Final HWWTP Dsi Bid 02.12.2016

i
Bidding Document for

Procurement of Plant Design,
Supply, and Installation
of:
Hebron Regional Wastewater
Treatment Plant
Bid Invitation No:PWA/IDA,AFD & EU/2016/065-CTD
Issued on: December 2016
ICB No: PWA/HRWWTP/ICB/1-2016
Employer: Palestinian Water

Authority
Country: Palestine
December 2016
iii
Table of Contents
PART 1 – Bidding Procedures ................................................................................................5

Section I. Instructions to Bidders .................................................................................... 1-7
Section II. Bid Data Sheet ............................................................................................. 1-43
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria (Without Prequalification) ............. 1-49
Section IV. Bidding Forms ............................................................................................. 5-1
Section V. Eligibility Criteria, Social and Environmental Responsibility, and Corruption6-59
PART 2 –Employer’s Requirements ................................................................................ 6-60
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements ......................................................................... 6-61
PART 3 – Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms ................................................ 10-1
Section VII. General Conditions (GC).................................................................................3
Section VIII. Particular Conditions...................................................................................93
Section IX. - Contract Forms ..............................................................................................1
1-5
PART 1 – Bidding Procedures

1-7
Section I. Instructions to Bidders
Table of Clauses
A. General ................................................................................................................... 1-1-9
1. Scope of Bid ...................................................................................................... 1-1-9
2. Source of Funds ................................................................................................ 1-1-9
3. Corrupt Practices ............................................................................................... 1-1-9
4. Eligible Bidders .............................................................................................. 1-1-12
5. Eligible Plant and Installation Services ......................................................... 1-1-14
B. Contents of Bidding Document .......................................................................... 1-1-14
6. Sections of Bidding Document ...................................................................... 1-1-14
7. Clarification of Bidding Document, Site Visit, Pre-Bid Meeting ................... 1-1-15
8. Amendment of Bidding Document ................................................................. 1-1-16
9. Cost of Bidding ............................................................................................... 1-1-16
10. Language of Bid .............................................................................................. 1-1-16
C1. First Stage Technical Proposals: Preparation .................................................. 1-1-16
11. Documents Comprising the First Stage Technical Proposal........................... 1-1-17
12. Letter of First Stage Bid and Attachments ...................................................... 1-1-17
13. Alternative Technical Proposals ..................................................................... 1-1-17
14. Documents Establishing the Eligibility of Plant and Installation Services.... 1-1-18
15. Documents Establishing the Eligibility and Qualifications of the Bidder ...... 1-1-18
16. Documents Establishing Conformity of the Plant and Installation Services .. 1-1-18
17. Format and Signing of First Stage Technical Proposal .................................. 1-1-19
C2. First Stage Technical Proposals: Submission and Opening ........................... 1-1-20
18. Submission, Sealing and Marking of First Stage Technical Proposals .......... 1-1-20
19. Deadline for Submission of First Stage Technical Proposals ......................... 1-1-21
20. Substitution and Modification of First Stage Technical Proposals ................. 1-1-21
21. Opening of First Stage Technical Proposals by Employer ............................. 1-1-21
C3. First Stage Technical Proposals: Evaluation ................................................... 1-1-21
22. Determination of Responsiveness of First Stage Technical Proposals ........... 1-1-21
23. Technical Evaluation of First Stage Technical Proposals............................... 1-1-22
24. Eligibility and Qualification of the Bidder ..................................................... 1-1-23
D. Clarification of First Stage Technical Proposals.............................................. 1-1-23
25. Clarification Procedures.................................................................................. 1-1-23
1-8 Section I. Instructions to Bidders
26. Invitation to Submit Second Stage Bids ......................................................... 1-1-24

E1. Second Stage Bid Preparation ........................................................................... 1-1-25
27. Documents Comprising the Bid ...................................................................... 1-1-25
28. Letter of Bid, and Schedules ........................................................................... 1-1-26
29. Bid Prices and Discounts ................................................................................ 1-1-26
30. Currencies of Bid and Payment ...................................................................... 1-1-29
31. Period of Validity of Bids ............................................................................... 1-1-29
32. Bid Security .................................................................................................... 1-1-30
33. Format and Signing of Second Stage Bid ....................................................... 1-1-32
E2. Second Stage Bids: Submission and Opening .................................................. 1-1-32
34. Submission, Sealing and Marking of Second Stage Bids ............................... 1-1-32
35. Deadline for Submission of Second Stage Bids ............................................. 1-1-33
36. Late Bids ......................................................................................................... 1-1-33
37. Withdrawal, Substitution, and Modification of Second Stage Bids .............. 1-1-33
38. Second Stage Bid Opening ............................................................................. 1-1-34
E3. Second Stage Bids: Evaluation and Comparison ............................................. 1-1-35
39. Confidentiality ................................................................................................ 1-1-35
40. Clarification of Bids ........................................................................................ 1-1-35
41. Deviations, Reservations, and Omissions ....................................................... 1-1-36
42. Determination of Responsiveness .................................................................. 1-1-36
43. Nonmaterial Nonconformities ........................................................................ 1-1-36
44. Correction of Arithmetical Errors ................................................................... 1-1-37
45. Conversion to Single Currency ....................................................................... 1-1-37
46. Margin of Preference ...................................................................................... 1-1-38
47. Evaluation of Second Stage Bids .................................................................... 1-1-38
48. Comparison of Bids ........................................................................................ 1-1-39
49. Qualification of the Bidder ............................................................................. 1-1-39
50. Employer’s Right to Accept Any Bid, and to Reject Any or All Bids ........... 1-1-40
F. Award of Contract .............................................................................................. 1-1-40
51. Award Criteria ................................................................................................ 1-1-40
52. Notification of Award ..................................................................................... 1-1-40
53. Signing of Contract ......................................................................................... 1-1-40
54. Performance Security ...................................................................................... 1-1-41
Section I. Instructions to Bidders 1-9
Section I. Instructions to Bidders

A. General
1. Scope of Bid 1.1 In connection with the Invitation for Bids indicated in the Bid
Data Sheet (BDS), the Employer, as indicated in the BDS,
issues this Bidding Document for the procurement of Plant
and Installation Services as specified in Section VI,
Employer’s Requirements. The name, identification, and
number of lots (contracts) of the International Competitive
Bidding (ICB) are provided in the BDS.
1.2 Unless otherwise stated, throughout this Bidding Document

definitions and interpretations shall be as prescribed in the
General Conditions, Section VII.
2. Source of Funds 2.1 The Borrower or Recipient (hereinafter called “Borrower”)

indicated in the BDS has applied for or received financing
(hereinafter called “funds”) from the World Bank (hereinafter
called “the Bank”) toward the cost of the project named in the
BDS. The Borrower intends to apply a portion of the funds to
eligible payments under the contract(s) for which this Bidding
Document is issued.
2.2 Payments by the Bank will be made only at the request of the
Borrower and upon approval by the Bank in accordance with
the terms and conditions of the financing agreement between
the Borrower and the Bank (hereinafter called the Grant
Agreement), and will be subject in all respects to the terms
and conditions of that Grant Agreement. No party other than
the Borrower shall derive any rights from the Grant
Agreement or have any claim to the funds.
2.3 The Grant Agreement prohibits a withdrawal from the Grant

account for the purpose of any payment to persons or entities,
or for any import of equipment, plant, or materials, if such
payment or import is prohibited by a decision of the United
Nations Security Council taken under Chapter VII of the
Charter of the United Nations.
3. Corrupt Practices 3.1 The Bank requires that Borrowers (including beneficiaries of
Bank Grants), as well as Bidders, Suppliers, Contractors and
their agents (whether declared or not), personnel,
subcontractors, sub-consultants, service providers and
suppliers, under Bank-financed contracts, observe the highest
standard of ethics during the procurement and execution of
such contracts. In pursuit of this policy, the Bank:

(a) defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set
forth below as follows:
(i) “corrupt practice” is the offering, giving, receiving
or soliciting, directly or indirectly, of anything of
value to influence improperly the actions of another
party1;
(ii) “fraudulent practice” is any act or omission,
including a misrepresentation, that knowingly or
recklessly misleads, or attempts to mislead, a party
to obtain a financial or other benefit or to avoid an
obligation2;
(iii) “collusive practice” is an arrangement between two
or more parties3 designed to achieve an improper
purpose, including to influence improperly the
actions of another party;
(iv) “coercive practice” is impairing or harming, or
threatening to impair or harm, directly or indirectly,
any party4 or the property of the party to influence
improperly the actions of a party;
(v) “obstructive practice” is
(aa) deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering or
concealing of evidence material to the
investigation or making false statements to
investigators in order to materially impede a
Bank investigation into allegations of a
corrupt, fraudulent, coercive or collusive
practice; and/or threatening, harassing or
intimidating any party to prevent it from
disclosing its knowledge of matters relevant to
the investigation or from pursuing the
investigation, or
1
“another party” refers to a public official acting in relation to the procurement process or contract execution].
In this context, “public official” includes World Bank staff and employees of other organizations taking or
reviewing procurement decisions.
2
“Party” refers to a public official; the terms “benefit” and “obligation” relate to the procurement process or
contract execution; and the “act or omission” is intended to influence the procurement process or contract
execution.
3
“Parties” refers to participants in the procurement process (including public officials) attempting to establish
bid prices at artificial, non competitive levels.
4
“Party” refers to a participant in the procurement process or contract execution.
(bb) acts intended to materially impede the exercise

of the Bank’s inspection and audit rights
provided for under sub-clause 3.2 below.
(b) will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the
Bidder recommended for award has, directly or through
an agent, engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive,
coercive or obstructive practices in competing for the
contract in question;
(c) will cancel the portion of the Grant allocated to a
contract if it determines at any time that representatives
of the Borrower or of a beneficiary of the Grant engaged
in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices
during the procurement or the execution of that contract,
without the Borrower having taken timely and
appropriate action satisfactory to the Bank to remedy the
situation; and
(d) will sanction a firm or an individual, at any time, in
accordance with prevailing Bank’s sanctions
proceduresa, including by publicly declaring such firm
or individual ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated
period of time: (i) to be awarded a Bank-financed
contract; and (ii) to be a nominatedb sub-contractor,
consultant, manufacturer or supplier, or service provider
of an otherwise eligible firm being awarded a Bank-
financed contract.
3.2 In further pursuance of this policy, Bidders shall permit the

Bank to inspect any accounts and records and other documents
relating to the Bid submission and contract performance, and
to have them audited by auditors appointed by the Bank.
3.3 Furthermore, Bidders shall be aware of the provision stated in
the General Conditions (GC 42.2.1(c)).
a
A firm or an individual may be declared ineligible to be awarded a Bank-financed contract upon
completion of the Bank’s sanctions proceedings as per its sanctions procedures, including inter alia: (i)
temporary suspension in connection with an ongoing sanctions proceeding; (ii) cross-debarment as agreed
with other International Financial Institutions, including Multilateral Development Banks; and (iii) the
World Bank Group corporate administrative procurement sanctions procedures for fraud and corruption.
b
A nominated sub-contractor, consultant, manufacturer or supplier, or service provider (different names are
used depending on the particular bidding document) is one which either has been: (i) included by the bidder
in its pre-qualification application or bid because it brings specific and critical experience and know-how
that are accounted for in the evaluation of the bidder’s pre-qualification application or the bid; or (ii)
appointed by the Borrower.
4. Eligible Bidders 4.1 A Bidder may be a private entity or a government-owned

entity—subject to ITB 4.5—or any combination of such
entities in the form of a joint venture, or association (JVA)
under an existing agreement or with the intent to enter into
such an agreement supported by a letter of intent. In the case
of a joint venture, or association:
(a) unless otherwise specified in the BDS, all partners
shall be jointly and severally liable for the execution of
the Contract in accordance with the Contract terms, and
(b) the JVA shall nominate a Representative who shall have

the authority to conduct all business for and on behalf of
any and all the partners of the JVA during the bidding
process and, in the event the JVA is awarded the
Contract, during contract execution.
4.2 A Bidder, and all partners constituting the Bidder, shall have a
nationality of an eligible country, as defined in Guidelines:
Procurement under IBRD Grants and IDA Credits, October
2006, (hereinafter referred to as the Guidelines), in accordance
with Section V, Eligible Countries. A Bidder shall be deemed
to have the nationality of a country if the Bidder is a national
or is constituted, incorporated, or registered and operates in
conformity with the provisions of the laws of that country.
This criterion shall also apply to the determination of the
nationality of proposed subcontractors or suppliers for any
part of the Contract including related services.
4.3 A Bidder shall not have a conflict of interest. All Bidders
found to have a conflict of interest shall be disqualified. A
Bidder may be considered to have a conflict of interest with
one or more parties in this bidding process, if :
(a) they have a controlling partner in common; or
(b) they receive or have received any direct or indirect
subsidy from any of them; or
(c) they have the same legal representative for purposes of
this bid; or
(d) they have a relationship with each other, directly or
through common third parties, that puts them in a
position to have access to information about or
influence on the bid of another Bidder, or influence the
decisions of the Employer regarding this bidding
process; or
(e) a Bidder submits more than one bid in this bidding

process, either individually or as a partner in a joint
venture, except for alternative offers permitted under
ITB Clause 13. This will result in the disqualification
of all such bids. However, this does not limit the
participation of a Bidder as a subcontractor in another
bid or of a firm as a subcontractor in more than one bid.
or
(f) a Bidder or any of its affiliates participated as a
consultant in the preparation of the design or technical
specifications of the Plant and Installation Services that
are the subject of the bid.
(g) A Bidder or any of its affiliates has been hired (or is
proposed to be hired) by the Employer or the Borrower
as Project Manager for the contract.
4.4 A Bidder that has been sanctioned by the Bank in accordance
with the above ITB 3.1 (d), or in accordance with the Bank's
Guidelines on Preventing and Combating Corruption in
Projects Financed by IBRD Grants and IDA Credits and
Grants, shall be ineligible to be awarded a Bank-financed
contract, or benefit from a Bank-financed contract, financially
or otherwise, during such period of time as the Bank shall
determine.
4.5 Government-owned entities in the Borrower’s country shall be
eligible only if they can establish that they (i) are legally and
financially autonomous, (ii) operate under the principles of
commercial law, and (iii) are not dependent agencies of the
Employer or the Borrower.
4.6 Bidders shall provide such evidence of their continued
eligibility satisfactory to the Employer, as the Employer shall
reasonably request.
4.7 In case a prequalification process has been conducted prior to
the bidding process, this bidding is open only to prequalified
Bidders.
4.8 Firms shall be excluded if:
(a) as a matter of law or official regulation, the Borrower’s
country prohibits commercial relations with that
country, provided that the Bank is satisfied that such
exclusion does not preclude effective competition for the
supply of goods or related services required; or
(b) by an act of compliance with a decision of the United

Nations Security Council taken under Chapter VII of the
Charter of the United Nations, the Borrower’s country
prohibits any import of goods or contracting of works or
services from that country or any payments to persons
or entities in that country.
5. Eligible Plant and 5.1 The Plant and Installation Services to be supplied under the
Installation Contract shall have their origin in eligible source countries as
Services defined in ITB 4.2 above and all expenditures under the
Contract will be limited to such Plant and Installation Services
5.2 For purposes of ITB 5.1 above, “origin” means the place
where the plant, or component parts thereof are mined, grown,
produced or manufactured, and from which the services are
provided. Plant components are produced when, through
manufacturing, processing, or substantial or major assembling
of components, a commercially recognized product results that
is substantially in its basic characteristics or in purpose or
utility from its components.
B. Contents of Bidding Document

6. Sections of 6.1 The Bidding Document consists of Parts 1, 2, and 3, which
Bidding include all the Sections indicated below, and should be read in
Document conjunction with any Addenda issued in accordance with ITB 8.
PART 1 Bidding Procedures
 Section I. Instructions to Bidders (ITB)

 Section II. Bid Data Sheet (BDS)
 Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
 Section IV. Bidding Forms
 Section V. Eligible Countries
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
PART 3 Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms
 Section VII. General Conditions (GC)

 Section VIII. Particular Conditions (PC)
 Section IX. Contract Forms
6.2 The Invitation for Bids issued by the Employer is not part of
the Bidding Document.
6.3 The Employer is not responsible for the completeness of the

Bidding Document and its addenda, if they were not obtained
directly from the source stated by the Employer in the
Invitation for Bids.
6.4 The Bidder is expected to examine all instructions, forms,
terms, and specifications in the Bidding Document. Failure to
furnish all information or documentation required by the
Bidding Document may result in the rejection of the bid.
7. Clarification of 7.1 A prospective Bidder requiring any clarification of the

Bidding Bidding Document shall contact the Employer in writing at the
Document, Site Employer’s address indicated in the BDS or raise his
Visit, Pre-Bid enquiries during the pre-bid meeting if provided for in
Meeting accordance with ITB 7.4. The Employer will respond to any
request for clarification, provided that such request is received
no later than twenty-eight (28) days prior to the deadline for
submission of bids. The Employer’s response shall be in
writing with copies to all Bidders who have acquired the
Bidding Document in accordance with ITB 6.3, including a
description of the inquiry but without identifying its source.
Should the Employer deem it necessary to amend the Bidding
Document as a result of a request for clarification, it shall do
so following the procedure under ITB 8, ITB 19.2 and ITB
35.2.
7.2 The Bidder is advised to visit and examine the site where the
plant is to be installed and its surroundings and obtain for
itself on its own responsibility all information that may be
necessary for preparing the bid and entering into a contract for
the provision of Plant and Installation Services. The costs of
visiting the site shall be at the Bidder’s own expense.
7.3 The Bidder and any of its personnel or agents will be granted
permission by the Employer to enter upon its premises and
lands for the purpose of such visit, but only upon the express
condition that the Bidder, its personnel, and agents will release
and indemnify the Employer and its personnel and agents from
and against all liability in respect thereof, and will be
responsible for death or personal injury, loss of or damage to
property, and any other loss, damage, costs, and expenses
incurred as a result of the inspection.
7.4 The Bidder’s designated representative is invited to attend a
pre-bid meeting, if provided for in the BDS. The purpose of
the meeting will be to clarify issues and to answer questions
on any matter that may be raised at that stage.
7.5 The Bidder is requested, as far as possible, to submit any

questions in writing, to reach the Employer not later than one
week before the meeting.
7.6 Minutes of the pre-bid meeting, including the text of the
questions raised, without identifying the source, and the
responses given, together with any responses prepared after
the meeting, will be transmitted promptly to all Bidders who
have acquired the Bidding Document in accordance with ITB
6.3. Any modification to the Bidding Documents that may
become necessary as a result of the pre-bid meeting shall be
made by the Employer exclusively through the issue of an
Addendum pursuant to ITB 8 and not through the minutes of
the pre-bid meeting.
7.7 Nonattendance at the pre-bid meeting will not be a cause for
disqualification of a Bidder.
8. Amendment of 8.1 At any time prior to the deadline for submission of bids, the
Bidding Employer may amend the Bidding Document by issuing
Document addenda.
8.2 Any addendum issued shall be part of the Bidding Document
and shall be communicated in writing to all who have obtained
the Bidding Document from the Employer in accordance with
ITB 6.3.
8.3 To give prospective Bidders reasonable time in which to take
an addendum into account in preparing their bids, the
Employer may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for the
submission of bids, pursuant to ITB 19.2 and/or ITB 35.2
9. Cost of Bidding 9.1 The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation
and submission of its Bid, and the Employer shall not be
responsible or liable for those costs, regardless of the conduct
or outcome of the bidding process.
10. Language of Bid 10.1 The Bid, as well as all correspondence and documents relating
to the bid exchanged by the Bidder and the Employer, shall be
written in the language specified in the BDS. Supporting
documents and printed literature that are part of the Bid may
be in another language provided they are accompanied by an
accurate translation of the relevant passages in the language
specified in the BDS, in which case, for purposes of
interpretation of the Bid, such translation shall govern.
C1. First Stage Technical Proposals: Preparation

11. Documents 11.1 The first stage technical proposal submitted by the Bidder
Comprising the shall comprise the following:
First Stage
Technical (a) Letter of First Stage Bid;
Proposal (b) alternative technical proposals in accordance with ITB
13;
(c) written confirmation authorizing the signatory of the Bid
to commit the Bidder, in accordance with ITB 17.2;
(d) documentary evidence established in accordance with
ITB 14 that the Plant and Installation Services offered by
the Bidder in its bid or in any alternative bid are eligible;
(e) documentary evidence in accordance with ITB 15
establishing the Bidder’s eligibility and qualifications to
perform the contract if its Bid is accepted;
(f) documentary evidence established in accordance with
ITB 16 that the Plant and Installation Services offered by
the Bidder conform to the Bidding Document;
(g) in the case of a technical proposal submitted by a JVA,
JVA agreement, or letter of intent to enter into a JVA
including a draft agreement, indicating at least the parts
of the Plant to be executed by the respective partners;
(h) List of subcontractors, in accordance with ITB 16.3; and
(i) any other document required in the BDS.
First stage technical proposals are unpriced proposals and
shall contain no prices or price schedules or other reference
to rates and prices for completing the facilities. First stage
technical proposals containing such price information will
be rejected.
12. Letter of First 12.1 The Letter of First Stage Bid and any attachments shall be
Stage Bid and prepared using the relevant forms furnished in Section IV,
Attachments Bidding Forms. The forms must be completed as instructed in
each form.
13. Alternative 13.1 Bidders shall note that they are permitted to propose technical
Technical alternatives with their first stage technical proposals in
Proposals addition to or in lieu of the requirements specified in the
bidding documents, provided they can document that the
proposed technical alternatives are to the benefit of the
Employer, that they fulfill the principal objectives of the
contract, and that they meet the basic performance and
technical criteria specified in the bidding documents.

13.2 Any alternative technical proposal submitted by bidders as
part of their first stage technical proposal will be the subject of
clarification with the Bidder, pursuant to ITB 25.
14. Documents 14.1 To establish the eligibility of the Plant and Installation
Establishing the Services in accordance with ITB Clause 5, Bidders shall
Eligibility of provide documentary evidence consisting of a statement on
Plant and the country of origin of the Plant and Installation Services
Installation offered.
Services
15. Documents 15.1 To establish its eligibility and qualifications to perform the
Establishing the Contract in accordance with Section III, Evaluation and
Eligibility and Qualification Criteria, the Bidder shall provide the information
Qualifications of requested in the corresponding information sheets included in
the Bidder Section IV, Bidding Forms.
15.2 Domestic Bidders, individually or in joint ventures, applying
for eligibility for domestic preference shall supply all
information required to satisfy the criteria for eligibility as
described in ITB 46.
16. Documents 16.1 The Bidder shall furnish a first stage technical proposal
Establishing including the information stipulated in Section IV, in
Conformity of the sufficient detail to demonstrate substantial responsiveness of
Plant and the Bidders’ proposal to the Employer’s requirements and the
Installation completion time.
Services
16.2 The documentary evidence of the conformity of the Plant and
Installation Services with the bidding documents may be in the
form of literature, drawings and data, and shall include:
(a) detailed description of the essential technical and
performance characteristics of the Plant and Installation
Services, including the functional guarantees of the
proposed Plant and Installation Services, in response to
the Specification. The functional guarantees of the
proposed Plant and Installation Services shall be stated
in the applicable form in Section IV Bidding Forms;
(b) a list giving full particulars, including available sources,
of all spare parts, special tools, etc., necessary for the
proper and continuing functioning of the plant for the
period named in the BDS, following completion of
Plant and Installation Services in accordance with
provisions of contract; and
(c) Adequate evidence demonstrating the substantial

responsiveness of the Plant and Installation Services to
those specifications. Bidders shall note that standards
for workmanship, materials and equipment designated
by the Employer in the Bidding Document are intended
to be descriptive (establishing standards of quality and
performance) only and not restrictive. The Bidder may
substitute alternative standards, brand names and/or
catalog numbers in its technical proposal, provided that
it demonstrates to the Employer’s satisfaction that the
substitutions are substantially equivalent or superior to
the standards designated in the Specification.
16.3 For major items of supply or services as listed by the
Employer in Section III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria,
which the Bidder intends to purchase or subcontract, the
Bidder shall give details of the name and nationality of the
proposed Subcontractors, including manufacturers, for each of
those items. In addition, the Bidder shall include in its
technical proposal information establishing compliance with
the requirements specified by the Employer for these items.
16.4 The Bidder shall be responsible for ensuring that any
Subcontractor proposed complies with the requirements of
ITB 4, and that any Plant or Installation Services to be
provided by the Subcontractor comply with the requirements
of ITB 5 and 15.1.
17. Format and 17.1 The Bidder shall prepare one original of the documents
Signing of First comprising the bid as described in ITB 11 and clearly mark it
Stage Technical “FIRST STAGE TECHNICAL PROPOSAL - ORIGINAL.” Alternative
Proposal bids, if permitted in accordance with ITB 13, shall be clearly
marked “FIRST STAGE TECHNICAL PROPOSAL - ALTERNATIVE”.
In addition, the Bidder shall submit copies of the bid, in the
number specified in the BDS and clearly mark them “FIRST
STAGE TECHNICAL PROPOSAL - COPY.” In the event of any
discrepancy between the original and the copies, the original
shall prevail.
17.2 The original and all copies of the first stage technical proposal
shall be typed or written in indelible ink and shall be signed by
a person duly authorized to sign on behalf of the Bidder. This
authorization shall consist of a written confirmation as
specified in the BDS and shall be attached to the first stage
technical proposal. The name and position held by each
person signing the authorization must be typed or printed
below the signature. All pages of the first stage technical
proposal where entries or amendments have been made shall
be signed or initialed by the person signing the bid.

17.3 A bid submitted by a JVA shall be signed so as to be legally
binding on all partners.
17.4 Any interlineations, erasures, or overwriting shall be valid
only if they are signed or initialed by the person signing the
bid.
C2. First Stage Technical Proposals: Submission and

Opening
18. Submission, 18.1 Bidders may always submit their first stage technical
Sealing and proposals by mail or by hand. When so specified in the BDS,
Marking of First bidders shall have the option of submitting their first stage
Stage Technical technical proposals electronically.
Proposals
(a) Bidders submitting first stage technical proposals by
mail or by hand, shall enclose the original and each
copy of the technical proposal, including alternative
technical proposals, if permitted in accordance with ITB
13, in separate sealed envelopes, duly marking the
envelopes as “FIRST STAGE TECHNICAL PROPOSAL -
ORIGINAL”, “FIRST STAGE TECHNICAL PROPOSAL -
ALTERNATIVE” and “FIRST STAGE TECHNICAL
PROPOSAL - COPY.” These envelopes containing the
original and the copies shall then be enclosed in one
single envelope. The rest of the procedure shall be in
accordance with ITB 21.2 and 21.3.
(b) Bidders submitting first stage technical proposals
electronically shall follow the electronic submission
procedures specified in the BDS.
18.2 The inner and outer envelopes shall:
(a) bear the name and address of the Bidder;
(b) be addressed to the Employer in accordance with ITB
19.1;
(c) bear the specific identification of this bidding process
indicated in accordance with ITB 1.1; and
(d) bear a warning not to open before the time and date for
bid opening.
18.3 If all envelopes are not sealed and marked as required, the
Employer will assume no responsibility for the misplacement
or premature opening of the technical proposal.

19. Deadline for 19.1 First stage technical proposals must be received by the
Submission of Employer at the address and no later than the date and time
First Stage indicated in the BDS. Any first stage technical proposal
Technical received by the Employer after the deadline for submission of
Proposals bids shall be declared late, rejected, and returned unopened to
the Bidder.
19.2 The Employer may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for
the submission of first stage technical proposals by amending
the Bidding Document in accordance with ITB 8, in which
case all rights and obligations of the Employer and Bidders
previously subject to the deadline shall thereafter be subject to
the deadline as extended.
20. Substitution and 20.1 In case a Bidder wishes to substitute or modify its first stage
Modification of technical proposal after it has been submitted and prior to the
First Stage deadline for first stage technical proposal submission, it may
Technical do so by sending a written notice, as per ITB 19.1 and its
Proposals substituted or modified first stage technical proposal will be
opened as per ITB 21.
21. Opening of First 21.1 The Employer shall conduct the bid opening of the first stage
Stage Technical technical proposals in public, in the presence of Bidders`
Proposals by designated representatives and anyone who choose to attend,
Employer and at the address, date and time specified in the BDS. Any
specific procedures required if electronic bidding is permitted
in accordance with ITB 18.1 shall be as specified in the BDS.
21.2 The names of all bidders who submitted first stage technical
proposals will be read out, and other such details as the
Employer, at its discretion, may consider appropriate, will be
announced at the opening.
21.3 The Employer shall prepare a record of the first stage
technical proposal opening that shall include, as a minimum:
the name of the Bidder, including any alternative bids. The
Bidders’ representatives who are present shall be requested to
sign the record. The omission of a Bidder’s signature on the
record shall not invalidate the contents and effect of the
record. A copy of the record shall be distributed to all Bidders
who submitted technical proposals in time, and posted online
when electronic bidding is permitted.
C3. First Stage Technical Proposals: Evaluation

22. Determination of 22.1 The Employer will examine the first stage technical proposals
Responsiveness of to determine whether they are complete, whether the

First Stage documents have been properly signed and whether the bids are
Technical generally in order. Any bids found to be non responsive or not
Proposals meeting the minimum levels of the performance or other
criteria specified in the bidding document will be rejected by
the Employer and not included for further consideration. The
Employer will also carry out a preliminary examination of any
alternative bids submitted by bidders.
22.2 The Employer may request that the Bidder submit the
necessary information or documentation, within a reasonable
period of time, to rectify nonmaterial omissions in the first
stage technical proposal related to documentation
requirements. Failure of the Bidder to comply with the
request may result in the rejection of its technical proposal.
23. Technical 23.1 The Employer will carry out a detailed evaluation of the first
Evaluation of stage technical proposals in order to determine whether the
First Stage technical aspects are in compliance with the Bidding
Technical Document. In order to reach such a determination, the
Proposals Employer will examine and compare the technical proposals
on the basis of the information supplied by the bidders, taking
into account the following:
(a) overall completeness and compliance with the Employer’s
Requirements; the technical merits of alternatives offered;
conformity of the Plant and Installation Services offered
with specified performance criteria, including conformity
with the specified minimum (or maximum, as the case may
be) requirement corresponding to each functional
guarantee, as indicated in the Specification and in Section
III Evaluation and Qualification Criteria; suitability of the
Plant and Installation Services offered in relation to the
environmental and climatic conditions prevailing at the
site; and quality, function and operation of any process
control concept included in the bid;
(b) compliance with the time schedule called for in the

corresponding Appendix to the Contract Agreement and
any alternative time schedules offered by bidders, as
evidenced by a milestone schedule provided in the
technical proposal;
(c) type, quantity and long-term availability of mandatory

and recommended spare parts and maintenance services;
(d) other relevant factors, if any, listed in Section III,

Evaluation and Qualification Criteria; and
(e) any deviations to the commercial and contractual

provisions stipulated in the bidding documents.
23.2 The Employer will also review complete alternative technical

proposals, if any, offered by the Bidder, pursuant to ITB 13, to
determine whether such alternatives may constitute an acceptable
basis for a Second Stage bid to be submitted on its own merits.
24. Eligibility and 24.1 The Employer shall determine to its satisfaction whether
Qualification of Bidders determined as having submitted responsive First Stage
the Bidder Technical Proposals are eligible and meet the qualification
criteria specified in Section III, Evaluation and Qualification
Criteria.
24.2 The determination shall be based upon an examination of the
documentary evidence of the Bidder’s qualifications submitted
by the Bidder, pursuant to ITB 15, and on any additional
information which the Employer may request from the Bidder
to support such evidence.
24.3 An affirmative determination will be a prerequisite for the
Employer to invite the Bidder to a clarification meeting in
accordance with ITB 25. A negative determination will result
in rejection of the Bidder’s first stage technical proposal.
24.4 The capabilities of the manufacturers and subcontractors
proposed to be used by the Bidders for Employer-identified
major items of supply or services will also be evaluated for
acceptability in accordance with Section III, Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria. Should a manufacturer or subcontractor
be determined to be unacceptable, if invited to submit a
Second Stage Bid, the Bidder will be required to substitute an
acceptable manufacturer or subcontractor.
D. Clarification of First Stage Technical Proposals

25. Clarification 25.1 The Employer may conduct clarification meetings with each
Procedures or any Bidder to clarify any aspects of its First Stage technical
proposal that require explanation and to review any Bidder’s
proposed alternative solutions or reservations to the
commercial or contractual provisions of the bidding
documents. The Employer may also seek clarifications in
writing.
25.2 The Employer may bring to the attention of the Bidder any
amendments or changes which the Employer may require to
be made to the First Stage technical proposal; however the

Employer may not require amendments or changes at variance
from the Employers’ requirements unless the Employer
intends to amend the Bidding Document in accordance with
ITB 26.1(a).
25.3 The Employer will advise the Bidder of any deviations to the
commercial or contractual provisions of the bidding documents
in the First Stage technical proposal, that are unacceptable and
that are to be withdrawn in the Second Stage bid.
25.4 The Employer will also advise the Bidder whether the
proposed alternative technical proposal, if any, is acceptable,
and will identify the degree (if any) to which such an
alternative bid may be incorporated in the Bidder’s Second
Stage bid.
25.5 The Employer will issue a Memorandum titled “Changes
Required Pursuant to First Stage Evaluation,” documenting
the clarifications made in writing and/or in a meeting, if any,
and including an Annex listing all decisions, and required
amendments or changes resulting from the clarification of the
First Stage technical proposal. The Memorandum will be
communicated to the Bidder as part of the invitation to submit
the Second Stage bid.
26. Invitation to 26.1 At the end of the clarification process pursuant to ITB 25,
Submit Second conducted as necessary:
Stage Bids
(a) the Employer may need to issue an amendment to the
Bidding Document resulting from the First Stage
evaluation and clarification process, with the objective
of clarifying the requirements and improving
competition without compromising essential project
objectives and/or
(b) in regard to all bidders, the Employer will either:
(i) invite the Bidder to submit a final updated technical
and a commercial Second Stage bid based on its
First Stage technical proposal taking into account
the Bidding Document, if and as amended, and any
other modifications as recorded in the Annex to the
Memorandum entitled “Changes Required Pursuant
to First Stage Evaluation”. Bidders will be allowed
to submit only one Second Stage Bid, or
(ii) notify the Bidder that its bid has been rejected on
the grounds of being substantially non-responsive,
or that the Bidder does not meet the minimum

qualification requirements set forth in the Bidding
Document.
26.2 The deadline, for submission of Second Stage bids will be
specified in the invitation to submit Second Stage bids,
pursuant to ITB 35.1.
26.3 Bidders are not allowed to form JVA(s) with other bidders,
nor change the partner or structure of the JVA if the Bidder in
the First Stage was a JVA.
E1. Second Stage Bid Preparation

27. Documents 27.1 The Second Stage Bid submitted by the Bidder shall comprise
Comprising the the following:
Bid
(a) Letter of Bid
(b) Completed schedules as required, including Price
Schedules, in accordance with ITB 28 and 29;
(c) Bid Security, in accordance with ITB 32;
(d) written confirmation authorizing the signatory of the
Bid to commit the Bidder, in accordance with ITB 33.2;
(d) the updated first stage technical proposal, comprising
any modifications required to the first stage technical
proposal as recorded in the Memorandum entitled
“Changes Required Pursuant to First Stage Evaluation”;
(f) documentary evidence established in accordance with
ITB 14 that any additional or varied Plant and
Installation Services offered by the Bidder, and not
included in the first stage technical proposal, are
eligible;
(g) documentary evidence regarding any changes that may
have occurred between the time of submitting the First
and Second Stage bids that have any material effect on
the Bidder’s eligibility and qualifications to perform the
Contract.
(h) documentary evidence establishing that any additional
or varied facilities to be supplied and installed by the
Bidder, in accordance with the requirements of the
Memorandum entitled “Changes Required Pursuant to
First Stage Evaluation”, are technically acceptable. The
documentary evidence of the conformity of the Plant

and Installation Services to the requirements of the
Memorandum entitled “Changes Required Pursuant to
First Stage Evaluation” may be in the form of literature,
drawings and data. The functional guarantees of any
additional or varied Plant and Installation Services shall
be stated in the applicable form in Section IV Bidding
Forms.
(i) If the Bidder proposes to engage any Subcontractors
additional to or different from those named in its first
stage technical proposal for major items of supply or
services as listed by the Employer in Section III,
Evaluation and Qualification Criteria, which the Bidder
intends to purchase or subcontract, the Bidder shall give
details of the name and nationality of the proposed
Subcontractors, including manufacturers, for each of
those items. In addition, the Bidder shall include in its
bid information establishing compliance with the
requirements specified by the Employer for these items.
Quoted rates and prices will be deemed to apply to
whichever Subcontractor is appointed, and no
adjustment of the rates and prices will be permitted.
(j) other documentation and information which may be
specified in the BDS.
28. Letter of Bid, and 28.1 The Bidder shall complete the Letter of Bid and Schedules,
Schedules including the appropriate Price Schedules, using the relevant
forms furnished in Section IV, Bidding Forms. The forms
must be completed as instructed in each form.
29. Bid Prices and 29.1 Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, bidders shall quote for
Discounts the entire Plant and Installation Services on a “single
responsibility” basis such that the total bid price covers all the
Contractor’s obligations mentioned in or to be reasonably
inferred from the bidding document in respect of the design,
manufacture, including procurement and subcontracting (if
any), delivery, construction, installation and completion of the
plant. This includes all requirements under the Contractor’s
responsibilities for testing, pre-commissioning and
commissioning of the plant and, where so required by the
bidding document, the acquisition of all permits, approvals
and licenses, etc.; the operation, maintenance and training
services and such other items and services as may be specified
in the Bidding Document, all in accordance with the
requirements of the General Conditions. Items against which
no price is entered by the Bidder will not be paid for by the
Employer when executed and shall be deemed to be covered

by the prices for other items.
29.2 Bidders shall give a breakdown of the prices in the manner
and detail called for in the Price Schedules included in the
BDS and in Section IV, Bidding Forms.
29.3 Depending on the scope of the Contract, the Price Schedules
may comprise up to the six (6) schedules listed below.
Separate numbered Schedules included in Section IV, Bidding
Forms, from those numbered 1-5 below, shall be used for each
of the elements of the Plant and Installation Services. The
total amount from each Schedule corresponding to an element
of the Plant and Installation Services shall be summarized in
the schedule titled Grand Summary (Schedule 6) giving the
total bid price(s) to be entered in the Letter of Bid.
Schedule No. 1 Plant (including Mandatory Spare Parts)
Supplied from Abroad
Schedule No. 2 Plant (including Mandatory Spare Parts)
Supplied from within the Employer’s Country
Schedule No. 3 Design Services
Schedule No. 4 Installation and Other Services (Earth Works
and Site Preparation)
Schedule No.4b Installation and Other Services – Building
(Civil Works) and Other Construction Works
Schedule No. 5 Environmental, Social, Health and Safety
Services
Schedule No. 6 Grand Summary (Schedule Nos. 1 to 5)
Bidders shall note that the plant and equipment included in
Schedule Nos. 1 and 2 above exclude materials used for civil,
building and other construction works. All such materials shall
be included and priced under Schedule No. 4, Installation
Services.
29.4 In the Schedules, bidders shall give the required details and a
breakdown of their prices as follows:
(a) Plant to be supplied from abroad (Schedule No. 1):
(i) The price of the plant shall be quoted CIP-named
place of destination basis as specified in the BDS
(b) Plant manufactured within the Employer’s country

(Schedule No. 2):
(i) The price of the plant shall be quoted on an
EXW Incoterm basis (such as “ex-works,” “ex-
factory,” “ex-warehouse” or “off-the-shelf,” as
applicable),
(ii) Sales Sales tax and all other taxes payable in the
Employer’s country on the plant if the contract is
awarded to the Bidder, and
(iii) the total price for the item.
(c) Design Services (Schedule No. 3).
(d) Installation and other Services shall be quoted separately
(Schedule No. 4) and shall include rates or prices for local
transportation to named place of final destination as
specified in the BDS, insurance and other services
incidental to delivery of the plant, all labor, contractor’s
equipment, temporary works, materials, consumables and
all matters and things of whatsoever nature, including
operations and maintenance services, the provision of
operations and maintenance manuals, training, etc., where
identified in the bidding documents, as necessary for the
proper execution of the installation and other services,
including all taxes, duties, levies and charges payable in
the Employer’s country as of twenty-eight (28) days prior
to the deadline for submission of bids.
(e) Recommended spare parts shall be quoted separately
(Schedule 6) as specified in either subparagraph (a) or (b)
above in accordance with the origin of the spare parts.
29.5 The current edition of Incoterms, published by the
International Chamber of Commerce shall govern.
29.6 The prices shall be either fixed or adjustable as specified in
the BDS.
29.7 In the case of Fixed Price, prices quoted by the Bidder shall
be fixed during the Bidder’s performance of the contract and
not subject to variation on any account. A bid submitted with
an adjustable price quotation will be treated as non responsive
and rejected.
29.8 In the case of Adjustable Price, prices quoted by the Bidder
shall be subject to adjustment during performance of the
contract to reflect changes in the cost elements such as labor,
material, transport and contractor’s equipment in accordance

with the procedures specified in the corresponding Appendix
to the Form of Contract Agreement. A bid submitted with a
fixed price quotation will not be rejected, but the price
adjustment will be treated as zero. Bidders are required to
indicate the source of labor and material indexes in the
corresponding Form in Section IV, Bidding Forms.
29.9 If so indicated in ITB 1.1, bids are being invited for individual
lots (contracts) or for any combination of lots (packages).
Bidders wishing to offer any price reduction (discount) for the
award of more than one Contract shall specify in their Letter
of Bid the price reductions applicable to each package, or
alternatively, to individual Contracts within the package, and
the manner in which the price reductions will apply.
29.10 Bidders wishing to offer any unconditional discount shall
specify in their Letter of Bid the offered discounts and the
manner in which price discounts will apply.
30. Currencies of Bid 30.1 The currency(ies) of the bid shall be, as specified in the BDS.
and Payment
30.2 Bidders may be required by the Employer to justify, to the
Employer’s satisfaction, their local and foreign currency
requirements.
31. Period of Validity 31.1 Second Stage Bids shall remain valid for the period specified
of Bids in the BDS after the bid submission deadline date prescribed
by the Employer pursuant to ITB 35.1. A bid valid for a
shorter period shall be rejected by the Employer as non
responsive.
31.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to the expiration of the bid
validity period, the Employer may request Bidders to extend
the period of validity of their bids. The request and the
responses shall be made in writing. If a bid security is
requested in accordance with ITB 32, the Bidder granting the
request shall also extend the bid security for twenty-eight (28)
days beyond the deadline of the extended validity period. A
Bidder may refuse the request without forfeiting its bid
security. A Bidder granting the request shall not be required or
permitted to modify its bid, except as provided in ITB 31.3.
31.3 In the case of fixed price contracts, if the award is delayed by

a period exceeding fifty-six (56) days beyond the expiry of the
initial bid validity, the Contract price shall be adjusted by a
factor or factors specified in the request for extension. Bid
evaluation shall be based on the Bid Price without taking into
consideration the above correction.
32. Bid Security 32.1 The Bidder shall furnish as part of its bid, either a Bid-
Securing Declaration or a bid security as specified in the BDS,
in original form and in the amount specified in the BDS.
32.2 A Bid-Securing Declaration shall use the form included in
Section IV Bidding Forms.
32.3 If a bid security is specified pursuant to ITB 32.1, the bid
security shall be a demand guarantee in any of the following
forms at the Bidder’s option,:
(a) an unconditional guarantee issued by a bank or surety;
(b) an irrevocable letter of credit;
(c) a cashier’s or certified check; or
(d) another security indicated in the BDS,
from a reputable source from an eligible country. If the
unconditional guarantee is issued by an insurance company or
a bonding company located outside the Employer’s Country,
the issuer shall have a correspondent financial institution
located in the Employer’s Country to make it enforceable. In
the case of a bank guarantee, the bid security shall be
submitted either using the Bid Security Form included in
Section IV, Bidding Forms or in another substantially similar
format approved by the Employer prior to bid submission. In
either case, the form must include the complete name of the
Bidder. The bid security shall be valid for twenty-eight days
(28) beyond the original validity period of the bid, or beyond
any period of extension if requested under ITB 31.2.
32.4 If a bid security is specified pursuant to ITB 32.1, any bid not
accompanied by a substantially responsive bid security or Bid-
Securing Declaration shall be rejected by the Employer as non
responsive.
32.5 If a bid security is specified pursuant to ITB 32.1, the bid
security of unsuccessful Bidders shall be returned as promptly
as possible upon the successful Bidder’s furnishing of the
performance security pursuant to ITB 54.

32.6 The bid security of the successful Bidder shall be returned as
promptly as possible once the successful Bidder has signed the
Contract and furnished the required performance security.
32.7 The bid security may be forfeited or the Bid-Securing
Declaration executed:
(a) if a Bidder withdraws its bid during the period of bid
validity specified by the Bidder on the Letter of Bid, or
(b) if the successful Bidder fails to:
(i) sign the Contract in accordance with ITB 53; or
(ii) furnish a performance security in accordance with
ITB 54.
32.8 The Bid Security or the Bid Securing Declaration of a JVA
shall be in the name of the JVA that submits the bid. If the
JVA has not been constituted into a legally enforceable JVA at
the time of bidding, the Bid Security shall be in the names of
all future partners as named in the letter of intent referred to in
ITB 4.1.
32.9 If a Bid-Securing Declaration is executed in accordance with
ITB 32.7, the Employer will declare the Bidder ineligible to be
awarded a contract by the Employer for the period of time
stated in the Form of Bid-Securing Declaration.
32.10If a bid security is not required in the BDS, and
(a) if a Bidder withdraws its bid during the period of bid
validity specified by the Bidder on the Letter of Bid
Form, except as provided in ITB 32.2, or
(b) if the successful Bidder fails to: sign the Contract in
accordance with ITB 53; or furnish a performance
security in accordance with ITB 54;
the Borrower may, if provided for in the BDS, declare the
Bidder disqualified to be awarded a contract by the Employer
for a period of time as stated in the BDS.
33. Format and 33.1 The Bidder shall prepare one original of the documents
Signing of Second comprising the bid as described in ITB 27 and clearly mark it
Stage Bid “SECOND STAGE BID - ORIGINAL.” In addition, the Bidder shall
submit copies of the bid, in the number specified in the BDS
and clearly mark them “SECOND STAGE BID - COPY.” In the
event of any discrepancy between the original and the copies,
the original shall prevail.
33.2 The original and all copies of the bid shall be typed or written
in indelible ink and shall be signed by a person duly
authorized to sign on behalf of the Bidder. This authorization
shall consist of a written confirmation as specified in the BDS
and shall be attached to the bid. The name and position held
by each person signing the authorization must be typed or
printed below the signature. All pages of the bid where entries
or amendments have been made shall be signed or initialed by
the person signing the bid.
33.3 A bid submitted by a JVA shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a) Unless not required in accordance with ITB 4.1 (a), be
signed so as to be legally binding on all partners and
(b) Include the Representative’s authorization referred to in
ITB 4.1 (b), consisting of a power of attorney signed by
those legally authorized to sign on behalf of the JVA.
33.4 Any interlineations, erasures, or overwriting shall be valid
only if they are signed or initialed by the person signing the
bid.
E2. Second Stage Bids: Submission and Opening

34. Submission, 34.1 Bidders may always submit their bids by mail or by hand.
Sealing and When so specified in the BDS, bidders shall have the option
Marking of of submitting their bids electronically. Procedures for
Second Stage submission, sealing and marking are as follows:
Bids
34.2 Bidders submitting bids by mail or by hand shall enclose the
original and each copy of the Bid, in separate sealed
envelopes, duly marking the envelopes as “SECOND STAGE
BID - ORIGINAL”, and “SECOND STAGE BID - COPY.” These
envelopes containing the original and the copies shall then be
enclosed in one single envelope. The rest of the procedure
shall be in accordance with ITB 34.2 and 34.3.
34.3 Bidders submitting bids electronically shall follow the
electronic bid submission procedures specified in the BDS.

34.4 The inner and outer envelopes shall:
(a) bear the name and address of the Bidder;
(b) be addressed to the Employer in accordance with ITB
35.1;
(c) bear the specific identification of this bidding process
indicated in the BDS 1.1; and
(d) bear a warning not to open before the time and date for
bid opening.
34.5 If all envelopes are not sealed and marked as required, the
Employer will assume no responsibility for the misplacement
or premature opening of the bid.
35. Deadline for 35.1 Second Stage bids must be received by the Employer at the
Submission of address and no later than the date and time indicated in the
Second Stage Letter of Invitation to submit Second Stage Bids.
Bids
35.2 The Employer may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for
the submission of bids by amending the Bidding Document in
accordance with ITB 8, in which case all rights and
obligations of the Employer and Bidders previously subject to
the deadline shall thereafter be subject to the deadline as
extended.
36. Late Bids 36.1 The Employer shall not consider any bid that arrives after the
deadline for submission of bids, in accordance with ITB 35.
Any bid received by the Employer after the deadline for
submission of bids shall be declared late, rejected, and
returned unopened to the Bidder.
37. Withdrawal, 37.1 A Bidder may withdraw, substitute, or modify its bid after it
Substitution, and has been submitted by sending a written notice, duly signed by
Modification of an authorized representative, and shall include a copy of the
Second Stage authorization in accordance with ITB 33.2, (except that
Bids withdrawal notices do not require copies). The corresponding
substitution or modification of the bid must accompany the
respective written notice. All notices must be:
(a) prepared and submitted in accordance with ITB 33 and ITB
34 (except that withdrawals notices do not require copies),
and in addition, the respective envelopes shall be clearly
marked “SECOND STAGE BID - WITHDRAWAL,” “SECOND
STAGE BID - SUBSTITUTION,” “SECOND STAGE BID -
MODIFICATION;” and
(b) received by the Employer prior to the deadline prescribed
for submission of bids, in accordance with ITB 35
37.2 Bids requested to be withdrawn in accordance with ITB 37.1
shall be returned unopened to the Bidders.
37.3 No bid may be withdrawn, substituted, or modified in the
interval between the deadline for submission of Second Stage
bids and the expiration of the period of bid validity specified
by the Bidder on the Letter of Bid or any extension thereof.
38. Second Stage Bid 38.1 The Employer shall conduct the Second Stage bid opening in
Opening public, in the presence of Bidders` designated representatives
and anyone who choose to attend, and at the address, date and
time specified in the Letter of Invitation to submit Second
Stage Bids. Any specific electronic bid opening procedures
required if electronic bidding is permitted in accordance with
ITB 34.1, shall be as specified in the BDS.
38.2 First, envelopes marked “SECOND STAGE BID - WITHDRAWAL”
shall be opened and read out and the envelope with the
corresponding bid shall not be opened, but returned to the
Bidder. No bid withdrawal shall be permitted unless the
corresponding withdrawal notice contains a valid
authorization to request the withdrawal and is read out at bid
opening. Next, envelopes marked “SECOND STAGE BID -
SUBSTITUTION” shall be opened and read out and exchanged
with the corresponding bid being substituted, and the
substituted bid shall not be opened, but returned to the Bidder.
No bid substitution shall be permitted unless the
corresponding substitution notice contains a valid
authorization to request the substitution and is read out at bid
opening. Envelopes marked “SECOND STAGE BID -
MODIFICATION” shall be opened and read out with the
corresponding bid. No bid modification shall be permitted
unless the corresponding modification notice contains a valid
authorization to request the modification and is read out at bid
opening. Only bids that are opened and read out at bid opening
shall be considered further.
38.3 All other envelopes shall be opened one at a time, reading out:
the name of the Bidder and the Bid Price(s), including any
discounts, and indicating whether there is a modification; the
presence or absence of a bid security or a Bid-Securing
Declaration; and any other details as the Employer may
consider appropriate. Only discounts read out at bid opening
shall be considered for evaluation. No bid shall be rejected at

bid opening except for late bids, in accordance with ITB 36.1.
38.4 The Employer shall prepare a record of the bid opening that
shall include, as a minimum: the name of the Bidder and
whether there is a withdrawal, substitution, or modification;
the Bid Price, per lot if applicable, including any discounts;
and the presence or absence of a bid security or a Bid-
Securing Declaration. The Bidders’ representatives who are
present shall be requested to sign the record. The omission of
a Bidder’s signature on the record shall not invalidate the
contents and effect of the record. A copy of the record shall
be distributed to all Bidders who submitted bids in time, and
posted online when electronic bidding is permitted.
E3. Second Stage Bids: Evaluation and Comparison

39. Confidentiality 39.1 Consistent with the requirements of transparency and
intellectual property rights, in revising the Second Stage
Technical Proposal, information contained in the Bidder’s
Technical Proposal reviewed in the first stage shall not be
disclosed to Bidders or any other persons not officially
concerned with such process until information on contract
award is communicated to all Bidders,.
39.2 Any attempt by a Bidder to influence the Employer in the
evaluation of the first and second stage bids or Contract award
decisions may result in the rejection of its bid.
39.3 Notwithstanding ITB 39.2, from the time of First Stage
technical proposal opening to the time of Contract award, if
any Bidder wishes to contact the Employer on any matter
related to the bidding process, it should do so in writing.
40. Clarification of 40.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation, and comparison of

Bids the bids, and qualification of the Bidders, the Employer may,
at its discretion, ask any Bidder for a clarification of its bid.
Any clarification submitted by a Bidder that is not in response
to a request by the Employer shall not be considered. The
Employer’s request for clarification and the response shall be
in writing. No change in the prices or substance of the bid
shall be sought, offered, or permitted, except to confirm the
correction of arithmetic errors discovered by the Employer in
the evaluation of the bids, in accordance with ITB 44.1.
40.2 If a Bidder does not provide clarifications of its bid by the date
and time set in the Employer’s request for clarification, its bid
may be rejected.
41. Deviations, 41.1 During the evaluation of bids, the following definitions apply:
Reservations, and
Omissions (a) “Deviation” is a departure from the requirements
specified in the Bidding Document;
(b) “Reservation” is the setting of limiting conditions or
withholding from complete acceptance of the
requirements specified in the Bidding Document; and
(c) “Omission” is the failure to submit part or all of the
information or documentation required in the Bidding
Document.
42. Determination of 42.1 The Employer’s determination of a bid’s responsiveness is to

Responsiveness be based on the contents of the bid itself, as defined in ITB 27.
42.2 A substantially responsive bid is one that meets the
requirements of the Bidding Document and has properly
incorporated all modifications listed in the Memorandum
entitled “Changes Required Pursuant to First Stage
Evaluation”, without material deviation, reservation, or
omission. A material deviation, reservation, or omission is
one that,
(a) if accepted, would:
(i) affect in any substantial way the scope,
quality, or performance of the Plant and Installation
Services specified in the Contract; or
(ii) limit in any substantial way, inconsistent with the
Bidding Document, the Employer’s rights or the
Bidder’s obligations under the proposed Contract;
or
(b) if rectified, would unfairly affect the competitive position
of other Bidders presenting substantially responsive bids.
42.3 A Second Stage bid containing technical or commercial
alternatives not submitted as part of the first stage technical
proposal will be treated as non responsive.
42.4 If a bid is not substantially responsive to the requirements of
the Bidding Document, it shall be rejected by the Employer
and may not subsequently be made responsive by correction of
the material deviation, reservation, or omission.
43. Nonmaterial 43.1 Provided that a bid is substantially responsive, the Employer
Nonconformities may waive any nonconformities in the bid that do not

constitute a material deviation, reservation or omission.
43.2 Provided that a bid is substantially responsive, the Employer
may request that the Bidder submit the necessary information
or documentation, within a reasonable period of time, to
rectify quantifiable nonmaterial nonconformities in the bid
related to documentation requirements. Requesting
information or documentation on such nonconformities shall
not be related to any aspect of the price of the bid. Failure of
the Bidder to comply with the request may result in the
rejection of its bid.
43.3 Provided that a bid is substantially responsive, the Employer
shall rectify nonmaterial nonconformities related to the Bid
Price. To this effect, the Bid Price shall be adjusted, for
comparison purposes only, to reflect the price of a missing or
non-conforming item or component. The adjustment shall be
made using the method indicated in Section III, Evaluation
and Qualification Criteria.
44. Correction of 44.1 Provided that the bid is substantially responsive, the Employer
Arithmetical shall correct arithmetical errors on the following basis:
Errors
(a) where there are errors between the total of the amounts
given under the column for the price breakdown and the
amount given under the Total Price, the former shall
prevail and the latter will be corrected accordingly;
(b) where there are errors between the total of the amounts of
Schedule Nos. 1 to 4 and the amount given in Schedule
No. 5 (Grand Summary), the former shall prevail and the
latter will be corrected accordingly; and
(c) if there is a discrepancy between words and figures, the
amount in words shall prevail, unless the amount
expressed in words is related to an arithmetic error, in
which case the amount in figures shall prevail subject to
(a) and (b) above.
44.2 If the Bidder that submitted the lowest evaluated bid does not
accept the correction of errors, its bid shall be declared non-
responsive.
45. Conversion to 45.1 For evaluation and comparison purposes, the currency(ies) of
Single Currency the bid shall be converted into a single currency as specified
in the BDS.
46. Margin of 46.1 No margin of domestic preference shall apply.

Preference
47. Evaluation of 47.1 The Employer shall use the criteria and methodologies
Second Stage indicated in this Clause. No other evaluation criteria or
Bids methodologies shall be permitted.
Technical Evaluation
47.2 The Employer will carry out a detailed evaluation of the
Second Stage bids not previously rejected to determine
whether the technical aspects concerning the modifications to
the technically acceptable base or alternative bid detailed in
the Memorandum entitled “Changes Required Pursuant to
First Stage Evaluation”, pursuant to ITB 26.1, have been
properly addressed and are substantially responsive to the
requirements set forth in the Bidding Document.
Economic Evaluation
47.3 To evaluate a bid, the Employer shall consider the following:
(a) the bid price, excluding provisional sums and the
provision, if any, for contingencies in the Price
Schedules;
(b) price adjustment for correction of arithmetic errors in
accordance with ITB 44.1;
(c) price adjustment due to discounts offered in accordance
with ITB 29.9;
(d) price adjustment due to quantifiable nonmaterial
nonconformities in accordance with ITB 29.10;
(e) converting the amount resulting from applying (a) to (c)
above, if relevant, to a single currency in accordance with
ITB 45; and
(f) the evaluation factors indicated in Section III, Evaluation
and Qualification Criteria.
47.4 If price adjustment is allowed in accordance with ITB 29.5,
the estimated effect of the price adjustment provisions of the
Conditions of Contract, applied over the period of execution
of the Contract, shall not be taken into account in bid
evaluation.
47.5 If this Bidding Document allows Bidders to quote separate
prices for different lots (contracts), and the award to a single
Bidder of multiple lots (contracts), the methodology to
determine the lowest evaluated price of the lot (contract)

combinations, including any discounts offered in the Letter of
Bid, is specified in Section III, Evaluation and Qualification
Criteria.
47.6 If the bid, which results in the lowest Evaluated Bid Price, is
seriously unbalanced or front loaded in the opinion of the
Employer, the Employer may require the Bidder to produce
detailed price analyses for any or all items of the Price
Schedules, to demonstrate the internal consistency of those
prices with the methods and time schedule proposed. After
evaluation of the price analyses, taking into consideration the
terms of payments, the Employer may require that the amount
of the performance security be increased at the expense of the
Bidder to a level sufficient to protect the Employer against
financial loss in the event of default of the successful Bidder
under the Contract.
48. Comparison of 48.1 The Employer shall compare all substantially responsive bids
Bids in accordance with ITB 47.3 to determine the lowest evaluated
bid,.
49. Qualification of 49.1 The Employer shall determine to its satisfaction whether the
the Bidder Bidder that is selected as having submitted the lowest
evaluated and substantially responsive bid still meets the
qualifying criteria specified in Section III, Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria.
49.2 An affirmative determination shall be a prerequisite for award
of the Contract to the Bidder. A negative determination shall
result in disqualification of the bid, in which event the
Employer shall proceed to the next lowest evaluated bid to
make a similar determination of that Bidder’s qualifications to
perform satisfactorily.
49.3 The participation of the manufacturers and subcontractors
proposed in its Bid to be used by the lowest evaluated Bidder
should be confirmed with a letter of intent between the parties,
as needed. The capabilities of additional or different
manufacturers and subcontractors proposed in its Bid to be
used by the lowest evaluated Bidder will also be evaluated for
acceptability in accordance with Section III, Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria. Should any additional or substitute
manufacturer or subcontractor be determined to be
unacceptable, the Bid will not be rejected, but the Bidder will
be required to substitute an acceptable manufacturer or
subcontractor without any change to the bid price. Prior to
signing the Contract, the corresponding Appendix to the
Contract Agreement shall be completed, listing the approved

manufacturers or subcontractors for each item concerned.
50. Employer’s Right 50.1 The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any bid,
to Accept Any and to annul the bidding process and reject all bids at any time
Bid, and to Reject prior to contract award, without thereby incurring any liability
Any or All Bids to Bidders. In case of annulment, all bids submitted and
specifically, bid securities, shall be promptly returned to the
Bidders.
F. Award of Contract
51. Award Criteria 51.1 Subject to ITB 50.1, the Employer shall award the Contract to
the Bidder whose offer has been determined to be the lowest
evaluated bid and is substantially responsive to the Bidding
Document, provided further that the Bidder is determined to
be eligible and qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily.
52. Notification of 52.1 Prior to the expiration of the period of bid validity, the
Award Employer shall notify the successful Bidder, in writing, that its
bid has been accepted. The notification letter (hereinafter and
in the Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms called the
“Letter of Acceptance”) shall specify the sum that the
Employer will pay the Contractor in consideration of the
execution and completion of the Plant and Installation
Services (hereinafter and in the Conditions of Contract and
Contract Forms called “the Contract Price”).
52.2 At the same time, the Employer shall also notify all other
Bidders of the results of the bidding, and shall publish in
UNDB online and in the dgMarket the results identifying the
bid and lot numbers and the following information: (i) name
of each Bidder who submitted a Bid; (ii) bid prices as read out
at Bid Opening; (iii) name and evaluated prices of each Bid
that was evaluated; (iv) name of bidders whose bids were
rejected and the reasons for their rejection; and (v) name of the
winning Bidder, and the Price it offered, as well as the
duration and summary scope of the contract awarded.
52.3 Until a formal contract is prepared and executed, the
notification of award shall constitute a binding Contract.
52.4 The Employer shall promptly respond in writing to any
unsuccessful Bidder who, after notification of award in
accordance with ITB 52.1, requests in writing the grounds on
which its bid was not selected.
53. Signing of 53.1 Promptly upon notification, the Employer shall send the
Contract successful Bidder the Contract Agreement.

53.2 Within twenty-eight (28) days of receipt of the Contract
Agreement, the successful Bidder shall sign, date, and return it
to the Employer.
53.3 Notwithstanding ITB 53.2 above, in case signing of the
Contract Agreement is prevented by any export restrictions
attributable to the Employer, to the country of the Employer,
or to the use of the Plant and Installation Services to be
supplied, where such export restrictions arise from trade
regulations from a country supplying those Plant and
Installation Services, the Bidder shall not be bound by its bid,
always provided, always provided, however, that the Bidder
can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Employer and of the
Bank that signing of the Contact Agreement has not been
prevented by any lack of diligence on the part of the Bidder in
completing any formalities, including applying for permits,
authorizations and licenses necessary for the export of the
Plant and Installation Services under the terms of the Contract.
54. Performance 54.1 Within twenty-eight (28) days of the receipt of notification of
Security award from the Employer, the successful Bidder shall furnish
the performance security in accordance with the General
Conditions of Contract, subject to ITB 47.6, using for that
purpose the Performance Security Form included in Section
IX, Contract Forms, or another form acceptable to the
Employer. If the performance security furnished by the
successful Bidder is in the form of a bond, it shall be issued by
a bonding or insurance company that has been determined by
the successful Bidder to be acceptable to the Employer. A
foreign institution providing a bond shall have a correspondent
financial institution located in the Employer’s Country.
54.2 Failure of the successful Bidder to submit the above-
mentioned Performance Security or sign the Contract shall
constitute sufficient grounds for the annulment of the award
and forfeiture of the bid security. In that event the Employer
may award the Contract to the next lowest evaluated Bidder
whose offer is substantially responsive and is determined by
the Employer to be qualified to perform the Contract
satisfactorily.
Section II. Bid Data Sheet 1-43
Section II. Bid Data Sheet

A. Introduction
ITB 1.1 The number of the Invitation for Bids is :PWA/IDA,AFD & EU/2016/065-
CTD
ITB 1.1 The Employer is: Palestinian Water Authority
ITB 1.1 The name of the ICB is:Design, Supply and Installation of HRWWTP
The identification number of the ICB is: PWA/HRWWTP/ICB/1-2016
The number and identification of lots (contracts) comprising this ICB is: 1
ITB 2.1 The Borrower is: Palestine Liberation Organization
ITB 2.1 The name of the Project is: Hebron Regional Wastewater Management
Project – Phase I.
The Source of Funds is provided through co-financing of the project by the

World Bank, the Agence Francaise de Developpement and the European
Commission.
Bidding will be conducted through the international competitive bidding

procedures specified in World Bank’s “Procurement of Goods, Works and
Non-consulting Services under IBRD Loans and IDA Credits and Grants
by World Bank Borrowers" dated January 2011 (revised July 2014).
ITB 4.1 (a) The individuals or firms in a joint venture, consortium or association
jointly and severally liable.
B. Bidding Document
ITB 7.1 For clarification purposes only, the Employer’s address is: Palestinian
Water Authority
For clarification purposes only, the Employer’s address is:
Attention: Mr. Bassam Jaber
Street Address: Al Amin Circle Street
Floor/Room number: Second floor, flat # 9
City: Al Bireh- Um Al Sharayet
ZIP Code: NA
Country: State of Palestine
Telephone: 00970 2 2966006/7
Facsimile number: 00970 2 2988582
Electronic mail address: ctd.pal@gmail.com
In addition to, in all communications the bidders shall sent copy to
Sali@pwa-gpmu.org.
1-44 Section II. Bid Data Sheet
ITB 7.4 Concurrent Pre-Bid meetings for Contract “A” HRWWTP Design, Supply
and Installation (DSI) and Contract “B” HRWWTP Operations and
Maintenance (O&M) Services shall take place at the following date, time
and place:
Date: January 9, 2017
Time: 10:00 AM
Place: Hebron Municipality - Water / Waste water Department Room
#Meeting Room
A site visit conducted by the Employer shall be organized immediately
after the pre-bid meeting.
ITB 10.1 The language of the bid is: English
C1. First Stage Technical Proposals: Preparation
ITB 11.1 (i) The environmental and social risks are evaluated as high and impacts as
significant. Consequently, the Technical Proposal shall include an
environmental, social, health and safety (ESHS) Methodology meeting the
requirements of the ESHS Specifications.
The Bidder shall use the ESHS Methodology Form provided for this
purpose in Section IV – Technical Proposal.
A Bid not comprising an ESHS Methodology shall be rejected.
ITB 11.1 (ii) The Bidder shall submit with its bid the following additional documents:
ITB 16.2 (b) Spares required for operation; number of years following completion 5
yaers
ITB 17.1 In addition to the original of the bid, the number of copies is: 4 printed and
one soft copty
ITB 17.2 a) Notarized certificate confirming that the signatory is duly
authorized to sign bids for and on behalf of the Bidder, with name
and capacity of the signatory, address and date, and
b) In the case of Bids submitted by an existing or intended JV an
undertaking signed by all parties (i) starting that all parties shall be
jointly and severally liable, if so required in accordance with ITB
4.2(a) and (ii) nominating a representative who shall have the
authority to conduct all business for and on behalf of any and all
the parties of the JV during the bidding process and, in the event
the JV is awarded the Contract, during contract execution.
C2. First Stage Technical Proposals: Submission and Opening

ITB 18.1 Bidders shall not have the option of submitting their bids electronically.
ITB 18.1 (b) If bidders shall have the option of submitting their bids electronically, the
electronic bidding submission procedures shall be: NA

ITB 19.1 For First Stage Technical Proposal bid submission purposes only, the
Employer’s address is :
Attention: Mr. Bassam Jaber
City: Al Bireh- Um Al Sharayet
ZIP Code: NA
The deadline for the submission of First Stage Bids is:
Date: 06 March, 2017
Time: 12:00 noon.
ITB 21.1 The bid opening shall take place at:
City : Al Bireh- Um Al Sharayet
Date: 06 March, 2017
Time: 12:00 noon
ITB 21.1 If electronic bid submission is permitted in accordance with ITB 19.1, the
specific bid opening procedures shall be: NA
E1. Second Stage Bid Preparation

ITB 27.1 (j) The Bidder shall submit with its bid the following additional documents:
ITB 29.1 Bidders shall quote for the entire Plant and Installation Services on a single
responsibility basis taking into account that the Contarctor will be granted
for the Contrcat Ceiling VAT exemption to enable the Contrcator issuing
the required Zero VAT invoices and the Contractor will be granted
donation number for all Plant and Equipmnet importaed from abroad, all as
per applicable procedures by MoF. However, the Contractor shall copmply
with all the requirements related to registration of the contracting entity
(individual firm or Joint Ventures) as per applicable and adapted
procedures in Palestine. Furher details are presented in the Employer
Requiremnets Annex 5. Considerations For Delivering Imported Goods
And Equipment To The Site
ITB 29.4(a) Named place of destination is: Contrcator’s Stores at the HRWWTP Site
1-46 Section II. Bid Data Sheet
ITB 29.4(d) Named place of final destination is: Contrcator’s Stores at the HRWWTP
Site
ITB 29.6 The prices quoted by the Bidder shall be: adjustable
ITB 30.1 The currency(ies) of the bid shall be as follows: Bidders may express the
price for their financial offer in any fully convertible currency, singly or in
combination of up to three foreign currencies
ITB 31.1 The bid validity period shall be 180 days.
ITB 32.1 The Bid shall include a bid security (issued by bank or surety);
The amount and currency of the bid security shall be US$ 750,000 (Seven
Hundred Fifty Thousand U.S. Dollars) or an equivalent amount in any
freely convertible currency.
ITB 32.10 Not applicable.
ITB 32.3 (d) Other types of acceptable securities:
ITB 33.1 In addition to the original of the bid, the number of copies is: Four (4)
hardcopies and one copy in digital form on electronic medium together
with the hard copies.
ITB 33.2 The written confirmation of authorization to sign on behalf of the Bidder
shall consist of:
Notarized certificate confirming that the signatory is duly authorized to
sign Bids for and on behalf of the Bidder, with name and capacity of the
signatory, address and date
E2. Second Stage Bids: Submission and Opening

ITB 34.1 Bidders shall not have the option of submitting their bids electronically.
ITB 34.1 (b) If bidders shall have the option of submitting their bids electronically, the
electronic bidding submission procedures shall be: NA
ITB 38.1 Electronic bid submission is not permitted in accordance with ITB 36.1.
E2. Second Stage Bids: Evaluation and Comparison

ITB 42 Compliance of the ESHS Methodology (as specified in BDS11) with the
ESHS Specifications (Section VI – Employer’s Requirements) shall be
determined by using the method specified in ITB 27. A Bid for which the
ESHS Methodology is not substantially responsive (i.e. without material
deviation, reservation or omission) shall be rejected.
ITB 45.1 The currency(ies) of the Bid shall be converted into a single currency as
follows: Prices shall be converted to a single currency using the selling
rates of exchange, source and date indicated below.
The currency that shall be used for bid evaluation and comparison
purposes to convert all bid prices expressed in various currencies into a
single currency is: US$
The source of exchange rate shall be: www.FT.com
The date for the exchange rate shall be: 14 days before the deadline for
submission of bids as specified in ITB35.1.
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification

Criteria
(Without Prequalification)
This Section contains all the criteria that the Employer shall use to evaluate bids and qualify
Bidders. In accordance with ITB 23, ITB 47 and ITB 49, no other factors, methods or
criteria shall be used. The Bidder shall provide all the information requested in the forms
included in Section IV, Bidding Forms.
1-50 Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria –Without Prequalification
First Stage Technical Proposals
1.1. 1. Evaluation
In addition to the criteria listed in ITB (a) – (c) the following factors and methods
will apply:
The E&S risks and impacts are evaluated as high and impacts significant. Consequently,
specific E&S qualification criteria are included. In accordance with BDS11 and BDS42, the
ESHS Methodology submitted by the Bidder will be evaluated to determine whether it is
substantially responsive (i.e. without material deviation, reservation or omission) to the
requirements specified in Section VI – Employer’s Requirements – ESHS Specifications.
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria –Without Prequalification 1-51
2. Qualification
Factor 1 Eligibility
Criteria
Bidder
Joint Venture, Consortium, or Documentati
Sub-Factor Association
Requirement on Required
Single Entity All Each At least
partners partner one
combined partner
2.1.1 Nationality Nationality in accordance Existing or
Form ELI –
with ITB 4.2. intended
Must meet Must meet 1.1 and 1.2,
JVA must N/A
requirement requirement with
meet
attachments
requirement
2.1.2Conflict of No- conflicts of interests Existing or
Interest as described in ITB 4.3. intended
Must meet Must meet
JVA must N/A Letter of Bid
requirement requirement
meet
requirement
2.1.3Bank Not having been declared Existing
Ineligibility ineligible by the Bank as Must meet JVA must Must meet
N/A Letter of Bid
described in, ITB 4.4. requirement meet requirement
requirement
2.1.4 Government Compliance with Form ELI –
Owned Entity conditions of ITB 4.5 Must meet Must meet Must meet 1.1 and 1.2,
N/A
requirement requirement requirement with
attachments
Factor 1 Eligibility
Criteria
Bidder
Joint Venture, Consortium, or Documentati
Requirement on Required
Single Entity All Each At least
partners partner one
combined partner
2.1.5Ineligibility Not having been excluded
based on a United as a result of the
Nations resolution or Borrower’s country laws Existing
Borrower’s country or official regulations, or Must meet JVA must Must meet
N/A Letter of Bid
law by an act of compliance requirement meet requirement
with UN Security Council requirement
resolution, in accordance
with ITB 4.8
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 2-53
Factor 2 Historical Contract Non-Performance

Criteria
Bidder
Joint Venture, Consortium, or
Documentation
Requirement Single Required
All Each At least one
Entity
partners partner partner
combined
2.2.1 History of Non-performance of a
non-performing contract did not occur
contracts within the last five (5)
years prior to the deadline
for application
submission, based on all
Must meet Must meet
information on fully
settled disputes or
by itself or by itself or
litigation. A fully settled N/A
as partner to as partner to N/A Form CON – 2
dispute or litigation is one
past or past or
that has been resolved in
existing existing
accordance with the
JVA JVA
Dispute Resolution
Mechanism under the
respective contract, and
where all appeal instances
available to the bidder
have been exhausted.
2.2.2 Pending All pending litigation Must meet Must meet
Litigation shall in total not represent requirement requirement
more than fifty percent ( by itself or by itself or
50%) of the Bidder’s net as partner to N/A as partner to N/A Form CON – 2
worth and shall be treated past or past or
as resolved against the existing existing
Bidder. JVA JVA
Factor 3 Financial Situation

Sub-Factor Criteria Documentation
Requirement Bidder Required
Single Entity Joint Venture, Consortium or Association
All partners Each partner At least one
combined partner
2.3.1 Historical Submission of audited balance
Financial sheets or if not required by the
Performance law of the bidder’s country,
other financial statements
acceptable to the Employer, for
the last three [3] years to
demonstrate the current
soundness of the bidders
financial position and its
prospective long term
Must meet Must meet Form FIN – 3.1
profitability . N/A N/A
requirement requirements with attachments
criterion 1: The Bidder shall be
in positive profit (before taxes)
account for the above specified
three [3] years
and
criterion 2: Bidder’s net worth
calculated as the difference
between total assets and total
liabilities shall be positive.

combined partner
2.3.2 Average Minimum average annual
Annual turnover of twenty million
Turnover United States dollars Must meet Must meet at
(US$_20.000.000) or equivalent Twenty Five least
Must meet Must meet
calculated as total certified percent (25%) forty percent Form FIN –3.2
payments received for contracts of the (40%) of the
in progress or completed, within requirement requirement
the last five [5] years
2.3.3 Financial The Bidder must demonstrate

Resources access to, or availability of,
financial resources such as
liquid assets, unencumbered
real assets, lines of credit, and
other financial means, other
than any contractual advance
Must meet at
payments to meet:
least forty
Must meet Must meet
N/A percent Form FIN –3.3
(i) the following cash-flow requirement requirement
(40%) of
requirement:
requirement
Five million United States
dollars (US$ 5.000.000) or
equivalent
and
(ii) the overall cash flow
requirements for this contract
and its current commitments.
Factor 4 Experience
Criteria
Bidder
Documentation
Sub-Factor
Requirement Joint Venture, Consortium, or Association Required
Single Entity All partners Each partner At least one
combined partner
2.4.1 General Experience under contracts in
Experience the role of contractor,
subcontractor, or management
contractor for at least the last
Must meet Must meet
five [5] years prior to the N/A N/A Form EXP-2.4.1
applications submission
deadline, and with activity in at
least nine (9) months in each
year.
2.4.2 (a) (a)Participation as contractor, Must meet
Specific management contractor or requirement
Experience- subcontractor, in at least two [2] for at least
Contract Values contracts within the last ten one contract
[10] years , each with a value of with a value
at least twenty-four million Must meet Must meet of at least Form EXP 2.4.2(a)
N/A
United States dollars U$ requirement requirements twenty-four
24.000.000] or equivalent and million
substantially completed (at least US$24,000,0
80%) and that are similar to the 000 in last
proposed DSI services ten [(10]
years

combined partner
2.4.2 (b) The similarity shall be based
Specific upon the physical size,
Experience – complexity; site circumstances,
Project Size methods/technology or other
characteristics (particularly
design and build approach, and
Must meet Must meet Must meet
footprint as described in Section N/A Form EXP-2.4.2(b)
requirements requirements requirements
VI, Employer’s Requirements.
Applicant must specifically
demonstrate its Design capacity
in biological treatment,
excavation, SCADA, sludge
treatment.
2.4.2 (c) Experience in complying with
Specific environmental, social, health
Experience - and safety requirements, as
Must meet Must meet Must meet
ESHS required, in at least one project N/A Form EXP-2.4.2(b)
requirements requirements requirements
of similar size, nature and
complexity in the last 6 [6]
years.
Factor 5 2.5 Environmental, Social, Health and Safety (ESHS)

Criteria
Bidder
Sub-Factor Documentation
Single Entity All partners Each At least one
combined partner partner
2.5.1 ESHS Availability of a valid ISO
Certifications certification or internationally Must meet
recognized equivalent (equivalency requirement
to be demonstrated by the (a JV
Applicant) : member
(a) quality management certificate which would
Must meet Form CER
ISO 9001 N/A not meet this N/A
requirement
requirement
(b) environmental management Form CER
must be
certificate ISO 14 001 presented as
Form CER
(c) health and safety certificate a sub-
OHSAS 18001 contractor)
Must meet
2.5.2 ESHS Availability of in house policies requirement
Documentation and procedures acceptable to the (a JV
Employer for ESHS worksites member
management which would Form ESHS and
Must meet
N/A not meet this N/A supporting
requirement
requirement documentation
must be
presented as
a sub-
contractor)

Criteria
Bidder
Form ESHS and
2.5.3 ESHS Experience of two (2) construction
supporting
Experience contracts over the last ten (10)
documents(in
years, where major ESHS measures
particular the
were carried out satisfactorily and Must meet Must meet
N/A N/A final ESHS
in compliance with international requirement requirement implementation
standards
monitoring
reports shall be
provided)
Form EXP-ESHS
2.5.4 Specific ESHS Experience of one (1) construction
with supporting
Knowledge Transfer contract over the last five (5) years
documents
Specific Experience in which the ESHS knowledge
transfer to a local partner or the
ESHS capacity building of the
Employer’s country staff was The Applicant
Must meet Must meet
N/A N/A shall submit a
carried out satisfactorily requirement requirement
piece of evidence
supporting the
ESHS knowledge
transfer or
capacity building.

Criteria
Bidder
2.5.5 ESHS Personnel The Bidder must demonstrate that
it has the key personnel staff for at
least two (2) years that meet the
following requirements:
(a) environmental expertise: a

minimum of five (5) years of Form PER 2
experience in designing and
monitoring ESHS work sites Must meet Must meet
N/A N/A
management measures; requirement requirement
(b) health & safety expertise: a

minimum of five (5) years of Form PER 2
experience in designing and
monitoring ESHS worksites
management measures.
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-61
2.5 Personnel
The bidder must demonstrate that it will have the personnel for the key positions during the DSI phase that
meet the following requirements:
Total Work In Similar

Similar Works Number of
No. Position
Experience Experience Staff
(years) (years)
1 Contractor’s Project
15 10 1
manager
2 Deputy Contractor’s
10 5 1
Project manager
3 Civil Engineer 10 5 1
4 Process engineer 10 8 1
5 Construction Chief
8 4 1
engineer
6 Hydraulic engineer 8 4 1
7 Mechanical Engineer 8 4 1
8 Electrical Engineer 8 4 1
9 Supervisor Engineer 8 4 1
10 Scada specialist 10 5 1
11 QA/QC Engineer 10 5 1
12 ESHS Coordinator 10 5 1
2.6 Equipment
No specific equipment required
2.7 Subcontractors/manufacturers
No minimum requirements are defined for subcontractors/manufacturers.
1-62 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
Second Stage Bids
1. Evaluation
1.1 Economic Evaluation

In addition to the criteria defined in ITB 47.3 (a) – (d), the following factors and methods will apply.
(a) Time Schedule

(b) Operations and Maintenance Costs
(c) Cost of Consumables
The Second Stage Bid Price will be evaluated as follows:
EBP = ABP + (COM) + (COC)
Whereby:
EBP is the evaluated bid price including life cycle costs
ABP is the Bidder’s Bid Price as shown in the Letter of Bid- Two Stage Bidding – Second Stage
Bid and further adjusted, as necessary, in accordance with ITB 47.3
COM is the Grand Total of Operations and Maintenance Costs from Table 1 below
COC is the Grand Total Costs of Consumables from Table 2 below.
(a) Time Schedule:
Time to complete the Plant and Installation Services from the effective date specified in
Article 3 of the Contract Agreement for determining time for completion of pre-
commissioning activities is: nine hundred ten (910) calendar days. No credit will be given
for earlier completion.
(b) Operating and Maintenance Costs
This table shall correspond with table 1 in the Bid Price From of the O&M bid.
Operations and Maintenance Total per year Total for 5 years

MC Costs for maintenance of the Plant, US$ US$
including spare parts, sampling and
analysis, transport, office equipment et
cetera
Labour Number All-in salary and Total per year Total for 5 years
of staff taxes per year and
per person
converted to US$
equivalent
L 1. Operations manager # US$ US$ US$
L 2. Assistant Operations manager # US$ US$ US$
L 3. Proces engineer # US$ US$ US$$
L 4. Plantoperators # US$ US$ US$
L 5. Maintenance manager # US$ US$ US$
L 6. Maintenance engineers # US$ US$ US$
L 7. Laboratory staff # US$ US$ US$
L 8. Support staff # US$ US$ US$
L9 … # US$ US$ US$
.. … # US$ US$ US$
Ln … # US$ US$ US$
LC Labour costs for 5 years US$
Other costs Total costs for 5
years
T1 Training programme US$
… … US$
Tn … US$
TC Other costs for 5 years US$
Grand total MC + LC + TC COSTS 5 US$
YEARS
Cost Of Consumables For Five (5) Years
Instructions:
a. Calculate quantity of consumables based on the following four design situations:
• Amount of consumables needed for operating the WWTP when the wastewater temperature is 13C and loads and flows are as
stated for stage 1 year 2020
Calculations, excluding price information, are to be included in the Bid for evaluation and verification purposes
b. The bidder shall state the specific consumption/production of the following items in :
• Specific chemical consumption (polyelectrolytes) will be specified as maximum amount of kg polyelectrolytes used per kg
BOD removed from influent wastewater.
• Specific fuel consumption will be specified as maximum amount of fuel (m3) per amount of influent wastewater treated (m3)
• Specific sludge production will be specified as maximum amount of sludge produced from the plant, kg dried solids per kg
BOD removed from influent wastewater
c. Unit rates are to be completed by Bidder, except for electricity.
d. The unit rates will be subject to price adjustment as per schedule G.9. Bidder has to complete in this Table the source of the index
that will be used for Price Adjustment of the Unit Rates, as well as the Base date index on the date 28 days prior to the submission
deadline of the Bid.
Maximum unit rates Source of

Guaranteed converted to Costs for index for Base
Specific US$ Five price date
Consumables unit Amount Quantity equivalent Years adjustment index
Electricity (as KWH Per Kg US$ 0,15 /

C 1. kWh/y US$
calculated) TOD* kWh
Fuel for operations fuel m3 per m3

C 2. and generator (as m³/y influent US$........ / mᶟ US$
calculated)
Instructions:
kg
Chemicals polyelectrolytes
US$ ..... /
C 3. polyelectrolytes (as solids per kg US$
tonnes/year tonne
calculated) BOD in
influent
kg dried solids
Sludge transport tonnes US$...... ./
C 4. per kg BOD in US$
and disposal product/year tonne
influent
C 5. Others as per bid [specify] US$...... /...... US$

Instructions:
C n. Others as per bid [specify] US$..... ./...... US$
TC GRAND TOTAL COSTS OF CONSUMABLES FOR 5 YEARS US$

F
Note : * TOD – total oxygen demand = BOD mass removed + 4,57 x NKjeldahl mass removed
2-5-1
Section IV. Bidding Forms
Table of Forms
Letter of Bid.......................................................................................................................... 5-3
Letter of Bid – Two Stage Bidding, First Stage Bid ........................................................ 5-3
Letter of Bid – Two Stage Bidding, Second Stage Bid ................................................... 5-5
Statement of Integrity, Eligibility and Social and Environmental Responsability ........ 5-7
Schedules of Rates and Prices ........................................................................................... 5-11
Schedule No. 1. Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Abroad .................. 5-11
Schedule No. 2. Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Within the Employer’s
Country .............................................................................................................. 5-12
Schedule No. 3. Design Services .................................................................................. 5-13
Schedule No. 4a. Installation and Other Services ......................................................... 5-14
Schedule No. 4b. Installation and Other Services......................................................... 5-15
Schedule No. 5. Environmental, Social, Health and Safety.......................................... 5-16
Schedule No. 6. Grand Summary ................................................................................. 5-18
Schedule No. 7. Recommended Spare Parts ................................................................. 5-19
Price Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 5-20
FIRST STAGE TECHNICAL PROPOSALS ................................................................. 5-22
SECOND STAGE BID ...................................................................................................... 5-26
Site Organization ........................................................................................................... 5-27
Method Statement .......................................................................................................... 5-28
Mobilization Schedule ................................................................................................... 5-29
Construction Schedule ................................................................................................... 5-30
Plant 5-31
Contractor’s Equipment ................................................................................................. 5-32
Personnel 6-34
Proposed Subcontractors for Major Items of Plant and Installation Services ............... 6-36
Others - Time Schedule ................................................................................................. 6-37
Others – Commercial or contractual aspects of the bidding documents that the Bidder
would like to discuss with the Employer during clarifications .......................... 6-38
Bidder Information Sheet.................................................................................................. 6-39
Party to JVA Information Sheet ....................................................................................... 6-40
1-5-2 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
Historical Contract Non-Performance ............................................................................. 6-41

Current Contract Commitments / Works in Progress ................................................... 6-42
Financial Situation ............................................................................................................. 6-43
Historical Financial Performance .................................................................................. 6-43
Average Annual Turnover ............................................................................................. 6-45
Financial Resources ....................................................................................................... 6-46
Experience - General Experience ..................................................................................... 6-47
Specific Experience ....................................................................................................... 6-48
Specific Experience in Key Activities ........................................................................... 6-50
Form of Bid Security (Bank Guarantee) ......................................................................... 6-57
Form of Bid Security (Bid Bond)...................................................................................... 6-58
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-5-3
Letter of Bid
Letter of Bid – Two Stage Bidding, First Stage Bid
Date:
ICB No.:
Invitation for Bid No.:
To: _______________________________________________________________________
We, the undersigned, declare that:
(a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Document, including
Addenda issued in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (ITB) Section I
(b) We offer to design, manufacture, test, deliver, install, complete and commission, in
conformity with the Bidding Document including subsequent Addenda, the Hebron
Regional Wastewater Management Plant (Phase I).
(c) We, including any subcontractors or manufacturers for any part of the contract , have
or will have nationalities from eligible countries, in accordance with ITB-4.2;
(d) We, including any subcontractors or manufacturers for any part of the contract, do not
have any conflict of interest in accordance with ITB-4.3;
(e) We are not submitting more than one bid in this bidding process as a Bidder, either
individually or as a partner in a joint venture, in accordance with ITB-4.3, except for
alternative offers permitted under ITB Clause 13;
(f) We, along with any of our subcontractors, suppliers, consultants, manufacturers, or service providers for any part of
the contract, are not subject to, and not controlled by any entity or individual that is subject to, a temporary
suspension or a debarment imposed by a member of the World Bank Group or a debarment imposed by the World
Bank Group in accordance with the Agreement for Mutual Enforcement of Debarment Decisions between the World
Bank and other development banks. Further, we are not ineligible under the Employer’s country laws or official
regulations or pursuant to a decision of the United Nations Security Council;
(g) We are not a government owned entity/ We are a government owned entity but meet the
requirements of ITB-4.5;5
(h) We further undertake, if invited to do so by you, and at our own cost, to attend a
clarification meeting at a place of your choice, for the purpose of reviewing our First
Stage Bid and duly noting all amendments and additions thereto, and noting omissions
therefrom that you may require.
5
Bidder to use as appropriate
(i) We further undertake, upon receiving your written invitation, to proceed with the
preparation of our Second Stage Bid, updating our First Stage Bid in accordance with
the requirements from the Memorandum of the clarification meeting, and completing
our Second Stage bid for supplying the Plant and Installation Services.
(j) We have paid, or will pay the following commissions, gratuities, or fees with respect to
the bidding process or execution of the Contract:
Name of Recipient Address Reason Amount
(If none has been paid or is to be paid, indicate “none.”)
Name In the capacity of _
Signed
Duly authorized to sign the bid for and on behalf of
Dated on ________________________________ day of _______________________, _____

Letter of Bid – Two Stage Bidding, Second Stage Bid
Date:
ICB No.:
Invitation for Bid No.:
To: _______________________________________________________________________
We, the undersigned, declare that:
(a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Document, including
Addenda issued in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (ITB) Section I, and your
requirements incorporated in the Memorandum of the clarification meeting held between
us on [date], ;
(b) We offer to provide design, manufacture, test, deliver, install, complete and commission
, in conformity with the Bidding Document including subsequent Addenda, the Hebron
Regional Wastewater Management Plant (Phase I).
(c) The price of our Bid, excluding any discounts offered in item (d) below is the sum of:
___________________, (___________), and ___________________, (___________).
The discounts offered and the methodology for their application are: ;
(d) Our bid shall be valid for a period of ____________________________ days from the
date fixed for the submission deadline for the Second Stage bids as stipulated in the
Letter if Invitation to submit a Second Stage Bid, and it shall remain binding upon us and
may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period;
(e) If our bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a performance security in accordance with
the Bidding Document;
(f) We, including any subcontractors or manufacturers for any part of the contract , have or
will have nationalities from eligible countries, in accordance with ITB-4.2;
(g) We, including any subcontractors or manufacturers for any part of the contract, do not
have any conflict of interest in accordance with ITB-4.3;
(h) We are not submitting more than one bid in this bidding process as a Bidder, either
individually or as a partner in a joint venture, in accordance with ITB-4.3, except for
alternative offers permitted under ITB Clause 13;
(i) We, along with any of our subcontractors, suppliers, consultants, manufacturers, or service providers for any part of
the contract, are not subject to, and not controlled by any entity or individual that is subject to, a temporary suspension
or a debarment imposed by a member of the World Bank Group or a debarment imposed by the World Bank Group in
accordance with the Agreement for Mutual Enforcement of Debarment Decisions between the World Bank and other
development banks. Further, we are not ineligible under the Employer’s country laws or official regulations or
pursuant to a decision of the United Nations Security Council;
(j) We are not a government owned entity/ We are a government owned entity but meet the
requirements of ITB-4.5;6
(k) We have paid, or will pay the following commissions, gratuities, or fees with respect to
the bidding process or execution of the Contract:
Name of Recipient Address Reason Amount
(If none has been paid or is to be paid, indicate “none.”)
(l) We understand that this bid, together with your written acceptance thereof included in
your notification of award, shall constitute a binding contract between us, until a formal
contract is prepared and executed; and
(m) We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest evaluated bid or any other bid
that you may receive.
Name In the capacity of _
Signed
Duly authorized to sign the bid for and on behalf of
Dated on ________________________________ day of ___________________, _____
6
Bidder to use as appropriate
Statement of Integrity, Eligibility and Social and

Environmental Responsability
Reference name of the Bid : ("Contract")
To: ("Contracting Authority")
1. We recognise and accept that Agence française de développement ("AFD") only

finances projects of the Contracting Authority subject to its own conditions which are
set out in the Financing Agreement which it has entered into with the Contracting
Authority. As a matter of consequence, no legal relationship exists between AFD and
our company, our joint venture or our subcontractors. The Contracting Authority
retains exclusive responsibility for the preparation and implementation of the contract
procurement and its subsequent performance.
2. We hereby certify that neither we nor any other member of our joint venture or any of
our subcontractors are in any of the following situations:
2.1) being bankrupt, wound up or ceasing our activities, having our activities
administered by the courts, having entered into receivership, reorganisation or
being in any analogous situation arising from any similar procedure;
2.2) having been convicted, within the past five years by decision of a court
decision, which has the force of res judicata in the country where the project
is implemented, of one of the acts mentioned in sections 6.1 to 6.4 below or of
any other offense committed during the procurement or performance of a
contract7;
2.3) being listed for financial sanctions by the United Nations, the European Union
and/or France for the purposes of fight-against-terrorist financing or threat to
international peace and security;
2.4) having committed serious professional misconduct within the past five years
during the procurement or performance of a contract;
2.5) not having fulfilled our obligations regarding the payment of social security
contributions or taxes in accordance with the legal provisions of either the
country where we are established or the Contracting Authority's country;
2.6) having been convicted, within the past five years by a court decision, which
has the force of res judicata, of one of the acts mentioned in sections 6.1 to 6.4
below or of any other offense committed during the procurement or
performance of an AFD-financed contract;
7
In the event of such conviction, you may attach to this Statement of Integrity supporting information
showing that this conviction is not relevant in the context of this AFD-financed contract.
2.7) being subject to an exclusion decision of the World Bank since 30 May 2012,
and being listed on the website http://www.worldbank.org/debarr8;
2.8) having committed misrepresentation in documentation requested by the
Beneficiary as part of the contract procurement procedure.
3. We hereby certify that neither we, nor any of the members of our joint venture or any
of our subcontractors are in any of the following situations of conflict of interest:
3.1) being an affiliate controlled by the Contracting Authority or a shareholder
controlling the Contracting Authority, unless the stemming conflict of interest
has been brought to the attention of AFD and resolved to its satisfaction;
3.2) having a business or family relationship with a Contracting Authority’s staff
involved in the selection procedure or the supervision of the resulting contract,
unless the stemming conflict of interest has been brought to the attention of
AFD and resolved to its satisfaction;
3.3) being controlled by or controlling another bidder or being under common
control with another bidder, or receiving from or granting subsidies directly or
indirectly to another bidder, having the same legal representative as another
bidder, maintaining direct or indirect contacts with another bidder which
allows us to have or give access to information contained in the respective
bids, influencing them or influencing decisions of the Contracting Authority;
3.4) being engaged in a consultancy activity, which, by its nature, may be in
conflict with the assignments that we would carry out for the Contracting
Authority;
3.5) in the case of a works or goods procurement procedure:
i. Having prepared or having been associated with a consultant who
prepared specifications, drawings, calculations and other
documentation that are subject of the bid;
ii. having been recruited (or being proposed to be recruited) ourselves or
any of our affiliates, to carry out works supervision or inspection for
this contract;
4. If we are a government-owned entity, we certify that we have legal and financial
autonomy and that we operate under commercial laws and regulations.
5. We undertake to bring to the attention of the Contracting Authority, which will inform
AFD, any change in situation with regard to points 2 to 4 here above.
6. In the context of procurement and performance of the contract:
6.1) We have not and we will not engage in any dishonest conduct (act or
omission) deliberately indented to deceive others, to intentionally conceal
items, to violate or vitiate someone's consent, to make them circumvent legal
8
In the event of such exclusion, you may attach to this Statement of Integrity supporting information
showing that this exclusion is not relevant in the context of this AFD-financed contract.
or regulatory requirements and/or to violate their internal rules in order to

obtain illegitimate profit.
6.2) We have not and we will not engage in any dishonest conduct (act or
omission) contrary to our legal or regulatory obligations or our internal rules
in order to obtain illegitimate profit.
6.3) We have not promised, offered or given and we will not promise, offer or
give, directly or indirectly to (i) any person who holds a legislative, executive,
administrative or judicial mandate within the State of the Contracting
Authority regardless of whether that person was nominated or elected,
regardless of the permanent or temporary, paid or unpaid nature of the position
and regardless of the hierarchical level the person occupies, (ii) any other
person who performs a public function, including for a State institution or a
State-owned company, or who provides a public service, or (iii) any other
person defined as a public officer by the national laws of the Contracting
Authority, an undue advantage of any kind, for himself or for another person
or entity, for such public officer to act or refrain from acting in his official
capacity.
6.4) We have not promised, offered or given and we will not promise, offer or
give, directly or indirectly to any private person who occupies an executive
position in a private sector entity or works for such an entity, regardless of the
nature of his/her capacity, any undue advantage of any kind, for himself or
another person or entity for such private person to perform or refrain from
performing any act in breach of its legal, contractual or professional
obligations.
6.5) We have not and we will not engage in any practice likely to influence the
contract award process to the detriment of the Contracting Authority and, in
particular, in any anti-competitive practice having for object or for effect to
prevent, restrict or distort competition, namely by limiting access to the
market or the free exercise of competition by other undertakings.
6.6) Neither we nor any of the members of our joint venture or any of our
subcontractors shall acquire or supply any equipment nor operate in any
sectors under an embargo of the United Nations, the European Union or
France.
6.7) We commit ourselves to comply with and ensure that all of our subcontractors
comply with international environmental and labour standards, consistent with
laws and regulations applicable in the country of implementation of the
contract, including the fundamental conventions of the International Labour
Organisation (ILO) and international environmental treaties,. Moreover, we
shall implement environmental and social risks mitigation measures such as
specified in the environmental and social management plan or, if appropriate,
in the environmental and social impact assessment notice provided by the
Contracting Authority.
7. We, as well as members of our joint venture and our subcontractors authorise AFD to
inspect accounts, records and other documents relating to the procurement and
performance of the Contract and to have them audited by auditors appointed by AFD.
Name:____________________ In the capacity of _____________________

Signature:______________________________
Duly empowered to sign the bid in the name and on behalf of9
____________________
9
In case of joint venture, insert the name of the joint venture. The person who will sign the bid on behalf of
the bidder shall attach a power of attorney from the bidder.
Schedules of Rates and Prices

Schedule No. 1. Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from
Abroad
Item Description Code1 Qty. Unit Price2 Total Price2

CIP
(1) (2) (3) (1) x (3)
TOTAL (to Schedule No. 5. Grand Summary)
Name of Bidder
Signature of Bidder
1
Bidders shall enter a code representing the country of origin of all imported plant and equipment.
2
Specify currency. Create and use as many columns for Unit Price and Total Price as there are currencies.
Country of Origin Declaration Form
Item Description Code Country

Schedule No. 2. Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from

Within the Employer’s Country
Item Description Qty. EXW Unit Price1 EXW Total Price1

(1) (2) (1) x (2)
Name of Bidder
Signature of Bidder
1
Specify currency in accordance with specifications in Bid Data Sheet under ITB 18.1 in Single Stage Bid, or ITB 30.1
in Two Stage Bid.
Schedule No. 3. Design Services
Item Description Qty. Unit Price1 Total Price1

Local Currency Foreign Currency
Portion Portion
(1) (2) (optional) (1) x (2)
Name of Bidder
Signature of Bidder
1
in Two Stage Bid.
Schedule No. 4a. Installation and Other Services

Earth Works and Site Preparation
Foreign Local Foreign Local
Currency Currency
Portion Portion
(1) (2) (3) (1) x (2) (1) x (3)
Name of Bidder
Signature of Bidder
1
in Two Stage Bid.
Schedule No. 4b. Installation and Other Services

Building (civil works) and other Construction Works
Foreign Local Foreign Local
Currency Currency
Portion Portion
(1) (2) (3) (1) x (2) (1) x (3)
Name of Bidder
Signature of Bidder
1
in Two Stage Bid.
Schedule No. 5. Environmental, Social, Health and Safety
ESHS
Item N° Description Unit Amount [specify currency]
Specifications
Clause N°
ESHS 1 Resources allocated to ESHS Clause 4 Lump sum
management
ESHS 2 Drafting and updating the ESHS Clauses 1, 2, Lump sum [Cost ESHS 1 should
documentation, reporting, inspections 3, 5, 6, 7, 9 exclude all or part of the
costs of those tasks]
ESHS 3 Implementation of the Health and Clauses 1, 9, Lump sum [Cost ESHS 1 should
Safety Plan: 20 to 24, 26 to exclude all or part of the
Meetings, health care center, medical 36, 40 costs of those tasks]
check-ups, emergencies and
evacuations, safety protective
equipment, hygiene
ESHS 4 Accommodation, drinking water, Clauses 35,
meals and transportation of staff(*) 38, 39
(*) : The Bidder shall detail the financial
conditions of the supply of [The cost for “site
accommodation, meals and transport to mobilization” should
its staff: exclude all or part of the
 Accommodation Lump sum costs of those tasks]
 Meals Lump sum
 Transport Lump sum
ESHS 5 Training and local recruitment Clauses 8, 37 Lump sum [Cost ESHS 1 should
management costs exclude all or part of the
costs associated to those
tasks]
ESHS 6 Protection of adjacent areas, Clauses 10, Lump sum
prevention of erosion and wastewater 11, 12, 17
management
ESHS 7 Traffic, noise and atmospheric Clauses 13, Lump sum
emissions management, land take 14, 41, 42
ESHS 8 Waste and hazardous products Clauses 15, Lump sum
management 25, 39
ESHS 9 Vegetation clearing and site Clauses 16, Lump sum [The cost for “site
rehabilitation 18, 19 mobilization” should
exclude all or part of the
costs associated to those
tasks]
ESHS
Item N° Description Unit Amount [specify currency]
Specifications
Clause N°
Total for Bill ESHS ______________
ESHS costs are deemed to cover operations on all Sites (as defined in Clause 1.3 of ESHS Specifications)
Interim payment certificates shall include the portion of each ESHS cost amounting to the percentage of the actual
progress achieved in executing the ESHS measures in compliance with the ESHS Specifications and approved by
the Engineer.
Schedule No. 6. Grand Summary
Item Description Total Price1

Foreign Local
Total Schedule No. 1. Plant, and Mandatory Spare

Parts Supplied from Abroad
Total Schedule No. 2. Plant, and Mandatory Spare
Parts Supplied from Within the Employer’s Country
Total Schedule No. 3. Design Services
Total Schedule No. 4. Installation and Other
Services
Total Schedule No. 5. Environmental, Social, Health
and Safety
TOTAL (to Bid Form)
Name of Bidder
Signature of
Bidder
1
Specify currency in accordance with specifications in Bid Data Sheet under ITB 18.1 in Single Stage Bid,
or ITB 30.1 in Two Stage Bid. Create and use as many columns for Foreign Currency requirement as there
are foreign currencies
Schedule No. 7. Recommended Spare Parts
Item Description Qty. Unit Price Total Price

CIF or CIP EXW
(foreign parts) (local parts)
(1) (2) (3) (1) x (2) or(3)
Name of Bidder
Signature of Bidder
Price Adjustment
Price Adjustment Formula
Prices payable to the Contractor, in accordance with the Contract, shall be subject to
adjustment during performance of the Contract to reflect changes in the cost of labor and
material components, in accordance with the following formula:
in which:
P1 = adjustment amount payable to the Contractor
P0 = Contract price (base price)
a = percentage of fixed element in Contract price (a = 15 %)
b = percentage of labor component in Contract price (b = 15 %)
c = percentage of material and equipment and installation component in Contract

price (c = 70 %)
c=
α…ω = numbering of items included in the Schedule of Indices in which the Bidder
indicates the source of materials and equipment indices and the base date indices in its
bid.
L0, L1= labor indices applicable to the appropriate industry in Palestine on the base date
and the date for adjustment, respectively
The Palestinian Central Bureau of Statistics (PCBS) Consumer Price Index is the
reference for labour indices (L0, L1).
M0, M1= material and equipment indices in the country of origin on the base date and the
date for adjustment, respectively. Sub-numbering α..ω refers to the categories of items in
schedule Indices.
Conditions Applicable To Price Adjustment

The Bidder shall indicate the source of materials and equipment indices and the base date
indices in its bid.
Schedule of Indices
Item Source of Indices Used Base Date Indices
α.
β.
..
ω.
These indices should correspond with the items included in the following schedules (refer to
Section IV, Schedules of Rates and Prices):
- Schedule no.1: Plant (Including Mandatory Spare Parts) Supplied from Abroad, with
possibility to split-up if Plant is supplied from different origins;
- Schedule no.2: Plant (Including Mandatory Spare Parts) Supplied from within the
Employer’s country;
- Schedule no.4b: Installation and other services - Building (civil works) and other
construction works
All other Schedules of the Schedules of Rates and Prices are considered as part of the ‘fixed
element’ in the Contract price.
The base date shall be the date thirty (28) days prior to the Bid closing date.
The date of adjustment shall be the mid-point of the period of manufacture or installation of
component or Plant.
The following conditions shall apply:
(a) No price increase will be allowed beyond the original delivery date unless covered by
an extension of time awarded by the Employer under the terms of the Contract. No
price increase will be allowed for periods of delay for which the Contractor is
responsible. The Employer will, however, be entitled to any price decrease occurring
during such periods of delay.
(b) If the currency in which the Contract price, P0, is expressed is different from the
currency of the country of origin of the labour and/or materials indices, a correction
factor will be applied to avoid incorrect adjustments of the Contract price. The
correction factor shall correspond to the ratio of exchange rates between the two
currencies on the base date and the date for adjustment as defined above.
(c) No price adjustment shall be payable on the portion of the Contract price paid to the
Contractor as an advance payment.
FIRST STAGE TECHNICAL PROPOSALS
The first stage Technical Proposal shall comprise
1. Part 1:
Part 1 of the Technical Proposal shall consist of the following sub-parts in the following
order:
A. An Executive Summary of the Technical Section:
A detailed Design, Supply, Install - Workplan including a detailed program
timetable (the “Design, Supply, Install Workplan”) setting out the manner in which
the Bidder proposes to carry out the Design, Supply, Install - services as defined in
the Draft Contract (the “Design, Supply, Install -Services”) and meet the Design,
Supply, Install standards in accordance with the Technical Standards Appendix to
the General Conditions. The Design, Supply, Install Workplan shall be divided into
the following Sections:
A Section entitled “Process Design” which consists of the process calculations and
conceptual drawings, principles of hydraulic design and P&ID’s that are sufficiently
detailed to communicate the Bidders design intent for all components of the
HRWWTP and the site. The design, process calculations and conceptual drawings
shall include the following:
a. A site plan showing the location and footprint of the proposed constructions,
including access roads, pipelines and discharge point(s) and limits to the
operator(s) construction activities;
b. A site plan showing all proposed works:
c. Calculations that demonstrate that Bidder’s plan complies with the Design,
Supply, Install Services. Process calculations need to demonstrate appropriate
system selection and functioning of the HRWWTP, taking into account gradual
increase in loads and flows over time and taking into account variations in
climate and temperatures. Process calculations, to be delivered for water and
sludge handling and discharge of residuals, need to be based upon internationally
accepted principles and need to be self-explaining.
d. Design basedn the process calculations, showing all main components of the
proposed solution and operating philosophy, including redundancy and process
continuity.
e. Calculations demonstrating the amount of energy and chemicals needed for
proper operations of the plant under pre-defined conditions as set out in The
Employers Requirements;
f. Main drawings on preliminary level showing all main components and pipelines;
g. Process flow diagrams and process instrumentation and information diagrams;
h. List of proposed components, sizes, proposed construction materials;
i. List of all main electrical and mechanical equipment to be used, including design
(max.) and nominal capacities;
j. A detailed program and schedule setting out the proposed sequence of works to
be undertaken, including estimated start date, date of finalization and time
allocations for individual components of the work, proposed resources to be
allocated and the identification of all major milestones, including the submission
of detailed design documentation, design development documents and;
k. An itemized list of all principal codes of practice and standards proposed to be
used for the Design, Supply, Install Services.
B. A Section entitled “Plant Equipment, Parts and Components and Operator’s
Equipment” which consists of a list of proposed and selected suppliers of major
Plant Equipment and Operators Equipment (Design, Supply, Install ) and Operator’s
Equipment (Operations) including:
a. fixed plant and equipment
b. mobile plant and equipment
c. materials (consumables/non durable materials) and chemicals
For all items listed in Clause B a - c, the bidders shall provide the Conceptual
design, catalogue cuts or detailed information with respect to manufacturer and
source, model designation, primary specification, and year of manufacture ( as far as
applicable);
C. A detailed Work Plan ( the “Operations Work plan”) setting out the manner in
which the Bidder proposes to carry out the operation and maintenance, under his full
responsibility, of the HRWWTP as set out in the Draft Contract (the “Operations
Services”) and meet the operational technical standards in accordance with the
Technical Standards Appendix to the General Conditions. The Operations Work
plan shall be divided into the following sections:
a. A section entitled “Operations Start-up” which provides the outline contents
and the overview of the Bidder’s proposed plans and programs for the start-up
of the facility and the facility operations and maintenance, including the items
listed in the Bid Data Sheet;
b. A detailed staffing plan (the “Staffing Plan”) setting out the Bidders’ proposed
staffing arrangements for the carrying out of the Design, Supply, Install
Services. The Staffing Plan shall be divided into the following sections:
(1) A section entitled “Summary of Staff Qualifications” which consists of a

summary table setting out:
 For the Key Staff positions, the names of the Bidder’s employees who
will occupy the Key Staff positions; and
 All proposed positions for the Operator’s Personnel and the

qualifications, years of experience and areas of expertise, including a
clear indication of the expertise that the staff will provide consistent
with the requirements set out in the Operator’s Expertise Appendix of
the Draft Contract, for each of the proposed positions; and
 A section, “Curriculum Vitae” which contains the signed curriculum

vitae of each Key Staff, in the format set out in Annex A tot the Bidding
Documents;
For the purpose of C.a.(1), “Key Staff” means those individuals that will fill the
positions listed in the Bid data Sheet; and
(2) A list of all nominated subcontractors and subconsultants and a detailed
description of the services to be carried out or the Plant components and
Equipment to be provided by the nominated subcontractors and
subconsultants. The Bidder shall provide the name and nationality of all
nominated subcontractors and subconsultants. The Bidder shall ensure that
all nominated subcontractors and subconsultants comply with ITB Section
2, and that Bidders reconfirm the subcontractors and sub consultants
nominated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall not exceed the maximum
percentage of subcontracting and sub consulting set out in GC Section 19
of the Draft Contract.
D. A section entitled: Environmental, Social, Health and Safety (ESHS) Methodology
consisting of 2 separate parts:
a. ESHS Methodology related and dedicated to the Design, Supply, Install stage;
b. ESHS Methodology related and dedicated to the Operations and Maintenance
stage
The two ESHS Methodologies submitted shall be in the form of preliminary drafts
of the Worksite Environmental and Social Management Plan (W-ESMP),
Information should be provided on all items of the above mentioned table of
contents.
In order to address the highly sensitive ESHS issues highlighted during the project’s
environmental and social impact assessment, the ESHS Methodologies shall provide
detailed information per Methodology as stipulated in D.a and D.b on the
management of the following items:
 ESHS resources and facilities and ESHS monitoring organization

 Worksites description (base camps, quarries, borrow pits, storage areas)

 Health & Safety on worksites
 Local recruitment and ESHS trainings of local staff (capacity building), ESHS
trainings of subcontractors and local partners (transfer of knowledge)
 Traffic management
 Hazardous products
 Wastewater (effluents)
2. Part 2:
Part 2 of the technical Proposal shall comprise Alternative Technical Proposals in accordance
with BDS 13.1, and consist of the sub-parts in the same order as specified in Part 1, A-D.
SECOND STAGE BID
The Second Stage Bid shall comprise the updated First Stage Technical Proposal comprising
any modifications required to the first stage technical proposal as recorded in the
Memorandum entitled “Changes Required Pursuant to First Stage Evaluation.
Site Organization
Method Statement
Mobilization Schedule
Construction Schedule
Plant
Contractor’s Equipment
Form EQU
1 Bidder must demonstrate that he has sufficient access to and has sufficient
experience to make available the equipment needed for the DSI of the HRWWTP.
A summary of proposed equipment shall be submitted which is needed by the
Bidder for the DSI.
The Bidder shall provide further details of proposed items under 1 and 2 of equipment using
per equipment a separate Form.
Item of equipment
Equipment Name of manufacturer Model and power rating

information
Capacity Year of manufacture
Current Current location

status
Details of current commitments
Source Indicate source of the equipment

 Owned  Rented  Leased  Specially manufactured
Omit the following information for equipment owned by the Bidder.
Owner Name of owner

Address of owner
Telephone Contact name and title

Fax Telex
Agreements Details of rental / lease / manufacture agreements specific to the project
6 Form Functional guarantee
The Bidder shall copy in the left column of the table below, the identification of each functional guarantee required in the
Specification and stated by the Employer in the Bid Form Operation and Maintenance Costs, under G1 of Section III.
Evaluation and Qualification Criteria, Chapter 9, and in the right column, provide the corresponding value for each functional
guarantee of the proposed plant and equipment.
Required Functional Guarantee Value of Functional Guarantee of the

Proposed Plant and Equipment
1.
2.
3.
…
Personnel
Form PER -1
Proposed Personnel
Bidders should provide the names of suitably qualified personnel to meet the specified
requirements stated in Section III. The data on their experience should be supplied using the
Form below for each candidate.
1. Title of position*
Name
Name
Name
Name
*As listed in Section III.

Form PER-2
Resume of Proposed Personnel

Name of Bidder
Position
Personnel Name Date of birth

information
Professional qualifications
Present Name of employer

employment
Address of employer
Telephone Contact (manager / personnel officer)
Fax E-mail
Job title Years with present employer
Summarize professional experience over the last 20 years, in reverse chronological order.
Indicate particular technical and managerial experience relevant to the project.
From To Company / Project / Position / Relevant technical and management experience

Proposed Subcontractors for Major Items of Plant and

Installation Services
A list of major items of Plant and Installation Services is provided below.
The following Subcontractors and/or manufacturers are proposed for carrying out the item of
the facilities indicated. Bidders are free to propose more than one for each item
Major Items of Plant and Proposed Subcontractors/Manufacturers Nationality

Installation Services
Others - Time Schedule

(to be used by Bidder when alternative Time for Completion is invited in ITB 13.2 – Single
Stage Bidding only)
Others – Commercial or contractual aspects of the bidding

documents that the Bidder would like to discuss with the
Employer during clarifications (to be used by Bidder – Two Stage Bidding
only)
Form ELI 1.1
Bidder Information Sheet
Date: ______________________
ICB No.: ___________________
Invitation for Bid No.: ________
Page ________ of _______ pages
1. Bidder’s Legal Name
2. In case of JVA, legal name of each party:
3. Bidder’s actual or intended Country of Registration:
4. Bidder’s Year of Registration:
5. Bidder’s Legal Address in Country of Registration:
6. Bidder’s Authorized Representative Information

Name:
Address:
Telephone/Fax numbers:
Email Address:
7. Attached are copies of original documents of:

 Articles of Incorporation or Registration of firm named in 1, above, in accordance with
ITB Sub-Clauses 4.1 and 4.2.
 In case of JVA, letter of intent to form JVA including a draft agreement, or JVA
agreement, in accordance with ITB Sub-Clauses 4.1 and 11.1(i) Single Stage Bidding or
11.1(g) Two Stage Bidding.
 In case of government owned entity from the Employer’s country, documents establishing
legal and financial autonomy and compliance with the principles of commercial law, in
accordance with ITB Sub-Clause 4.5.
Please note that a written authorization needs to be attached to this sheet as required by ITB
21.2 Single Stage Bidding) or ITB 17.2 Two Stage Bidding
Form ELI 1.2
Party to JVA Information Sheet
Date: ______________________
ICB No.: ___________________
Invitation for Bid No.:_________
Page ________ of_ ______ pages
1. Bidder’s Legal Name:
2. JVA’s Party legal name:
3. JVA’s Party Country of Registration:
4. JVA’s Party Year of Registration:
5. JVA’s Party Legal Address in Country of Registration:
6. JVA’s Party Authorized Representative Information

Name:
Address:
Telephone/Fax numbers:
Email Address:
7. Attached are copies of original documents of:


ITB Sub-Clauses 4.1 and 4.2.
 In case of government owned entity from the Purchaser’s country, documents establishing
legal and financial autonomy and compliance with the principles of commercial law, in
accordance with ITB Sub-Clause 4.5.
Form CON – 2
Historical Contract Non-Performance
In case a prequalification process was conducted this form should be used only if the
information submitted at the time of prequalification requires updating
Bidder’s Legal Name: _______________________ Date: _____________________
JVA Partner Legal Name: _______________________ ___________________
ICB No.: __________________
Page _______ of _______ pages
Non-Performing Contracts in accordance with Section III, Evaluation Criteria
 -performance did not occur during the stipulated period, in accordance with
Sub- Factor 2.2.1 of Section III, Evaluation Criteria
Pending Litigation, in accordance with Section III, Evaluation Criteria
 -Factor 2.2.2 of Section III, Evaluation

Criteria
 Pending litigation in accordance with Sub-Factor 2.2.2 of Section III, Evaluation Criteria,
as indicated below
Year Outcome as Total Contract
Percent of Contract Identification Amount (current
Total value, US$
Assets equivalent)
Contract Identification:
______ ______ Name of Employer: ___________
Address of Employer:
Matter in dispute:
Contract Identification:
______ ______ Name of Employer: ___________
Address of Employer:
Matter in dispute:
Form CCC
Current Contract Commitments / Works in Progress
Bidders and each partner to a JVA should provide information on their current commitments
on all contracts that have been awarded, or for which a letter of intent or acceptance has been
received, or for contracts approaching completion, but for which an unqualified, full
completion certificate has yet to be issued.
Name of contract Employer, Value of Estimated Average

contact outstanding completion date monthly
address/tel/fax work (current invoicing over
US$ equivalent) last six months
(US$/month)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
etc.
Form FIN – 3.1
Financial Situation
Historical Financial Performance
Bidder’s Legal Name: _______________________ Date: _____________________

JVA Partner Legal Name: _______________________ ICB No.: __________________
Page _______ of _______ pages
To be completed by the Bidder and, if JVA, by each partner
Financial Historic information for previous ______ (__) years

information in (US$ equivalent in 000s)
US$
equivalent
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year … Year n Avg. Avg.
Ratio
Information from Balance Sheet

Total Assets
(TA)
Total
Liabilities
(TL)
Net Worth
(NW)
Current Assets
(CA)
Current
Liabilities
(CL)
Information from Income Statement
Total Revenue
(TR)
Profits Before
Taxes (PBT)
 Attached are copies of financial statements (balance sheets, including all related notes,
and income statements) for the years required above complying with the following
conditions:
(a) Must reflect the financial situation of the Bidder or partner to a JVA, and not sister
or parent companies
(b) Historic financial statements must be audited by a certified accountant
(c) Historic financial statements must be complete, including all notes to the financial
statements
(d) Historic financial statements must correspond to accounting periods already
completed and audited (no statements for partial periods shall be requested or
accepted)
Form FIN – 3.2

Average Annual Turnover
Bidder’s Legal Name: ___________________________ Date: _____________________

JVA Partner Legal Name: ____________________________ ICB No.: __________________
Page _______ of _______ pages
Annual turnover data (construction only)

Year Amount and Currency US$ equivalent
_________________________________________ ____________________
_________________________________________ ____________________
_________________________________________ ____________________
_________________________________________ ____________________
_________________________________________ ____________________
*Average _________________________________________ ____________________
Annual
Construction
Turnover
*Average annual turnover calculated as total certified payments received for work in
progress or completed, divided by the number of years specified in Section III, Evaluation
Criteria, Sub-Factor 2.3.2.
Form FIN 3.3

Financial Resources
Specify proposed sources of financing, such as liquid assets, unencumbered real assets, lines of
credit, and other financial means, net of current commitments, available to meet the total
construction cash flow demands of the subject contract or contracts as indicated in Section III,
Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
Source of financing Amount (US$ equivalent)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Form EXP 2.4.1
Experience - General Experience
Bidder’s Legal Name: ____________________________ Date: _____________________

JVA Partner Legal Name: ____________________________ICB No.: __________________
Page _______ of _______ pages
Starting Ending
Contract Identification Role of
Month / Month /
Years Bidder
Year Year
*
Contract name:
______ ______ Brief Description of the Works performed by the _________
Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
Contract name:
Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
Contract name:
Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
Contract name:
Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
Contract name:
Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
Contract name:
Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
*List calendar year for years with contracts with at least nine (9) months activity per year
starting with the earliest year
Form EXP – 2.4.2(a)

Specific Experience

JVA Partner Legal Name: _________________________ ICB No.: __________________
Page _______ of _______ pages
Similar Contract Number: ___ of ___ Information

required.
Contract Identification _______________________________________
Award date _______________________________________
Completion date _______________________________________
Role in Contract
  
Contractor Management Subcontractor
Contractor
Total contract amount __________________________ US$_______

__ ___
If partner in a JVA or subcontractor,
specify participation of total contract __________% _____________ US$_______
amount
Employer’s Name: _______________________________________
Address: _______________________________________
_______________________________________
Telephone/fax number: _______________________________________
E-mail: _______________________________________
Form EXP – 2.4.2(a) (cont.)

Specific Experience (cont.)
Bidder’s Legal Name: ___________________________ Page _______ of _______ pages

JVA Partner Legal Name: ___________________________
Similar Contract No. __[insert specific Information

number] of [total number of contracts]
___ required
Description of the similarity in
accordance with Sub-Factor 2.4.2a) of
Section III:
Amount _________________________________
Physical size _________________________________
Complexity _________________________________
Methods/Technology _________________________________
Physical Production Rate _________________________________

Form EXP – 2.4.2(b)

Specific Experience in Key Activities

JVA Partner Legal Name: _________________________ ICB No.: __________________
Subcontractor’s Legal Name: ______________ Page _______ of _______ pages
Information
Contract Identification _______________________________________
Award date _______________________________________
Completion date _______________________________________
Role in Contract
  
Contractor Management Subcontractor
Contractor
Total contract amount _________________________ US$________

If partner in a JVA or subcontractor,
specify participation of total contract __________% _____________ US$________
amount
Employer’s Name: _______________________________________
Address: _______________________________________
_______________________________________
Telephone/fax number: _______________________________________
E-mail: _______________________________________
Form EXP – 2.4.2 (b)(cont.)

Specific Experience in Key Activities (cont.)
Bidder’s Legal Name: ___________________________ Page _______ of _______ pages

JVA Partner Legal Name: ___________________________
Subcontractor’s Legal Name: __________________________
Information
Description of the key activities in accordance with
Sub-Factor 2.4.2b) of Section III:
a) The similarity for the DSI works shall be based

upon the physical size, complexity; site
circumstances, methods/technology or other
characteristics (particularly design and build
approach, and footprint as described in Section VI,
Employer’s Requirements. Applicant must
specifically demonstrate its Design capacity in
biological treatment, excavation, scada, sludge
treatment.
b) Experience in complying with environmental,
social, health and safety requirements, as required, in
at least one project of similar size, nature and
complexity in the last 6 years.
c) Bidders need to demonstrate specific experience in
operation, maintenance and management of waste
water treatment plants in order to qualify for this
project.
Bidder is required to demonstrate experience with
- operating, maintaining and managing of
- at least two waste water plants each with
comparable physical size, capacity, complexity;
site circumstances, methods/technology etc
- under his full responsibility for
- at least 365 successive calendar days for each
plant in the last 5 years
Form CER
Quality Management / Environmental, Social, Health and Safety
(ESHS) Certification
Bidder’s Legal Name: ___________________________________ Date: __________

Bidder’s JV Member name: ______________________________ ICB No.: _____________
DESCRIPTION INFORMATION
Identification of the certificate _______________ [insert full name of the
certificate]
First award date ________________ [insert day, month, year of first
certificate award]
Last update of the certificate __________ [insert day, month, year of latest
renewal, if any]
Issuers Name _______________ [insert full name]
Address _______________ [insert street / number / town or

city / country]
Telephone/fax number _______________ [insert phone/fax no., incl.
country & city area codes]
E-mail _______________ [insert e-mail address, if
available]
Compliance with international The certificate is [ISO 9001, ISO 14001, OHSAS
standards 18001] [select as appropriate]
□ Yes / □ No
If no, proof of conformity with ISO The Bidder shall provide a conformity assessment
standards by the Bidder of its certificate by an internationally recognized
Accredited Certification Body
The Bidder shall fill this Form for each Certification required under sub criteria 5.1 of
Section III – Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
Form ESHS
Environmental, Social, Health and Safety (ESHS) Documentation
Bidder’s Legal Name: ________________________________________ Date: __________

The Bidder shall demonstrate the existence of the following in-house policies and
procedures.
DESCRIPTION SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION
REQUIRED IN ENGLISH (ORIGINAL OR
TRANSLATION)
1 Health & Safety Policy Policy document or the index of the health &
safety manual or other relevant documents
acceptable to the Employer.
2 Environmental Management Policy Policy document or the index of the
Environmental Management manual or other
relevant documents acceptable to the Employer
3 Declaration of compliance with ILO The Bidder certifies (by ticking explicitly)
core labour standards10 in operations complying with the following core labour
standards
f Association
4 Reviews, inspections and audits Provide detailed samples of such reviews or

related to ESHS issues within the audits which were carried out during the past 5
company and especially on years
construction sites
5 Internal and external integration and Provide information on:
enforcement policy
- how the Bidder ensures that subcontractors,
suppliers or temporary workforce a) are
aware of and b) comply with ESHS
requirements
- nature and content of the ESHS trainings
10
See relevant ILO conventions C087, C098, C029, C105, C100, C111, C138, C182; more detailed
information are available at www.ilo.org/ilolex/english/docs/declworld.htm.
The Bidder shall demonstrate the existence of the following in-house policies and
procedures.
DESCRIPTION SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION
REQUIRED IN ENGLISH (ORIGINAL OR
TRANSLATION)
provided to employees
6 Procedures on main ESHS issues Unless information is already provided in policy
documents submitted under the requirements of
Articles 1 and 2 above, provide in-house
procedures for managing the following E&S
issues, acceptable to the Employer:
[Delete items if not applicable and add items
specific to the works and resulting from the
project’s ESMP if any – refer to the “User Guide
for including Environmental and Social (E&S)
Criteria” located at the start of this SBD of
Works]
a) Wastewater effluents
b) Air emissions, noise and traffic
c) Waste
d) Erosion and sedimentation
e) Site rehabilitation and revegetation
f) Hazardous products
g) Training and recruitment
h) Safety on construction sites
i) First aid and medical evacuation for staff
j) Control of infectious and communicable
diseases (HIV/AIDS, malaria…)
Form EXP - ESHS

Environmental, Social, Health and Safety (ESHS) Experience
Bidder’s Legal Name: ________________________________________ Date: __________

Page __________________of ________________pages
Similar Contract No. _____ [insert

specific number] of [total number of Information
contracts] ______ required
Contract Identification _______________________ [insert contract name
and number, if applicable]
Short Project Description (main scope and key ______________________ [insert short project
values of project) description]
Award date _____________________ [insert day, month, year]
Completion date _____________________ [insert day, month, year]
Role in Contract
[check the appropriate box] Contractor Management Subcontractor
Contractor
Total Contract Amount [insert total [insert total
contract amount contract amount
in local in US$
currency] equivalent]
_____________ _____________
If party in a JV or subcontractor, specify [insert a [insert total [insert total
participation of total contract amount percentage contract amount contract amount
amount] in local in US$
__________% currency] equivalent]
____________ _____________
Employer’s name: _____________________ [insert full name]
Address: _____________________ [insert street / number /
town or city / country]
Telephone/fax numbers : ____________________ [insert phone/fax no., incl.
country and city area codes]
E-mail: ____________________ [insert e-mail address, if
available]
Similar Contract No. _____ [insert

specific number] of [total number of Information
contracts] ______ required
Description of the ESHS challenges and measures
implemented under the contract:
a) ESHS Challenge Insert description
b) ESHS Risk Assessment Level Insert classification of risk assessment as per

development bank classification if applicable
c) ESHS implemented measures (as per Provide ESHS final implementation report acceptable
sub-criteria 5.3 of Section III – Evaluation to the Employer
and Qualification Criteria)
d) ESHS Knowhow Transfer or ESHS Local Provide evidence of successful:

Staff Capacity Building (as per sub-criteria - ESHS knowhow transfer to local partners or
5.4 of Section III – Evaluation and subcontractors or
Qualification Criteria) - ESHS capacity building to local staff under the
contract
Form of Bid Security (Bank Guarantee)

__________________________
Beneficiary: __________________________
Date: __________________________
BID GUARANTEE No.: __________________________
We have been informed that __________________________ (hereinafter called “the
Bidder”) has submitted to you its bid dated ___________ (hereinafter called “the Bid”) for
the execution of ________________ under Invitation for Bids No. ___________ (“the
IFB”).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to your conditions, bids must be supported by a
bid guarantee.
At the request of the Bidder, we ____________________ hereby irrevocably undertake to
pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of ___________
(____________) upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a written
statement stating that the Bidder is in breach of its obligation(s) under the bid conditions,
because the Bidder:
(a) has withdrawn its Bid during the period of bid validity specified by the
Bidder in the Form of Bid; or
(b) having been notified of the acceptance of its Bid by the Employer during
the period of bid validity, (i) fails or refuses to execute the Contract
Form, if required, or (ii) fails or refuses to furnish the performance
security, in accordance with the ITB.
This guarantee will expire: (a) if the Bidder is the successful Bidder, upon our receipt of
copies of the contract signed by the Bidder and the performance security issued to you upon
the instruction of the Bidder; and (b) if the Bidder is not the successful Bidder, upon the
earlier of (i) our receipt of a copy your notification to the Bidder of the name of the
successful Bidder; or (ii) twenty-eight days after the expiration of the Bidder’s bid.
Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at the
office on or before that date.
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication No.
478.
_____________________________
[signature(s)]
Form of Bid Security (Bid Bond)

BOND NO. ______________________
BY THIS BOND _____________ as Principal (hereinafter called “the Principal”), and
___________________, authorized to transact business in ________________, as Surety
(hereinafter called “the Surety”), are held and firmly bound unto _________________ as
Obligee (hereinafter called “the Employer”) in the sum of ____________11 (__________),
for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we, the said Principal and Surety,
bind ourselves, our successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS the Principal has submitted a written Bid to the Employer dated the ___ day of
______, 20__, for the construction of _____________ (hereinafter called the “Bid”).
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the
Principal:
(a) withdraws its Bid during the period of bid validity specified in the Form of Bid;
or
(b) having been notified of the acceptance of its Bid by the Employer during the
period of Bid validity; (i) fails or refuses to execute the Contract Form, if
required; or (ii) fails or refuses to furnish the Performance Security in
accordance with the Instructions to Bidders;
then the Surety undertakes to immediately pay to the Employer up to the above amount upon
receipt of the Employer’s first written demand, without the Employer having to substantiate
its demand, provided that in its demand the Employer shall state that the demand arises from
the occurrence of any of the above events, specifying which event(s) has occurred.
The Surety hereby agrees that its obligation will remain in full force and effect up to and
including the date 28 days after the date of expiration of the Bid validity as stated in the
Invitation to Bid or extended by the Employer at any time prior to this date, notice of which
extension(s) to the Surety being hereby waived.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have caused these presents to be
executed in their respective names this ____ day of ____________ 20__.
Principal: _______________________ Surety: _____________________________
Corporate Seal (where appropriate)
_______________________________ ____________________________________
(Signature) (Signature)
(Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)
11
The amount of the Bond shall be denominated in the currency of the Employer’s country or the equivalent
amount in a freely convertible currency.
Section V. Eligibility Criteria, Social and

Environmental Responsibility, and Corruption
Eligibility in AFD-Financed Procurement
Interested bidders (including sub-contractors or suppliers) are advised that AFD’s decision to
finance its respective part of a contract will be conditional on meeting AFD’s legal financing
requirements relating to EU and French financial and commercial sanctions as set forth in the
table below [1]:
EU financial sanctions list http://eeas.europa.eu/cfsp/sanctions/consol-list_en.htm

French financial sanctions http://www.tresor.economie.gouv.fr/4248_Dispositif-
list National-de-Gel-Terroriste
EU commercial sanctions http://eeas.europa.eu/cfsp/sanctions/docs/measures_en.pdf
[1]
Bidders shall take note that the address of those links may be amended from time to time
PART 2 –Employer’s
Requirements
2-6-61
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements

2-6-62 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
1 Introduction
1.1 Project Framework and Project Objective
The City of Hebron in the south eastern section of the West Bank/Palestine is currently
served by a combined sewer system which provides sewer services to some 82% of the city.
Currently, there is no wastewater treatment plant at the end of the sewer system and
therefore, most of the sewage intercepted by the sewers runs untreated along Wadi As-
Sameen until it reaches the green line and enters Israel at Shokeit. Here it is treated by the
Israelis.
This flow of untreated wastes for about 40km along the Wadi, causes damage to the eastern
aquifer and the communities which border the Wadi along the way. This was identified as a
serious issue as far back as the 1970s. In order to address this outstanding issue within the
Hebron Governorate, the Palestinian Authority has requested support from the donor
community for this project - the Hebron Governorate Regional Wastewater Management
Project, which would be financed by a consortium of multilateral and bilateral partners
including the l’agence française de développement (afd), the European Union and the World
Bank. As part of this project, the Design Build Contractor is to design and construct the
Hebron Regional Wastewater Treatment Plant (HRWWTP) to treat the flows identified for
the area and meet the effluent limit stipulated for in the contract.
The contractor will undertake all of the works required for fully functional units which meet
the Employers’ requirements, specifications and minimum technical requirements stipulated
in these documents within the contract.
1.2 Documents Forming the Employer’s Requirements

The Employer’s Requirements comprise the following:
Employer’s Requirements – Design, Supply, Installation (section VI)

Employers Requirements – ESHS (section VI)
Employer’s Requirements – Annex 1 – Civil Works
Employer’s Requirements - Annex 2 Mechanical Works
Employer’s Requirements - Annex 3 Electrical works
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-63
2 Scope of Work
2.1 General
The work comprises, but is not limited to, the complete detailed design, preparation of
working drawings, manufacture, temporary erection at the manufacturers or his sub-
contractors works, supply, shipping, construction, commissioning, testing, training and
guarantee the Works during the Defects Notification Period of construction of the Hebron
Regional Wastewater Treatment Plant (HRWWTP) as described in the Employer’s
Requirements.
Contractor shall guarantee the quality and soundness of the Works, which shall be in
accordance with all demands that can be made to them. All machines and parts shall meet the
highest demands, which can be made to them by the latest technical standards in case of
choice of materials, constructions, finishing and good performance.
2.2 Responsibility for information

The Tenderer will be deemed to have fully informed and satisfied himself, by his own
independent observations, inquiries, site visits and investigation of local site conditions as
required to prepare his Tender.
The EMPLOYER and the Project Manager will bear no responsibility whatsoever for the
completeness and accuracy of any information made available to Tenders.
Tenderers are expected to conduct their own research on all important matters related to the
Project and their Offer. Any negligence or failure on the part of the Tenderer to obtain
reliable information on the site or elsewhere concerning any matter affecting the Contract
Agreement shall not relief the selected Contractor from any of his obligations or liability
arising from the Contract Agreement.
2.3 Background information

2.3.1 Capacity of the treatment plant
The HRWWTP has to be able to receive, treat and discharge the wastewater with
composition and characteristics, including the expected variations, as indicated in the tables
below.
Table 1 shows the projected growth of connected population and of the daily wastewater
flow for the period 2015 up to 2027. The table shows two stages: stage 1, the presently
connected Hebron city with autonomous growth of loads and flows, and stage 2 in which
additional parts of Hebron and of surrounding villages will be connected.
Table 1 Projected growth of average (on yearly basis) loads and flows for two development
stages up to the year 2027.
Year 2015 2020 2025 2027
connected population (#)
stage 1 - Hebron city 169.797 193.991 216.820 225.580
stage 2 - including extended network 184.232 264.905 375.138 455.500
waste water flow (m³/d)
stage 1 - Hebron city 11.478 13.114 14.657 15.250
stage 2 - including extended network 12.837 21.214 32.628 43.500
This project aims at principally designing for the stage 1 facilities, Hebron City 2027
(225,580 people equivalents or 15,250 m³/day on an average yearly basis) but must allow for
possible expansion of the plant in the future to meet
The total stage 2 capacity for 2027 (455,500 people equivalents or 43,500 m³/day).
Only the stage 1 HRWWTP is part of this contract. Nevertheless, the stage 1 design has to
allow for and demonstrate possible future expansion to the full stage 2 capacity by logical
spatial reservations.
The layout of facilities on site for this stage project has therefore taken into
consideration the long term plans for future construction at this location and proposed
stage 1 facilities have been suitably located so that future works may be constructed
without disruption of existing systems.
The main loads and flows to the HRWWTP consists of municipal wastewater. Industrial
wastewater is to be diverted and treated separately on-site (which is not part of this contract).
However there maybe circumstances where wastewater from the following sources may
unintentionally enter system:
- Stone cutting residual
- Olive mill wastewater – usually only in the months of October – December
- Wastes from tanneries.
It may be possible that these and other discharges inhibit the nitrification process. It is
therefore required to allow in the design for “early warning” monitoring equipment and
allowances to accommodate such inhibition. It is expected that such inhibition can be up to

15 % of normal nitrification rates.
Is is strongly suggested to consider incorporating any or all of the following: an EQ tank,

polymer addition for enhanced sedimentation of the cutting stone residual, increasing the
reactor volume for additional buffering, etc. The contractor in his proposal must relate to this
issue.
Civil works for the following main elements of the treatment plant will, under this contract,
be constructed for full capacity (final stage 2 capacity - 2027)
- Lifting station building and raising main
- Screening
- Grit chamber
- Head works and flow divider
- Any connecting pipe works that will eventually convey the total or combined water flows
in the ultimate situation
- Effluent discharge channels or pipes
- Main power cables
- Housing and buildings that accommodate mechanical thickening and of dewatering
equipment
- Reservations for future electrical cabinets and reservations in the SCADA system/blind
panel.
These items pertain to civil works and structures only. Mechanical and electrical equipment
that is not required for plant operation according to stage 1 capacity, are not to be purchased
and/or delivered and/or installed under this contract.
Furthermore the site has to be graded and prepared as to accommodate the total 2027
capacity.
2.3.2 Flows and loads
The flows vary, resulting in an average day, peak dry weather flow and the peak wet weather
flows for the stage 1 final design year 2027 are presented in table 2.
Table 2 Wastewater flow Projections

Design Year 2027
Parameter Unit Stage 1 Project
Average daily flow m3/d 15,250
Average hourly flow m3/h 635
Diurnal peaking factor - 2.50

Design Year 2027
Parameter Unit Stage 1 Project
Diurnal peak flow m3/h 1,585
Storm water peaking - 1.50

factor
Storm water flow m3/h 2,375
Per capita wastewater pollutant loads are presented in table 3.
Table 3. Design Wastewater Pollutant Unit Loads

TSS COD BOD TN TP COD/BOD
g/c.d 60 140 60 10.8 1.9 2.3
design values
mg/l 888 2.070 888 160 28.1
The pollutant loads for process design shall be calculated by multiplying the average flow
15,250 m3/day by the design concentrations (as detailed in table3) with a 10% peak factor.
2.3.3 Ambient conditions
Temperatures of the wastewater may vary from 13 degrees in winter to 30 degrees in summer
period, which can be assumed as design temperatures. The HRWWTP has to function
effectively in this temperature range.
2.3.4 Effluent requirements
The effluent of HRWWTP has to fulfil the following monthly average values:
parameter limit type of sampling
Biological Oxygen Demand 20 mg/l 8 composite 24 h flow

(BOD5) proportional samples
Total Suspended Solids (TSS) 30 mg/l 8 composite 24 h flow

proportional samples
Total Nitrogen (TN, as 50 mg/l 4 composite 24 h flow

nitrogen) proportional samples
Ammonia as Nitrogen 15 mg/l 4 composite 24 h flow

Organic nitrogen 5 mg/l 4 composite 24 h flow

Total Phosphours TP 10 mg/l
4 composite 24 h flow
Faecal E-coli bacteria 200 MPN/100 ml 4 composite 24 h flow

pH 6 to 9
In addition, if nitrification occurs during the biological aeration treatment, de-nitrification

shall be achieved in the biological reactors prior the secondary clarifiers in order to obtain
final effluent quality having a maximum concentration of nitrates of no more than 8 mg/l as
N.
Adequate design of suspended solids removal is required to meet the effluent standards for
BOD5, COD and TSS. Removal of TN requires biological nitrification and denitrification.
Disinfection shall be needed to meet the required coli-count.
It is foreseen that in future more stringent effluent requirements will be applied, focusing at
nitrogen and phosphorus effluent standards even below 10 mg/l TN and 5 mg/l respectively.
In any case the process selection for BNR removal shall be based on biological treatment.
The process design should demonstrate that the present investments can be converted to
process stages that form part of a future HRWWTP fit for enhanced nutrient removal.
2.3.5 Sludge requirements
The dewatered sludge that is produced in the HRWWTP will be trucked away and disposed
of in the Halmyra Landfill on a distance of about 36 km from the HRWWTP site. This
requires that all sludge is stabilized and dewatered to a dry solid content of at least 20%
before it leaves the site of HRWWTP.
The digested sludge shall be considered stable if in accordance with the following:
- Volatile solids reduction of the sludge in the digesters shall not be less than 38%
- In case of aerobic digestion the oxygen requirements of the digested solids in the sludge
shall be no more than 2.0 mg/hr per gram of volatile solids at 20ºC.
2.3.6 Construction Site
The available site is located on an oxbow of Wadi as-Sameen downstream of Hebron as

shown on Figure 1. The Wadi actually runs through the centre of the plant site, limiting the
options for plant construction and generally making construction difficult. The present trunk
sewer is extended to the boundary of the dedicated site. This contract will take the trunk
sewer from the site boundary to the intake of the wastewater treatment plant.
The difference in elevation between the high and low spots on the site is more than 40m as
shown on Figure 1. Significant land levelling and other measures will be required before the
site can be made suitable for plant construction. When developing the site design, the
contractor shall take into account 1 to 100 year flash flood. The contractor shall provide
detailed calculation and methods for allowing safe operational discharge
An access road is recently completed. A 1800 kVA power supply has been planned to be
adjacent to the access road. The detailed design and construction of the power line shall part
of this contract. In addition a water supply pipeline has been constructed and is also
adjacent to the access road. The contractor will include in his bid connecting this water
pipeline to the wastewater treatment plant facilities.
Fig. 1-1 Proposed HRWWTP Plant site (31º28’43.78N; 35º6’14.44 E)

2.4 Applicable Wastewater Treatment Concept

In the preparation stage of the project, alternative wastewater treatment options for the
HRWWTP were reviewed and two reference designs were analyzed. The report, which
summarizes the two conceptual designs, is provided for information purposes to Bidders as
an Annex of this Employers Requirements. It is explicitly stated that this report is not part of
the formal contract documents.
Under this Design, Build and Install (DSI) contract, Bidders are requested to propose their
own solutions for the HRWWTP, provided that they meet the conditions set out in the
bidding document. Processes and technologies elaborated in the conceptual design are just
for reference and are not intended to prescribe any specific technologies, techniques and/or
equipment to be utilised by the contractor.
2.5 Environmental Requirements

Providing wastewater collection and treatment will significantly improve the quality of life
and reduce contamination of surface and groundwater sources in the Hebron area including
the Eastern aquifer. However, the construction of the wastewater treatment systems may
temporarily affect the existing environmental and natural settings. Engineered controls,
including spill control and containment measures, will be designed and implemented to
minimize adverse impacts to land, wadis, and aquifers from construction equipment. Public
safety has to be ensured through the implementation of health and safety measures. All
efforts will be made to coordinate proposed activities on public and private land.
Chapter 5 of this document details the required compliance with the ESCHIA that is to be
followed.
2.6 Operations and maintenance

Operations and Maintenance of HRWWTP, starting after final acceptance of the constructed
plant, will covered under a separate O&M contract. Bidders are referred to the HRWWTP
bidding documents for an explanation of the relationship between the DSI and the O&M
contracts.
2.7 Quality Standard equipment and materials

All the equipment and materials provided by the Contractor shall be new, modern, of good
quality, faultless, with long service span and low maintenance.
2.8 Facility Guarantee

The Contractor must ensure the Guarantee period of 2 years commencing from the date of
signing of the Final Acceptance Certificate, pursuant to PC Sub-Clause 25.3. During the
guarantee period, the Contractor shall maintain the equipment and carry out at least two
overall inspections. During the guarantee period, in case of failure of any equipment or poor
manufacturing, the Contractor shall be responsible for repairing and recovering smooth
operation without delay, once he has been informed. If the Contractor fails to recover
operation within 14 days, the Employer reserves the right to dispose by himself. The
expenses shall be compensated by the Contractor with no rejection.
The Employer reserves the right to reject the equipment or components found to be defect or
not conforming to the Contract requirements. The equipment or components shall be repaired
or replaced by the Contractor. The employer shall not afford any additional expenses thereof.
2.9 Quality Assurance and Quality Control

The Contractor shall establish and operate a Project Quality System to verify that his work is
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract.
Contractor shall prepare a list of quality plans related to different parts of the Works in which
the process of Quality Control and Quality Assurance is described. The written Control
Quality Plan(s) shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative / Project Manager before
any works can start that is covered by the quality control plan. The plan should include
sampling and testing frequencies and the use of control charts to monitor production and
processes.
The Contractor is responsible for all process and product control, sampling and testing and
shall prepare reports with the results of this sampling and testing and submit these to the
Employer.
At all times the Employer shall have access to Site, the sampling, testing, construction and
processes and to all subsequent reports to ensure that work conforms to the contract
requirements.
3 Design and engineering aspects
The Tender Drawings and Proposals shall be those submitted by the Tenderer with his
Tender, and shall comprise the following:
3.1 Design requirements
3.1.1 Drawings
- General Site Layouts

- process drawings / diagrams
- P&I diagrams
- Electrical single line diagrams
- Automation and control (SCADA) general overview and diagram
- general arrangement drawings of all main structures
- Layout (including proposals for future extension to stage 2
- Hydraulic profile through the plant
- Layout of site services
- special details of main structures
- architectural drawings of all main buildings
- site Landscaping drawings.
Note: The above details need to include all the works described in the tender documents
3.1.2 Design Proposals
Written proposals of the basis and principles of the design of the Works, with particular
regard to the treatment principles, hydraulics and structural design, and to the standards and
codes of practice.
A detailed description of the offered equipment including material specification shall be

given as part of the Technical Proposal.
Proven process technologies have to be applied with references in similar climate and
demographic conditions as Hebron. Requirements for contractors references are a minimum
capacity of 250.000 PE and contain secondary treatment of domestic or combined
domestic/industrial waste water.
For the treatment of sludge proven technologies have to be applied with references in similar
conditions as Hebron and on a scale with a minimum of 50% of the HRWWTP. References
have to be provided proving effectiveness of the proposed technologies.
Tenderers shall prepare design documentation of sufficient detail, as a basis for stage 1
evaluation and for issuing the stage 2 offer and to allow a proper evaluation of the submitted
bid. The design documentation shall contain but is not limited to:
Design report containing:
a) Description of process design
b) Description of individual process elements
c) Process design calculations, including starting points used, demonstrating
appropriateness of the design for meeting the effluent standards12;
d) Calculations demonstrating the energy consumption of the treatment plant for the
following eight situations:
Load/flow stage 1 year 2020; temperatures of 13C and 30C; dry weather and rain
weather flow
Load/flow stage 1 year 2027; temperatures of 13C and 30C; dry weather and rain
weather flow
e) Hydraulic calculations
f) Connecting Sewer hydraulic and structural design
g) Schedule of plant and equipment cross-referenced to P&I diagram with details of
manufacturer, model, and power rating.
h) Operational conditions / requirements
The Contractor shall design in detail the construction of the civil, mechanical, electrical
installations and the control and monitoring system of the treatment plant in accordance with
the Employer’s Requirements. The installations shall be designed in such a way that they
operate automatically to the extent described in the Employer’s Requirements and with a
minimum of power and chemicals consumption. Preparation of detailed design drawings and
design calculations is part of Contractors’ obligations.
The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying any design parameters given in this
document and for securing all approvals of his designs required by the relevant Palestinian
authorities. The detailed design shall be undertaken using current best practice and shall
comply with the Employer's Requirements, current Palestinian design and construction
regulations and all Construction Standards currently in force in Palestine.
All Plant and Materials supplied shall be designed to meet the needs for satisfactory
operation under all possible working conditions like pressure, temperature, degree of
wetness, friction, load, vibration, intensity of current etc., including variations in the ambient
temperature.
The philosophy of the design shall be simplicity, energy efficiency, robustness and reliability
such that the equipment will give long trouble-free service with low maintenance costs.
Particular attention should be paid to ease of access to facilitate inspection, cleaning,
maintenance and repair in a safe environment to ensure satisfactory operation under all
service conditions.
12
Models to be used to demonstrate appropriate design are ASM2d or ASM3 for activated sludge, method vd
Emde for aeration requirements, Chen & Hashimoto for sludge digestion
3.1.3 Specific requirements
Wastewater characteristics
The influent may contain high concentrations of coarse material, fibres & cloths, grease, sand
and grit and other components. The treatment system must be sufficiently robust and flexible
to resist the impact of these components and must be able to remove them from the
wastewater.
Gravity flow
After initial pumping, the wastewater should flow through the entire HRWWTP under
gravity. If post treatment is applied, a lifting station may be used for this purpose.
Internal flows like return sludge and flows related to sludge treatment may be pumped.
By-passes
In case by-pass(es) are applied, these should function under gravity. All by-passes of relevant
objects should be closed pipes, except the by-pass of the grit chamber and screens.
All by-passes can be opened or closed.
A by-pass has to be connected to the next (logical) process step.
Construction site
HRWWTP has to be constructed within the limits indicated in figure 1-1. The function of the
Wadi has to be kept intact under all circumstances and the contractor shall take necessary
actions are measures required to ensure this.
Energy consumption
The net energy consumption of the HRWWTP for wastewater and sludge treatment shall be
not more than 30 kWh per 55 kg Total Oxygen Demand (TOD) removed from the
wastewater.
TOD is measured as: BOD mass removed + 4,57 x NKjeldahl mass removed.
Seismology
The HRWWTP site is located in a, from seismic point of view, relative active site with a
Peak Ground Acceleration Factor of Z=0,075 to Z=0,3 on rocks. The project area has a PGA
factor of Z=0,15 according to the Uniform Building Code. Design and construction of the
HRWWTP has to mitigate any adverse effects that may be caused by earthquakes to this
extend.
3.2 Plant, Equipment and Material Selection

3.2.1 General
All plant, equipment and materials to be incorporated in the Works shall be new brand and
recently manufactured, unused products of reputable, experienced manufacturers. The plant
and materials shall be of industrial grade, standard construction, of sturdy design and
manufacture. Materials, equipment and plant shall be designed for long life and shall be
suitable for continuous 24 hours per day operation in strong sewage environment.
With the design of the installation, the Contractor shall strive for uniformity of manufactures,
proportions and materials of therefore qualified parts, such to be judged by The Project
Manager. Similar items in the project shall be the products of the same manufacturer. All
equipment performing similar duties shall be of a single type and fully interchangeable in
order to limit the stock of spare parts required.
Due to the minimal number of local supplier agencies of unique and specific equipment and
plants for wastewater treatment plants in Palestine, the contractors are to include in their bid
all necessary site visits by the international supplier’ s representatives to be implemented at
the various stages of construction and commissioning, as deemed necessary by the
Contractor, the supplier or the Project Manager.
All systems and component(s) required to achieve the desired system operation and specified
output and for continuous safe, efficient and cost-effective system operation shall be
provided whether specified or not in this document.
In addition, particular attention shall be given to the following aspects:

- the local climatic conditions;
- durability of the plant and the minimum required design life;
- flexibility in dealing with varying flow and load regimes;
- ease of operating and maintaining the plant and facilities;
- configuration of the treatment units to allow individual items of plant to be taken out of
operation for maintenance or repair;
- future expansion of the plant to deal with increased flows considering that additional areas
for extension are limited to the existing site boundaries;
- safety considerations for the construction of the plant;
- safety considerations for the operation and maintenance of the plant.
The design shall fully comply with the overall process needs, the contractual design flow
rates, design capacities, design criteria, and technical specifications. The design shall result in
a fully operational and energy efficient system.
3.2.2 Substitutions
Where brand names or manufacturers of the equipment are mentioned this information is
meant to describe a functional quality level. The Contractor is free to make another choice
under the explicit restriction that the quality of the equipment and the performances are at
least equivalent., subject to the Project Manager’s concurrence.
The Contractor is specifically cautioned to the following minimum considerations that will
be reviewed by the Project Manager in case of any necessary substitutions:
- full conformity with architectural and engineering design criteria, design concepts and
performance requirements
- physical dimension requirements to satisfy the space limitations shown on the Drawings
- interchangeability of parts and components
- accessibility for preventive maintenance and possible removal and replacement
- compatibility with other materials, assemblies and components
- full compliance with all applicable test requirements
- full compliance with guarantee requirements.
The burden of submitting adequate information to the Project Manager to prove equality of
substituted materials, items of plant or assemblies of construction shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor. The acceptance of such shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility under this Contract and the various guarantees provided therein.
3.2.3 Materials
Components incorporated in the Plant shall be selected to minimise maintenance costs. As a

minimum requirement, items of Plant shall incorporate those features normally associated
with the Plant as detailed in manufacturer's specifications and literature, unless specifically
excluded.
Plant, equipment and Materials to be provided by the Contractor and incorporated in the
Works shall be new brand and recently manufactured, unused, and of the most recent or
current design and specification, and shall incorporate all recent improvements in design and
materials unless provided for otherwise in the Contract.
Plant, equipment and Materials to be incorporated in the Works shall be approved by an

internationally recognised body for use in connection with wastewater. Particular attention
shall be paid to the selection of Materials used to convey chemical solutions to ensure that no
material corrosion will take place.
The Contractor shall include a copy of the technical specification extracted from the
manufacturer's technical literature for all offered Plant, equipment and Materials.
The Contractor shall provide supports, anchors, plinths, grouting, sealants and fixings
associated with the installation of Plant, Equipment and Materials associated with this
Contract and full compliance with the plant, equipment and materials manufacturers.
Gaskets, seals and lubricants required for pipes, fittings and appurtenances shall be supplied
with the specified pipes, fittings and appurtenances all from the same producer or/and
approved supplier by the producer.
The materials subsequently supplied shall conform to the quality of samples.

Materials and components shall be stored in such a manner as to preserve their quality and
condition to the standards required by the Contract in full compliance with the suppliers
instruction.
Materials and components shall be handled in such a manner as to avoid any damage or
contamination, and in accordance with all applicable recommendations of the manufacturer.
Contact between dissimilar materials where galvanic reaction could occur shall not be
allowed.
Unless otherwise described in the Contract the use, installation, application or fixing of
materials and components shall be in accordance with all applicable recommendations of the
manufacturer. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall make use of any technical advisory
services offered by manufacturers.
The Contractor shall supply all Plant, Equipment and Materials, unless directed otherwise by
the Project Manager.
3.3 Noise and Vibration

With the envisaged maximum number of items of Plant running 'on-load' the sound pressure
outside an envelope of 1m radius from any item of Plant shall not exceed 85 dB(A). Where
the noise cannot be reduced to a level complying with this requirement, acoustic enclosures
shall be provided. Where the Plant is installed in a separate room/enclosure, the noise level
shall not exceed 80 dB(A) outside the room/enclosure.
Control room noise levels shall not exceed 55 dB(A).
At the site boundary the noise level shall not be higher than 40 dB(A)
Hazardous warning notices indicating those ear defenders are to be worn shall be installed at
entrances to rooms/enclosures where the sound pressure level exceeds 80 dB(A).
Machinery vibration shall not exceed the limits defined in BS7854-1.
3.4 Investigations and measurements

3.4.1 General surveys
As part of this Contract, all information and surveys on site, as far as necessary for the
detailed design and not included in the Tender Dossier, shall be obtained/performed by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for confirming all necessary site levels and geotechnical
information appertaining to the Works. The Contractor shall undertake further investigations,
as he considers necessary for the design and construction of the Works.
3.4.2 Level and reference points
Except where otherwise specified all levels shall be in metres above mean sea level with an
accuracy of three decimals. The data for all levels shall be based on benchmarks; these
benchmarks and the related data shall be made available to the Project Manager for his
information.
The Contractor shall execute during the period of construction of the Works necessary
benchmarks, which shall be checked periodically.
The Contractor shall be responsible for constructing the Works in accordance with the data
on levels. The Contractor shall establish data and information on levels, dimensions,
alignments and gradients during the execution of the Works.
The Contractor shall maintain a record of the levels of all the benchmarks and shall submit
one copy of the records to the Project Manager.
3.5 Minimum Design Life

Materials shall be selected for, and the new treatment plant facilities designed for, a
minimum whole life of 50 years. The following table gives the minimum design lives for the
various components of the treatment plant before major refurbishment is required:
Table 5: Minimum Design Lives
Design Life
Description
Years
Civil Works and Buildings

Process Structures 50
Buried Pipework 50
Buildings 50
Mechanical and Electrical Plant

Process Plant – sewage 15
Pumps – sewage and sludge 15

Design Life
Description
Years
Valves and Actuators– sewage and sludge 20

Turbine and generator 25
LV Motor Control Centres 20
Electrical Installations 20
Instrumentation, Control and Automation equipment 15
SCADA and PLC systems 15
Flowmeters 15
3.6 Odour abatement

The plant receives high strength wastewater from long sewer trunks, in part force mains. It is
therefore anticipated that high sulphide concentrations and odour levels will be present in the
wastewater, especially in the hot summer months. The contractor with his design shall
conduct site tests for determining the level of H2S and odours.
The general approach to the design of the odour control systems shall comprise of two stages,
as follows:
- Containment of the area in which the odours are formed – headworks, influent pumping
station and primary clarifier
- H2S and Odour removal from the contaminated air by means of biological washing or
filtration processes, if necessary two or three stage to achieve the required removal rate.
Hydrogen peroxide or sulfuric acid application will be not allowed due to security
reasons.
The required air pollution concentrations for design the odour control system are given in the
following table
Maximum allowable H2S

concentration or Odour dilution unit Value
value at location
Maximum allowable H2S microgram/m3 45

concentration in building

concentration site boundry
Maximum allowable H2S

concentration or Odour dilution unit Value
value at location

concentration at the outlet of the
odour treatment system
D/T13 at the inlet of the odor D/T 200,000

treatment system
D/T at the outlet of the odor D/T no more than 60

treatment system
Note: The odour testing standard shall be EN13725 - “Determination of odor concentration by dynamic
olfactometry"
Ventilation
Ventilation fold
: spaces accessible by human beings ventilation 12 times/hr
: spaces not accessible by human beings ventilation 5 times/hr
To be ventilated
: sumps for lifting pumps
: screens and screen sumps
: grit chambers, when covered
: classifier when covered
: distribution works / sumps, when covered
: overflow weir primary sedimentation tank, when covered
: containers for grit, screenings and sludge
: housing for thickeners and dewatering equipment
: sumps for return sludge
: sumps for terrain sewers
3.7 Electro technical Works and process automation

Electro technical works including SCADA systems have to be executed as specified in the
Technical Specifications (Appendix 3 Electrical Specifications).
The operations of the process related to reception, treatment and discharge of wastewater and
sludge shall be automated, allowing continuous operations with only 8 hours per day
presence of operation staff.
13
D/T – Dilution to threshold ratio
Interruptions in operation have to be solved within 8 hours of occurrence of the interruption.

3.8 Mechanical Works

Mechanical works have to be executed as specified in the Technical Specifications
(Appendix 2 Mechanical Specifications).
The operations of the process related to reception, treatment and discharge of wastewater and
sludge shall be automated, allowing continuous operations with only 8 hours per day
presence of operation staff.
3.9 Civil Works

Civil works have to be executed as specified in the Technical Specifications (Appendix 1
Civil Specifications).
3.10 Specific Plant Design Criteria

3.10.1 General
The Plant shall be designed for maximum operation stability, reliability and flexibility and
minimum energy consumption (maximum efficiency) considering:
- appliance of safety factors wherever necessary in order to cover variations in wastewater
flow and pollution loads.
- Provision shall be made for suitable steps, platforms and hand railing to allow safe and
easy access for the operation and maintenance of all items of plant according to European
and Palestinian Standards.
The plant shall be designed so that it shall be possible to manage operation with one of the
process units out of order, without any deterioration of the effluent quality.
The design has to accommodate uninterrupted flow of wastewater through the HRWWTP
even in case of malfunction of major plant components. By-pass of untreated wastewater
flows is not permitted.
By passes due to taking parts of installation out of operation is not allowed when malfunction
of major plant components fail the plant still has to meet 80% of maximum design load and
100% of hydraulic design load in case of malfunction of main plant components.
The contractor will in his bid demonstrate how the plant will operate at full flow and load
when one of the main components is out of service (e.g. one primary clarifier, one aeration
tank, one secondary clarifier, one digester etc.
3.10.2 Safety and accessibility

The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all
those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the works.
To guarantee access to all mechanical and electrical parts of the whole Plant for cleaning,
maintenance and repair, the following points are important:
- Space between the process units (tanks, chambers, channels, pipe, machines, pumps,
aggregates etc.) shall be big enough to guarantee acceptable accessibility for the working
personnel to facilitate inspection, cleaning and repairs, dismantling and replacement
especially when working with lifting units.
- All covers such as gratings for channels or assembly orifices shall be constructed in such
way that they can be opened by one person only without danger.
- All tanks shall be provided with platforms and gangways with proper handrails.
- All tanks and chambers shall be designed in that way that easy emptying is possible,
either by providing a washout for each tank or a pump sump.
- Accessible means shall be provided for the easy lubrication of all bearings, mechanisms
and moving parts.
- Defining accurately explosion proof areas in accordance with the Standard for Fire
Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities -NFPA 820 – latest Edition
and appropriate measures to be taken.
3.10.3 Pumping station
A minimum of four duty and one standby submersible pumps will be installed in the pump
station for the stage 1 flows. Local Hand/Off/Auto control will be provided. The variable
speed pumps will be controlled by level controllers in the pump station. High level alarms
and low level cut-off will be provided. The pumps will operate in a lead/lag configuration
with manually rotated duty pumps.
The pumping station should be able to receive internal return flows (e.g. from sludge
treatment, wash water from screenings).
3.10.4 Screens
The Screening system shall include:

- coarse screens with a maximum width of 25 mm shall be applied as first screening step;
- fine screens with a maximum width of no more than 3 mm shall be applied as second
screening step;
- at least two fine screens should be used. When one screen is not operational, the
remaining screen(s) should have a capacity of 100% of storm water flow;
- screens will be designed for low maintenance and severe duty service;
- the screens shall be automatically cleaned
- screens are to be placed in a enclosed building that includes an odour containment;
- screens are to be equipped with hoisting equipment;
- Isolation of the screens is effected via manually actuated penstocks. Screenings shall be
washed and compressed as to reach a dry solids content of at least 60%. Screenings are
mechanically conveyed to containers (2 duty, 1 stand by);
- reject water from the screens has to be recycled to HRWWTP to a location up flow from
the screens;
- A sampling point has to be placed after the screens.
3.10.5 Grit and grease removal
Grit should be removed before primary or secondary treatment. Grease may be removed
together with the grit, or skimmed and removed from the primary sedimentation
The grit system shall be designed such that:
- grit shall be removed prior to entering the biological treatment stages;
- the grit removal system shall be able to achieve a removal rate of at least 95%, at a grit
size greater than 0.25 mm and 65% of grit greater than 0.1 mm in size with a specific
gravity of 2,650 kg/m³. grease and scum shall be removed through an upper scraper that
skims the scum, grease and floatable matter from the surface of the passive zone towards
a scum pit.
- grit shall to be automatically conveyed to two (one working and one reserve) classifiers
and from there to containers (2 duty, 1 standby)
- The grit shall be washed via the classifiers and should not contain more that 2% organic
material;
The grit (and grease) removal chambers shall be fully enclosed to avoid odour nuisance.
Minimum detention time in the units shall be 6 min at storm water flow when two units are in
operation.
3.10.6 Primary sedimentation
If primary sedimentation is applied:

- there shall be at least 2 process units. Each unit shall be capable to handle full hydraulic
and solids loads.
- the settled sludge shall be not less than 5%.
- is to be equipped with a one-sided overflow weir.
- is to be equipped with an automatic scum removal facility that is accessible via a work-
platform attached to the scraper bridge; overflow water from the is to be connected to
internal sewer system.
- scum is to be diverted to sump and taken separately to thickener and scum treatment Scum
grease and floatable matter will be transported to thickener and dewatering separate from
the internal sewer system.
- It has to have the possibility to be by-passed.
- The scum shall go to a separate silo and from there to be thickened and dewatered.
3.10.7 Activated sludge reactor
If biological treatment is based on activated sludge (classical activated sludge, extended

aeration, SBR or similar).
- the sludge content should not exceed 5 kg/m³ in the biological reactors.
- Design of the treatment biology will ensure a sludge volume index that does not exceed
150 ml/g. In SBR systems the decant volume will be determined by a SVI of at least 200
ml/gram in spite of the fact that the biological treatment is required to obtain an SVI of
150 ml/gram (for safety factor)
- at least two separate treatment lines are to be constructed.
Biological nitrogen and phosphorous removal

For the design of nitrogen and phosphorous removal
- transparent and international guidelines are to be used.
- elaborated calculations and referral to used guidelines are to be provided in the design
documents Models to be used to demonstrate appropriate design are ASM2d or ASM3
for activated sludge, method vd Emde and Chen & Hashimoto for anaerobic sludge
digestion.
- Nitrogen and phosphorus is to be removed using biological processes.
Aeration elements and pipework

- For systems utilizing an aeration system,
- the specific oxygen transfer efficiency should be equal or higher than 4.0 kg O2/kWh
under standard conditions of 1 bar, 20°C; clean water and absence of dissolved oxygen.
This shall be tested by the contractor (on his expense) in the actual tanks using the
standard method ASCE – measurement of Oxygen transfer in clean water – EWRI 2-06
latest edition.
- it has to be possible to perform maintenance to the aeration elements, either by draining
the tank (with sufficient capacity in the tanks remaining in operation to treat the full flow)
or by installing facilities to hoist and maintain the aeration elements while the tank
remains in operation.
- the amount of aeration has to be tuned with the actual oxygen demand of the wastewater
(maximum and minimum), given the projected growth of wastewater flows and the
expected daily variations (low demand low flow 2015 situation14 to high demand high
flow 2027 situation).
- If diffusers are used, the minimum lifetime guarantee of the manufacturer of the diffusers
shall be 10 years.
- The design of the aeration system shall be based on the required oxygen quantity.
Pipework
- All interconnecting pipes will be equipped with valves and the pipes shall be from
SS316L.
- The maximum air velocities in the aeration pipes will be as follows:
14
If biological denitrification is used, the (return)flow to the denitrification basin should be low in oxygen.
No Pipe diameter Velocity

in mm ft/min m/min
1 1-3 25-75 1200-1800 360-540
2 4-10 100-250 1800=3000 540-900
3 12-24 300-600 2700-4000 800-1200
4 30-60 750-1500 3800-6500 1100-2000
- The pipe diameter and pipe configuration shall be design to avoid noise nuisances and
vibrations.
-
3.10.8 Aeration system
All kind of aeration systems are allowed, permitted the requirements for oxygen transfer
efficiency are met. The minimum oxygen transfer efficiency will be 4.0 kg O2/kWh
consumed.
All submitted calculations concerning required aeration capacity shall be based on the
following criteria.
Aerator design (maximum oxygen input conditions):

alpha coefficient : 0.6
beta coefficient : 0.95
theta coefficient : 1.024
DO in wastewater : 2.0 mg/l
Wastewater temp Celsius : 31 max
Wastewater temp Celsius : 13 min
Where blowers are proposed

- Multiple blowers shall be designed according to the principle if one blower fails still
100% of the required aeration capacity remains;
- Minimum efficiency of blowers shall be 75%. The blowers will be equipped with variable
capacity capable of supplying air from 45% to 100% of design capacity of the specific
blower.
- All blowers will be placed in suitable building with proper air filter system that prevents
dust;
3.10.9 Mixers and propellers
If carrousel-type reactors or circuits are used, propellers must be installed to maintain

circulation flow:
- The average water velocity will under all conditions be between 0,25 and 0,35 m/s.
- The minimum velocity at any point in the tank will be 0,2 m/s as to avoid settling of
sludge.
If plug-flow reactor types are used, mixers have to be installed

- Vertical mixer types are to be applied.

- Motors are to be placed above water level.
- A minimum of 1 mixer per tank is required.
If wastewater buffer tanks are used, mixers have to be installed

- Vertical mixer types are to be applied.
- Motors are to be placed above water level.
- A minimum of 1 mixer per tank is required.
3.10.10 Final sedimentation
If final sedimentation is applied

- design should be based on international and transparent guidelines demonstrating
appropriate design.
- is to be equipped with a one-sided overflow weir.
- is to be equipped with a scum removal facility that is accessible via a work-platform
attached to the scraper bridge; overflow water from the scum removal facility is to be
connected to the internal sewer system.
- In spite of the fact that the biological process will ensure design sludge volume index
should not exceed 150 ml/g, the clarifier shall be capable of treating sludge with a 250
ml/gram SVI.
3.10.11 Effluent post-treatment
If it is necessary to store biologically treated water, effluent, wash water or similar, than these
buffers are regarded as integrated parts of the effluent post treatment system.
- the selected materials have to be resistant to corrosion caused by any chemicals that may
be used in the treatment process.
- Post disinfection will be based on chlorine disinfection.
This disinfection will include a chlorine contact tank with a 30 minute retention time. The
chlorine contact tank will also have internal baffles that ensure proper plug flow for optimal
contact.
If the effluent has to be lifted

- multiple vertical centrifugal pumps or positive displacement screws have to be applied in
an arrangement that when one pump/screw fails the remaining pumps/screws have
sufficient capacity to lift 100% of the design flow.
- The pumping/lifting station is to be equipped with a by-pass allowing the full hydraulic
design capacity to pass.
3.10.12 Chemical and dosing installations
If chemicals are used in the water and/or sludge treatment process, the following conditions
apply
- Storage capacity of all chemicals shall be 14 days at minimum.
- Chemicals have to be readily available in the Palestine Territories.

- All storage tanks will be installed in a containment tank.
- Storage tanks and pipes are to be equipped with leak alarm.
- Two dosing pumps per dosing installation are to be provided, each of them 100%
capacity.
- Dosing pumps have their own housing.
- Pumps have their own leakage containers.
- A safety shower and eye-shower have to be available and operational
3.10.13 Effluent discharge
All effluent is to be discharged through a single effluent discharge construction.

- The discharge construction contains a functional flow meter
- The accuracy of the flow meter shall be 99.5% or higher.
- Data from the flow meter are to be automatically logged and recorded.
3.10.14 Sludge thickener
If a sludge thickener is used and poly-electrolytes are used in this process,

- the maximum allowable PE dosage is 5g active PE/kg DS.
- Operation will be based on only 40 hours a week (5 consecutive days 8 hours)
- The TSS in the supernatant will be no more than 500 mg/l
3.10.15 Anaerobic digestion (if applied)
- At least two digester reactors are to be provided

- Minimum retention time 20 days at average flows –
- The digester will be mesophilic (between 34 and 37 oC)
- The construction of the digester shall allow for easy removal of sand without interruption
of the normal operation.
- The digester shall include all the required safety accessories including but not limited to
pressure relief valves, flame arrestors, flame traps, etc. in compliance with European
Guideline Atex 137. instrumentation and the auxiliary equipment to be installed
according to the European Guideline Atex 95
- Special consideration shall be given to preventing struvite precipitation and methods for
cleaning this if seen.
- The digester will be equipped with systems for preventing foam accumulation.
3.10.16 Aerobic digestion (if applied)
- At least two digester reactors are to be provided

- Minimum retention time at average flows with both reactors in operation – 30 days
3.10.17 Sludge dewatering
- The possible methods for dewatering are either belt filter press or centrifuge. The
contractor must consider minimum energy requirements while obtaining the minimum
Dry solid content.
- Sludge dewatering shall be provided to produce sludge with a minimum solids
concentration of 20%.
- the maximum allowable PE dosage is 15 g active PE/kg DS.
- Operation will be based on only 40 hours a week (5 consecutive days 8 hours)
- The TSS in the supernatant will be no more than 1,000 mg/l
3.10.18 Dewatered sludge conveyors
The dewatered sludge will be transferred from the dewatering system to transport containers
with a capacity of 20 ton each. The system will be automated so that it is possible change
from one container to the next without onsite personnel. The distribution system will have
places for 4 containers, to provide sufficient capacity for at least a full day of sludge
production
Operation will be based on 40 hours a week, (5 consecutive days 8 hours).
3.10.19 Trucking facilities
Trucking facilities shall be provided to load trucks for removal and disposal of dewatered
sludge. This also shall include an automated truck scale for determining the weight of sludge
hauled. The scale has to be suitable to weigh loaded and unloaded trucks.
3.10.20 Co-heat generator
- If the use of anaerobic digestion is selected, the biogas is to be used for electricity
production in a CHG.
- The CHG is capable of dealing with all biogas that is actually produced in the process.
- The electrical efficiency of the CHG is at least 33%.
- The cogeneration shall include bio-gas treatment including but limited to H2S removal,
moisture removal particle removal and silicate removal.
- The cogeneration will include a complete cooling and heat transfer system. The excess
heat will allow for heating the sludge before entering the anaerobic digesters by specific
heat exchangers.
- The cogenerator will be fully synchronized with the electrical grid supply.
3.10.21 Gas storage
- If the use of anaerobic digestion is selected, a gas buffer is to be used.

- The size of the gas buffer is to be optimized with the capacity of the GHC but in no case
shall the storage volume be less than 6 hours at design flows.
- The storage tank shall include all safety features such as safety (pressure/vacuum) relief
valves, , flame arrestors, flame traps etc. in compliance with EU Atex 95 and 137.
3.10.22 Flare
If the use of anaerobic digestion is selected, a flare is to be installed for the incineration of
biogas in case production exceeds consumption.
- A flare should be equipped with an internal flame.
- Capacity of the flare shall be sufficient to burn the full actual gas production.
3.10.23 Production of process water
For process and cleaning purposes process water is to be used including but not limited to
polymer dilution, foam dispersion etc.;
- Process water is to be produced through the filtration of effluent. Backwash will be sent to
the inlet of the plant
3.10.24 Hydrants
All process components and objects can be reached by hydrants.

- The maximum length of the hoses between hydrant and process components and objects is
not more than 20 metres
- All hydrants will be placed above the surface.
- These components shall be designed in accordance with the Palestinian Fire fighting code.
3.10.25 Electrical service points
The distance between the process components/pumps and the local switch junction box shall
be no more than 15 m.
- The maximum length of the cables between service point and process components and
objects is not more than 20 metres.
3.10.26 SCADA System
A fully functional SCADA system suitable for automatic control, monitoring and data
logging is required. The control system programming shall be able to be amended on site in
the light of operating experience, or as new equipment is installed, and shall have the ability
to monitor fault conditions and to alert the operator of these fault conditions. A data
exchange with the central dispatcher and a remote operation and control of the HRWWTP
shall be assured.
The proposed SCADA an PLC software shall be a well-known commercial brand that is
already in use in similar facilities.
The SCADA will allow full operation via mobile phone.

All data from HMI will be sent to Hebron representatives – complete and full HMI without
the possibility of intervention.
In particular the design of the control and data acquisition system shall provide for the
following:
The design shall be based on an automated system controlled by programmable logic

controllers ("PLCs") such that the HRWWTP is capable of automatic operation for extended
periods.
The plant must be equipped in a manner that:

a) A full-automatic process is guaranteed
b) All process relevant parameters can be measured by on-line meters.
c) A remote monitoring, control and operation of the HRWWTP must be ensured.
The data acquisition system shall have provision in the database to record all the results of
sampling and testing undertaken by the HRWWTP Laboratory. The design of the Data
acquisition system shall provide two operating data storage units in order to guarantee
redundancy of the system.
An emergency power supply that provides sufficient capacity to allow running of the plant in
accordance with the specifications included herein.
It is envisaged that the Plant will be manned five days per week, one shift -eight hours- per
day. Full operation of partly manual operated component shall be ensured for 5 days a week
and 8 hours a day.
At a regular operation modulation modus a fully automatic operation shall be possible for a
period of at least 2 days.
3.10.27 Instrumentation
The plant is to be equipped with instrumentation required for logging and recording process
operations, for automated process control, for signalling and generating alarms et cetera. An
overview of the minimum required instrumentation for process control is set out in the table
below.
Table 1
DS content
NO3/NH4
sampler
Temp.
Level
Auto.
Flow
Pres.
Tur.
DO
EC
pH
Instrument
Inlet sewage X X X X X
Inlet PS X X X
DS content
NO3/NH4
sampler
Temp.
Level
Auto.
Flow
Pres.
Tur.
DO
EC
pH
Instrument
Primary sludge X X X
Reactors X X
Air supply X X X
Secondary X
clarifier
RAS PS X X X
Secondary X X
sludge
Chemicals X X
Tertiary X X X X
treatment
Combined X
sludge before
thickener
Combined X
sludge before
thickener
Digester X X X X
Recycle sludge X
Dewatering X X
Biogas X X X
Additionally all equipment will be equipped with instrumentation generating alarms when
crucial parameters of the equipments are superseded (eg temperature, flow, level).
Main valves will be equipped with status indicators (open/close)
3.10.28 Transformer and stand by generator sets
The contractor will provide 1800 kVA from the site next to the entrance road (indicative
coordinates 31º29’01.8N; 35º07’09.0 E) and to the electrical building within the HRWWTP
as a main power source. In addition the contractor will provide standby generation by means
of generator sets. The standby generator capacity (without the biogas cogeneration) shall be
sufficient to fully operate the process without detrimental degradation for up to 15 days based
on full design load of the plant.
- A full electrical installation and cabling is to be provided for any electrical use on the site;
- Stand by generator sets complete with fuel storage sufficient for 5 days uninterrupted
functioning of the HRWWTP is to be provided for emergencies;
- Fuel storage is to be designed as to prevent any leakage of fuel to the environment;
- Fuel storage is to be secured against theft of fuel;
- The diesel generator sets will be fully synchronized with the electrical grid supply.
3.10.29 Electrical cabinets
The electrical cabinets will be placed in the operations building.
3.10.30 Protection
- In order to protect the plant against theft, vandalism, burglary and fire a security system
will be installed detecting movements, smoke and fire in the buildings and on the site;
- An automated system will alarm the authorities;
- The site will be fenced with a 3 metre high fence This should include a 80 cm concrete
base and wire mesh fence above that. ;
- The entrances to the site will be equipped with automated steel gate.
- All windows will have steel grates.
- The doors to the buildings will include doubled bolted steel doors.
3.10.31 Buildings
An office/administration/operations building is to be provided with a minimum area of 720

square meters to include at least five offices, an operations room, a laboratory, a maintenance
room, a workers changing room and a workers lunch room with suitable toilet and
shower/bathing facilities.
Two separate buildings may be considered or a single building with two storeys.
Function Area (m²)
office 1 – manager 20
office 2 – operations 20
office 3 – operations 20
office 4 - documentation 20
office 5 – Hebron representative 20

operations with the control room 60
laboratory 60
maintenance 100
change room and showers 40
dining room 50
toilets 30
storage room 150
meeting room 100
general passages 30
Total 720
Maintenance and storage room have to allow for maintenance of pumps and other equipment,
have to allow for hoisting equipment, accessibility for trucks and heavy equipment.
Separate entrances are required for access to offices and meeting rooms and storage and
maintenance rooms.
Illumination
The following values will apply for illumination
within buildings Lux value
A operations room 500
B laboratory 700
C electro technical rooms 400
E halls and corridors 200
F stock 200
G toilets 300
H showers and dressing rooms 300

within buildings Lux value
emergency lighting in buildings Lux value
I escape route illumination 1
J orientation illumination 10
terrain illumination Lux value
K work lighting at mechanical equipment 150
3.11 Setting Out Of the Works

3.11.1 General
The Works shall be set out and tied to the Palestine Co-ordinate System. The Contractor shall
establish temporary benchmarks and survey stations at suitable locations on the Site of the
Works and during the progress of the Works shall periodically check the levels of the
benchmarks and the co-ordinates of the stations against the originally obtained points lines
and levels of reference. Temporary benchmarks and survey stations shall be located clear of
the construction Works.
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for his information drawings in duplicate
showing the locations and levels or co-ordinates as appropriate of each and every temporary
benchmark and survey station used for the setting out of the Works.
The Contractor shall before commencing execution of any given section of the Works submit
to the Project Manager for his information complete setting out details with supporting
calculations and drawings (including drawings showing the locations and co-ordinates of the
reference points used).
The Contractor shall identify setting out dimensions for all structures by relating them to
existing Works and by interpretation of the Drawings. The gradients of pipelines and the
levels of weirs, inverts of channels and other hydraulic structures shall be as shown on the
drawings for the information of the Project Manager.
The locations of structures to be constructed as part of the Works shall be identified by

reference to steel pins set in concrete by the Contractor, who shall also determine the co-
ordinates of the markers and their distances from adjacent existing structures.
The Contractor shall set out sections of the Works at such times as may enable Service
Authorities to carry out temporary or permanent alterations to their equipment or buried
services and share such information with the Project Manager.
3.11.2 Execution and Workmanship
The Contractor shall employ well-qualified and experienced surveyors for the execution of
the survey work and setting out as described in the Contract, subject to the concurrence of the
Project Manager.
The survey instruments to be used by the Contractor shall be of the modern type and make,
and suitable for the work to be executed and shall be maintained in a first class condition.
For all survey, instruments used in the Works the Contractor shall submit recent calibration
certificates issued by competent authorities. Further calibration of the instruments shall be
carried out every six months.
All field-books, calculations, maps, etc. of the survey activities mentioned above shall be
handed over to the Project Manager immediately after the completion of the survey work.
The Contractors shall record the progress of the Work on electronic photos.
The Contractor shall provide, for State Quality Control Inspection, a schedule of the main
phases of the construction.
3.12 Standards and Codes

3.12.1 Standards Specifications
The applicable standards are specified in the annexes.
Unless otherwise specified, all material and workmanship shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the latest editions of the European standards. The ruling standards and
manuals shall be those that are valid thirty days before the first date set for the delivery of
Tenders. Other equivalent National Standards or internationally recognised standards may be
proposed to the Project Manager for review and comments. Palestine standards are referred
to where appropriate. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the standards and
translation if required.
3.12.2 Priority of standards
The European standards have priority over the local standards, unless the local standards are
more stringent. Whenever the local standard does not cover a specific aspect of the
Employer’s Requirements – General Technical Specification, the European standard shall be
applied.
Throughout the General and Specific Technical Specifications, reference is made to ‘the
applicable standards’. This reference should be interpreted as explained above.
The Contractor shall bring issues regarding the application of standards to the attention of the
Project Manager for resolution in accordance with the Contract.
3.12.3 Standards on Site
The Contractor shall obtain and keep on Site at least one copy of each of the relevant
Standards, Codes and Manuals or approved National Standards which are referred to in the
Specification. In addition, the Contractor shall keep on Site a copy of any other Standard,
Code, Manual, or National Standard, which applies to materials supplied.
Copies of the standards shall be made available for reference at all times at the office of the
Project Manager. All standards shall be in English. If the standard is not in English the
contractor shall provide a certified a translation to English of any of the Standards or
Manuals the Contractor shall provide a typed copy of the translation within 7 days of
receiving a written request from the Project Manager.
3.12.4 Subjects not Covered by Standards
All materials, plant and workmanship not fully specified herein or covered by Standards or
Manuals, shall be of such kind as is used in first class work.
3.13 Contractor's Documents for Review and Review and

comments by the Project Manager
3.13.1 Final Design Report
The Contractor shall submit a final design report to the Project Manager for his review within
13 weeks of the Commencement Date. This report shall comprise the following elements:
1. Detailed description of the chosen treatment concept. The report shall as a minimum
elaborate on the following aspects:
 design criteria
 treatment principles and process assumptions
 aeration
 sludge handling (sludge thickening, sludge digestion, sludge dewatering, sludge
transport, sludge storage)
 monitoring and process control principles
 operational costs.
 How the current design allows for implementing the future expansion.
2. Process Flow Diagram (PFD) and Process and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs)
including control philosophy statement.
3. Final detailed process calculations
4. General site layouts with leading dimensions and setting out details showing the
arrangement of all buildings, plant, pipework, services, roads, fencing and drainage as
appropriate together with finished site levels.
5. General arrangement drawings of each structure including sections and elevations with
leading dimensions, hydraulic levels, finished surface levels, proposed materials,
location, foundations, arrangement of plant, plant size and weight, pipework, ducts,
dosing lines and accesses, fixing details, craneage and lifting equipment proposals.
6. Details of modifications to existing infrastructures.
7. Design criteria and methods covering the structural and geotechnical design of the
Works.
8. Mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, process control and automation design
descriptions.
9. For above ground pipework, layout drawing and installation details including valves,
meters and other ancillaries, painting and protection, and maintenance working space.
10. For underground pipework, plans and longitudinal sections including details of existing
ground levels, pipe diameter, material, rating/strength and profile, existing ground surface
and loading, pipe bedding details, location of known services, location of valves,
washouts, connections and access chambers as appropriate.
11. Hydraulic design calculations for pipelines, channels weirs and pumping stations for both
the liquid, air and the sludge lines.
12. Design of control and monitoring system.
13. Schedule of operation and exploitation costs.
14. Construction planning including provided staged site plans.
15. A synopsis of the QA/QC program – assumptions, main principles and benchmarks for
verification and acceptance.
16. A synopsis of the health and safety program – assumptions, main principles and
benchmarks for verification and acceptance.
17. A synopsis of the environment and social program – assumptions, main principles and
benchmarks for verification and acceptance.
3.13.2 Detailed Design Documents
Detailed design documents shall be prepared for a complete component (e.g. reactor,
clarifier, digester) of for complete infrastructure between process facilities (drainage, site
development, process piping, electrical cables etc.). These documents shall include detailed
working drawings, particular specifications and P&IDS. These shall be submitted a specific
activity at least 42 days prior to commencement of the activity for Project Manager/client
comments and approval. The contractor shall revise and modify the design documents in
accordance with the Project Manager's comments and instructions within 21 calendar days.
The following design documents shall be submitted to the Project Manager for his review at
least 42 days prior to the programmed activity commencement:
1. Pipelines:
 hydraulic calculations, including determination of test pressures;
 site plan and general arrangement drawings;
 pipeline profiles;
 drawings and schedules showing all pipe work, fittings, chamber and trench details
and thrust block arrangements;
 reinforcement drawings and calculations for thrust blocks to pipe work;
 drawings, calculations and method statements for all road, rail and river crossings and
connections to existing pipe work;
 landscaping, land drainage, top-soiling and all ancillary works relating to
reinstatement works.
2. General arrangement and foundation drawings complete with dimensions, for all
buildings, tanks, plant and associated equipment.
3. Structural calculations and drawings including foundation design.
4. Reinforced concrete details, structural steelwork and masonry drawings.
5. Reinforcement drawings and calculations for in situ and precast concrete. Bending
schedules.
6. Fabrication drawings for any structural steelwork.
7. Architectural and building works drawings including masonry, cladding, roofing, etc, and
all specified fixtures and finishes both externally and internally.
8. Details of protective coating design.
9. Landscaping, land drainage, sub and top soiling and all ancillary works.
10. Detailed drawings and calculations of grating floors, hand railing, gutter covering and
hatches.
11. Detail drawings of doors, door- and window jambs and windows.
12. Building services layout drawings/routing diagrams and schedules including internal,
external and emergency lighting, small power, water distribution systems, foul drainage,
and lighting protection, earthing and bonding.
13. Manhole/access chamber schedules, schematic layout of each manhole and access
chamber providing details of pipe layout, diameters, flow direction, invert levels and
cover level.
14. Details of road construction, valve chambers, washouts, meter chambers, fencing,
manholes, access chambers, grit traps, property connections and associated connections
and outfall structures (if any).
15. Details of any pipeline, road, watercourse and railway crossings.
16. Mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, process control and automation detailed
specifications.
17. Lifting equipment specifications.
18. Layout of principal mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, process control and
automation plant including:
 interconnecting pipework, channels and ducts;
 ventilation and ducting;
 supports of equipment and pipework;
 cable duct and cable draw pits;
 control building and kiosks;
 transformer and generator locations;
 motor control panel general arrangement drawings;
 access routes into buildings and structures including provision for removal of plant,
emergency exists and craneage proposals.
19. Detailed process and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) and control philosophy
statement, architecture diagrams and data sheets for the Works together with the control
philosophy for each plant item.
20. Pump and fan calculations. Calculations of total pump head (static and dynamic) and
determination of the various pump types and pump sizes.
21. Heating calculations.
22. Consumer / equipment list.
23. Instrument list.
24. Valve list.
25. Functional Design Specification (FDS).
26. Hazardous Area Zonal Classification drawings.
27. MCC and control panel drawings including:
 panel layout and facial;
 single line diagrams;
 schematic and wiring diagrams (switch gear, control, instrumentation, etc.);
 instrumentation loop diagrams;
 instrumentation and control block diagrams;
 control cable connection and system interface diagrams;
 panel engraving schedules;
 automation network architecture.
28. Electrical calculations and drawings including:
 fault level calculations throughout the site;
 voltage transient calculations on large motor starting;
 cable sizing calculations;
 distribution line diagrams;
 connected load and maximum demand calculations;
 LV schematics;
 cable schedules and cable layouts / routes drawing including calculations;
 control philosophy block diagram including written description of control systems
and schedule of digital and analogue inputs and outputs submitted on A4 sheets with
a separate sheet/sheets for each drive/function;
 fire, gas and security alarm system schematic diagrams and layouts.
29. PLC I/O lists.
30. Documents for the European Guidelines (for example, PED, ATEX-137, CE): for
example, Explosion Safety Document (ATEX137); Technical Construction Document
(CE); Construction documents for PED.
3.13.3 Construction and Installation Method Statements
Construction and installation method statements shall be prepared for the principal elements
of the Works and shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review at least 28 days prior
to the programmed activity commencement.
Construction and installation method statements shall make due allowance for all
requirements and restrictions imposed by the Contract. Each method statement shall
comprise a step by step schedule of specific operations or activities with description, date,
times and duration of each step. The statements shall be supported by sketches, diagrams or
other supportive detail as necessary to enable a clear understanding of the method and
significance of each step of work or operation.
The construction and installation method statements shall include, but not be limited to:
1. the method of working for all major activities;
1. construction equipment to be used;
2. measures for controlling noise and vibration;
3. hours of working;
4. layouts of compounds storage facilities;
5. sources of Materials;
6. methods of movements and storage of bulk materials and spoil;
7. haulage routes;
8. site organisation;
9. measures of controlling dust;
10. temporary lighting details;
11. temporary works details;
12. details of all disposal sites;
13. maintaining and cleaning of Site roads and highways;
14. site safety procedures;
15. pedestrian, light vehicular and emergency access;
16. any proposed demolition methods.
For existing structures, which are to be retained and require refurbishment in order to meet
the required design life, the Contractor shall also submit details of his structural assessment
and his proposals for renovation works.
3.13.4 Production and Submission Procedures
The Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with printed copies of all technical
documents for review and comments. (in sufficient scale which allows for easy reading) and
one copy in DXF format on CD ROM or USB stick where applicable. On submission, the
Contractor shall clearly identify previously submitted inter-related technical documents and
also changes to previously reviewed technical documents.
All designs, drawings and documents submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager for
review and comments shall be checked by the Contractor before submission and shall be
signed by the construction manager and relevant professional engineer (e.g. electrical,
structural mechanical engineer etc.) of the Contractor’s staff in accordance with QA
procedures, to confirm that the check has been conducted. The Contractor shall likewise
check submissions from his sub-Contractors or from any other source before passing such
submissions to the Project Manager.
A drawing and document register shall be kept and updated continuously by the Contractor.
A copy of the register shall be submitted to the Project Manager every time a drawing or
document is issued.
The Contractor shall submit 4 draft copies of the documents, as one package, to the Project
Manager for review and comments. The Project Manager’s review and comments period will
be 42 days. In case the Contractor chooses not to submit all required documents as one
package, the Project Manager’s review period will start upon receipt of the last document. If
the Project Manager gives notice to the Contractor that the submitted documents fail to
comply with the Contract, they shall be rectified and resubmitted in accordance with this
clause.
The Project Manager will return, before the end of the review period, one copy of the
submitted documents to the Contractor, containing his remarks and corrections. The
Contractor shall alter his design documents in accordance with the remarks and corrections
of the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall then submit 4 copies of the design documents, as one package, to the
Project Manager for review and comments. The Project Manager’s review and comments
period will be 21 days. In case the Contractor chooses not to submit all required documents
as one package, the Project Manager’s review and comments period will start upon receipt of
the last document. If the Project Manager gives notice to the Contractor that the submitted
documents fail to comply with the Contract, or that the submitted documents have not been
altered in accordance with the Project Manager’s remarks and corrections, they shall be
rectified and resubmitted in accordance with this clause.
The contractor has to provide a time schedule for submission of documents upon start of the
project, that needs review and comments from the Project Manager. The schedule will be
regularly updated.
Upon review and comments one copy of the submitted documents shall be returned to the
Contractor, duly stamped and signed by the Project Manager.
All drawings submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager for review and comments
shall be on ISO standard size sheets with a maximum size of A0. Every drawing shall have a
title box in the bottom right corner showing:
- employer’s name;
- title of scheme;
- title of Contract;
- contractor's name;
- title of work location;
- title of drawing;
- drawing number;
- date;
- author;
- scale;
- a separate revision box;
- signature of Contractor to the effect that the drawing, whether his own or from any other
source, has been checked by him before submission to the Project Manager. Also every
related Project Manager shall sign this in addition to the construction manager.
Sheet sizes shall be in accordance with international sizes unless otherwise agreed by the
Project Manager.
The drawings of all parts of the construction shall be clear and complete. The choice of scale
will depend on the kind of drawing and/or details to be presented.
The recommended scales are as follows:

Pipeline plans 1:500;
Pipeline profiles 1:1000 horizontal, with vertical scale 5 to 10 times the horizontal
scale;
Site plans/layouts 1:500;
General arrangements 1:100;
Mechanical components 1:50
Electrical 1:50 to 1:10
Instrumentation 1:10 to 1:5
Details 1:50 to 1:10.
Structural 1:50
Architectural 1:50
All drawings shall be dimensioned and shall include a graphical scale to aid the use of
photographic reproductions. All clearances required for the installation, routine operation and
maintenance of items of Works shall be noted on the drawings.
The Contractor shall use the metric international system of units (SI units).
Designs and documents submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager for review shall
include:
- contents list;
- scope (description of the contents and purpose of the submission);
- conclusions and recommendations;
- references, specification requirements, codes, manuals and supporting documents used,
drawing numbers and titles of drawings which are based on the design;
- description of design approach;
- criteria, parameters and methods used;
- test procedures, analyses and results;
- calculations and schedules;
- qualitative description and comments on results;
- any other relevant information.
All design calculations prepared by the Contractor shall be prefaced by a statement

explaining the principles of design and type of analysis adopted. The statement shall also
indicate the Codes of Practice or Standard(s) upon which the design is based. Any computer
programs used in the design shall be fully described, and details of inputs and printouts shall
be presented in a manner that can be readily understood. Program manuals and any
instructions to program users shall be made available to the Project Manager upon request.
Final works inspection reports shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review and
comments before dispatch of the Works from the manufacturer.
Manufacturer's instructions for plant and equipment installation and maintenance shall be
submitted alongside with the detailed installation drawings.
Draft Operation & Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted to the Project Manager for his
review and comments at least eight weeks prior to the commencement of Tests on
Completion. The document shall be in English and the specific instruction for the operation
and maintenance of the plant shall be translated to Arabic.
The following documentation will not be specifically required for review and comments but
be submitted to the Project Manager for review and comments. In case commented the
contractor shall take the comments during implementation:
1. all civil and structural calculations;
2. services routing diagrams;
All documents and drawings to be provided in accordance with this clause shall be in
English. All data and text that is presented on nameplates, displays, etc. shall be in the
English language.
3.13.5 Construction drawings and calculations
Drawings shall show tolerances, clearances, loading, finishes, materials, ratings, etc. All
drawings shall be to scale and include a graphical scale to aid the use of photographic
reproductions. All dimensions shall be metric.
The Contractor shall prepare all construction drawings and detailed drawings, calculations,
etc., necessary for the execution of the Works. The Contractor shall submit, 42 days before
execution of the relevant part of the Works, 4copies of the documents to the Project Manager
for information purposes only.
If the Project Manager gives notice to the Contractor that the submitted documents fail to
comply with the Contract or the design documents, they shall be rectified and resubmitted in
accordance with this sub clause.
3.14 Design Approvals by Authorities

Approvals for the detailed design and construction shall be obtained by the Contractor from
the relevant authorities.
3.15 Final Documents to be Provided by the Contractor

3.15.1 As-built Documents
The drawings shall include those provided by the Contractor during the design, construction,
structure and manufacturing period together with drawings submitted by him with his tender
as appropriate. In addition, each item of the Facility, e.g. valves, motors, starters, cables, etc.
shall be shown on detailed general arrangement drawings clearly marking the position of the
component parts. All parts shall be numbered and the numbers given shall correspond to the
spare parts list, pamphlets and descriptive matter.
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager copies of the As-built Drawings as
detailed below:
- 4 full size, unbound, paper copy in English;
- 4 bound set of A3 paper reductions in English;
- 4 copies in electronic format on CD Rom as AutoCad files (latest release) in English.
Subject to the review and comments of the Project Manager, the Contractor may submit the
As-built drawings in an alternative electronic format provided that the Contractor provides to
the Project Manager free of charge the software required to read, edit, save and print the
drawings.
All As-built drawings submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager shall be on ISO
standard size sheets with a maximum size of A0. Every drawing shall have a title box in the
bottom right corner detailing project and drawing details, as well as numbering according to
the quality system of the contractor. All layout and arrangement drawings submitted by the
Contractor shall be drawn to scale and dimensioned and shall include a graphical scale to aid
the use of photographic reproductions. The Contractor shall use the metric international
system of units (SI units).All drawings shall be signed by the relevant Project Manager
(structural, mechanical, electrical engineer etc.) and by the construction manager.
Comprehensive electrical circuit drawings shall be provided showing the relation of one
electrical item of equipment to another.
In addition to the foregoing, each item of electrical equipment shall be provided with
schematic drawing and a wiring drawing.
The schematic drawing shall show the connections in a schematic form enabling the
operation to be ascertained, while the wiring drawing shall show the individual components
approximately in their relative physical positions, with the electrical connection shown
exactly as wired, to enable a particular component or connection to be located on the actual
equipment.
Every connection shall be numbered and the number given for a particular connection shall
be the same on the schematic drawing, on the wiring drawing and as tagged on the actual
equipment itself.
Where possible one print of each of the appropriate electrical equipment drawings and
diagrams shall be provided in a purpose made pocket of each cabinet.
3.15.2 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted) . Each manual shall include but not
be limited to the following:
1. Table of Contents.
2. An overview of the different suppliers/manufacturers of plant with their representatives
in the Palestine Territories, including addresses and telephone numbers.
3. A general description of the scope, purpose and manner of working of each section of the
Works. The Contractor shall also include a description of parts of the treatment process
not included in the Contract, i.e. the operational description shall cover the entire water
treatment works;
4. The as-built drawings and the final P&ID
5. Specific operation procedures for each component and for the entire plant. This shall
include operating times and sequences, chemical dosages, operating ranges of various
process parameters etc. Each procedure shall include a description of a step by step
instructions for pre-start, starting up, including start up following emergency shutdown,
normal operation and emergency shutting down of plant. Data on general setting of
controls associated with controlling design conditions, monitoring instruments and
switchgear, together with the details of initial settings of all adjustable items shall be
included. A schedule of alarms, how they are initiated and what action should be taken
6. Maintenance procedures for regular and preventative maintenance, including frequencies
of routine maintenance procedures, fault finding charts, trouble shooting, procedures for
disassembly, repair and re-assembly, and procedures for alignment, adjusting and
checking. Sectional arrangement drawings of major items of plant should also be
included, i.e. pumps, valves, etc., with dismantling instructions;
7. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions, including procedures for
the calibration of instruments, etc.;
8. Instrumentation, control and automation equipment operating instructions for normal
procedures in a step by step format including flow charts, control operations, requests for
display or printing of data, performance monitoring, response to alarms or failures,
changing of operation parameters, and manual data entry;
9. Safety instructions for the various areas including chemical storage, explosive areas,
areas where drowning may be a concern, chemical handling instructions, microbial
contamination prevention, etc.;
10. In addition to the above, the following schedules shall also be included:
 A schedule of plant supplied including spares, tools and lubricants and their
recommended equivalents, which must be readily available. The schedule shall give
the manufacturers' name, address and appropriate Make/Model No./Cat No.,
description of unit and component parts identified on drawings and giving ordering
reference numbers and price lists.
 A schedule of copies of all tests certificates. This shall include for both works and site
testing of motors, pumps, pressure vessels, electrical switchboards, transformers,
instrumentation, lifting equipment; for site tests of pipework, cabling and electrical
installations; earthing; lightning protection; and other items where appropriate. Pump
performance curves as tested and system curves shall also be provided.
 A schedule of CE-certificates.
The operation and maintenance instruction manuals shall be supplemented by

- The supply of a comprehensive planned yearly maintenance programme for the
wastewater works operation and maintenance staff
- Wall charts, covering a period of one year with colored markers. It shall have vertical
divisions in weeks and horizontal divisions for each item of the Facility
- A fitter’s card system, cross-referenced to the chart(s) with at least one card for each item
of the Facility detailing the planned maintenance required with the relevant spaces for
work done, parts required and the like, in order that for each task or day’s work, the
electrical and mechanical maintenance staff may be presented with the card for routine
work completion and signature
- Markers arranged with standard colors to indicate work required, parts outstanding, and
work completed.
The maintenance scheme shall be to the review and comments of the Project Manager and
shall be provided complete at the time of the commissioning of the Facility. It shall have
sufficient space for expansion if required to include any further routine work.
The Operation & Maintenance manuals prepared by the Contractor and manuals relating to
plant by any sub-contractors shall be printed or duplicated and shall be bound into suitable
loose leaf hard cover binders of A4 size, using not more than 70 % of the binder capacity.
Each volume of the manuals shall be identified with the typed or printed title "OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL", the title of the project and the identity of the general
subject matter covered in the manual. Each manual volume shall contain a table of contents.
Not later than 8 weeks before start of the Tests on Completion, the Contractor shall submit
two draft copies of the documents, to the Project Manager for review. The Project Manager’s
review period will be 42 days. In case the Contractor chooses not to submit all the required
documents as one package, the Project Manager’s review period will start upon receipt of the
last document. If the Project Manager gives notice to the Contractor that the submitted
documents fail to comply with the Contract, they shall be rectified and resubmitted in
accordance with this sub-clause.
The Project Manager will return, before the end of the review period, one copy of the
submitted documents to the Contractor, containing his remarks and corrections. The
Contractor shall alter his documents in accordance with the remarks and corrections of the
Project Manager.
Following review and comments but prior to the issue of the Taking Over Certificate, the
Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager 3 copies of the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals. With the exception of manufacturers literature, 2 copies shall be in Arab and 1
copy shall be in English. In addition, an electronic copy of the text of the Operating and
Maintenance Manuals shall be provided in Arab and English. The format of the electronic
copy shall be agreed with the Project Manager.
All data and text that is presented on name plates, displays, etc. and on computers, all
equipment documentation, all drawings and schemes, all manuals for operation and
maintenance, etc. shall be in the English language.
3.16 Other Documents to be provided by the Contractor

3.16.1 ESHS Plan
See also chapter 4.
3.16.2 Organisation Chart
Within 14 days of commencement, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager details
of the Contractor’s Representative and other key personnel including respective job
descriptions, addresses, 24 hour telephone numbers and facsimile transmission numbers. The
Project Manager shall be notified immediately of any changes to the details provided.
3.16.3 Programme
The Contractor is not allowed to start construction works until he has obtained the review
and comments of the Project Manager for the detailed design. Construction works shall be
executed in a sequence that has the review and comments of the Project Manager. The
Contractor shall submit a general programme for the execution of the Works with his Tender.
The Contractor’s detailed time programme shall be prepared on a programme software

package suitable for operation with a Windows operating system, as agreed with the Project
Manager and shall include:
- a detailed works contract programme in the form of a Gantt chart which clearly details
individual functions, actions and tasks and shows the period for design, approvals,
procurement, fabrication, main construction, testing, commissioning and all other such
operations as may be applicable with key dates indicated;
- an associated Pert chart with all task linkages and the critical path clearly indicated;
- resource charts specifically related to but not limited to the activities shown on the
programme of work.
Photographic Records
- A photographic record shall be kept of the Construction work on the following basis:
- Prior to commencement of the Works, a joint photographic survey of the Site and the
surrounding area shall be carried out and agreed by the Project Manager and Contractor’s
Representative.
- The Contractor shall on the first working day of each calendar month, or on such later
date, as agreed with the Project Manager, undertake a further photographic survey of the
Site and progress of the Works.
- All photographic surveys shall be undertaken by a recognised professional photographer.
Unless otherwise agreed with the Project Manager each survey shall comprise no less
than 72 photographs.
- Two sets of photographs shall be provided to the Project Manager, together with the
digital format files. The photographs shall be high resolution, full colour and 150mm by
100mm minimum size. The photographs shall be suitably titled, dated and coded in
numerical order.
- A video film of the site shall be prepared and updated every quarter.
4 Environmental, social, Health and Safety

management
4.1 ESHS responsibilities

The Contractor will perform the design, supply and installation project in compliance with
the Environment, Social, Health and Safety (ESHS) specifications described in this chapter.
The ESHS specifications refer to:

- Protection of the natural environment (water, air, soil, vegetation, biological diversity) in
areas adjacent to the Worksite, access roads, quarries, borrow areas, stockpiling of
backfill material, camps or storage areas,
- Health and safety conditions to be maintained for the Contractor’s personnel and any
other person present on the Worksites, or along access routes,
- Working practices and the protection of people and populations living near the Worksite,
but exposed to the general disturbance caused by works.
The Contractor is liable, with respect to the Employer, for all damages to natural resources
caused by the execution of the works or the methods used for execution, unless it is
established that the execution or methods were necessary, according to the provisions of the
Contract.
4.2 ESHS Co-ordinator

The Contractor shall appoint an ESHS Co-ordinator whose role shall be to promote, monitor
and enforce safe working practices on the Site. The ESHS Co-ordinator shall be a senior
member of the Contractor’s staff.
The Contractor shall arrange and undertake regular safety briefings for all of his staff,
workmen and sub-Contractor’s staff. In addition, he shall ensure that regular safety liaison
meetings are held between the Contractor, Project Manager and Employer. The Contractor
shall carry out a safety audit of the Site at intervals not exceeding six months.
The Contractor shall ensure that all statutory safety obligations are met in respect of anyone
entering the Site.
4.3 ESHS Plan

An ESHS Plan shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Project Manager for
his review and comments at least 42 days prior to any programmed construction activities on
site. The ESHS Plan shall include, but not be limited to:
- Environmental policy
- Organisation and management arrangements for implementing the ESHS plan;
- Construction health and safety plan
- all health and safety risks relating to the execution of the works;
- prevention and protection measures to control risks related to the execution of the
works;
- human and material resources involved;
- works requiring work permits; and
- emergency plans to be implemented in the case of an accident.
- Local recruitment
- recruitment procedures
- training provided
- location and management
- Traffic management
- Atmospheric emissions and dust
- Noise and vibrations suppression
- Dangerous products handling
- Effluents
- Waste storage, handling and disposal
- Worksite clearing, erosion prevention and rehabilitation
The Contractor shall not take possession of the Site before the Project Manager has approved
his ESHS Plan.
The Contractor implements prevention, protection and monitoring measures, as described in
the Health and Safety Plan and other elements of the ESHS plan. During the execution of the
works, the ESHS plan will be updated by the Contractor every two months and reissued to
4.4 Rules of conduct

Rules of conduct are established by the Contractor addressing at least: environmental
sensitivity of areas around the Worksites, zero tolerance for drug abuse, risks of the
communicable diseases, and respect for the beliefs and customs of the populations and
community relations generally. The rules are clearly displayed at the different Worksites and
vehicles. Existing and new employees are made aware of the rules and the associated
provisions. A record shall be made for each case of serious misconduct, indicating all action
taken to terminate the misconduct. This record will be provided to the Project Manager as an
attachment to the monthly report.
4.5 ESHS reporting

Monthly ESHS report

Contractor submits a monthly ESHS activity report summarising all ESHS initiatives
implemented in relation to the execution of the Works. The report contains the following
information.
- list of ESHS personnel at present at the site at the end of the month.
- inspections carried out
- non-conformities detected, with descriptions of the corrective actions taken.
- update of the product registers and inventory of hazardous waste.
- description of activities to prevent erosion.
- monitoring results
- health & safety statistics
- training activities
- provisional actions for the coming month.
Incident notification
- the Project Manager is informed within one hour of any incident involving serious bodily
injury
- the Project Manager is informed within 6 hours of any near-accident relating to the
execution of the works which, in slightly different conditions, could have led to bodily
injury.
4.6 ESHS training and meetings
4.6.1 ESHS training
The Contractor prepares a training programme for its workforce. Training sessions are two-
fold: introductory sessions for starting work at the Worksite, and technical training as
required in relation to the execution of the works.
Starting work sessions are organised for each employee and shall cover as a minimum: rules
of conduct, health and safety, emergency and evacuation procedures. Technical training
includes the skills needed for the tasks to be performed, safety and first aid procedures
related to the task.
4.6.2 Daily and weekly health and safety meetings
At worksites where work is ongoing, the Contractor organises one health and safety meeting
per week with all the personnel assigned to the Worksite. At the meeting accidents and
incidents that occurred are discussed, feedback is provided and means of improvements are
assessed to establish corrective actions.
The Contractor organises daily meetings prior to the start of the daily work establishing the
health and safety risks associated with the day’s tasks and activities, and means of prevention
and protection to be implemented.
4.7 Specific ESHS subjects

4.7.1 Effluents
Sanitary wastewater from the construction staff will be collected and disposed of in
accordance with local regulations and review and comments of Project Manager.
All other liquid discharges will be monitored, and treated if necessary, to prove that the
discharges are harmless before being discharged to the surface water, in accordance with the
local regulations and after review and comments of Project Manager.
4.7.2 Atmospheric emissions and dust
The Contractor will use equipment and adopt construction and transport methods with
atmospheric emissions which are not in excess of the local emission standards.
On unpaved roads the Contractor takes action to abate dust emissions generated by vehicles
or mobile equipment, including application of water and speed reduction insensitive areas.
When bulk materials are exposed to the wind, the Contractor implements the necessary dust
abatement measures, including humidification or covering of the surface.
4.7.3 Noise and vibration
The Contractor uses equipment and adopts construction and transport methods so not to
generate noise levels in excess of values applicable. High noise generating works (e.g. pile
driving, blasting, rock clearing, drilling, percussion drilling) are only carried out during
normal working hours.
4.7.4 Waste
The Contractor is responsible for identifying, collecting, transporting and treating all waste
produced on the Worksites. The Contractor implements specific waste management practices
adapted to the level of danger for human health or the natural environment, identifying
hazardous, non-hazardous and inert wastes. The Contractor effectively implements any local
recycling or re-use options for its waste. Waste is stored separately prior to removal from the
Worksites, depending on the level of danger, phase (liquid, solid or gas). Waste is removed
from Worksites and transported to recycling, treatment and waste management facilities on a
regular basis. The collection and storage method and frequency of removal guarantee no
emissions to soil, water or air, regular cleaning and no overflow from containers, no
unpleasant odour or emissions which are dangerous for human health, no proliferation of
insects, rodents, dogs or other animals.
4.7.5 Equipment and operating standards
The facilities and equipment used by the Contractor are operated, tested and maintained
pursuant to the manufacturer’s recommendations, in accordance with international standards,
guidelines and industry codes for safe and healthy practice.
4.7.6 Personal protective equipment
The Contractor ensures that all personnel, visitors or third parties entering a Worksite are
equipped with Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) in accordance with international
standards, guidelines and industry codes for safe and healthy practice.
4.7.7 Dangerous substances
In the case dangerous substances are used, an assessment of risks and related prevention and
protection measures shall be included in the health and safety plan. Methods for storage,
application and disposal of dangerous substances must be in accordance with international
and local regulations and authorised by the Project Manager.
4.7.8 Medical check-ups
The Contractor organises medical check-ups for all employees prior to the initial
mobilisation to the Worksite to check aptitude for the work. Medical check-ups are carried
out pursuant to the recommendations of the International Labor Organization. Subsequent to
the check-up, a written medical certificate is issued declaring the aptitude of the worker for
the allocated tasks.
The Engineer can request additional medical examinations for the Contractor’s personnel if
considered necessary, all costs to be borne by the Contractor.
4.7.9 First aid
The Contractor ensures that at least one first aid officer is present at all times during working
hours, per shift for 10 to 50 workers present, and one extra first aid officer for each additional
100 workers allocated to the shift.
The Contractor equips each Worksite with an adequate number of first aid kits to ensure that
all workers can access these kits in approximately 5 minutes. Kits must be available at all
times.
4.7.10 Access to health care
The Contractor guarantees access to health care for all personnel in case of accident or illness
occurring during the execution of the works, i.e.:
a) Medical check-ups: initial (recruitment), annual and upon returning to work after sick
leave;
b) Screening, vaccinations and preventive healthcare;
c) General healthcare during the execution of the works;
d) Medical assistance in the event of an accident and assistance for emergency
evacuations.
4.7.11 Emergency medical evacuations
The Contractor establishes and provides the Engineer within one month of the start of works,
an agreement with a specialised company for the handling of personnel in the event of a
serious accident requiring an emergency medical evacuation.
The agreement includes a convention with a referring hospital where the member of
personnel evacuated in emergency conditions will be treated.
4.7.12 Hygiene
the Contractor provides personnel with drinking water at all Worksites. The quantity and
quality of this water complies with the standards of the World Health Organization at supply
points.
Sanitary areas (showers, sinks, urinals, toilets) are cleaned and disinfected by the
Contractor’s cleaning service at least once every 24 hours. Cleaning operations are
documented.
4.8 Cultural, environmental and social compliance

Reference is made to the report “Environmental, Social and Cultural Heritage Impact
Assessment to Support the Hebron Governorate Wastewater Management Project (ESCHIA-
report) dated June 20, 2013.
Recommendations and requirements set out in this report are considered integrated elements
in this ER, and as such binding to the contractor, unless overruled in other texts in this ER.
The Contractor will be acquainted with this report, possible project impacts, both in
construction and operational stage, and with the mitigating measures.
Contractor will specifically

- abide to instructions and guidelines related to preservation of Cultural Heritage as set out
in Chapter 7.5 (Cultural Heritage Impacts) of the ESCHIA.
- abide to instructions and guidelines related to avoiding noise, vibrations, traffic jams
during construction as set out in chapter 8 (Other environmental impacts and mitigation
measures) of the ESCHIA.
- fully adopt all mitigation measures as mentioned in chapter 9.1 (Summary of mitigation
measures) of the ESCHIA in his DSI Workplan and Operations workplan.
- keep detailed records of all grievances received during preparation, supply, install,
assemble as well as operations and maintenance activities, including contact details of
complainers. Contractor will immediately forward a copy of the recorded grieve to the
Client, including a proposal to mitigate the grieve.
- included a chapter and a check lists in all progress reports related to cultural,
environmental and social compliance, reporting compliance with these requirements. If
deviations occur, the Contractor reports occurrence and corrective measures taken.
- Prepare an Environmental, social and Cultural Heritage Management Plan (ESCHMP) as
detailed in chapter 10 of the ESCHIA and prepare the periodic reports on the
environmental status of the project and the community. Periodic reports will be prepared
every 4 month in the Design, Supply, Install and Assembly phase and every 6 months in
the Operations and Maintenance stage.
- participate in and contribute to any activities to be developed by the Client related to
project communication with the residents nearby the construction area and with a wider
audience.
5 Construction aspects
5.1 Demolition works

The Contractor shall execute any demolition works necessary for the construction of the
Works.
All the produced waste shall be removed and transported to a suitable location in accordance
with local regulations for the specific material. All costs involved in transportation and
disposal of waste shall be borne by the Contractor. The contractor shall provide a
construction waste management plan to be approved by the Project Manager.
5.2 Contractors area

The Contractors area at the plant site has to be established.
5.3 Billboards
Billboards shall be placed at the entrance of the HRWWTP. The billboard for the Site shall
be in English (with an appropriate Arab translation on a second board) and include the
following:
- reference to, and logo of World Bank, AFD and EU;
- name of Employer;
- name of Contractor;
- name of Project Manager;
- name and date of project.
All billboards shall include a space reserved for the indication of the Donor‘s participation.
They shall be of a size, which is appropriate to the scale of the operation and visible to the
passing public.
The section of the billboard reserved for the Donors shall meet the following criteria:
- it shall take up at least 25 % of the total area of the billboard;
- it shall bear the standardised World Bank, AFD and EU emblem and the following text to
be presented as follows:
PROJECT CO-FINANCED BY
World Bank
AFD L’Agence française de développement
European Union
Billboards shall be constructed from durable material with a life of not less than two years
after the completion of the work. If, during the Contract, the billboards are damaged or in any
other way made illegible and unrepresentative, they shall be repaired or replaced by the
Contractor.
5.4 Temporary Fencing/Security of Site

Security fencing shall be 2m high galvanised mesh fence link fence as a minimum where
indicated on the drawings or where directed by the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall mark all open trenches and other obstructions by appropriate signs,
fences, barricades, and lights for the safety of the public.
The Contractor shall instruct all persons engaged in the Construction of the Works not to
trespass on land adjacent to or in the vicinity of the Site.
5.5 Maintenance of Access Roads

The Contractor shall maintain all public and private roads, drives and tracks which he has
permission to use during the Contract and shall leave them in the same state of repair as at
the commencement of the Contract.
The Contractor shall ensure that all the access routes, crossings and river frontages are
suitable for his use and allow for any temporary measures that may be required to bring them
up to the standard he requires. The Contractor is to restore the routes, crossings and frontages
to their original state upon completion of the Works.
Should the use of any access routes arranged by the Contractor be considered by the
Employer to be detrimental or contrary to any undertakings or statements given by the
Employer regarding environmental aspects of the Contract, the Project Manager may
withhold his consent to the use of the access route.
Prior to any construction work the Contractor shall prepare and agree with the Project
Manager a schedule recording the condition of all structures, land and surfaces (including the
depth and condition of any topsoil, if present) within the site working areas and access routes
and site compounds.
5.6 Pollution Control

The Contractor shall be responsible for all matters whatsoever arising out of or in connection
with the processing, removal, transport and disposal of groundwater and other waste
material in accordance with all applicable Environmental Law.
In dealing with water and wastewater arising from the Works, including water from cleaning,
testing or disinfection, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Palestinian
Standards.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable measures to ensure his activities do not cause
pollution of groundwater sources or surface watercourses.
The Contract shall comply with Palestinian Standards covering the discharge of wastewater
into watercourses.
The Contractor shall comply with the contents and recommendations of any national or local
regulations or codes of practice for noise and dust control on construction sites and shall that
the mitigation plan as described in the environmental and social impact assessment are fully
applied.
5.7 Services of Utilities

The Contractor shall be responsible for identifying the location and nature of all other
services on the Site, liasing with utilities and other organisations or bodies whose services
may be affected by the Works and obtaining the necessary permits and approvals for design
and construction of the Works. The necessary approval periods shall be allowed for in the
Contractor’s scheduling programme.
Before excavation commences the Contractor shall ascertain the accurate location of existing
services using safe methods of pipe location, cable detection or hand digging of trial holes as
appropriate. If any underground service is encountered unexpectedly the Contractor shall
notify the Project Manager of the service without delay. Notwithstanding any services
information supplied to the Contractor the responsibility to locate all services and prevent
any damage to existing services shall rest with the Contractor.
If the contractor causes damage to any utility, the contractor shall immediately repair the
damages on his own expenses, in accordance with the specific instruction of the utility and
under the supervision of the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all works as may be required in the inter-relation with
existing utilities and services, such as the realignment, adjustment, disconnection, relaying
and reconnection, for all and any delay occasioned thereby and making payment to the
relevant statutory bodies for utility services.
The Contractor shall ensure that all utility service providers, including the Employer, whose
equipment already traverses the Site can gain access to that equipment to inspect, repair and
renew the same without restriction.
5.8 Cost for Inspection at Manufacturers Workshop

The Contractor shall pay all travel and subsistence costs for the Project Manager and
Employer for the witnessing of Factory Acceptance Tests at the manufacturers workshop.
The Contractor shall count on 1 employees from the Employer and one from the Project
Manager. The FAT will be for:
All major process components – Bar Screen, grit removal, clarifiers, blowers, pumps,
aeration systems, thickeners, dewatering systems, mixers, etc.
6 Tests on Completion
6.1 General
Tests on Completion for the Process Plant shall be undertaken in accordance with Clause 9 of
the Conditions of Contract and shall cover:
- Pre-Commissioning Tests;
- Commissioning Tests;
- Trial Operation;
- Tests on Completion.
Prior to the commencement of the Tests, the Contractor shall have completed the following:
- removed all debris and unwanted materials from the Site;
- ensured and proved to the Project Manager that the Works is safe to operate;
- have completed the demonstration and training for the operation of the Works.
- Written approval of from all the manufacturers that the equipment has been properly
installed.
Records, test certificates, log sheets, performance curves etc. relating to the Tests on
Completion shall be forwarded to the Project Manager in triplicate at the conclusion of each
test. The test records and certificates shall be supplied for all tests whether or not they have
been witnessed by the Project Manager. The information given on such test certificates shall
be sufficient to identify the materials or equipment to which the certificate refers and the
method of test (including connection diagrams as appropriate) and shall also bear the
Contract reference and title.
6.2 Tests on the Wastewater Treatment Works

The pre-commissioning stage shall include:
a. Dry test for individual equipment, this includes but not limited:
i. Verifying that all the equipment has been installed in accordance with the design
and the manufacturer's requirements – a documentation from the manufacturer's
authorized representative shall be provided.
ii. Verifying that the as-build drawings are in accordance with the design and
manufacturers requirements.
iii. Verifying that all mandatory and spare parts have been supplied and they are in
accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and are stored appropriately.
iv. All tanks have been hydraulically tested.
v. All pipes have been hydraulically tested.
vi. Testing all the electrical and control connections,
vii. Testing the direction of the rotation and phases.
viii. Automatic control shall be simulated.
b. Wet test with water. In this stage the system is operated with water and the water is
recycled from the outlet to the inlet pumping station. This will enable to actually
operate the system with water for a period of 1 month thereby verifying that the
entire system is capable of operating. The contractor must prepare he necessary
piping to ensure this operation. During this period the following tests shall be
conducted:
i. Pump curve tests
ii. Instrumentation calibration, especially flow meters
iii. Blower tests
iv. Dosing equipment calibration
v. Leakage from pipes and tanks
vi. Controls and set point optimization
Commissioning stage shall include but not limited to:

c. Raw sewage start up this needs to be conducted in two phases – liquid phase where
the activated sludge process is slowly build up (the primary clarifier will be initially
bypassed) and after the sludge concentrations have achieved the target concentration
the anaerobic digesters are put in line.
d. Commissioning - three month period of operation where the plant is operating and
process parameters are aligned and adjusted.
6.2.1 Pre- Commissioning Tests
The pre-commissioning tests will be carried out when all civil, mechanical, electrical and
control components and functions are finished, tested dry, found in compliance with the
contract conditions and accepted by the Project Manager for the acceptance of sewage, water
or sludge. The remedy of any defects shall be done according to the decision of the Project
Manager before or during the Commissioning Tests.
The Contractor shall test each item of plant to ensure proper functioning. All related costs,
including water, energy, chemicals, etc. shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor is
deemed to have tested each item to his satisfaction before the pre-commissioning tests shall
commence.
The pre-commissioning services shall consist of all activities necessary to verify that all
installed plant and systems are operating in accordance with the manufacturers’ specification,
are correctly lubricated and ready to be put into operation.
The Project Manager's right to inspect, test and where necessary, reject the plant after the
plant’s arrival in Employer's country shall in no way be limited or waived by reason of the
plant having previously been inspected, tested, and passed by the Project Manager prior to
the plant’s shipment from the country of origin.
Should any inspected or tested plant fail to conform to the Technical Specifications, the
Project Manager may reject the plant, and the Contractor shall either replace the rejected
plant or make alterations necessary to meet Specification requirements free of cost to the
Employer.
Specific activities to be performed include but are not limited to examining and testing each
piece of plant to confirm that:
- manufacturer’s Quality certificates and Warranty certificates are available and eligible;
- all manuals, safety procedure and as-built drawings are available and correct;
- all lubrication requirements have been met;
- controls and instrumentation are functioning satisfactorily;
- equipment functions as stated by the manufacturer;
- maintenance records have been established;
- any modification made has not detrimentally affected its performance;
- safety devices are in place and are operational.
The Contractor shall prepare checklists for each item of plant and the Project Manager shall
witness the precommissioning activities.
6.2.2 Commissioning Tests
The Contractor is to set the treatment works to work following satisfactory completion of the
functional tests. This is to take place following the successful testing of all plant and systems
within the works.
In preparation for commissioning the Contractor shall submit a detailed testing and
commissioning programme to the Project Manager for his review and comments.
The Tests on Completion shall only start after the Pre-Commissioning Tests have been
successfully executed.
The Commissioning Tests shall also demonstrate the hydraulic performance of the whole
sewage treatment stream and ancillary processes and shall demonstrate that;
- The plant can accommodate maximum flows without overflow from other than
designated overflows and without suppression of any hydraulic control device.
- The specified minimum freeboard can be maintained in all units and at all flows.
- Where flow is distributed to a number of units in distribution chambers there shall be
equal division of flows between all operational units within  2 % of the expected values.
Tests shall be carried out at maximum and design flows, and with units out of service.
- The readings from all flow meters measuring flow into and out from the sewage treatment
process stream shall be mutually consistent within  1,5 % of the expected values.
The contractor in his proposal shall prove that the above working requirements. Special
consideration must be taken when the initial flows are lower than the design flows. The
contractor shall provide all required components/accessories needed for this at no extra cost.
The Contractor shall provide appropriate temporary instrumentation to verify flows in

individual pipelines and channels as necessary.
The Commissioning tests shall include all tests to demonstrate that the Works can be
operated safely and as specified, under all operating conditions.
If any defect is detected, the faulty equipment shall be rectified immediately at the
Contractor’s expense. If the fault cannot be rectified, the Contractor shall replace the
defective equipment, which also shall be proven to be free from defects.
6.2.3 Tests on Completion
Sewage Line: When the process is producing effluent of the required standard the Contractor
shall request that the Project Manager attends site to carry out sample tests on the raw
influent and final effluent from the HRWWTP. During a 14-day test period the Contractor
shall record flows being treated by the process.
The Contractor is to demonstrate that the process can meet the requirements of the Contract
to treat to the prescribed effluent quality standards. The Contractor shall sample raw sewage
influent and final effluent discharged from the final settling tanks and analyse on Suspended
Solids, BOD5(ATU), COD and Total Nitrogen by taking one 24 hour composite flow
weighted samples of the final effluent discharges each day during the Tests on Completion
period.
The Contractor is to demonstrate that the process meets the requirements set out for energy
chemicals and efficiency requirements of the Contract by combining removal efficiency
rates and actual and detailed energy consumption measurements.
The process shall be deemed to have passed the tests if the final effluent quality meets the
specified standards on all of the composite sample test results taken during the fourteen day
period, then the Sewage Line plant can be taken over.
This test meets the Performance Criteria set out in these Employers Requirement.
Sludge Line: The Contractor is to demonstrate that the process can meet the requirements of
the Contract to treat to the prescribed sludge dewatering requirements under the conditions
during the Test on Completion period. The Contractor shall take 3 spot samples each of un-
dewatered and dewatered waste activated sludge, every two hours each day during the Tests
on Completion.
The process shall be deemed to have passed the tests if the dry solid content in the cake and
chemical dosage is consistent with the specified target on all of the sample test results taken
during the fourteen day period, then the Sludge Line plant can be taken over.
This test meets the Performance Criteria set out in these employers Requirements.
Note: Sewage line and sludge line are interdependent, and have to be tested on Completion
with both lines in operation and after the sludge line has been fully commissioned.
Biogas system (if applicable): The Contractor is to demonstrate that efficiency of the CHG-
set meets the contractual requirements during a three week measurement period, after
commissioning of the sludge line.
General: When the Contractor has demonstrated, in accordance with the above, that the
process is operating in accordance with the Contract any remaining process units are to be
commissioned in sequence. As part of the commissioning, the Contractor shall test all of the
Plant to demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, that all of the Plant operates
and performs in accordance with the Contract.
Independent and Special Tests: The Project Manager may take incoming and final effluent
samples to verify the Contractor’s results. The Contractor shall use an independent testing
laboratory for analysing sewage and final effluent samples. He may also carry out whatever
special tests he determines necessary to demonstrate the satisfactory performance of the
plant.
6.2.4 Reservations
The Performance Criteria Guarantees alone cover conditions, which the Contractor is able to
check and control regularly. The below mentioned reservations are valid.
- That inhibitors in the inlet cause less than 15 % of inhibition on the biological processes.
(Inhibition is measured according to EN ISO 8192, which defines the measurement of
inhibition for BOD due to toxic substances).
- That inhibitors in the inlet cause less than 15 % of inhibition on the nitrification processes
(Inhibition is measured according to EN/ISO 9509, which defines the measurement of
inhibition for nitrification due to toxic substances).
6.3 Approvals
All approvals for completed works required under Palestine Law are considered part of the
Tests on Completion and must be completed prior to issue of the relevant Taking Over
Certificate.
The Contractor shall be responsible for securing such approvals at his own cost.
7 Tests after Completion
7.1 General
A series of test will be conducted to demonstrate the HRWWTP proper functioning a various
stages of plant commissioning and taking over.
The following tests will be conducted by the Contractor:
First test – 28 day uninterrupted period after commissioning of the complete HRWWTP
(liquid and sludge lines)
Second test – 28 day uninterrupted period after one year of defects notification period
Third test – 28 days uninterrupted period upon completion of the 5 years operation and
maintenance period.
In any case the contractor will not be relieved of his responsibilities on the stage unless there
is full compliance.
Tests after Completion shall be undertaken on the during the Defects Notification Period on a
two weekly basis. They shall be carried out by the Contractor to determine the performance
of the Works and to demonstrate compliance, or otherwise, with Performance Criteria
provided by the Contractor.
7.2 Additional tests

Client may require additional and specific tests for additional process elements, either per
process element or as combined processes. Client will decide on need for additional tests
after completion of the final design. These tests shall comprise two periods each of 28 days
continuous duration. The time of commencement of each period shall be selected by the
Client to reflect different operating conditions at the Works.
7.3 Passing of a 28 day Test

Each of the two periods of 28 day testing will be treated as separate tests. Failure of a 28 day
test will not invalidate any previous 28 day test that an item of Plant has to pass.
7.4 Sampling and Analyses

The Contractor shall collect all samples and measurements under supervision of the Project
Manager. Samples are to be analysed by an independent certified laboratory.
The analyses shall be performed in accordance with internationally accepted analysis
methods.
If the Project Manager considers there has been a significant error in either the sampling
technique or the method of determination for any sample or analytical result, then it shall be
excluded from the Performance Test results.
7.5 Reporting
On completion of each of the 28-day test periods the Contractor will prepare a 28-day test
period report. The report will summarise the results of all the tests carried out in the stage,
the consumption of all guaranteed consumables during the stage and will include a schedule
of identified failures. This report will be produced and submitted to the Project Manager
within 14 days of the end of each 28-day test period.
7.6 Test Procedures

Fine Screens
Samples shall be taken downstream of the fine screens to ascertain the effectiveness of
screenings removal. The test shall be conducted by introducing a net or mesh of opening size
less than 6mm into the downstream channel for a minimum of 30 minutes and observing the
material collected. The test shall be conducted at periods of high flow.
Determinant type of Sample frequency criterion for passing

Required
Once every 7 Insignificant quantity of

Object Size Grab
days matter collected
Screenings Conditioning Plant

Tests shall be conducted on the screenings conditioning plant to establish the faecal
contamination and dryness of the screenings with which to confirm their acceptability for
disposal. Samples shall be taken from the discharge point of the conditioning plant.
Conditioning units shall be tested individually and performance conditions applied to each.
Screenings dryness shall be determined by loss of weight from dried samples.
Determinant type of Sample frequency criterion for passing

Required
% dry solids Grab Once every 7 In accordance with

days Employers Requirements
Grit Classifying
Tests shall be conducted on the separated and cleaned grit to determine its cleanliness.
Samples shall be taken from the discharge point of the grit classifier. Units shall be tested
individually and performance conditions applied to each. Dryness shall be determined by loss
of weight from dried samples.
type of Sample
Determinant frequency criterion for passing
Required
% dry solids Grab Once every 7 In accordance with

days Employers Requirements
Final Effluent
Final effluent quality shall be tested for the following parameters:
type of Sample frequenc

Determinant criterion of passing tests
Required y
BOD5
In accordance with
TSS Employers Requirements
COD
24 hr Composite Daily
Total nitrogen
Nkjeldahl
Total phosphorous
Specific Power Consumption

The specific power consumption of the HRWWTP in kWh/kg TOD removed shall be
established through measurement and calculation:
Determinant type of Sample frequency

Required
Power consumption (kWh) of foul sewage

pumps, aerators, return activated sludge pumps Reading Daily
and recycle pumps if used.
BOD of wastewater at inlet 24 hr Composite Daily
BOD of final effluent 24 hr Composite Daily
NKj of wastewater at inlet 24 hr Composite Daily
NKj of final effluent 24 hr Composite Daily

1. The electrical power consumed shall be recorded at the associated SCADA on a daily
basis throughout each 28-day test period. The daily power consumption shall be totalled
for the whole 28-day test period in kilowatt-hours.
2. BOD and NKj removed shall be calculated from the difference in BOD and NKj loads
between the inlet to the aeration lanes and the final effluent. Loads shall be calculated by
multiplying the daily flow to the secondary treatment plant with the difference in BOD
and NKj concentrations as obtained from the 24-hour composite sampling.
3. Total Oxygen Demand (TOD, in kg) is calculated as the sum of BOD removed (kg) and
4.57 x NKj removed (kg)
4. The specific power consumption for the HRWWTP shall be calculated in kilowatt-hours
per kilogram TOD removed on a daily basis by dividing the nett electrical power
consumed by the total TOD load removed.
Sludge Treatment Specific Power Consumption

The specific power consumption of the sludge treatment process in kWh/kg dry matter
produced shall be established through measurement and calculation.
frequen
Determinant type of Sample Required
cy
Power consumption (kWh) of thickener feed Reading Daily

pumps, thickeners, thickened sludge pumps,
dewatered feed pumps, dewaterers and any
associated plant.
Dry solids treated Total weight of wet sludge Daily

produced
1. The electrical power consumed shall be recorded at the associated SCADA on a daily
basis throughout each 28-day test period. The daily power consumption shall be totalled
for the whole 28-day test period in kilowatt-hours.
2. Dry solids treated shall be calculated from cake solids concentration calculated as
described above multiplied by the total weight of sludge produced.
3. The specific power consumption for the sludge treatment process shall be calculated in
kilowatt-hours per kilogram dry solids treated on a daily basis by dividing the electrical
power consumed by the total dry solids.
Sludge Treatment Chemical Consumption

The chemical consumption of the sludge treatment process in kg of chemical per kg dry
sludge produced shall be established through measurement and calculation.
Determinant type of Sample Required frequency

Chemical consumption, each Reading Daily

chemical
Dry solids treated Total weight of wet sludge Daily

produced
1. The chemical consumption shall be recorded on a daily basis throughout each 28-day test
period. The daily consumption shall be totalled for the whole 28-day test period.
2. Dry solids treated shall be calculated from cake solids concentration calculated as
described above multiplied by the total weight of sludge produced.
3. The specific chemical consumption for each chemical for the sludge treatment process
shall be calculated in kg per kg dry solids treated on a daily basis by dividing the
chemical consumed by the total dry solids.
Sludge thickening performance and sludge dewatering performance

Sludge Solids Concentration of dewatered sludge and of thickened sludge
Test shall be conducted on the sludge to establish the dry solid concentration in the cake.
Sludge samples shall be taken from the discharge point of the equipment.
Thickened surplus sludge Hourly Composite during the operation of Daily

the gravitational sludge thickener
Thickened surplus sludge for Hourly Composite during the operation of Daily
digester the mechanical sludge thickener
Digested sludge Hourly Composite during the operation of Daily

the digested sludge tank
Dewatered sludge (Cake dry Hourly Composite during the operation of Daily
solid Concentration) the mechanical dewatering station
Sludge Dewatering and Thickening Solids Capture

Solids Capture shall be calculated as follows:
For processes involving no continuous use of wash water:
S1 S - S 2 / 10 000
% solids capture  100 
S S1 - S 2 / 10 000
where:
S is the % dry solids of the feed sludge multiplied by the density of the feed sludge;
S1 is the % dry solids of the dewatered sludge multiplied by the density of the dewatered
sludge;
S2 is the total suspended solids concentration of the filtrate (centrate) expressed in mg/l
(filtrate assumed to have a density of 1).
For process involving continuous use of wash water:
QS - S 2 / 10 000 - Q 3 S 2 / 10 000

% solids capture  100  S1 
QS S1 - S1 / 10 000
where:
S is the % dry solids of the feed sludge multiplied by the density of the feed sludge;
S1 is the % dry solids of the dewatered sludge multiplied by the density of the dewatered
sludge,
S2 is the total suspended solids concentration of the filtrate (centrate or decant) expressed in
mg/l (filtrate assumed to have a density of 1);
Q is the feed sludge flow rate expressed in m3/h and
Q3 is the wash water flow rate expressed in m3/h.
Criterion of passing tests

The final passing test will be conducted in two shifts during the day-time. The test shall be
conducted, if the machinery shall have functioned for two days.
7.7 Continuing Performance Criteria Tests

During the Defect Notification Period, the Contractor shall continue to monitor the Final
Effluent Quality, the Sludge Solids Concentration and other performance criteria. Once a
week the Contractor shall collect samples with at least four parts evenly spread over the daily
operation time and analyses of inlet and outlets from the whole Plant and the dewatered
sludge. The corresponding consumption items (electric energy, polymer consumption and
sludge production) for computing the running costs shall be recorded. All the results shall be
sent to the Client on a weekly basis.
The Employer will at all times be entitled to take his own samples for verification and
validation purposes.
During the Defects Notification Period, the Contractor shall immediately inform the
Employer when a result indicates that the guaranteed values are not being met and shall take
immediate remedial action .
If, during the Defects Notification Period, the specific guaranteed consumptions values
controlled on weekly bases as stated above are higher than the ones guaranteed for more than
2 consecutive weeks and no unusual events or defective operation of the Plant have happened
to explain the overrun of the consumptions,, the Contractor’s Process Manager and the
Employer’s Project Manager will meet on-site, in order to establish the causes that lead to the
Process and/or Running cost functional guarantees not being fulfilled.
If the Contractor subsequently fails to remedy the defects or to prove that the causes are
outside the Contractor’s responsibility, the Contractor shall be required to submit a project
proposal to reduce the consumptions of the plant to the values of the functional guarantees..
If the Defects or causes are found to be the Contractor’s responsibility, the Contractor shall
also be liable to reimburse the Employer for the direct additional costs incurred until the
defects or causes have been remedied.
In general, during the Defects Notification Period, all actions to be taken by the Contractor
and the Employer, respectively, shall be in accordance with the relevant provisions of the
General and Particular Conditions of Contract.
7.8 Amendments to the Final Operation and Maintenance

Manual
When failure of the performance tests or when any adjustments or modifications to the
Works requires amendments to be made to the Operation and Maintenance Manuals the
Contractor shall issue any amendments in writing. If the Contractor fails to amend the
Manuals the Project Manager may arrange for the amendments to be carried out by others
and debit the cost to the Contractor.
The Project Manager shall not issue the Performance Certificate until all such amendments
are complete and the amended versions of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals have
been approved by the Project Manager.
7.9 FAT and SAT

FAT and SAT are part of the Contract. The protocols shall be provided by the Contractor for
approval by the Project Manager. FAT and SAT shall be performed by the Contractor, while
the Employer reserves the right to witness the FAT and the SAT.
The FAT for the key equipment, key systems and key components shall be performed in the
factories of the Equipment, systems or component manufacturers.
The FAT test ensures:

- that the different pieces of equipment, systems and components comply in all aspects with the technical design
specifications as laid down in the Contract;
- that after successful completion, the different pieces of equipment, systems and components can be transported to the
construction site of the Facility.
No part of the Facility or foundations shall be covered up on the Site without the Contractor
carrying out any test and/or inspection required under the Contract. The Contractor shall give
a reasonable notice to the Project Manager whenever any such parts of the Facility or
foundations are ready or about to be ready for testing and/or inspection; such testing and/or
inspection and notice thereof shall be subject to the requirements of the Contract.
The Employer and the Project Manager or their designated representatives shall be entitled to
attend the FAT and/or inspection, provided that the Employer shall bear all costs and
expenses incurred in connection with such attendance including, but not limited to, all
travelling and board and lodging expenses.
Whenever the Contractor is ready to carry out any such test and/or inspection, the Contractor
shall give a reasonable advance notice of such test and/or inspection and of the place and
time thereof to the Project Manager. The Contractor shall obtain from any relevant third
Party or manufacturer any necessary permission or consent to enable the Employer and the
Project Manager or their designated representatives to attend the test and/or inspection.
The Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with a certified report of the results of any
such test and/or inspection.
If the Employer or Project Manager or their designated representatives fails to attend the test
and/or inspection, or if it is agreed between the Parties that such persons shall not do so, then
the Contractor may proceed with the test and/or inspection in the absence of such persons,
and may provide the Project Manager with a certified report of the results thereof.
The Project Manager may require the Contractor to carry out any test and/or inspection not
required by the Contract, provided that the Contractor’s reasonable costs and expenses
incurred in the carrying out of such test and/or inspection shall be added to the Contract
Price. Further, if such test and/or inspection impede the progress of work on the Facilities
and/or the Contractor’s performance of its other obligations under the Contract, due
allowance will be made in respect of the Time for Completion and the other obligations so
affected.
If any Plant or any part of the Facility fails to pass any test and/or inspection, the Contractor
shall either rectify or replace such Plant or part of the Facilities and shall repeat the test
and/or inspection upon giving a notice under GC Sub-Clause 23.7.
After completion of the commissioning of the Plant, the Contractor shall start-up the facility.
The Qualification of the Facility consists of the Installation Qualification and the Operational
Qualification. The Qualifications shall be performed in conformity with the Guidelines
specified in the Employers Requirements. The Qualification of the Facility shall start after
successful start-up of the facility.
The Installation Qualification means to establish documented proof that the equipment,
systems and components adheres to the above mentioned codes, standards and descriptions,
is correctly installed and all components and documentation required are available.
The Operational Qualification means the collection and the evaluation of all the data required
in order to determine that the Facility, the systems and components always meets the
predicted values of limits with reproducible characteristics as described in the Employers
Requirements.
In respect to the qualification of the systems and components specified, it is the basis for the
determination and proof of the effectiveness, the reproducibility, the performance of the
systems and components, the interaction between systems and components within the
HRWWT and the interaction of the systems and components with the services.
The Installation and the Operational Qualification will be organised on site and will be
carried out by the Contractor and witnessed by the Employer.
The Qualification report will only be accepted if “a clear report of findings” can be
submitted.
The Installation Qualification and Operational Qualification documentation are part of the
Contract and shall be provided by the Contractor.
The SAT test shall be performed after installation assembly, commissioning and start-up and
successful qualification. The SAT test ensures:
- that the equipment systems and components installed and assembled in the Facility are traceable to the guidelines and
standards specified in the Employers Requirements;
- that the Facility is ready for Operation;
- that pursuant to PC 25.2, the Provisional Acceptance Certificate can be signed.
If any dispute or difference of opinion shall arise between the Parties in connection with or
arising out of the test and/or inspection of the Plant or part of the Facilities that cannot be
settled between the Parties within a reasonable period of time, it may be referred to the
Dispute Board for determination in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 6.1.
The Contractor shall afford the Employer and the Project Manager, at the Employer’s
expense, access at any reasonable time to any place where the main Plant equipment are
being manufactured or the Facility are being installed, in order to inspect the progress and the
manner of manufacture or installation, provided that the Project Manager shall give the
Contractor a reasonable prior notice.
The Contractor agrees that neither the execution of a test and/or inspection of Plant or any
part of the Facilities, nor the attendance by the Employer or the Project Manager, nor the
issue of any test certificate pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 23.4, shall release the Contractor from
any other responsibilities under the Contract.
8 Miscellaneous Requirements
8.1 Accommodation to be provided for the Project

Manager
During the works supervision phase only (excluding design and Defect Notification Period),
the Contractors shall provide and maintain site accommodation for the Project Manager for
four (4) persons:
- office space including: 4 workplaces; telephone connection; internet connection (at least
3G); photo copier; scanner; 3 computers & software; A4 printer; payment of subscription
and bills; office maintenance, office supplies;
- conference room;
- kitchen (equipped);
- toilet facilities;
- 1 airconditioned vehicle 4x4 pickup with driver and maintenance;
- 1 airconditioned vehicle 4x4 jeep with driver and maintenance;
- store room;
- drying room.
8.1.1 Office Equipment
the Contractor shall supply and keep in full working order the following equipment:
Photocopier / scanner
One number new plain paper copier with the following minimum features:
- fixed plate type;
- copy size A3 and A4;
- copy speed 10cpm;
- resolution 600dpi;
- document feed (30 sheet) scan once/copy many;
- paper storage capacity 500 sheets A4 (80gsm);
- bypass sheet feeder;
- copy ratio 50-200 %;
- automatic and manual exposure settings;
- power supply 230/240v, 50-60Hz.
computers
Three number new laptop computers with the following minimum features:
- Intel® Core™ i7-5500U processor
- Ports 1x USB 3.0 with power share; 1x USB 3.0; 2x USB 2.0; RJ45 Ethernet; HDMI™
v1.4a; Combination headphone/ microphone jack
- 17” flatpanel LCD screen
- 16 GB Dual Channel DDR3L-memory (1.600 MHz, 2 x 8 GB)
- Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 + Bluetooth 4.0

- 16x integral DVD-ROM and 8x DVD+R/RW drive;
- 512GB Solid State Drive
- NVIDIA® GeForce® 845M 2 GB GDDR5
- graphics/video card with minimum integral 128 MB RAM;
- 10/100/1000 ethernet network interface card
- Sound card and built in speaker;
- USB optical mouse;
- PS/2 US keyboard;
- 64 GB USB memory key;
- Three standards for laptop
- Three laptop cases
- operating manuals for the computer and all peripheral equipment listed above.
printers
One number Hewlett Packard Laser Jet A4 Network printer or similar with the following
minimum features:
- A4 paper size complete with sheet feeder;
- A3 paper size facility;
- Microsoft Windows compatible;
- power supply 230/240v, 50-60Hz;
- one set toner cartridge included;
- operating manual.
software for the computers

The computers shall be supplied with the latest version of the following software already
installed and configured ready for use:
- Windows 10;
- MS Office professional - latest release, including MS Word, Excel, Access and
PowerPoint;
- MS Project latest release;
- MS Internet Explorer;
- MS Outlook;
- Winfax Pro;
- Winzip;
- Adobe Acrobat Reader;
- McAfee Anti Virus;
- AutoCAD on only one computer;
- latest driver and utility software supplied with the peripherals supplied with the computer
including, but not limited to, the sound card, video card, NIC card (compatible with
Windows XP).
All software shall be legally licensed in the name of the Employer and appropriate evidence
must be produced to demonstrate the validity of the license. Software shall be supplied with
original manuals and installation disks/CDs.
The Contractor shall maintain the complete configuration as described above in a good state
of repair and each part of it shall be replaced in the event of damage or failure.
8.1.2 Handover of office equipment acquired for the use of the Project Manager
The equipment acquired for the use of the Project Manager shall be handed over to the
Employer four weeks after the issue of the final Taking-Over Certificate, with an inventory
report on the quantities acquired and handed over and the condition of the items at handover.
Except when outstanding defects require equipment to be retained on site for a longer period.
In this case, the equipment shall be handed over on completion of these outstanding defects,
unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager.
8.1.3 Details of communication requirements
Three No. exclusive mobile phones with subscription for speak and data plus 2 No. 2 way
radios suitable for use on and around the site. One line shall be suitable for connection to a
computer for e-mail access. Two telephone handsets also to be provided. The Contractor
shall obtain the radio licenses required to operate the radios.
The Contractor shall pay for the project related costs (including all international project calls)
of the phones.
8.1.4 Details of the office accommodation and facilities.
Resident Project Manager's Single Office: Minimum Floor area 16 m2 equipped for 1 No.
person
Fixtures and Fittings No. or
amount per
person
Lockable desks with 2 side drawer sets 1
Table/worktop suitable for viewing drawings 1
Computer workstation 1
Chairs with castors and adjustable backrest, padded seat and arm rests 2
Pin boards (2.4m x 1.2m) 1 total
Shelving or book case (minimum length of shelving ) 2m
Steel lockable 4 drawer filing cabinet with drawer inserts suitable for 2
Fixtures and Fittings No. or

amount per
person
A4 files
Lockable cupboard (nominal size 1.8m high, 0.9m wide and 0.5m 2
deep)
Power points 3
Coat hooks 2
300 mm floor fan 1
3m long 4-way mains extension lead 1
A0 size plan chest with six drawers/vertical plan hanger 1 total
Office for 3 Project Managers: Minimum Floor area 50 m2 – as above but equipped for
4 No. people
Kitchen: Minimum Floor area 12 m2;

Fixtures and Fittings No./ details
Power points in kitchen area 6
Twin ring and grill cooker 1
Microwave oven 650 watts (min) with carousel 1
Electric kettle 1
Teapot 1
Coffee maker
12 mugs, milk jug, sugar bowl, tray 1 set
Kitchen utensils & storage tray for 10 1 set
Saucepan set of 4 1 set
Sink unit and cupboard with draining board supplied with hot and cold
potable water supply and wastewater disposal system
Wall cupboard 2
Refrigerator 1 (120l)
Electric Toaster 1
First aid kit 1
Fire extinguisher and fire blanket 1
Toilets: Minimum Floor Area 6 m2
The toilet block shall be fitted with a mortise lock. A set of two keys shall be provided to the
Project Manager.
Flushing WC 1
Wash basin with hot & cold water supply 1
Paper towel Dispenser 1
Flip top waste paper bin 1
Drying Room: Minimum Floor area 6 m2

Power points 2
Store Room: Minimum Floor area 9 m2

300 mm wide shelving 27m
Conference Room: Minimum Floor area 30 m2

Stacking chairs "Padded" 8

Conference table (min 3m long) 1
Whiteboard (1.2m x 0.9m) for meeting room 1
Power points 8
Pin board (2.4 x 1.2m) 2
Coat hooks 12
300mm floor mounted fan 2
General reception area: Minimum Floor area 9 m2

Chairs with castors and adjustable backrest, padded seat and arm rests 4
Coffee table 1
Ancillary Facilities:
An intruder alarm
Outside tap and boot cleaning facilities adjacent to the entrance door
Electricity supply (220V single phase) with heating and lighting,

including all charges. Gas heating shall not be permitted.
Sufficient office stationery.
Window clothing and sun protection;
Car Parking spaces (marked for the sole use of the Project Managers 5
staff)
External lighting to car park and entrance
The said office building shall have a sound floor, wooden walls and lockable doors and
shuttered windows. The offices shall be divided by full height partitioning. The partitioning
shall be reasonably sound proof.
The Contractor shall furnish electricity for lighting and power and sufficient quantities of
coffee, tea and soft drinks that are needed daily for the Project Manager's office. The
Contractor shall arrange for the office to be cleaned daily and the Contractor shall provide
domestic consumables such as cleaning materials, soap, towels, napkins etc. The office, the
furniture, fixtures, electricity and water shall be provided complete, within two weeks after
the Commencement Date.
The Contractor shall equip the office with complete air conditioning and heating units with
all supports and electrical works and of rates capacity, in cubic metres per minute, equal to
the gross volume of the office measured in cubic metres.
The Contractor shall submit a plan of the layout of the office facilities to the Project Manager
for review and comments before the Commencement Date.
The furniture, fixtures and equipment in the office shall need prior review and comments by
the Project Manager before being installed. The standard of the furniture, fixtures and
equipment shall be of good quality and shall generally be in conformity to that, which is
provided for supervisory staff offices for similar contracts of this magnitude.
8.1.5 Material and Workmanship
The material used and workmanship employed in the construction of the office shall be
according to the other requirements of the Contract documents.
In particular, the Contractor shall conform to the following general requirements for
construction:
- the area shall be levelled and the ground around the building grade to slope away, to
allow proper drainage;
- the roof of the office shall be of an appropriate construction. Ample fly-proof doors and
shuttered windows and, where required, cupboards, shelves and other fixtures are to be
provided;
- the sewage disposal system shall incorporate piped drainage to a septic tank with separate
soak-away;
- an adequate electrical installation shall be provided, including a distribution box, power
and lighting socket outlets, all necessary wiring, light fittings, etc., complete with
connection.
8.1.6 Maintenance
The Contractor shall maintain the office with furniture, fixtures and equipment, roads, paths,
etc., as from completion of the office until the end of the Defects Liability Period of the
Works, or such shorter time, as the Project Manager may direct. At the end of the Defects
Liability Period, the office with furniture, fixtures and equipment, services, etc., shall revert
to the Contractor.
8.2 Equipment for the Project Manager

8.2.1 Survey and/or measuring equipment
General
the Contractor shall supply, maintain, repair or replace survey and other instruments and
equipment as listed below. The instruments shall be for the use of the Project Manager and
his Staff. All instruments and equipment shall be fully adapted to the local conditions.
The following instruments and equipment shall be made available:
Items marked with * shall be kept in the Project Managers office. Other items shall be kept
by the Contractor but the Project Manager shall be provided with reasonable access.
- total station with single prism (1,500 m distance measurement)* with:

 unsurpassed battery life;
 IPx6 waterproof construction;
 superior function on-board data recording system;
 ergonomic keyboard with convenient, full alphanumeric input;
 light, compact design.
- 1 - 5m 4 Section, levelling staff;
- 1 - 30m non metallic Tape *;
- 1 - 30m Steel Tape *;
- 6 - 2m Ranging Poles;
- 6 - Ranging Pole Stands;
- 2 - 5m Steel Pocket Tapes *;
- 1 - 2m Wooden Folding Rule;
- 1 - Spirit Level not less than 750 mm long *;
- 1 - 2000 x 50 x 2 mm bevelled stainless steel straight edge;
- 1 - Torch (6 volt minimum) – rechargeable *;
- 1 - 1 kg hammer *;
- supply of wooden pegs;
- 2 plumb bobs and string*;
- wax crayons, bio-degradable spray paint;
- 2 measuring wheels.
Maintenance
Safety Equipment for the Project Manager

The Contractor shall provide the following safety equipment for the use of the Project
Manager and his staff:
- 2 Gas detectors;
- 2 Respirators.
8.2.2 Handover of survey and/ or measuring equipment acquired for the use of the Project
Manager
The equipment acquired for the use of the Project Manager shall be handed over to the
Employer four weeks after the issue of the final Taking-Over Certificate, with an inventory
report on the quantities acquired and handed over and the condition of the items at handover.
Except when outstanding defects require equipment to be retained on site for a longer period.
In this case, the equipment shall be handed over on completion of these outstanding defects,
unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager.
Employer’s Requirements Annexes
Annex 1. Civil Specifications

Annex 2. Mechanical Specifications
Annex 3. Electrical Specifications
Annex 4. HRWWTP Conceptual Design
Annex 5. Considerations for Delivering Imported Goods and
Equipment to the Site
1 introduction .................................................................................................... 8-152

2 Standards ........................................................................................................ 2-154
3 Testing of Materials ....................................................................................... 3-155
3.1 Sampling and Testing of Soils and Fill Materials .................................................. 3-155
3.2 Sampling and Testing of Construction Materials ................................................. 3-155
4 Temporary Facilities ...................................................................................... 4-156
4.1 General 4-156
4.2 Temporary Office ..................................................................................................... 4-156
5 Preparatory Works ........................................................................................ 5-157
5.1 General - Works included ........................................................................................ 5-157
5.2 Site Clearance ........................................................................................................... 5-157
5.3 Stripping of Topsoil .................................................................................................. 5-157
6 Earthworks ..................................................................................................... 6-158
6.1 General .................................................................................................................... 6-158
6.2 Relocation of possible utilities ................................................................................. 6-158
6.3 Excavation ................................................................................................................. 6-158
6.3.1 General ...................................................................................................... 6-158
6.3.2 Antiquities.................................................................................................. 6-159
6.3.3 Dewatering ................................................................................................ 6-159
6.3.4 Excavation for structures.......................................................................... 6-159
6.3.5 Tolerance ................................................................................................... 6-159
6.3.6 Slips, falls and excess excavations ........................................................... 6-159
6.3.7 Safety of excavation and adjacent structures........................................... 6-160
6.3.8 Laboratory tests ......................................................................................... 6-160
6.4 Preparation of foundation ....................................................................................... 6-160
6.5 Backfilling and filling ............................................................................................... 6-160
6.5.1 Fill materials in general ........................................................................... 6-160
6.5.2 Placing and compaction of fill and backfill ............................................. 6-161
6.5.3 Filling adjacent to structures .................................................................... 6-162
6.5.4 Tolerances for filling ................................................................................ 6-162
6.5.5 Control and testing of fill .......................................................................... 6-162
6.5.6 Allowance for settlement ........................................................................... 6-162

6.6 Disposal of surplus material .................................................................................... 6-162
7 Pipeworks........................................................................................................ 7-164
7.1 General .................................................................................................................... 7-164
7.2 Information about pipe systems .............................................................................. 7-164
7.3 Pipe materials ........................................................................................................... 7-164
7.3.1 Concrete pipes ........................................................................................... 7-164
7.3.2 Concrete pipes with steel core. .................................................................. 7-165
7.3.3 PVC and PP pipes ..................................................................................... 7-165
7.3.4 HDPE pipes ............................................................................................... 7-165
7.3.5 GRP pipelines ............................................................................................ 7-165
7.3.6 Ductile Iron pipes ...................................................................................... 7-166
7.3.7 Steel pipes .................................................................................................. 7-166
7.4 Transportation of pipes............................................................................................ 7-166
7.5 Storage of pipes ......................................................................................................... 7-166
7.6 Inspection of pipes and fittings................................................................................ 7-167
7.7 Installation ................................................................................................................ 7-167
7.7.1 General ...................................................................................................... 7-167
7.7.2 Excavation for pipes in trenches .............................................................. 7-168
7.7.3 Foundation and bedding........................................................................... 7-168
7.7.4 Jointing and cutting .................................................................................. 7-169
7.7.5 Curves and bends ...................................................................................... 7-169
7.7.6 Backfilling of pipe trench ......................................................................... 7-170
7.7.7 Concrete bedding and surrounding.......................................................... 7-170
7.7.8 Inspection through manufacturer ............................................................ 7-171
7.7.9 Pressure Test of Pipes ............................................................................... 7-171
7.8 Manholes and chambers .......................................................................................... 7-172
7.9 Tolerances ................................................................................................................. 7-172
8 Concrete Works ............................................................................................. 8-174
8.1 Materials.................................................................................................................... 8-174
8.1.1 General ...................................................................................................... 8-174
8.1.2 Cement ....................................................................................................... 8-174
8.1.3 Water.......................................................................................................... 8-175
8.1.4 Aggregates ................................................................................................. 8-175
8.1.5 Admixtures ................................................................................................ 8-176

8.1.6 Total Chloride and Sulphate Contents ..................................................... 8-177
8.1.7 Reinforcement ........................................................................................... 8-177
8.1.8 Liquid Membrane - Curing Compound ................................................... 8-177
8.1.9 Water stops ................................................................................................ 8-177
8.1.10 Spacers ..................................................................................................... 8-177
8.2 Requirements/Workmanship .................................................................................. 8-178
8.2.1 Formwork .................................................................................................. 8-178
8.3 Reinforcement ........................................................................................................... 8-181
8.4 Concrete .................................................................................................................... 8-183
8.4.1 Grades of Concrete.................................................................................... 8-183
8.4.2 Concrete Mixes .......................................................................................... 8-183
8.4.3 Compliance and Quality Control.............................................................. 8-184
8.4.4 Mixing of Concrete ................................................................................... 8-185
8.4.5 Distribution and Placing of Concrete ...................................................... 8-186
8.4.6 Water stops ................................................................................................ 8-189
8.5 Requirements for Structures ................................................................................... 8-189
8.5.1 General ...................................................................................................... 8-189
8.5.2 Structural lay-out ...................................................................................... 8-189
8.5.3 Concrete..................................................................................................... 8-190
8.6 Joints .................................................................................................................... 8-191
8.6.1 General ...................................................................................................... 8-191
8.6.2 Construction Joints ................................................................................... 8-191
8.6.3 Water stops ................................................................................................ 8-191
8.7 Structural Design Requirements ............................................................................. 8-192
8.7.1 General ...................................................................................................... 8-192
8.7.2 Standards ................................................................................................... 8-192
8.8 Design Assumptions ................................................................................................. 8-192
8.8.1 Lateral Soil ................................................................................................ 8-192
8.8.2 Filled Tanks............................................................................................... 8-192
8.8.3 Uplift .......................................................................................................... 8-193
8.8.4 Minimum Structural Requirements ......................................................... 8-193
8.9 Loads .................................................................................................................... 8-194
8.9.1 Characteristic Values ................................................................................ 8-194
8.10 Load Combinations .................................................................................................. 8-195
8.10.1 Serviceability Limit State ........................................................................ 8-195

8.10.2 Ultimate Limit State ................................................................................ 8-195
8.11 Calculations ............................................................................................................... 8-196
8.12 Corrosion protection ................................................................................................ 8-196
9 Building Works .............................................................................................. 9-197
9.1 General .................................................................................................................... 9-197
9.1.1 Scope .......................................................................................................... 9-197
9.1.2 Standards and Rules ................................................................................. 9-197
9.1.3 Works Included ......................................................................................... 9-197
9.2 Masonry Works ........................................................................................................ 9-197
9.2.1 Materials .................................................................................................... 9-197
9.2.2 Mortar Mix ................................................................................................ 9-198
9.2.3 Workmanship ............................................................................................ 9-198
9.2.4 Bricklaying and Blocklaying in Cold Weather ........................................ 9-199
9.2.5 Exposed Concrete Blocks.......................................................................... 9-199
9.2.6 Concrete Blocks to receive Plaster ........................................................... 9-200
9.2.7 Brickwork .................................................................................................. 9-200
9.2.8 Lintels, Miscellaneous .............................................................................. 9-200
9.2.9 Cleaning .................................................................................................... 9-200
9.2.10 Damp-proof courses ................................................................................ 9-200
9.2.11 Waterproof building paper...................................................................... 9-200
9.3 Plastering ................................................................................................................... 9-200
9.3.1 Materials .................................................................................................... 9-200
9.3.2 Plaster Mixing ........................................................................................... 9-201
9.3.3 Workmanship ............................................................................................ 9-201
9.3.4 Preparation of Surfaces ............................................................................ 9-201
9.3.5 Plastering................................................................................................... 9-202
9.3.6 Completion of Work .................................................................................. 9-202
9.3.7 Waterproof Plaster .................................................................................... 9-202
9.3.8 Tolerances ................................................................................................. 9-202
9.4 Screeds .................................................................................................................... 9-202
9.4.1 General ...................................................................................................... 9-202
9.4.2 Floor Screeds............................................................................................. 9-202
9.4.3 Joints.......................................................................................................... 9-203
9.4.4 Tolerances ................................................................................................. 9-203

9.5 Flooring .................................................................................................................... 9-203
9.5.1 General ...................................................................................................... 9-203
9.5.2 Materials .................................................................................................... 9-204
9.5.3 Workmanship in general .......................................................................... 9-204
9.5.5 General requirements for Application ..................................................... 9-204
9.5.6 Thin Floor Coverings................................................................................ 9-205
9.6 Tiling .................................................................................................................... 9-205
9.6.1 General ...................................................................................................... 9-205
9.6.2 Materials .................................................................................................... 9-206
9.6.4 Preparation of Tiles .................................................................................. 9-206
9.6.5 Placing ....................................................................................................... 9-206
9.6.6 Fixing and Bedding .................................................................................. 9-206
9.7 Roofing .................................................................................................................... 9-207
9.7.1 General ...................................................................................................... 9-207
9.7.2 Waterproofing and Insulation .................................................................. 9-207
9.7.3 Covers, Flashings and Rainwater Outlets................................................ 9-208
9.7.4 Workmanship ............................................................................................ 9-208
9.8 Timber Works........................................................................................................... 9-209
9.8.1 General ...................................................................................................... 9-209
9.8.2 Materials .................................................................................................... 9-209
9.8.3 Samples ...................................................................................................... 9-209
9.8.4 Ironmongery .............................................................................................. 9-210
9.8.5 Fabrication ................................................................................................ 9-210
9.8.6 Timber Components .................................................................................. 9-210
9.9 Metal Windows and Doors ...................................................................................... 9-210
9.9.1 Metal windows and doors ......................................................................... 9-210
9.9.2 Kind of windows and doors....................................................................... 9-211
9.9.3 Louvers ...................................................................................................... 9-212
9.10 Finish Hardware ....................................................................................................... 9-212
9.10.1 General .................................................................................................... 9-212
9.10.2 Hardware description .............................................................................. 9-212
9.10.3 Window hardware: .................................................................................. 9-213

9.11 Glazing .................................................................................................................... 9-213
9.11.1 General .................................................................................................... 9-213
9.11.2 Materials .................................................................................................. 9-213
9.11.3 Size, Delivery and Storage ...................................................................... 9-213
9.11.4 Installation .............................................................................................. 9-214
9.11.5 Cleaning up ............................................................................................. 9-214
9.12 Sanitary Installation ................................................................................................. 9-214
9.12.1 Connections to equipment and fixtures ................................................. 9-214
9.13 Painting .................................................................................................................... 9-218
9.13.1 General .................................................................................................... 9-218
9.13.2 Contractor's responsibility ...................................................................... 9-218
10 Metalwork ..................................................................................................... 10-228
10.1 Scope .................................................................................................................. 10-228
10.1.1 General .................................................................................................. 10-228
10.2 Welding and heat treatment .................................................................................. 10-228
10.2.1 General .................................................................................................. 10-228
10.3 Flooring .................................................................................................................. 10-229
10.3.1 General .................................................................................................. 10-229
10.4 Laddering and stairways ....................................................................................... 10-232
10.4.1 General .................................................................................................. 10-232
10.4.2 Ladders .................................................................................................. 10-232
10.4.3 Steel stairways ....................................................................................... 10-233
10.5 Rainwater Guttering .............................................................................................. 10-233
10.6 Miscellaneous .......................................................................................................... 10-233
11 Site Works..................................................................................................... 11-236
11.1 General .................................................................................................................. 11-236
11.1.1 Scope ...................................................................................................... 11-236
11.1.2 Materials and Standards ....................................................................... 11-236
11.1.3 General Requirements for Road Works ............................................... 11-237
11.1.4 Reinstatement of existing Roads and Footpaths.................................. 11-237
11.2 Roads and Pavements ............................................................................................ 11-237
11.2.1 Formation and Sub-grade .................................................................... 11-237
11.2.2 Sub-base and Road base ....................................................................... 11-238
11.2.3 Sealing of Surfaces ............................................................................... 11-238
11.2.4 Flexible Road Surfacing ....................................................................... 11-239

11.2.5 Concrete Paved Areas ........................................................................... 11-239
11.2.6 Kerbs ...................................................................................................... 11-240
11.2.7 Footpaths ............................................................................................... 11-240
11.2.8 Disposal of Surplus Material ................................................................ 11-241
11.3 Drainage Works ...................................................................................................... 11-241
11.3.1 Piped Systems ........................................................................................ 11-241
11.3.2 Open Channels ...................................................................................... 11-241
11.4 Fencing .................................................................................................................. 11-242
11.4.1 General .................................................................................................. 11-242
11.4.2 Standard Fencing.................................................................................. 11-242
11.4.3 Security Fencing ................................................................................... 11-243
11.4.4 Gates ...................................................................................................... 11-243
11.5 Topsoiling and Landscaping.................................................................................. 11-243
11.5.1 Topsoiling .............................................................................................. 11-243
11.5.2 Grassing................................................................................................. 11-244
11.5.3 Shrubs and Trees .................................................................................. 11-244
11.5.4 Dressing of Topsoil ............................................................................... 11-244
11.6 Auxiliary Works ..................................................................................................... 11-244
Annex 1: Civil Specifications

1 Introduction
This Part of the Specification sets out the technical standards of design and materials to be
supplied and work to be carried out by the Contractor. Mention of any specific material or
plant does not necessarily imply that such is included in the Works.
All Civil Works shall, unless otherwise specified, comply with the provisions of this Section.
The names of the manufacturers of materials proposed for incorporation in the Works, shall
be furnished by the Contractor when so requested by the Project Manager who shall have
power to reject any parts which in his opinion are unsatisfactory or not in compliance with
the Specification.
2 Standards
The Civil Works shall comply as a minimum with International Standards ISO, EN, BS,
ASTM or DIN, with the respective Codes of Practice and Standards generally used for waste
water treatment plant internationally, adapted to the local conditions, shall be used as an
alternative subject to written approval by the Project Manager.
Where no standards are specified in the present Section or any other Section of the Contract,
the above defined Standards or other international Standards shall apply.
Where specific Standards are mentioned, they may be exchanged by other International
Standards that rule on similar objects, works and/or activities.
Where there is conflict between this Technical Specification and the relevant Standard, the
Technical Specification shall take precedence.
Materials supplied and work performed shall comply with these standards and regulations as
a minimum. If manufacturers offer material to other standards, the standards shall be equal or
superior to those specified and full details of the difference shall be supplied to the Project
Manager if requested.
3 Testing of Materials
3.1 Sampling and Testing of Soils and Fill Materials
Sampling and testing of soils and fill materials includes for trial pits, inspection of
excavations and sampling and testing of soils, aggregates and all materials used for backfill
and embankments.
3.2 Sampling and Testing of Construction Materials

Sampling and testing of construction materials includes the provision of samples of materials
and workmanship as well as the testing and quality control of aggregates, cement, concrete
and other building materials.
4 Temporary Facilities
4.1 General
The Contractor shall supply a detail design specifying all temporary facilities that he intends
to organize on Site – stores, workshops, temporary and access roads, water, power and
sewerage supply services etc.- to the Project Manager.
4.2 Temporary Office

A temporary office or offices for the Contractor, shall be established in proximity to or on the
site and shall be adequately furnished, and maintained in a clean, orderly condition by the
Contractor for the duration of construction. The Contractor or his authorized representative
shall be present in the office at all times while Work is in progress.
5 Preparatory Works
5.1 General - Works included
Preparatory Works as specified hereunder shall include site clearance, the conservation of
structures and trees and the removal of all structures and . The materials so obtained shall be
reserved for further use, when considered suitable, and all rubbish and material unsuitable for
further use shall be removed from the site.
5.2 Site Clearance

All areas of the site, marked on drawings for clearance or from which material has to be
excavated or upon which fillings have to be deposited shall be levelled and be cleared from
all debris, all obstructions and all vegetation except trees marked for conservation. Excess
materials obtained from site clearance shall be disposed off the site at locations to be found
by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager.
5.3 Stripping of Topsoil

Topsoil shall be stripped from the site where the works are being constructed, where site
vehicles travel, where bulk materials are stored or provided in the Contract or in accordance
with the Contractor's design. Topsoil shall be stripped from the whole working area and shall
be stored in tidy, stable and well drained stockpiles until required for later use.
All surface areas for which stripping of top soil has not been ordered, but has been disturbed
by the Contractor’s operations shall be reinstated, at the Contractor’s expense, to the original
condition including providing and placing of top soil to a minimum thickness of 15 cm.
Topsoil shall be stockpiled on the site in stacks not more than 1.5 m high and shall not be
traversed by any plant. The stock-piles of topsoil shall be grassed and kept free of weeds by
treatment with a foliar acting herbicide..
6 Earthworks
6.1 General
The Contractor shall be responsible for all excavations and the disposal of excavated
materials as required for the construction of the works and referred to herein as earthworks.
No earthworks shall commence until the Contractor has affected all safety measures,
including the provision of barriers and traffic management measures.
The earthworks shall be executed in accordance with the applicable Palestinian standards,
norms and regulations, and if such do not exist the work shall be performed in accordance
with internationally recognized standards and norms.
6.2 Relocation of possible utilities

The Contractor shall take all steps necessary to find, protect and safeguard any drains, pipes,
cables and similar services encountered, already installed or to be installed, for the duration
of the contract in order to keep them in good working condition. Should the services become
damaged during the course of the works, then the Contractor shall be responsible for liaising
with the responsible utility companies or organisations and arranging for the repair of that
service and bear all costs associated with the repair of the service.
Information as may be given in the contract in relation to the present condition and character
of the existing structures, roadways, embankments and the like and in relation to the
dimensions of various parts of the existing structures, the position, extent and particulars of
drains, pipes, cables and the like, is given without guarantee of accuracy and neither the
Employer nor the Project Manager will be liable for any discrepancy therein. The Contractor
shall follow GC Clause 9 regarding its responsibilities for a proper examination of the data
relating to the Facilities and the Site of HRWWTP.
The absence of such information shall not relieve the Contractor of this liability for the cost
of any repair work necessitated by damage caused by him to such mains and services in the
course of his work and for the cost of all losses arising from their disruption.
6.3 Excavation
6.3.1 General
Earth excavation shall consist of excavating, removing and disposing of satisfactorily any
material, regardless of the material encountered for all parts of the works.
Earth excavation is excavation of any naturally occurring or man-made or placed material

that can be removed manually or by mechanical shovel, bulldozer or ripper.
The Contractor shall also remove unsuitable materials/soils or excess soils from the site and
dispose it in a proper manner and location. Unsuitable material shall e.g. include:
- Peat, timber and perishable material;
- Material susceptible to spontaneous combustion;

- Clay with a liquid limit exceeding 80 and having a plasticity index exceeding 55; and
- Materials having moisture content greater than the maximum permitted for such materials.
If areas of excavation are not accessible for earthmoving equipment due to limited working
space, traffic or any other reason, excavation shall be carried out manually.
The Contractor shall make records of the position and extent in excavations of every type of
service and obstruction encountered during the construction of the works, and samples taken
and the results of tests on such samples.
The extent of excavations shall be kept to a minimum practicable for construction of the
works, and all over-excavation shall be filled with suitable material and adequately
compacted.
The earth excavation shall be organised taking into consideration the local conditions as can
be interpreted from the investigations made by the Contractor.
6.3.2 Antiquities
If during the excavation antiquities are encountered, notice will be given to the Project
Manager and work will cease until Project Managers approval for continuation.
6.3.3 Dewatering
The excavation works will include dewatering of the excavation if accumulation occurs
either from surface water or ground water.
6.3.4 Excavation for structures

Excavation for structures includes removal and disposal of material for all structural
excavation.
Should the surface of excavations at foundation level become deteriorated through any cause
whatsoever, then the Contractor shall further excavate all materials that has become
unsuitable, and replace it- at his own expense- with suitable material and in adequate manner.
6.3.5 Tolerance
Unless otherwise specified no point of the surface of the completed earthwork shall be more
than +/- 50 mm from the designed surface. Within the above tolerances, the surface shall
have a smooth regular face .
Bed levels of drains shall not be higher, (tolerance 0), or more than 200 mm lower than the
correct level.
6.3.6 Slips, falls and excess excavations

The Contractor shall prevent slips and falls of materials from the sides of the excavations and
embankments.
In the event of slips or falls occurring in the excavations, and where excavations are made in
excess of the specified dimensions, then any unsuitable material that has entered into the
excavation is to be removed from the excavation, and the additional backfilling that may be
required is to be carried out with selected excavated or imported material and adequately
compacted.
6.3.7 Safety of excavation and adjacent structures

The Contractor shall provide support necessary to ensure the stability of the excavation and
adjacent roads and structures. The support may be made with sheet-pile walls, holding walls,
open caissons or pneumatic caissons etc. Prior to execution of the excavation works the
contractor shall prepare and file the calculations and method description of the proposed
work.
6.3.8 Laboratory tests

The contractor shall carry out soil tests according to BS 1377 and file the results. On average
tests will be carried out in a density of one sample per 100 m² evenly spread.
6.4 Preparation of foundation

The work under this description shall consist of preparing the foundation, which is to be the
base for structures, buildings, roads, pipes etc. All foundations shall be free of loose material,
remoulded debris or other deleterious and organic materials.. Any foundation areas shall be
well-graded for proper drainage and said grading shall be maintained at all times.
Foundations, except where limited by structures, which are to receive fill or structures shall
be scarified and loosened by means of a disc harrow or plough or similar quality methods to
a depth of no more than 200 mm unless such loosening is not needed.. Scarifying shall be
done approximately parallel to the centre line of the fill.
If any unsound material occurs in the bottom of any excavation, the Contractor shall remove
it and dispose it . Unless otherwise specified , the Contractor shall fill the voids so formed
with concrete grade C16/20 or with suitable granular material.
After removal of all unsuitable materials, the entire foundation area shall be graded, moisture
conditioned and thoroughly compacted to the required compaction degree.
The period between completion of preparation of foundation and the construction of the
overlaying works shall be kept as short as possible.
6.5 Backfilling and filling

6.5.1 Fill materials in general
Fill material shall not contain roots, frozen material, organic or otherwise unsuitable
materials. No fill material shall be placed in any of the permanent works until its foundation
has been prepared as specified.
Fill materials shall be handled, placed, spread and compacted in such a manner as to avoid
segregation of the fill and to obtain a stable, homogeneous compacted structure.
When organising his work, the Contractor shall take due account of the climatic conditions,
which may be expected in the area. Should placed material by any cause become
unacceptable, the Contractor shall remove such material or shall process it until all
specifications are met. Such work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Employer.
Unless otherwise specified, the material used for backfill and fill shall be excavated material
of particle size not exceeding 75 mm.
Backfill against the permanent works shall be selected, and free from boulders, cobbles, rock
fragments and the like greater than 50 mm nominal size.
Imported fill materials shall comprise the following materials all in accordance with the
relevant norms:
- Sand in fraction 0-7 mm;
- Gravel in fraction 7-15 mm; and
- River boulders in fraction 8-15 mm.
Where fill will be used below structures and building floors, the material shall consist of
durable gravel, broken stone, crushed concrete or sand with a particle size not exceeding 10
mm. The grading of the material shall be such that there is no migration of fines into the fill.
6.5.2 Placing and compaction of fill and backfill

The natural ground over which filling is to be placed shall be cleared of all loose boulders,
grass, productive soil, mud, bushes, trees, roots, other vegetation and other unsuitable
material.
Unless otherwise specified, fill shall be spread by machine or manually in successive

horizontal layers of not more than 200 mm loose depth and compacted to 100% Standard
Proctor.
Operations on earthwork shall be suspended at any time when satisfactory results cannot be
obtained because of rain, or other unsatisfactory field conditions. The Contractor shall drag,
blade, or slope the embankment to provide proper surface drainage.
The material in the layers shall be of the proper moisture content before compaction. Wetting
or drying of the material and manipulation when necessary to secure uniform moisture
content throughout the layer may be required.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect exposed faces against
deterioration.
The Contractor shall compact the fill using suitable compacting methods and equipment.
Backfilling shall not impose uneven or excessive load on a structure.
All material used for filling shall be deposited and compacted as soon as practicable after
excavation in layers of thickness appropriate to the compaction plant used. Filling of areas
and embankments shall be built up evenly over the full width and shall be maintained at all
times with a sufficient inclination and a surface sufficiently even to enable surface water to
drain readily from them.
6.5.3 Filling adjacent to structures

Filling against the perimeter of structures shall not be carried out until the construction is
sufficiently advanced implying no risk of interferences or damage from either the compaction
equipment or the backfilling material.
Where relevant hydraulic tests shall be conducted to verify the integrity of the structure
before backfilling.
Filling material for excavations and for making up levels within the perimeter of structures
shall be suitable material and shall contain no particular size in excess of 50 mm. The
compaction of fill material within the perimeter of structures shall be carried out with
equipment suited to the area being compacted..
6.5.4 Tolerances for filling

The fill shall be placed and compacted to a tolerance of –10 mm/+ 15 mm for a final surface.
Where further works will be carried out above the fill the tolerance shall be –25 mm/+0 mm.
Within the above tolerances the surface shall have a smooth regular face.
6.5.5 Control and testing of fill

Control testing shall be carried out by members of the Contractor's staff competent to
perform the required tests. Additional testing may be carried out at the discretion of the
Project Manager.
Soil compaction tests will be carried out according to the relevant standards.
6.5.6 Allowance for settlement

The Contractor shall make due allowance for consolidation and settlement of fill and
compacted fill such that the levels and dimensions of the finished surfaces at the end of the
contract (defects notification period) are within the tolerances specified.
6.6 Disposal of surplus material

Deposits of surplus suitable material and unsuitable materials are in the following referred to
as "soil dumps". Generally, the Contractor shall transport and dispose of all excavated
material not required for the works. The Contractor shall compact, trim and drain soil dumps
as may be necessary to maintain them in a sightly and stable condition.
Placing materials in soil dumps shall be such that it will not contaminate or otherwise render
less efficient usable lands or interfere with natural drainage or access. Where required drains
shall be constructed to prevent the undesirable accumulation of water in or around soil

dumps.
7 Pipeworks
7.1 General
The requirements covered by the present section are applicable for external, buried pipes
between treatment units, to/from pumping stations and to/from buildings and applies to e.g.
pipe systems for:
1. Wastewater;
2. Return, excess and floating sludge;
3. Treated wastewater for re-use;
4. Groundwater drainage (if required);
5. Aeration.
7.2 Information about pipe systems

Wastewater: The existing sewer which currently discharges to the Wadi.
7.3 Pipe materials

Generally all pipes, valves and pipe fittings installed shall conform to the relevant
international norms and standards. The Contractor shall file certificates showing that the
materials have been tested and comply with the requirements of this specification and the
relevant standard.
Pipes shall be ordered in the maximum lengths available to minimise the number of joints.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of all materials in sufficient quantities and
shall immediately prior to placing any order, especially for imported goods, ascertain the
required quantities.
In the following is listed the pipe materials that are found appropriate and relevant for
installation in the proposed wastewater treatment plant depending on the media to be
transported.
7.3.1 Concrete pipes

Un-reinforced and reinforced concrete pipes and fittings with flexible joints shall comply
with CEN Standard EN 1916. Concrete pipes shall be sealed with standard rubber ring
gaskets. Prior to use the jointing rings shall be stores in a cool place, protected from direct
sunlight and frost.
Pipes shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to meet any of the testing
requirements. Pipe sections also may by rejected if found to contain cracks, damaged ends
and other defects due to faulty manufacture, handling, transporting or placing.
In dimensions from ø200 to ø400 mm, connections to the sewer pipe can only be performed
with single branch fittings produced on factory. In dimensions from ø500 saddles may be
used but only saddles using direct drilling in the concrete pipe.
7.3.2 Concrete pipes with steel core.

All concrete pipes with steel core and fittings shall be manufactured by a quality assured
manufacturer in accordance with the ISO 9000 system. The concrete pipes with steel cores,
fittings and joints shall be manufactured in accordance with CEN Standard EN 1916.
Generally, all buried pipes shall be jointed using steel spigot and steel socket which should
be covered with concrete.
7.3.3 PVC and PP pipes

All PVC and PP pipes shall be manufactured by a quality assured manufacture in accordance
with the ISO 9000 system. Un-plasticized PVC pipes and fittings for gravity drainage and
sewerage shall comply with the relevant provisions of CEN Standard EN 1401, PP pipes
shall comply with CEN Standard EN 1852. Un-plasticized PVC pipes and fittings for
pressure pipes shall comply with the relevant provisions of CEN-standard EN 1452.
All connections to PVC and PP pipes must be performed by using single 45 branch; no
saddle must be used.
Only pipes with ring stiffness larger than 8 kN/m² may be used. Reference is made to ISO
9969.
PVC and PP pipes cannot be installed outside, unless adequately protected, due to intense
sunlight.
7.3.4 HDPE pipes

All HDPE pipes and fittings shall be manufactured by a quality assured manufacturer in
accordance with the ISO 9000 system. HDPE pipes shall be manufactured from PE 100
material, as classified by the European Technical Committee Report CEN/TC 155. In
accordance with ISO 12162 the PE 100 material shall have a minimum required strength
(MRS) value of 10 MPa. The pipes and fittings shall be coloured differently coloured for
potable water, gas and wastewater and be suitable for below-ground use. Proposed colors
need approval from the Project Manager.
PE pipes and fittings shall comply with the relevant provisions of CEN-standard EN12201
(water and wastewater) and EN1555 (gas).
Generally, all buried pipes shall be jointed using either butt or electro fusion welding
techniques. Internal weld beads shall be removed. Small diameter pipes (diameter<63 mm),
pipes within structures and pipes connecting to metal fittings shall be jointed using
mechanical jointing techniques, such as compression, flanged joints or push-fit joints. The
welder and fitter must have a certificate issued by the pipe manufacturer within the last year.
7.3.5 GRP pipelines

All GRP pipes and fittings shall be manufactured by a quality assured manufacturer in
accordance with the ISO 9000 system. The GRP pipes, fittings and joints shall be
manufactured in accordance with ISO 10467.3 and shall have a minimum required strength
of 10 MPa.
Generally, all buried pipes shall be jointed using spigot and socket or flexible joints.
7.3.6 Ductile Iron pipes

All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be manufactured by a quality assured manufacturer in
accordance with the ISO 9000 system. The ductile iron pipes, fittings and joints shall be
manufactured in accordance with ISO 7186 and shall have a minimum required strength of
10 MPa. The ductile iron pipeline is provided with a high alumina cement lining in
accordance with ISO 4179. All gaskets shall be produced in accordance with ISO 4633. The
pipeline is protected with zinc aluminium lining.
Generally, all buried pipes shall be jointed using spigot and socket.
7.3.7 Steel pipes

All steel pipes and fittings shall be manufactured by a quality assured manufacturer in
accordance with the ISO 9000 system. The steel pipes grade GRA, fittings and joints shall be
manufactured in accordance with ISO ASTM A 53 and shall have a minimum required
strength of 10 MPa. The pipeline is provided with a cement mortar lining in accordance with
PS 325-1 The pipeline is protected with a PE coating in accordance with PS 325-6.
Generally, all buried pipes shall be jointed using but welding or spigot and socket.
7.4 Transportation of pipes

Any vehicle on which pipes are to be transported shall have a body of such length that the
pipes do not overhang. The pipes shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Suitable slings shall be used and all hooks and dogs and other metal
devices shall be padded. Hooks engaged on the inner wall surface at pipe ends shall not be
used. Pipe handling equipment shall be maintained in good repair and any equipment that
may cause damage to the pipes shall be discarded.
Under no circumstances shall pipes be dropped, be allowed to strike on another, be rolled

freely, or dragged along the ground.
7.5 Storage of pipes

All pipes shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, in order to
preserve their quality and condition to the standards set out in the specification. Particular
care shall be taken in respect to HDPE, PVC and GRP pipes, e.g. PVC-pipes shall not be
exposed to direct sunshine.
All pipe ends shall be covered.
Pipes and fittings shall be stored raised from the ground and shall be carefully supported
cushioned and wedged. Pipes shall not rest directly on one another and shall not be stacked
more than four pipes high, or two pipes high in the case of pipes greater than DN 500.
Couplings and joints (and all components thereof) and other similar items shall be stored in
dry conditions, raised from the ground in sheds or covered areas.
Storage areas shall be carefully set out to facilitate unloading, loading and checking of
materials with different consignments stacked or stored separately with identifications marks
clearly visible.
7.6 Inspection of pipes and fittings

Before incorporation into the pipeline each pipe shall be brushed out and carefully examined
for soundness. Damaged pipes, which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, shall be rejected and
removed from the site.
If 10% or more of the pipes within a test length have failed, the Contractor shall test
hydraulically, to the site test pressure each pipe and joint before pipe lying. In this event, test
results shall be filed and issued with progress reports
The Contractor shall inspect all joints and file results.
Filing results will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to excavate and permit the
inspection of the joints during the testing of the pipeline, if necessary.
7.7 Installation
7.7.1 General
Installation of pipelines includes supply, laying and jointing of pipes and fittings,
construction of beddings and foundations, manholes and other structures in the line, testing,
and commissioning.
Pipes shall be laid in accordance with:

- Gravity pipes (EN 1610) and
- Pressure pipes (EN 805).
All plant, operation and haulage required from source or store to bring the pipes, valves, etc.,
to their place of laying of fixing, including any unloading into temporary storage areas and
any subsequent reloading for haulage to the place of laying shall be included in the supply of
pipes and fittings.
During installation pipes are to be suitably anchored to prevent flotation while backfilling.
All pipes shall be laid accurately and handled in accordance with the Manufacturer's
instructions. The pipes shall be laid into the trench on the bedding material and joints made.
During installation careful checking and supervision shall ensure that the pipes are laid to the
correct line and grade, and sealed at each joint, fitting, branch and manhole. The level of the
grading and the pipe shall be checked with a laser.
7.7.2 Excavation for pipes in trenches

Whether trenches for pipe lines are constructed with vertical, sloping, or stepped sides, that
portion of the trench which extends from the foundation level to not less than 300 mm above
the crown of the pipe when laid in its correct position, shall unless otherwise specified, be
formed with vertical sides the minimum practical distance apart.
The minimum trench width shall follow requirements as stated in CEN- EN 1610, table 1. If
the trench dept exceeds more than 1.5 meters a trench box system shall be used.
Pipe trenches shall as far as practicable be kept free of surface or ground water.
No excavations with battered sides shall be made in roads, footpaths or within 10 m of any
existing or proposed building or other structure.
The material excavated from the trenches shall be handled with care, with asphalt, stone
blocks, rock and stone from road construction or broken out of the trench during excavation,
stock piled separately from the granular material of the natural ground.
7.7.3 Foundation and bedding

Unless specified otherwise, pipelines shall be laid in trenches excavated in the ground
conforming to the above section ”Excavation for pipes in trenches”. Unless unsuitable soil is
encountered, trenches shall be excavated to 250 mm below the barrel of the pipe and
prepared conforming to the following.
On the trench bottom sand bedding shall be laid to a compacted thickness of 250 mm. The
bedding sand shall comply with CEN EN 1610. Pipe bedding to concrete pipes shall contain
no more than 0.3% sulphate. The bedding shall be compacted to 95% of the standard
maximum dry density. The level tolerance for the bedding shall be 10 mm.
For pipes over 400 mm, the height of the bedding shall be 5% of the diameter plus 250 mm.
The additional layer shall be shaped concentrically with the pipe along the bedding angle.
Where pipes are jointed, bell holes of ample dimensions shall be formed in the bedding to
ensure that each pipe is uniformly supported throughout the length of its barrel and to enable
the joint to be made. Pipes shall be laid on sufficient setting blocks only where a concrete bed
or cradle is used.
Pipe bedding will have to be imported to the site.
The bedding material shall be spread over the full width of the foundation and lightly hand
compacted to a level slightly higher than the level corresponding to the underside of the pipe
barrel to allow for settlement of the pipe to the correct level.
Further granular material shall be placed in the trench, special care being taken to fill under
the sides of the pipe to ensure full contact with the barrel of the pipe, but leaving the joint
exposed for a length of approximately 200 mm on each side of the joint collar, sleeve or
socket. The granular material shall then be compacted evenly on both sides of the pipe.
Clay, or other equally suitable impermeable material barriers shall be constructed to limit the
uninterrupted length of granular bedding and backfill to a maximum of 500 m.
7.7.4 Jointing and cutting

All joints shall comply with the relevant provisions of the appropriate international standard
and shall be made to the manufacturer’s recommendations and the specifications hereafter.
Flanged joints shall be properly aligned before any bolts are tightened. Gaskets for flanged
joints shall be of the inside-bolt-circle type. Jointing compounds shall not be used when
making flanged joints, except that to facilitate the making of vertical joints, gaskets may by
secured temporarily to one flange face by a minimum quantity of clear rubber solution. Bolt
threads shall be treated with graphite paste and the nuts shall be tightened evenly in
diametrically opposite pairs. Nuts shall be secured against loosening by vibration.
Rubber joint rings for water mains and drainage purposes shall be obtained from the pipe
manufacturer. Joint lubricants for sliding joints and used for jointing water pipes shall not
impart to water taste, colour, or any effect known to be injurious to health, and shall be
resistant to bacterial growth.
Unless specified otherwise joints having exposed mild steel components shall be cleaned and
all loose rust shall be removed. The internal lining in a gap, which has been left for the joint
to be made, shall be completed in accordance with the recommendations of supplier, unless
specified otherwise. The external protection shall comprise bitumen applied to a thickness of
not less than one millimetre on to the external surface of the joint, followed where
appropriate by a spiral wrap of heavy duty glass fibre tape bonded with hot bitumen.
For closing lengths, it may be necessary to cut pipes of various materials. Pipes shall be cut
by a method which provides a clean square profile without splitting or fracturing the pipe
wall, and which causes minimum damage to any protective coating. Where necessary, the cut
ends of pipes shall be formed to the tapers and chamfers suitable for the type of joint to be
used and any protective coatings shall be made good.
Where ductile pipes larger than 450 mm diameter are to be cut to form non-standard lengths,
the Contractor shall comply with the Manufacturer’s recommendations in respect of ovality
correction to the cut spigot end.
Where cut concrete pipes are used any exposes reinforcement shall be sealed with a suitable
epoxy resin.
7.7.5 Curves and bends

The pipes shall be laid in straight lines where possible. Curves of long radius shall be
obtained by deflection at the joints. The deflection of the joints for this purpose shall not be
more than 50% of the maximum deflection as specified by the pipe manufacturer for the
relevant type of joint. Where a required change of direction cannot be obtained by deflection
of the joints, prefabricated bends shall be used.
Concrete thrust blocks shall be provided to pressure pipelines at reducers, tee junctions, caps,
etc, and curves or bends deflecting 11.25o or more, except where welded steel pipes or self
anchoring joints are used. The type and size of thrust blocks shall be in accordance with the
drawings.
Concrete for thrust blocks shall comply with all the relevant requirements of Section
"Concrete Works" and shall be placed carefully against undisturbed earth or rock with
suitable bearing capacity and shall in no case be less than 150 mm of cover to the pipe.
Concrete shall be grade C16/20. When casting thrust blocks no couplings or joints shall be
covered, and if required the pipe with fittings shall be firmly fixed to the block by a suitable
stainless steel strap belted to the block. Where timber shuttering has been used such timber
shall be removed before backfilling. The concrete shall be allowed to develop adequate
strength prior to any pressure being applied to the pipeline.
7.7.6 Backfilling of pipe trench

After excavation of the trench, placing and compacting the bedding, laying the pipe and
concreting the thrust blocks the pipe must be surrounded by fill or concrete (if protection is
required). Unless otherwise specified, the space between the sides of the trench and the pipe
must be backfilled with the same material as for the bedding. It shall be placed and
compacted in accordance with the requirements of section ”Backfilling and Filling”. Special
care must be taken to backfill on both sides of the pipe evenly to support the pipe properly
and avoid distortion of the pipe. Unless specified otherwise the pipe surround is continued up
to a level 200 mm above the pipe crown. The layers shall be compacted, in layers not
exceeding 100 mm thick after compacting, by small manually manoeuvred compaction plant
on each side of the pipe only. Mechanical compaction of the main backfill directly above the
pipe may not be commenced until there is a total depth of cover at least 300 mm above the
top of the pipe. Site test shall be made to prove the effectiveness of the method of
compacting.
The trench above the so finished pipe surround shall be filled with fill complying with the
requirements of section "Earthworks" and shall be compacted flush with ground level
according to the requirements of the chapter "Backfilling and Filling". Trench supports shall
be gradually withdrawn in accordance with the progress of the fill subject at all times to the
provision that such withdrawal will not prejudice the safety of all works.
7.7.7 Concrete bedding and surrounding

Where pipes are surfacing or having less than the required ground cover of 750 mm, pipes
shall be surrounded by concrete grade C25/30. The pipes shall be supported on regularly
spaced blocks in accordance with any recommendations from the manufacturer. Plastic pipes
to receive concrete bed and surround shall be closely wrapped in a sheet of plastic (nominal
thickness 120 µm).
For pipes with flexible joints, compressible filler shall be cut and placed at each pipe joint
over the entire cross section of the concrete.
Concrete shall be poured in a single operation and shall comply with the requirements of
Section "Concrete Works". Pipes shall be secured against lifting or moving during pouring of
concrete.
7.7.8 Inspection through manufacturer

The Contractor shall provide for the pipe manufacturer's representative to be on site so as to
inspect and certify that the pipes have been installed in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's instructions.
7.7.9 Pressure Test of Pipes

The Contractor shall perform pressure tests according to the following instructions for all
pressure piping.
The Contractor shall provide and mount all for the pressure tests necessary equipment.
If pressure tests are made against closed valves the guidelines from the manufacturer of the
valves regarding the highest single side pressure against closed valve shall be complied with.
Hydraulic pressure tests shall be carried out by the use of potable water.
During pressure tests a minimum of 1.5 times maximum allowed operating pressure shall be
maintained.
The Contractor shall prior to pressure testing verify on the spot that the piping is fully
evacuated from air.
After successful and documented pressure test the piping shall be emptied and the pressure
test fluid shall be disposed of. If it is not possible to perform visual inspection of leaks of all
welded joints, the piping shall be tested according to the following guidelines:
- Piping is tested with a test pressure of minimum 1.5 times maximum allowed operating
pressure. The pressure shall be held for at least four hours.
- During the pressure hold period no water shall be allowed to be added, and
- All visible welding joints, flange joints and glands on valves and pumps shall be
inspected.
The acceptance criterion demands no detected leaks.
After the pressure tests have been finalised the Contractor shall elaborate and file a report.
The report shall as a minimum include:
- Pressure Test Procedure,
- Unambiguous references to piping or part of piping and shut-off,
- Specification of test pressure,
- The period of the pressure tests,
- Results and signature of acceptance, and
- A description of atypical testing results, their causes and corrective action.
7.8 Manholes and chambers

All chambers for valves etc. shall be constructed from precast units that are interlocking and
comply with the requirements of CEN-standard EN1917.
All manholes shall be constructed from reinforced concrete or precast concrete chambers.
Stone-work or brick-work shall not be used. Unless otherwise indicated they shall be
provided with a reinforced concrete cover slab and with a ductile iron cover and frame in a
square, rectangular or circular opening in areas with traffic. The clear opening shall be a
minimum of 600 mm diameter or square and the edges of the opening are to be chamfered.
Covers are to be suitable for the anticipated loading in road minimum 40 tonnes (class D400)
and in pavement minimum 12.5 tonnes (class B125) and are to comply with the provisions of
CEN-standard EN 124. They shall be set in mortar to be free from surface imperfections or
blemishes.
Joints shall be made with sealing rings of vulcanised rubber; no other sealing material must
be used.
Manholes on gravity sewers will have to be placed where change in slope, dimension and
direction occur. Maximum spacing of manholes is 60 meters. Min. Ø 1000 mm manholes
shall be placed where intersections are connected.
On gravity sewer pipes bends and reductions shall occur in manholes only.
All concrete shall be grade C30/37 and shall meet the requirements of section "Concrete
Work". The concrete shall be watertight and have a thickness of not less than 200 mm and
incorporate water stops.
Rung irons or step irons are to be provided. Their size and strength shall be suitable for
access to the manhole with a maximum vertical spacing between steps of 350 mm in a
vertical alignment.
Pipes passing through the concrete walls of a manhole shall be provided with ductile iron or
steel spool pieces with puddle flanges. A flexible joint shall be situated as close as
practicable to the outside face of any manhole or other structure.
Manhole inverts and benching in sewer pipes, drains and culverts shall be formed in concrete
grade C30/37 to the same gradient and diameter as the connected pipework and with a
smooth finish.
7.9 Tolerances
Pipes shall be laid accurately to the lines and levels shown in the design. The maximum
permitted deviation from the specified line and level for pipelines shall be:
- Up to 600 mm: 10 mm
- Greater than 600 mm: 15 mm.
However, negative gradients are not accepted.

8 Concrete Works
8.1 Materials
8.1.1 General
Materials used in the works shall be new, good and of the qualities and kinds specified
herein. Delivery shall be made sufficiently in advance to enable further samples to be taken
and tested if required. Materials considered not suitable shall be immediately removed from
the works at the Contractor's cost.
All specified properties of the concrete-making materials shall be tested with a frequency to
ensure continuous compliance with the requirements, and whenever new materials are to be
used.
Materials shall be transported, handled and stored on the site or elsewhere in such a manner
as to prevent damage, deterioration, or contamination.
8.1.2 Cement
Cement shall be from an renown and suitable source and shall be low alkali cement and
sulphate-resistant or ordinary Portland cement complying with EN197.
In addition low alkali cement used in the works shall contain less than 0.6% alkali (expressed
as Na2O + 0.658 K2O).
Cement shall be delivered in sealed manufacturer's branded bags or barrels, each

consignment accompanied by the manufacturer's test certificates. Damaged bags or barrels
shall be rejected. Each bag shall be used on the day of opening; bags opened on the previous
day shall be rejected. All rejected cement including that which has become affected by damp
conditions is to be removed from site within 48 hours.
Cement stored on site shall be protected from the weather and raised from the ground.
Cement shall be used in the order in which it is delivered.
Cement temperature shall not exceed 60C when used.
Cement shall not be used after 6 months from its manufacture date or after it has been held in
store for 3 months, unless it is tested and satisfies the relevant EN Standards. Each re-test
certificate shall be valid for a period of 6 months.
Each consignment of cement delivered to the site must be accompanied by a certificate

showing the place and date of manufacture and the results of standard tests carried out on the
bulk supply from which the cement was manufactured.
8.1.3 Water
Water for use in concrete, mortar mixing and curing shall be obtained from a suitable source
and shall be of a quality as not to affect the setting time, strength, durability of the concrete
or mortar, or the appearance of hardened concrete or mortar by discolouration or
efflorescence, nor the reinforcement at any age of the concrete or mortar.
Water shall be clean, potable, blended or unblended, with a pH between 5.0 and 9.0 and shall
be tested in accordance with EN 1008. The following limits shall not be exceeded:
- Total dissolved solids (TDS) not greater than 2000 ppm
- Suspended solids not greater than 2000 ppm
- Chlorides (Cl) not greater than 500 ppm
- Sulphates (SO4) not greater than 1000 ppm
- Alkali (HCO3/CO3) not greater than 1000 ppm.
Water shall be stored in suitable and clean containers which are protected from sun, wind,
dust, organic contamination or from contamination by any other source.
8.1.4 Aggregates
Materials used as aggregates shall be obtained from a source known to produce aggregates
satisfactory for concrete and shall be chemically inert, strong, hard, durable, of limited
porosity and free from adhering coatings, clay lumps, coal and coal residues and organic or
other impurities that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or may impair the strength or
durability of the concrete. Aggregates shall be natural gravels or crushed stone complying
with EN 12620.
The aggregates used in the concrete mix shall not cause damage or weakening of the
concrete.
Aggregates shall be stored and handled only on suitable impervious free draining platforms
with concrete block walls separating different grades. Stock piles shall be built in 1.50 m
(maximum) layers and segregation of the aggregates shall be prevented. All aggregates
which have become segregated shall be removed. All aggregates stored on site shall be
covered with suitable sheeting until required for mixing. Aggregates which have become
contaminated whilst stored on site shall be removed.
Fine Aggregates
Sand for concrete shall comply with EN 12620. It shall not contain more than 3% voided
shells (as determined by direct visual separation).
Artificial or manufactured sand will not be acceptable.
The maximum permitted concentration of chlorides and sulphates expressed as percentage by

weight of dry sand are 0.06% (as acid soluble Cl-) and 0,4% (as acid soluble SO4)
respectively.
The blending of crushed stone fines may be permitted provided that the blended product
meets all the requirements for fine aggregates. Materials finer than 75 micron size - ISO 3310
test - shall not exceed 5% by weight. If the materials finer than 75 microns - according to
ISO 3310 test - consist of the dust of fracture, essentially free of clay or shale, the limit can
be increased to 7% by weight.
Absorption shall not exceed 5%.
Magnesium sulphate soundness weight loss shall not exceed 10% after five cycles (ASTM
C88).
When tested for organic impurities the colour shall be lighter than the reference standard
colour (ASTM C40).
When tested for potential alkali reactivity (ASTM C 227) the expansion shall be less than
0.05% at 3 months. Alternatively the potential alkali reactivity can be tested in accordance
with ASTM C 289 and the evaluation done in accordance with ASTM C 33, Appendix XI.
Coarse Aggregates
Coarse aggregates for concrete shall be hard and durable stone, produced by mechanical
crushing, e.g. by jaw, impact or cone crushers or other mechanical means.
The maximum permitted content of chlorides and sulphates by weight of dry aggregates are
0.03% (as acid soluble Cl-) and 0,4% (as acid soluble SO4) respectively.
Coarse aggregate for use in all classes of concrete shall be provided for batching as single
sized aggregates of 40 mm, 20 mm and 10 mm nominal size proportioned in such ratio as to
give a uniform gradation.
Absorption shall not exceed 2.5% (EN 12620).
Flakiness index and elongation index shall not exceed 25% (EN 12620).
Coarse aggregate shall not contain more than 5% soft fragments (ASTM C 235).
Magnesium sulphate soundness weight loss shall not exceed 10% after five cycles (ASTM
C88).
When tested for potential alkali reactivity (ASTM C 227) the expansion shall be less than
0.05% at 3 months. Alternatively the potential alkali reactivity can be tested in accordance
with ASTM C 289 and the evaluation done in accordance with ASTM C 33, Appendix XI.
8.1.5 Admixtures
Admixtures shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, shall be
dispensed by suitable equipment, which provides a visible means of checking each dose, and
shall comply with the relevant EN standards.
The proposed dosages, the manufacturer's technical information and the results of trial mixes
shall be filed.
When more than one admixture is to be used in a concrete, the compatibility of the various
admixtures shall have been ascertained by standard tests and certified by the manufacturer(s).
No admixture containing chloride or nitrate shall be used.
8.1.6 Total Chloride and Sulphate Contents

For concrete made with sulphate-resistant cement the maximum total acid soluble chloride
content expressed as % of chloride ion by weight of cement shall be 0.200%.
The maximum total acid soluble sulphate content of the concrete mix from whatever source
expressed as % SO4 by weight of cement shall be 4.0.
8.1.7 Reinforcement
Reinforcement bars shall have strength equal to high yield steel bars and shall be profiled.
The characteristic yield stress shall be at least 420 N/mm2.
The Contractor shall file copies of the manufacturer's certificates of tests for the steel
reinforcement to be supplied.
All reinforcement shall be clean and free from pit corrosion, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil,
grease, adhering earth, or any other material that may impair the bond between the concrete
and the reinforcement or that which may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or may be
detrimental to the quality of the concrete.
8.1.8 Liquid Membrane - Curing Compound

Liquid membrane - curing compound shall comply with ASTM C 309, Type 1.
8.1.9 Water stops

Water stops shall be used in all construction joints. Web thickness shall not be less than 5
mm.
Water stops shall be either rubber or polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
8.1.10 Spacers
Spacers shall be made of concrete of same grade as the structure, for which they are to be
used.
8.2 Requirements/Workmanship
8.2.1 Formwork
Design and Construction
Formwork for concrete shall be rigidly constructed of either steel or blue wood and shall be
true to the shape and dimensions. Formwork shall be constructed of material or lined with
materials as may be necessary to achieve the finishes specified in this section. The formwork
design shall be filed.
All material brought on the site as forms, struts or braces shall be new materials.
Faces in contact with concrete shall be free from adhering grout, projecting nails, splits, or
other defects. Joints shall be sufficiently tight to prevent the leakage of cement grout and to
avoid the formation of fins or other blemishes. Faulty joints shall be caulked. 20 mm by 20
mm chamfers shall be formed on the external corners of concrete members, unless otherwise
specified. Internal corners shall similarly be provided with 20 mm fillets.
Formworks for exposed surfaces shall be laid out in a regular and uniform pattern with the
long dimension of panels vertical and all joints aligned.
If openings of the formwork for the escape of water used for washing out are made, they
shall be formed so that they can be conveniently closed before placing the concrete.
Connections shall be constructed to permit easy removal of the formwork and shall be strong
enough to retain the correct shape during consolidation of the concrete.
Metal ties or anchors within the form shall be so constructed as to permit their removal to a
depth of at least 50 mm from the face without injury to the concrete. All fittings for metal ties
shall be of such design that upon their removal the cavities which are left will be of the
smallest possible size. Spreader cones or ties shall not exceed 25 mm diameter. The cavities
shall be filled with cement mortar and the surface left sound, smooth, even and uniform in
colour.
Formwork shall be true to line and braced and strutted to prevent deformation under the
weight and pressure of the unset concrete, constructional loads, wind, and other forces.
Beams spanning more than 3 metres shall have an upward camber of 1½ mm per m of span.
Concrete shall normally not be placed in lifts deeper than 3 m. For lifts higher than 3 m
openings for placing the concrete shall be provided in order to avoid segregation of the
concrete.
A suitable mould oil or other material shall be applied to faces of formwork to prevent
adherence of the concrete. Such coatings shall be insoluble in water, non-staining, and non-
injurious to the concrete. Liquids that retard the setting of concrete shall not be used. Mould
oil, retarding liquid, and similar coatings shall be kept from contact with the reinforcement or
previously cast concrete.
Before any concrete is placed, forms shall be properly cleaned by washing out with water
and/or air under pressure to remove sawdust, shavings, metal and other foreign matter. All
water shall then be drained and mopped out from the formwork.
Construction Tolerances
The tolerances within which concrete work shall be constructed are as summarized below:
Item of construction Permissible deviation (mm)

- Position in plan: ± 20 mm
- Size and shapes:
- Thickness of walls and slab ± 6 mm
- Columns and beams ± 6 mm.
- Dimensions of foundations: + 50 mm to -0.0 mm.
- Variation from plumb: (vertically - up to 5 m) ± 12 mm.
- Levels to slabs and beams: ± 10 mm.
 Holes:
- Placement: ± 10 mm
- Sizes: ± 3 mm.
 Cast-in items:
- Placement: ± 10 mm
- Distance between interconnected items: ± 2 mm.
The Contractor is responsible for keeping the deviations of the finished concrete structure
within the limits given, and any rectification of work not constructed within the tolerances set
out shall be entirely at the expense of the Contractor.
Removal of Formwork
Formwork shall be removed by gradual easing without jarring. Before removal of the
formwork the concrete shall be examined and removal shall proceed only in the presence of a
competent supervisor and only if the concrete has attained sufficient strength to support its
own weight and any load likely to be imposed upon it.
The following striking time given in maturity days are the absolute minimum that will be
permitted:
- Soffits 10 days
- Sides 4 days.
Loads shall not be placed on concrete before the following periods after casting:
- Columns, walls, beams, slabs, etc. 14 days
- Foundations 10 days.
The Contractor shall record the date upon which the concrete is placed in each part of the
work, and the date on which the formwork is removed from there. The assessment of the
period elapsing between placing the concrete and removing the formwork and consequences
arising there from shall be entirely the Contractor's responsibility.
Surface Finishes
Type 1 Finish - Standard Rough Form Finish:

Provide standard rough form finish to all formed concrete surfaces that are to be concealed in
the finished work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated or specified.
Standard rough form finish shall be the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the
form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and all fins
and other projections exceeding 5 mm in the height rubbed down with hard blocks. This type
should be used for the clarifier, the floor of the clarifier will be finished with screed
according to paragraph 1.9.4.
Type 2 Finish - Standard Smooth Form Finish:

Provide standard smooth finish for all formed concrete surfaces, that are visible or in contact
with wastewater.
Standard smooth finish shall be the cast concrete surface as obtained with a smooth form
facing material, with defective areas repaired and patched and all fins and other projections
on the surface completely removed and smoothed.
Related unformed surfaces as top of walls, horizontal offsets to be striked off smooth and
finished with a texture matching the adjacent formed surfaces. Apply float finish or trowel
finish to provide smooth uniform surfaces.
- Blowholes greater than 5 mm to be filled with matching mortar.

- Nos. of blowholes between 1 to 5 mm must not exceed 50 per 10 m2 concrete surface."
Type 3 Finish - Monolithic Slab Finish:

Provide scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces which are not specified as monolithic
smooth slab finish.
After placing slabs, plane the surface to a tolerance not exceeding 6 mm in 3 m, when tested
with a 3 m straight-edge. After levelling, roughen the surface before the final set with stiff
brushes, brooms or rakes.
Type 4 Finish - Monolithic Smooth Slab Finish:

Provide a smooth finish to monolithic slab surfaces which are not intended to be finished
with flooring materials or which are to be run over by a sludge scraper.
After placing the slabs, the surface has to be levelled and trowelled smooth in one operation
with the casting. The tolerance on the surface plane should not exceed 6 mm in 3 m, when
tested with a 3 m straight-edge. This type should be used for the biological reactor, anaerobic
reactor and aerobic reactor.
Type 5 Finish - Monolithic Power Float Slab Finish:

Provide power float finish to monolithic floor slab.
Power Floating shall be undertaken by steel floating the concrete to an even finish with no
ridges or steps. When the concrete has taken a primary set it shall be power trowelled to a
uniform smooth polished surface free from trowel marks or other blemishes. Once power
floating is completed the surface finish must be adequately protected from construction
traffic.
The tolerance on the surface plane should not exceed 5 mm in 3 m, when tested with a 3 m
straight-edge.
8.3 Reinforcement
General
The Contractor shall ensure that all reinforcement is checked by a competent person.
Storage of Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be stored on properly constructed racks at least 150 mm above ground
level. The storage, cutting and bending of steel reinforcement shall be carried out under cover
on a suitable, free draining concrete platform. The method of storing shall be such as to
prevent contamination or damage by weather or accident. Steel shall be protected from
humidity when stored.
Handling of Reinforcement
Sheets of mesh fabric shall be flat unless specified as bent and any tendency to curve or twist
shall be corrected by the Contractor before fixing. Mesh fabric shall not be supplied in rolls.
Cutting and Bending

Dirt, rust, concrete, scale, paint, oil, grease, salts, etc. shall be removed from the
reinforcement by sand blasting.
Reinforcement shall be bent when cold by hand or by using a suitable hand or power
operated bending machine. When bending, the reinforcement should be subjected to a
constant even load and not an impact load.
Bars incorrectly bent shall be used only if the means used for straightening and re-bending be
such as not to damage the steel. No reinforcement shall be bent when in position in the
works.
Bending dimensions shall be in accordance with regulations.
Fixing Reinforcement
Bars in contact shall be firmly secured to each other with suitable binding wire or proprietary
clips. Binding wire shall be 16-18 gauge soft iron wire free from rust or other contaminants.
The reinforcement shall be fixed accurately in position so that the reinforcement is in the
correct position in relation to the formwork to give the specified concrete cover. The
reinforcement shall be securely fixed in position so that it will not be displaced during the
passage of the Contractor's traffic, the placing and compaction of the concrete or any related
operations.
The correct cover shall be maintained by the use of concrete spacers. Concrete spacing
blocks shall be machine pressed, or, if manufactured on site, shall be made from a mix of one
part cement and two parts of sand. Site manufactured blocks shall be well compacted and
water cured for a minimum of 7 days after casting and shall have a 10 minute absorption of
less than 3.2% by weight. Concrete spacers shall be comparable in strength, durability and
appearance to the surrounding concrete. Any wire cast into the spacer blocks shall be
positioned well away from the exposed surface and shall be galvanized. Spacers fixed to
parallel reinforcement bars shall not be located in a line across a section. Timber, stone or
metal spacers shall not be used.
The top reinforcement in slabs shall be rigidly supported by mild steel chairs from the bottom
reinforcement. Chair spacing shall be at maximum 1.50 m centres in both directions.
Starter bars to walls must be securely fixed to the reinforcement in the parent concrete and
accurately located to maintain the specified cover. Reinforcement embedded in hardened
concrete shall not be bent.
Reinforcement cages assembled before fixing shall be protected against the weather and shall
be stored and transported carefully so that no distortion or contamination may occur.
Concrete shall be placed within 3 days of fixing reinforcement.
Laps and Joints

Laps are to be staggered in such a manner that maximum one third of the bars are lapped in
the same section, otherwise the lap length shall be increased by 50%.
8.4 Concrete
8.4.1 Grades of Concrete
Grades of concrete with 25 mm maximum nominal aggregate size shall be as follows:
Minimum Maximum free Target mean

Concrete Characteristic cylinder
Cement water/cement free water/
Class strength at 28 days
Content ratio cement ratio
C35/45 320 kg/m3 0.45 0.45 35 N/mm2
C30/37 300 kg/m3 0.45 0.45 30 N/mm2
C25/30 280 kg/m3 0.50 0.50 25 N/mm2
C16/20 225 kg/m3 - - 16 N/mm2
The maximum cement content shall not exceed 400 kg/m3.
The concrete shall be capable of being transported and readily compacted by internal
vibrators into a dense impermeable mass without segregation, bleeding or plastic cracking.
Subsequently, the concrete shall be durable and free from crazing, thermal cracks and drying
shrinkage cracks.
The slump shall be kept to the minimum compatible with adequate and suitable placing and
compacting requirements, but in no case shall the concrete be placed at a slump of more than
160 mm or less than 40 mm.
Concrete mixes shall have the cement content necessary to meet the specified water-cement
ratio, the workability and the compressive strength requirements.
Concrete mixes shall have the lowest possible sand content to meet the workability and water
tightness requirements.
Concrete mixes shall be made with a target air-content equal to 6%. The air-content in any
mix may not be less than 4% or above 8%.
In-situ concrete shall be dense and well-compacted to a minimum of 98% of the density of
the relevant test cylinders.
8.4.2 Concrete Mixes

Mix Design
The Contractor will be responsible for the final mix design for each class of concrete. The
Contractor file samples and test reports proving compliance with this specification of all
materials to be used in the various mixes together with the mix design and the proposed
weights of materials to be incorporated in the mixes.
Trial Mixes
The Contractor shall perform a trial mix on site for the various classes of concrete specified,
using the proposed plant, equipment and batching and mixing methods and file test results.
No structural concrete shall be placed in the works until the relevant mix meets requirements.
Before any grade of concrete is placed in the works three trial mixes of the grade shall be
made to the submitted mix proportions and from each mix six cylinders shall be prepared and
cured, three for testing at 7 days and three at 28 days by a laboratory.
The mix proportions shall be accepted for use in the works only if the 28 days cylinder
strengths exceed the characteristic strength compliance requirements by at least 4 N/mm2.
Where the maximum free water/cement ratio is specified preliminary tests shall be made to
establish the relationship between free water/cement ratio and the slump. A maximum
allowable slump value shall be established which includes an appropriate tolerance for
variability of manufacture, sampling and testing.
The preliminary tests shall be repeated and revised and maximum slump values established
whenever necessary due to a change in materials or batching.
When the mix has been established, no variations shall be made in the proportions, the
original source of the cement and aggregates or in the type, size and grading of the latter.
8.4.3 Compliance and Quality Control

General
For assessment of strength a sample shall be taken from a randomly selected batch of
concrete by taking a number of increments. The minimum sampling frequency shall be one
set per concrete mix per day of concreting. The samples shall be taken at the site, whenever
practicable, to be taken at the point of discharge from the mixer. Four test cylinders from
each sample shall be prepared of which results will be filed.
The test cylinders shall be cured. Two cylinders will be crushed at 7 days and used for early
assessment of the concrete as a guide only.
The test cylinders shall be delivered to, and tested by, a laboratory. Certified copies of the
test results shall be filed.
Compliance with the characteristic strength will be assumed only if the conditions given
below are met:
- The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results exceeds
the specified characteristic strength by 3 N/mm2
- The strength determined from any test result is not less than the specified characteristic
strength minus 3 N/mm2.
The cost of any given mix, poured between the taking of two consecutive samples shall be
represented by the former sample.
Tests covering all specified properties of all materials to be used in the mixes shall be carried
out at a frequency necessary to prove continuous compliance for each property.
The cost of taking and testing concrete samples and materials required to ensure compliance
with this specification shall be borne wholly by the Contractor.
Should the concrete supplied not comply with the characteristic strength requirements, the
Contractor will take remedial action or replace the concrete
Records
The Contractor shall keep a complete record of the work of concreting showing the time and
the date of placing the concrete in each portion of the work. The record shall be available for
inspection at any time by the Project Manager
The following information for testing shall be recorded for each cylinder:
- Class of mix
- Site mixed or ready-mix and supplier
- Slump
- Time of mixing and concreting
- Location in structure of concrete
- Cylinder identification marks
- Temperature of concrete.
All cylinders shall be clearly marked prior to leaving site and no cylinder shall leave the site
unless documentation complying with the above has been filed and documented .
The temperature of the concrete sample shall be determined.
8.4.4 Mixing of Concrete

Concrete shall be weight batched and mixed in a suitable mixing machine fitted with water
metering device. Volume batching will not be allowed.
The weighing and water-dispensing mechanisms shall be maintained in good order. Their
accuracy shall be maintained within the tolerances and checked against accurate weights.
The weights of cement and each size of aggregate as indicated by the mechanisms employed
shall be within a tolerance of ±2% of the respective weights per batch. The weights of the
fine and coarse aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for the free water contained in them.
The water to be added to the mix shall be reduced by the quantity of free water contained in
the fine and coarse aggregates, which shall be determined by the Contractor immediately
before mixing begins.
Mixers which have been out of use more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before
any fresh concrete is mixed in that machine. Mixing plant shall be thoroughly cleaned before
changing from one type of mix to another or before changing from one manufacturer of
cement to another.
Controls shall be provided to ensure that no additional water can be added during mixing.
The entire batch shall be discharged before the mixer is recharged. In no case shall the
mixing time be less than 1½ minutes.
8.4.5 Distribution and Placing of Concrete

General
The Contractor shall note that methods of transporting and placing of concrete which
necessitate the carrying and lifting of concrete by manual labour is not permitted. For major
concreting works, the means of transport from mixer to place of pouring, shall be semi-
mechanized, i.e. vertical transport by crane, hoist or similar and horizontal transport by
dumper, wheelbarrows or similar.
The formwork or area of deposition shall be cleaned as specified. Constructional plant and
materials required, or which may be required, during the concreting work and for curing shall
be on site and fully prepared before concreting commences. All accessories shall be installed
and formwork for holes, chases, etc. shall be provided as specified.
Concrete shall be transported, placed and spread by suitable means and in such a way as to
prevent segregation.
Concrete with a temperature above 32C or below 5C or with a slump less than 40 mm or
more than 160 mm shall be rejected. Concrete not placed within 60 minutes of the
commencement of mixing or before starting its initial set shall be rejected.
Concrete shall be transported and compacted into a dense impermeable mass without
segregation or bleeding or cracking to ensure that when hard, it is durable, un-cracked and
un-crazed.
Concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to compacted depth not exceeding 300 mm.
Concrete shall be deposited as near as possible to its final position to avoid rehandling.
Concrete shall not be dropped into place from a height exceeding 3 metres. When trunks or
chutes are used they shall be kept clean and used in such a way as to avoid segregation.
The Contractor shall not place concrete in standing or running water.
Concrete shall be deposited continuously. No concrete shall be placed against concrete which
has hardened sufficiently to cause seams, planes of weakness or cold joints.
If for unforeseen reasons it is necessary to stop concreting before completion of the pour then
construction joints as specified shall be formed and further concreting shall be suspended for
at least twenty four hours.
The Contractor shall provide openings, mortises, chases, sleeves, etc. and fix bolts, anchors,
etc. in concrete as work proceeds and support embedded items against displacement. Items
cast shall have all voids filled with readily removable material to prevent concrete ingress.
The Contractor shall clean and wet then fill tie holes solid with patching mortar.
Honeycombed and other defective concrete shall be cut back to sound concrete, with
perpendicular or slightly under cut edges and shall be prepared in an adequate manner.
With reference to the specifications and other technical requirements stated in this Section,
the Project Manager will reject any concrete which has been inadequately mixed or in which
the ingredients have segregated or which is no longer capable of being effectively placed or
compacted. The Project Manager will document his findings and promptly share them with
the Contractor, who will be expected to take remedial action in accordance with this
Contract.
All receptacles used for the transport and deposition of the concrete shall be kept clean and
thoroughly washed out after stopping work and at the end of each shift.
No concreting shall be carried out in heavy rain.
Compaction
Concrete must be carefully and thoroughly compacted during placing to ensure that it
completely surrounds the reinforcement, fills the formwork and excludes voids.
All concrete shall be compacted by using internal vibrators that shall be used by operators
experienced in their use. Concrete is to be vibrated for the minimum time necessary for
thorough consolidation, and the Contractor shall ensure that excessive vibration, leading to
segregation, is avoided. Care must be taken to ensure that the vibrator does not touch the
reinforcement or formwork.
Internal vibrators shall be of the immersion type with a frequency of not less than three
thousand vibrations per minute and sufficient amplitude to consolidate the concrete
effectively. The Contractor shall provide at least fifty percent duplication of all vibration
equipment as stand by during any period of concreting.
Vibrators shall not be employed to move the concrete within the formwork.
Curing
Freshly deposited concrete shall be protected from premature drying and excessively hot or
cold temperatures and shall be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant
temperature for the proper hydration of the cement and hardening of the concrete.
The materials and methods of curing shall reported to the Project Manager and suitable for
the work. Concrete surfaces not in contact with forms, shall be cured before any risk for
plastic shrinkage cracking or drying out of the concrete surface may occur by one of the
following materials or methods:
(a): Polythene membrane shall be laid direct on to the concrete in unbroken sheets with
substantial close fitted lap joints. Sheets shall be weighted with timbers to prevent dry winds
blowing under the membrane
(b): Spray applied curing membrane and curing compounds which shall be of suitable
manufacture and type and be of the maximum retentively type. Curing compounds used shall
have reflective properties; they shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of
the manufacturer and are to be used with extreme caution on any surfaces against which
additional concrete or other finishing materials are to be bonded and shall not adversely
affect the concrete.
Application of curing water shall not be able to affect the finished fresh concrete surface by
dilution of the top layer.
Curing shall be continued for a period of at least 7 days when method (a) above are used.
Rapid drying at the end of the curing period shall be prevented.
Exposed horizontal surfaces of slabs in hot windy weather may require additional protection
between the initial compaction and final finishing stages to ensure that the concrete is not
exposed for more than twenty (20) minutes after placing.
Formwork exposed to direct sunlight during the curing period shall be shaded.
Steel forms heated by the sun and all wood forms in contact with the concrete during the
curing period shall be kept wet. If forms are to be removed during the curing period, one of
the above curing materials or methods shall be employed immediately. Such curing shall
continue for the remainder of the curing period.
Joints
Construction joints shall be formed in either horizontal or vertical planes and located in the
work to suit working stresses. They shall be so located and the quantity of concrete placed at
any one time shall be so limited in size and shape as to minimize shrinkage and temperature
effects. All reinforcing steel shall be continued across construction joins. The surface of the
concrete at all joints shall be straight and shall be thoroughly cleaned with water and air
under pressure, to expose aggregate. The cleaned surfaces shall be well wetted before
casting. Suitable water stops shall be provided in joints subject to water pressure, except in
horizontal joints in walls.
8.4.6 Water stops

General
Water stops shall be welded or glued together as to form a continuous strip, both horizontally
and vertically. Laps will not be accepted.
Installation of water stops

Water stops shall be carefully placed and maintained in position during concreting and
compaction operations.
Concrete shall be carefully compacted around the water stops so as to leave no cavities.
Liquid tightness testing of Water-Retaining Structures

Water retaining structures shall be tested in accordance with BS 8007 (1987).
The test shall be carried out before any backfilling and coating/sealing has taken place.
In the event of any water-retaining structures fail to pass the prescribed test, the Contactor
rectifies the structure defects and re-tests the structure. This shall be repeated until the test
passes.
8.5 Requirements for Structures

8.5.1 General
The Contractor shall incorporate the following requirements in all structures and buildings
included in the works.
8.5.2 Structural lay-out

All liquid-retaining structures shall be made of reinforced concrete cast in-situ.
All liquid-retaining walls shall be vertical.
Horizontal construction joints in walls with a height not exceeding 5 metres is not allowed.
Structures for process tanks (end walls), primary- and secondary clarification and sludge
digester shall be made circular.
Circular walls must not be in polygonal shape.
All pipes below the bottom slabs - except for drain pipes if any - shall be cast-in and
reinforced together with the slab.
All WWTP units shall be surrounded with backfilling leaving one meter of walls above
ground level if not any special mention below.
Precast concrete unit (rings) for manholes shall be provided in a concrete quality as stated for
liquid-retaining structures.
Design of pipe connections to structural items shall take earthquake loads into consideration.
8.5.3 Concrete
Concrete Strength
The concrete strength requirements for the structures are given below:
Concrete mix - C 35/45
- Characteristic strength: fck = 35 N/mm2 , cylinder strength
- Cement Low alkali and high sulphate resistant cement
- Exposure Class Freeze-thaw attack and chemical attack
- Max. free water/cement ratio .45
- Nominal maximum size of aggregates 25 mm
Concrete C 35/45 shall be used for Liquid-retaining structures and Chambers with
characteristics as follows.
Concrete mix - C 30/37

- Characteristic strength fck = 30 N/mm2 , cylinder strength
- Cement Ordinary Portland Cement
- Exposure Class Freeze-thaw attack
- Max. free water/cement ratio 0.45
Concrete C 30/37 shall be used for:
- Other RC structures
- Roads
- Surface drainage units- Kerbs.
Concrete mix - C 25/30:

- Exposure Class Moderate environment, XC3
- Max. free water/cement ratio 0.50
Concrete C 25/30 shall be used for other concrete components.
Concrete mix - C 16/20:

- Exposure Class Passive environment, X0
Concrete C16/20 shall be used for blinding layer and mass concrete
8.6 Joints
8.6.1 General
In order to incorporate the effects from thermal action, shrinkage and creep the Contractor
shall make construction joints or contraction joints in accordance with this specification. The
Contractor shall make his design calculations in accordance with the intended location of
joints.
8.6.2 Construction Joints

The reinforcement is passing through the joint. The purpose of this type of joint is to separate
the structure into sections equal to a size which easily can be casted. In critical sections with
a high stress the joints shall be made with a suitable water stop.
The surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned. The surface layer shall be
completely removed with a steel brush to expose the aggregates.
The hardened concrete shall be watered continuously 1 hour prior to casting the adjacent
concrete. When casting the hardened concrete surface shall be saturated but free from water
on the surface.
Cement grout and adhesives shall not be used at joints.
8.6.3 Water stops

When water stops are placed for water tightness the water stops shall be made PVC-type
resistant to chlorides, sulphates, chemicals and the like.
The width of the water stops shall be according to the manufacturer’s specifications.
All water stops shall be made continuous and shall be welded at all connections. Overlap is
not allowed. All joints in water stops shall be made by the manufacturer of the water stop.
If a joint ends at another part of the structure e.g. the connection between a wall and a bottom
slab, the water stop should also be placed at least 30 cm inside the adjacent part of the
structure.
Water stops shall be placed in accordance with the manufacturers specifications.

Water stops shall fulfil the following requirements:
Criteria Property at 250c
Rubber PVC
Min tensile strength (N/mm2) 20 15
Minimum elongation at break (%) 450 285
Hardness (IRHD/ Shore A) 60 – 75 70 - 75
Softness (BS 2571) 420C – 520C
Specific gravity 1.1 (+/-5%) 1.3 (+/- 5%)
8.7 Structural Design Requirements

8.7.1 General
The Contractor shall carry out and document the structural design for all structures and
buildings included in the works.
8.7.2 Standards
General
Seismic loads: All structures and buildings shall be designed to withstand earthquake loads
accordance with Palestinian Regulations.
Liquid-retaining Structures
Liquid-retaining structures shall be designed in accordance with "BS 8007: Code of practice
for design of concrete structures for retaining aqueous liquids".
Other Reinforced Concrete Structures

Other structures and buildings shall be designed in accordance with EN standards, e.g. ENV
1992.
8.8 Design Assumptions

8.8.1 Lateral Soil
Structures should be capable of withstanding external lateral soil pressure when empty. The
pressure from any external water should be taken into consideration - see remarks regarding
uplift in Clause (c) below.
8.8.2 Filled Tanks

Structures should be capable of withstanding internal pressure when filled with water and
assuming no lateral external support from soil and/or groundwater.
8.8.3 Uplift
Based upon the outcome of the Contractor's own geotechnical investigations it might be
necessary to secure the structures against uplift.
The Contractor has the full responsibility for the security against uplift and is therefore also
responsible for any assumption of the ground water level made by him in the calculations.
If the Contractor finds any risk of a ground water level above the bottom of the individual
structures (even if it comes from the surface), the structures have to be secured in the
following way:
- The structures in which the water levels can drop suddenly (even if the operators make a
mistake), should be secured against uplift by their own weights together with the
surrounding soil
- The structures in which the water level can drop by some extra ordinary initiatives only,
should be secured by the construction of a permanent ground water drainage system so the
operators easily can lower the ground water level when needed.
8.8.4 Minimum Structural Requirements
Walls
- The thickness of walls should at least be made with a thickness equal to the height of the
wall divided by 20 and must under no circumstances be less than 250 mm.
- All walls shall be reinforced in both sides and in both directions.
- Walls shall be considered as fixed to the bottom slab. Hinged or sliding walls are
therefore not allowed.
- Partition walls in liquid-retaining structures shall be designed for unilateral water
pressure.
Bottom Slabs
The minimum thickness of bottom slabs under walls should be equal to the thickness of the
wall plus 50 mm. The thickness of the bottom slab beside the walls can be reduced with 100
mm per every meter. The thickness of slabs must under no circumstances be less than 250
mm.
Bottom slabs shall be reinforced in both directions in top and bottom.
Reinforcement
The amount of reinforcement placed in the structures should be in accordance with the
structural design calculations. Further to this the amount of reinforcement (in percent) placed
for reduction of crack widths less than the bars diameter (in millimetres) divided by 25 is
under no circumstances allowed. The percentage should be taken of the full cross sectional
area of the concrete.
Reinforcement in liquid-retaining structures shall be high yield steel bars.

Crack Width Criteria for Concrete

In calculating the stress using an elastic analysis, account shall be taken of whether or not the
section is expected to crack under service loads and also of the effects of creep and
shrinkage.
Crack Width wmax (mm)
Exposure Class Pure tension Tension in bending
Freeze-thaw attack and chemical 0.15 0.20

attack
Maximum allowed crack width in concrete under service loads.
Special account shall be taken for the provision of reducing crack width due to temperature,
creep and shrinkage in the concrete. These provisions must fulfil the requirements given in
BS 8007 (1987): "Code of Practice for Design of Concrete Structures for Retaining Aqueous
Liquids", with a maximum allowed crack width of wmax = 0,20 mm.
Cover on reinforcement
Minimum cover on reinforcement:
- Liquid-retaining structures, retaining walls etc.: Min. 50 mm
- Other concrete structures: Min. 35 mm.
8.9 Loads
8.9.1 Characteristic Values
Dead load:
- Concrete: 24 kN/m2
- Water: 10 kN/m2
- Soil: According to laboratory tests performed by
the Contractor.
Imposed load:
- Imposed load on buildings: According to EN standards
- Traffic load on ground level along tanks 10 kN/m2 (characteristic)
- Temperature: T1 not less than 200C, (BS 8007:1987 A.3);
T2 not less than 200C, (BS 8007:1987 A.3).
Seismic loads:
The project site is located in a zone of seismic activity and all structures shall be designed to
withstand earthquake loads. Design includes also pipe connection to structures.
Other loads:
- Loads from equipment
- Loads from supports

- Loads distributed by the pipes in its longitudinal direction.
8.10 Load Combinations

8.10.1 Serviceability Limit State
Load Combination 1 (normal):
In the serviceability limit state the structures are filled with water to the normal working level
and surrounded by backfilling if any. Any ground water level and the pressure from the
surrounding soil should in this state be stipulated with low values.
In this state, the effects from thermal action, shrinkage and creep should be taken into
account in accordance with the temperature loads stated above.
In the serviceability limit state the maximum allowed crack width is: See above.
8.10.2 Ultimate Limit State

Load Combination 2.1 (empty):
In this state the structures shall be assumed empty with pressure from the backfilling and
ground water if any.
Load Combination 2.2 (full):

In this state the structures shall be assumed to be filled with water to the maximum possible
level of filling in the structure even though this is above the normal working level. No
pressure from external soil or groundwater should be considered in this state.
Load Combination 2.3 (uplift):

This combination should be checked if applicable only - see remarks regarding uplift in
Clause 6.4.3 (c).
The safety factor against uplift should meet the following requirements when calculated:
The safety factor to be at least 1.05 when the weight of the concrete together with the weight
of soil on bottom slabs (calculated vertical upwards from the edges of the slabs - without any
friction in the soil) only is taken into consideration.
The safety factor to be at least 1.2 when allowing friction in the soil to be taken into account.
Load Combination 2.4 (earthquake):

An comprehensive earthquake risk analysis and recommendations shall be made by the
contractor and filed.
This combination shall be calculated according to Palestinian Standards and norms.

- 2.4 a: In this state the structures shall be assumed empty
- 2.4 b: In this state the structures shall be assumed full
Load Combination 3 (water testing of liquid-retaining structures):

Even though the crack widths normally are calculated in the serviceability limit state only,
the maximum allowed crack width in the state of testing structures for water tightness is 0.20
mm. In this state the structures should be assumed filled with water to a level of 70% of the
height of the normal working level only. Pressure from surrounding soil or ground water
must not be taken into account.
8.11 Calculations
The Contractor has the full responsibility for the structural design calculations.
All action forces should be calculated based upon the theory of elasticity wherever possible.
An approximate assumption of the load distribution is allowed if realistic only. Loads which
support the structures should be stipulated with low values.
8.12 Corrosion protection

All reinforced concrete structures that are in contact with corrosive wastewater and / or
sludge shall be provided with HDPE lining with a thickness of 2.5 mm. In practice this
relates to all structures in the water line up to the final clarification and to all structures in the
sludge line.
The lining should be placed 0,30 m below the minimum water level till the top of the
construction. The lining should be connected to the form work according to the guidelines of
the manufacturer. In the edges is not allowed the weld the lining.
Valves should be placed after the completed lining is installed.

9 Building Works
9.1 General
9.1.1 Scope
This sub-section covers the requirements for the construction of buildings and includes all
building works, except earth and concrete works. The work required under this sub-section
shall include all labour, materials, equipment, remedy of deficiencies, site clearance and all
other appurtenant works required to complete all building works specified herein.
9.1.2 Standards and Rules

The Contractor shall carry out the works described in this Section in accordance with the
appropriate DIN standards or equivalent standards. The main standards are, but are not
limited by, the following Technical Codes:
- DIN 18299 General technical specifications for building works
- DIN 18330 Masonry works
- DIN 18331 Concrete and reinforced concrete
- DIN 18332 Natural stonework
- DIN 18333 Artificial stonework
- DIN 18334 Carpentry
- DIN 18336 Waterproofing
- DIN 18338 Roofing
- DIN 18339 Plumbing works
- DIN 18350 Plastering
- DIN 18352 Tiling
- DIN 18353 Screeding works
- DIN 18354 Bituminous paving
- DIN 18355 Joinery
- DIN 18361 Glazing
- DIN 18363 Painting works
- DIN 18365 Flooring
- DIN 18379 Ventilation works
- DIN 18381 Sanitary installation
9.1.3 Works Included

The Contractor shall, unless otherwise specified herein, supply all materials, equipment,
temporary works and labour necessary to perform, maintain and complete the building
works.
9.2 Masonry Works

9.2.1 Materials
(a) Bricks and Blocks
Bricks shall be clay facing bricks manufactured locally. The quality shall correspond to DIN
105. Blocks shall be dense concrete blocks in accordance to DIN 18153 with a compressive
strength of more than 7.5 N/mm². Bricks and blocks shall be hard, sound, square and clean
with sharp, well defined arises.
Strength test certificates performed on the basis of appropriate DIN standards shall be filed.
(b) Reinforcement for Brickwork

Reinforcement of brickwork shall be in accordance with DIN 488, DIN 1045 and DIN 1053.
Reinforcement for Brick shall be plain round bars B ST 22/34 GU or ribbed bars B St 22/34.
Reinforcement shall be detailed, stored and tested as specified for Concrete Works.
(c) Fixings for Brickwork

Fixings shall be of stainless steel for sheet, strip, plate and bars in accordance to DIN
regulations for stainless steel.
(d) Sand
Sand shall be clean and sharp course grit, fresh water river or pit sand conforming in all
respects to DIN 1053 and DIN 18550 and shall be re-washed on site if the silt, loam or clay
content exceeds the limits prescribed in DIN 4226.
(e) Cement
Cement shall be sulphate resisting Portland cement as specified in DIN 1164 and DIN EN
197.
(f) Water
For the mixing of mortar and plaster the Contractor shall provide tap water
9.2.2 Mortar Mix

Masonry mortar shall be 1 part cement to 4 parts sand. Mortar shall be added to the mix in an
amount compatible with workability. Mortar constituents shall be measured by volume using
clean gauge boxes.
Mortar shall be mixed in a mechanically operated mortar mixer for at least three minutes
after all ingredients are in the drum. The mixing by hand will only be permitted when the
quality of hand mixing is comparable to mechanical mixing.
Mortar shall be used within 2 hours after discharge from the mixer at normal temperatures.
No mortar shall be used after the initial set has taken place. Reconstitution of mortar will not
be permitted.
9.2.3 Workmanship
All masonry shall be laid plumb and true to lines and built to the thickness and bond
required. Masonry shall be carried up in a uniform manner. No one portion shall be in raise
more than one meter above adjacent portions.
Face work shall be kept clean during construction and until completion of the Works.
Under hot and dry weather conditions, bricks and blocks shall be stacked on a hard standing
level so as to prevent the absorption of water. Suitable shading shall be provided to prevent
high temperatures within the brick and block stacks. Clay brickwork and block work shall be
kept wet to the minimum extent required to prevent mortar drying out prematurely.
All bricks shall be wetted before being laid. Clay bricks shall not be used until completely
cold from the kiln. Freshly laid brickwork/block work shall be protected during interruption
through rain and at the completion of each day’s work.
Face work shall be kept clean during construction and until practical completion. Scaffold
boards shall be kept clear of the building at night and during heavy rain. Rubbing to remove
stains will not be permitted.
Facing bricks of varying colour shall be distributed evenly throughout the work so that no
patches appear. Different deliveries which vary in colour shall be mixed to avoid horizontal
stripes.
Brickwork and block work abutting concrete columns, walls and beams shall be tied with
stainless steel ties in accordance with the relevant references and as directed by the design.
Additional ties shall be supplied at openings. Walls which are to be fair face shall have
selected bricks and blocks with perfect arises and flat surface structures and with faces in
line.
9.2.4 Bricklaying and Blocklaying in Cold Weather

Materials used in bricklaying and blocklaying shall be frost free and no bricks or blocks shall
be laid when the ambient temperature is below –5C, unless special precautions are taken.
The Contractor shall ensure that any additive used in the mortar does not cause a variation in
the colour of the joints. Completed work shall be protected adequately during cold weather.
9.2.5 Exposed Concrete Blocks

Concrete block work shall be laid in stack bond and, unless otherwise directed, with joints
not exceeding 1 cm and uniform throughout. All blocks shall be laid in a full bed of mortar
applied to shells only. Intersecting bearing walls shall be tied together with stainless steel ties
at one meter vertical spacing.
Where directed, concrete blocks shall be reinforced and concrete blocks lintel type shall be
built in above wall openings.
Control joints shall be installed at the intersection with structural concrete and elsewhere
where joints are useful. Joints not detailed otherwise shall be racked out to a depth of 2 cm
for the full height of the wall and be caulked. Joints are to be examined to locate cracks,
holes or other defects and all such defects shall be remedied with mortar and pointed.
9.2.6 Concrete Blocks to receive Plaster

Concrete block walls to be plastered may be laid with bonds described above. Joints are to be
left rough to assist in bounding of plaster. Control joints in plastered block shall be carried
through the plaster. The joint shall not be plastered.
9.2.7 Brickwork
Solid brick walls shall be laid in common bond with all joints filled solidly with mortar and
backs fully purged to form solid masonry structure. Joints of walls to receive plaster shall be
lightly raked to provide a bond for plaster. Control joints in brick walls shall be carried
through the plaster. The joint shall not be plastered.
9.2.8 Lintels, Miscellaneous

The Contractor shall build in or provide all miscellaneous items to be set in masonry
including lintels, frames, reinforcing steel, electrical boxes, fixtures, sleeves, grilles, anchors
and other miscellaneous items. All anchorage, attachments and bonding devices shall be
completely covered with mortar.
9.2.9 Cleaning
Masonry work to be exposed shall be thoroughly cleaned. Mortar smears and droppings on
concrete block walls shall be dry before removal with a trowel. Masonry work may be
cleaned using a mild acid solution.
9.2.10 Damp-proof courses

As a minimum requirement, damp-proof courses shall be in accordance with DIN 18195 or
equivalent.
Bituminous sheet damp-proof courses shall be laid on a level bed of cement mortar with a
minimum lap of 75 mm at angles and joints and neatly pointed in matching mortar on
exposed edges. Horizontal and sloping damp-proof coursing over door openings shall be in
single pieces of material of a length to extend 225 mm at both sides beyond the width of the
frame.
9.2.11 Waterproof building paper

Waterproof building paper shall be laid beneath structural concrete. The paper shall be laid
with 150 mm lapped joints which shall be treated and sealed with a suitable bituminous
solution. The weight of the paper shall not be less than 0.3 kg/m².
9.3 Plastering
9.3.1 Materials
Sand
Sand shall be clean and sharp course grit, fresh water river or pit sand conforming in all
respects to DIN 1053 and DIN 18550 and shall be re-washed on site if the silt, loam or clay
content exceeds the limits prescribed in DIN 4226.
Cement
Cement shall be sulphate resisting Portland cement as specified in DIN 1164 and DIN EN
197.
Water
For the mixing of mortar and plaster the Contractor shall provide tap water
9.3.2 Plaster Mixing

Plaster shall be mixed with proportions according to DIN 18550. The constituents shall be
measured by volume and water added in an amount compatible with workability.
Plaster shall be mixed in a mechanically operated plaster mixer for at least long enough to
make a thorough, complete intimate mix of the materials. The mixing of plaster by hand shall
not be permitted, unless otherwise directed.
The mixer, bunker, gauge boxes and all tools shall be kept clean, and care shall be taken to
ensure that fresh plaster is not contaminated with set plaster.
9.3.3 Workmanship
Plaster shall be of 2 or 3 coats. If plaster is to be applied to smooth surfaces, a dash coat shall
be applied as a bonding surface. The dash coat shall be of mush consistency, composed of 1
part Portland cement and 15 parts of sand.
The plaster coats shall be applied according to the thickness given below, whereby additional
thickness which will be required due to unevenness in the masonry surface is not included:
Location: Ceiling Interior wall Finish
Thickness of first coat: 15 mm 10 mm 10mm
Thickness of 6 mm 9 mm
intermediate coat:
Thickness of finish 10 mm 4 mm 6 mm
coat:
Total thickness: 25 mm 0 mm 25 mm
9.3.4 Preparation of Surfaces

Surfaces that are to receive plaster shall be carefully examined by the Contractor and any
unsatisfactory surface shall be repaired. Where fixtures have to be installed prior to plastering
they shall adequately be protected from damage during plastering. Concrete masonry and
brick surfaces shall have sufficient roughness to provide proper bond and shall be dumped by
brushing or spraying with water followed by plastering.
9.3.5 Plastering
The dash coat shall be applied with a whisk broom or fibre brush and be kept moist for 48
hours before the first coat is applied to the dash coat.
Before the first coat hardens, the surface shall be scratched to provide bond for the
intermediate coat. This coat shall be kept moist for not less than 24 hours and be allowed to
set for not less than 14 days before application of the intermediate coat.
The surface of the intermediate coat shall be brought to a true and even surface, then
roughened with a wood float before setting to provide a bond for the finish coat.
The finish coat shall be applied while the intermediate coat is moist and if the intermediate
coat dries out it shall be wetted evenly. The finish coat shall be first floated to a true and even
surface and then trowelled to a smooth and even finish.
9.3.6 Completion of Work

Completion of work includes curing (moisturing for at least 3 days) and removal of
deficiencies (at the Contractor’s expense). Upon completion of the work, all plaster surfaces
shall be cleaned and all rubbish, debris and excess material and equipment shall be removed.
9.3.7 Waterproof Plaster

Waterproof plaster shall consist of waterproofing compound, cement and sand mixed in strict
accordance with the manufacturer’s specification. The water proofing compound shall be a
mass product of a repudiated manufacturer.
9.3.8 Tolerances
All surfaces shall be true to line, level, plumb and all junctions, angles and arises truly scare.
On two or three coat work, the plaster surface shall not show any deviation greater than
specified in DIN 18202 for accuracy class B.
9.4 Screeds
9.4.1 General
Workmanship and construction shall generally conform to DIN standards 18353 and 18560
or equivalent standards.
Materials used for mortar shall be measured in gauge boxes. All concrete surfaces shall be
adequately prepared and keyed to receive screeds. The screeds to be carried out have to be
placed within buildings and shall be dense aggregate cement screeds.
9.4.2 Floor Screeds

To form falls for drainage or to improve the surface finish of a concrete slab when necessary,
a screed shall be laid on it. In basement the slope of the screed shall be at least 1% towards
the pump sump of the basement drainage pump.
Floor screeds in buildings shall be laid monolithically to a thickness of 50 mm and be laid

separately.
The preparation of base concrete shall include the removal of laitance from the concrete
surface to receive screed and the removal of all loose concrete, dust and dirt by thorough
washing with water.
The screed mix shall be prepared in accordance to DIN 18550 and shall be thoroughly and
efficiently be mixed dry by mechanical means until a uniform distribution is obtained prior to
adding the water. The water content shall be kept as low as it is necessary to allow for
sufficient workability for laying and compacting. Where only small quantities are required,
mixing might be carried out by hand on clean watertight surface.
The screed mix shall be placed between forms, rigidly fixed on a firm foundation and set true
to level within +/- 3 mm, and shall be fully compacted by means of a screed board providing
laitance is not brought to the surface. The screed wearing course shall be tamped with a wood
float and trowelled with a steel trowel to produce a smooth finish.
The screed mix shall be placed between the forms (and or other bays) worked around the
penetrations, duct covers, manhole covers, gutters, balustrade standards, pipes, etc., and shall
be fully compacted by means of a screed board, or other suitable compacting equipment,
providing laitance is not brought to the surface.
Where screeds thinner than 30 mm are required, a pre-packed high performance mortar
suitable for ‘drinking water’ contact shall be used, in accordance with the instructions of the
manufacturer.
9.4.3 Joints
All edge joints of floor screeds shall be simple butt joints without filler. Screeds laid over
construction joints in concrete shall be separated by 10 mm impregnated oakum strips or the
like.
Joints in wearing courses shall be 10 mm polysulphide according to DIN 18540.
9.4.4 Tolerances
The finished surface of base course screeds, when laid, shall not depart more than specified
in DIN 18202 for accuracy class B.
Floor screeds, when laid, shall be free of all defects and any work which shows signs of bond
failure, hollow patches, crazing, cracking or any other defects will not be accepted and shall
be removed and replaced with acceptable work by the Contractor.
9.5 Flooring
9.5.1 General
The floorings shall be such as to provide a cover surface that can well be walked on and must
not give any rise to any unreasonable inconvenience.
9.5.2 Materials
Concrete paving slabs shall be 50 mm thick, hydraulically pressed pre-cast concrete slabs in
accordance with DIN 18500.
Terrazzo shall be in accordance with DIN EN 13748. The marble chippings shall be of a
suitable quality in irregular pieces with no flaky pieces.
PVC flooring material shall comply with the requirements of DIN EN 649 and DIN 650 and
shall be temperature resistant, waterproof, abrasion resistant, flameproof, pigment or colour
proof to light, evenly coloured throughout, resistant to chemicals, fats, acids and alkaline,
odourless, easily laid and flexible, non-porous and slip proof.
All adhesives shall have suitable properties to ensure a firm and durable bond. They must not
adversely affect either the flooring nor the underlay or the base and shall be odourless once
applied.
All fillers and levelling compounds shall have a firm and durable bond to the base, provide a
good bonding surface for the adhesive and be of suitable property so as to give an adequate
support to the covering. They must have no adverse effect on base, adhesive, underlay, or
covering.
9.5.3 Workmanship in general

The Contractor shall examine the base to verify whether it is in suitable condition to carry out
his work.
All materials and structural components whose processing is subject to manufacturer’s

instructions shall be processed accordingly. The Contractor shall clean the flooring and treat
it in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for flooring materials.
The Contractor shall furnish the Project Manager with the written instructions for the care
and the maintenance of the flooring.

The surfaces must be cleaned prior to flooring. The base for covering to be placed without
underlay shall be smoothed with filler compound. In the case of major unevenness a suitable
levelling compound shall be used.
Any filler or levelling compound shall be applied so that it will bond firmly and durably to
the base, will not crack and will adequately withstand pressure. Any screeds such as
magnesia and anhydride screed to which the filler or levelling compound will not sufficiently
bond, shall receive a priming coat.
9.5.5 General requirements for Application

Workmanship generally shall be in accordance with DIN 18352 and DIN 18365.
Floorings shall be placed without underlay unless otherwise specified.

The courses shall be laid towards the main window wall, in halls and corridors, however, in
longitudinal direction, unless otherwise specified.
Deviations in colour which are not of minor importance and not due to the flooring pattern
shall not be allowed if marring the overall appearance of the flooring.
Courses with pattern repeats shall be laid so as to suit these. Where courses run towards
doors, recesses and the like, they shall be laid so to cover also the floor areas such door
openings, recesses etc. Strips of slabs may be used as coverings of such floor areas.
Plastic flooring shall not be welded unless otherwise specified or expressly required in the
flooring material manufacturer’s processing instructions.
Baseboards of the same material as the flooring material with a minimum height of 6 cm
have to be installed at all side walls.
Pre-cast Concrete Slabs: All pre-cast concrete slabs shall be laid in bays not exceeding 10 m
in length, the bays being separated by an expansion joint 10 mm wide.
9.5.6 Thin Floor Coverings

Flexible PVC sheeting or tiles shall be laid on a level and smooth background generally
consisting of anhydride screed. The screed surfaces shall be clean, dust-free and dry. Tiles
shall be laid in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
9.6 Tiling
9.6.1 General
Tiles on wall are required in all buildings where water is used and/or where profound
cleaning is required up to a minimum level of 2 m at least from the floor (eg mechanical
thickening, mechanical dewatering, laboratory, sludge storage). Intensively used rooms
require tiling up to the ceiling (eg. sludge storage, pumping stations, bath rooms, showers.
Tiling shall comprise all required labour, equipment and the supply of the appurtenant
materials and structural components including off-loading and storage at the site.
Workmanship and construction for tiles to floors and walls shall generally be in accordance
with DIN 18352. Only standardized materials and structural components shall be used.
All tiles and flags for which there are several grades available shall be of the best standard
commercial grade.
Before starting the work, the Contractor shall ascertain the Employer’s selection of patterns
and colours and the Contractor shall furnish the Project Manager with duplicate samples of
the patterns and colours of the materials selected by the Employer.
Tiling shall be free of any defects and any work that shows signs of bond failures, hollow
patches, misalignment, cracking or any other defect. Defective work will not be accepted and
shall be removed and replaced by acceptable work.
9.6.2 Materials
In general, tiles and flags shall meet the quality requirements of DIN EN 14411 DIN 18158,
DIN 12912, DIN EN 12004 and other relevant regulations. Where tiles and flags are not
standardized, the quality features shall satisfy the standard commercial requirements (top
surface, parallelism of edges, colour, water absorption). All floor and wall tiles shall be from
the same batch.
Glazed ceramic tiles for walls shall be in the colour selected by the Employer, true to shape,
flat, free from flaws, cracks and crazing, uniform in colour, keyed on the back and shall
comply with DIN 18515. The ties shall be of a suitable type, size, colour and acid resistance.
Ceramic floor tiles shall be oil and acid resistant, true to shape, flat, free from flaws, cracks
and crazing, uniform in colour and of a non slippery type, make and colour. Dimensions and
tolerances shall comply with DIN 18158, DIN 18157 and similar relevant regulations.
Cement based adhesives shall comply with the requirements of DIN 18156 and used strictly
in accordance to the manufacturer’s printed instruction. Mortar materials and adhesives shall
not alter the top surface of the tiles.

Surfaces shall be prepared before covering with tiles in strict accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
9.6.4 Preparation of Tiles

Tiles which are to be laid in cement mortar shall be soaked in clean water for 15-30 minutes
before fixing and allowed to drain for 10-15 minutes. Any surplus water shall be removed
from the backs before laying. Tiles to be fixed with adhesives shall not be soaked or wetted
before laying. All cutting to tiles shall be fair cutting using a tile cutter.
9.6.5 Placing
In interior finishing works all tiles, flags or mosaic shall only be set and laid before the fixing
of windows and door frames and trims, and after stop rails, plumbing installations and the
application of plaster.
All tiles, flags and mosaic shall be set or laid plumb, in true alignment and horizontal or at
the slope specified, without any projections, with regard to any specified reference or level
lines. In wall coverings, projections shall be allowed only to the extent imposed by the
particular type of tile or flag specified.
9.6.6 Fixing and Bedding

Thin tiles shall be generally adhesive fixed. Backgrounds shall be cleaned and primed
according to the manufacturer’s instructions and the adhesive shall be applied by the notched
trowel technique and trowelled over the area to receive tiles in 4 mm thickness. Tiles shall be
pressed in as recommended by the manufacturer.
Thick tiles shall be generally bedded in cement-sand mortar, at least 10 mm thick. Any
surplus mortar which adheres to the face of the tile shall be wiped off with a damp cloth
before it sets hard.
The external angles and side and top edges shall be formed with rounded edge tiles. At
intersections, returned rounded edge tiles shall be used.
9.7 Roofing
9.7.1 General
The specification for waterproofing and insulation of flat concrete roofs shall be designed
and laid according to the norms valid in Palestine or equivalent and taking into account the
relevant manufacturer’s instructions). Work shall follow the general principles given below.
The waterproofing and insulation of concrete roofs shall consist of at least 2 coats of
polymer-bitumen / rubber membranes.
The work shall consist of supplying, laying and finishing complete insulation and roof
coverings and shall include the provision of all necessary skirting, copings, flashings etc. On
completion, all roofs shall be left sound and watertight and in neat and clean condition. All
roof finishes shall be carefully worked or fitted around pipes and openings.
Roofing systems shall be in general the “inverted roof“ or “protected membrane roof system“
where the waterproof membrane is laid directly onto the structural slab and the insulating
layer is then laid on the membrane and protected by a layer of files.
The top surface of the roof slab shall be finished by cement plastering of minimum thickness
20 mm. A 50 mm x 50 mm mortar or wooden fillet shall be fixed in the corner between the
horizontal slab and the vertical parapet before the water proofing membrane is formed, fillets
shall also be fixed in the corners of gutters.
The finished roof slab surface must be clean, dry, smooth and free of roughness or dips. The
plastered surface of roof slab must be allowed to dry before the sheets are applied. Drying
time is dependent on the weather and may take anything from 8 days to 3 weeks.
9.7.2 Waterproofing and Insulation

The structural slab or surface screed on it shall be primed before application of the membrane
in accordance to the manufacturer’s instructions. The insulation layer shall have a minimum
density of 35 kg/m².
Depending on the different construction types, the sheets can be fully bonded to the substrate
by torch, spot bonded or loose laid. Torch-bonding is carried out with a suitable gas torch
burner connected to a propane gas cylinder.
The sheets are overlapped longitudinally by 100 mm, while the head laps of the membranes
shall not be less than 150 mm. The bonding is carried out by torch application in such a way
that a continuous bead of melted bitumen comes out from the overlap. So as not to remove
the protective top layer, the use of trowel is to be avoided.
However the membranes must not be overheated and a further sign of correct application is
that an excessively large bead of melted compound does not come out from the overlap.
The waterproofing membranes and coatings shall be brought up the inside of the roof parapet
to a height of at least 150 mm. The top sheet must be protected by mineral coating or suitable
painting.
Expanded polystyrene slabs or other foam insulation 40 mm thick at least shall be stuck
down to the roof with a coat of the waterproofing compound.
Each slab of insulation shall be bounded by a key interlocking with adjacent slabs, to ensure
the continuity of the insulation.
A vapour barrier shall be applied below the insulation layer.
9.7.3 Covers, Flashings and Rainwater Outlets

Pre-cast cement roofing tiles shall be formed with a minimum 10 mm facing of one part
white cement and three parts of sand, set on a backing of sulphate resistant cement mortar
with a minimum cement content of 300 kg/m³.
Flashings shall be formed out of 0.8 mm aluminium with natural mill finish. Accessories
such as hooks, nails, screws and clamps shall be of the same material and alloy.
Screeds shall be prepared of cement, sand and water in accordance to the requirements
stipulated for screeds.
Rainwater outlets shall drain from the top interface between the waterproof membranes.
Rainwater guttering for flat roofs shall have vertical pipes of diameter, such that a minimum
cross-sectional area of 100 mm2 is provided for each square metre of roof area.
9.7.4 Workmanship
Workmanship shall be carried out in accordance with DIN 18338. The roof surfaces shall be
uniform, compact and free from debris.
Waterproof membranes shall be 1.5 mm thick self adhesive rubber bitumen applied strictly in
accordance to the manufacturer’s instructions. The membrane shall be continuous and take
up abutments and pipes to above the insulation layer. Exposed membrane shall be solar
protected. The waterproof membrane shall be dressed and bonded into rainwater outlets and
under flashings.
The insulation board shall be not less than 50 mm thick closed cell extruded polystyrene
loose laid in a single layer with tight staggered butt joints in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. The board shall be trimmed to fit any fillets used under the
waterproof membrane.
Flashings shall be sheet aluminium neatly cut to the width and length required. The
aluminium shall be carefully bent using a slightly rounded former so as to avoid surface
cracking. Where surface fixing is required, the sheet shall be pre-drilled and fixed with
screws that are not oxidizable to proprietary fixings or hardwood grounds let into the surface
of the base concrete or brick work.
Lightweight screeds shall be laid in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and to
falls not less than 1:40 with a thickness of 100 mm. The screed shall be laid in two courses
and in bays not exceeding 15 m², laid alternatively and finished with a mortar topping of 1:4
cement/sand mortar. Immediately after laying, the screed shall be protected from wind and
sunlight and cured for 7 days.
9.8 Timber Works

9.8.1 General
A high standard of workmanship and materials shall be achieved in the works. The
completed timber work shall be durable, well finished and designed and constructed to arrive
at a service lifespan of at least 40 years.
Workmen employed in the manufacture and installation of timberwork shall be experienced

carpenters.
9.8.2 Materials
Timber shall be of best quality, sound, in good condition, reasonably free from shakes and
free from loose dead knots, insect attack, decay, twisting and warping. Timber shall be
properly seasoned to suit the purpose for which it is intended. Only knots with characteristics
similar to those detailed in DIN 4074 will be allowed. Where timber is prescribed as
“selected“ it shall be free from knots.
Softwood shall be either redwood, specially selected from the best unsorted and joinery
quality or Douglas fir of selected merchantable quality or better.
Hardwood shall be selected and of best quality; it shall be particularly checked for infestation
by pinhole borers. Selected hardwood shall comply with DIN 4074, grade IA.
All plywood, chipboard or materials incorporating chipboard shall not be used in the works.
9.8.3 Samples
Timber, or carpentry and joinery units of which the material on delivery to the site does not
conform to the standard of samples will be rejected
9.8.4 Ironmongery
The Contractor shall provide all necessary ironmongery including matching screws, bolts,
plugs and other fixings. The use of nails for ironmongery fixing will not be permitted.
Ironmongery shall be of the best quality and shall be of solid brass.
9.8.5 Fabrication
The carpenter shall perform all necessary mortising, tenoning, grooving, matching, housing,
rebating and all other works for correct jointing. He shall also provide all metal plates,
screws and other fixings that may be specified or necessary for the proper execution of the
works and he shall carry out all works necessary for the proper construction of all framings,
linings etc. and for their support and fixing in the works.
No nails shall be used to assemble or fix hardwood, major supports or ironmongery. Screws
used in exposed locations and/or for hardwood shall be brass and complete with brass
surrounds.
9.8.6 Timber Components

Flush doors shall have a minimum thickness of 40 mm and shall be faced both sides with
hardwood veneered faces. The core of solid core flush doors shall be constructed of
longitudinal laminations of precision planed timber, butt jointed and glued with resin based
adhesive under hydraulic pressure. All edges shall be bevelled and lipid with hardwood
tongued into the edge of the door.
Hardwood doors shall be constructed out of teak or similar hardwood, with 100x38 mm
stiles, 125x38 mm top rails and 225x38 mm middle and bottom rails. Where required, the
doors shall be glazed with 6 mm wire polished plate glass, fixed with hardwood glazing
beads.
Frames, architrave’s and extension pieces shall be manufactured from red or whitewood
timber and shall include the use of finger-jointed material. If exposed in the laboratory, the
frames must be in hardwood.
9.9 Metal Windows and Doors

9.9.1 Metal windows and doors
Metal windows and doors shall be handled with care and until fixed shall be stacked on edge
on clean surfaces.
In brick openings, frames shall be fitted with fixing lugs in adequate number, and bedded in
mortar.
In concrete openings, frames shall be plugged to the walls using zinc-coated screws.
To avoid corrosion of Aluminium alloy frames, screws and other metal fixing in contact with
them shall be of Aluminium, zinc or cadmium plated. In no circumstances shall copper
fixings be used.
Frames shall not be used as centring for brickwork or to support a lintel.
Frames shall be carefully pointed in 1: 3 cement mortar and, after raking out the gap, shall be
pointed with mastic.
9.9.2 Kind of windows and doors

When not otherwise specified, the Contractor shall use surface treated anodised Aluminium
windows and doors which shall be robust and of good quality.
Extruded Aluminium members shall be fabricated conforming to DIN EN 546.
Where members are formed from sheet materials they shall be fabricated conforming to DIN
EN 485.
The main elements of the Aluminium solid section outer frame shall be at minimum
tolerance not less than 2.0 mm thick. The thickness of all other structural elements of the
sections shall be at minimum tolerance not less than 1.2 mm except for weather-stripping
retaining flanges and glazing beads which may be thinner.
All Aluminium alloy parts shall be finished satin matt and anodised in accordance with DIN
4113.
Weather-stripping shall:
- be made from materials known to be compatible with Aluminium;
- not shrink or warp or adhere to sliding surfaces or closing surfaces;
- not promote corrosion when in contact with the Aluminium alloy used; and,
- be resistant to deterioration by weathering.
Joints in frames shall be made neatly and accurately either by welding or by mechanical
means (e.g. cleaning and screwing) and may have flush, stepped or lapped surfaces. Welded
joints shall be cleaned off smooth on the surfaces which are exposed when the window or
door is in the closed position or where they come into contact with glazing.
Hinges and pivots shall be either of suitable corrosion-resistant materials or, if not
compatible with Aluminium, shall be separated from the Aluminium by materials which are
compatible with it. Hardware, including fixings, shall be of suitable corrosion resistant
materials. Materials or finishes which are not compatible with Aluminium shall not be used
unless they are satisfactorily separated from the Aluminium by materials which are
compatible with it.
Glazing beds, gaskets, glass adaptors and glazing compound shall be of materials compatible
with aluminium and finishes thereon.
Windows and doors shall be such that glazing and reglazing on site is possible without the
need to remove the outer frames from the structure of the building.
Mosquito screens shall be fitted to all windows and external doors.
All windows shall be protected externally by corrosion-resistant steel bars to effectively

prevent undesired entrance.
9.9.3 Louvers
The use of louvers is not permitted in principal, due to the fact that Hebron is subject to sand
storms. Where louvers are proposed, Contractor has to demonstrate that both alternatives are
not functional and that the use of louvers is appropriate in this case.
9.10 Finish Hardware

9.10.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish and install all finish hardware to complete the work as specified.
All hardware shall have the required screws, bolts and fastenings necessary for proper
installation, wrapped in paper and packed in the same package as the hardware. Each
package shall be legibly labelled, indicating that portion of the work for which it is intended.
All hardware shall be of the best grade, entirely free from imperfections in manufacture and
finish.
Quantities, weight and sizes specified herein are the minimum that will be acceptable.
Finish of all hardware shall be dull stainless steel unless otherwise noted.
9.10.2 Hardware description

Locks:
1) Tabular cylinder locks: stainless finish
2) Entry, exit and office doors: keyed on side, button opposite side
Passage doors: knobs both sides, no lock

Storage rooms: single knob with key
All keyed locks to be master keys for same building.
All locks to have two keys each.
Door closers: heavy duty type with stainless cover; top installation for either right or left
hand operation
Stops: floor or wall mounted type, stainless
Door pull: 10 x 30 cm stainless plate, with 15 cm shaped pull securely fastened to plate;
mounted with oval head stainless screws.
Kick plates: 20 cm stainless plate, width of door less 5 cm
Coat holder: stainless steel, standard
Door hinges: 10 x 10 cm stainless steel, three per door
Flush bolts: 15 cm stainless
Gravity hinges: set of upper and lower, chrome finish, adjustable to stay slightly ajar
Cabinet hinges: 6 x 10 cm stainless, three per door
Friction catch: heavy duty - two parts with rubber grips concealed installation
Cabinet and drawer pulls: stainless steel, 10 cm grip with concealed bolt fastenings.
9.10.3 Window hardware:

Windows indicated to be pivot type shall be furnished with a pair of window fittings (friction
stays), a window pull and one barrel bolt lock. Window fittings shall be galvanized or
stainless steel. Window pull shall be 2.5 x 10 cm with 4 screws and barrel bolt 10 cm long, 6
mm bolt.
Installation: Unless otherwise indicated, all hardware installation and hanging shall be done
at the site.
Exteriors doors and doors in air conditioned areas shall be weather-stripped.
The Contractor shall provide one (1) painted wood key case in each structure, size 25 x 50
cm with door and lock. Supply plywood back inside with hooks for spare keys. All keys shall
be clearly labelled with metal or hardboard tags size approximately 50 x 20 securely fixed to
the keys and handed over to the Project Manager
Upon completion of the hardware installation, all items shall be inspected for proper
operation. All work shall be protected and any damage or incorrectness shall be repaired.
Hardware shall not be fitted until the latest time in the Contract.
9.11 Glazing
9.11.1 General
The Contractor shall supply the glass required in those items of plant, furnishings and
figments included in the Contract. Glass shall be of quality in accordance to DIN 1249 or
equivalent. Sheets shall be selected quality glazing and of weight. Labels showing the glass
manufacturer’s name, type of glass thickness and quality will be required on each piece of
glass and shall remain on the glass until it has been set and inspected.
9.11.2 Materials
Clear float glass shall be 6 mm thick. Obscured glass shall be rough cast, untainted and of 6
mm nominal thickness. Wired glass shall be transparent with a polished surface, 6 mm thick,
selected and cut parallel to the reinforcement.
Putty for glazing to timber frames shall be in accordance to DIN 18540, and to metal frames,
it shall be of renown manufacture.
9.11.3 Size, Delivery and Storage

Dimensions of glass and frame shall provide minimum clearance equal to glass thickness for
single glass on all four sides. The sealed space between face of glass and applied glazing
stops shall be not less than 3 mm minimum.
Glass shall be delivered to the site in suitable containers allowing to protect the glass from
weather and breakage.
9.11.4 Installation
Clear glass shall be used except where ordered otherwise. The glass shall be cut and installed
without any visible lines or waves running horizontally.
Glazing in wood shall have rebates and beds primed and painted. The glass shall be firmly
seated into the previously bedded and back-bedded rebate with glazing compound and
secured in place with wood beds, attached with not less than 25 mm finish nails or flat
headed screws, countersunk and set approximately at 15 cm centers. Nails and screws used in
beds shall be corrosion resistant.
9.11.5 Cleaning up
All glass shall be cleaned at the completion of construction and any broken glass replaced.
The glazing shall be maintained in a clean condition until the date of handing over the works.
9.12 Sanitary Installation

9.12.1 Connections to equipment and fixtures
The Contractor shall provide all equipment and necessary material and labour to fixtures
connect to the plumbing system all fixtures and equipment having plumbing connections,
which are specified elsewhere. All connections to the sanitary drainage system shall be
trapped. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture shall be equipped with a cut-off
valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with
operation of other equipment or fixtures.
Cutting and repairing

The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and no excessive cutting of construction will
be permitted. Damage to buildings, piping, wiring, equipment or appurtenances as a result of
cutting for installation shall be repaired by persons skilled in the trade involved.
Protection to fixtures and equipment

Pipe openings shall be closed with fixtures and caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and
equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and chemical or
mechanical injury. Upon completion of all work, the fixtures, materials and equipment shall
be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted, and operated. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings,
protecting setscrews, keys and other rotating parts shall be located so that any person in close
proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed or properly guarded.
Sanitary, wastewater and vent piping - generally

Pipe materials shall conform to the following requirements:
- Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe:
- Fittings on PVC pipes shall be PVC socket type and shall be installed by solvent welt
method.
- Cast Iron Pipe:
- "Specifications for cast iron soil pipe and fittings (ISO R-13), spigot and socket"; the pipe
shall be coal tar pitch coated.
Downspouts and clutters

Downspouts for roof drainage shall have a diameter not less than 100 mm and shall be
fabricated of light gouge galvanized steel or PVC. All offsets and bends shall be made with
451-bends and no skewed joints or bowed down spouts will be permitted. Downspouts shall
be supported with galvanized steel straps or PVC straps.
Gutters shall have half round or rectangular profiles in asbestos cement, PVC, or galvanized
iron. The width or diameter of gutters shall be 150 mm.
Water pipes, fittings and connections

The piping shall be extended to all fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The water piping system
shall be installed so as to be drained. Drainage shall be accomplished using 12 mm plugged
or capped fittings at each low point, except where a drain valve or a hose tap is reasonable.
Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Contractor
and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to
weaken structural portions of the building. Exposed piping shall be run parallel with the lines
of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken
from top, bottom, or side of the main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by
structural or installation conditions. Pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept in a sufficient
distance from other work and other pipes to permit not less than 25 mm between pipes and
other work. No water pipe shall be buried in floors or cast in concrete walls, unless
specifically indicated. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with fittings. Use of bushings will
not be permitted. Change in direction shall be made with fittings.
Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of pipe. Sufficient
flexibility shall be provided on all branch run outs from mains to provide for expansion and
contraction of piping. Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more turns in the line
so that the piping will spring enough to allow for expansion without straining.
Joints in steel piping may be screwed or flanged. Installation of pipe and fittings shall be
made in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Mitring of joints for elbows
and notching of straight runs of pipe for test will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have
ISO/R7 pipe threads with graphite or inert filler and oil, with a suitable graphite compound,
or with polyethylene tape applied to the male threads only. Unions shall be provided where
required for disconnection.
Valves
Valves shall be provided for piping to equipment and fixtures. No valve shall be installed on
any line with its stem below the horizontal. All valves shall be gate valves, unless otherwise
specified or indicated.
Unions
Unions shall be installed in easily accessible locations. Gaskets for flanged unions shall be of
the best quality fibre, plastic or leather. Unions shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or
partitions.
Hose taps
Hose taps shall be brass with 13 mm inlet threads, hexagon shoulder, and 20 mm hose
connection, unless otherwise indicated. Hose taps installed on exterior walls of buildings
shall have an integral wall flange which shall be securely anchored to the wall to prevent any
strain on the supply pipe when attaching or disconnecting hose. Anchors shall use brass or
bronze bolts or screws with expansion shields in the concrete or masonry wall.
Pipe sleeves
Pipe passing through concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors shall be provided with
pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves shall be steel pipe. Each
sleeve shall extend through its respective wall, floor or roof, and shall be cut flush, except
sleeves in toilet room floors shall extend 25 mm above the finished floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, sleeves shall be of such size as to provide a minimum of 6 mm all around
clearance between bare pipe and sleeves. The annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be
packed and caulked watertight.
Pipe hangers insert and supports

The location of hangers and supports shall be co-ordinated with the structural work to assure
that the structural members will support the intended load.
Fixture support
Wall-hung fixtures shall be fastened to the wall by 9.5 mm through bolts where appearance
of the bolts is not objectionable. Exposed bolt heads in finished areas shall be hexagonal and
painted. Exposed nuts shall be chromium-plated hexagonal cap nuts. Washers shall be
painted or chromium-plated to match bolt heads or nuts.
For solid masonry and where through bolting is objectionable, fixtures shall be fastened with
9.5 mm machine bolt expansion shields or 9. 5 mm stud-type expansion bolts.
For cellular-masonry construction, where through bolting is objectionable, fixtures shall be

fastened with 9.5 mm toggle bolts. Toggle bolts shall extend into the cell of the masonry unit
and shall be of the gravity or spring-wing type. Lavatories mounted on pipe chases shall be
installed with one or two steel backup plates as required. The backup plates shall be 3.2 mm
thick, 100 mm wide and not less than the width of the fixture.
Testing and sterilization of water system

When the roughing-in is completed and before fixtures are set, the entire water piping
systems shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 10.0 kg /cm2, and proved
tight at this pressure for not less than 30 minutes in order to permit inspection of all joints.
Where a portion of the water piping system is to be concealed before completion, this portion
shall be tested separately as specified for the entire system.
If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or
repaired as necessary and inspection and tests repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with
new materials. No caulking of screwed joints or holes will be acceptable.
Cleaning and adjusting

Equipment, pipes, valves, fittings, fixtures and appurtenances shall be cleaned of grease,
metal cuttings, and sludge that may have accumulated from operation of the system during
the test. Any stoppage, discolouration or other damage to the finish, furnishings, or parts of
the building, due to the Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system, shall be
repaired by the Contractor. Flush valves and automatic control devices shall be adjusted for
proper operation.
Disinfection
After pressure tests have been made, the entire water system shall be thoroughly flushed with
water until all dirt and mud have been removed before introducing chlorinating material. The
chlorinating material shall be either chlorine solution or hypo chlorite. The chlorinating
material shall provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts per million and shall be introduced
into the system in an evenly spread and suitable manner. The treated water shall be retained
in the pipe long enough to destroy all non-spore forming bacteria. The retention time shall be
at least 24 hours and shall produce not less than 10 ppm of chlorine at the extreme end of the
system at the end of the retention period. All valves in the system being sterilized shall be
opened and closed several times during the contact period. The system shall then be flushed
with clean water until the residual chlorine is reduced to less than 1.0 ppm. During the
flushing period all valves and taps shall be opened and closed several times.
The Contractor will take samples of water in properly sterilized containers for bacterial
examination. Disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of pollution for at
least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results
have been obtained.
Fire protection
Portable fire extinguishers shall be installed in all buildings at strategic positions (stair cases,
corridors) in a manner that traffic will not be obstructed. As a further condition, extinguishers
shall be located at easily visible and accessible locations regarding the event of a fire.
Preferably dry chemical extinguishers, multipurpose type, shall be supplied. As a rule

powder units containing 12 kg shall be supplied, which combine all of the extinguishing
effects, and are permitted for fires of class A to C in the presence of electrical voltage up to
1,000 V. For class D fires involving combustible metals dry compound extinguishers shall be
introduced. The portable fire extinguishers shall be fitted with spring headed interchangeable
safety valves.
Rooms and areas where voltages above 1,000 V are to be present, housing relays, control and
computer units shall be equipped with portable carbon dioxide extinguishers in addition.
Also suitable masks to prevent any injury to personnel shall be supplied.
All extinguishers shall be designed for service over a period of 20 years taking the conditions
at the site into account.
The extinguishers must be provided as early as possible, however, at latest on

commencement of the commissioning preparations.
After completion of the installation, random tests of 20% of the portable extinguishers
supplied shall be performed. The necessary refills shall be provided by the Contractor.
The following Arrangement criteria shall be met:

- Maximum travel distance to an extinguisher: 22 m
- Maximum areas to be protected per extinguisher: 500 m²
9.13 Painting
9.13.1 General
This Specification covers the general requirements and standards of workmanship and the
painting and protective coatings required to be carried out by the Contractor of the works.
No alternative or substitute painting standard or specification will be accepted unless it is

specifically required for the above stated reason.
9.13.2 Contractor's responsibility

The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete cleaning, preparation, priming, painting
and protection of the works carried out by him.
Appropriate standards
Where no explicit instruction is given standards in the Specification or by the manufacturer
concerning any particular aspect of the workmanship, materials or procedures in connection
with anti-corrosion protective systems in the works for iron and steel structures, the relevant
recommendations of the following standard or code of practice shall apply:
DIN EN 13507 Thermal spraying - Pre-treatment of surfaces
DIN EN ISO 2063 Thermal spraying - Metallic and other inorganic coatings
DIN EN ISO 8044 Corrosion of metal
DIN EN ISO 1461 Hot-dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles
DIN 50928 Protective coating of iron and steel structures against corrosion
DIN 18364 Surface protection of steel structures
Local conditions
All coatings shall be suitable for the long term protection of the plant under operational
conditions at the site of installation. The Contractor's attention is specifically drawn to the
extremes of temperature and humidity recorded in the region and he shall take into account
possible abrasions, restricted ventilation, and the various potentially corrosive environments
within the works buildings and structures.
Decorative finish and final appearance

The Contractor is advised that internal civil works finishes, furnishings and decorative colour
schemes in the main operational areas should be of a pleasing appearance, co-ordinated and
designed to produce a comfortable working environment. Accordingly, the Contractor shall
allow for consultation with the Project Manager regarding the final colour scheme and
decoration of the works.
Precautions etc.
All surface fittings, ironmongery, etc., except hinges shall be removed before painting and
refixed on completion. They shall be entirely free of any droppings, paint smears and
blemishes. Labels, pump and other machinery name plates, data plates, markings, etc., shall
not be over painted but carefully preserved by removal and replacement or by masking.
The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the toxicity, inflammability and the explosive
dangers related to the storage and application of the systems and shall take all precautions
necessary to protect his operatives, the public and other site personnel.
Work succession
No one site coat may proceed in any section of the works until the entire section is complete
and the Project Manager has had notice of completion in order that he may inspect the work
and authorize the application of subsequent coats. Each successive coat shall preferably be of
different colour or shade to facilitate inspection.
Application of protective coating and paint system

Unless specifically specified elsewhere, the protective systems shall be applied in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions to the full thickness range specified, particular note
being taken of the requirements for the time interval between successive coats of the System.
The coating thickness for painting on concrete or plaster surfaces shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions or proposals.
Equipment and condition

Brushes, tools and equipment shall be kept in a neat and clean condition. Painting shall not
be carried out in the vicinity of other operations which might cause dust. The final coat shall
be uniform in colour and free from brush marks, runs or other defects.
Paint thickness and continuity

The Contractor shall provide and maintain, during manufacture and on site, gauges and
measuring equipment of high quality type to ensure that the specified film thickness are
achieved, paint holidays are avoided, and adhesion perfect.
Wet film thickness gauges shall be provided to and used by each painter to check the rate of
paint application.
The thickness of the built-up dry film after each paint coat applied to steel or other magnetic
surfaces shall be measured systematically with a dry film thickness gauge.
The Contractor shall adopt holiday detection on concrete, steel and iron surfaces and shall
use a suitable method of detecting pinholes in the coating system after trials on test plates.
The sweep voltage on high voltage DC equipment shall not exceed half the voltage required
to spark through the complete paint system specified.
Gauges, instruments and meters shall be maintained in an accurate working condition.
The following instruments, with the manufacturer’s operating instructions, shall be provided,
maintained and used by the Contractor's inspector. In addition, under the Contract a separate
set shall be provided and maintained for the Project Manager’s sole use for the duration of
the Contract:
- adhesion tester, cover 0 to 280 kg/ cm2;
- 1 DC high voltage holiday detector, 20 kV, with rechargeable batteries;
- 1 paint inspection gauge, 0 to 500 microns;
- 4 "wet-check" moisture meters with suitable concrete and timber scales;
- 1 dry film thickness gauge, 0 to 500 microns;
- 4 wet film gauges, up to 500 microns;
- 1 steel temperature gauge, up to 50° C;
- 1 air humidity gauge;
- 1 air Thermometer (maximum and minimum);
- surface profile gauge, up to 150 microns.
Daily checks shall be carried out and recorded on site in accordance with the provisions of
DIN 55634.
Dry film thickness

References in the Specification to dry film thickness (DFT) shall mean the minimum dry film
thickness measured with a suitable instrument, either of individual coats, or the total system,
-0
% over the DFT.
Colour coding
Pipework, tanks and ducting shall be colour coded by totally painting with the appropriate
code colour as specified.
The principal code colours shall be as follows

Contents Description Colour
Raw waste water Light brown

Waste water sludge Dark brown
Potable water Blue
Hot water Crimson
Irrigation water Medium green
Fire fighting water (including sprinkler systems and hydrants) Signal red
Oil and fuel oil Brown
Gas for fuel Yellow ochre
Chlorine liquid and gas yellow
Compressed air Light blue
Air (ventilation and air conditioning ducts) Silver
The definition RAL-notation of the colours mentioned above shall be subject to Project
Manager’s approval after the commencement of the works.
The colour coding for other minor pipelines, etc., will be notified to the Contractor prior to
the commencement of erection.
All pipes and tanks shall also bear painted labels to indicate the contents. Lettering shall be in
both Arabic and English. Labels on pipework shall incorporate arrows showing the direction
of flow within the pipework.
Black lettering shall be used on organ, yellow and green and white lettering shall be used on
red and blue. Sufficient labels shall be used to ensure adequate identification throughout the
length of the pipe runs. These shall be located at least adjacent to each flange or
disconnecting joint, where pipework passes through walls, floors, crosses doorways and other
access ways and at intervals in long runs of pipework.
Knotting and stopping

Knotting shall comply with DIN 4062.
Stopping for concrete or sand/cement plastering shall be of similar material to the

background and shall have a similar surface finish.
Stopping for woodwork, hardboard and plywood shall be proprietary spirit-based wood filler,
tinted to match the woodwork.
Parts to be subjected to manufacturer’s shop testing shall not be stopped or surface treated
prior to satisfactory completion of the testing. Thereafter the specified treatment shall be
applied.
Paint source and supervision

All paint shall be "new" and "fresh" and obtained from reknown manufacturer(s).
Systems to be compatible and complete

All coatings, stoppings, primers, compatible and undercoats and finishing paints of any one
complete protective system shall be compatible with each other and the completed system
shall provide continuous, pore-free coatings resistant to physical and chemical disintegration
in the environment in which they are to be used.
As far as is practicable, materials, forming any one protective and/or decorative system used
in the permanent works, shall be obtained from one manufacturer.
Bitumen coating
Bitumen coatings shall be to DIN 18195, 18336 and DIN 18299. Suitable grades shall be
selected where the coating will be in contact with potable water.
Identification
All paint shall be supplied in sealed containers bearing the following information in addition
to any statutory requirements:
- Manufacturer’s name, initials or trade mark;
- Whether priming, undercoat or finishing coat;
- Whether for interior or external use;
- The colour reference number;
- The method of application (e.g. brush);
- The batch number and date of manufacture of re-test
- The shelf life of the contents.
Containers for materials other than paints shall bear as much of the above information as
appropriate.
Storage and use of paint, thinners etc.

Paint, thinners etc., shall be stored in sealed containers in a lock-up store at a temperature of
not less than 4°C and not more than 27°C. Any special storage conditions for the paint
recommended by the manufacturer shall be observed.
Paint preparation
Paint shall be supplied from the Contractor's paint store to the painters ready for application.
Any addition of thinners shall be made in the store under supervision and up to the limit
detailed on the appropriate manufacturer’s paint data sheet for the particular method and
conditions of applications concerned.
Waste
The Contractor shall provide onsite suitable moveable receptacles into which are to be placed
all the liquid, slops, washings, etc. All solid refuse or inflammable residues shall be removed
from site or carefully burned. No refuse shall be deposited on any soil or disposed down any
permanent sanitary fittings, sinks or drains. The Contractor shall immediately clean up any
unauthorized deposition and remove from the site any employee found to be responsible.
Spray application
The equipment to be used for spray application shall be in strict accordance with the paint
manufacturer’s instructions for each coating material. Any runs shall be immediately brushed
out.
Brush application
The shape and quality of the brushes shall be suitable for the work to be carried out.
Extension handles to brushes shall not be permitted.
Metal coatings
All steelwork (except roof structures) where ever installed and if not specified otherwise
shall be galvanized (in hot bath or zinc spraying).
Metal coatings required for protective purposes on any item of metalwork shall be applied
after fabrication of the items is completed, including all punching, welding, drilling,
grinding, screw tapping and cutting, and after the removal of surface defects. Tapped holes
shall be blanked off before the metal coating is applied.
Prefabrication primers
Unless otherwise specified, prefabrication primers for steelwork shall comply with the
relevant DIN standards and contain corrosion-inhibiting pigments, adhere firmly to the
substrate and form suitable bases for the succeeding coats in the protective paint system.
Surface Preparation by blasting

All surfaces to be coated shall be free of scale, rust, grease, oil, dust and other deleterious
materials.
The surface finish of blast cleaned steel shall be in accordance with the relevant DIN
standard and to a visual standard in accordance with SIS 05 59 00 at the time of painting. The
blast profile shall be within the limits 50 - 75 microns.
Abrasives shall be restricted to reusable iron or steel (grit and shot) or copper slag. The type
and grades of abrasive shall be selected in accordance with the appropriate DIN standard.
Within four hours of completion of surface preparation, and before surface re-rusting occurs,
a coating of primer shall be applied to avoid deterioration of the prepared base metal. No
contamination shall be permitted to occur between blast cleaning and primer coating.
Dehumidification required for special purposes

The Contractor shall supply and operate such dehumidification equipment as may be
necessary to preserve blast cleaned surfaces in a pristine condition until they can be coated
and/or to provide the curing conditions necessary for such coats.
Uncoated surfaces
The only surfaces of iron or steelwork or non-corrosion resistant materials which are to be
left unprotected by paint or metal coating are:
The internal surfaces of boxes or hollow sections which are of dimensions too small to
permit access for painting either at the fabrication stage or for maintenance during the
operation life of the steelwork and which are to be hermetically sealed by welding.
Those surfaces of built-in iron or steel members which are to have concrete cast against
them;
- Machine bright parts and bearing surfaces which shall be thoroughly cleaned, polished
and protected from corrosion by painting with one coat of a mixture of white lead and
tallow or other similar high quality material before despatch. The Contractor shall provide
solvent for removing the treatment;
- Parts which are specified to include corrosion allowances instead of protective coatings.
- Stainless steel parts
- Surfaces of iron or steel members which are to have concrete cast against them shall be
clean and free of deleterious matter and loose rust at the time of concreting. The paint
protection system, to be applied to the permanently exposed faces of these members
before the members are built in, shall be continued for 50 mm as marginal strip along the
contact surface. No paint containing Aluminium in metallic form shall be allowed to come
into direct contact with the concrete.
Repair of damaged work - general

Unless specified elsewhere, areas of paint on steelwork which have been damaged shall be
cleaned to sound material and the edges of the undamaged paint smoothed with sand-paper to
a gentle bevel.
The specified paint system shall then be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions to bring the damaged area up to the same state of protection as the surrounding
paintwork, with each coat of new paint overlapping the corresponding existing coat of paint
by at last 50 mm.
Where epoxy coatings are damaged, suitable repair supplied by the manufacturer of the
original coating shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Fastenings
Bolts, nuts and washers and other demountable fastenings of all galvanized parts and also
Aluminium alloy parts shall be in stainless steel to the appropriate DIN standard and shall
remain unpainted. P.T.F.E. washers shall be fitted beneath bolt-head and washer when
fastening galvanized and aluminium alloy parts.
Fastenings, except high tensile, of all ferrous parts shall be steel prepared and galvanized to
or sheradized to the relevant DIN standards, primed and painted in accordance with location.
Electro-galvanizing, nickel, cadmium or any other plating process, except chromium plating,
will not be acceptable, and shall not be offered.
Painting and protection of bolted connections

Joints areas of bolted connections shall be masked to maintain the surfaces free from any
paint applied prior to making the connections. Masking shall be removed before erection.
After installation and after all bolts have been tightened, the area of the connection shall be
cleaned to remove all dirt, dust, oil or other contaminant. Particular care shall be taken to
ensure that all traces of oil and grease are removed from bolts, nuts and washers.
Bolts, nuts and washers and any exposed at bolted connections shall also be primed as
specified, particular care being taken to ensure that any crevices are fully sealed. The
remaining coats of the paint system shall then be applied.
Following painting and where the bolted connections are in an area to be backfilled (pipe
trench flanges, etc.) the bolts, nuts and washers and the entire joint assembly shall be
carefully packed with a purpose made water proof protective paste (non solvent) and finally
wrapped with a protective paste impregnated tape to completely encase the assembly. Pipe
joint protection shall continue along the length of the barrel for a distance of 200 mm.
Copper and brass

Copper pipes and brass fittings shall be painted where they are located in aggressive
locations, or to colour code the function.
Plaster and concrete protection

Where specified or required for the protection of the work or the containment or storage of
chemical solutions, concrete or rendered surfaces shall be protected with paint systems
accordingly to the table at the end of this section.
Preparation of concrete and rendered surfaces

Concrete and rendered surfaces shall be thoroughly cured in accordance to the
manufacturer’s instructions before the application of any painting system is begun.
Minimum thickness and adhesion tests for painting systems for concrete and plaster
The total dry film thickness of any used paint system shall have a minimum value of tests for
0.75 mm. In order to restore the coating integrity and plaster thickness whenever the paint
inspection gauge is used or wherever the coating has been otherwise damaged, the surface
shall be abraded for 50 mm around such damage and the area touched in with not less than
two thick applications.
Adhesion tests will be carried out on the cured coating using the test equipment supplied
under the Contract in accordance with the best practice. The resulting test specimen shall
show no indication of poor adhesion to the substratum, residual laitance or intercoat adhesion
weakness.
Preparation of plaster, brickwork and concrete surfaces

Efflorescence present on the surface of internal plaster, brickwork and concrete shall be
removed by scraping and brushing before any surface paint is applied. When fluorescence
has been removed surfaces shall be left for at least three days before priming. Painting shall
be deferred where further salt deposits form on the surface during this period.
Plaster surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned down, smoothed as necessary, and all cracks
shall be filled with stopping for plaster. All fittings shall be carried out before paint is applied
to the surface.
Brickwork, block work and concrete surfaces shall be cleaned of all contaminating matter
before being primed. Large holes which would cause a break in the paint film shall be filled
with mortar, the surface being rubbed down to match the surrounding areas.
Preparation of wood surfaces

Wood surfaces shall not be painted when the moisture content of the timber measured with
an electric moisture meter exceeds 12 % for interior surfaces and 18 % for exterior surfaces.
Hardwoods and soft woods for which a clear finish is specified shall be rubbed down with
abrasive paper to give a smooth surface which shall be free from contaminating substances,
scratches and other imperfections.
Prior to coating all nail and screw holes, etc., shall first be stopped. Surfaces which are to be
painted shall be rubbed down to remove all contaminating substances and imperfections
which would be visible in the finished paint film. The surfaces of knots and resinous streaks
shall then be painted with two coasts of knotting, the first being allowed to dry before the
second is applied.
The surfaces of timber treated with a water-borne preservative by an impregnation process

shall be rubbed down and dry brushed to remove all traced of efflorescence before the primer
is applied.
Where surfaces are suspected of being infected with mould they shall be thoroughly treated
with a fungicide.
Final treatment of wood, plaster, etc.

The final painting system required in the works is given in the following table and is
presented to tenderers for guidance to include such work in their supply under this Contract.
Paint System for Plaster and Concrete Protection
Surface Environment Primer Final Treatment
Concrete and High 1 coat of a highly 2 coat of a highly weather resistant

cement plaster humidity weather resistant synthetic resin based paint
resin, thinned to
manufacturer’s
Surface Environment Primer Final Treatment
instruction
Concrete Exposed to 1 coat with a plastic 3 coats with an oil resistant synthetic
oil modified hydraulic resin based paint
mortar
Concrete Exposed to 1 coat of colourless 2 coats of a 2-pack epoxy-based paint

mechanical 2-pack epoxy-based
and chemical paint, thinned to
attack manufacturer’s
instructions
Concrete Exposed to 1 coat of colourless 2 coats of a 2-pack epoxy-based paint

flooring mechanical rubber-based paint,
wear and oil thinned to
manufacturer’s
instructions
Internal Exposed to 3 coats of an oil-free synthetic resin-

concrete and minor based dust-binding paint
plastered abrasion
walls
Concrete Exposed to 2 coats of an oil-free synthetic resin-

flooring minor based dust-binding paint
mechanical
wear
Internal Exposed to 1 coat of polyvinyl- 2 coats of polyvinyl-acetate dispersion

plastered normal acetate dispersion type, non-chalking
conditions type, non-chal-king,
thinned to manufac-
turer’s instructions
10 Metalwork
10.1 Scope
This section sets out the general requirements for the metalwork required in the works.
10.1.1 General
All steelwork in areas prone to high corrosion risk shall be Stainless Steel 316L. This
pertains as a minimum for all steel structures, equipment and appurtenances in the water line
up to the final clarifier as well as structures, equipment and appurtenances in the sludge line.
All other steelwork (except roof structures) where ever installed shall be galvanized (in hot
bath or zinc spraying). Welding on galvanized steelwork has to be avoided and assembling
has to be done by bolts and nuts.
The permissible design stresses for materials, bolts, rivets, etc., are given in DIN 18800.
Rolled structural steel sections shall be mild steel, conforming to DIN EN 10025. The
dimensions, tolerances and properties of the structural sections shall conform to DIN 18201
up to 18203 and to DIN 18800. Where the use of prefabricated proprietary designs is
proposed, the standards to which they are manufactures shall be no less rigorous than
specified herein.
For structural steel work assemblies, steel bolts, nuts and washers shall be high strength
friction grip bolts conforming to DIN 14399 or black bolts including nuts and washers
conforming to DIN 7989 and DIN 7990.
All welding consumables (electrodes, wire, filler rods, flux, shielding gas and the like) shall
comply with the requirements of the appropriate DIN standard and with the requirements of
the appropriate welding procedure.
Design and detailing

Structures and components, such as required for the laddering, hoppers, etc., shall be shop
fabricated so as to form sub-assemblies of the largest practical size suitable for
transportation, handling and erection.
Detailing should be in accordance with DIN 18800.
Erection
All erection processes shall be carried out in accordance to DIN 18800.
10.2 Welding and heat treatment

10.2.1 General
All welding carried out during fabrication in the factory and erection on the Site shall be
carried out in accordance with the requirements as shown on the detail drawings. Details of
the proposed welding procedures shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative for
information at the same time as the detail drawings. All connections shall be welded in such
a manner as to make the finished connections neat and smooth in appearance, and suitable for
painting. All slag shall be removed, and any sharp projections shall be ground smooth. All
welding carried out during fabrication in the factory and erection on the site shall be carried
out in accordance with the requirements of DIN 18800 and as shown on the detail drawings.
Before welding is commenced either in the fabrication shop or on site, weld procedure tests
shall be carried out.
All welders employed either in the fabrication shop or on site shall pass qualification tests
relevant to the weld procedures in use in accordance with the appropriate DIN standard.
Welders shall have satisfactory evidence of having been engaged in welding for at least 9
months in the preceding period. If the work of any welders employed on the Contract is
unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall carry out such further welder qualification tests as are
necessary to demonstrate that the welders are proficient.
When not otherwise specified, welds shall be subject to non-destructive testing by processes
which may include but not necessarily be limited to radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic
particle, or dye penetration methods, depending on the type of weld and its position in the
structure. About 50 % of all welding shall be tested.
If any work shows defects or fails to comply with the requirements of the drawings or the
specification for any reason, it shall be repaired or rejected, even though it may have been
carried out by qualified welders.
The welding procedure for cupro-nickel linings shall avoid porosity in the weld and any
uncontrolled dilution of the weld by iron picked up from the steel.
Special precautions shall be taken to avoid lamellar tearing when welding thick plates and
low hydrogen content electrodes shall be used. Class 1 welds shall be fully radiographed
except where otherwise specified.
In bad weather, additional measures are needed in the course of welding consequently, in
case of rainy weather, provision shall be made to keep the places of welding dry. In weather
with temperatures below 5 C, a strip of 100 mm should be preheated to 50 C, on both sides
of the welded joint in case of both seams and tack welds.
Splash, burning-in, uneven arc, oversized root edges at corner joints, unsatisfactory seam or
any crack are impermissible in the course of welding. Surfaces should be free from any
marks of impact, indentation and deformation.
Preparation for welding

No welding on galvanized steelwork and over zinc primers or paint will be allowed.
10.3 Flooring
10.3.1 General
Flooring shall be fabricated from chequer plate or open mesh panels.
All steelworks for chequer plates, frames or open mesh flooring shall be constructed in mild
steel and shall be hot–dip galvanized after manufacture, except where otherwise specified.
For all prefabricated metalwork, as chequer plates, frames, open mesh and the like, the
Contractor shall file fabrication drawings.
Flooring and supports thereto shall be designed and manufactured to resist a uniform applied
live loading of 7.5 KN/m² unless otherwise specified or stipulated in the applicable DIN
standards.
Flooring panels shall generally be removable by one man and the maximum weight of each
panel shall not exceed 25 kg. Removable sections of flooring shall be provided with holes for
lifting keys, keys to suit for each location, and be arranged to permit removal without
disturbance to support brackets, spindles, pipework, etc. Intermediate support members shall
be provided as required and attached to the supporting structure.
Flooring shall be detailed and fabricated so that no cutting is required on site. Supporting
steelwork shall comply with the requirements of clauses for structural steelwork. Bolt holes
in brackets and mountings shall be slotted to allow for adjustment of line and level. Mild
steel continuous kerbing shall be provided for seating the flooring in concrete. Kerbing and
other supporting structures for building into concrete shall have lugs welded on a maximum
spacing of 600 mm. Flooring shall be secured to the kerbing or supports by stainless steel
flush screws.
The width of any access walkway shall be not less than 750 mm.
Floor plating
Floor plating over openings in concrete or brickwork shall be set flush in mild steel framed
kerbing provided with adequate integral lugs for building in.
Plating and frames shall be heavily galvanized or Aluminium alloy.
Floor plating shall have a raised pattern.
Open mesh flooring panels shall be fabricated from mild steel load bearing bars of flat
section backed with round, square, or twisted bars perpendicular to and welded to each load
bearing bar. Panels shall be trimmed across the ends of load bearing bars by flats of the same
cross section welded to each load bearing bar. Cut-outs for plant items shall be trimmed with
curved or straight edge trimming as appropriate. Panels shall be fixed to the kerbing or
supporting steelwork with adequate flush stainless steel screws or clips so that movement is
prevented.
Open mesh flooring shall be heavily galvanized.

Internal access covers shall generally be designed and fabricated as specified for flooring. In
situations which warrant special measures to prevent pollution of filtered water the covers
shall be air tight.
If not anywhere otherwise required, external access covers over such as raw water or sludge
channels shall be steel open mesh.
Cast iron access covers

Access covers and frames for use with manholes, chambers, draw pits and other structures
shall be lockable and shall be in compliance to the relevant quality requirements of DIN
1239.
Manhole covers shall be of a class appropriate to their location according to the respective
Standard in the Palestine Territories
Where covers and frames are supplied from manufacturers to standards other than those
specified, the alternatives shall be designed and tested for loadings equal to or greater than
the covers specified, and the clear openings of the frames of the alternatives shall be equal to
or greater than the covers specified.
Permissible differences
For metalwork at floor level joints differences between flooring sections and between steel
flooring and adjacent concrete shall be:
- difference in level at joints: 3 mm
- joint gap: 3 mm
Hand railing
Handrails shall be stainless steel 316 or reinforced carbon. If steel is used, protective
measures have to be taken to prevent high temperatures in summer. Standards shall be fitted
with high quality bases.
Hand railing shall be provided along every edge of all metalwork and concrete walkways,
stairs or accessible open areas where the drop beyond the edge exceeds 700 mm. Hand
railing shall consist of standards at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5 m, and two rails. The
upper rail shall be 1.0 m above the adjacent finished floor level, and 900 mm above the
nosing line on stairways. The lowest rail shall be midway between floor and upper rail. The
hand railing fixing and anchorages shall be designed to withstand a continuous horizontal
load at the top rail of 750 N/m.
Unless otherwise required in the particular specification standards for hand railing inside
buildings, all rails shall be fabricated from 32 mm bore galvanized medium weight steel tube.
Hand railing shall be flush jointed. Hand railing terminating against a wall shall either have a
suitable wall fixing flange, or shall terminate at a standard with a gap between the standard
and the wall not exceeding 100 mm. Where the shape of the concrete structure does not
incorporate an up stand at the edge of walkways, toe plates 5 mm thick and 100 mm high
shall be fixed to handrail standards. The bottom edge of such toe plates shall be 10 mm above
the surface of the concrete walkway.
The handrail standards for stairways and for landings and walkways of width less than 1.2 m
shall have palm fittings for bolting to the side of the structure. Elsewhere the standards shall
be designed for fixing 100 mm inside the edge of concrete structures, or at the supporting
edge girder of steel flooring, or have palm fittings. Horizontal mounting palms shall be
drilled for not less than three bolts with two bolts on a line parallel to and on the walkway
side of the line of the hand railing. Vertical mounting palms shall be drilled for not less than
two bolts the line through the bolts being vertical.
Where required ladders, stairways or other openings shall be guarded on three sides by hand
railing conforming to the requirements stated above. Access to the ladders or openings shall
be guarded by two removable galvanized hanging chains secured to eyes at top and middle
levels.
Hand railing shall be of uniform appearance and manufacture.
10.4 Laddering and stairways

10.4.1 General
Stairways shall be used for access to all reactors and critical equipment, as well as for access
to the digester roof. Ladders shall only be used where non-essential access is needed.
Stairs shall have an inclination of approximately 30°. They shall be complete with handrails,
min. 100 cm vertical height.
All ladders are to have a minimum width of 750 mm where practicable. Vertical ladders shall
be installed alternating left hand/right hand side to horizontal platforms placed approximately
every 6 m of vertical height. Vertical ladders of more than 3 m height shall be provided with
safety hoops at intervals not exceeding 900 mm, with the lowest hoop 2.0 m above the ladder
foot. Load assumptions for ordinary platforms shall be:
- for platforms used by personnel and for support of light equipment with single weights of
less than 50 kg 2.5 kN /m²
- for all other platforms 7.5 kN /m²
- unless otherwise specified or stipulated in the applicable standards.
10.4.2 Ladders
With exception of internal access ladders to water tanks, reservoirs and wet sumps, laddering
shall be in steel (fully hot-dip galvanized). Ladders for internal access shall be in stainless
steel 316L. Generally all ladders shall be in accordance with DIN EN 14396.
The stringers shall be sized to suit the height of the ladder and the interval of the stringer
supports. Stringer shall be radiused over the top and drilled to receive the rungs which shall
be welded to the stringers on each side of each stringer. The bottom ends of the stringers
shall not be designed for floor fixing, but shall terminate at wall fixing supports at least 150
mm above the floor. All edges of stringers shall be ground smooth to remove burrs and sharp
edges.
Where the installation of hoops is not possible or inappropriate, anchorage points shall be
provided for attaching safety harnesses.
10.4.3 Steel stairways

Stairways shall be designed for a loading of 7.5 kN /m² of plan area of the stairway. Steel
stairways shall be provided with tubular hand railing, stringers of cross section suitable for
the span and loading, and treads of open mesh flooring or chequer plating. Except where
specified otherwise, the rise between treads shall be uniform and between 150 mm and 175
mm. Stairways in the same area of the works and in similar locations shall have the same
angle and height of rise between treads.
The width of the treads shall be between 250 mm and 300 mm. The width of the stairways
shall not be less than 750 mm.
The stringer shall be mounted by means of angle brackets with slotted holes for adjustment
of line and level.
10.5 Rainwater Guttering

Rainwater guttering for flat roofs shall have vertical pipes of diameter, such that a minimum
cross-sectional area of 100 mm2 is provided for each square metre of roof area.
Rainwater guttering shall be of hot dip galvanized steel pipes or halfpipes.
10.6 Miscellaneous
Dissimilar metals
The use of dissimilar metals in contact, liable to lead to galvanic action, shall be avoided.
The contractor will provide isolation between metals if these need to be connected.
Mild steel surfaces to be in contact with Aluminium or Aluminium alloy shall be deemed to
satisfy this requirement if they are galvanized. For fixing aluminium to steel structures, bolts,
nuts, washers and screws shall be cadmium plated.
Opening tools
Lifting keys and devices for unfastening screws shall be galvanized mild steel and supplied at
the rate of one set for each five similar covers, with a minimum of two sets of each particular
type.
Step irons
Step irons for buildings into pre-cast concrete and step irons and handholds for building into
the wall of in-situ concrete manholes and chambers shall be of round pattern. All step irons
shall be cast iron with rubber coating as corrosion protection. Step irons shall only be used
where ladders would not be an appropriate alternative.
Surface boxes
Surface boxes for key operation of valves shall be cast grey iron or ductile iron and shall
comply with the relevant requirements of DIN 405. The lid shall be chained to the frame.
Road gully gratings

Gully gratings and frames for road drainage shall be cast iron or ductile iron and shall
comply with the relevant requirements.
Protection
The metal work shall be protected in accordance with the general specification for "Painting
and Protective Coating".
Installation
Where metalwork is to be founded on and fastened to concrete, the Contractor shall use one
of the following methods as subsequently detailed:
Method Description
1. Bolting or screwing the metalwork to plates or angle sections with anchors set into
the concrete structure or set into pockets left in the concrete structure.
2. Setting the metalwork into pockets or recesses formed in the concrete structure.
3. Bolting the metalwork to bolts set into the concrete structure or set in pockets or
holes in the concrete structure.
4. Bolting the metalwork to self-anchoring epoxy resin fixed bolts placed in drilled
holes.
5. Bedding the metalwork on cement-mortar placed on the concrete surface.
Cement-mortar of 1 part of cement to 3 parts of sand shall be used for bedding access covers
and the like and for filling around metalwork or bolts set into pockets or holes smaller than
100 mm². For larger holes, concrete of the same grade as the structure shall be used instead
of mortar. The installation methods permitted for each type of metalwork are specified in the
table below:
Metalwork item Permissible methods of

installation
Stairs, ladders, flooring 1, 3 and 4

Step irons 2
Hand railing 3
Access covers, surface boxes and gully grating 2 and 3
During installation, each item of metalwork shall be temporarily braced as necessary to resist
all forces which are likely to be applied to it during installation, fixing and building in. Any
bolted connections required as part of the installation operation shall be fitted and tightened
before fixing bolts are tightened or pockets are grouted. The nuts of grouted or resin fixed
bolts shall not be tightened until the grout has fully cured.
Small or lightly loaded items may be fixed using screws and plugs set in drilled holes.
11 Site Works
11.1 General
11.1.1 Scope
Site works, as specified hereunder, comprise roads and pavements as well as fencing of
operation compounds and the like.
The site works to be carried out include the supply of all materials, all works required,
disposal of surplus materials and cleaning of the site after the works are completed.
11.1.2 Materials and Standards

The Contractor shall carry out the works and provide materials described in this Specification
in accordance with the appropriate DIN standards. The main standards are, but are not
limited by, the following:
- DIN 482, DIN 483 Kerbs of natural stone and concrete;
- DIN 1995, DIN 1996 Testing of bituminous material;
- DIN 18315 - DIN 18318, etc Technical codes for road construction;
- DIN EN 1338, DIN EN 1342 Concrete and natural pavements.
The Contractor may carry out the works or provide materials in accordance to local or other
international standards (ISO, BS, ASTM and others), provided their requirements are
superior or equivalent to the quality described by the standards cited in the Specifications.
Design of Roads
If not otherwise specified in the Contract, roads and pavements shall be laid out to plans
prepared by the Contractor.
Pavement design for roads and hardstand shall be in accordance with the Local Authority
Road Regulations. The design shall be based on a design life of 50 years and traffic volumes
envisaged for operation of the works, unless otherwise specified.
The Contractor shall make his own assessment of the traffic and the sub-grade CBR at the
site and accordingly design the thickness of the road base and surfacing. Carriageway
construction and surfacing to hardstands shall be resistant to diesel and other chemical
spillage.
Design of Footpaths
Hardstands, footpaths and associated drainage shall be laid out to plans prepared by the
Contractor.
Footpaths shall be provided around all buildings and external process tank perimeters.
For frequently used accesses (this applies to all external doors to buildings and to main
access points to external tanks), footpaths shall be by means of minimum 900 wide pathways
formed from either hydraulically pressed pre-cast concrete slabs or interlocking bricks or
blocks. Steps can be provided where appropriate. For the balance of building and process
tank perimeters footpaths shall be by means of minimum 600 mm wide pathways.
Footpaths in verges shall be edged with concrete edging, laid flush with the surfacing.
Footpaths shall be located in such positions as to eliminate the hazard of snow slides from
adjacent roofs or other positive alternative methods shall be taken.
11.1.3 General Requirements for Road Works

Roads and pavements, as specified hereunder, shall include the construction of roads and
pavements as shown on the drawings. Earth works below formation levels are not included.
All materials shall be new and shall comply with standard quality and dimension provision.
Mineral materials shall be weatherproof, of adequate hardness and of sufficient adhesion to

bind. They shall not contain any swelling, weathering, loamy, clay or organic components in
harmful quantities.
Bituminous mixes must be blended so as to be suitable for the purpose of application. Special
consideration shall be given to climatic conditions, volume and type of traffic.
11.1.4 Reinstatement of existing Roads and Footpaths

The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance and reinstatement of existing roads
and footpaths. He shall maintain and regularly clean the paved surfaces, reinstate them where
required and ensure that the surfaces after execution of works are kept in satisfactory
condition during the period of maintenance. The reinstatement of any settlement shall be
carried out forthwith upon notification of the Contractor.
The reinstatement of the paved surface shall be done by the Contractor and shall include the
re-excavation of the top surface, base and sub-base, the backfilling of base and sub-base with
graded aggregate and the reinstatement of the surface according to surface conditions met
before.
11.2 Roads and Pavements

11.2.1 Formation and Sub-grade
Formations means the surface of the soil in cut or fill after completion of earth works on
which further road work construction is carried out. Sub-grade means the soil immediately
below the formation.
The formation and sub-grade shall be graded and compacted to the levels, falls, cambers and
densities as required by RSTO 01. The sub-grade shall be so compacted that the dry density
of the upper 15 cm of the ground or fill is not less than 95 % of the maximum dry density
determined by tests in accordance with DIN 18127.
Where existing ground conditions are such that direct compaction of the sub-grade according
to the specification is impossible unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with
suitable granular sub-base.
Where the sub-grade is in natural ground, the compaction shall, whenever possible, be
carried out at or near to the natural moisture content of the ground.
The formation shall be kept free of standing water at all times and drains shall be provided so
that it will drain quickly and effectively during rain.
Any irregularities or depressions that develop during compaction of the sub-grade or any area
which becomes muddy, broken-up or loosened due to weather conditions shall be corrected
by loosening the surface of these places and adding, removing or replacing these materials
and re-compacting so that the surface is smooth and uniform.
11.2.2 Sub-base and Road base

If not otherwise required, the sub-base and road base shall be graded and compacted to the
levels, falls, cambers and densities as required by RSTO 01 or as shown on drawings.
The materials for the sub-base and road base shall be laid in layers, each not exceeding 15 cm
or being less than 7.5 cm. The total compacted thickness of sub-base and road base shall
nowhere be less than the specified nominal thickness. If not otherwise directed, the sub-base
and base in roads shall have each a thickness of 20 cm, in footpaths a thickness of 15 cm.
The sub-base and road base materials shall be deposited in such a manner that there is no
segregation and the materials require the minimum of blading or spreading. Each layer of
material shall be compacted immediately after spreading in accordance with ZTVE-StB 07.
If any of the sub-grade material is worked into the sub-base material during spreading,
blading or compaction, all the sub-base material in the affected area shall be replaced by
fresh sub-base material at the Contractor’s expense.
On completion of compaction and before commencing the next operation, the surface of the
granular sub-base and road base shall comply with a surface tolerance of +/- 1 cm.
11.2.3 Sealing of Surfaces

Wherever possible, the operations of final trimming of the formation, compaction of the sub-
grade and placing and compaction of the granular sub-base and road base shall be carried out
without intermediate delays.
The Contractor shall be responsible for taking all necessary steps to prevent damage to the
previously completed layer or layers by excessive wetting or drying out due to weather
conditions or by traffic or any other cause.
In any case, the completed surface of the road base shall be sealed with suitable emulsion
(MC70) at a rate of 1.5-2.0 kg/m² immediately when it has been completed and checked for
compliance with the specified tolerances.
11.2.4 Flexible Road Surfacing

Unless otherwise specified or detailed, materials for flexible road surfacing shall be
bituminous concrete and asphalt, in a quality corresponding to ZTV Asphalt-StB 07 and
related regulations. The surface on which each course of coated bituminous material to be
laid shall be free from standing water and any loose or deleterious material and shall be
tested for accuracy.
Before laying commences in any area, a tack coat of bitumen road emulsion shall be applied
to the whole area of the preceding course and any other surfaces with which the coat will be
in contact. After cleaning, the top of the base should be sprayed with suitable emulsion
(MC70) at a rate of 1.5-2.0 kg/m²; the surface of the bituminous coat should be treated with
asphalt tack coat (RC250) at a rate of 0.5 kg/m². The emulsion shall be allowed to break
completely before the subsequent bituminous layer is laid on it.
Coated macadam material shall be delivered to site in clean vehicles and shall be protected to
minimize loss of heat in transit and against contamination by dust or other deleterious matter.
The rate of delivery to the site shall be regulated so as to enable the material to be laid with
the minimum of delay and so that the paver can operate continuously.
The coated thickness of individual layers shall be not less than the minimum compacted
thickness specified or shown on the drawings. If not otherwise directed, the bituminous
wearing course shall have a thickness of 10 cm, the asphalt course 5.0 cm.
In case of bituminous roads to be reconstructed, the Contractor has to reinstate all asphalt
courses according to their original thickness.
11.2.5 Concrete Paved Areas

Concrete paved areas shall be constructed in accordance with RStO-01 and ZTV Beton-StB
07 and with the relevant requirements of the Specification for Concrete Works.
Concrete for roads and Pavements shall be of class C 30/37. Concrete courses shall be never
less than 100 mm thick.
If reinforcement is required, it shall be made with reinforcement steel mesh of at least 2

kg/m². The reinforcement shall not influence the effectiveness of the joints. The concrete
cover shall be at least 30 mm thick.
Transport and placing of the concrete shall be co-ordinated so that the concrete can be
completely placed before setting.
Expansion joints shall be executed at the required intervals and shall enable expansion to the
concrete slabs and be fixed. The expansion joints shall be 20 mm wide. The strength of the
concrete and the properties of the concrete surface shall not be influenced by the execution of
joints.
The concrete shall be protected against harmful influences until correct setting, i.e. against
drying out, especially due to sun and wind, against washing out due to rain, against heat or
quick cooling. The concrete surfaces shall be cured and kept moist for 7 days.
11.2.6 Kerbs
Pre-cast concrete kerbs shall comply with DIN 482 and DIN EN 1343 and be laid true to line
and level. Kerbs found to be more than 1 cm out of line or level at either end shall be lifted
and re-laid.
Kerbs shall be bedded on a layer of 3:1 sand/cement mortar, minimum 10 cm thick on a

grade C 16/20 concrete foundation and shall be backed with concrete shaped up to the
required cross section. Kerbs shall be jointed with cement mortar except at expansion joints
which shall be made with joint filler, 10 mm thick.
11.2.7 Footpaths
Footpaths shall be surfaced with coated macadam, concrete, pre-cast concrete slabs or natural
stones. The base for footpaths shall be formed from flexible surfacing, laid and compacted to
a minimum thickness of 100 mm using a roller of at least 2 tons mass or similar quality
equipment allowing for equivalent compaction.
Where footpaths receive coated macadam surfaces, the construction shall be as follows:
(1) pre-cast concrete edging in accordance with DIN 482 shall be bedded and backed with in-
situ concrete C16/20;
(2) the base shall be constructed as specified above and shall then be sealed;
(3) the surfacing shall consist of a single course of coated macadam and be compacted to
minimum thickness of 25 mm.
Pre-cast concrete slabs shall be bedded on a layer of sand, approximately 50 mm thick, and
tamped into place.
Natural stones shall be sound, durable, hard and free from undesirable weathering and shall
be of such properties that they will not disintegrate from the action of weather in handling
and placing. The density of stones shall be not less than 2.2 t/m³ (solid volume without
voids). The dimensions of stones shall range between 150 and 200 mm. The stones will be
rough hammered dressed so that they fit reasonably close together. They shall be laid to a
true and even surface on a layer of sand, approximately 100 mm thick and tamped into
place.´
Concrete footpaths shall be surfaced with concrete C 25/30, at least 10 cm thick with mortar
topping, constructed on a prepared bed as specified above. Concrete footpaths shall be
constructed in accordance to the Specification for Concrete Works.
11.2.8 Disposal of Surplus Material
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements to dispose off all surplus backfill and
unsuitable excavated material from any part of the Work. The material shall be disposed off-
site and shall become the property of the Contractor who will be entirely responsible for its
removal from the site and its ultimate disposal.
The Contractor shall clean the site and the surrounding ground immediately and leave the
construction sites clean and tidy to the satisfaction of the Employer.
The Contractor shall also refer to the ESHIA Section of these Employer’s Requirements
regarding the disposal of surplus materials.
11.3 Drainage Works

11.3.1 Piped Systems
Cylindrical concrete pipes and fittings shall be “standard“ quality with flexible spigot and
socket joints and shall comply with DIN V 1201 and DIN EN 1916. Concrete pipes shall be
used for diameters greater than 300 mm.
Glazed vitrified clay pipes and fittings shall conform to DIN EN 295 or equivalent and be
used for diameters up to 300 mm.
Pipes for porous drainage shall be of PVC to DIN 4925.
Manholes, inspection chambers and gullies shall comply with DIN 4034 or DIN 4052 or
equivalent and be constructed in details shown in the standards. Cast iron covers or gully
gratings shall comply with DIN 19584 or DIN 4052.
Earthworks for piped drainage systems shall be carried out in accordance to the Specification
of Earth Works, applying minimum cover and trench width.
11.3.2 Open Channels

Open channels shall be constructed either as earth channels, in stone work or with pre-cast
concrete elements in half-round or trapezoidal sections.
Open channels adjacent to buildings, basins or other structures and channels with
longitudinal slopes steeper than 1:100 shall be constructed with pre-cast concrete or stone
work, depending on soil conditions. Channel sections which are subject to scouring shall be
protected with stone pitching.
Pre-cast concrete channels shall be manufactured of pre-cast concrete class C30/37. All
backfilling shall be with selected material suitable for high quality backfilling. If the soil is
unsuitable for laying of channels, the Contractor shall place a bedding layer of granular
material or concrete C16/20 under the channel.
All road crossings of channels shall be constructed such that vehicular traffic is not exposed
to danger. The Contractor shall provide for the installation of pipes and culverts or grating
over the channel.
11.4 Fencing
11.4.1 General
The works comprise the supply and erection of fences and gates both around the perimeter of
the site and internal fencing. Internal fencing shall be of the standard type and fencing around
the perimeter of the site shall be of the security type. Security fences shall be anti-intruder
type.
All items of material for fencing shall be standard products of specialized manufacturers.
Posts and struts shall be either reinforced concrete or galvanized steel sections. Timber posts
shall not be used.
All wire shall be galvanized wire with plastic coating. The length of the sides of the chain
link mesh shall be 50 mm. All chain link fencing shall be barbed along the top edge.
The work pertaining to fencing shall consist of providing all necessary materials and
construction of the fencing including all requisite materials, unloading and storing on site as
well as intermediate handling as required. All earth and concrete work shall be included in
the offer.
All posts and struts shall be anchored in rigid concrete C 16/20 foundations of sufficient
depth. In the vicinity of gates, structures and fence openings, adequate provisions to fix the
fences shall be provided. The distance of the bottom of the wire mesh to the levelled ground
surface shall not exceed 2.5 m.
11.4.2 Standard Fencing

Standard fencing within the perimeter of the site shall consist of a 1 m high mesh wire
fencing with steep posts of circular tubing of high tensile steel.
The posts shall be galvanized inside and outside and plastic coated and closed at the top with
cast zinc alloy caps. End, intermediate, corner and straining posts shall be 1.5 m long, gate
posts 1.5 m long. The distance between the posts shall be 2.5-3.0 m. The posts are to be set in
sufficient C 16/20 concrete foundations.
Intermediate straining posts are to be installed to 20 m intervals and at changes in line or

direction. They shall have two diagonal struts and shall be provided with 3 double ratchet
winders for the strain line wires and one joint clamp to fix the struts to the post. Strut
foundations shall be cast in concrete C 16/20 and in sufficient size.
Corner and end posts shall either be supported by struts as for intermediate straining posts or
by a horizontal bracing. Sufficient straining wires, winding ratchets, joining clamps and other
fittings required shall be provided for all end, corner and gate posts.
Three rows of straining wires are to be installed for 1.0 m high fences.
11.4.3 Security Fencing

Security fencing shall be constructed along the
outer perimeter of the plant site. The fence will
consist of galvanized 4 mm mesh –see picture –
rectangular profiles with protrusions facing the
external side and with a concrete base.
The total fence height shall be 2.5 m., 4 point

barbed wire shall be fixed to the cranked top
section of the post. Sufficient ratchet, winders and
clamps are to be provided to assemble and to
secure the barbed wire.
11.4.4 Gates
The tops of the gate frames shall be levelled with the tops of adjacent fencing. Gates in
fencing with barbed wire on extension arms shall also carry wire mounted on extension arms
as specified.
All gates shall be of welded steel construction, galvanized and painted and covered with
plastic coated chain link mesh and surmounted with galvanized plastic coated barbed wire to
match the fencing. Sliding gates shall be provided with roller support tracks.
The gates shall be complete with all fittings such as drop bolts, back catches, locking bars,
lock plates and locks including three keys per lock.
Installation
Fences shall be installed in accordance with the fence manufacturer’s drawings and written
installation instruction, except as modified herein. Each line of fencing shall be erected so
that it is plumb, taut, true to line and grade, and complete in all details. The outside face of
the fabric shall be on the property line where the fence runs along the property boundary.
Posts shall be suitably braced during concreting to ensure that they remain in the correct line
and level during placing of concrete and the concrete shall be cured for 3 days before any
further work is done at the post.
11.5 Topsoiling and Landscaping

11.5.1 Topsoiling
So far as practicable, top soil shall be obtained from material emanating from excavations
and separately stored in temporary spoil tips.
Topsoil shall be evenly spread and trimmed over embankments and filled excavation to the
slopes and levels as shown on drawings. The depth after spreading and trimming shall be 250
mm measured perpendicular to the surface. All clods and lumps shall be broken up and any
rubbish, large stones, roots and weeds shall be removed.
Where the upper layer of natural soil is poor in organic matter, it shall be improved to a
minimum depth of 25 cm by adding either clay or sand or silt to create a loamy soil texture
consisting of 40 % Sand (size > 0.05 mm), 30 % silt (size 0.05-0.002 mm) and 30 % clay
(size < 0.002 mm).
A shallow ripping will be required before adding clay or sand or silt which should be under
mixed properly by using a disk harrow. If it should be necessary for topographical reasons,
levelling shall be carried out before mixing clay, sand or silt.
11.5.2 Grassing
Where the topsoil shall be sown with grass seed, the top 75 mm of the previously laid topsoil
shall be brought to a fine tilt suitable for seeding, and sowing shall be carried out as soon as
practicable after completion of topsoiling having due regard to the season and the weather
conditions.
After the seed has been sown uniformly, they shall be raked and lightly rolled into the
surface. The young grass shall be kept free from weeds and any bare patches shall be re-
seeded until an even close turf is established. The grass shall be watered, mown and rolled as
required and maintained in good condition until the expiry of the period of maintenance.
The Contractor shall replace, at his own cost, any damaged area where the grass has dried up
or has not adhered to the slope surface, which contains undesirable plants or which has an
irregular or unattractive appearance.
11.5.3 Shrubs and Trees

Shrubs for borders and hedges shall have a minimum height of 0.6 m. A minimum of 2 plants
per m² are to be planted to create an evenly dense area. Trees to be supplied and planted shall
have a minimum height of 1.5 m. For the plant holes vegetable soil is to be used.
Stabilization of freshly planted trees against wind actions shall be provided. Shrubs and trees
shall be suitable for the climatic conditions on site. Growth of shrubs and trees shall be
guaranteed for five years from the day of planting. Any shrubs and trees which have died
within the guaranteed period must be substituted without extra payment.
11.5.4 Dressing of Topsoil

After planting of lawn, shrubs or trees, the topsoil shall receive a dressing of fertilizer. As
minimum requirements, dressing of topsoil shall be done with lime, potash and super-
phosphate, as applicable.
Dressing of topsoil shall only be carried out after watering and raining. The surface of the
soil shall be kept wet until fertilizers have dissolved.
11.6 Auxiliary Works

Unless otherwise specified, all and any kind of works, materials, services, safety measures,
etc. as well as, all tests and samples required for the completion of the work, shall be
included in the unit prices. Hence, the auxiliary works comprise, but are not necessarily
limited to the following:
- Removing and storing of boundary stones, bench marks, etc., protection of surveying
points and designation by means of boards, survey and protection of all secondary survey
points, profiles, etc.
- Difficulties to be overcome where excavation may have to be carried out in layers or by
hand.
- Removal of any groynes, buried pipes, wattle-work, fascines and the like that might
interfere with excavation profiles.
- Difficulties resulting from the Specifications relating to fills, compaction tests,
eliminating unsuitable material from fills, and, if necessary, mixing of different soil
materials.
- Transport of excavated material to fill or deposit, placing and spreading in layers
according to conditions and Drawings, and careful compaction if required.
- Difficulties in transport due to existing ground conditions.
- Grading of intermediate and top fill surfaces and slopes to lines and levels required.
- Sorting of excavated material which, if necessary, is to be used for special purposes.
- Any expenditure for providing, maintaining and later removal of drive-ways, maintaining
existing ways and roads; providing, placing, maintaining and later removal of conveying
and dumping equipment that might be required.
Annex 2: Mechanical Specifications

1 STANDARDS
1.1 General
The Mechanical Works shall comply as a minimum with International Standards ISO, EN or
DIN Standards* named as I.S., with the respective Codes of Practice and Standards generally
used for water supply and waste water facilities in foreign countries, adapted to the local
conditions, shall be used as an alternative subject to written approval by the Project Manager.
For example:
EN: European Standard
DIN: German Industrial Standard
VDE: Standards of the German Electrical engineers’ Society
DWA: Standards of the German Association for the Water, Wastewater and Waste
DVGW: Standards of the German Society for Gas & Water Technology
UVV: German Regulation for Accident Prevention
GUV: Standards of German Judicial Ministry Accident Prevention Society
IEC: International Electrical Commission
ISO: International Organization for Standardization
SI: International System of Units
Contractor shall use machinery and equipment that is supplied with documents indicating
compliance with the EC Machinery Directive. In evidence of this, the CE-marking, or so-
called IIA declaration, is to be presented. Relating documents, such as declarations of
conformity and user information are to be included.
1.2 Quality standard

When a certain piece of equipment is planned to be applied, the product of a certain
manufacturer, that manufacturer must be clearly marked. The purpose is to set up a quality
standard, structure type and acceptable reference. Generally, a definite manufacturer for the
respective item of plant shall be given in the Schedule of Particulars. The term of “or equal”
for manufacturer shall not be applied.
All the equipment and materials provided by the Contractor shall be new, modern, of good
quality, faultless, with long service span and low maintenance.
1.3 Facility guarantee

The Contractor must ensure the Guarantee period of 2 years commencing from the date of
signing of the Final Acceptance Certificate, pursuant to PC Sub-Clause 25.3. During the
guarantee period, the Contractor shall maintain the equipment and carry out at least two
overall inspections. During the guarantee period, in case of failure of any equipment or poor
manufacturing, the Contractor shall be responsible for repairing and recovering smooth
operation without delay, once he has been informed. If the Contractor fails to recover
operation within 14 days, the Employer reserves the right to dispose by himself. The
expenses shall be compensated by the Contractor with no rejection.
The Employer reserves the right to reject the equipment or components found to be defect or
not conforming to the Contract requirements. The equipment or components shall be repaired
or replaced by the Contractor. The employer shall not afford any additional expenses thereof.
1.4 Materials
All materials incorporated in the Facility shall be the most suitable for the duty concerns and
shall be new and first class commercial quality, free from imperfection and selected for long
life and minimum maintenance.
The use of dissimilar materials in contact is to be avoided, but where unavoidable these
materials shall be selected so that the natural potential difference between the materials does
not exceed 250 millivolts. Electro-plating or other treatment of contacting surfaces shall be
employed as necessary to reduce the potential difference to the desired limit.
All materials and material finishes shall be selected for long life under the climatic conditions
at site. Materials used in ventilated or air-conditioned areas shall be selected to allow for the
conditions expected in case of failure of the ventilation or air-conditioning.
1.5 Finish
All covers, flanges and joints shall be properly faced, bored, fitted, fixed, hollowed, mounted
or chamfered as the case may be, according to the best approved practice and all working
parts of the Facility and other apparatus shall similarly be well and accurately fitted, finished,
fixed and adjusted.
1.6 Patent
The Contractor shall be responsible for all the patent charges and certificate fees on the
equipment and process specified in the Contract and shall protect the Employer from any
damage. All appeals caused by certificate fees, document and patent infringement, or other
law arbitration, lawsuit and expenses caused by the application of equipment and process
shall have nothing to do with the Employer. The payable expenses specified in the Contract
shall be regarded as having included any patent fees, certificate fees and other expenses of
the like.
1.7 Welding works

The following standards shall be applied for the welding operation during the manufacturing
and installation of equipment:
DIN 1910-3: Welding; Welding of Plastics, Processes

DIN 1910-11: Welding; terms dependent on materials for metal welding
DIN 1910-100: Welding and allied processes - Vocabulary - Part 100: Metal welding
processes with additions to DIN EN 14610
DIN EN 14610 Welding and allied processes - Definitions of metal welding processes;
Trilingual version EN 14610
DIN EN ISO 6520-1: Welding and allied processes - Classification of geometric
imperfections in metallic materials - Part 1: Fusion welding (ISO 6520-
1:2007)
DIN EN ISO 6520-2: Welding and allied processes - Classification of geometric
imperfections in metallic materials - Part 2: Welding with pressure
(ISO 6520-2:2001)
DIN EN 287-1: Qualification test of welders - Fusion welding - Part 1: Steels
DIN EN ISO 9606-2: Qualification test of welders - Fusion welding - Part 2: Aluminum and
aluminum alloys (ISO 9606-2:2004)
DIN EN ISO 9606-3: Approval testing of welders - Fusion welding - Part 3: Copper and
copper alloys (ISO 9606-3:1999)
DIN EN ISO 3834-1: Quality requirements for fusion welding of metallic materials - Part 1:
Criteria for the selection of the appropriate level of quality
requirements (ISO 3834-1:2005)
Comprehensive quality requirements (ISO 3834-2:2005)
DIN EN ISO 3834-3: Quality requirements for fusion welding for metallic materials - Part 3:
Standard quality requirements (ISO 3834-3:2005)
Elementary quality requirements (ISO 3834-4:2005)
DIN EN ISO 14731: Welding coordination - Tasks and responsibilities (ISO 14731:2006)
DIN EN ISO 5817: Welding - Fusion-welded joints in steel, nickel, titanium and their
alloys (beam welding excluded) - Quality levels for imperfections
(ISO 5817:2003 + Cor. 1:2006)
DIN EN ISO 14555: Welding - Arc stud welding of metallic materials (ISO 14555:2006)
DIN EN ISO 13919-1: Welding - Electrons and laser beam welded joints; guidance on
quality levels for imperfections - Part 1: Steel (ISO 13919-1:1996)
DIN EN ISO 13919-2: Welding - Electron and laser beam welded joints; Guidance on
quality levels for imperfections - Part 2: Aluminum and its weldable
alloys (ISO 13919-2:2001)
DIN EN ISO 10042: Welding - Arc-welded joints in aluminum and its alloys - Quality
levels for imperfections (ISO 10042:2005)
DIN EN 25817 Arc-welded joints in steel; Guidance on quality levels for
imperfections (ISO 5817:1992)
DIN EN 462-1: Non-destructive testing; image quality of radiographs; part 1: image
quality indicators (wire type); determination of image quality values
DIN EN 462-4: Non-destructive testing - Image quality of radiographs - Part 4:
Experimental evaluation of image quality values and image quality
tables
DIN EN 462-3: Non-destructive testing - Image quality of radiograms - Part 3: Image

quality classes for ferrous metals
DIN EN 1435: Non-destructive testing of welds - Radiographic testing of welded
joints
DIN EN 12681: Founding - Radiographic examination
DIN EN 444: Non-destructive testing; general principles for the radiographic
examination of metallic materials using X-rays and gamma-rays
DIN EN 1330-4: Non-destructive testing - Terminology - Part 4: Terms used in
ultrasonic testing
Welding work on steel structures subjected to static and/or dynamic loads shall be carried out
by welders holding a valid welding certificate according to DIN EN 287-1. On request, the
certificates shall be submitted to the Employer. The valuation for welding seam execution
shall be based on DIN EN ISO 5817, Categories B and C (category B for inside analysis;
category C for outside analysis, for gas lines only category B will be accepted).
Steel structure, in particular pipes, shall be shop-prefabricated as far as possible in order to

minimize welding work on side.
The Employers reserve the right to order at the Contractor’s expense the X-ray examination
of up to a maximum of 10 % of all executed welding seams. In case more than 10 % of the
examined welds fail the test, the Employer will order the X-ray examination of a further 30
% of all executed welding seams at the expense of the Contractor. If, again more than 10 %
of the welds fail the tests, the Employer shall order the X-ray inspection of all welds. The
Contractor shall bear all costs involved. The X-ray examination shall be conducted according
to DIN EN 444, DIN EN 462 and DIN EN 1435. Test classification according to DIN EN
ISO 5817.
2 CORROSION PROTECTION
2.1 General
The scope of work comprises the delivery and application of a complete and durable
corrosion protection system. The expected life span is 60 months as a minimum. The
contractor is to deliver an application plan with guarantee from the pains supplier in writing.
This work also includes all required scaffolding and all ancillary means required for the
execution of the Facility. Prior to the corrosion protection works, the installed hardware, non-
ferrous and stainless steel components shall be protected against possible damages.
2.2 Applicable standards

ISO 8504-2 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related
products - Surface preparation methods - Part 2: Abrasive blast-cleaning
DIN 55 928-8 Protection of steel structures from corrosion by organic and metallic
coatings; part 8: protection of supporting thin-walled building
components from corrosion
DIN EN ISO 12944-1 Paints and varnishes - Corrosion protection of steel structures by
protective paint systems - Part 1: General introduction (ISO 12944-
1:1998)
protective paint systems - Part 2: Classification of environments
(ISO 12944-2:1998)
protective paint systems - Part 3: Design considerations (ISO 12944-
3:1998)
protective paint systems - Part 4: Types of surface and surface
preparation (ISO 12944-4:1998)
protective paint systems - Part 5: Protective paint systems (ISO 12944-
5:2007)
protective paint systems - Part 7: Execution and supervision of paint
work (ISO 12944-7:1998)
protective paint systems - Part 8: Development of specifications for new
work and maintenance (ISO 12944-8:1998)
DIN EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles -
Specifications and test methods (ISO 1461:1999)
DIN EN ISO 2063 Thermal spraying - Metallic and other inorganic coatings - Zinc,
aluminum and their alloys (ISO 2063:2005)
DIN 8577 T1 Alloys for Thermal Application
DIN EN ISO 14919 Thermal spraying - Wires, rods and cords for flame and arc spraying -
Classification; Technical supply conditions (ISO 14919:2001)
DIN EN 13507 Thermal spraying - Pre-treatment of surfaces of metallic parts and
components for thermal spraying
Each base surface shall be checked with regard to the suitability of the follow-up coating and
– if necessary – shall be pre-treated accordingly. The paint supplier’s instructions for the
application of the coatings shall be strictly adhered to.
2.3 Shotblasting
The shotblasting of steel surfaces shall be carried out according to DIN EN ISO 12944-4, de-
rusting grade Sa 2 1/2. Immediately after completion of the shotblasting, the treated surfaces
shall be properly cleaned and the prime coat applied. The Contractor’s production scheduling
should be such that only the absolute necessary shotblasting work has to be executed on site.
2.4 Stainless steel

Stainless steel applied in steel constructions and appurtenances shall be AISI 316L grade.
2.5 Galvanizing
Preferably hot galvanizing should be employed wherever materials need to be galvanized. If
in certain cases this is not possible the zinc shall be applied by coating.
2.6 Applicable corrosion protection systems

All plant and component parts have to be implemented with a suitable corrosion protection
with the exception of components being made from stainless steel, plastic or aluminum.
Color of the protection according to employers specifications.
If not defined else wise, environmental conditions

above water level: at least corrosion category C5-I with an expected protection
duration long (L) acc. to DIN EN ISO 12944-2.
below water level: at least corrosion category IM2 with an expected protection
duration long (L) acc. to DIN EN ISO 12944-2.
below plant covers and pump sumps: like plant component below water level.
Surface preparation and superimposed undercoating and coating have to fulfil the
corresponding requirements acc. to DIN EN ISO 12944-5.
If plant and component parts have to be hot dip galvanized or otherwise protected against
corrosion, the technical specifications will give the necessary information.
2.7 Application of coating for plant equipment

Pumps, motors, valves, compressors, vessels, etc.to be delivered to site with a coating
applied by the manufacturer of the specific equipment. The employer reserves the right to
request details in writing about the pre-treatment and coating process employed by the
equipment manufacturer.
Surfaces inaccessible after assembly:

Above specified coating prior to the assembly. The above specified coating shall assure a
uniform appearance of the entire plant. If, during transportation and / or assembly the top
coat has been damaged, it is the Contractor’s obligation to patch-up the damaged surfaces at
no extra cost.
2.8 Color design

The color of top coats will be determined by the Employer. The Contractor will be notified in
due course. The color tint has to correspond to RAL.
2.9 Calculation
All costs in connection with the above specified corrosion protection have to be included in
the quoted prices. The top coat has to be applied after assembly of structures on site.
3 Steelwork
3.1 Open mesh and chequer plate flooring

- Comply with DIN EN 14122
- Rectangular mesh and “non-slip” design
- The material shall be mild steel and hot-dip galvanized offsite after manufacture
- Flooring shall be provided to span between the supporting members
- Toe plates around all cut-outs
- Load bearing and the transverse bars in rectangular flooring panels are positioned
symmetrically around the center lines of the panels in both directions
- Chequer plate flooring
 non slip type
 > 6 mm thick measured excluding the raised pattern
 secured to its frame by stainless steel countersunk set screws
- All flooring shall be designed
 to carry a loading > 500 kg per square meter
 deflection shall not exceed 0.2 per cent of the span
 provided with curbing at the edge of walkways
 shall be removable and set flush in frames of similar material. Where frames are to be
fixed over openings the frames shall be provided with lugs for building – in.
 in sizes suitable for lifting and removal by one man
 with appropriate cut-outs to permit its removal without disturbing or dismantling
spindles, supporting brackets, cables or pipework.
 Intermediate supporting members to give the required rigidity to the spanning edges
of individual flooring sections over the wider openings and trenches shall be provided
and bolted to suitable built-in fixings
- Members shall be removable to afford clear access to the openings and trenches
- Lifting keys shall be supplied for each location where regular lifting is to be undertaken
3.2 Ladders
- The material shall be mild steel and hot-dip galvanized offsite after manufacture
- The stringers shall be
 flat section < 65 mm x 13 mm spaced 380 mm apart, flanged and drilled for wall
fixing at both ends
 radiuses over the top < 600 mm apart. Ladders > 3.000 mm long have additional
intermediate stays at not more than 2.500 mm center to center
- Rungs shall be 25 mm diameter solid at 300 mm centre to centre shouldered at each end
and securely riveted into countersunk holes. Rungs shall be not less than 225 mm from the
wall
- All ladders shall have safety cages, and

 constructed of three flat vertical strips supported by flat hoops, with a diameter of 750
mm
 the hoops shall be at approximately 700 mm center to center and the first hoop shall
be 2.400 mm above ground or platform level
- Where the rise exceeds 6.000 mm an intermediate landing shall be provided.
3.3 Stairways
Design : detailed, fabricated and erected in accordance with the DIN EN
standards
: carry load 500 kg per square meter
: treads shall be open mesh fixed to the stringers, not directly to
concrete
: steel hot-dipped galvanized off site after manufacture and comprises
stringers
supporting stair treads and shall be supplied complete with handrails
and
stanchions
3.4 Multiple duct covers and frames

Design : cast iron, waterproof, non-rocking and recessed for filling with
concrete or
similar material
: of the type incorporating integral, removable, intermediate beams to
give the
required clear pit opening
: a heavy grease seal is to be formed between the cover and the frame
to
prevent ingress of grit and sand
: all covers, frames and supporting metalwork be designed for loadings
of
minimum 500 kg
3.5 Hand railing

Handrailing
Material : galvanized mild steel hollow section complying with the relevant
DIN EN
: galvanized mild steel toe plates, 100 mm high by 3 mm thick
positioned 10 mm
above the platform level and fixed securely to the stanchions
: stanchions and handrails > 32 mm in diameter
: horizontal handrails 1100 mm high with an intermediate rail at a

height of 550
mm, measured from finished floor level to the handrail centerline
Design : withstand a horizontal force at handrail level of 740 Newton per
meter nun
: deflection of rails < 0.8 per cent of their part between stanchions
: deflection of stanchions < 0.8 per cent of their height
: sloping hand railing shall be as specified for horizontal hand railing
but with top
rail 900 mm vertically above the line of pitch and stanchions
vertical and spaced
at < 1,500 mm measured parallel to the line of pitch
: when provided in sections, hand railing shall be joined together with
purpose
made fittings secured by screws or grub screws
: all hand railing shall be of uniform appearance and manufacture
: all ladders, stairways or other openings shall be guarded using hand
railing as
appropriate, in a manner conforming to the requirements. Access to
ladders or
openings shall be guarded by two galvanized hanging chains, which
shall be
secured at one end and detachable at the other
Drawings : working drawings of hand railing shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the Project Manager
Mounting flanges
Design : horizontal flanges drilled for not less than three bolts with two bolts
on a line parallel to and on the walkway side of the line of the hand
railing and vertical flanges drilled for not less than two bolts the lines
through the bolts being vertical
: stanchions be set at not more than 1500 mm centers
4 SPARE PARTS
4.1 General
The Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule in duplicate of all the spare parts to be
supplied. During commissioning all spare parts shall be checked against the schedule and
against the recommended maintenance programme. Any shortfall in the provision shall be
provided by the Contractor.
All spare parts supplied shall be new, and strictly interchangeable with the parts for which
they are intended to be replacements, and shall be treated and packed for long storage under
the climatic conditions prevailing at the Site. Each spare part shall be clearly marked or
labelled on the outside of its packing with its description and purpose, and when more than
one spare is packed in a single case or other container, a general description of its contents
shall be shown on the outside of such case or container and a detailed list enclosed.
All cases, containers and other packages shall be parked and numbered in a suitable manner
for the purposes of identification.
All cases, containers or other packages are liable to be opened for such examination as
maybe required and packing shall be designed to facilitate opening and thereafter repacking.
4.2 Minimum spares requirement

The Contractor shall provide the following as minimum requirements for the Facility. The
full cost of the provision shall be included in the contract price. The spares shall be delivered
with the plant. The contract should complete the schedule of spares, including the following
items:
Penstocks and sluice gates

One set of any replaceable wear or seating elements and spindle nut for each type
Actuators
One set of manufacturer’s complete overhaul kit for each type and size.
Aerators, Blowers and Agitators

- one set of each type of bearings, bushes, chain and wear elements for each type of
machine
- sufficient seals, sealing rings etc. and replacement parts for annual or shorten service
periods for each unit over 2 years
Screw Pumps
As for agitators; set of replacement lining.
Centrifugal Pumps
- one replacement impeller and each type of bearing or bush
- sufficient seals, sealing rings, packing etc. and replacement parts for annual or shorten
service periods for each unit over 2 years.
Gate valves and movable weirs

Two sets of renewable sealing elements for each size and type provided
Electric Motors
One set of bearings and one set of brushes and brush gear (as applicable) for each type and
size
Switchgear and Controls

- Fuses
- One set of electric spares for each panel type with minimum of 15 % spares of relays, 100
% spares of common fuses and 200 % of special fuses
One set means the number of parts installed in each machine and equipment. The Project
Manager will determine the amount to be deducted from the Contract Price in respect of the
Contractor’s failure to deliver all spare parts defined by this clause.
4.3 Teekeys and keys

Upon completion of the commissioning of the Facility, or at such earlier time as the
Contractor and the Project Manager agree, the Contractor shall provide a set of three tee keys
for each type of valve or penstock cap in the Facility which have been provided under the
contract.
At this time, he shall also deliver two complete sets of labelled keys to the Project Manager
(substantial rings and brass engraved tags) for all the Facility and instrument panel locks
supplied, and any other operating tools necessary to enable the works’ staff to control the
process.
The Contractor shall also supply with the keys one glass fronted timber wall mounted key
hook cabinets with brass hooks and matching engraved and mounted brass labels. The
cabinet shall be mounted in an approved location.
5 General Specifications on Equipment

5.1 Workmanship and material
The design, fabricating, installation and other work of all the equipment must be in line with
the latest engineering technology. The element of each part shall be fabricated according to
standard specifications and it shall be possible to replace and install them on site at any time.
The same elements shall be able to replace each other.
The materials must be suitable for all operation conditions. The characters of strength,
ductility and durability shall be taken into consideration when choosing metal materials. The
cast iron material shall be of a tenacious compact texture, with no pores, defects or cracks.
The forge pieces bearing stress shall be fine and even; cast iron, steel and other materials
shall all be in accordance with the requirements in the equipment specifications. All the
materials chosen shall be new and unused.
5.2 Safety guard

All the moving parts like blades, chains, couplings, exposed central axis and other rotary
parts of the equipment shall have protection coverings for safety guard.
The safety protection shall be standard products of manufacturers or made of electroplated or

compound aluminum, steel plate or galvanized metal plates. Each safe guard facility shall be
easily installed and dismantled and shall be attached with necessary supports and accessories.
The safety guard outdoor facility shall prevent the splashing of rain water and be a shelter
against sun heat.
5.3 Foundation and bedplate of equipment

Unless there are other stipulations, each piece of equipment shall have high-strength iron or
steel structure bedplate, which can be installed on concrete foundation. The foundation and
bedplate shall have support pads and dowels, which shall coordinate with the alignment of
combining bodies or relevant equipment. There shall be enough space left for grouting and
cable pipe laying. All the joints between plates shall be welded and ground smoothly.
5.4 Fasteners
The Contractor shall provide all the fasteners for equipment installation, including adjusting
bolts, anchor bolts, nuts and sleeves. The anchor bolts and particularly noted bolts, nuts and
gaskets shall all be stainless steel, and others shall be galvanized steel. DIN standard 267-
series shall be applied.
5.5 Special tools and accessories

The Contractor must provide special tools, instruments required for periodical maintenance
and adjustment of mechanical equipment and auxiliary equipment for maintenance.
5.6 Data plate

The data plate of the equipment shall be carved on or adhered to a metal plate and fastened to
the casing of equipment that is available and also clearly visible after installation. There shall
be the following specifications on the data plate:
- name of manufacturer
- model and type of equipment and related parameters
- serial No
- date of production
5.7 Lubrication
- Lubrication of mechanical equipment shall be able during continuous operation.
- Lubrication system shall be operated during starting or closing of equipment and shall
avoid waste of lubricant
- The type of lubricant shall be suggested by the manufacturer
- The Contractor shall provide instructions on the lubrication type of equipment and annual
consumption of lubricant, and shall suggest the time of lubrication
5.8 Coupling
Driving motor > 3 kW : driving spindle of driving unit shall be coupled with the
output spindle of the
motor with flexible coupling.
Factors of motor power, rotation speed, driving type and the service coefficient = 1.5.
5.9 Equipment protection

Mechanical equipment
Under the storage : packed and complete protection measures, no exposure and dry
With surface painting : prevented from sustaining impact force, abrasion, fading and other
damage. If the painting surface has been destroyed before acceptance,
the painting shall be reapplied to as new condition.
Electrical, control and isolation equipment
Damp proof, prevented from damage by water soaking.

5.10 Anti-corrosion of materials

Parts of equipment operated under water or in water-gas interface, or in direct contact with
chemicals, shall have anti-corrosion and anti-etching properties.
Corrosion problems arisen from tight connection of different types of metals shall be
avoided.
When it is a must of the contact of different metals, the electrochemical series difference
shall be kept below 250 mV.
5.11 Electric motor

Property and Power of Motors
Each motor shall at least have an efficiency according to the IE3 Premium Efficiency class
- Unless there are other specifications, the motor shall be a constant squirrel-cage induction
motor.
- The service coefficient shall be taken as 1.15.
- motor power < 7.5 kW: direct starting
- motor power >= 7.5 kW reduced voltage starting.
Construction and Standard Product
(1) General Specifications

All motors
- Be designed, produced, tested and checked according to the latest version of IEC Standard
or other equal standards
- Shall have a permanent, non-corrosive data plate installed in an obvious position
containing all data in English or Arabic
- Have enough torque force if the voltage of the power is < 15 % of the voltage recorded on
data plate
- Shall be able to carry out full-load continuous operation.
(2) Outdoor Motor

All outdoor motors must be totally-enclosed fan-cooling type, with the casing protection type
of IP67.
(3) Indoor Motors

All motors installed indoors, to use the totally-enclosed fan-cooling type, shall all use drip-
proof type, with the casing protection type of IP54.
(4) Bearings
- Motors < 1.5 kW : pre-lubricated ball bearings
- Horizontal motors > 1.5 kW : antifriction bearings
- Plugs at the inlet and outlet of grease to allow lubrication at any time and discharge of
waste grease without any dismantling
- Each vertical motor shall have rotary drum or rotary ball shaped thrust bearings, which are
enough to bear gravity and the force generated during construction
- Each motor shall have a data plate showing its bearing and lubrication method
- Design of bearings shall be up to the service time of five years (50,000 hours) when the
motor is under 100 % full-load operation
(5) Insulation Class and Temperature Increasing

- Class F or near Class H according to the IEC Standard or equivalent
- Temperature increase of the motor no more than the limit stipulated in the NEMA
Standard MG-1 or one class lower in the same standard
- Insulation must be tested according to the methods stipulated in the adopted standard after
the motors are transported to the site
(6) Current Balance

When the motor is operated at any load within its service factors, and is in a balance voltage
supply system, the unbalanced current at different poles of the multi-phase motors shall not
exceed the following value:
Below 3.5 kW : 25 %
Equal or above 3.5 kW : 10 %
(7) Miscellaneous
Motors
Waterproof and totally-enclosed motors have silicon rubber gaskets between the terminal box
and the wire pipes of the motor
Have anti-corrosive metal components
Shall be painted according to the standard of manufacturers
Fan : anti-corrosion materials
: suitable with rotation in all directions and accurately balanced
: casing shall be of metal(s)
Rotary element : dynamic balance adjustment
: max vibration amplitude < 0.04 mm when rotation speed <
1800 rpm
: < 0.03 mm when the synchronous speed is 3600 rpm.
Motors rating at 50°C ambient temperature, shall be squirrel cage induction type,
=< 15 kW : direct on-line starting
> 15 kW : star-delta starting
Low voltage motors : suitable for operation at 400 V, 3 phases, 50 Hz supply

: comply with IEC publications 34, 72-1, 72-2, 79, 445; VDE
0530
Low voltage frame indoor use : degree of protection not less than IP 54
Motors for outdoor : meet or exceed the requirements of IP 55 with regard to
protecting
from harmful ingress of sand, dust, harmful effects of water
projected
from nozzles
Connection box : IP 65.
Motor frames submersible pumps : not less than IP 58
Minimum starting torque : 150% of the full load torque.
Continuous Maximum Rating (CMR) of electric Motors
Application Drives up to 37 kW Drives above 37 kW
All pump motors CMR 10% above calculated CMR 5% above calculated power
power requirements under requirements under all operation
all operation conditions conditions
Blowers and CMR 25% above calculated CMR 12,5% above calculated
compressors power requirements for power requirements for normal
normal duty and 5% above duty and 5% above requirements
requirements for maximum for maximum duty
duty
All other drives CMR 50% above normal CMR 25% above normal duty
duty requirements requirements
Terminal boxes
Provided with glands suitable for PVC insulated wire
Motor steel base : drilled at works vertically below the terminal box gland for
the passage of cables
: edges of the hole slightly countersunk or the hole bushed
All motors over 5,5 kW rating shall have terminal boxes arranged to accept both, the main
cable and the cable for measuring temperature as well as a separate anti-condensation heater
cable
Shall be of suitable dimensions to accept appropriate oversized cables
5.12 Explosion protection

The mechanical / switch boxes and electrical diving must be carried out according to the
requirements of operating areas. The minimum requirements shall be based on European
Standard Atex 95.
The contractor must prepare drawings and a detailed list to determine the potential explosive
gas area, relevant area class, fire protection class, explosion class, temperature class and
other particular measuring requirements.
5.13 Noise protection

With the envisaged maximum number of items of Facilities running 'on-load' the sound
pressure outside an envelope of 1m radius from any item of Plant shall not exceed 85 dB(A).
Where the noise cannot be reduced to a level complying with this requirement, acoustic
enclosures shall be provided.
Noise levels:
- Facility installed in a separate room/enclosure : < 80 dB(A) outside the room/enclosure.
- Control room : < 55 dB(A).
- Site boundary : < 40 dB(A)
Hazardous warning notices indicating ear defenders are to be worn shall be installed at
entrances to rooms/enclosures where the sound pressure level exceeds 80 dB(A).
Machinery vibration shall not exceed the limits defined in BS7854-1.
5.14 Supplementary principles for mechanical design and

measurement
The following contents include the principles for design, calculation, selection and
installation of machines and equipment, which shall all be strictly complied with.
Spare Parts
If a component from a certain manufacturer must guarantee uninterrupted operation in any
condition, in this case sufficient spare parts such like motors, etc. must be provided in the
design.
Easy Maintenance
During the design stage, the Contractor must pay special attention to ensure easy
maintenance of machines and equipment as to ensure the realization of quick, easy
inspection, maintenance and repairing.
From the view of safety facilities as ladder, hand rails and platforms have to be provided to
get close safely to machines and equipment for inspection and operation.
Lifting facilities must be provided for the machines over 50 kg. The Contractor must give
thorough considerations to the size and alignment of lifting facilities and lifting holes.
Group Operation
Preparations must be made to separate the selected machine from related procedures for
maintenance and repairs.
Installation of Pumps
When pumps and similar equipment are installed into the pipelines, there must be valves.
Expansion joints must be installed on both the suction side and the pressure side.
5.15 Labelling of equipment

- Each item of equipment shall have affixed to it in a conspicuous position a nameplate
which shall have stamped or engraved upon it the following information:
(a) name of manufacturer; (d) rating
(b) description of item (e) any other relevant information
(c) manufacturer’s serial, manufacturing appertaining
to the particular and/or job reference number;
item of equipment.
- All equipment used for indication, alarm and control shall be adequately labelled with
regard to their function, mode and sequence of operation
- Adhesive tape shall not be allowed for labelling
- Each label shall be provided in Arabic and English language
- The labels shall only be manufactured and affixed after checking and approval of the
inscription
6 Piping and Fittings

6.1 General
The following specifications have to be applied in the complete range of provided piping
work. The detailed specifications do not require special dimensions and/or methods of
execution. The specifications are available to complete piping systems including fittings,
drives, flush connections, brackets, etc. All pipes and fittings must be delivered accompanied
by a test certificate according to DIN EN 10204.
The hydraulic test pressure applied at the manufacturer’s work shall be twice the working
head, or one and a half time the maximum working head, whichever is the greater.
After completion of any fabrication, all pipes shall be hydraulically tested. If any alterations
involving additional fabrication are made after dispatch, a further hydraulic test will be
required on the pipe or piping assembly concerned.
The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the internal surface of all pipe work is
thoroughly clean before and during erection and before commissioning. Cleaning shall
include removal of all dirt, scale and welding slag due to site welding. Before dispatch from
the contractor’s works the ends of the pipes, branch pipes, etc. shall be suitable capped and
covered to prevent any accumulation of dirt or damage. This protection shall be not removed
until immediately to connecting adjacent pipes or valves.
All small bore pipes shall be blown through with compressed air before connection is made
to instruments and other equipment.
6.2 Piping
The following summary of recommended velocities in pipes.
Terms of delivery : DIN EN 10 312, test certificate DIN EN 10204/3.1 B
Edge preparation for welding : DIN EN ISO 9692-1.
Permissible Velocities in Pipes:

Potable and non-potable water: 1.0-2.5 m/s
Sewage : 0.8-2.0 m/s
Pipe Bends
Bends : same wall thickness as the joining pipes
: DIN EN 10253, Radius 1.5 *D.
6.3 Dismantling pieces, lockable

Axial adjustment capability : at least  25 mm
Sufficient number of dismantling pipes have to be incorporated in each pipe line
Threaded rods and nuts through two opposite flanges should allow the dismantling piece to
be secured in the position determined during installation, so that the system represents a rigid
connection of two adjoining pipes.
6.4 Dismantling pieces, non-lockable

Axial adjustment capability : at least  25 mm
Sufficient number of dismantling pipes have to be incorporated in each pipe line
The dismantling piece must permit axial and angular movements during operating conditions.
Flexible Coupling
A sufficient number of flexible couplings must be installed in the pipe lines to ensure
uninterrupted operation in case of different settlement.
Material and Design Criteria:

pipe sections, flanges : welded steel unit
sealing ring : resistant against sewage, e.g. Perbunan
tie rods, nuts : galvanized steel
corrosion protection : black bitumen coating inside/outside or equivalent
radial deflection : approx. 4°
Branch Pipes : Where possible, branch should be realized through a socket welded
into main line. Wall thickness of main and branch pipe have to
correspond to each other.
6.5 Flange connections, screws, nuts

Flange connections : up to DN 50 threaded flange according to DIN EN 1092-1
Flange connections : >=DN 65 welded neck flange type according to DIN EN 1092-1 with
a sealing
surface form C
: > DN 250: steel reinforced rubber packing
: operating pressure requires PN 25: welded neck flanges according to
DIN EN
1092-1
Blind flanges : with sealing surface form C: DIN EN 1092
Gaskets : DIN EN 1514-1
Steel joints : galvanized hexagonal screws, nuts DIN 7990, quality 4.6 or better
Nuts : In case hexagonal bolts and nuts cannot be used, galvanized threaded
rods
according to DIN 976-1, type m, quality 4.6 together with galvanised
hexagonal
nuts according to DIN EN ISO 8673, type m, quality 5.
: nuts of size M16 and above to be protected by a hood made of soft-
polythene.
6.6 Measuring instruments

Wherever, measuring instruments are required, socket or flange connections have to be
provided on the pipe lines.
6.7 Pipe hangers

Design : welded steel structures, subsequently galvanized
: consist of slide- and fixed brackets
: proper alignment of pipe, even when moving longitudinally. No
stress can be
transmitted to supports, except for the weight resulting from pipe and
medium
: all forces and moments resulting from operating conditions are to be
transmitted to the building structure
: required pipe supports, gussets, etc. be connected to pipes by
reinforced welds
: designed on the prevailing operating and ambient temperatures of
pipe system
: all hangers and pipe components which will be inaccessible after
installation
must be sufficiently protected against corrosion prior to assembly
6.8 Installation of piping

Requirements : DIN EN 805
: pipe lines must be level, plumb and properly aligned, respectively
installed with
the required slope
: pipes connected to machinery and appliances cannot transfer forces
and/or
moments to the respective equipment
: forces and moments due to misalignment of pipe work shall under no
circumstances be transmitted to wall ducts
6.9 Flushing and pressure test

Procedure : DIN EN 805
: prior to applying the final coat, all pipe lines must be pressure tested
: after successful pressure testing, the piping systems have to be
properly flushed
6.10 Stainless steel pipes and fittings

Material : EN ISO 1127, material 1.4571
Terms of Delivery : DIN EN 10312 and test certificate DIN EN 10204/3.1B
: edge preparation for welding according DIN EN ISO 9692-1
: pipe ends must be: sealed by PVC caps during transportation
: tools and appliances for processing and installation must be of
suitable type
Pipe Bends
Bends : welded stainless steel pipes to be used
: wall thickness must correspond to those of adjoining pipes
Standard : DIN EN 10253
: Bending radius R = 1.5* D
: DN 250 and above may have R=D + 100 mm
Flange Connections
Dimensions : to be as specified above
Material : flanges, bolts, nuts, washer: stainless steel
: different materials have to be used for bolt and nut, e.g. material
1.4571 and
1.4541
Welding Works
Welders : must possess the welding certificate according to DIN EN 287-1
131/135/141.
Quality of welds : DIN EN ISO 5817, Categories B, and C (category B for inside
analysis; category C
for outside analysis, for gas lines only category B will be accepted)
: avoid the occurrence of annealing colours
: root weld must be protected by inert gas against ingress of oxygen
: ignition spark spots and weld spatter will not be accepted on material
surface
: areas affected by scale / annealing colours must be subjected to
smooth
grinding
: post-treatment from stainless steel surfaces by pickling.
6.11 Painting and marking of equipment

All machinery, equipment, pipes, ducts, etc. have to be painted and marked as follows below:
Final coat : DIN 2403.
Tapes : Stainless steel and PVC pipes as insulated pipes have to be provided
with
suitable adhesive tapes
: distance between tapes < 3 meter

: located at strategic points, e.g. branch points, wall ducts, valves,
equipment, etc.
: information on tapes: media’s name, flow direction arrow and colour
code
marking in accordance with DIN 2403
Identification markings : single or multiple coloured rings painted around the pipes on
all pipework in
buildings at 5 metre intervals
: painted on all pipework where pipes pass through walls or floors,
enter or leave
the buildings
: adjacent to each such point, place a pipeline identification schedule
: conform to the recommendations of BS 1710 where applicable
: schedule of the proposals shall be submitted to the Project Manager
for approval
Name plates : In addition to the above-mentioned marking, all pipes must be
equipped with
name plates
: name plates must be of the same layout throughout the facility
: name plates shall be of multiple-line type to accommodate the
following data:
. medium
. pipeline no, / section
. diameter
. operation pressure
. name plates must be secured to pipes by means of a hose clamp
6.12 Labels
Type : engraved identification labels fitted on all valves and items of plant
Information : reference numbers of all valves as indicated on the schematic
diagrams
Warning labels : on all machinery that is operated under automatic control
Language : in English and Arabic
6.13 Guards
Guards : drive mechanisms are covered with adequate guards
: all rotating and reciprocating parts, drive belts, etc. are to be securely
shrouded
: guards are readily removable for gaining access to the Facility
without the need
for first removing or displacing any major item of plant
6.14 Fire protection equipment

Carbon dioxide extinguishers: pressurized type with trigger release
: Din EN 3-7
: installed on wall mounted brackets
: capacity of 7 litres of carbon dioxide
Dry powder : pressurized with carbon dioxide, plunger operated
: Din EN 3-7
: installed on wall mounted brackets with protection covers
: capacity of 5 kg of dry powder.
Discharge hose : prefitted flexible non-conductive discharge hose having a flared end
Fire blankets : 1.5 square meter asbestos type supplied in a wall mounted container
Color : fire extinguishers shall be painted "fire red"
Location : positions to be directed by the Project Manager.
Information : operation instructions printed on a metal plate in Arabic
7 Pumps
Pumps used in the Facility shall be designed to handle raw sewage and sewage sludge and
shall run unattended for long periods. They shall be capable of passing solids up to a sphere
size of 100 mm and shall pass stringy matter, rags, paper and plastics without clogging and
be resistant to abrasive components present in the wastewater.
7.1 Centrifugal pumps

A: General
Requirements : efficient, reliable and trouble free to operate
: require a Factory Acceptance Test according to ISO9906 and a site
acceptance
test proving capacity
: quiet in operation and free from vibration
: casing of best quality closed grained cast iron
: mounted on base plates or suction stools manufactured of cast iron
: accurately aligned and located by dowels or machined spigots
: shock and corrosion resistant
: adequately designed to assume a rigid support of the impeller and to
rotate
without whip, vibration or undue deflection at all operating speeds
and under
all operating conditions
: of same manufacturer’s design where applicable
: complete, with motor, gearbox, bearings, couplings, pressure gauge
on pumps
delivery, as well as flushing connections on the pumps delivery and
vacuum on
the pump suction
: impellers designed to give a non-overloading characteristic over the
range of
duties stated
B: Design
The pumps and motors
Efficiency : overall efficiency > 65 %
: efficiency point close to the most common duty point the pump is
designed for
Speed : low revolving speeds and not more than 1,500 revs/sec
: periodical speed of impeller blades does not exceed 25 m/s at
specified duty
Casings
Design : equipped with exchangeable internal wearing plates in the volute
: allow the withdrawal of impeller and drive end cover assembly
without
disturbing the pump casings
: hand holes close to impeller and near to delivery branch on the volute
: covers to the hand holes are bolted and shaped internally to match the
internal
contours of casings and minimize disturbances of the flow
The impellers
Design : best nickel cast iron, smooth, well finished, free from blow holes and
imperfections, statically and dynamically balanced and of self-
cleaning,
preferably non-shrouded type
: grit, solids and other foreign matter is kept away from the eye and
neck bush
: securely fitted to pump spindles so that they will not be loosened or
detached
when the pump is in operation.
Pump spindles
Design : stainless steel or high tensile steel, fitted with exchangeable stainless
steel,
chrome nickel or bronze sleeves to protect the spindles against wear
over the
distance it passes through the stuffing box
Casing wearing rings

Design : best quality close-grinded cast iron or nickel iron in a full circle and
fully
concealed and machined
: light drive fit in the casing and located in suitable recesses machined
in casing
: form continuous and smooth surface without gaps or steps with the
adjoining
surfaces of the pump casings
7.2 Centrifugal pumps in dry well installation

General
Design : DIN EN 12255-1 and DIN 19569 Part 2-3, where applicable single-
passage blade
clog-free
: liquid passage smooth and large enough for discharge of all solid
wastes
entering into the impeller. Only when not available due to higher
design
capacity, three-passage blades are allowed.
Driving System of Pumps

Shall have the following functions:
Pump : sewage pump complete with V-belt drive (pulley designed as
flywheel mass)
and motors, mounted on base frame
: 3-phase asynchronous motor according to IEC Standard with at least
IE3
Premium Efficiency
: protection type IP 56
: insulation class F
: operating mode S1
: temperature controller as PTC (positive temperature coefficient)
resistor with
automatic re-start, protecting the coil against overheating
: thermo element at upper and lower bearings to automatically shut off
the pump
in case the temperature passes the limit of allowable temperature of
bearings
Power and Control Unit

Functions : all required switch and control equipment including fastener and
accessories,
continuous measurement of process data, exit 4 – 20 mA
: potential-free contact points for all operational, fault and emergency
stop
messages
: emergency stop push button
: site key-operated switch for “manual-0-automatic” operation
: site changing switch for “remote-0-local” control
: switches or push buttons for all pump functions for “manual”
function mode
: all required ancillaries, such as limit/overload switches, alarms,
indication lamps,
running hour meter, time switch for automatic sequence control etc.
7.3 Submersible centrifugal pumps

Design
Standard : DIN EN 12255-1 and DIN 19569 Part 2-3, where applicable
: single-passage blade clog-free
Impeller : smooth liquid passage, large enough for discharge of all solid wastes
entering
into the impeller

: three-passage blades are allowed if single blade is not available due
to higher
design capacity
: screw centrifugal impellers may be adopted, with the design of
gradual type
impellers
Coupling : device for duckfoot bend of each pump for convenient dismantling
and repairs
: automatic coupling to discharge pipe is required when pumps are in
position
: automatic coupling to the discharge pipe and the sealing shall be
finished at the
same time of descending so workers need not to go down into the
pit/tank
: guiding bar system for each pump
: no components of the pump shall be in contact with the tank bottom
Hoisting : chain stainless steel 1.4571, hoisting ring (hoisting clip) and steel
string
(stainless steel 1.4571) for each pump
: hoisting ring shall be threaded by steel rings
: all components be able to bear the total weight of pump and motor
Guiding bars : installed on the anchor base on the bottom of the tank
: bar, its supports and other fasteners stainless steel 1.4571
: arrangement of the guide bar allows steady conveyance of the pump
from top
of the pump pit to the outlet connection
Structure and Materials of Pumps

Pump shell : gray cast iron, smooth surface, no holes and other irregularities
Nuts, bolts and other fasteners: stainless steel 1.4571
Impeller : nodular cast iron DIN GG –25. The suction inlet and the impellers
externally
adjustable to balance, anti-abrasion and shall have replaceable wear
ring
Bearings : permanent lubrication care-free bearings, with long service life
Shaft material : stainless steel 1.4021
B: Driving System of Pumps

Motor : 3-phase asynchronous according to IEC Standard with an efficiency
that equals
at least IE3 Premium Efficiency
: protection type IP 68
: insulation class F
: operating mode S1
: internal and external cooling
Temperature control : sensor device to be installed at every phase of the motor stator
: sensor shall alarm or automatically shut off the pumps in time

Submersible pumps for waste water and sludge should be designed in ex-protection version
Moisture/water sensor : in electrical sealing monitoring system to alarm for checking in
case of water
enters the oil chamber, wiring box or motor box
Water level sensor : switch to shut off pump at lowest water level
C: Power and Control Unit

Functions : switch and control equipment including fastener and accessories,
continuous
measurement of process data, exit 4 – 20 mA
: potential-free contact points for all operational, fault and emergency
stop
messages
: emergency stop push button
: site key-operated switch for “manual-0-automatic” operation
site changing switch for “remote-0-local” control
: switches or push buttons for all pump functions for “manual”
function mode
: ancillaries, such as limit/overload switches, alarms, indication lamps,
running
hour meter, time switch for automatic sequence control etc.
7.4 Progressive cavity pumps

Pump and motor units : continuous rating
: components capable of renovation during overhaul and all
replaceable
components shall be readily available
: of standard range and shall operate satisfactorily over the range of
duties
: if the pumped medium contains abrasive solids, the maximum rated
speed shall
be derated and the pressure per stage of the pump set shall be limited
as
follows:
Level of Abrasive solids Maximum Pressure Per % of Maximum Speed

Stage (bar)
None 6 100
Light 5 75
Medium 4 50
Level of Abrasive solids Maximum Pressure Per % of Maximum Speed

Stage (bar)
Heavy 3 25
The pump
Mounting : on a single, rigid baseplate preventing distortion under all operating
conditions
: baseplate designed to prevent formation of trapped air pockets during
grouting
as to avoid collection of water and debris when the unit is in service
Casing : suitable for the environmental conditions and the fluid being handled
: suction and discharge connections can be re oriented in 901 steps.
: suction casing provided with access ports to allow clearance of
blockages and
inspection of rotor drive components
Stator : pump stators moulded from high quality resilient synthetic rubber
bonded to an
external steel sleeve to ensure dimensional stability.
: where synthetic rubber is chemically incompatible with the pumped
media, the
Contractor shall select a suitable alternative and state his selection
Pump rotors : corrosion resistant material with a hard plated coating or abrasion
resistant,
hardened tool steel
Transmission system : purpose designed shaft solidly connected to the pump rotor and to the
input
drive shaft
: or shaft jointed to the pump rotor and the input drive shaft via 'sealed
for life',
lubricated pin joints
Access to drive assembly : afforded without the need to disassemble the pump casing
Lifting points : clearly identified on the equipment and located to give a balanced,
safe lift
Protection : ump sets are provided with mechanical and electronic over pressure
and
electronic dry running protection
7.5 Screw pumps

The pumps
Standard : ISO 9001:2000 and ISO 3834-2 certified manufacturer
Body : fully welded steel construction consisting of a support tube holding 1,
2 or 3
flights
: rotating clockwise, seen from the upper bearing to the lower bearing
: end-plates welded to the screw pump tube thus making a watertight
and
gastight screw pump body, also when the bearing flanges are not
mounted
: end-plates have recesses for the stub shaft connections
: after the end-plates, the blades are welded to the tube
: welds have to be accomplished manually by certified welders
Blades : outer edge shall be machined for adjusting the right dimension and
creating a
true cylindrical shape
Tension : deflection, bending moment and welding tension of the screw pump
shall be
minimized. The actual tensions have to be ascertained
Stub shafts of the upper and lower bearings

material : Spheroidal/Nodular Graphite Cast Iron 80-55-06 material or better
(acc. ASTM
A536-72)
: shaft with flange shall be casted in one piece
: casted shaft has to be machined and drilled to its final shape
: shaft flanges shall be connected to the screw pump body end-plates
with high
strength fixing bolts, to be tightened with a torque wrench
Upper bearing
Type : a spherical roller bearing
: or, for large screw pumps, a combination of a spherical roller and a
spherical
roller thrust bearing
: cast iron housing shall be supported by a heavy cast support flange
: unit meets the radial and axial forces of the operating screw pump
Bearing life : min. 100.000 hrs. (ISO B 10)
Seal : special lip seals with stainless steel spring
Lubrication : grease, manual, intermittent
Lower bearing
Type : 3D-self-aligning, absorbs the radial forces whilst permitting axial
expansion of
the screw pump body due to ambient temperature changes
: enclosed cast iron housing containing 2 single-row tapered roller
Seal : 3 special cargo-seals, warranting an optimum seal at relatively high-
pressure,
extreme temperature, high rpm and in corrosive, abrasive or
aggressive media
: at the position of the seals the shaft surface is provided with a grinded
ceramic
layer
Lubrication : lubricated for lifetime (minimum lifetime 100.000 hours) with a
special
monograde oil.
Side rail
Type : removable lateral steel guide plates, wall thickness of min. 3 mm
7.6 Dosing pumps

Dosing pumps may be needed for the addition of chemicals to the treatment process,
depending on the Contractors’ design.
Contractor has to submit design documentation proving that type and make of the pump is
suitable to handle the chemical that is to be dosed.
Specifications of the pumps will not be less than specified for the various types of pumps
specified above.
8 Screening and grit removal

8.1 Screening
General
Goal is the removal of larger solid particles from the influent flow. The Screening system
shall include:
Coarse screens : maximum width 25 mm
Fine screens : maximum width 3 mm
Type : similar to climber screen or step screen, low maintenance and
designed for
severe duty service
Cleaning : automatically by washing and brushing or raking. The cleaning cycle
operates
on the differential water level across the screens. In case of
malfunction the
cycle will be run a time based. Non-potable water shall be used for
flushing of
the screening material
Isolation : via manually actuated penstocks. Two isolation penstocks be
provided to allow
full isolation of each screen. Penstock frames shall be from stainless
steel 316L
with gate of a suitable composite HDPE or SS316L material
Reject water : to be recycled to HRWWTP to a location up flow from the screens
Sampling : a sampling point has to be placed after the screens.
Mechanical requirements
Flow velocity : between bars 1.2 m/s
Bar distance : max 25 mm for coarse screens and 3 mm for fine screens
Cleaning : automatically cleaned based on
. differential water level measurement before and after the screens
. time setting
. continuous under rain weather flow conditions
Safeguards : automatic opening of by-pass when high-high water level is detected
8.2 Screenings wash installation

General
Screenings : washed and compressed as to reach a dry solids content of at
least 60%
: screenings are mechanically conveyed to containers (2 duty, 1 stand
by)
: installation made in stainless steel 316 L
Grit removal and classifiers
:
General : stainless steel piping
: all materials used resistant to corrosive atmosphere
: grit removal as continuous operation
: access bridge required
: automatic greasing installation
: overflow weir stainless steel 316 thickness 3 mm as minimum
: overflow weir adjustable after installation
9 Aeration equipment and mixers
9.1 Air blower units

General
Redundancy : multiple blowers shall be applied, assuring 100% aeration capacity
available when one blower fails
: all blowers can provide process air to the aeration elements
Efficiency : minimum efficiency shall be 75%.
: equipped with variable capacity ,capable of supplying air from 45%
to 100% of design capacity of the
specific blower
Make : blowers shall not need maintenance procedures requiring replacement
of parts within the first 18,000 hours of operation, except lubricants
and filters,
: blowers shall produce not more than 80 dB(a) sound
: blowers shall be equipped with pressure relief valves, suction filters,
suction and discharge silencers, air temperature and pressure
measurement at inlet and outlet
and are mounted on vibration isolators on a common rigid mild steel
base plate
on top of the receiver
: blower test to be performed under certificates for the following
categories:
Positive Displacement Blowers: ISO 1217
Centrifugal Blowers: ASME PTC 10
All Blower Technologies: ASME PTC 13 (pending release)
Pipework : connections to the blowers shall be flexible to avoid vibrations being
transferred to the pipes or to any structures.
: interconnecting pipes will be equipped with valves and the pipes shall
be from
SS316L
Housing : all blowers will be placed in suitable building or containment that
provides acoustic isolation, that prevents excessive room temperature, with
proper air filter system that prevents dust inclusion
Air filter : self supporting disposable modular filter pocket units installed with
air tight
seals within a rigid frame
: according to requirements of BS 6540.
: rated for 120% of the maximum air flow rate of the blower
: permanently installed manometer shall be installed with each blower
filter unit
arranged to indicate normal and high (filter blocked) differential head
loss
across the air filter unit

: an electronic signal and alarm shall be included for high head loss.
Anti surge system : complete system to prevent surge occurring be installed to each
blower to
ensure that an air flow requirement below the optimum turndown of
the blower
will not lead to surge conditions
: where this is achieved with a blow off valve, suitable silencing shall
be provided
Controls : all necessary sensor systems for oil, temperature and pressure shall be
included to provide control and alarm functions.
Compressors shall be sized for the variations in atmospheric pressure, temperature and
relative humidity stated below:
Standard Conditions
Air Temperature 15 °C
Relative Humidity 75%
Atmospheric Pressure 1013 mbar
Standard Operating Range Minimum Maximum
Air temperature 0 °C 45°C
Relative Humidity 0% 80 %
Atmospheric Pressure 900 mbar 1100 mbar
9.2 Diffusers
General
Diffusers shall be made from porous material fully covered with rubber membranes and shall
have a proven record of successful and efficient operation in a wastewater treatment plant.
Diffusers shall be disc or plate membrane type, made of EPDM/poly-urethane based rubbers.
No ceramic disc diffuser shall be used.
Materials of Construction:
supports : SS 316L
expansion joints : SS 316L
all welded parts : SS 316L
submerged air manifolds : SS 316L
drop pipes : SS 316L
nuts, bolts and washers : SS 316L

anchor bolts : SS 316L
Fastening diffusors : securely to a purpose designed baseplate by a peripheral retaining

ring with 0
ring seals. The baseplate assembly and retaining ring shall be of
UPVC. Bolted
assemblies shall not be used
: diffuser/baseplate assembly incorporates a suitable orifice for control
of air flow
and shall be securely fixed to the pipework system to ensure the
assembly
remains in position under all operational conditions and during
manual cleaning
(low pressure hosing) and lifting of diffuser sections
: diffusers shall be evenly distributed within the whole floor area of
each zone to
prevent "dead areas"
Pipework Installation
Pipes : from the blower station and headers for aeration tanks preferably be
installed
above ground with a condensate release device fitted at the lowest
accessible
point of the main pipe
: designed and installed to accommodate thermal expansions
Levelling : pipework and diffusers shall be "levelled" to ensure even air
distribution
Water release : water release pipes be installed at appropriate points from each
diffuser section
to enable entrapped water to be blown from the air pipework
: each release pipe shall terminate in a valve at a point easily accessible
from a
walkway
Frictional Losses
Frictional losses : to be minimised by keeping cross sectional changes and directional
changes to
A minimum and by use of large radius bends
: use of valves shall be the minimum
: pipework, including all valves, diffusers and restrictions, be designed
so that the duty point discharge pressure head of each blower does not
exceed Static Head (Water Depth above Diff users) + 100 mbar
: this shall be measured at maximum design air flow with all control
valves fully
open. The Contractor shall provide calculations as part of the outline

design submission to prove compliance with this requirement
Air Flow Control

Control valves : eccentric plug or butterfly type giving a linear characteristic of air
flow against
the degree of opening
: each valve shall be supplied with a pressure/flow calibration
certificate
: motorised and suitable for a continuously modulating duty
: lockable in any position
Flow measuring : Suitable tapings and air flow measuring devices installed on each
zone of each aeration lane
: devices shall be complete with any necessary interface equipment for
connecting to portable flow indicating instruments
: contractor shall supply two sets of indicating instruments and will, in
addition, install a permanent flow measuring device in the main pipe
from the blower station
9.3 Mixers
General
Mixers will be used to prevent sedimentation in activated sludge basins and other tanks and
compartments of the HRWWT that are not designed for sedimentation. Contractor will
present calculations in his tender demonstrating that the offered equipment transfers enough
energy to prevent sedimentation.
Equipment
Mixer : all materials of stainless steel 316
: oil chamber equipped with detection ‘water in oil’
: suitable for wastewater and resistant against components that are
normally present in wastewater
Motor : protection IP 68
: isolation class F
: continuous operation
: IEC-34 and IEC-72
: nominal power at least 10% higher than maximum needed axis power
: cables are oil and grease resistant
Hoisting : chain stainless steel 316, hoisting ring (hoisting clip) and steel string
(stainless steel 316) for each mixer
: hoisting ring shall be threaded by steel rings
: all components are able to bear the total weight of mixer and motor
Guiding bars : installed on the anchor base on the bottom of the tank
: bar, its supports and other fasteners stainless steel 316
: arrangement of the guide bar allows steady conveyance of the mixer
10 Clarifiers and SBR systems

10.1 Primary and secondary clarifiers
10.1.1 Rotating scrapers
General Description
Scraper : rotating, half bridge type, up to and including 55 m diameter
Bridge: D=< 40 m : extends > 1000 mm beyond the centreline of the centre bearing
D>40 m : extends 5m beyond the centreline of the centre bearing
: driven at the periphery of the tank and rotate in a clockwise direction
looking
on the plan
: sufficient traction at all times, including snow, ice, high winds and
the sludge
loading of 200 kg/m² of blade
: Speed at the tank periphery in a range of 72 to 144 m/h, according to
ATV
regulations and calculated for the complete sludge removal
10.1.2 Bridge requirements
Clamps, fixings and pins : stainless steel to 1.4571 minimum Grade A4.
Loads and deflection : design to accommodate the following loads and maximum deflections
in addition to its self weight and ancillary equipment
- Imposed loading via flooring : 3.0 kN/m²
- Wind loading on structure : 1.4 kN/m²
- Sludge loading on blades : 200 kg/m² of blade
- Maximum deflection of beams : 1/250th of part
: internal cross bracing shall be provided to stiffen the structure
Walkway : 700mm minimum clear width between hand railing
: from tank periphery to the inner end of the bridge.
Flooring : > 900mm either side of the slip ring collector
: > 6 mm thick galvanised steel,
: floor plating with raised, self-draining non slip tread pattern and the
top surface
finished flush with the top surface of the open grid flooring
: sectional and removable, panel length < 1,000 mm
: panels individually secured, abutting ends of each panel suitably
fixed together,
< 10 mm gap.
Access : permanent ladder fixed to the bridge suitably positioned to avoid
creating trap
points with any projecting structures and ground level pathways <
300 mm
from finished ground level

: where the bridge deck is > 2 m above the surrounding ground level,
the access
ladder shall have a hinged bottom section
: ladder supports and fastenings of the same design and materials as the
main
bridge
Carriage : bolted to the underside of the bridge
: driving gear and wheel assemblies mounted on the end carriage with
the
driving wheel leading
: minimum distance between wheels of 1400 mm
combined motor and gearbox assembly, continuously rated and
arranged for
direct drive onto the leading wheel.
: jacking points provided to enable wheel assemblies to be easily
replaced “In
situ"
: wheels made of cast iron with direct moulded polyurethane tyres
: wheels easily replaceable and fitted on steel axles
: axle supports of the plummer block type, grease packed after
assembly, having
self aligning ball or roller bearings with a life of 100.000 hours.
: polyurethane tyres have an outer diameter > 250 mm, a face width >
70 mm
and a 93' ± 2' Shore A hardness value
: guards over wheels and rotating parts ensure accessibility for
adjustment
and/or maintenance
: wheel guards allow easy visual inspection of tyre wear galvanised
expanded
metal guards would be acceptable for this purpose.
: plough blade" on the leading edge of the end carriage deflects
obstacles to the
outside of the tank wall. The lower 25 mm of the plough shall be of
stiff rubber,
in contact with the runway
10.1.3 Central tripod support
Tripod Support : seamless circular structural hollow section to DIN- EN 10220

: at its base the tripod to be fixed inside the sludge hopper with a
minimum
clearance of 150 mm between the edge of the hopper and the outside
of the
tripod legs
: each leg shall be provided with a baseplate
Central Bearing
Comprises : grease fed slewing ring bearing (ball or roller type) allowing
rotational
movement
: stainless steel axle supported in self lubricating plain bush bearings
allowing the
bridge to pivot in the vertical plane
Bearings : withstand the deflection of the bridge
: are fully sealed against the ingress of dust, moisture etc
: minimum design life of 100,000 hours
: bearing support plate be bolted to the tripod top plate. Fixing holes be
slotted
at 90° to those in the tripod, to give at least + 25mm universal
adjustment for
centralising the bearing assembly
10.1.4 Diffuser drum
Drum : rotates with the bridge

: scum removal from inside the drum through two diametrically
opposite cut
outs, 150 mm minimum width x 75mm minimum above and below
normal top
water level
: drum assembly, when in an empty tank, shall withstand loading from
winds of
up to 40 m/sec
Sizes : diameter 20% of the tank diameter
: depth of immersion 50% of the water depth
: freeboard of 200 mm
Materials : GRP with skin and flange thicknesses > 6mm
: surfaces smooth and crevice free and all cut edges fully sealed
10.1.5 Scraper blades and support mechanism
Scraper blades : maximum length 2.00 m each

: arrangement in helical pattern
: tanks with diameters >40m, blades on the 5 m extended bridge
: forward inclination of approximately 5° to the vertical
: blades permanently connected together and be arranged to overlap
each other
by at least 75 mm
Blade assembly : flexible blade clamped to the rear of a support plate by a backing
strip, details
being support plates > 250 mm high x 6mm thick, with a 90° returned
top edge
backing strip > 40 mm wide x 6mm thick flexible blade high quality,
wear
resistant rubber or polyurethane specially compounded to resist wear
and
damage, > 150 mm wide x 20 mm thick with 55 mm protruding
below the
bottom edge of the support plate
: fixing holes along the centre of the flexible blade so that it may be
inverted to
extend its working life
: materials for the blades and the mechanism: stainless steel or
galvanised steel,
but only one material shall be used
Supports : series of vertical rigid tubes extending to trailing arms
: trailing arms shall incline downwards at an angle not exceeding 30°
to the
horizontal
: all tubular members of the scraper support system shall be capped
10.1.6 Scum collection and removal
Scum collection blade : manufactured from GRP, > 6mm thickness

: > 350 mm deep with 150 mm above top water level
: mounted from the underside of the bridge
: suitable profiled rubber or polyurethane strip form a seal between
scum blade
and scum board
: sufficient angle of rake to ensure scum and floating material diverted
to the
periphery of the tank
: outer edge of the blade converges with scum board at > 30° to the
centreline of
the bridge and rectangular impounding area of > 0.35 m² surface area.
Scum removal : automatically via a rotary tube actuated by a bridge mounted cam
which
partially rotates the tube, enabling scum and top water to gravity
discharge
through an orifice in the tube
: orifice shall be returned to top dead centre, before being dipped for a
second
time to collect carriage water
: system allows a full range of adjustment to immersion depths and
dwell periods
10.1.7 Scum board and weir plates
Scum Board : manufactured from GRP, > 6mm thickness

: fixed around the inner perimeter of the tank to prevent scum / floating
debris to
escape to the tank outlet channel
: 450 mm deep
: 150 mm freeboard except for 2 metres either side of the scum
removal device
: near scum removal, scum board shall be 600 mm deep with 150 mm
freeboard
: mounted nominally 250 mm inboard of the weir plate
Weir plates : manufactured from GRP, > 6mm thickness

: fixings shall allow adjustment of the weir level by ± 25 mm, be a
minimum of
100 mm from the top of the weir Wall and not more than 400 mm
apart.
10.2 SBR systems

In case SBR technology is applied the equipment of the SBR technology shall meet the
following criteria
General : The equipment for the SBR shall include influent distribution,
aeration, mixing, decanting, sludge extraction, scum removal,
instrumentation and process control facilities suited for a well
functioning SBR operation capable of providing all stages required –
fill, react, settle, decant, sludge removal and idle.
Influent distribution : prevents hydraulic short circuiting between the influent and effluent
outlets
: allows for rapid mixing of the influent with the mixed liquor
: prevents odour emission
Aeration : shall be based on fine bubble aeration as dictated in relevant

specifications
; suited for intermittent (batch) operation and variable water levels
: capable of providing specific amounts of air to each reactor in spite of
the fact that the water level in each tank is different
Mixing equipment : the mixing system shall be designed to allow the development of
perfect mixing conditions inside the reactor. The time required for
development of perfect mixing conditions inside the reactor from the
start of operation of the aeration/mixing system shall not exceed 5
minutes.
The difference between the concentration of the suspended solids at
any two sampling points inside the reactor under conditions of
aeration/mixing shall not exceed 10% under varying conditions.
Decanters : measures to avoid entrapment of floating material and/or suspended

solids from the sludge blanket and/or activated sludge contained in
the decanting mechanism and pipework during the aeration phase.
: automatic mechanical safeguard by means of mechanical valve or
equivalent against accidental effluent extraction
: Made from SS316
: easy access for maintenance
Blowers : the SBR package will include blowers that are suitable for
intermittent (batch) operation and variable water levels operation of
the SBR system.
: will be in accordance to the Blower specification
Foam/scum removal : automatic foam removal that allows for foam and scum removal
: easy access for maintenance
Sludge removal : for automatic sludge removal from the SBR from either the react or
after decant stages.
Shall be installed for easy access for operation and maintenance
Instrumentation : In each reactor there shall be a DO meters, a level transmitter, high

level switch, low level switch and sludge level transmitter. The
equipment shall be suited for intermittent (batch) operation and
variable water levels
: shall be installed for easy access for maintenance
Process control : Fully automatically control process that integrates all the process
controls with operator interface that can operate the system either
completely automatic or manual via switches (in emergency
situations).
: allows for both time and flow based process programs
: allows for blower control both by timer and DO in reactor
: allows for complete parameter adjustment for process optimization
11 Thickening and dewatering equipment

11.1 Polymer preparation and dosing
Polymer : use of both liquid and solid (powder) polymer is accepted
Polymer preparation : prepares polymer for dosing in thickening and/or dewatering
equipment
: concentrated polymer is to be diluted to 0.5 % solution to prepare a
stem
solution
: no less than 120 minutes ripening time of stem solution
: upon dosing this will be further diluted in-line with a static mixer to
0.1%
solution
Equipment (not limited) : ventilation facilities
: mixers for continuous mixing, axes and propellers stainless steel
316L
: leak prevention / liquid tight leak collection basin with capacity for
full content
of tanks
: drains
: level measurement
: protection against chemical corrosion
: piping of HDPE or thermic galvanized steel PN6
: tanks made of pigmented glassfiber reinforced polyester
: static inline mixer for dilution of feed PE to 0.1% solution
: when powder PE is used: adequate mixing tank required for
preparation of
PE dosing pumps type membrane / mohno pump, pumphouse made
of cast
iron rotor of chromesteel
11.2 Belt thickeners

General
Belt thickeners shall be provided for sludge pre-thickening prior to the possibly proposed
digestion system.
Site conditions : location indoors, in the dewatering building

: ambient temperature min./max. (C): 5 / 45
: humidity (%): approx. 85
: site elevation: 765 m above sea level
Construction : complete package unit operating on a continuous belt press and all
ancillary
equipment
: constructed for least 20 years of full operational life with the
minimum of
maintenance
: all components shall be capable of renovation during overhaul
: electrical control equipment installed in a dry environment suitably
protected
from the belt operating conditions
Operating conditions : maximum allowable PE dosage is 5g active PE/kg DS
: only 40 hours a week (5 consecutive days 8 hours)
: TSS in the supernatant will be no more than 500 mg/l
Main Provisions
Loading : hydraulic loading of sludge (m3/m/h): < 40
: dry solids capacity per m belt width: < 350 kg/hr
Diameter : rollers (mm): > 240
: rollers pin for bearings (mm): > 45
Lifetime : rollers (h): > 100.000
: roller bearings (h): > 50.000
: belt (h) : > 8.000
: bearings (L10h according to ISO; h): > 50.000
Belt filter : two continuous weaves high strength polyester of the split type
: constant filter tension, irrespective of sludge loading to be provided,
accommodating an increase in belt length of at least 3 per cent
: automatic belt alignment within inner band limits achieved by means
of sensing
devices
: automatic belt breakage and ‘out of band’ limit lateral movement
with suitable
signals provided
: ploughs and other suitable mechanisms for sludge distribution to be
included
: even sludge distribution over full width of belt required
: high pressure belt washing system required to adequately clean belt
and
prevent blinding
: removable nozzles to allow simple cleaning
: aerosol emissions from belt washing system is not allowed
Provisions : pre thickening drum (dynamic flocculation)
: air compressor (if required)
: cake scraping doctor blade
: safety cut-out devices for safety purposes
Materials: : rollers from stainless steel AISI 316 or rubber covered carbon steel
: frame hot spray metallisation and epoxy painted
: belt of polyester fabric with clipper seam
Mechanical Requirements
Mixing : per unit a suitable vessel (covering) and agitator to promote
flocculation
: mixing arrangement ensures uniform agitation and no short-circuiting
: mixing tank enables sludge and polyelectrolyte to develop a good floc
: sludge from the flocculation/conditioning tank shall be conveyed on
to the filter
belt in a manner to avoid excessive turbulence and consequent floc
break up
Pipe work : steel pipe firmly fixed to the structural frame of the belt thickener
: suitable access for removal of blockages
Enclosure : if belt thickener is enclosed, suitable provision for visual checking
during
operation
: transparent panels shall not discolour with age
: suitable access for adjustment and maintenance of equipment
Safety Cut-out Devices

Safety cut–out devices : incorporated in the belt thickener control circuits to initiate safe
shutdown of
the Facility and provide audio–visual alarms under the following
conditions:
. belt breakage
. out of band’ limit lateral movement
. automatic sludge level control/sludge level switch
Polymer Trials
Where thickening is to be achieved by polymer dosing to the sludge the Contractor shall
complete evaluation trials during the tests before completion to establish the most cost
effective polymer.
The contractor shall provide all equipment and consumables (including polymer) necessary
to undertake the trials.
11.3 Dewatering belt presses

General
ancillary
equipment
minimum of
maintenance

protected
Operating conditions : dewatering produces sludge with a minimum solids concentration of
20%
: maximum allowable PE dosage is 10g active PE/kg DS
Main Provisions
Diameter : rollers (mm): > 240
: rollers pin for bearings (mm): > 45
Lifetime : rollers (h): > 100.000
: roller bearings (h): > 50.000
: belt (h) : > 8.000
: bearings (L10h according to ISO; h): > 50.000
: belt (h): > 8,000
: bearings (L10h according to ISO; h): > 50,000
Belt filter : two continuous weaves high strength polyester of the split type
: constant filter tension, irrespective of sludge loading to be provided,
accommodating an increase in belt length of at least 3 per cent
: automatic belt alignment within inner band limits achieved by means
of sensing
devices
: automatic belt breakage and ‘out of band’ limit lateral movement
with suitable
signals provided
: ploughs and other suitable mechanisms for sludge distribution to be
included
: even sludge distribution over full width of belt required
: high pressure belt washing system required to adequately clean belt
and
prevent blinding
: removable nozzles to allow simple cleaning
: aerosol emissions from belt washing system is not allowed
Provisions : pre thickening drum (dynamic flocculation)
: air compressor (if required)
: cake scraping doctor blade
: safety cut-out devices for safety purposes
Materials: : rollers from stainless steel AISI 316 or rubber covered carbon steel
: frame hot spray metallisation and epoxy painted
: belt of polyester fabric with clipper seam
Mechanical Requirements
Mixing : per unit a suitable vessel (covering) and agitator to promote
flocculation
: mixing arrangement ensures uniform agitation and no short-circuiting

: mixing tank enables sludge and polyelectrolyte to develop a good floc
: sludge from the flocculation/conditioning tank shall be conveyed on
to the filter
belt in a manner to avoid excessive turbulence and consequent floc
break up
Pipe work : steel pipe firmly fixed to the structural frame of the belt thickener
: suitable access for removal of blockages
Enclosure : if belt thickener is enclosed, suitable provision for visual checking
during
operation
: transparent panels shall not discolour with age
: suitable access for adjustment and maintenance of equipment
Safety Cut-out Devices

Safety cut–out devices : incorporated in the belt thickener control circuits to initiate safe
shutdown of
the Facility and provide audio–visual alarms under the following
conditions:
. belt breakage
. out of band’ limit lateral movement
. automatic sludge level control/sludge level switch
Polymer Trials
effective polymer.
11.4 Centrifugal decanters

General
ancillary
equipment
minimum of
maintenance
protected
Operating conditions : dewatering produces sludge with a minimum solids concentration of
20%
: maximum allowable PE dosage is 10g active PE/kg DS
Mechanical
Decanter : rated speed bowl (rpm): at least 3000
: differential speed bowl / conveyor (rpm):to be adjustable between 0
to +/- 30
: speed control, hydraulic drive or planetary gear with eddy current
brake motor
or cyclo gear box + 2 frequency inverters or direct drive in
conjunction with a
planetary gear box
: lifetime bowl (h): > 40.000
: lifetimescroll (h): > 20,000
: casing; upper part removable
: lower part with discharge funnels for centrate and sludge cake
Bearings : ball- and/or roller bearings
: lifetime (L10h according to ISO, h):  100.000
: lubrication, oil (compact unit oil pump with oil tank), alternatively
can offer
grease pack lubrication
Provisions : vibration monitor / switch
: inlet and outlet flexible connections
vibration dumpers
Materials : centrifuge bowl from stainless steel AISI 316, with welded strips of
hard-wearing
metal
: scroll from stainless steel AISI 316
: scroll flights, replaceable wearing tips made of tungsten carbide alloy
or
tungsten carbide tiles
: discharge funnel from stainless steel AISI 316
: cover from stainless steel AISI 316
: support frame / platform / ladder from St 37-2
Drive unit
Principle : Electric motor, fluid coupling and multi V-belts, mounted on a base
plate as a
drive unit. Alternatively when using a variable frequency drive for
main motor
Electric motor: : power supply (V/Hz): 3 x 400 / 50
: rated speed (rpm):  1500
: starting method: variable frequency drive
: continuous operation
: life time bearings (L10h according to ISO, h): more than 100.000
: lubrication, grease (for lifetime)
: insulation class F (temperature rise as for class B)
: protection class IP55
: protective devices, thermal switches incorporated in the stator

windings
: terminal boxes, metal, gland with screw thread; one for main
supply and one for
accessories
Accessories : heating element 230V
Coupling : fluid coupling and V-belts
Provisions : oil fill plug, breather, level indication, oil drain plug, thermal fuse,
protective
covering for V-belts
Polymer Trials
effective polymer.
The contractor shall provide all equipment and consumables (including polymer) necessary
to undertake the trials.
11.5 Conveyor
General
Dewatered sludge is to be conveyed into containers in which the dried sludge will be trucked
away. Water leaking during conveyance is to be collected and diverted to sewer network.
Automatic loading of containers.
Conveyor
Type : screw or belt conveyor
Medium : dewatered sludge
: specific design weight 1100 kg/m³
: dry solids 18 - 28 % weight
Make : all materials stainless steel 316, minimum 6 mm thick
: protection class IP 54
: IEC-34 and IEC72
: screw: maximum of 35 rpm, reversible direction
12 Sludge digestion
12.1 General requirements sludge digestion

Digester : sludge shall be stirred by a mixer. The mixing arrangement shall
ensure that the
entire contents of the digester are uniformly agitated and no short-
circuiting
occurs
: construction allows for easy removal of sand without interruption of

the normal
operation
: includes all the required safety accessories including but not limited
to pressure
relief valves, flame arrestors, flame traps, etc.
: special consideration shall be given to preventing struvite
precipitation and
methods for cleaning this if seen
: will be equipped with systems for preventing foam accumulation
: at least two digesters are to be provided
Availability : all components shall be capable of renovation during overhaul and all
replaceable components shall be readily available
Mixer in the digester : shall suitable for operation in a digester
: stator casing, mixer and mixer shaft shall be made from stainless steel
: removable out of the digester in parts by a mobile crane
Safety cut-out devices

Safety cut–out devices : over- and under pressure device (protected against frost)
: hydraulic overload protection by means of calamity overflows
: gas overpressure protection by means of a sludge siphon
12.2 Gas storage

General requirements
Gas storage tank : mechanical construction on a civil concrete plate
: capable of equalising the daily variations in the gas flow production
: constructed to give at least 20 years of operational life with the
minimum of
maintenance
: dual membrane shall be capable of renovation during overhaul
Biogas :
: gas storage tank is equipped with an internal rubber balloon, dual
membrane
: gas pressure shall be reached by means of weights on the internal gas
balloon
: gas balloon shall be equipped with the following safeties:
. under pressure
. overpressure
. detection-instrumentation
. automated valves
: biogas supply and biogas take-off pipes shall be equipped with drains
: biogas shall be burned in cogeneration-units or in the sludge heating
boiler
(back-service of the gas motors)
Safety : safety zone around the gas storage tank shall be at least 7 m
: gas storage tank shall be located and installed according to the
European
Guideline Atex 137. The instrumentation and the auxillary equipment
will be
installed according to the European Guideline Atex 95
: includes pressure/vacuum relief valves, leak detection systems, flame
arrestors,
flame traps etc.
Gas storage : gas storage tank is constructed from stainless steel AISI 316 L
: rubber membrane of the balloon shall be internally guided with a
wooden guide
bars to protect the membrane against wear and sticking
: membrane is made of resistant rubber, which shall have a proven
record of
successful and efficient operation in a wastewater treatment plant.

Safety cut–out devices : hydraulic overpressure device
: mechanical overfilling device
12.3 Flare
Flare : capable of conserving the daily differences in the gas flow production
: capacity sufficient to burn full actual gas production
: constructed to give at least 20 years of operational life with the
minimum of
maintenance
making
maximum use of readily replaceable parts.

: electrical control equipment shall be installed in a dry environment
suitably
protected.
: internal flame
Electrical and mechanical requirements

Safety : gas burner shall be located and installed according to the European
Guideline
Atex 137
: instrumentation and the auxiliary equipment to be installed according
to
European Guideline Atex 95.
: electrical equipment, the gas burner and the automatic control valves
shall be
installed on a distance of 1 m of each other
: total amount of biogas shall be burnt in de gas burner in case of
emergency.
The gas burner shall be a closed system burner; the flame shall not be
visible
: there will be a dead area of 7 m around the gas burner, in which no
buildings or
equipment will be installed.

Safety cut–out devices : low gas pressure
: general safety protections.
12.4 Cogeneration units

General requirement
Co-generation unit : apt for continuous operation
: at least 10 years of operational life with minimum of maintenance
: electrical efficiency at least 33%
: includes biogas treatment
: synchronized with electrical grid supply
Fuel
Biogas : gas motors-units generate thermal power and electrical power from
biogas
: installations are resistant against 1000 ppm H2S for 10 years
Safety : cogeneration units shall be located and installed according to the
European
Guideline Atex 137
: instrumentation and the auxiliary equipment will be installed
according to the
European Guideline Atex 95

Equipment (not limited) : automatic switch of fuel
: gas dryer for biogas
: ventilation system of the gas installations to prevent explosion in case
of gas
leakage.
Requirements
Gas motor : runs in part load from 60% – 100%
Equipment (not limited) : gas motor
: generator
: gear
: automatic controlling valves, condense valves, valves, gas filters, and
instrumentation for biogas, valves
: intercooler
: gas motor heat exchanger (or gas motor cooler)
: stack heat exchanger
: stack with dampers
: controlling system: temperature control (low-off), temperature
control (high-
low), maximum temperature control, automatic switch (on/off),
temperature
gauges, pressure gauges
Heat exchange : outlet temperature of the water shall be 70 °C and the inlet shall be 50
°C. The
gas motor shall have a independent water system for heat distribution:
.drains
. filters and valves for air-outlet and filth-outlet
. expansion vessel
. controlling valves
. blocking valves
. circulation pumps
. feeding pumps
. emergency cooling pumps
. heat exchanger
. effluent pumps
. isolation
12.5 Sludge heating boiler

Sludge heating boiler : complete package unit operating in standby position, and all
necessary ancillary
Equipment
: system constructed to give at least 10 years of operational life with
minimum of
maintenance.
Fuel
Fuel : biogas or liquid fuel shall be burned in the boiler
Safety : sludge heating boiler shall be located and installed according to the
European
Guideline Atex 137
: instrumentation and the auxiliary equipment will be installed
according to the
European Guideline Atex 95
Equipment (not limited) : automatic switch of fuel
gas dryer for biogas
: ventilation system to prevent explosion in case of gas leakage
Requirements
Boiler : overpressure boiler, standard equipped
: temperature control (low-off)
: temperature control (high-low)
: maximum temperature control
: automatic switch (on/off)
: temperature gauges
: pressure gauges
: weather dependent controlling devices
: range of power from 25% – 100%
: outlet temperature of the water 70 °C and the inlet 50 °C
: independent water system for heat distribution
: following equipment: drains filters and valves for air-outlet and filth-
outlet,
expansion vessel, controlling valves, blocking valves, circulation
pumps, feeding
pumps, emergency cooling pumps, isolation, pipe-work
13 Utilities and air treatment

13.1 Ventilation and odour control
Applicable technologies
Filtration technologies : air is to be treated in lava or compost filters
Equipment : centrifugal ventilators of polypropylene
: piping polypropylene, equipped with valves and flow
measurement
: filter housing of glassfiber reinforced polyester and 3 mm
thermoplastic liner
: ventilators placed in buildings or sheltered positions
: lava or compost filters to be provided with moistening
installation
: moistening with filtered effluent
13.2 Process water production

- Automatic filtration with mesh size 100 m.
- Filter and pressure pump of process water is to be designed on a minimum of 6 bar
pressure at the end of the distribution system when two taps are opened and all other
continuous consumers of process water are operational.
14 Any other equipment
The specifications in this section apply to all equipment, materials and parts that are to be
implemented in the HRWWTP.
Equipment, materials or parts may that are not specifically described and/or detailed in this
section may be used as well. In that case, the high standards, quality definitions and design
principles defined in these specifications will be effective as if the equipment, materials or
parts were described in this section. The client can refuse design solutions that do not meet
these standards, quality definitions and design principles.
Annex 3: Electrical Specifications

1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
1.1 General
The specification of electrical equipment defines supplies and services and all extra work
required for the plant ready for automatic operation, even if it should not be listed or
specified in detail.
The total electrical engineering is to be based on the relevant data of the offered mechanical
equipment and respect temperatures, altitudes and sudden variations of load and voltage as
may be encountered at site. The requirements for continuous operation during prolonged
periods with a minimum of maintenance have also to be considered. The design has further to
incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all those concerned in
the operation and maintenance of the plant.
The equipment and materials are to be new, of sound workmanship and robust design, and of
grade and quality, suitable for the climatic conditions at the site.
The following services have to be provided:

- Documentation, as-built drawings (both WWTP´s and small hydropower station, SHP)
- Medium Voltage Power Supply
- Compact Transformer Station with medium voltage switchgear and electricity meter
- Low Voltage Power Supply for new Treatment
- Emergency Power Supply
- Low-voltage distribution switchgears for new Treatment
- Equipotential bonding, lightning protection system, over voltage protection
- Instrumentation and Control Systems
- Local control units
- General installations and lighting systems
- Cabling of :
 Medium voltage equipment
 Low voltage equipment
 Measuring and control equipment
 Building installation practice
All electrical equipment, devices and terminals are to be marked durable by engraved
formica labels in accordance with the schematic diagrams. Double letterings are to be
provided, one on the device and equal on the mounting plate. Fused outgoing circuits are to
be marked in plain language as to their function. It is not allowed to stuck the labels, they are
to be attached by screws or rivets.
The lettering is to be done in two languages that means English and Arabic.
The contractor has to provide free of charge all spare parts required for the first year of
operation. For the purpose of a simplified stocking of spare parts, uniform devices of one
manufacturer are always to be used for similar tasks. The number of manufactures coming up
for use is to be reduced to a minimum.
The equipment parts have to leave the supplier’s works carefully cleaned up and preserved
especially as regards the inside. All openings have to be closed up in such a way that no
contaminations of the inside are possible during the transportation and the assembly till the
connection.
The assembly of the electrical equipment has to depend on the construction progress.
Normally, it is not practicable in one step so that interruptions during the assembly have to be
considered. The structural measure can be divided into stages which will be realized at
different times. These requirements are to be met without additional costs.
Upon the end of assembly, all terminals and screwed connections have to be tightened once
again and the corrosion protection and the coating have to be subsequently improved, if
necessary.
1.2 Concept of Power Supply

The energy supply of the Hebron WWTP will be designed as an independent system which
takes into account all new necessary devices, equipment parts, the general supply (lighting,
building installations, etc.) as well as the necessary measuring and control equipment.
The nominal low voltage of 400/230 V will be provided by an integrated compact substation
with transformer, medium voltage switchgear and metering. According to the power factor
the instructions of the power distribution company should be followed, if the power
distribution company has no requirements the PF should be minimal 0,92.
In order to meet a high security of supply even in case of power supply interruptions, an
emergency generator will be permanently installed.
Highest priority is to be given to the safe working and supply conditions when designing and
dimensioning the equipment.
General
The contractor calculates the equipment, determines the necessary space required and
coordinates the structural conditions with the other buildings that will be erected. In view to
the local climatic and environmental conditions, appropriate measures have to be met for
cooling and protection against dust of the equipment.
First of all, the contractor will design and calculate the entire supply services (inclusive the
incoming-feeder and cable) according to the fixed requirements. On the basis of this design,
the final co-ordinations are to be done with the Project Manager, the principal and the local
energy supplier IDEC.
1.3 Concept of Instrumentation and Control Engineering

The concept for the process engineering provides the automatic operation of the wastewater
treatment plant. The requirements on the instrumentation and control engineering have to be
coordinated with this concept. Even in this case, operational reliability and availability of the
equipment are the principal design criteria. It has to be guaranteed that the equipment serves
its purpose unattended and faultless for longer periods under the local operational conditions.
The operation and control of the equipment shall be effected a) via local control units, b) via
manual control elements on the door of the switchgear cabinet or c) by automatic control by a
PLC/SPC System. The reporting and archiving are made by a SCADA System and additional
by printing recorder with a data logger on board. The following structure has to be set up for
each equipment, even if the equipment will be controlled by a sub-distribution switchgear of
the manufacturer. The reports will include but not limited to:
a. Daily flows with max and min hourly flows;
b. Operation hours of critical process components;
c. Energy consumption of headworks, primary clarifiers, biological treatment, pumps,
secondary clarifiers, thickeners, digesters, dewatering;
d. Alarms and warnings;
e. Water quality measurements – DO, pH, EC temperature, etc. This will provide the
average daily the maximum daily and the amount of time that the reading was not in
compliance during the day.
1.3.1 Local manual operating level:

The highest priority has to be given to this operating level. When switching over to the
manual operation local, this level is hardware-like directly linked with the drive so that the
control has no longer any influence.
1.3.2 Central manual operating level (switchgear cabinet):

The second priority has to be given to this operating level. When switching over to the
manual operation on the switchgear cabinet, this level is also hardware-like directly linked
with the control units in the switchgear cabinet, so that the automatic operating level has no
longer any influence.
1.3.3 Automation level:

The automatic control of the equipment or aggregates is realized via the PLC/SPC units in
dependence of the measurements and the relevant operation limits. The automatic control
works directly on the relay and contactor coupling.
1.4 Documentation
In the course of the detailed planning, the contractor satisfies himself about the designed
process structure and accepts the development of all shop drawings on his own responsibility.
The contractor has to prepare and to submit for verification the following documents:
1 Directory of all drawings and further documents
2 Layout (schematic layout, block diagrams, single-line representations )
3 Functional and technical descriptions and specifications of work and services

4 Functional and technical descriptions and specifications of automation network
5 List of components
6 Mechanical design and projection of components
7 Cable calculations
8 Heat exchange calculations
9 Short circuit calculations
10 Load list
11 Selectivity diagrams / analysis
12 Wiring lists
13 Control system function diagram and description
14 List of measuring points
15 Schematics and circuit diagrams
16 Terminal connection diagram
17 External connection diagrams
18 Test records
19 Installation drawings
The complete documentation is to be set up in two languages, i.e. in English and Arabic. A
table of contents with a tabulation of all single drawings, sheet number, drawing numbers and
so forth has to be set up. All drawings have to be provided with a common numbering system
according to DIN 40719, part 2, or DIN 6779, part 1, under inclusion of all individual
devices, building parts, etc.
Furthermore, all drawings are to be delivered on data carriers. Here, current formats have to
be used (DXF-format, Excel, Word, etc.).
The preparation of the documentation has exclusively to be done according to the respective
DIN-standard (item designation, graphical symbols, terminal diagrams, etc.).
If necessary, all records are to be folded in DIN-A-4 format and handed over in appropriate
files.
Depending on their size, the originals have to be made available in wrappers, drawing rolls
and so forth.
Complete list of components, which will be delivered under this contract, belongs to the
documentation. The listing is done on DIN-A-4 lists with item designation, the electrical
drawings, manufacturers, type designation, manufacturer or product number as well as an
indication about wear and durability. A complete maintenance list is to be set up.
Functional and automation descriptions and charts are to be submitted in duplicate for the
start-up. The complete operation under manual and automatic control, the functional
connections and the instructions for fault location have to be presented in this document.
In case of outside cabling, site drawings of cable lines and the reserve conduit system are to
be set up.
1.5 Standard Specifications

The latest version of the DIN/VDE (note of transl.: VDE = Association of German Electro
technical Engineers) standards are first valid for the electro technical equipment. High-
quality, DIN/VDE-proved operating materials – that means devices, generating sets and other
materials – of well-known Western European manufacturers are to be used.
In case, no relevant proposals will be made on behalf of the contractor, the standards
mentioned in the specification are valid. In addition, the following standards have to be
considered:
DIN/VDE standards, especially

- DIN/VDE 01 series
- DIN/VDE 02 series
- DIN/VDE 03 series
- DIN/VDE 04 series
- DIN/VDE 05 series
- DIN/VDE 06 series
- DIN/VDE 07 series
- DIN/VDE 0800 series
- all the Standards issued by the Electrical Technical Commision (IEC), IEEE Standards
- Technical supply conditions of the responsible power supply company
- Guidelines for explosion protection
The total plant and all devices belonging to the scope of service have to correspond at least to
the interference suppression level “N”. Here, the standards DIN 57874 and 57875 as well as
VDE 0874 and 0875 are valid.
The contractor will certify that all electrical equipment’s, operating materials and the
electrical installation meet the relevant standards and local provisions.
2 REQUIREMENTS ON POWER SUPPLY
2.1 Incoming Supply

WWTP
It is the Contractors responsibility to coordinate the technical details of the power supply
connections, meterings, executions and programme of the works with the local power supply
company.
The nominal low voltage of 400/230 V will be provided by an integrated compact

transformer substation with medium voltage transformer and MV and LV switchgear
compartment. The supply and installation of the transformer stations is part of the
Contractors scope of works.
2.2 Medium-Voltage Switchgear and Transformer

This Specifications covers the supply and installation of AC switchgear for 1.000 volts to
20.000 volts systems and motor control gear for 1.000 volts to 6.600 volts systems, three-
phase.
2.2.1 General
The equipment shall be designed for operation from the front, except where necessary for the
isolation of voltage transformers where rear access is required. The package unit / M.V
switchgear should include Metering panel in addition to the incoming and transformer
panels. The LV switchboards should be separated from the MV room/ building.
Materials
Enclosures shall be constructed of folded and welded sheet steel.
Suitably insulated bus bars and earth bars shall be of high-conductivity, hard drawn copper,
and all other main current carrying components shall be of solid copper.
Mounting
The equipment shall be freestanding floor mounted, with the exception of ring main units,
which may be transformer mounted. Fixing shall be by not less than four holding down bolts
for each unit.
Working space
Clear floor space of not less than 1.000mm shall be provided all round the equipment after
allowing for withdrawal of component parts and projecting operating handles. It shall be
possible to close any cover after withdrawal of a truck-mounted breaker in its line of
withdrawal.
Earth connections
Each switchboard shall be equipped with a suitably rated earth bar along its full length with
provision for bonding to the site cables, and a main earth terminal. Ring main units shall be
equipped with a main earth terminal and provision for bonding to site cables. The integral
earthing system for each unit shall be solidly connected to the earth bar of terminal. Bolted
connections shall be tinned.
2.2.2 Testing and certification

Type test
The high voltage equipment shall be type tested by a recognised type-testing organisation
and copies of the type testing certificates shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator.
Routine works test

Routine works test and inspection shall include the following:
- power frequency voltage withstands tests on the main circuit;
- voltage withstands tests on control and auxiliary circuits;
- measurement of the resistance of the main circuit;
- mechanical operating tests;
- any other tests necessary to demonstrate compliance with the Specifications and drawings.
Ambient conditions
Unless otherwise specified the assembly and all equipment provided shall be capable of
satisfactory operation within the temperature limits of -10˚C to 40˚C and relative humidity of
80 %.
Training
The contractor shall provide training in the operation of MV Switchgear and Control Gear in
the manufacturers works. Further training shall be provided on site.
2.2.3 Arrangement
MV switchboards and motor control gear shall comprise either a single unit or a suite of such
units. Each unit shall be cubicle type, single bus bar, with vertical or horizontal isolation.
Extension
It shall be possible to extend the board safely by installing additional units at either end, and
cabling up with existing units live except when making the bus-bar connections.
2.2.4 Earthing facilities

Each unit of MV switchboards shall include integral earthing facilities for both bus bars and
circuit. Each unit of motor control gear shall include a motor circuit earth switch.
2.2.5 Safety shutters

Automatic safety shutters shall be provided to cover the bus bar and circuit spouts during
isolation. They shall be positively driven in each direction and padlockable in the closed
position. A self-cancelling latch shall be included in each shutter mechanism for testing and
maintenance purposes.
2.2.6 Interlocks
Comprehensive mechanical and electrical interlocks shall be provided to prevent any mal-
operation.
2.2.7 Circuit breakers

Circuit breakers shall be of the SF6 vacuum type.
The equipment shall be rated in accordance with the Particular Specifications.
Circuit breakers shall be capable of clearing any fault condition with may occur in the system
without damage to equipment or personnel.
Circuit breakers of the same pattern and rating shall be interchangeable.
Circuit breakers shall be of the vertical isolation, horizontal draw-out pattern, complete with
carriage earthing contact. The isolating contacts shall comprise an appropriate number of
individually spring loaded fingers.
Vacuum circuit breakers shall comprise separate vacuum interrupters that are designed to
prevent welding of contacts and sharp current chopping during fault interruption and
switching of motor loads.
Sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) circuit breakers shall comprise separate vacuum interrupters that
are designed to prevent welding of contacts and sharp current chopping during fault
interruption and switching of motor loads.
Operating mechanisms shall be as detailed in the Particular Specifications and selected from
the following:
- independent manual spring;
- hand charged spring with manual release;
- motor charged spring with electrical release.
All operating mechanisms shall have mechanical ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ indicators in Arabic
language and a manual trip device fitted with means for locking. Hand charged and motor
charged spring mechanisms should have mechanical indicators to show ‘SPRING
CHARGED’ and ‘SPRING DISCHARGED’ in the Arabic language.
Operating mechanisms of the hand charged and motor charged spring types shall be arranged
so that release of the springs to close the circuit breaker can only be achieved by a deliberate
action. It shall not be possible for vibration or mechanical shocks to release the charged
springs. Motor spring mechanisms shall be arranged so that charging is initiated
automatically following a discharge. The necessary limit stops and switches for the automatic
control of the charge, once initiated, shall form an integral part of the mechanism. It shall be
possible to hand charge a motor charged spring mechanism.
Spring operated mechanisms shall be provided with volt-free contacts to give indication that
the springs are charged.
The closing solenoids of dc solenoid operated mechanisms shall be suitable for operation at a
minimum of 80 % of the nominal supply voltage. They shall not mal-operate or cause
excessive vibration when energised at the voltage rate, or when energised from a full wave
rectified source designed for multiple simultaneous operation. Unless otherwise agreed, this
higher voltage shall be taken as 120 % of the nominal supply voltage.
To facilitate maintenance and adjustment of contacts, it shall be possible to ‘slow-close’ the

circuit breaker but this operation shall only be possible in the fully withdrawn position. Any
necessary operating handle or lever shall be supplied.
All circuit breakers shall be provided with interlocks to ensure that:

- the circuit breaker cannot be plugged in or isolated whilst it is closed; attempted isolation
shall not trip a closed circuit breaker;
- the circuit breaker cannot be closed until it is fully plugged in or completely isolated;
- the circuit breaker cannot be closed in the service position without completing the
auxiliary circuits between the fixed and moving portions;
- the circuit breaker cannot be ‘slow-closed’ except in the fully withdrawn position;
- with hand charged or motor charged spring mechanisms, the springs cannot be discharged
until they have been fully removed and disconnected;
- with the circuit breaker plugged into an earthing location tripping shall only be affected
by a lockable manual device on the operating mechanism.
Where mechanical key interlocking is employed, tripping of a closed circuit breaker shall not
occur if any attempt is made to remove a trapped key from the mechanism.
2.2.8 Control and auxiliary switches

Control and auxiliary switches shall comply with the requirements of IEC. They shall be
readily accessible and enclosed in a transparent plastic cover.
2.2.9 Type of tripping

Circuit protection shall operate through a shunt tripping system.
2.2.10 Secondary isolating contacts

Connection of secondary circuits between the circuit breaker and the housing shall be by
means of secondary isolating contacts, having a means of circuit testing with the breaker
lowered.
2.2.11 Protection and instrumentation

Current Transformers and voltage transformers
Current transformers and voltage transformers for protection and instrumentation shall be
designed in accordance with the IEC recommendations appropriate for the application.
Voltage transformers shall be protected by HRC primary fuses, and by secondary fuses in
each relay and metering circuit. The secondary circuits shall be kept as short as possible, and
separate leads used to connect the transformer to each relay and metering burden. A means of
isolation of the primary shall be included and lockable safety shutters shall cover the fixed
isolating contacts when the transformer is isolated.
Voltmeters and Ammeters

A voltmeter and ammeter shall be fitted to each feeder circuit breaker and motor starter
arranged to monitor phase and line voltages and line currents on the load side in conjunction
with selector switches. Ammeter switches shall be make-before-break type to avoid open
circuits in the C.T. circuits.
Protective relays
Protective relays for circuit breakers shall, unless otherwise specified, be of the electronic
type installed in draw-out cases mounted in an instrument cabinet above the circuit breaker
on the front of the panel.
Over current and Earth Fault Protection shall be provided on all circuits.
The protection shall be inverse, extremely inverse, definite time, instantaneous, directional or
non-directional as appropriate to the circuit or circuits being protected. Discrimination must
be provided with the REC´s protection, for all types of fault. The discrimination shall extend
to all points on the system down to the final sub-circuit.
2.2.12 Motor starters

The motor starters shall be of the rating to carry the full load current of its rated current under
the most severe circumstances foreseen. All starters shall be capable of at least 10 starts an
hour at 100% full load torque. The starters shall be dust proof.
Type
Motor control gear shall be of the vacuum interrupter type, arranged for direct on line starting
of the motors specified.
Short circuit protection

Short circuit protection shall be by means of striker pin H.R.C. fuses arranged to open the
contactor on operation of any one fuse.
Isolation
Off-load isolation shall be provided such that it operates only when the carriage is fully home
or completely withdrawn, and with the contactor open.
Overload and earth fault protection

Overload and phase imbalance/single phasing protection shall be provided on all MV motor
starters.
Earth Fault protection shall be provided on all MV motor starters.

Co-ordination
The main fuses, contactor, overload protection and all other components shall be fully co-
ordinated so that no damage or change to the starter’s characteristics shall occur under any
fault conditions.
Additional protection
The following additional protection shall be provided when specified in the pump
Specifications:
- Bearing Temperature Protection. This shall comprise temperature detectors suitably
located to detect an over-temperature in any of the pump or motor bearings. The over-
temperature device(s) shall operate into mechanically latched flag relays. Once operated,
the drive must stop and must not restart until the relay has been reset.
- Water Cooled Motor Protection. Water-cooled motors shall include protection appropriate
to the type of installation. All water-cooled motors shall have Loss of Cooling Water Flow
protection. This shall comprise a flow switch (or switches) and a mechanically latched
flag relay to detect loss of flow of cooling water. Once operated, the drive must stop and
must not restart until the relay has been reset. Closed air circuit water-cooled motors shall,
in addition, have a sensor to detect loss of water into the closed air circuit. The sensor
shall operate in conjunction with a mechanically latched flag relay. Once operated, the
drive must stop and must not restart until the relay has been reset.
- Motor Over-temperature Protection. Over-temperature Protection shall comprise
thermistors in the motor and a thermistor relay in the starter. The thermistor relay shall
operate in conjunction with a mechanically latched flag relay. Once operated, the drive
must stop and must not restart until the relay has been reset.
- Pump Over-temperature Protection. Pump Over-temperature Protection shall comprise a
temperature sensor in the pump casing. This shall operate in conjunction with a
mechanically latched flag relay. Once operated, the drive must stop and must not restart
until the relay has been reset.
- Pump Low Flow Protection. Pump Low Flow Protection may be provided instead of
Pump Over-temperature Protection. This shall comprise a flow switch/sensor in the pump
delivery. This shall operate in conjunction with a mechanically latched flag relay. Once
operated, the drive must stop and must not restart until the relay has been reset.
- Pump Low Suction Protection. Pump Low Suction Protection shall comprise a pressure
gauge, with electrical contacts that open at low pressure, fitted in the suction main to each
pump. This shall operate in conjunction with a mechanically latched flag relay. A timer
relay (0 to 30 seconds) shall be provided to enable the protection to be time delayed
during starting and instantaneous during running. Once the protection has operated, the
drive must stop and must not restart until the relay has been reset.
- Pump High Delivery Protection. Pump High Delivery Protection shall comprise a pressure
gauge, with electrical contacts that open at high pressure, fitted in the delivery main from
each pump. This shall operate in conjunction with a mechanically latched flag relay. Two
timer relays shall be provided. One timer (0 to 10 minutes) shall prevent the protection
operating during starting. The other timer (0 to 30 seconds) shall delay the protection
operating during running so as to protect against nuisance tripping due to transients. Once
the protection has operated, the drive must stop and must not restart until the relay has
been reset.
Motor circuit earth switch

The motor circuit earth switch shall be capable of discharging the stored energy of the
rotating machine system. It shall be manually operated and designed to close independently
of the operator. It shall be possible either to close the switch or leave it open with the unit
isolated, but it shall close automatically on any attempt to withdraw the carriage.
Control transformer
A double wound single-phase transformer with an earthed metal screen between the windings
shall be included in each unit to provide 230 volts control supplies. Primary and secondary
HRC fuses shall be included, together with a neutral link, the neutral side of the secondary
being earthed
Controls and indications

Stop/start push buttons, supply on, motor running and tripped indicator lights, a key operated
auto/off/manual selector switch as appropriate, an hours run counter, and other components
as necessary shall be included on the front panel to provide the method of control required.
Volt free contacts shall be provided for output to SCADA or RTS in accordance with the
Particular Specifications.
2.2.13 Ring main units

Arrangement
A ring main unit shall comprise two ring switches and a tee-off switch mounted within a
single tank together with earthing facilities all operated from the front by means of
independent manual mechanisms.
Insulating medium
The ring main units shall be filled with sulphur hexafluoride (SF6). Gas pressure shall be
monitored, and a low-pressure lock-out device with a means of remotely indicating the
existence of abnormally low pressure shall be included.
Ring switches
The ring switches shall be fault make, load break type with ‘on’, ‘of’, and ‘earth’ positions.
There shall be a time delay incorporated to prevent immediate opening of the ring switch
after closing onto the ‘on’ or ‘earth’ position.
Tee-off switch
Type
The tee-off switch shall be circuit breaker utilising the SF6 medium for arc control with a
separate earth switch, or a fault make, load break switch with ‘on’, ‘off’ and ‘earth’ positions
with HRC striker pin fuses arranged to trip al three phases if any one fuse blows.
Tripping characteristic
The characteristic of the circuit breaker or fuse shall be suitable for the transformer load
being fed from the ring main unit.
Fault indication and protection

It shall be possible to fit an earth fault indicator to the feeder circuit, and, if required by the
Particular Specifications, the indicator shall be included. Other types of protection shall be
included as required by the Particular Specifications.
Circuit earthing
It shall not be possible to close any switch to earth and bus bar simultaneously, or to switch
directly to the ‘earth’ position from the ‘on’ position without first topping at the ‘off’
position.
Cable test terminals

Ring cable test terminals shall be provided, protected by an interlocked cover. Access shall
be available only after the ring cable has been earthed. It shall not be possible to move the
ring switch to the ‘on’ position until the test cables or appliance have been removed and the
cover replaced.
2.2.14 Cable terminations

MV terminal boxes
MV terminal boxes shall be designed for dry type cable joints and sized appropriately for the
cables to be terminated.
Auxiliary circuit termination

Auxiliary circuits shall be terminated in a segregated terminal box.
2.2.15 Padlocking facilities

Facilities shall be provided for padlocking against each individual position of the switchgear
operating mechanisms, against closure of control gear isolation, and against access to cable
test terminals and high voltage fuses.
It shall be possible to padlock earth switches open or closed, and circuit breaker carriage
position selectors in any position or to restrict selection of any position.
2.2.16 Transferable key interlocking

It shall be possible to fit transferable key interlock to each circuit breaker, ring switch and
tee-off switch.
Where transferable key interlocks are fitted, the keys shall be non-copyable and no spare
keys shall be supplied. Transferable key interlocks requirements are included in the
2.2.17 Monitoring facilities

Mechanical
All circuit breakers and switches, including isolating switches, shall have a positively driven
mechanical indicator to show the on/off/earth state of the switch as applicable.
Electrical
A volt-free changeover contact shall be wired to the auxiliary circuit terminal box for each
circuit breaker and switch on/off state, service and earth position, and fault trip. Other states
as defined in the Particular Specifications shall be similarly equipped.
A minimum of four spare auxiliary switches, two normally open and two normally closed,
shall be provided for each circuit breaker and contactor.
Closing and tripping power supplies

Each switchboard shall be provided with a self-contained and dedicated battery backed
auxiliary 30V DC power supply unit as required for switchgear operation, installed within the
substation. It shall be energised from a local AC power supply.
Batteries
The batteries shall be of the nickel-cadmium alkaline type designed for long life minimum
maintenance and continuous floating across a constant voltage supply without emitting
corrosive fumes. Sufficient capacity shall be available for any future extension of the
switchgear that may be stated in the Particular Specifications.
Battery charger
The battery charger shall be an automatically controlled unit designed to maintain the
batteries in a state of full charge. It shall incorporate a current limiting device for protection
against low battery volts and short circuit, and reverse battery protection.
Monitoring
A voltmeter shall be included on the unit to indicate the system condition. A relay with a
tripping supply failed flag, situated at the far end of the switchboard from the tripping supply
unit, shall monitor the tripping supply. A volt-free change–over contact on this relay shall be
wired to terminals within the unit for connection to a tripping supply failed alarm.
2.2.18 Labelling
Each ring main unit, switchboard and control board shall bear an identification label with
letters of minimum size 12mm. Additionally, each individual switch shall bear an
identification label at both the back and front of the unit where applicable with the switch
name and number, with minimum lettering size 8mm.
2.2.19 Substation provisions

Notices
Conspicuous notices shall be fixed to the outside and inside of each substation giving the
following information:
- External. Outside the substation the notices shall state: the name of the substation; the
voltage; a warning against unauthorised entry; how to raise the alarm in case of fire; how
to send for an ambulance; and who keeps the key.
- Internal. Inside the substation the notices shall state: electric shock instructions; a warning
against working without a permit; and any other applicable routine instructions.
- Single-line Diagram. A single-line diagram of the power distribution system shall also be
provided in a glazed frame fixed to the wall of each substation.
Tool cupboard
A wall mounted tool cupboard shall be provided in each substation to store all operating
handles and any special attachments for testing etc.
Logbook cupboard
A wall-mounted cupboard with a drop down writing surface shall be provided in each
substation to house the substation logbook. This cupboard may be combined with the tool
cupboard.
Key safe
Two lockable key safes shall be provided in each substation. Each shall be provided with not
less than 8 hooks. Each safe shall be manufactured from steel, shall be of rigid construction
to prevent being forced open, and be capable of being locked by two padlocks.
2.2.20 Operating handles

One set of operating handles not integral with the switchgear shall be supplied for each
substation. Each handle shall be labelled with details of the substation to which it belongs
and an instruction notice prohibiting its removal shall also be provided.
2.3 Transformers
2.3.1 General
Power transformers 25 KVA and above for installation outdoors shall be oil immersed,
naturally cooled type classified ONAN: Unless specified otherwise, power transformers for
installation indoors shall be of the cast resin type.
When oil filled transformers are used indoors, they shall only be installed at ground level.
2.3.2 Rating
Transformers shall be sized for continuous operation at the maximum rating under the
ambient conditions specified. Allowance shall be made for harmonics where non-linear loads
(i.e. inverters) are connected.
2.3.3 Paint specifications

The paint Specifications shall be suitable for the environment in which the transformer is to
be located. The finish colour shall be the manufacturers standard.
2.3.4 Windings
The primary windings of all transformers shall be closed delta connected. Unless specified
otherwise, the winding configuration shall be Dy11.
The secondary windings of all transformers, except for special applications such as 12 pulse
inverters, shall be star connected with the star/neutral point brought out to the low voltage
terminal box.
The transformer star/neutral terminal shall be capable of accepting cabling as specified in the
The star/neutral point of the secondary windings shall be solidly earthed.
2.3.5 Tap changing

Off-circuit tap changing equipment shall be provided on the primary windings.
Tapping range shall be ±2,5; ± 5 % of the principal tapping.
A padlock facility shall be provided for locking the tap change selector in any chosen
position. A padlock, and one key only, shall be provided.
2.3.6 Transformer cores

The transformer cores shall be manufactured from non-ageing, low loss and high
permeability cold reduced grain oriented steel. Preference will be given to transformers
constructed with mitred cores in which no core bolts are used. Lifting eyes or lugs shall be
provided for removal of the core assembly.
The core shall be earthed at one point only with a readily accessible removable connection
that may be conveniently opened to check the core insulation.
2.3.7 Transformer tanks enclosures

Oil filled transformers
Transformer tanks shall be shot blasted internally and externally to remove mill and welding
scale. Immediately after shot blasting, a primer coat of paint shall be applied to external
surfaces.
Tanks shall be oil pressure tested to at least 34 kN/m2 plus the dead weight of oil contained
under operating conditions.
Tanks shall be provided with a suitably sized earthing connection.

Cast resin transformers

Enclosures for cast resin transformers shall be of sheet steel with either lockable doors, or
access panels fixed by unique fixings requiring a special tool for removal. Where lockable
doors are fitted locks shall be interlocked with the feeder MV Switchgear, to prevent access
unless the circuit is earthed through the switchgear.
Adequate ventilation shall be provided into the enclosure, which shall have a minimum
protection rating of IP 31. Shrouds shall also be provided within the enclosure to prevent an
object being pushed through vents onto live parts.
Lifting facilities shall be provided.
Transformer oil
Transformer oil shall be of the mineral oil.
If the transformer is to be filled with oil on Site, the Contractor shall provide oil and filtration
equipment of suitable capacity.
The Contractor shall supply a schedule of insulating oils and greases that the Contractor
recommends for use with the transformer.
2.3.8 Main terminal boxes

Unless specified otherwise, MV cable boxes shall be designed for dry type terminations, and
shall have adequate space to permit cores of cables to cross over if required.
It shall be possible to remove the cable boxes without breaking the cable seals or oil seals.
The primary and secondary terminal boxes shall be provided with gland plates, to suit the
MV and LV cables detailed in the Particular Specifications. Non-magnetic gland plates shall
be provided where single core cables are specified. All cable entries shall be on the bottom of
the terminal boxes.
2.3.9 Fittings
The following fittings and auxiliary equipment shall be fitted, where applicable, to oil filled
transformers:
- Conservator (transformers of 2 MVA and above).
- Explosion vent.
- Bucholz relay (transformers of 2 MVA and above) with alarm and trip contacts, 2 sets
N/C (i.e. open for alarm and trip conditions, and to be confirmed) contacts for both alarm
and trip settings.; Winding temperature indicator fitted with alarm and trip contacts, 2 sets
N/C, (to be confirmed) or both alarm and trip settings.
- Silica gel breather, weatherproof, complete with first filling of silica gel.
- Two drain valves (in series), each fitted with a padlock facility. Two padlocks shall be
provided.
- Auxiliary terminal/marshalling box, housing all terminals for the alarm and trip contacts
from Bucholz and winding temperature units. The terminal box shall have a degree of
protection of IP 55 W as a minimum. The Contractor shall provide all cabling between

trip and alarm contacts and the terminal/marshalling box.
- Oil level gauge on conservator tank with markings indicating cold and hot oil levels with
drain cock.
- Tank oil thermometer pocket complete with dial type indicating thermometer.
- Wheels, lifting and jacking lugs.
- Skid underbase.
Cast resin transformers

The following fittings and auxiliary equipment shall be fitted, where applicable, to cast resin
transformers:
- Winding temperature indicator fitted with alarm and trip contacts, 2 sets N/C, (to be
confirmed) for both alarm and trip settings.
- Auxiliary terminal/marshalling box housing all terminals for the alarm and trip contacts
from winding temperature units. The terminal box shall have a degree of protection of IP
54 W as a minimum. The Contractor shall provide all cabling between trip and alarm
contacts and the terminal/marshalling box.
2.3.10 Terminal markings

Permanent terminal markings are to be mounted on primary and secondary terminal boxes.
2.3.11 Identification labels

All transformers shall be provided with a white/black/white traffolyte identification label
mechanically fixed to the front of the transformer. Minimum letter size is 15mm.
2.3.12 Works tests

The works tests shall be witnessed by the Project Managerand at least ten days notice in
writing shall be given of the date set for the tests.
- ‘Routine Tests’ as set out in the relevant British or Harmonised European Standard.
- Calibration and functional checks on Bucholtz, WTI and indicating thermometer.
In addition to the above routine tests the transformers shall have been subjected to a
temperature rise ‘Type Test’ as set out in the relevant British or Harmonised European
Standard. A copy of all test results shall be sent to the Contract Administrator.
2.3.13 Site tests

The Project Manager shall witness site tests and at least ten days notice in writing shall be
given of the date set for the tests.
Site testing of transformers after erection and prior to the connection of site cables and
commissioning shall consist of the following tests (where relevant to the type and size of
transformer):
- Insulation Tests of Primary and Secondary Windings;
- Bucholz Relay Calibration and Functional Tests (to auxiliary terminal box);
- Winding Temperature Indicator Calibration and Functional Tests (to auxiliary terminal
box);
- Oil Temperature Indicator calibration Test;
- Dielectric Tests;
- High Voltage Tests on Primary and Secondary Windings with cable links disconnected.
The Contractor shall provide power required for testing purposes. This may involve the
provision of a portable generating set.
2.3.14 Test certificates

Original test certificates together with one typed copy of each certificate shall be handed to
the Project Managers Representative no later than eight days after the tests have been
completed.
2.3.15 Transformer location

Transformers shall be housed in Transformer Rooms or Transformer Pens.
Transformer Rooms shall be designed and constructed to withstand fire, and shall have doors
designed to burst open in the event of an explosion. All doors into the transformer room shall
be external doors, and shall open outwards. No doors or windows shall link into another
building, or room, other than one used for housing transformers. The Transformer Room
shall be vented to outdoors; it must not vent into another room or building. The transformer
shall sit on a concrete pad. A bunded soakaway shall be provided. This shall be designed to
rapidly absorb any oil spillage and to prevent a fire being sustained in the event of the tank
exploding.
Steel rollers or wheels shall be provided for positioning the transformer and left in-situ for
future use.
Cast resin LV transformers

Cast resin transformers for use with invertors, or rectifier equipment, which have both
primary and secondary windings that operate at Low Voltage, may be housed within control
panel assemblies. Access to the transformer must be by means of hinged and lockable doors
that are interlocked with the incoming isolator, fused switch or circuit breaker.
Cast resin MV transformers

Cast resin transformers with either primary or secondary MV Windings shall be housed in
Transformer Rooms.
Transformer Rooms shall be designed and constructed to withstand fire, and shall have doors
designed to burst open in the event of an explosion. Doors into the transformer room may
open into other rooms, but must be at least ½ hour fire rated and open outwards. The
Transformer Room shall be vented to outdoors; it must not vent into another room or
building. The transformer shall sit on a concrete pad.
2.4 Diesel-generatorset
2.4.1 Diesel-engine
The diesel engine shall be a water-cooled inline or V-type four stroke cycle compression
ignition diesel, normally aspirated or turbo charged. If needed, after-cooling and / or air-to-
air-cooling are also permitted.
The diesel engine shall be equipped with lubrication oil, intake air filters, lubrication oil
cooler, gear driven fuel transfer pump, fuel priming pump, gear driven cooling water pump,
cooling water temperature controls and starting motor. The stand-by diesel engine should be
of low fuel consumption and low emissions.
2.4.2 Coupling
The coupling between the engine and generator preferably to be designed as a close-coupled
system in which the generator flange is bolted to the engine flywheel housing. If a conventio-
nal coupling is applied an increased rigidity of the frame is required.
In case a single bearing type generator is applied, the rotor weight of the generator must be
compared to the capability of the selected engine to support this additional load.
A flexible coupling between engine and generator shall be fitted in case of selecting a two
bearing type generator.
The engine to be equipped with a torsion vibration damper. The contractor shall make a
torsion vibration analysis. The calculation to be submitted to the Project Manager.
2.4.3 Generator
The generator shall be a three-phase, 50 Hertz, synchronous brushless 4 pole alternator. The
generator with a revolving field and a solid-state exciter.
The generator shall be of dripproof type and shall be ventilated. The sound proof canopy
shall be provided ( if use nearby residential area) to reduce the noise level otherwise possible
to have the room itself sound insulated to achieve the recommended values. The generator
completes with voltage regulator with compounding system.
The generator shall meet the following characteristics:

- Frequency - 50 Hz
- Voltage - 400 V
- Revolution speed - 1.500 rpm
- Stator winding connection - star
- Number of phases - 3
- Number of wires - 4 (three plus zero / earth)
- Terminal voltage adjustment range - +/- 10 %
The generator shall be designed for a run away speed of 1.2 times the rated speed, and shall
be suitable for unbalanced operation. The generator shall be provided with a superior class of
insulation. A temperature-sensing element shall be fitted to each set of stator windings.
The momentary short-circuit current shall not exceed the value of 3 times the peak value of
the rated current. The end windings shall be properly braced and anchored in order to prevent
injurious deformation in case of short circuits.
2.4.4 Air intake

Generator air intake will be designed as to be able to function in periods of sand storms.
2.4.5 Earthing of the generator

The generator star connections and the frame shall be connected to the safety earthing
protection system.
2.4.6 Earth fault protection

Current transformers shall be fitted to the generator windings, in order to feed the earth fault
protection system in case of an earth fault. The protection system to be supplied and installed
shall be of the "fault-current-circuit"-system.
2.4.7 Speed control

The engine shall be equipped with an electronic, load-sharing governor that controls the
actuator for speed control.
2.4.8 Mounting
The diesel-engine and the generator shall be mounted on a structural steel base. The base to
be secured on the concrete foundation by means of anchor bolts. Between base and
foundation vibration dampers shall be fitted to prevent transmission of vibration to
inoperative diesel-generatorsets.
The vibration isolators shall be rubber or spring type. The isolators to be capable to isolate at
least 80 % of the vibratory forces. A vibration calculation shall be carried out by the
contractor and to be presented to the Project Manager.
2.4.9 Cooling system

An engine-mounted radiator with engine-driven blower-type fan. The contractor shall
provide steel ductwork with flexible connecting section between radiator and duct. To transit
through a wall a grid shall be supplied. The dimensions of the grid such that the maximum air
speed between bars shall not exceed 6 m/s, and the maximum static head, as stated by the
manufacturer is not exceeded.
The radiator preferably to be purchased by the diesel-engine supplier (selection of the

radiator sizing to be done by the engine manufacturer). If the radiator is obtained from a
supplier other than the engine supplier the contractor shall submit a heat rejection calculation.
2.4.10 Diesel engine instrumentation panel

An instrumentation panel shall be mounted on each engine, which comprises of the following
instruments:
- lubricating oil pressure;
- operation hours;
- tacho meter for motor speed;
- battery voltage;
- oil temperature;
- water temperature;
- a key-lockable emergency stop button;
- an "idle - run" switch;
- switches for local manual start.
2.4.11 Batteries and battery chargers

For starting the diesel engine shall be provided with nickel-cadmium batteries. The batteries
to be mounted on a plate on the frame of the engine, nearby the starter motor.
For re-charging the batteries, with the diesel-engine in operation, the batteries shall be con-
nected to the alternator of the diesel engine by means of as short as possible, slack cables.
The alternator has to be equipped with a voltage regulator.
To keep the batteries alive if the diesel-generatorsets are not used for long periods, a battery
charger shall be delivered for every diesel-generatorset. The battery charger to be placed in
the corresponding section of the switchboard as above mentioned.
2.4.12 Fuel daytank

Closed cylindrical steel, inclined at least 3 degrees from horizontal and fitted with drain plug,
inlet and outlet pipe connectors and breather pipe. Tank design has to be double walled. The
tank shall be installed on two hot dip galvanised steel supports and shall be placed in a
concrete reservoir. The concrete reservoir shall have a net volume at least equal to the
maximum volume of the tank.
All inlets of the suction connections inside the tank shall be situated at least 80mm above the
tank bottom.
The capacity of the Fuel Storage Tank shall be sufficient for 36 hours of operation under full
load, but 2 cubic meters minimum. Steel thickness 6 mm. Tank design has to be double
walled.
Has to have replaceable paper air filter or breather caps with air filters.
Have to include float switch, solenoid valve and dial-type alarm on over-fill and low-level.
2.4.13 Fuel lines

Heavy gauge, black seamless steel, to ISO/R65 or equal, treated internally with corrosion
resistant paint and with joints sealed with PTEE tape. Plumber's twine or gasket sealing
compound may not be used.
Fuel feed line to daytank has to have bypass with stop-cock. Size of fuel return line from
daytank to main fuel tank has to be to manufacturer's recommendations.
Filling line of main fuel tank has to be at least as fuel-line-size & external diameter, entering
tank at opposite end to drain plug. Main tank fill and sounding line connections must have
hinged, lockable caps with female threaded bottom inlets.
2.4.14 Expansion joints:

Stainless steel, packless bellows type, suitable for working pressure and temperature of
service, of same size as pipe on which installed, with screwed ends for pipe sizes not
exceeding 50 mm and flanged ends for sizes over 50 mm.
2.4.15 Preservation
The outside of the fuel daytank to be preserved according to code G. The inside of the tank to
be de-rusted and cleaned.
2.5 LV Switchboards and motor-control gear

2.5.1 General
The switchgear and control-gear assembly shall comply with the regulations for prefab low
voltage switchgear and control-gear assemblies as described in the IEC 60439-1.
With the exception of measurements the arrangement of the switchgear and control-gear
assembly shall correspond, as much as possible with the process in an orderly way. The
measurements shall be enclosed in separate cells. Furthermore the drawing list shall explain
which field (or cell) is allocated to equipment of each motor/machine/ valve etc.
The switchgear and control gear assembly shall be assembled from different cells as
described in standards and shall be provided with side panels.
Panels shall close the upper side and the rear side of the assembly. The bottom side shall be
closed with a bottom panel provided with bushing openings for electric cables. A door shall
close the front side of the assembly. Two doors shall be installed in case the width of a cell
exceeds 1.200mm. Each cell shall comprise a mounting plate made in one piece of Sendzimir
galvanised steel.
Each cell (or cell compartment) shall comprise the following items:
- one lighting armature provided with 15 W strip-light mounted to the upper- inner side of
the cell and shall be switched on/off using a door switch;
- one heating element;
- one 230 Vac wall socket with a protection contact.
For every three cells one automatic moisture meter shall be installed. This moisture meter
shall switch on/off the heating elements of these three cells.
For each switchgear and control-gear assembly the Contractor shall provide a heat load
calculation. The Contractor shall provide all necessary provisions to prevent the temperature
in the assembly exceeding 25°C or a lower temperature if prescribed by any supplier of
materials within this assembly.
The heat load calculation shall be based on the following conditions:
- all heat generating equipment within the assembly is operating simultaneously at a
maximum heat load;
- an ambient temperature of 30°C.
Vent holes shall be provided with dust filters, if applicable.
If mechanical ventilation is required this ventilation shall be switched on/off with a

thermostat that shall simultaneously switch off/on. The heating shall be switched off when
switching on the fan.
The power supply for the lighting armature and wall socket within the assembly shall be
connected to the main power supply cable before the main switch and shall be provided with
a circuit breaker. The circuit breaker shall be mounted onto the mounting plate in the supply-
cell (section).
Apparatus connected before the main switch shall permanently have a warning label at a
conspicuous position.
Branching cables shall be connected to connection boxes with warning labels attached to
them.
Each switchgear and control-gear assembly shall have a drawing holder.
Dimensions on drawings of switchgear and control-gear assemblies are for information only.
The Contractor shall determine the exact dimensions required, based on a logical and orderly
arrangement of the internal. For this no price adjustments will be accepted.
Within the switchgear and control-gear assembly a swinging frame shall be used for
apparatus which must be accessible at the rear side.
The main switchgear and control-gear provision shall be provided with a single line diagram.
As a reserve each mounting plate within a switchgear and control-gear assembly shall have at
least 15 % of free space.
For each Switchboard the Contractor shall supply the following equipment:
- electrical grade rubber floor mat 1.000mm wide extending the full length of the
switchboard;
- 2 pairs of electrical grade rubber gloves;

- 2 notices advising treatment for a person suffering from electric shock (on the front and at
the back of the switchboard).
2.5.2 Construction
The construction guidelines of the supplier shall be adopted in case the make and type of the
prefabricated switchgear and control-gear is specified. The scope shall include:
- mounting plates including fastening materials;
- bottom panel;
- coupling materials for coupling of the cells.
If the make and type of the switchgear and control-gear assembly is not specified in the
Particular Specifications the switchgear and control-gear assembly shall be manufactured and
assembled according to the following specifications.
The assembly shall be constructed from a welded box profile framework of steel. The casing
shall be of plate material of at least 2mm thickness. To obtain a rigid construction the edges
of the plate shall be chamfered.
Doors shall be made of 2.5mm steel plate material and shall be provided with stiffeners. Each
cell shall have a mounting plate of 3mm thickness.
Doors shall be provided with internal hinges with a profile of sponge rubber (neoprene),
mounted in a U-profile over the entire outline of the door. The door shall completely close
the assembly.
The construction of the switchgear and control-gear assembly shall be placed on a framework
of U-profiles (UNP 100) in one piece made of hot galvanised and preserved steel.
The assembly used outdoors shall be constructed from stainless steel (AISI 316) of at least
3mm thickness.
Unless otherwise specified a switchgear and control-gear assembly shall meet the following
protection classes:
- closed condition: IP 54;
- open condition: IP 20.
Doors of switchgear and control-gear assemblies shall be provided with a three-point lock
with crank handle and cylinder lock, except for motor chambers of assemblies with
compartments. All locks must be opened and locked with one universal key. The Contractor
shall furnish a total of 6 keys to the Project Manager.
Doors of switchgear and control-gear assemblies shall be provided with a stop mechanism,
which will limit the openings angle of the door to 85°. This mechanism will prevent that this
door can come in contact with another door or with a wall.
If any standard prescribes that the door of the switchgear and control-gear assembly has to be
grounded, a litz wire provided with a yellow/green socket shall connect the door with the
framework.
Cable inlet chambers or cells with cable inlets shall be provided with a bottom plate. Cable
inlet dust seals shall close these compartments. For this aspect the Contractor shall consult
with the Project Manager.
2.5.3 Complementary to compartmentalised switch-gear and control-gear assembly

Cubicles, sections, sub-sections and compartments which have to be accessible during
normal operation, e.g. for replacement of fuses, shall when opened contain no exposed live
parts under normal operational conditions, or shall be provided with means to prevent
opening of doors or covers before disconnection of supply to exposed parts. Access shall be
possible to the load break switch and cable box in any cubicle without having to take the bus
bars out of service.
Adequate means shall be provided to ensure the safe removal of fuses.
Adequate protection in the form of shrouding and/or vertical and horizontal screening
between sections and sub-sections shall be provided to minimise the risk of accidental short-
circuiting and to limit propagation time, if occurring.
The insulation shall be capable of providing adequate and lasting protection under specified
normal conditions and recognised over currents and over voltages.
Compartments for cable termination shall be large enough to allow for spreading and
locating of cores by hand.
The degree of protection between compartments shall be not less than IP20.
The door of each compartment shall be mechanically interlocked with the switchgear
mechanism so that the door cannot be opened when the switch is closed.
2.5.4 Transport and erection

The Contractor shall take into account that it may be necessary to assemble the switchgear
and control-gear unit on site (within the building where it will be placed in). The dimensions
of the access provisions of that building will dominate the maximum size of a prefabricated
part of this assembly.
Each prefabricated part shall be provided with temporary eyebolts, which shall be detachable.
Measures shall be taken to prevent the switchgear and control-gear from any damages during
transport.
After assembly and erection the eyebolts shall be detached and the remaining holes shall be
closed.
Any damages to the coating of the assembly shall be properly preserved. the Project Manager
may require preservation of complete assembly once again if necessary. Resulting additional
costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.5.5 Bus-bars
For each bus-bar system the Contractor shall furnish a certificate of acceptance.
Bus-bars shall be made of electrolytic tin dipped, nickel dipped or epoxy-coated copper and
shall be constructed to resist the maximum expected short-circuit current. This shall be
proven with a typical test certificate.
Bus-bars systems shall consist of three phases and a neutral.
All joints and branches shall be fixed using tapped holes with bolts, nuts and washers. For
this the Contractor shall provide a certificate in which it is declared that:
- the connections will have a minimum lifetime of 10 years;
- items within the bus-bar system are dismountable and replaceable.
- Cells containing supply sections and motor groups shall be provided with a bus-bar,
excluding cells containing only measuring and control equipment.
Bus-bars shall have codes attached to them if required by the local Electricity Company.
Bus-bars shall be coloured according to their standards.
At the bottom of the switchgear and control-gear assembly an uninterrupted electrically tin-
dipped or nickel-dipped red copper earthing bus bar of at least 25x5mm shall be installed.
M6 tapped holes shall be provided every 50mm. Every 25-cm a green/yellow mark shall be
attached to the bar.
In compartmented switchgear and control-gear assemblies earthing bus-bars shall be installed

only in compartments for cable and shall be branched from the main earthing bus-bar.
2.5.6 Wiring
Wiring shall be of flexible assembly flex:
- type VDS 450/750 V for cross-sections  1,5mm;
- type VDMS 300/500 V for cross-sections < 1,5mm.
The following minimal cross-sections shall be applied:
- circuits 230 Vac : 1mm²;
- circuits < 230 Vac : 0,75mm²;
- safety circuits : 1,5mm²;
- secondary circuits of current transformers : 2,5mm².
The selection of any cross-section shall be based on the relating safety provision.
Coloured wiring shall be applied:
- black : wiring AC and DC voltage main circuits;
- (light) blue : neutral.
The following colours shall be applied for control current wiring:
- phase 230 Vac : brown

- switch circuits 230 Vac : black
- neutral 230 Vac : blue
- protection line : yellow/green
- 24 Vdc (plus) : red
- switch circuits 24 V= : violet
- 24 Vdc (neutral) : white
- 24 Vac (alternating current) : grey
- control circuits for interlocking powered
- with an external power supply : orange
The colours yellow, green and light blue shall not be applied for auxiliary current circuits.
Explanatory text for the codes of colours shall be engraved in a white synthetic nameplate.
This plate shall be installed using PVC spreading rivets in a conspicuous position within the
switchgear and control-gear assembly.
Wire ends shall be finished with cable sockets in such a way that an adequate connection
between the conductors is obtained. The isolation of the socket shall enclose the earthing
isolation properly.
The cable sockets shall perfectly fit in the clamps.
Wire ends connected to the bus-bar system shall be finished with ringed sockets.
A maximum of two wires may be connected to one socket if a suitable socket is applied.
Mounting two wire sockets or more on one clamp is not allowed.
Each wire end shall be provided with a code according to the potential-coding system as
described in the attached standard coding diagram. The code shall be attached
uninterruptedly in a conspicuous way and numbers shall be properly fixed.
Coding by using a thermo printing system also is allowed.
Wiring shall be concealed in cable trays with a removable cover. The filling ratio shall not
exceed 80 % taking also future extensions into account. Cable trays shall be placed within 30
- 75mm from equipment in such a way that all codes shall be legible.
Back loops of wiring to the cable tray are not allowed. Loops shall be avoided as much as
possible (laying phase and neutral, + and – according to the same route).
Connecting through two wire ends in one wire line is not allowed.
Wires for measuring signals (0-10 V, 4-20 mA en 0-20 mA) shall be of flexible multi-core
shielded cable or cord.
Wires for intrinsically safe signals shall be of flexible multi-core protected blue clad wire.
Wire beams to doors shall be suspended within a 500mm loop and shall be shielded with
weaved shielding material. Wire beam-ends shall on both sides (door side and assembly side)
be relieved from any stress using proper synthetic brackets. Both brackets shall be installed
as close as possible to the hinged side of the door. Braid wiring will not be accepted.
To avoid motions of cables within the cable tray in case of a short-circuit motor power
supply wiring, limited to one motor, shall be bound together with nylon cable binders.
2.5.7 Selectivity
Safety apparatus shall activate in a regulated selective way.
All safety units of the power switches shall be selected and set in such a way that an optimal
selectivity between the various safety units is obtained. The settings of the power switches
shall meet the requirements of the local Power Supply Company. In a selectivity diagram the
Contractor shall present the switch-off characteristics of all relating safety switches.
2.5.8 Protective devices, labels, terminal blocks etc.

All signal lamps, instrument indicators, switches etc. must be mounted in the door of the
section. All other equipment must be mounted behind the doors on the rear mounting plate.
All live parts shall be protected against accidental contact. Therefore the equipment shall be
installed in the most convenient way and, if necessary, protected with a removable 3mm
thick transparent isolation plate.
Each section door shall have a title legend and each door-mounted component shall have a
function legend.
Each internal component shall have identification and each fuse shall be engraved with fuse
type and current capacity.
All legends shall be engraved in a white synthetic nameplate in the Arabic language. The
colour shall be a white background with black characters. The legends shall be mounted with
chrome plate nuts and bolts with slotted holes to allow expansion of the legend.
All fuses shall be of High Breaking Capacity (HBC) types. One spare fuse for each fuse
fitted in the panel shall be supplied, clipped adjacent to the position in which it would be in
service. A complete scheme of all fuses used in the panel shall be supplied and affixed on a
convenient position in the panel.
Neutral links will not be arranged in fuse holders but shall be arranged in bolted copper links
with one link for each fuse.
Provision for the accommodation of rising armoured cables shall be provided with adequate
cable supports and a form of cable entry seal.
Space shall be provided to accommodate cable glands of the appropriate size for incoming
and outgoing cables. Non-ferric gland plates shall be provided were single core cables are
terminated. All gland plates and trays shall be adequately earthed.
Auxiliary switches for indication, protection, interlocking and supervisory purposes shall be
readily accessible and protected by a transparent dust-proof cover. Adequate secondary
disconnection means shall be included in between the fixed and the moving part of the circuit
breakers.
Fuse switches shall comprise of flush mounted air break switches and fuse units and shall be
rated as detailed.
For each type of fuse in each section a suitable fuse carrier shall be provided. It shall be fitted
on a convenient place inside the section.
All equipment of one group must be mounted in the same section.
Equipment mounted on the rear mounting board with switch knobs/handles on the door must
be equipped with a self-searching coupling.
All terminal blocks for the connection of small wiring shall comprise shrouded anti-tracking
mouldings of melamine phenolic or comparable material with provision for securing
conductors by high tensile screws and clamps.
All terminals for outgoing connections shall be located in a lower level of the section
adjacent to the cable gland trays. Direct termination on equipment such as fuses, motor
contactors or thermal protection relays is not acceptable.
Terminal blocks shall be arranged in such a way that easy access to both terminals and wiring
ends is guaranteed.
Valves Generally
125 psi steam working pressure rating and 200 psi cold water non-shock pressure rating and
type that can be repacked under pressure.
Power and Control Equipment:

To comply with the specification.
Main failure automatic transfer switch (ATS):

Floor mounted, galvanised sheet steel cubicle of equal construction to control cubicle,
comprising two main contactors or circuit breakers and controls necessary for automatic
transfer of power supply from normal source to stand-by source, voltage sensing control
relay and time delay relays to signal generator start and stop, auxiliary switches and
indicating lights etc. as necessary for the required operation of the system. The Automatic
Transfer Switch (ATS) preferable to be part of the L.V switch board rather than incorporated
in the Generator panels.
2.5.9 Specifications Frequency converters

Frequency-converters must meet the requirements IEC 34 and shall comply with the
following specification:
Tension: 3 x 400-Volt ± 10%
Netfrequency: 50 Hertz
Frequency outgoing signal : 0 – 100 Hertz
Power pumps :
Power requirements:
Inputs:
- ‘start/stop” with contact
- ‘reset failure’
- ‘intended value’ (4-20 mA)
Outputs:
- ‘failure and ‘operations’ with contacts
- tension low
- motorcurrent (4-20 mA)
Protection:
- current limitation when overloaded
- thermistor or clixon at the semiconductor
- Adjustment of the following parameters :
- minimum frequency
- maximum frequency
Other requirements:
- RFI-interference-filter
- automatic restart after return tension
- efficiency rate with a minimum of 97% with normal load
Protection class : IP54
Place of installation : in the vicinity of the machine
2.6 Low Voltage Distribution Units

The transformers feed on a common bus bar in the low voltage main distribution switchgear,
which will be arranged in a separate room/building with below arranged concrete cable
cellar. The contractor shall design the main distribution switchgear and coordinates the space
required with the structural demands.
The number of the low voltage sub distribution switchgears to be supplied depends on the
entire concept of the wastewater treatment plant, the spatial arrangement of certain drives and
mechanical equipment. All drives of extension of WWTP will be supplied from the low
voltage main distribution switchgear directly. Some units and drives will be supplied via sub-
distribution by the manufacturer.
That sub-distribution switchgears will partly be delivered as finish-wired system components

of the mechanical equipment. The coordination with the requested service features are part of
the contractor. Extensions which do not directly belong to the scope of delivery have to be
taken into account.
Depending on the final conception, this structure has to be corrected or extended, if

necessary. The respective structure of all distribution switchgears has to be indicated in the
Proposal Forms.
All switchgears are to be equipped with protective combinations for emergency OFF,
according to DIN EN 60204 part 1 (DIN/VDE 0113 part 1).
All switchgears have to be executed by a uniform cubicle system. The environmental

conditions as regards temperature, dust development and, if necessary, aggressive
atmospheres have to be taken into account.
Warning and indicating boards have to be attached in all areas. Especially in switchgear
rooms sign-posting of the escapes are to be effected. Furthermore, these rooms are to be
equipped with CO2-fire extinguishers and portable emergency hand lamps for battery
operation.
In aLl switchgears at least 20 % space reserve has to be provided.
The possibility of proper storage of the respective drawings has to be ensured for each
functional unit in the doors, frames or side walls of the switchgears. The pockets for the
drawings are to be delivered in a form-resistant design with screwed fixing.
Against accidental arcs the switchgear cubicles have to be partitioned. Only the concerned
section may be affected in case of disturbance.
Each section gets an engraved signboard which clearly displays the functional group,
installation place, circuit diagram, terminal strip, etc. These signboards are to be mounted
durable on the outside.
The wiring inside the switchgear cubicles is done by highly flexible conductors. The
stripping of insulation is thermally effected or done by mechanical special tools, according to
cross section. The connection to the devices is effected by insulated terminal ends or wire
end ferrules. Non-insulated connecting systems are not allowed.
The cross section design is to be effected in accordance to DIN/VDE. The lines have to be
provided with 20 % reserve to the nominal current. In main circuits the smallest allowed
cross section is 2.5 mm². Control and measuring circuits will be wired according to the back-
up fuse, whereby 0.75 mm² is accepted as smallest section. For electronic circuits, the wiring
in form and method is depending on the conditions of the manufacturer, however with a
minimum of 0.75 mm².
Measuring circuits are to be installed shielded. The wiring of the control-, signal- and
measuring circuits as well as electronics in-/outputs is done in colour.
All bus bars have to be provided with appropriate markings over the total length according to
their meaning.
All in- and outgoing cables and lines have to be marked with cable-identification labels
inside the switchgear cubicles, main distribution switchgears, etc. The respective cable
number has to be mounted permanently in a respective designation carrier. It is not allowed
to paste the cable numbers on the cables.
Installed operating and supervising devices will be marked outside in plain language with
engraved Formica labels which are to be fixed by screws or rivets.
Connectors inside the switchgears are to be marked clearly and durable on the plug and the
device.
All terminal-, plug-in- and solder tag strips are to be assembled with a 20 % reserve.
The contractor has to ensure a durable protection against corrosion for the entire scope of
delivery. All switchgear cubicles are to be sand-blasted. A priming coat is to be applied
immediately after sand blasting. The following coating on epoxy resin base is to be applied
twice. The colour has to be agreed upon with the Project Manager. Transportation and
assembly damages are to be repaired professionally on the site.
2.7 Lightning Protection and Equipotential Bonding

For personal safety and protection of the equipment an appropriate earthing system is to be
designed and built up by the Contractor.
Foundation earths, ground strips and earth rods have to be provided.
The effectiveness of foundation earths supposes that a certain degree of humidity is kept in
the ambient concrete. Therefore, it is not allowed to apply humidity insulation under
foundation earth.
The resistance of the earthing/lightning system should be measured by the contractor and
should be no more than 1 ohm.
The buildings have to be equipped with a lightning protection system. On the roofs air
terminations are to be installed. Down leads are to be drawn up behind building linings as far
as possible.
All metallic structural elements of outdoor buildings are to be included in the lightning
protection. The earthing systems are to be connected to equipotential bonding strips and
marked in correspondence to their application.
In any case, all metallic casings of electrical equipment which can take up voltages in case of
faults are to be connected with the protective conductor according to DIN/VDE 0100.
As secondary protection of the electrical equipment against atmospheric and switching

surges, overvoltage protectors are to be used. In switchboards there should be an internal
protection against lightning using surge arrestors of adequate kA rating.
The control and instrumentation systems are to be equipped with overvoltage protectors in
their signal input. These are also to be equipped with quick-acting transient protection
devices. It is to be observed that protected and unprotected lines are not running parallel.
Contractor is to describe effective mitigation of over voltage,
The functionality of these protective devices is depending on the careful planning and
execution of the equipotential bonding. All measures of this domain are separately to be
documented including the necessary measurements of the earthing system.
As further criterion for trouble-free operation of the plant and as protection against corrosion
damages, the earthing system is to be kept at zero current, as far as possible. No equalizing
currents due to unacceptable PEN links may flow over the earthing system. This is to be
proved by measures.
2.8 Cables
Cables shall be single or multicore.
All cables shall be of suitable voltage grade, copper cored and manufacturers test certificates
shall be submitted to the Project Manager before the cables are installed. Cables laid not in
the ground shall be N2XY; cables laid in the ground N2KXFG.
All cables used shall bear the manufacturers’ original guarantee and shall be delivered on site
in their original wrapping.
The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the appearance of all cable routing. Before
start of the installation work the Project Manager shall agree to the arrangements. The
highest standards of neatness with respect to the visible cable routing and the arrangement
and alignment of apparatus and fittings shall be observed.
When the Contractor proposes the use of junction boxes in auxiliary control cable circuits for
marshalling a number of cables feeding a common item of equipment, full details shall be
given to the Project Manager. The Contractor shall not continue his activities until the Project
Manager gives written permission. Such junction box shall be of the wall mounting type with
a double set of terminals with cores ferruled and identified in accordance with the schematic
and cable diagrams.
The Contractor shall deliver and install all the necessary cable glands and sealing boxes to
complete the installation. All materials used in the manufacture of glands etc. shall have no
effect on the cable core or armouring and shall be corrosion-proof.
The conductors of each cable shall be taken direct to the terminals of the machine, instrument
and equipment to be connected. Cable ends shall be sealed in suitable cable boxes bolted to
terminal boxes.
Whenever it is necessary to remove the PVC sheathing of a cable, this must be done over a
minimum length. Exposed copper sheath or armouring shall be covered with a PVC tape or
sleeve or any other suitable means. A minimum length of 250mm tail shall be left on all
cables at outlet positions for connection of the components at the outlet.
Multi-core cables shall be terminated with suitable glands and earth bonding washers. Black
PVC shrouds shall be installed on glands. Care shall be exercised to ensure that
manufacturers’ minimum bending radiuses are not exceeded during installation.
For cables of 10mm2 or above terminators shall be executed by means of proprietary

compression lugs that shall be fixed to the cable conductors in a suitable manner by means of
adequately sized crimping tools.
No wire of less than 2.5mm2 shall be used in the installation and no combining or splicing of
cables shall be permitted. Only insulated cables shall be installed in conduit and trunking.
Cabling for different services shall be installed in separate conduits.
Cables shall not be combined in trunking. Cables of different circuits in trunking shall be
taped or bound at intervals of 1.5 meters for easy identification. Cables shall not be packed or
forced into trunking in such a manner as to damage or disfigure the insulation. This
requirement is to be strictly followed.
2.8.1 Rating of cables

The Contractor shall ensure that each cable is of sufficient rating for its normal and short-
circuit fault level conditions. All calculations shall be done under the assumption of
alternating current. To determine the rating and cross section required the following factors
must be considered:
- motor rating;
- short circuit fault level;
- conditions of ambient temperature relevant to the method of cable laying;
- voltage drop;
- voltage drop in motor circuits at the motor terminals, due to starting;
- over-current settings of circuit breakers;
- disposition of cabling whether in the air, ducts, cable trays, or in the ground;
- number of cables and distance between cables in the same duct or tray.
The total voltage drop from the connection from the Electricity Company to the terminals of
the equipment under the most severe circumstances foreseen may not exceed 5 % for the
power installation and 2 % for the lighting installation.
The Contractor shall submit details of the cable size calculations to the Project Manager and
shall not proceed until the Project Manager gives written permission.
2.8.2 Location and routing

The position of all equipment and the routing of the cables shall be shown in the diagrams on
the drawings, but the exact locations and routing shall be agreed with the Project Manager
before installation.
Where a number of cables approach a particular item of equipment, special care must be
taken to ensure that the cables finally approach the equipment from a common direction and
in an orderly and symmetrical manner.
The Contractor shall be responsible for measuring the required cable length. The cable shall
be supplied in a suitable length and be continuous throughout its routing. Cable combining
shall not be permitted without written permission given by the Project Manager.
Excessive bundling of cables in large conduits shall not be permitted and the Contractor shall
not exceed the requirements laid down in the local or international Standard and Regulations.
The Contractor shall provide, for terminating cable conductors in excess of 30 A current
carrying capacity, a pressure operated mechanically crimped cable lug or terminal socket.
2.8.3 Legends on cables

Cable numbers shall permanently identify each and every cable at each end and every 5
metres. Cable markers shall comprise of black PVC oval markers and be fixed axially by UV
resistant nylon tie wraps. Cable markers shall also be installed at entry and exit points of
ducts and walls exits and all necessary other points to trace the route of the cable.
In addition, control cables and individual conductors shall be identified by means of suitable
permanent ferrules, bearing the same number at both ends. Conductor identification shall
occur at every point of termination using a suitable system of ferrule markers. Numbering
shall be read from the terminal outwards on all conductors. At those points of interconnection
between wiring where a change of number cannot be avoided double numbers shall be
provided on each wire. This identification shall also be provided on the wiring diagrams were
the change is made.
2.8.4 Cable entrances and transits

All cable entrances, transits and jacket pipes are part of the order.
Cables entering or leaving buildings shall be laid in ducts that are sealed at the point of entry
in the building. Sealing shall be done with a Multiple Cable Transit (MCT). Care must be
taken that the PVC sheathing of the cables shall not be damaged. All entrances and transits
must be watertight.
Cables connected to switches, motors, switchboards etc. shall be entered as follows:

- MV cables (N2XSEFGbY) cables conforming to the instructions of the MV switchgear
manufacturer;
- LV cables (N2XY and NYFGbY) by means of cable glands, which allows the rubber ring
to be screwed tight to the cable;
- jacket pipes shall be firmly connected to the housing.
All cables shall be either clipped to walls, ceilings or building structures or run in trays or
ladders. All cable hangers, cleats, saddles, brackets and similar supporting devices shall be of
a suitable type and of adequate strength for the cables they are supporting. They shall be non-
ferrous and so treated that they can withstand the conditions on site without corroding.
All cables, whether in or out of sight shall run vertically, horizontally or parallel to adjacent
walls, beams or other structures.
Spacing of clips, saddles and cleats shall be in such a way that sagging during the lifetime of
the cable will be prevented.
2.8.5 Field cable work, excavation and backfilling work

Before commencing the excavation work the Project Manager shall be informed with a set of
drawings from routing of the underground cables of the Contractor.
The concerned drawings shall indicate:

- the exact location of the cable run;
- the width and the depth of the cable trenches;
- the ground levels;
- the location of road intersections;
- details towards road intersections, cable intersections and the mutual distance of cables;
- the location of the jacket pipes (including reserve pipes).
The cable trenches shall be cleared of stones and other sharp / hard objects. On the base of
the cable trench a sand bed of 100mm thick shall be applied on witch the cables are laid.
The minimal horizontal distance between low voltage cable work and the remaining cable
work is 200mm.
If it is necessary to layer or cross cable work, comply with the following requirements:
- between the cable layers a compacted sand layer of 50mm shall be applied;
- the top cable layer shall be supplied with a cover of 600mm compared with the ground
level;
- all other specified depth measures in this document towards field cable works shall be
applicable to the cable trenches.
The cables shall be laid zigzag in the cable trench, reckoning with 10 % excess length.
Signal cables in the ground must have 25 % reserve cores, with a minimum of 2 cores.
The backfilling of the cable trenches will be sustained in a suitable manner. The first 100mm
clean sand cover shall be carefully compacted on the cables. The backfilling shall be applied
with the original material cleared from stones and other hard / sharp objects.
All other cable trenches shall be provided with a red warning ribbon 300mm under ground
level provided with the text “ATTENTION: ELECTRICITY CABLES” in the Arabic
language.
Field cables that have crossings with pavements, shall be provided with synthetic material
jacked pipes sections. Likewise two reserve synthetic material jacked pipes at cable depth
shall be applied. The reserve synthetic material jacked pipes shall be watertight and provide
with detachable covers on both sides. The jacked pipes shall exceed each side of the road
with 1 m, be provided with nylon pull cord and have a diameter of Ø 110mm.
Cables that are not directly connected shall be capped in a watertight manner.
The revision drawings of cable routings shall comply with the following requirements:
- the exact location of the cable trenches compared to a reference point;
- the depth of the cable trenches;
- the cross-section of the cable trenches which indicates the position of the cables;
- details of road intersections and crossings of cable work;
- the locations which do not have the minimum ground covering of 600mm;
- the locations of the coupling sleeves.
2.8.6 Cables not in the ground

Single cables along walls shall be put in galvanised steel or grey impact proof Hostalith pipes
of sufficient diameter. One cable per pipe, the pipes shall be laid without elbows. Interrupt
the pipe circa 100mm before a bend and continue the pipe circa 100mm after the bend.
The beginning, end and each 300mm of the pipes shall be attached with hot dip galvanised
pipe brackets. Cables outside the building shall be laid in stainless steel pipes. The pipes shall
be mounted with stainless steel pipe brackets.
Vertical protection tubes that are mounted outside shall be carried out till 200mm under
ground level. The protection tubes shall be drained out to ensure that water doesn’t stay in
the tubes. The topside of the protection tubes shall be sealed.
The horizontal assembly of four or more cables near each other shall be laid in a cable tray
and vertically assembly of the cables shall be attached to a cable tray.
Cables in horizontal assembled cable trays can be laid unattached under the condition that
cables are laid in a proper and orderly way and are joined together. If the cable trays exceed
an angle of 30o the cables shall be attached each 400mm with cable ties or hot dip galvanised
pipe brackets.
Bushings of cables guiding systems shall be provided with rubber bushings or coupling nuts.
Cables in cable trays or cable ladder shall be laid with the required bend radius in the cable
trays and sufficient cable spreading shall be guaranteed.
Outgoing cables of a cable tray or cable ladder shall be protected to prevent damage
throughout the complete length of the cables. Inside a prefabricated galvanised steel
assembly system shall be used for the cables. This system shall also be used to assemble
main switches and wall mounted devices that are not near the machine. If necessary the
cables shall be adequately supported and relieved of tensile strain.
2.8.7 Tests on cables during manufacture

All cables under the Contract shall be subject to Routine Tests in accordance with the
relevant manufacturers’ specifications. Cables shall not be accepted on Site for installation
until certificates giving proof of compliance with the Specifications and data of tests have
been received presented to the Project Manager. A Certificate shall be required for each
drum. Tests carried out on every drum at manufacturers premises shall include:
- insulation resistance test;
- core continuity and identification;
- conductor resistance test.
2.8.8 Tests on cables during installation

During the installation at the Site the Project Manager shall carry out inspections of the
Works to ensure that the standards of workmanship meet the Specifications. In the event of
any part of the cabling installation failing to meet these requirements, the Contractors
supervisor or foreman shall immediately be informed and the Contractor shall remedy the
deficiency to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
After completion of various parts of the installation the Contractor shall provide a Test
engineer, labour and materials to demonstrate to the Project Manager that the cabling has
been correctly installed.
It shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor to test the insulation of the cables, both
between conductors and earthing during installation with a ‘Megger”; ‘500 Volt hand
generator.
The Contractor shall test all cables after installation to ensure correct phasing out of the
conductors, continuity of the conductors, sheaths and armouring over the whole length of the
cable.
2.8.9 Cable trays and cable ladders

Cable trays, cable ladders and covers shall be of hot dip galvanised (layer thickness between
50 and 150 m) sheet steel of at least 1mm thick. The cable trays shall be carried out with
stand-up edges of at least 60mm high with perforated slots in the bottom and bends. The
cable ladder shall be executed with stand-up longitudinal ribs of at least 15mm high. The
inside of the bends shall be fluidly. The trays outside shall be carried out in stainless steel or
synthetic material as agreed with the Project Manager.
For separation of low-voltage current / measuring signal cables and power supply cables a
partition wall shall be applied.
The bends, tees, couplings, reducers etc. shall be of the same manufacture as the tray.
The accessory curvatures shall be wide enough to fit the cables smoothly in the trays with the
required bending radius.
Cable ladders shall be suitable for attaching cables with cable brackets.
Maximum cable loading on a tray shall be in accordance with manufacturers’

recommendations. The complete installation shall have around 25 % spare capacity on each
tray.
Cable trays and cable ladders shall be suspended with typical brackets and shall be suitable
for a lateral attachment of the cables. The attachment of the tray shall be adjustable.
The suspension and support distance shall be in accordance with manufacturers’ regulations
of the cable tray or cable ladder. The maximum deflection shall not exceed 5mm with the
maximum cable loading on the tray.
Deviations in suspensions shall be consulted with the Project Manager.
Cable trays and cable ladders shall be neatly aligned.
Cable trays and cable ladders shall be carried out with covers unless they are situated in
creeping spaces or nearby ceilings. The covers shall be attached with metal clips.
All suspensions and mounting devices, nuts, washers etc. shall be made of the same material
as the concerned cable tray or cable ladder.
Damages to cable trays or cable ladders including suspension etc. shall be recovered in
conformity with the conserving regulations.
2.8.10 Conduit systems

Conduit systems shall comply with IEC 423 standards. All conduits and fittings shall be hot
dip galvanised. Non-metallic conduit systems shall not be used without the written
permission of the Project Manager.
Conduits shall be run on the surface or sunk as specified and be neatly arranged. Ways shall
be provided for additional conduit boards at all switchboards. The sizes of conduits used
shall be determined by the number of cables to be drawn in as scheduled or as specified. But
in no case conduits less than 20mm diameter shall be used. Sunk and concealed conduit
systems shall support fittings independently of any false ceiling.
All conduits shall be installed in a suitable manner and arranged with adequate ventilation
and drainage where necessary. The Contractor shall ensure that conduits drawn-in boxes and
junction boxes are of sufficient capacity to allow all cables plus 15 % to be drawn in or
withdrawn.
Conduits shall be of the screwed pattern, galvanised by the hot dip galvanising process. All
conduit fittings not carrying accessories shall be supplied with flat covers fixed in position
with round head brass screws.
Surface run conduits shall be supported in such a way that a maximum distance of 1,00 metre
between two points shall not be exceeded.
Where possible all bends and sets shall be formed in the conduit itself. Factory made bends
are only installed after written permission of the Project Manager. The radius of bends shall
not be less than specified in the standards.
Standard junction or adaptable boxes shall be provided at all junctions and at sharp changes
of direction in addition to any special positions to be called for by the Project Manager on
site. Inspection couplers may be used in long runs to facilitate drawing in cables.
Particular care must be taken to ensure that no water is allowed to enter a conduit. However,
they shall be arranged with adequate ventilation and drainage where necessary as directed by
the Project Manager. Inaccessible junction boxes shall not be allowed.
Fixing to surfaces of walls shall be by means of spacer bar saddles securely fixed by screws.
Where conduits are concealed or laid in structural floors they shall be held in position with
substantial fittings, make and type to be presented topresented to the Project Manager.
For the different voltage levels of the cables, separate compartments must be provided.
Conduit entries shall be protected against ingress of moisture or debris during installation.
The complete conduit system shall be cleaned from loose matter and dirt before cables are
drawn in.
Where conduits connect to switch boxes, drawn-in boxes and the like, the conduits must have
a machined faced socket screwed on to the end which, when tightened, is flush with the
outside of the box. The conduit is then to be secured to the apparatus by means of a screwed
conduit socket in order to make a sound and tight mechanical joint.
Conduits shall be bonded to earth.

2.9 Protective Measures for Safety

The complete power system of both wastewater treatment plants are to be built up as a TN-S-
system. TN-C or TN-C-S-systems are not allowed with regard to the low frequency
electromagnetic compatibility. In order to prevent unacceptable currents on the earthing
system, no PEN-links are allowed in the sub-distribution switchgears. The de-energized
earthing system is an acceptance criterion of the plant.
As protective measure for safety, the TN-S-system has to be equipped with over current
protective devices and residual-current-operated circuit-breakers.
3 REQUIREMENTS ON INSTRUMENTATION AND

CONTROL SYSTEMS
3.1 General
The instrumentation and control includes all services for an automatic operating mode of the
wastewater treatment plants. All services for control, measured-data acquisition and
observation are to be included in the Contractors scope of supplies. After finishing, all plant
has to run automatically on the PLC.
Centralized fault and alarm indications are to be linked to an existing emergency call central
unit. The valence of the indications is to be determined in the customer requirement
specification. These specifications are to be done by the contractor in agreement with the
designer of the plant.
Essential interventions are to be displayed to the staff by the small mosaic-type panel on the
switchgear cabinet. The logs of the main measured-data will be displayed on the SCADA
System and printed out by the printing recorder and stored there on an integrated Data-
Logger. After the appropriate training, the operating staff has to be able to observe and
control the procedures independently.
Deliveries of electro technical configuration as parts of the mechanical equipment are to be

integrated in the overall concept, where appropriate with the necessary extensions.
Cabling, cable racks, cable ducts, tubes, conduits and all fixing materials belong to the scope
of delivery.
For measuring- and control cabling, shielded cables or lines have to be used. The shielding
has to be put on single ended in the terminal boards.
All sensors, flow-rate meters, probes or other equipment parts delivered by the Contractor or
other suppliers have to be fail-safe and have to be connected, adjusted, calibrated and put into
operation.
Every measuring circuit, actuator and control loop is to be checked. The check list is to be
provided with the name and signature of the test engineer as well as the date.
All equipment shall be guaranteed to be suitable for operation under the prevailing
environmental conditions and shall be designed:
- such that routine and occasional maintenance throughout its life shall be a practical
minimum, compatible with the preservation of maximum reliability;
- to withstand the electrical, mechanical, thermal and atmospheric stresses to which it may
be subjected under operational conditions, without deterioration or failure;
- and constructed to the highest available standards of manufacture, reliability, accuracy

and repeatability.
Where more than one component or item of equipment is supplied to perform a particular
function, all such items shall be identical and interchangeable.
The degree of protection for equipment enclosures shall be in accordance with IEC529 as
follows:
- IP54 for indoor applications;
- IP65 for outdoor applications;
- IP68 for transducers and other equipment mounted within valve or meter chambers or
similar locations.
All equipment cabinets shall have lockable doors and any ventilation openings or louvers
shall have effective dust filters. Any cooling fans shall have fan failure alarm contacts
connected into the relevant alarm system.
External equipment shall be protected from direct sunlight by a well-ventilated cabinet,

canopy or other suitable type of sunshade.
Equipment in air-conditioned locations shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient

temperatures up to 45°C. External equipment and internal equipment not in air-conditioned
locations, shall be rated for continuous operation over the ambient temperature range 0°C to
50°C. The above temperatures make no allowance for local temperature rises due to
operation of the equipment itself or by adjacent equipment.
All equipment shall be protected against aggressive and/or corrosive environment.
All instruments shall be installed in the locations shown on the Contractors drawings and
where connections are to be made into pipelines, each installation shall be complete with the
necessary manifolds, isolating valves, drain valves, test points, sample cocks, etc., as
appropriate. In all cases it shall be possible to isolate and remove the instrument, and fit
check gauges, or take samples as appropriate.
All analogue transmitters, receivers and direct wire transmission systems shall have a signal
level of 0/4-20 mA or 0-10 V.
All panel indicator lamps shall have a lamp test facility.
3.2 Testing and commissioning

All equipment, including panels, consoles, pillars and all separate items shall be subject to
inspection and full function test at the manufacturers works. All equipment, sequences,
programs and the like shall be proved and demonstrated to the Project Manager as being in
accordance with the application requirements.
Test Certificates, including characteristics covering the full operating range of measured
variable against output signal, shall be provided for all instruments or sets of equipment
measuring primary quantities.
Site testing shall include demonstration of the satisfactory operation of each system
individually and the complete system as whole, before the start of main plants
commissioning.
As an integral part of the setting, to work and commissioning procedures, the Contractor
shall ensure and demonstrate that all items of transmitters, trip amplifiers, meter relays,
controllers, timer etc.) have been adjusted to achieve optimum control of the process or plant
operation.
3.3 Cables and cabling

All cables necessary for the complete installation shall be provided and installed in
accordance with the requirements of Section LV switchboards and motor-control gear.
All signal and control cables (also for PLC) shall be shielded.
All multi-pair cables, except those connected to remotely controlled actuators, shall include a
minimum of 25 % spare cores. This spare capacity shall be over and above any cores that
may be required for proposed future installations or extensions. Spare cores in addition to the
above may be required in some cables to cater for the spare alarm channels.
There shall be a separate multi-core cable between each motorised valve actuator and the
local distribution enclosure or control panel. All such cables shall include a minimum of 2
Nos. spare cores except those associated with actuators having remote control, which shall
have a minimum of 12 Nos. cores.
All cores, even spare cores, in the cables shall be connected to terminals at both ends.
Cabling for chlorination shall have insulation material that shall not deteriorate in the
presence of any of the gases stored. Conduit shall be of a heavy gauge high impact PVC type.
Joints shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of gas into the conduit system.
3.4 Instrumentation and control

All instrumentation, monitoring and control circuits and equipment shall be supplied at a
voltage not exceeding 55 volts to earth. These supplies shall be from one of the following:
- A battery/charger unit, typically of 24-volt nominal output, but under no circumstances
exceeding 48 volts nominal output.
- A double wound transformer having a fused primary, a 55-0-55 volt secondary with the
centre point earthed and each secondary line fused.
- A transformer/rectifier system, comprising a double wound transformer with a fused
primary and a secondary having one end earthed, together with a full wave rectifier unit
incorporating voltage stabilisation if necessary. The mean voltage of the rectified output
shall not exceed the nominal output from the instrumentation battery/charger units.
Equipment such as battery/chargers, no break and control power supplies, inverters etc. shall
be supplied as necessary to maintain the required electrical supplies to essential
instrumentation, monitoring and control systems which are to be kept in operation during a
mains power failure. Such essential equipment comprises flow measuring, indicating,
recording and integrating equipment or as otherwise detailed in the application clauses.
3.5 Remote control supplies

On remote control/indication circuits (such as occur with valves, penstocks, etc.) DC
voltages and relays shall be used in all cases where the cable capacitance could be of
sufficient magnitude to maintain AC relays in an energised state. The Contractor shall be
responsible for establishing where such DC operation of control/indication circuits is
required and for providing a suitable supply at locations where instrumentation
battery/charger supply is not available.
3.6 Construction of panels

All panels, cubicles, cabinets, consoles, and desks together with any other types of enclosure
(excluding motor control centres and switchgear) that form part of the instrumentation,
monitoring and control installation shall comply with the requirement and terminals.
Removable earthed, metal gland plates shall be provided to accommodate all

incoming/outgoing cables, and shall be fitted not less than 250mm above the floor level.
All equipment, other than front of panel items, shall be mounted on racks or fixing bars and
not directly onto the panels.
Each enclosure shall be vermin proof and dust proof with the necessary provisions made for
natural or forced ventilation.
All panel construction and arrangement details shall be checked before manufacture, and
panels shall be subject to inspection.
Panels for indoor use

All instrumentation, monitoring and control panels, designed for use within buildings shall be
constructed of prime quality, cold rolled and annealed mild steel or zinc coated sheet steel, of
adequate thickness welded and braced to form a rigid structure. The minimum sheet steel
thickness shall be 1.6mm, with panel fronts and desktops being thicker (2,00mm minimum)
to provide the necessary strength to prevent buckling. Panel fronts shall be flat and free of
bow and ripple. External corners and edges shall be rounded to give a smooth overall
appearance. No design involving the use of externally visible assembly bolts or screws will
be accepted. All floor-standing enclosures shall be constructed with a 60mm deep plinth
arranged to provide a recessed kicking strip at the front.
Equipment mounting panels shall be not less than 2mm thick and shall be strengthened
and/or braced to avoid any distortion or vibration. Equipment mounting plates and brackets
shall if necessary be hinged to provide quick and easy access to equipment securing screws,
terminals and wiring.
Doors and access panels shall be adequately braced or strengthened to avoid any buckling or
twisting. Doors shall be of folded and welded construction mounted on lift-off hinges, with
one hinge engaging before the other. Where necessary, removable access covers secured by
quick release fasteners shall be provided. All doors and access panels shall close onto
neoprene or soft rubber sealing strips which shall be held in place mechanically and not by
adhesive. All doors shall be lockable. Where “walk-in” panels or structures are provided,
these shall be fitted with lockable car type handles operable from inside even when locked.
The external colour shall be as advised by the Project Manager.
The design and construction shall be such as to provide an enclosure of superior quality,
which shall match all other panels in the same location in style, appearance and finish, and
have environmental protection to IP54. In cubicles for PLC (Programmable Logic
Controllers) the temperature shall be between + 10°C and + 30°C. The relative humidity
shall not exceed 85 %.
Panels for outdoor use

All instrumentation and control cubicles, kiosks etc. designed for outside use shall be
manufactured having walls of double skinned, resin-bonded fibreglass, with a totally
encapsulated infill of non-corroding alloy.
Box sections shall be encapsulated into door edges and doorframes. Hinges shall be of high
tensile, non-corroding alloy with stainless steel pins and through fixing bolts. Large plane
surfaces shall have adequate reinforcing to ensure rigidity.
The doors shall be complete with latching handles and locks. All door catches and locks shall
latch onto steel reinforced surfaces. The doorsill shall be protected by a non-corroding alloy
material.
Colour impregnated gel coats backed by coloured resin shall be used to ensure maintenance
free and “colour fast” finishes. The finish colour, both internal and external shall be glossy
white.
Door-mounted meters and transparent windows shall be of glass, which shall be protected
from harmful direct sunshine by orientation or other suitable means.
All internal equipment shall be mounted on supports built into the fibreglass structure. Fixing
bolts through the skin will not be accepted.
Each cubicle shall be constructed to provide environmental protection to IP55.

Panel wiring and equipment

The requirements of this Clause shall apply to all cubicles, desks cabinets, mimic diagrams
etc. being provided as part of the instrumentation, monitoring and control installation, but not
motor control centres or switchgear.
Panel wiring
Panel wiring shall be carried out using cables installed in a neat, systematic manner, securely
fixed and supported on insulated cleats or trunking, and arranged so as not to impede access
to any internally mounted equipment.
Analogue signal cables and DC control cables at voltages not exceeding 48 volts (nominal),
may be run together in the same cable bunch or trunking; but these cables shall be run
separately from all other cables. In any cubicle, panel, or structure which is not fully enclosed
(such as some mimic diagram structures), all cabling which is or may be at a voltage in
excess of 55 volts (nominal) to earth, shall be run in conduit.
For all cables, the sizing shall be fully adequate for the possible maximum loading, and
derating shall be applied as appropriate for cable bunching and ambient temperature.
Identification ferrules shall be fitted to both ends of all wires, and shall be of the full circle
type, threaded onto the cable such that all numerals are in line, and read outwards from the
terminal.
Where stranded conductors are used, each end shall be fitted with a sleeved termination lug.
Terminations shall be restricted to one wire per terminal.
Cabling to door mounted equipment shall be protected in flexible cable conduit(s) and
created to form a loom with a loop of adequate length to allow easy door opening without
causing strain to the components or cable.
Sharp edges of cubicles, trunking, components etc., which may be in contact with cables,
shall be protected to avoid damage to cable insulation.
Panel protection
All terminals and all level parts (on equipment) which are or may be at a voltage in excess of
55 volts (nominal) to earth, shall be enclosed by a protective cover and carry a warning label
stating the actual voltage.
For panels and enclosures covered under this section, the maximum potential between any
two points within the panel or enclosure shall not exceed 250 volts.
Terminals and equipment which are supplied from other sources and which may remain live
when the panel isolators are opened shall be adequately protected and clearly labelled to this
effect.
Adequate fuse protection for circuits and sub-circuits shall be provided and arranged such
that any fuse failure causes the minimum disruption to controls and indications, and that any
such fuse failure cannot crate an unsafe operating condition. Fuses shall be of the HRC
cartridge type and be mounted within fuse carriers. Ceramic fuse carriers and buses will not
be accepted. All neutral links shall be bolted connections.
Panel earthing
A copper earthing bar shall be provided and bonded electrically to the main frame. It shall be
provided with suitable brass screw terminals for the connection of the metal cladding,
instrument frames, gland plates, cable tray, the armouring of all incoming cables and the site
earthing system.
Panel heating
Each enclosure shall be fitted with one or more heaters to prevent condensation and assist
ventilation. The heaters shall be so arranged and located that no deterioration can be caused
to any equipment or wiring. The surface temperature of any part that may be accidentally
contacted shall not exceed 65°C. The heating circuit shall be supplied via a fuse, an isolator
and an Off/Auto switch. In the “Off” position the heater shall be isolated and in the “Auto”
position a thermostat or humidistat shall control the heater. All switches and controls shall be
mounted within the enclosure.
Panel equipment
A fuse and isolating switch shall be provided for each incoming AC and DC supply.
Where instrumentation, monitoring or control equipment is to be operated on AC supplies

derived from within the cubicle, a 110-volt (55-0-55) control transformer (or transformers)
shall be provided for this duty. Each microprocessor and/or programmable logic controller
shall have its own control supply transformer.
Each cubicle other than terminal enclosures shall be complete with a distribution unit
providing an adequate number of fused outlets at 110 volts (55-0-55) for possible future
requirements.
Cubicles for PLC shall be equipped with a two-way outlet 220 V, and a fluorescent lamp 18
W, automatically switched-on when the door is open. Both the outlet and the lamp shall be
fused in the LV distribution board.
All items of equipment mounted within the enclosure such as relays, electrical transducers,
indicators, recorders, switch fuses, terminals etc. shall be arranged so as to provide easy
access, be securely fixed and clearly labelled as to their function, designation, and where
applicable, the voltage.
Where meters and recorders are mounted on vertical front panels, the height of the
instrument centrelines shall be within the following limits above finished floor level:
- indicating meters: 1,35m min. and 1,90m max.
- recorders: 1,45m min. and 1,85m max.
3.7 Terminals and termination

Terminals for the connection of all incoming/outgoing cables shall be provided and comprise
anti-tracking mouldings of melamine, phenolic or comparable material fitted on a purpose-
built mounting rail. The conductors shall be secured by screw clamps or bars, but not pinch
screws.
All terminals used on circuits not exceeding 55 volts (nominal) to earth, excluding power
supplies and auxiliary drives, shall be of the disconnecting link type.
Every terminal shall carry a clear identity number. Terminals at different voltages shall be
grouped separately, and each group shall be clearly labelled with its respective voltage and
function. Each group shall be segregated with a proprietary barrier to give a physical
separation of 2mm minimum.
Transparent protective covers complete with a voltage-warning label shall be provided on all
terminals that are, or may be, at a voltage in excess of 55 volts (nominal) to earth.
Sufficient terminals shall be provided for terminating all cores of all cables (including spares)
associated with the particular enclosure. The number of terminals shall be sufficient to cater
for all anticipated requirements plus 20 per cent spare terminals and 30 per cent spare
terminal rail. A minimum of 5 terminals and 50mm of spare terminal rail shall be provided.
Terminals for connecting to incoming/outgoing cables shall be mounted vertically wherever

possible, arranged to provide easy access and to enable ferrule numbers to be read without
difficulty. Direct termination onto such equipment as distribution boards, fuses or miniature
circuit breakers is not acceptable.
Terminal rails shall be back plate mounted only. The mounting of terminal rails on the sides,
bottom or top of cubicles shall not be allowed under any circumstances.
3.8 Labels
All external labels for panels and other items where specified shall be of clear perspex, batch
engraved, filled and back painted the same colour as the panel. All labels shall have
chamfered edges and shall be fixed with chrome plated screws or adhesive with two-
component glue (epoxy).
All internal labels shall be of engraved multi-layered plastic fixed with chrome-plated
screws.
Every internal component shall be identified and each fuse shall be labelled with the
identification reference, fuse type and fuse current rating.
Panels with doors not interlocked to an isolator giving complete protection shall have a label
affixed to the door: “DANGER LIVE TERMINALS” with black letters on a yellow
background. The relevant voltage shall be stated.
All labels shall be in Arabic and in English.
A list of labels with Arabic and English inscriptions shall be submitted to the Project
Manager for information before manufacture.
All socket outlets shall be clearly labelled to indicate their respective operating voltages. All
junction boxes shall be clearly labelled to indicate the relevant cable reference numbers.
3.9 Control battery / charger equipment

This Clause covers the requirements for batteries and chargers, specified in the application
cluses for the operation of control, instrumentation, alarm and monitoring equipment, but not
for switchgear tripping/closing batteries or other special function batteries.
Where alternative AC supplies are available, provision shall be made for taking the supply to
the battery charger from either source (e.g. form either side of the bus-section switch) with
facilities for automatic change-over from one source to the other in the event of failure of the
supply source.
The battery and charger unit shall where possible form a composite unit and be housed in a
single sheet steel, floor standing cubicle having adequate ventilation and separate
compartments for the batteries (lower compartment) and chargers (upper compartment).
Access to the batteries shall be via lockable, hinged doors, and to the chargers via removable
covers.
Batteries
The batteries shall be of the nickel cadmium type having alkaline electrolyte with a nominal
output of 24 volts. The batteries shall be of adequate capacity to maintain full operation of
the relevant load equipment plus an additional 10 per cent, for a period of 2 hours during
mains failure, assuming a normal charge condition at the start of the mains failure.
The battery cases shall be made of polypropylene or similar translucent material such that the
electrolyte level can be seen through the battery casing.
All batteries shall be suitable for the intended service under the prevailing site conditions
without excessive gassing or loss of electrolyte.
Battery chargers
Duplicate chargers, one “Duty” and one “Standby”, shall be provided and mounted on their
own respective chassis in the upper cubicle compartment.
The controls for each charger shall be mounted on their own respective mounting plate and
these, together with all controls and indicators projecting through the front of the upper
compartment, shall be positioned at a height not exceeding 1.800mm from floor level.
The front panel of each charger unit shall include:

- 1 No. “ON/OFF” mains isolator;
- 1 No. Lamp to indicate “AC Supply On” (White);
- 1 No. Charger Ammeter;
- 1 No. Lamp to indicate “Boost Charge” (Red);
- 1 No. Lamp to indicate “Float Charge” (White);
- 1 No. Lamp to indicate “Charger Failed” (Amber);
- 1 No. Lamp test push button.
Each charger unit shall also be provided with:

- 1 No. “Float/Boost” selector switch mounted internally;
- 1 No. Set of AC supply fuses;
- 1 No. Volt-free contact for duty charger failed alarm;
- 1 No. Volt-free contact for low DC output voltage alarm;
- 1 No. Volt-free contact for loss of DC output voltage alarm;
- the above volt-free contacts shall open under fault conditions and be wired to a terminal
block.
The following items of common equipment shall also be provided and mounted on the front
panel:
- 1 No. DC output voltmeter, scaled to indicate regions of “Low”, “Normal” and “High”
output voltages, by the use of differently coloured sectors;
- 1 No. DC output isolator switch;
- 1 No. DC output Ammeter;
- 1 No. Duty/Standby selector switch (labelled “No. 1 Duty, No. 2 Standby/No. 2 Duty, No.
1 Standby”).
The battery charger unit shall also be provided with one set of full capacity rated output DC
terminals and fuses.
In the event of failure of the duty-selected charger, the standby charger shall be connected
automatically and contacts for the remote alarm indication shall be provided. The alarm
indicating failure of the duty charger unit shall remain on until the failed charger has been
repaired and returned to operation.
Reversion form “Standby” to “Duty” charger shall be a manual operation. The chargers shall
be of the solid state constant potential type, and shall be designed to regulate the charger
output voltage to within ± 1 per cent for a mains input voltage variation of ± 6 per cent.
The DC terminal voltage shall be further regulated such that under “Float” or “Boost” charge
conditions the DC voltage does not rise to more than 10 % above the nominal.
The charger unit shall also be provided with both short-circuit and reverse polarity
protection.
The charger when selected to “Float” shall be capable of restoring the battery to 75 %
capacity within 7-8 hours.
Under “Boost” conditions the charger shall be capable of restoring a fully discharged battery
to 75 % capacity within 4-5 hours.
The cabinet shall be manufactured in accordance with the relevant clauses but with additional
treatment to the interior surfaces to prevent any corrosion by battery chemicals and with
environmental protection to IP32.
For each batter/charger unit the Contractor shall supply a set of maintenance tools, equipment
and spares, and for non-sealed batteries this shall include a resealable, 2-litre container of
electrolyte, a pouring device and hydrometer; all of which shall be contained and secured
within the charger cabinet.
The Contractor shall fix inside the cubicle a wiring diagram indicating and identifying all
outgoing terminals, components and fuses.
Special precautions shall be taken in the sizing of the battery and charger for seasonal
conditions, and all equipment shall be adequately rated for the prevailing site conditions.
3.10 Plant control and indication circuits

The requirements detailed in this Clause refer specifically to control/indication circuits
associated with power-actuated valves and penstocks, but shall apply equally to all other
plant controls/indications where similar conditions occur.
Although two or more auxiliary or limit switches may initially be set up to give simultaneous
operation, it is impossible to ensure that such simultaneous operation still be maintained over
an extended period. The use of duplicate auxiliary or limit switches to provide the same
effective status signal to avoid the possibility of a system malfunction due to the above will
not be accepted.
Where a valve or penstock status signal is to be used in more than one circuit (e.g. control
and indication), one set of auxiliary or limit switch contacts only, together with a slave relay
if necessary, shall be used to initiate the operation of all such circuits.
4 Measurements
4.1 Electromagnetic flow meters
Electromagnetic flow meters shall be in accordance with the following:
- Meters shall be of the short form, having a modulated, direct current excitation and
inherent total zero stability.
- The power consumption shall not exceed 16 watts per 100mm of diameter.
- The output shall be 0/4-20 mA or 0 – 10 V and the system accuracy shall be within ± 1 %
or actual flow across the full range of the instrument.
- A test certificate shall be provided for each instrument.
- The field coils shall be fully encapsulated.
- The equipment shall be guaranteed to be suitable for the ambient and process liquid
temperatures.
- Each flow meter primary shall be supplied with a neoprene liner and electrodes of the
material best suited to the particular process fluid.
- Primary units shall be suitable for accidental submergence to a depth of 3 metres.
- The Contractor shall provide primary units having flanges in accordance with the relevant
Specifications relating to pipes, flanges, fittings, etc.
- The Contractor shall ensure that all primary units are rated to withstand the maximum
possible fluid pressure, including possible surge pressures.
- Each primary unit shall be supplied and installed complete with a dismantling joint to
permit removal for repair and inspection.
- The flow meter equipment shall be supplied complete with amplifier (converter), drive
unit (if applicable) and all cable for connecting between the components. The termination
box shall be sealed to IP68 minimum.
- The amplifier/converter shall be fully screened to prevent interference from adjacent
equipment and shall be remote from the electrodes.
- The amplifier/converter shall incorporate voltage stabilisation to ensure maintenance of
system accuracy with a supply variation of ± 10 %.
- The Contractor shall provide a length of pipe having the same length and being flanged as
the flow meter primary, to replace the meter should this have to be removed for repair.
- The flow meter primary shall incorporate an electrode (or electrodes) to detect when the
pipe is not full. The detector output shall control circuits within the converter to interrupt
the analogue signal and initiate an indication of the “pipe not full” condition.
4.2 Ultrasonic in-line flow meter

Ultrasonic flow measuring equipment for “in-pipe” applications shall operate on the phase
difference technique employing 2 Nos. ultrasonic probes displaced longitudinally and
mounted on opposite sides of the pipe to detect the difference between the upstream and
downstream flight times. The equipment shall include acoustic transducers and a transmitter,
and shall be installed complete with all necessary fittings, cables and connectors.
The acoustic transducers shall be non-intrusive and arranged so that they may be removed
without shutting down the process line.
All materials in contact with the process liquid shall be suitable for use in the specified
application.
All items of equipment attached to the pipe an/or pipe insert shall be of non-corrosive
material, designed to withstand continuous submergence to a pressure of 3 m head and be
guaranteed to be suitable for the temperature and process pressures, including maximum
possible surge pressures.
The transmitter shall process the signals from the acoustic transducers and shall:
- provide an output of 0/4-20 mA or 0 –10 V proportional to flow;
- be suitable for direct or wall mounting with up to 30 m of cable;
- incorporate contacts to initiate an alarm in the event of malfunction;
- incorporate temperature compensation;
- include facilities for field checking and zero adjustment.
The complete system shall operate within as accuracy of ± 1.5 % of full-scale deflection over
the full ambient temperature range. Attest certificates shall be provided for each set of
equipment.
4.3 Venturi tubes and nozzles

Venturis, nozzles, etc., shall be supplied with flanges in accordance with the relevant
Specifications relating to pipes, flanges, fittings, etc.
Each primary unit shall be supplied and installed complete with a dismantling joint to permit
removal for repair or inspection.
The sensing lines shall be installed with a continuous slope to avoid blocking by
condensation in the pipe. Stopcocks shall be provided close to the tapping points.
Case material shall be cast iron.
4.4 Ultrasonic level measuring equipment

Where ultrasonic level measuring equipment is specified in the relevant application clause,
level measurement shall be accomplished by the use of non-contact, echo-time measuring
equipment operating at ultrasonic frequency. The equipment shall transmit pulses, which are
reflected back to the sensor from the surface of the liquid of which the level is being
measured.
The equipment shall consist of a sensor incorporating both transmitter and receiver, together
with a separate control unit.
The equipment shall be provided with automatic temperature compensation, and shall be
suitable for operation in the designated application under the specified climatic conditions.
The sensor shall be suitable for mounting in the open, or within an enclosed tank, and shall
be totally enclosed to IP68.
The control units shall incorporate facilities for adjusting independently both zero and span,
and shall have an output of 0/4-20 mA or 0-10 V proportional to level.
The overall accuracy of the level measurements shall be within ± 1,0 % of the instrument
span.
The connection between the sensor and control unit shall be via commercially available
screened cable, and the equipment shall operate with up to 150 metres of such cable.
The Contractor shall ensure that each equipment is suitable for the application, particularly
with regard to the blocking distance and transmitted beam angle or cone.
4.5 Installation of ultrasonic level equipment

Each ultrasonic level sensor shall be installed on a robust and rigid structure provided for the
purpose under this Contract. The structure shall include a means of levelling the sensor so
that the transmitted beam is perpendicular to the liquid surface and shall provide a safe and
easy access to the sensor for servicing and maintenance.
The Contractor shall provide, where applicable, a canopy above the sensor and/or the control
unit to provide a protection from direct sunlight.
4.6 Ultrasonic open channel flow measuring equipment

Where ultrasonic equipment is specified in the application clause for measuring flow in open
channels, the equipment shall be supplied and installed in accordance with the above Clause,
except that in this application the control unit shall be microprocessor-based incorporating
algorithms for converting level to flow and shall provide a 0/4-20 mA or 0 – 10 V output
proportional to flow. The system accuracy shall be within ± 1,0 % of the instrument span
over the range 5 % to 100 %.
4.7 Turbidity Meters

The turbidity meters provided shall be of robust construction mounted on substantial hot
dipped galvanised brackets. Turbidity shall be measured using nephelometric principles and
shall include for sample processing and gas bubble removal, if necessary, to provide a
reliable reading for the application.
The Contractor shall provide the necessary sample pumps, pressure reducing valves, isolation
and control valves for the sample pipework from the tapping on the water pipe through the
instrument to a drain point to be agreed. All high-pressure connections to the process,
isolating and pressure reducing valves shall be bronze. Pipework shall be plastic coated
copper. Low-pressure pipework and fittings shall be uPVC. Pipework and wiring shall be run
on traywork provided under this contract.
Each transmitter shall give a local display (either analogue or digital) of the turbidity in NTU
and shall provide an isolated 4-20mA output for monitoring by a PLC and SCADA system.
Accuracy to be at least +/- 1 % of range.
4.8 UV-absorption
UV-absorption shall comply the following as a minimum:
- purpose measurement: continuous in-line measurement of UV absorption of water at 254
nm (UV monitor);
- UV254 is used as surrogate parameter for the colour of the raw water;
- dual-beam measuring method (for high stability);
- range UV254 absorption: 0,005 – 0,250 cm-1 (colour 0 – 40 Hazen), average 0,16 cm-1;
- accuracy: 0,001 cm-1.
4.9 pH
pH monitors shall comply with the following as a minimum:
- be of the submersion, insertion, or flow through type;
- produce a current output proportional to measured pH in the sample;
- have a measuring range 0-14 pH;
- be accurate to +/-0,05pH;
- incorporate automatic temperature compensation;
- include separate high and low setpoints, which are adjustable over the entire measuring
range. Setpoints shall have indication lights on the unit face;
- be enclosed in an IP65 enclosure;
- be capable of cabinet, panel front and wall mounting;
- include a local 4 digit LED display.
4.10 Chlorine Measurement

Chlorine residual analysers shall comply with the following as a minimum:
- continuous on-line analysis type;
- produce a current output proportional to free or total chlorine residual in the sample;
- have field selectable range (i.e. 0-0,1mg/l, 0-1,0mg/l, 0-5,0mg/l);
- be accurate to +/-1 % of range;
- comprise fixed gold and copper electrodes that are automatically cleaned;
- include separate high and low setpoints that are adjustable over the entire measuring
range. Setpoints shall have indication lights on the unit face;
- be enclosed in an IP65 enclosure;
- be capable of cabinet, panel front and wall mounting;
- include a local 4 digit LED display.
Process analysers are generally complicated systems and shall be properly applied and
installed in order to ensure a high degree of accuracy with trouble free operation.
Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations shall be adhered to.
For installations in areas containing Chlorination Equipment the following precautions shall
be taken:
- exposed copper and copper-based alloys shall be avoided;
- cable exit and entry to the area shall be at high level and cable ways sealed.
Every effort shall be made to keep sensitive electrical/electronic equipment out of chlorine
storage and chlorination rooms but where this is unavoidable care is to be exercised in the
choice of materials used.
Residual Analysers
Free residual chlorine values shall be continuously monitored by duty and standby analysers
with a minimum accuracy of plus or minus 2 % of span (± 0,01 mg/l). The operating range of
the analyser shall correspond to the maximum chlorine residual with a capability to withstand
chlorine concentrations up to 10 times its maximum range and a recovery time of less than 5
minutes following out of range excursions.
The chlorine residual indicator/transmitter shall incorporate local indication with high and
low level alarm initiation adjustable either side of the set point anywhere within the range of
the instrument. Panel mounted adjustable electronic timers shall inhibit short-term variations
not constituting a true alarm. The transmitter shall provide a fully isolated signal for remote
control and indication.
The sample water inlet to the measuring cell shall incorporate isolating and pressure reducing
valves, a flow controller, and flow rate indicator to ensure the sample water enters the cell at
the correct flow rate and pressure. In addition, the sample water inlet arrangement shall
incorporate a strainer to prevent foreign particles entering the measuring cell.
Where necessary, pH buffer facilities in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions shall
be provided.
4.11 Weight Measurement

The load cells shall be positioned such that each load cell shall bear the same amount of
weight.
The outputs of the individual load cells, before filling the vessel shall be measured. The
outputs shall be similar. As a general rule, an imbalance of less than 10 % is satisfactory. If
the outputs differ greatly, this indicates an overload situation on the load cells exists. This
shall be corrected by placing shim plates underneath the load cells with the lower outputs.
For hoppers, vessels and silos, it is important that the centre of gravity lies within the locus of
the load cells and they are in the same horizontal plane.
Where excessive vibration or shock is anticipated, it is necessary to incorporate anti-vibration

mountings.
All connections to the vessel shall be decoupled by the use of flexible couplings.
Other instrumentation required for control of the process shall be provided as necessary.
4.12 Differential pressure transmitter

Each differential pressure transmitter shall be of rugged construction, suitable for the
application and:
- have an electrical output of 0/4-20 mA or 0 – 10 V proportional to the differential
pressure;
- be capable of withstanding a 100 % overload (i.e. twice the differential pressure required
for full output) without sustaining damage;
- have a fully adequate static pressure rating to withstand all possible surge pressures;
- have stainless steel sensing elements;
- HAVE independent span, zero and damping adjustments;
- have an accuracy of within ± 0,5 % of span, repeatability within ± 0,2 % of span and an
dead band not exceeding 0,2 % of the span;
- be operable on a 2-wire system;
- incorporate an output indicator.
Each installation shall be supplied and installed complete with:

- sensing lines of stainless steel, grade 316S31;
- a 3- or 5-valve manifold as required;
- test point(s) with separate isolating valve(s).
4.13 Pressure transducer level measuring equipment

Pressure transducer level measuring equipment shall comprise a strain gauge or differential
transformer type pressure transducer, a controller/transmitter and be complete with all
necessary cable, conduits, etc., as detailed below. Differential transformer transducers are to
be preferred for very low ranges.
Each pressure transducer shall be enclosed within an all welded, stainless steel case not less
than 19,0mm in diameter and shall:
- have a single moulded cable which is securely bonded to the stainless steel case and
comprising electrical connections, venting tube, strain cord or wire within the cable tot
obtain the necessary strength, and an outer covering suitable for the application;
- be suitable for continuous immersion in all process fluids likely to be met in water
applications including potable water, distillate, wastewater, raw sewage, primary sludge,
secondary sludge, thickened sludge and final effluent;
- be constructed so that the sensor diaphragm is protected against damage by shock, debris,
etc., without restricting the transference of pressure changes from the surrounding
medium;

- withstand a continuous overpressure of up to 400 % without sustaining permanent
deformation or calibration change.
The controller/transmitter shall:

- be suitable for mounting within a control panel;
- accept the signal from the transducer and provide a 0/4-20 mA or 0-10 V output
proportional to level (gauge pressure), for indication and control;
- include independent zero and span adjustments;
- have a system checking module which will simulate the transducer output.
The complete system shall provide an accuracy of within ± 0,75 % of span, with a linearity
better than ± 0,1 %.
4.14 Pressure transducer installation

For installations in sumps and for similar applications where the depth is in excess of 3 m or
where the available headroom over the sump is limited, the pressure transducer shall be
installed within a 100mm dia. GRP tube to provide protection against mechanical damage to
both the transducer and the cable. The GRP tubing shall have an adequate number of holes
and/or slots to allow it to fill and drain as the level varies. The tubing shall be fixed to the
sump wall at intervals not exceeding 2.5 m.
For installations where the sump depth does not exceed 3 m, the sensor shall be supplied and
installed as a rigid assembly comprising a stainless steel tube, a tube holder (both as used for
control electrodes) and the transducer, with the cable passing through the tube. The
transducers shall be a close fit, located completely within the tube at the lower end. The
assembly shall be fixed at not less than two places to the sump wall and installed with the
bottom of the tube just clear of the sump invert.
For all installations the cable between the transducer and the controller/transmitter shall be
one continuous length, and kept as short as is reasonably possible. This cable shall be run in
conduit and installed well clear of all AC mains and power cables.
All fixings, brackets, etc. as required for the complete installation shall be provided.
4.15 Electrode level control equipment

Electrode level control equipment shall consist of a control unit or units and a number of
electrodes, together with all brackets and fixings as required for the complete installation.
For all applications, sufficient electrodes and associated controls shall be provided to prevent
“hunting” between the two states.
The control unit shall:

- have all live parts at a voltage in excess of 55 volts to earth completely shrouded and
fitted with warning labels;
- have an output relay with double pole changeover contacts of suitable material for the
application;
- have a light emitting diode mounted on the front panel to indicate when the relay is
energised;
- have a lockable sensitivity control potentiometer;
- be capable of operating at a distance of up to 100 m from the electrodes;
- have a voltage on the electrodes not exceeding 25 volts.
- The electrode and holder shall comply with the following;
- The electrode holder shall be of the heavy duty type, fully weatherproof, constructed form
die cast aluminium and provided with a mounting flange having a minimum O.D. of
25mm a wall thickness not less than 2,6mm. The lower end of the electrode shall be
sealed and the upper end shall be locked to the insulator by a brass clamp.
- Cable entry shall be via a standard screwed gland entry.
- Each electrode shall be firmly secured to avoid any movement due to turbulence or flow
velocity. The securing brackets shall be of the same material as the electrode and shall be
installed above top water level.
- Where the electrodes pass through securing brackets; they shall be protected by heat
shrunk sleeving extending from 300mm above the bracket to 300mm below the bracket.
4.16 Float switches

Float switches shall be the pendant type with the float suspended on a flexible cable, such
that with the float free of the liquid the float and cable hang vertically, but with a rising liquid
level the float shall rise and tend to invert.
The float shall be of robust design and comprise a mercury switch having changeover
contacts encapsulated in hard plastic foam and connected to a 3 core cable. The whole
assembly shall be covered and hermetically sealed in Hypalon or similar material.
With the tilting action that occurs on rising level, the contracts shall change over, but there
shall be a dead band between opening one contact and closing the other, during which period
both contacts shall be open. This dead band shall operate over an arc approximately 20°
either side of the horizontal.
The contacts shall be rated for a minimum of 5 amps at 100 volts. The voltage on the
contacts shall not exceed 55 volts (nominal) to earth.
In all applications the installation shall be complete with suitable means of preventing the
float (and lead) from movement due to wind or liquid turbulence.
Where float switches are to be used in applications under which they may be submerged
during normal operation (e.g. pump control and/or low level alarm); they shall be attached to
a weighted chain to minimise movement due to turbulence and also to provide means of
raising the units for maintenance and repair. All brackets, fixings, etc. as necessary for the
complete installation shall be provided. The chain/float assembly shall be installed such that
the point of suspension is not less than 400mm from any side wall.
4.17 Flow switches in pipe

Flow switches for installation in pipe lines shall:
- be suitable for the maximum possible flow rate;
- withstand reverse flow without sustaining damage;
- have the operating set point adjustable over the range 20 % to 100 % of the normal flow;
- have change-over contacts rated at 5 Amps 110 VAC (50 Hz) or 1 Amp at 24 volts DC;
- be complete with all fittings necessary to carry out installation in the pipeline, including
waterproof cable glands;
- have a metal housing compatible with the pipe material and rated for the system
temperature and pressure;
- be suitable for the application and process fluid in respect of the principle of operation and
the material of the wetted parts.
4.18 Pressure switches

Pressure switches shall be of either the bellows or bourdon type, and shall be rated to
withstand the maximum possible surge pressures.
The switches shall:
- have a signal pole change-over contact, with the contact material and rating suitable for
the application;
- have a calibrated set point adjustment which shall be lockable to prevent any movement
due to vibration;
- have a switching differential adjustable between 5 % and 25 % of the set point adjustment
range;
- have all wetted parts compatible with the process fluid;
- be housed within an enclosure to IP55 or IP67 according to location.
4.19 Indicating meters and meter relays

All indicating meters and meter relays for use in control and instrumentation panels, control
desks, mimics etc. shall comply with this Clause and the appropriate sub-clauses. All meters
and meter relays:
- shall comply with IEC 51 to accuracy Class 1 for instruments having a DC input and
accuracy Class 1.5 for instrument having an AC input;
- except those having digital indication, shall have a linear scale, with clear graduations and
markings;
- shall have the units of the measured variable and any multiplying factor clearly marked on
the scale plate or its equivalent;
- shall be flush mounting with matt or semi-matt black bezel;
- shall match all other instruments on the same panel or on similar panels in the same room
as regards style, finish and appearance;
- intended for installation within a control room shall be fitted with anti-glare or low
reflectivity glass;
- intended for installation on an inclined surface shall be suitable for the application and
when so mounted, the accuracy shall be maintained over the full range;
- accept input signals of 0/4-20 mA or 0-10 V.
Digital indicators
The digital indicators shall have a 4-digit display with floating decimal point and shall:
- display positive and negative readings;
- display digits approximately 14mm high;
- have standard DIN format 96 x 48mm;
- accept a 0/4 – 20 mA or 0-10 V input and display in the relevant engineering units;
- have a sampling rate not less than 10 per second;
- include a remotely initiated display hold facility;
- be powered from the 24 Volt battery supply.
Meter relays
Meter relays shall comply with the requirements as detailed in the Particular Technical
Requirements, but shall additionally incorporate one or two adjustable set point contacts for
alarm or control.
The set point shall be visible and adjustable from the front and the signal output shall be via
volt-free change-over contacts of suitable material and rating for the application.
4.20 Trip amplifiers

Trip amplifiers or analogue alarm relays may be single or dual set point instruments as
required and shall:
- accept input signals of 0/4-20 mA or 0-10 V;
- have switch outputs with changeover contacts of suitable material and rating for the
application;
- have a set point (or points) which is infinitely variable over the whole input range by
means of a lockable knob calibrated 0-100 %;
- have a dead band or hysteresis of not more than 3 % of input span.
The units shall be located within the cubicle and mounted so that they are easily accessible
for adjustment of set points.
Trip amplifiers required to continue in operation during a period of power failure shall be
supplied from the instrumentation system battery, either directly or via an inverter.
4.21 Integrators and counters

The integration equipment shall comprise an integrator and a 6 digit numerical display unit or
counter.
The integrator and counter may be combined into a single unit, or the integrator may be
mounted separately from the numerical display unit.
The counter shall be flush mounting with a matt or semi-matt bezel, and shall match all other
instruments on the same panel as regards style, finish and appearance.
If a counter reset facility is provided, this shall be arranged such that accidental operation is
impossible, and should preferably not be located on the front panel.
The integrator shall accept a 0/4-20 mA of 0-10V signal proportional to flow.
Integrators required to continue operating during a period of power failure shall be supplied
from the instrumentation system battery, either directly or via an inverter.
A low signal cut-off facility shall be provided on all integrators, and this shall be adjustable
over the range of 0.5 % to 5 % of the flow.
Integrated flows shall be in cubic metres and this, together with the measurement designation
and any multiplying factor, shall be clearly marked on the face of the counter, or on a
matching label immediately below the counter.
Unless otherwise stated in the application clause, the multiplying factors shall be as follows:
Flow Range multiplying Factor
0 - 5.000 m3/day x1
5.001 - 50.000 m3/day x 10
50.001 - 500.000 m3/day x 100
Alternatively
0 - 60 l/s x1
61 - 600 l/s x 10
601 - 6.000 l/s x 100
The Contractor shall submit for information of the Project Manager details of integration
rates and multiplying factors for all integrators to be supplied under the Contract.
Predetermining counters
Where a liquor sampler is used and/or where indicated in the application clause, the relevant
integrator shall incorporate a predetermining counter having a minimum of 3 digits. The
predetermining counter shall be on the front of the instrument with thumb-wheel setting
facilities and shall operate such that a relay with changeover contacts is energised when the
pre-set quantity is reached. The relay shall remain energised for approximately 1 second,
following which the counter shall automatically reset and start counting again.
4.22 Control and interposing relays

All control and interposing relays, except those used for lamp switching, shall operate on a
supply not exceeding 55 volts (nominal) to earth and shall:
- operate reliably over the range +10 % to + 20 % of the normal supply voltage;
- be of the plug-in type, complete with plastic cover and retaining clip;
- have vacuum impregnated coils and be suitably treated for operation under the specified
environmental conditions;
- have contact material suitable for each application;
- have relay bases of the front connected, screw clamp type;
- incorporate indication of energising/de-energising.
All relays operating on a DC supply shall have a surge suppression diode connected directly
across the coil.
Mixed voltages shall not be connected to the contacts of any relay.
All relays and the associated wiring shall be protected by suitably rated fuses.
Relays having different contact arrangements or coil voltages shall not be interchangeable. A
permanent means of identification shall be fixed to each relay base and this identification
shall be in accordance with the circuit diagram reference.
Where voltages from a remote source (i.e. voltages which cannot be readily isolated from
within the cubicle), are connected to a relay or associated terminals, fuses etc., the Contractor
shall ensure that all such live parts are fully shrouded and that appropriate warning notices
are fitted.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that AC relays cannot be held in due to
capacitance effects on long switching lines. Where such a possibility exists, a DC supply
shall be provided.
4.23 Discrepancy switches

Where illuminated control switches are used to provide discrepancy indication, the circuits
shall be arranged such that the lamp is energised via a flasher unit. This flashing discrepancy
indication shall operate if the switch is not fully activated or if the controlled item is not in
the position shown by the switchblade.
The switches shall be of the type having a rotary action to select the operation and a push
button action to initiate the operation.
All discrepancy switches shall be included with a lamp test facility.

4.24 Illuminated push buttons and status Indicators

All lamp indicators (except discrepancy switches) located on instrumentation and control
panels, mimics, desk or consoles shall:
- be of similar size and appearance;
- have bezel dimensions of not less than 24 x 36mm;
- incorporate two lamps;
- be included within a lamp test facility;
- be supplied complete with the required engraving on the screen;
- be supplied from the local instrumentation power system or the local instrumentation
system battery, unless stated to the contrary in the application Clauses.
DC operated lamps
All DC indicator lamps shall have diodes in series to prevent reverse current when making
lamp tests.
AC operated lamps
In applications where a battery supply is not available, status indicator lamps shall be
operated on available AC supplies. For these applications the indicator shall be a low-voltage
lamp supplied via a transformer incorporated within the light unit. The lamps shall have a
voltage rating higher than the transformer secondary.
4.25 Local Controlling Systems

The mechanical equipment are to be configured with local controls near to the drives. It must
be possible to take the respective drive out of the automatic mode and to switch it „ON“,
“REMOTE” or „OFF“ in manual mode. The prevailing mode is to be indicated.
All local controls get an emergency stop button which turns off the concerned drive not only
in automatic mode but also when in manual mode.
4.26 Communication
In each new low voltage switchgear room of both WWTP´s a stationary telephone is required
which is connected to the existing telephone system of the WWTP.
In the case of fault or alarm of WWTP extensions the operation staff on site or the on-call
service will be notified by cable connection to the existing emergency via potential free
contacts in upstream.
As far as the fault message is not acknowledged via potential free contact in downstream, it
has to be repeated periodically. The operator in charge shall then acknowledge the alarm and
initiate respective measures.
5 REQUIREMENTS SCADA and plc SYSTEM
5.1 General
All equipment required to fulfil the requirements shall be industry standard proven
computing equipment with a demonstrable long-term life cycle and support.
To permit other manufacturers’ equipment, e.g. PLC’s, to be added to the SCADA system,
all equipment shall, wherever possible, interface using open-system communication
protocols. The SCADA system will be designed together with a process engineer that has had
experience in at least 3 other similar sized plants.
Below an example on how the electrical system and the control system should be provided:
5.2 System features

SCADA software
The SCADA software running on Windows 2000 platform or latest industry proven version
of Windows is preferred. The SCADA software shall have ‘open system’ client/server
architecture allowing operation on and interfacing with a choice of hardware platforms. The
SCADA software package shall be one being widely used for similar application within the
region.
System access
Users of the system shall be allocated individual passwords allowing each user an
appropriate level of access commensurate with their requirements, responsibilities and areas
of knowledge and interest.
Three general categories of access have been identified:

- data only;
- data and Control;
- data and System Management.
Data only shall be generally available to all system users. Data and control shall be limited to
those personnel with the knowledge and responsibility to take control actions.
Colour graphics displays

The following display types shall be available on all colour graphics terminals:
- mimic diagrams;
- help pages;
- graphs;
- bar charts;
- alarm and event log listings;
- system configuration and maintenance displays.
Mimic diagrams
Mimic diagrams are required to present a pictorial representation of the plant and its present
status. Features required are as follows:
- display of fixed (background) diagrammatic plant information and text;
- display of variable information i.e. symbols or text displaying plant status;
- easy picture creation, possibly using a CAD style package.
Display of variables
Variables can be considered as digital on/off parameters, analogue or totalisers.
Digitals may be either status (e.g., running/stopped) or alarm points, and shall be displayed
by:
- text changing;
- symbol colour changing;
- symbol shape changing;
- text or symbol flashing.
It must be possible to associate more than one digital point with a symbol so that more than
two colours/shapes can have operational meaning. For example, a pump may be shown in
four colours indicating running/stopped/failed/non-operational.
In addition, it shall be possible to associate any number of symbols within different mimics
with a particular digital point.
Analogues and totals shall be displayed by:

- numeric value;
- bar chart;
- graph.
It shall be possible to display all these three types of indication in mimic diagrams. Colour
changes shall be used to indicate further information about a point, e.g. if an alarm limit has
been exceeded.
Display attributes
Using the display facilities described above, the mimic diagrams shall indicate the following
attributes for analogue, digital and totaliser points:
attribute point type
status On/Off digital Status
slarm/Normal digital Alarms
1st Stage Alarm (High, Low) analogues
2nd Stage Alarm (High, Low-low) analogues
communications Failure all
alarm Manually Suppressed (out of service) all
alarm Automatically Suppressed all
out of Range analogues
Picture creation
It is essential that picture creation is a straightforward procedure; a CAD type package would
be suitable. It must be possible to create symbols which may then be used in any orientation,
size and colour and to create a symbol library, i.e. a part of diagram which may then be used
many times. It must be possible to display, on any single mimic diagram, information from
anywhere within the system.
Help pages
Help pages shall be available within the system, to assist the operators in dealing with
received alarm conditions. These pages will be compiled by the plant managers and will
provide advice as to which staff shall be notified of which alarms.
Help pages may be presented as individual pages accessed from a mimic, or as a window
superimposed on a mimic.
Graphs
Graphical representation of historical data is required, with a selectable time base and the
ability to put up to four graphs on display at once on the same axes, using different colours.
The system must be easy to use, with automatic default facilities so that only a minimum of
instructions need be given to the system to obtain each plot.
Features that will be required are:

- Pre-configured and ad-hoc trend displays.
- Ability to compare graphs over different time spans, e.g. today’s flow compared against
yesterday’s flow.
- Read-out of the actual value of a graph at a given time point.
- Ability to roll a graph forward and backwards in time.
- Ability to set the scale for each graph.
- Trend graphs giving a plot of the selected variable up to the last scan, updating when a
new value is received.
- Ability to incorporate a trend graph as a feature on a mimic diagram.
- Graphical output of both analogue and digital signals (real and derived). Digital signals
will produce a square wave type plot indicating for instance when a pump started and
stopped.
- Auto ranging scale unless manually overridden.
- Ability to display data from different sites within the same trend display.
Bar charts
A bar char type representation of analogue variables is required. This is required on mimic
diagrams, and must be capable of horizontal or vertical orientation, with selectable scaling.
Width of bars must be selectable so that the feature can also be used for such items as tank
level pictorial representations.
Alarm and event log listings

All alarms and changes of status (i.e. digital events) in the system shall be logged to disc. It
shall be possible to recall this information to the screen via a select and sort programme. This
programme shall sort and display information on at least the following bases:
- process Area;
- site type;
- site name;
- time period;
- signal identification numbers;
- signal state (on/off);
- alarm status i.e. cleared, accepted and unaccepted;
- alarms or status occurrences required;
- any sort parameters not entered shall default to “all”.
System set-up and maintenance displays

Suitable displays of information shall be provided to display all set-up features of the system.
These displays will be closely associated with the SCADA system set-up facilities.
Logging On/Off
Every user of the SCADA system shall be required to log on (i.e. activate) his terminal when
he wishes to operate on it. The system will be aware of which terminals are logged on and
the access rights of the user and will therefore be aware of where to send certain information.
Alarm facilities
General
Digital points within the system shall be capable of operating as either status (e.g.
running/stopped) or alarm points (e.g. normal/failed). A digital alarm point shall enter the
Alarm State when it is either a logical ‘1’ or logical ‘0’ as designated in the system set-up for
each point, the opposite state being the normal condition.
Analogue points shall be provided with two high alarm limits (high and high-high), and two
low alarm limits (low and low-low). Should an analogue value either rise or fall from a value
considered to be normal, a first stage high or low alarm limit will be encountered resulting in
a new alarm condition. Should the value continue to rise (or fall) it will then encounter the
second stage high-high or low-low alarm limit again resulting in a new alarm condition.
Alarm priorities
Every alarm generated within the system shall be allocated an alarm priority to indicate the
importance of the alarm. Whereas a digital point will have only one alarm priority, an
analogue point will have three. This will allow the relative importance of the first and second
stage high and high-high (low and low-low) alarms to be set. The alarm priority is used in
conjunction with the ‘area of interest’ of the users logged onto the system to determine where
and when a new alarm is enunciated. The priority of an alarm shall change if required
depending on the time and date.
Alarm annunciation
Alarms are to be annunciated on the appropriate operator workstations both visually and
audibly, and have clear and unambiguous acceptance procedures. High priority alarms shall
be presented for acceptance before low priority ones.
Alarms filtering
The SCADA system shall have a “toolkit” of facilities that may be applied to individual
points in the system in order to prevent unnecessary annunciation of alarms. These shall
typically include:
- analogues:
· dead-bank;
· delays before initial;
· minimum alarm repeat interval;
· logical suppression of new alarm if other conditions are present;
· averaging values in PLC.
- digitals:
· delay before initial alarm;
· minimum alarm repeat interval;
· logical suppression of new alarm if other conditions are present.
·
Users subject to authorisation (i.e. correct level of access) shall be able to manually suppress
an alarm, e.g., if a transducer is faulty and is being particularly troublesome. The suppression
of alarms shall be logged to the event list.
Derived alarms
A combinational and sequential logic package is required within the SCADA system,
allowing signals to be combined to form derived alarms. These may be combinations of
analogue and digital information obtained from different sites (e.g., a pump may be running
at a pumping station but no flow entering the associated inlet works resulting in a derived
alarm indicating a potential burst).
5.3 Controls
Manual Control
It shall be possible to perform control operations (e.g. remote pump start/stop) from any of
the operator consoles. Access to controls will be limited by the access rights assigned to the
individual passwords for various operatives (see System Access).
The issuing of control instructions shall take precedence over the scanning for alarms.
A well organised select check and execute system is required.
Automatic Controls
Automatic control features shall be available within the SCADA system, and fall into two
categories:
- Profile type controls where a working pattern (e.g. of reservoir level) is downloaded to a
PLC for use by a local control system. New profiles may be sent for each day or week
etc., as required.
- Combinational and sequential control:
There are circumstances where the only practicable way of closing a control loop is via the
SCADA system, although this should be avoided whenever possible. The package used for
alarm derivation will also fulfil the automatic control requirements. The following facilities
shall be provided as a minimum:
- logical AND/OR/NOT/EXOR/EQUALS;
- IF-THEN-ELSE Constructions;
- arithmetic operations including >,$ , > , #, =, +, -, H, ), /;
- logical constructions including time and data;
- look-up tables, with interpolating facilities;
- input to functions from any system point including digital, analogues, totalisers, controls
from a keyboard, set point input from a keyboard;
- output from functions to be available as digital, analogue or totaliser points, or transmitted
to any PLC as a control or set point;
- access to point attributes in addition to present value, including: suppressed, telemetry
failed, in alarm (and for analogues, which alarm level).
5.4 System record

A record shall be kept on disc within the system of all operator actions, such as alarm
acceptance or control actions performed on the system. The record shall include:
- time and date;
- action;
- operator.
This record shall be retrievable from the system using a similar select and sort routine to that
specified for status and alarm logs.
5.5 Report generation

The system shall be capable of generating both regular and individual reports. Reports must
be easily configured and altered in order to maintain their relevance.
An example of a regular report which may be produced from the system is the following,
designed to be made available to the works manager each morning:
- service reservoirs: levels (%);
- treatment works: previous day’s output;
- river flows: at points where flows have to be maintained for abstraction purposes;
- rainfall: previous day;
- impounding reservoirs: level;
- alarms that have occurred during the night.
5.6 System time

The system shall support:
- Greenwich Mean Time (GMT/UCT);
- Daylight Saving Time (DST);
- Leap Years.
All data shall be logged at GMT/UCT + 2 hours, but automatically displayed in the
appropriate local time adjusted for daylight saving.
5.7 System database configuration

The system shall be provided with privileged and secure on-line database building utilities
i.e. it shall not be necessary to stop the scanning and alarm presentation facilities. Any
configuration shall not be installed into the active database until completed, verified and
authorised by the user. A reliable verification procedure shall be required to prevent the
creation of invalid files and the deletion of in-use files.
It shall be possible to define process point files, calculated/derived pint files, and remote PLC
files, to include:
- meaningful point identification and description;
- allocation of points to groups/locations;
- range of analogue values in Engineering Units;
- alarm limits/categories;
- scan control/frequency;
- report control (whether change of state is to be logged to the alarm/event printer);
- save control (whether values are to be archived);
- MIS control (whether values may be transferred to other systems).
5.8 System response times

The Dispatcher provided under this contract shall meet the following performance criteria:
Item description response time (sec)
1 From change of state of plant being detected by PLC 0,5
2 From change of state being detected by the Dispatcher to updating the 0,5
SCADA database
3 From change of state in the SCADA database to updating the alarm list 0,5
4 From change of state in the SCADA database to updating the active 0,5
mimic
5 All requests for mimic displays, alarm lists and help pages from the 3
completion of the operator request.
6 All requests for trend displays and event lists from the completion of the
operator request.
7 Time to perform screen dump from completion of the operator request
5.9 Historic information

PLC´s
PLC´s will sample and store values of analogue parameters at predetermined intervals to
cater for loss of communications. These will normally be 15 minutes but shall be user
configurable between 1 minute and 24 hour intervals.
SCADA system
In addition to the raw operational data, a long-term archive of analogue max/min/mean
values, pump hours run etc. will be maintained. Values stored will be as detailed within the
Remote data transfer

The SCADA system shall be capable of processing the data received from operational sites
e.g. into daily minimum, maximum and means, and forwarding the raw and processed data to
off-line packages e.g. Microsoft Excel.
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)

Each SCADA system shall be provided with a UPS capable of supporting all the main
computer equipment (central processing units, discs, communications processors, etc.),
operating consoles and the alarm/event printer for a period of not less than 60 minutes. The
UPS shall be provided to cater for a 50 % increase in load without the need for additional
hardware.
Essential services, e.g. UPS, security etc. shall be monitored by the SCADA system.
Printing devices
The system shall be provided with two types of printing device:
Alarm/Event Printer
To provide a hard copy log of all alarms and significant events, e.g. operator sign-on or
control override issued, a medium speed dot matrix printer shall be provided. The printer
shall be capable of 300 characters per second, 132 characters per line, multiple colours (to
differentiate alarms and level of alarms from events) and operation on continuous fan fold
stationery.
Colour Printer
To provide high quality printed output for report summaries, programme development,
copies of mimic displays, historical trends etc., a high speed colour ink-jet printer shall be
provided.
5.10 PLC equipment

5.10.1 General
- Programmable logic control devices (PLC´s), where specified, shall be used to effectuate
the monitoring and control of the plant or process.
- They shall be capable of operating as either a standalone unit providing local operator
interface information of form part of a supervised system complete with communications
facilities.
- The PLC shall be a modular unit capable of expansion. It shall support a minimum of 32
input/outputs but shall be capable of expansion up to 512 I/O.
- The PLC shall operate from a nominal power source of 230V AC 50 Hz. and incorporate
its own integral 24V DC power supply for driving auxiliary modules.
- The programmable controller shall have adequate memory and I/O ports to receive all
control and sequencing signals and drive all indicator lamps, relays or solenoids as may be
required to accurately control all the necessary functions of the control system.
- The controller shall indicate the operating state of the outputs by means of light-emitting
diodes (LEDs) and be equipped with sets of LEDs to indicate the controller status and to
notify of internal faults.
- An integral means of turning al outputs off and ceasing the processor operation shall be
fitted.
- The PLC shall perform the majority of sequential functions and shall drive, either directly
or by interposing relays, all the necessary outputs as detailed elsewhere.
- Where the output load exceeds the rated capacity of an output port of the controller,
suitably rated, D.I.N. rail mounted interposing relays shall be installed in the cabinet to
amplify output controls signals.
- D.I.N. rail mounted terminals shall be fitted in the bottom of the cabinet allow the
termination of all control and sequencing cabling. The terminals shall accept up to 4mm2
stranded conductor.
- All output ports from the controller shall be correctly fused in order to protect the
controller (by means of fused terminals).
- The PLC shall be capable of supporting the following component parts either inherently
or via expansion when required process I/O as detailed elsewhere:
· power supply;
· central processor;
· gigital input;
· digital output;
· analogue input;
· analogue output;
· communications;
· high speed pulse counter.
5.10.2 Power supply requirements

- The equipment shall be designed to operate from one of the following power supplies:
· Mains power supplies shall be 230V AC, 50 Hz. The mains operating voltage range
shall be user selectable by a switch or selection link.
· Mains power supplies as defined above, but having an additional facility for operation
directly from a 24V DC standby supply.
· 24V DC supply with full protection against accidental reversal of the supply polarity.
- The system circuitry shall be fully isolated from its power supply, using isolating barriers
having resistances of not less than 2 megohms, measured at 500V DC.
- Depression of the mains supply voltage by 25 % for a period of 5 seconds or interruption
of the supply for 25 cycles shall not cause the system alarms to operate.
- Mains-borne transients of up to 1000V with energy levels of 1 Joule shall not initiate
system alarms or cause the system to operate outside the performance requirements of this
Specifications after the occurrence of the transient.
- System cable terminations shall be made in a discrete termination section, housing
terminal blocks sized, barriered and uniquely identified, to suit the voltage and current
demands of the circuitry. Pinch screw type terminals are not acceptable.
- Within the following ranges variation of the power supply to any system shall not cause it
to operate outside the performance requirements of this Specifications:
· 12 % to +10 % of the nominal 230V AC and variation of the frequency within the
range 45 Hz to 55 Hz;
· 12 % to +10 % of the nominal 24V DC supply.
5.10.3 Digital input requirements

- the following class of input is acceptable:
- nominal 24V DC input rating, opto-isolated, reverse polarity protected.
- field contact inputs shall be debounced such that status changes will not be recognised
unless the contact condition is maintained for at least 25 milliseconds.
5.10.4 Digital output requirements

- Digital output shall be of the volt-free contact type.
- Each output shall be electrically isolated from other outputs, the rest of the circuitry and
earth. It shall have an insulation resistance to the rest of circuitry and earth of greater than
2 megohms, when tested for 1 minute with 500V DC insulation tester.
- System functionality shall be maintained when each output terminal is earthed in turn.
5.10.5 Analogue input requirements

The preferred input signal is 4-20 mA; continuous, linear supporting a fully floating, max.
250 ohm input impedance load. Analogue/Digital conversion shall have a minimum 8-bit
resolution, linear to ± 1 %, accepting signals in the range 0-10 mA and 0-20 mA and voltages
1-5 V, 0-1V and 0-100 mV as required.
5.10.6 Analogue output requirements

- Analogue output shall be 4 to 20mA DC electrical signal with a linearly increasing output
for increasing measured value.
- When the load resistance across the output terminals is varied from 0 to 1000 ohms the
output signal current shall not change by more than 0.1 % of span, over the full output
range.
5.10.7 Communication ports

Communication ports will only be necessary on the PLC when its use is specified as part of
an overall networked system. When required they shall provide the communication link
between the PLC and other PLC´s or PC based system.
5.10.8 Protocols
- Provision of the communication required to satisfy this Specifications shall include all
necessary protocols for its successful operation.
- A serial RS 232 port shall be available to enable interfacing to local PC´s for MMI
purposes to allow local database and control sequence loading, interrogation or
modification. The port shall cater for communication with a suitable encoding device.
5.10.9 High speed pulse counter

This input module shall accept voltage level input signals of either 5, 12, or 24 volt and have
counting speeds up to 50 kHz. Encoded count signals of either 16 or 32 bit, bi-directional,
shall be selectable and a minimum of 2, source of sink, independently configurable outputs
shall be provided.
5.11 Communications
5.11.1 General
The Contractor shall supply, install and commission all necessary communications
equipment and software to provide a complete integrated communications network for the
SCADA system.
5.11.2 Scan times

The Contractor shall prepare a detailed assessment of the PLC scan times for his system and
submit this to the Project Manager for information.
The longest scan time for PLC with radio communications shall not exceed two minutes
under full system utilisation.
5.11.3 Transmission and protocol

The contractor shall wherever possible use an industry standard transmission protocol. The
Contractor shall provide details of the proposed protocol to be used at the time of Tender.
5.11.4 Electronic equipment

All communications equipment used in the communications system shall be of high
reliability and shall comply with the most recent edition of appropriate National and
International Standards Specifications and recommendations at the time of Tender.
5.11.5 Radio equipment

Standards requirements
All equipment shall comply with the appropriate CCIR recommendations and shall be
presented to the national licensing agency. The equipment shall comply with the most recent
editions of the appropriate National and International Standards Specifications and
Recommendations.
Type approval numbers issued by the National Frequency Allocation Committee in the
country of manufacture shall be supplied, together with appropriate CCIR recommendations,
appropriate National and International Standards Specifications met by the equipment at the
time of Tender.
Radio system
The radio system shall conform to the latest regulations and requirements current at the time
of delivery. The radio system shall be of the following type:
Frequency: UHF as allocated by the Frequency Committee
Modulation: FM
Base Mode: Full Duplex
PLC Mode: TWO-Frequency Simplex
Channel Spacing: 12.5 kHz
PLC radio transmitters/receivers

PLC transmitter/receiver radio units shall be units with standby facilities. These units shall
have sufficient battery backup for the system to function for 4 hours in the event of mains
failure. The units may either be wall-mounted or installed in the PLC enclosure (the preferred
option).
The alarm signal shall be transmitted to the SCADA system when a changeover occurs due
to a radio failure.
The R.F. output of the radio units shall be variable from maximum down to 0.5 watt.
Attenuation pads shall be provided in the transmit leg only, and the radio output set to
maximum in the final system configuration.
Base station radio transmitters/receivers

Base station transmitter/receiver radio units shall be located adjacent to the Works Control
Centre (WCC) and shall be of a dual main/standby type with auto-changeover of the duty
units. The Contractor shall supply within the tender document an explanation of how this is
to be accomplished. An alarm signal shall be transmitted to the SCADA system when a
changeover occurs. The base station shall be provided with power supply equipment,
including: nickel cadmium battery and 230 volts 50 Hz AC mains fed battery charger and
gave sufficient battery backup to allow the system to operate for eight hours on the event of
mains failure. The charger shall be capable of recharging the battery to full capacity within 8
hours while the radio equipment continues to operate at full duty.
The alarm signal shall be transmitted to the SCADA system when a changeover occurs due
to a radio failure.
The R.F. output of the radio units shall be variable from maximum down to 0,5 watt.
Attenuation pads shall be provided in the transmit leg only and the radio output set to
maximum in the final system configuration.
The base station radio shall be forced to change the duty radio at a user definable interval
(normally every 24 hours).
Aerial and aerial structures

The Contractor shall supply and install all aerials an aerial support structures and shall
provide typical drawings to show how each type of aerial mast is to be mounted (including
free standing, guyed stub etc.) with the tender document. The base station shall have omni-
directional aerials plus any associated duplexers.
The aerial and support structure shall be capable of withstanding winds gusting to 160
km/hour without damage. The Contractor shall provide all supporting calculations.
The contractor shall supply to the Project Manager all necessary calculations and information
to demonstrate the aerial wind performance and structural integrity of the aerial support
structure and all necessary documentation and calculations to enable the appropriate planning
for the aerial and it’s support structure.
The Contractor shall supply and install all necessary low loss coaxial down leads for
connection to the radio unit and lightning protection for the aerial system. The lightning
protection system shall include use of aerial elements at earth potential, the aerial support
structure, the test link and the earth rods/spikes.
Mast structures
The Contractor may use the following mast types, however the contractor shall assess the
requirements for the mast structure:
- 3m or 5m Pole
A 50mm diameter aluminium pole with a 300mm standoff bracket kit for building mounting,
aerial clamps and 15 metres of low loss coaxial cable.
- 6m pole
A free standing circular or octagonal column of aluminium finish with bottom flush fitting
door opening, tamper-proof lock and stainless steel earth stud.
Poles may be flange mounted or cast in a concrete foundation. A 35mm diameter PVC duct
shall be installed between the pole and the PLC building. 25 metres of low loss coaxial cable
shall be allowed at each 6m pole.
- Guyed pole
A 50mm diameter aluminium pole secured by stainless steel guyed lines mounted on a
concrete base. A 35mm diameter PVC duct shall be installed between the pole and the PLC
building. 25 metres of low loss coaxial cable shall be allowed at each guyed pole.
- Lattice
Lattice structures shall be constructed of steel and shall be hot dip galvanised to provide a
maintenance free finish. The coaxial down-lead shall be enclosed within a galvanised steel
conduit to a height of 2m above ground level. A 35mm diameter PVC duct shall be installed
between the pole and the PLC building. 25 metres of low loss coaxial cable shall be allowed
at each lattice structure.
5.11.6 PSTN communications

General
All equipment for connection to the PSTN lines shall be offered:
- to comply in all respects to the National and Local regulations;
- to comply with the most recent editions of appropriate CCITT Recommendations,
National and International Standards Specifications and Recommendations;
- such that any line sending and receiving sensitivity controls shall be capable of alteration
by removal of the unit by authorised maintenance personnel;
- with evidence of prior use by major national telecommunications networks, together with
type numbers and full details of CCITT Recommendations, National and International
Standards Specifications and Recommendations met.
Modems
The contractor shall supply and install all modems and interconnecting wiring to the SCADA
system and telephone equipment as appropriate.
PLC equipment modems shall form part of the PLC unit and shall be compatible with the
associated “line connection” modules.
All modems shall be presented to the national and local service provider and shall comply
with V21, V23, V26, and V29 (III-1) as appropriate.
On-site communications cables

On-site communications networks shall be by glass fibre cable.
The cable must satisfy to the following specifications:

- non-metallic, loose fibre, stranded loose tube cable according to the latest issue of EN
187105;
- type of fibre: Standard single mode fibre according to ITU-T G.652b or IEC 60794-2-50
type B.1.1
5.12 Testing
The Contractor shall provide for system testing as detailed.
5.12.1 Factory acceptance test

General
The Tenderer shall provide for full Factory Acceptance Test of the fully configured system,
to include:
- The complete system network.
- Support for all PLCs with all points over an integrated network, simulated to include all
types of communications units and interfaces.
- Mimic display pages on the system as defined within the particular Specifications.
Test 1- Simultaneous occurrence of:

- the control centre polling outstations in normal (i.e. daytime) operational mode receiving
50 % of data from each PLC with 10 % of points in alarm condition.
- 2 Nos. operator workstations performing:
- simultaneous access;
- access staggered by 2 seconds.
Test 2:
- as test 1;
- performing daily system archive.
test 3:
- as test 1;
- performing archive data recovery:

- full daily archive recovery;
- four data points for one week (15-minute intervals).
test 4:
- as test 1;
- performing screen dump;
- printing daily report.
The simulation package shall use the SCADA system to demonstrate proper performance
under full utilisation conditions.
The Contractor shall record the following:

- DISPLAY RESPONSE: This shall be no greater than specified;
- PERCENTAGE CPU UTILISATION;
- SCAN TIME: This shall be no greater than 1 minute for full system scanning;
- TIME TO CLEAR BACKLOG: The Contractor shall also record any adverse conditions
that become apparent.
5.12.2 Factory acceptance test – Witnessing

The factory Acceptance Test shall be conducted in the presence of witnesses, who shall be
nominated, in writing, by the Contracting Authority and the Contractor respectively. The
witnesses shall be empowered to act during the Factory Acceptance Test on behalf of the
parties they represent, to judge the success or failure of a particular test. Either party, as
necessary, may appoint nominated Deputies in writing.
The Contractor shall provide evidence that the tests (FAT/SAT) have been successfully
performed prior to the witnessing by the Project Manager.
5.12.3 Factory acceptance test procedures

The testing procedures shall be designed such that each separate testable entity (e.g.
hardware configuration, picture building) consists of a well-defined series of tests.
Each test shall be documented to include:

- the purpose of the test;
- any pre-requisites required allowing the test to be completed successfully;
- any hardware required allowing the test to be performed successfully;
- a detailed schedule of activities to be performed within the test.
5.12.4 Factory acceptance test – Records

A log shall be maintained during the Factory Acceptance Test. This log shall record for each
test performed:
- the test results;
- any faults which occur;
- any remedial action taken;

- re-test results;
- decisions taken by the witnesses that may affect the test results.
The witnesses of both parties shall initial all entries within the log.
Copies of the log shall be provided to the Contracting Authority on completion of the Factory
Acceptance Test.
Failure and re-test

The success or failure shall be determined as follows:
- if the system performs as laid down in the Functional Design Specifications the test shall
be deemed successful;
- the tests shall not be failed due to external conditions, e.g. power failure, provided the
system fulfils the resilience criteria detailed within this tender document and any
subsequent project Specifications;
- the tests shall not be failed through incorrect operation, provided the fault can be corrected
by normal operating procedures and provided the test performed satisfactorily in all other
aspects (e.g. printer ribbon failure).
Any test that is deemed unsuccessful may be retried following any remedial action that may
be necessary.
If the system should fail any test and it is apparent that the fault may have affected the result
of tests previously regarded as successful, any or all of the tests affected may be re-tested.
To allow all participants to fully understand all aspects of the Factory Acceptance Test, the
Factory Acceptance Test Specifications as agreed between all parties shall be issued with the
Contractor’s Project Specifications (CPS).
System management
The Factory Acceptance Test shall include, but not be limited to, the following as defined
within Contractor’s Project Specifications.
Hardware
the hardware configuration being tested shall be fully detailed and cross-referenced against
the Tender Return Document.
System Start-up and Shut-down Procedures

These tests shall exercise the system start-up and shut-down commands including:
- system start-up commands;
- operator log-in and log-out commands;
- password verification;
- any special function command keys;

- orderly system shutdown.
System Back-up and Recovery

These tests shall exercise the system back-up and recovery procedures, including:
- System back up to archive media;
- System re-build from system archive media;
- Synchronisation of the Master Station and outstations.
SCADA database configuration

These tests shall exercise the database commands including:
- password and level of access maintenance;
- the creation and amendment of PLCs;
- the maintenance of PLC communications parameters, e.g. telephone numbers, radio
characteristics, change of media, scanning intervals, on/off telemetry scan;
- regions of interest;
- creation and amendment of SCADA points:
· name;
· type, e.g. status, analogue, derived;
· alarm limits;
· historic data recording and characteristics;
· re-transmission of value to associated points;
· scaling factors;
· calculation formula maintenance;
· set output control parameters for digital, analogue and derived controls.
Picture configuration
The tests shall exercise the picture configuration commands available to the privileged
operators, including:
- the creation of picture pages, to include foreground/dynamic and background/static
picture elements;
- the modification of picture pages, to include foreground/dynamic and background/static
picture elements;
- the deletion, copying and renaming of pictures;
- any function control key usage;
- examples of all picture types, e.g.:
· static information pages (e.g. indices);
· mimic pictures for information display and control monitoring;
· alarm list pages;
· statistical pictures (e.g. trends, histograms);

· help/text pages.
- the display and printing of pictures.
Data collection
These tests shall exercise the data collection commands available to the privileged operators,
including:
- the collection of digital, analogue and derived parameters;
- the collection of all data from outstations at frequencies defined by the privileged
operator;
- the inhibition of data collection from a PLC;
- the inhibition from data collection from an individual point;
- the editing of stored data (subject to correct level of access).
Supervisory control
These tests shall exercise the supervisory control commands, including:
- The creation and downline loading of control sequences;
- Digital (e.g. open/close) and analogue (e.g. set point) controls of individual control points;
- Revertive checks to ensure the correct control point is addresses
Alarm/event handling
These tests shall exercise the alarm and event reporting procedures, including:
- digital and analogue alarms:
· reported on the alarm/event printer;
· logged to disc;
· reported to the appropriate operator consoles.
- events, e.g. issue remedial control command:
· are only issued from appropriate operator consoles;
· logged to the alarm/event printer;
· logged to disc;
· are subject to correct level of access and regions of interest.
- alarm acceptance/acknowledgement procedures;
- alarm list interrogation procedures;
- alarm list printing;
- alarm inhibit for an individual point.
Data logging
These tests shall exercise the data logging and archiving procedures including:
- tests to ensure all data/alarms collected are logged to the on-line archive storage;
- tests to ensure data can be archived to and recalled from long term archive media.
PLC programming
These tests shall exercise the PLC sequence programming procedures, including:
- sequence program editing, compilation and loading;
- the ability to load new sequences on demand by a privileged operator.
Management information system development

These test shall demonstrate the use of the inquiry package and the applications programs
development tool kit, including:
· the editing and compilation of programs;
· the abstracting of data from the SCADA database;
· the automatic scheduling of programs as a result of time of day queues and as a result
of a SCADA event/alarm.
Site acceptance tests

The contractor shall provide for full site acceptance tests for each item of plant to be
provided under the Contract. This shall include the interface to the marshalling unit, the
communication system, the earthing system and full functionality as demonstrated at the
Factory Acceptance Test.
Systems acceptance test

The Contractor shall provide for full system test on completion to include tests as stated
above.
All special test equipment relevant to the Contractor supplied equipment shall become the
property of the Contracting Authority on completion.
General
The requirement is for a Hot Duty/Standby SCADA Dispatcher installed in each control
centre room of relevant WWTP:
The computer equipment shall be the latest IBM PC compatible, operating under the current
Microsoft Windows Operating system (minimum MS Windows Server 2008), necessary to
meet the system performance requirements as specified within the General Specification for
SCADA. Furniture for the control centre shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor, to
include:
3 no. flat top desks complete with integral cabling system and electrical sockets.
1 no. lockable cupboard to be located beneath desk.
2 no. swivel chairs with a duty of 8 hours continuous use.
Furniture shall be matching and presented topresented to the Project Manager.
System Availability
The system availability shall be in accordance with market availability at the time of deliver.
The Contractor shall demonstrate within his Preliminary Design how the system availability
shall be satisfied.
Data Storage
The SCADA system shall provide on-line historical data for all inputs/outputs on the system,
whether real or derived signals, at:
- Digital signals: On change of state.
- Analogue: Every 5-10 seconds and significant change.
- Integrated e.g. flow, mean, max/min, 15 minute, daily, weekly, monthly, yearly.
Data Transfer
The Contractor shall provide the ability to export data from the SCADA system to other
computer systems via the Microsoft Excel product. The data also should be capable of
operating from remote control via WEB so as to allow for home operation as well as via
smart phone technology. It also allow for receiving test messages of alarms
SCADA System Features
System Access
The Contractor shall configure the system in accordance with the General Requirements for
SCADA.
Mimic Displays
The mimics listed below shall be designed, configured and commissioned by the Contractor
under this Contract. All mimic displays shall be submitted to the Project Manager for
informatio prior to configuration. All mimics shall be suitable for display all sizes of monitor
supplied within the Contract and careful design of the mimic shall be used to this end. Where
mimics replicate those configured for the local PLC display, the mimics shall be identical to
those displayed on the PLC display. The following requirements are required for all mimics:
- The background colour for all mimics shall be subject to the approval of the Project
Manager.
- All flows shall be displayed in engineering units as specified in the I/O listing of the
agreed Functional Design Specification.
- Each mimic shall have navigation 'pushbutton' to the process overview, the geographical
overview and associated process mimics.
- The symbols used to describe the plant items shall be subject to the approval of the
Project Manager.
- Mimics shall display process lines as colour dynamic with arrow indication of flow
direction.
- Alarms indication shall be animated within the relevant mimic.

- Trend pages (including historic and current information) and the alarm summary page
shall be available from every mimic.
- The Contractor shall configure each on-site workstation such that a screen dump can be
printed by a single keyboard/on-screen action.
- Control pages for all plant that can be controlled, overridden or plant data entered
manually shall be available from every mimic.
- SCADA Mimics
- MIMICS QTY
- SCADA Network Status Schematic
- Geographical Overview
- Process Schematic Overview
- Incoming HV Supply
- Process Views
The Contractor shall allow for the following number of additional mimics as instructed by
The screens that need to be prepared should include:

- a. Overview screen
- b. Liquid line screen
- c. Sludge line screen
- d. Energy screen
- e. Inlet pumping station
- f. Headworks screen
- g. Primary clarifiers screen
- h. Biological treatment screen
- i. Secondary clarifier with WAS/RAS PS screen
- j. Thickener screen
- k. Digester with boilers and recycle screen
- l. Dewatering and conveyor screen
- m. Diesel gen-set
- n. Biogenerator screen
- o. Biogas system screen
The system will allow for "zoom in". The screens will show the process is a logical graphic
manner. Each screen will allow for additional pop-up screens for operation. In addition each
screen will allow for automatic graph generation of analogue data – both current and
historical. The SCADA system will allow for complete data transfer from the local PLC
operation the various components to the HMI
6 INSTALLATION AND LIGHTING SYSTEM
6.1 Wiring System

Basically, methods of installation adapted to the local requirements are to be used (for
example conduits, cable ducts, etc.). When installing cables and lines inside of buildings it is
probably necessary to mount auxiliary constructions for fixing. These are to be considered in
the tender. Installation of lighting, power and ELV installations to be embedded into
concrete/ flush mounted.
Cables have to run in one length without splice boxes or muffles. All cables have to run
properly adjusted, side by side, with mutual distance, especially as regards power cables, so
that a good ventilation is guaranteed (DIN/VDE 0298, part 2). The filling factor of cable
racks may not exceed 70 %.
All designation systems for cables and lines have to be executed in English and Arabic. The
marking of the cables with identifying bands are to be effected durable with a distance of 20
m. All cable selling ends on devices, equipment and machines are to be marked with
respective cable numbers.
For the final dimensioning of the conductor cross sections and the corresponding fuse, the
DIN/VDE 0100- and the DIN/VDE-0298-standards are valid, especially the reduction factors
for method of installation, cable bundling and the expected ambient temperatures.
The voltage drop between the feed-in and the electrical consumer shall not exceed 3 % of the
nominal values. Every drive and every measuring gets a separate lead wire.
N-conductors will be marked blue, PE-conductors green-yellow. This colouring is

exclusively reserved for these strands. A marking in form of coloured tube covers is not
allowed, with the exception of single-core lines/cables and number cables.
The proof for the compliance of the release conditions for over-current- and fault current-
protective devices are to be provided in tabular form for each line/cable and with indication
of the line/cable length.
6.2 Supply Conditions on Equipment

All devices, machines and equipment connected by the contractor, have to be sealed at least
in the degree of protection IP 54 against penetration of humidity and dust. Measures for
higher degrees of protection, e.g. IP 67 or explosion proof type, are taken there where they
are necessary, e.g. in flooding and hazardous areas.
On principle, the request is valid that the degree of protection of the device to be connected
has to be observed. It is the contractor’s duty to check the available cable entries in view to
functionality and degree of protection. If necessary, the glands, screwing, entrances and so
forth are to be modified in order to meet the demand. In case of non-compliance, the
contractor has to perform corrective measures. Possible operating failures are to be borne by
him.
For all connections it has to be obligatory that a perfect strain relief of the cables is
guaranteed.
All reserve strands of cables have to be put on respective terminals and are to be indicated in
the documentation. The terminals for the reserve strands are to be marked according to the
documentation.
6.3 Indoor Installation and Cabling

The electrical installation inside the buildings shall be carried out surface mounted.
Cable racks and gutters consisting of metal have to be connected electrically conductive and
to be included in the equipotential bonding. The used materials for the cable routes are to be
adapted to the local demands. Sheets are to be used with ground perforation, depth at least 60
mm. If necessary (e.g. for common embedding of energy- and measuring cables), separation
strips are to be used. If necessary, cutting edges or drill holes have to be after treated and
equipped with an edge protection.
Fixings among each other and on brackets, walls, ceilings and so forth have to be executed
with typical accessories. For accident prevention, stirrups are to be equipped with plastic
protection caps on the bottom cutting edge.
In the domain of building installations, all socket-outlets are to be provided with their fusing
number of the corresponding sub-distribution switchgear. The same signboards as for the
cable markings can be used.
If necessary, an air conditioning and electrical heating is to be provided for low voltage
room. The room temperature of the low voltage rooms of the WWTP during the summer
period shall not exceed 30 °C when reaching 40°C outside temperature, and shall not fall
below 5°C during the winter period.
6.4 Outdoor Installation and Cabling

The underground laying of cables is to be done in a sand stratum of at least 10 cm thickness.
Cables are to be laid in pipes to protect the cables from rodents and replace them if
necessary. It is to be kept free of stones. The cover shall be at least 80 cm. The cables have to
be protected by cable tiles or equivalent cabs.
Above the cabs a cable warning tape has to be laid.
The inner diameter of a duct shall be 150 mm, but the Contractor may, at his expose, use
ducts of larger size, if required. The specification should mention that the electrical system
will be designed so that surface water does not flood the cable system. The ducts should be
color coded for identification such as green low voltage, yellow very low voltage, blue
communications etc. If larger ducts are used, they shall be of the same diameter along the
entire crossing. It should also be required to specify that manholes long the cable route must
be installed. The material of construction should be specified as well as the strength of the
cover. It also should be marked for identification. Reducing couplings will not be permitted.
Cable entries into buildings and sub-structures, e.g. into the raised floor of the low voltage
switchgear room have to be executed with waterproof cable glands.
Outside junction boxes should be specified. These should be capable of between 5 C and
45C, 10% moisture, rain of 60 mm/hr and winds of up to 120 km/hr. These should be made
of corrosion resistant material – SS316 or FRP and have a IP65
6.5 Interior Lighting

The interior lighting is to be designed according to DIN 5035. The visual demands as well as
the psychophysical aspects of view have to be considered.
The requirements in view to the quality grade of the glare restriction are to be considered by
selection of luminaries for the different room tasks.
Type, number and arrangement of luminaries are to be adapted to the requirements of the
individual rooms.
6.6 Emergency Lighting

Emergency luminaries shall be provided as necessary to allow safe access from buildings and
plant areas in the event of a power failure. Emergency luminaries shall, where possible,
untilise normal lighting luminaries fitted with battery back-up system and uninterruptable
power supply.
Non-maintained emergency lighting shall be provided to ensure safe passage, escape and exit
from buildings, structures and stairways in the event of normal electrical supplies being
interrupted.
In addition a minimum of 20% of the fluorescent fittings installed in process and plant areas
shall act as emergency lighting. These luminaries shall be evenly distributed throughout the
area.
In switch rooms and control rooms 30% of the luminaries shall be three hour non-maintained
emergency type.
A dedicated emergency light test switch shall be provided, in a position accessible from the
respective floor level, adjacent to each emergency luminary.
6.7 Exterior Lighting

The exterior lighting has to be designed in order to guarantee save crossing of the extension
of WWTP and appropriate working conditions even in darkness. The average working place
luminance has to reach at least 50 lux.
Slip-fitter and wall mounted luminaries are to be used. The exterior lighting is switched
either manually by a central switch at the administration building or automatically by a time
limited twilight switch.
Type, number and arrangement will depend on the design and arrangements of the exterior
plants.
7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
A fire detection and alarm system shall be provided and installed to cover all buildings as
well as generator and fuel system area.
The fire detection and alarm system shall designed by the Contractor. The design and works
shall strictly comply and be subject to the approval of the Civil Defense.
Each building shall be provided with local addressable control panels for the fire detection
system. This shall be located adjacent to buildings’ main access doors, and shall be powered
from the distribution compartment by a dedicated circuit breaker with a red label “Fire Alarm
- Do not switch off”. The control panel shall be housed in a wall mounted enclosure with
clear Perspex windows displaying the system indicators. The location and area covered by
each zone shall be clearly indicated on a diagram mounted adjacent to the control panel. This
diagram shall be printed on non-combustible media or plastic encapsulated sheet.
The system shall be installed with the following activation devices:

- Optical smoke and heat detectors in each zone;
- Ionisation detectors in each zone;
- Manual call points in all areas.
8 REQUIREMENTS ON ELECTRICAL
MATERIALS
The materials and equipment used shall comply with the following standards:
8.1 Fuses and links

The form and materials of the fuse and link carriers and bases shall prevent shock and burns
to persons during normal maintenance.
For all ratings above 20 amps, fuses shall be of the non-deteriorating HRC cartridge type
complying with IEC 269 and fuse bridges shall be so designed as to permit detection of fuse
rupturing without removing the bridge. Led and screw-in type fuses are not permitted. Test
links in current transformer circuits shall be of the plug-in type.
Individual fuse-link types and rating shall be as shown on the single line/schematic layouts
and distribution schedules.
All fuse ratings have to be confirmed by the Project Manager prior to notification of
readiness for equipment inspection by the Project Manager.
The labelling of fuses, carriers and bases shall comply with IEC 269. Identification labels
fixed to panels, boards and desks for fuses and links shall describe their duty, voltage and
rating.
8.2 Auxiliary switches

Auxiliary switches shall be executed according to IEC 337.
presented to. Contacts shall have a positive wiping action when closing.
All auxiliary switches, whether in service or not in the first instance, shall be wired up to a
terminal board and shall be arranged in the same sequence on similar equipment.
Auxiliary switches mechanically operated by the load break switches, isolators, etc. have to
be presented to the Project Manager. Contacts shall be mounted in accessible positions, clear
of the operating mechanism of the isolator, etc. and they shall be adequately protected against
accidental electrical shock.
All mechanical switches shall be rated for intermittent duty.
8.3 Indicating lamps

All indicating lamps shall be of a low voltage type (24 VDC). All lamps shall be rated 20 %
higher than the secondary transformer voltage to ensure long life. Lamps shall be well
ventilated and the design shall permit removal of lamp and glass without removal of other
parts.
8.4 Instruments and meters

All indicating instruments shall be in accordance with IEC 151 and shall be of the 90-degree
scale type minimum class 1,5 flush mounted and generally of the same appearance
throughout. The zero level shall be horizontal, the maximum level shall be vertical and the
indicator shall turn clockwise with increasing value. They shall be sealed against entrance of
moisture and dirt and be hermetically sealed, with non-reflecting windows. The square
pattern type with dimensions 76 x 76mm shall be used.
Instruments shall have an external zero adjustment and an adjustable pointer or inscription to
indicate the normal circuit rating for the associated plant.
Instruments shall be positioned so that they can be easily read and the horizontal zero level
shall not be less than 400mm or more than 2.000mm above finished floor level.
Ampere-meters shall have a suppressed scale to indicate the maximum starting current.
Kilowatt-hour meters shall be arranged to register 3 phase 4 wire unbalanced loads except as
otherwise indicated.
All instruments shall be mounted adjacent to the relevant circuit breaker switch or starter
unless otherwise stated.
8.5 Current transformers

Current transformers shall be in accordance with IEC 185 and should be suitably rated and
designed to carry out appropriate functions as called for in the detailed Description of
Electrical Works.
The Short Time Current Rating should not be less than 3 seconds. The rated secondary
current shall be 5A.
Bar type current transformers have preference over transformers with wound primaries. Short
Time Current factors shall be related to the full fault Short Circuit Current level for one or
three seconds as applicable. Each current transformer shall be earthed through a removable
link from one secondary terminal to the Main Earth Bar.
Current transformers used for indication/metering purposes shall be Class 1; for energising
integrating meters this shall be Class 0.5.
8.6 Control and selector switches

Control and selector switches shall be in accordance with IEC 337.
Selector switches shall be of the two or more positions type as required and have a stay-put
action to remain in any selected position. Each position of the selector switches shall be
suitably labelled to indicate their function. The switch handle shall be of the spade type.
8.7 Interlocking
Mechanical and electrical interlocking shall be provided at the main switchboard, between
the main circuit breakers on the incoming electricity supply from the network and the
generator.
8.8 Motor starters

The motor starters shall be of suitable rating to carry the full load current of its rated current
under the most severe circumstances foreseen. All starters shall be capable of at least 10
starts per hour at 100 % full load torque. The starters shall be dust proof.
8.9 Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB’s)

Only MCCB’s of the “no fuses” current limiting type with short circuit performance shall be
used. MCCB’s shall be fitted with adjustable thermo-magnetic trip mechanisms.
8.10 Residual current circuit breakers

All Miniature Circuit Breakers feeding general services socket outlets shall be fitted with
Residual Current Breaking Devices. The units shall be of the type designated RCBO, shall be
of the differential current operated type in accordance with IEC 1008, DIN VDE 0664 or
equivalent Standard. They shall, unless otherwise stated, have a maximum differential
current to trip value of 30 mA. The mechanism shall be trip free and shall have direct fault
simulation test facilities.
8.11 Contractors
Contractors shall be triple pole, moulded case and capable to withstand the short circuit
current in the most severe circumstances. Auxiliary contacts (NO and NC) for control
purposes must be supplied.
8.12 Overload and short circuit protection

The protection shall be a fuse-less, triple-pole (tp) magnetic and thermal overload relay and
be fully adjustable for the required motor characteristic. Protection against two phases
running must be given. Auxiliary contacts for control purposes must be supplied.
8.13 Control, auxiliary, interposing relays

Relays shall be suitable for operation on nominal 230 or 24 V AC with the possibility of
operation at 20 % higher or lower voltage. They shall be of a plug (11-pins) in type complete
with plastic cover and shall be fitted with normally open (NO), normally closed (NC) or
changeover contact combinations as necessary, indicator lamp and manual contact operator.
Mixed voltages must not be used on different contacts of a specific relay. If necessary
additional relays must be used.
Coils shall be vacuum impregnated or guaranteed to be suitable for use in tropical conditions.
Terminals of the relay bases shall be of the front connected screw clamp type. The relay-
mounting panel shall be prepared for future extension.
For preventing malfunctioning due to the relay being loosened from its base; it shall be
secured by a retaining bar or clip.
The Contractor shall take care to ensure that relay contacts and associated wiring are suitably
fuse-protected.
Relays having different contact configurations shall under no circumstances be

interchangeable.
To both relay and base a permanent identification shall be affixed in line with the circuit
diagram reference.
8.14 Control switches, push buttons and indicator lamps

All control switches, push buttons and indicators shall be of standard 22mm diameter, with a
protection grade of IP54 or better. Terminals on all control devices shall be of IP20 or better.
Push button control units, with the exception of emergency stop units, shall be provided with
guard rings.
All push buttons, selector switches and indicator units shall be provided with legend plates
bearing the appropriate legends.
Colours of push buttons and indicator lights shall be in accordance with IEC standards.
8.15 Control transformers

Control transformers shall have a secondary voltage of 110VAC and the neutral shall be
earthed.
9 Testing and Start-up of electrical equipment
Testing and start-up of the electrical equipment will be performed together with the hydraulic
and mechanical testing plant. The procedures to be followed are described under the General
Requirements for the execution of contractual works. All special tools and testing apparatus
has to be arranged for the testing purposes, specialized technician to perform all related tests
as per standards.
All expenditures for the functional tests and the start-up have to be included in the tender. It
has to be considered that further tunings and settings of parameters could be necessary even
until one year upon the start-up, include:
- Testing the cables including insolation

- Testing the motors, transformers and capacitors
- Testing the control panels
- Testing all the protection systems and their calibration
- Testing and simulation the complete control system
- Testing if all the signs are correct
- Testing the grounding systems and the resistance
- Testing all instrumentation and calibration
- Testing all I/O's and verifying that they are connected in accordance with the design
Each of these above should be elaborated on.
9.1 Operating Tests

Works tests will be performed in accordance to appropriate DIN standards and include all
other tests the Project Manager may require for the verification that the works comply with
the specification.
Prior to start-up, the contractor will check the entire equipment in view to its functionality.
All equipment parts are to be examined in view of their complete functionality. Not only an
individual device- and information verification has to be performed, but the entire
interdependent functionality from the process control to the respective signalling devices,
processing blocks and the automatic control level has to be proved. As far as process data are
not available, they have to be simulated.
During this phase, all operating conditions have to be performed. The step-by-step start-up
can only be carried out upon the successful functional tests.
On request of the Project Manager, the Contractor is obliged to demonstrate the functionality
of the plant under “dry conditions”.
Furthermore, the functional testing of electrical equipment includes the verification of the
correct operation of all switching, measuring, the checks on keeping the desired temperature
of all engines and drives, insulation tests for all power circuits (voltage tests) etc.
For the WWTP the correct operation of the permanent emergency generator set, and thus the
operation of the entire electrical plant under emergency power supply, has to be simulated
and tested under power cut conditions.
Performing the tests, the Contractor shall use only tested measuring instruments. A copy of
the test certificate for test instruments shall be submitted at request of the Project Manager.
9.2 Start-up
Prior to start-up, all necessary certificates and test protocols have to be submitted to the
Project Manager.
The starting up of the electrical plant is effected together with the commissioning of the
mechanical equipment and the process technology. The Contractor shall carry out the start-up
including final functional tests of all connected components. These will be carried out at the
discretion of the Project Manager. Changes and adjustments will be made where necessary
for proper operation of the equipment.
At this time, the Contractor undertakes the entire responsibility for the start-up of the manual
and automatic functions for the electrical engineering.
Functional tests and the start-up are to be performed in the presence of the Project Manager
and his future operating staff. It is the Contractors obligation to render a detailed introduction
into the operation and maintenance of the electrical plant to the Project Manager’s staff.
The coordination of the plant commissioning with regards to the contractual deadlines is the
Contractor responsibility.
10 Definition of Supply of Complete Equipment
Where used in this specification, the term ‘Supply’ shall mean all of the execution designs,
drawings, documentation for and the manufacturing, packing, despatch, transport,
installation, testing, commissioning of the respective items of the complete equipment and
the complete process systems specified and/or tendered for installation at the site(s) by the
contractor according to the contractor’s instructions and under his supervision.
The term ‘Supply’ shall include but not be limited to:
1. Complete equipment of
- mechanical and all other equipment and accessories within process units and ancillary
structures;
- equipment including hoists, conveyors, valve operating systems and scour systems and
waste disposal
- pipework, penstocks, gates, fittings and all accessories.
2. Miscellaneous
- pipework, jointing materials including connectors, gaskets, bolts, nuts and washers;
- identification markings, tabs, tags and the like;
- fasteners, clips, stands, trays and hangers and all other auxiliary materials of any
description. It is recommended that all electrical trays will be from SS316.
3. Installation work of the equipment and machines delivered

- Installation of equipment and machines provided;
4. Commissioning
- test run of all mechanical, electrical equipment and on commissioning of the plant
5. Maintenance & operating instructions & spare parts lists for all items of plant
delivered:
- Parts and tools for routine maintenance;
- Maintenance & operating Instruction manuals;
- Spare parts
Annex 4. HRWWTP Conceptual Design

Annex 5. Considerations For Delivering

Imported Goods And Equipment To The
Site
1. The Final Destination shall be the HWWTP or any approved storage at Hebron
Governorate proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager and the
Employer.
2. There are no specific procedures for importing goods to Palestine in relation to shipment
and delivery method.
3. AFD and EU will finance the DSI Contract where the Contractor will be exempted from
VAT (Zero VAT Invoice) and will be granted donation number for all supplies from
abroad through seaports, land terminals and airports controlled by Israeli Customs.
4. The Contractor shall prepare all the required documentations and shall apply and
complete the registration in Palestine as per MoF procedures.
5. The Contractor shall prepare and submit the list of all items to be imported and all related
documents such as signed Contract, specifications, Performa invoices, etc. to the relevant
VAT and Custom Department as deemed necessary to complete the donation number
application.
6. The Bidders shall be aware that to complete the entire registration it might take two
months starting from the Contract signature and the Donation Number might take up to 3
to 4 months after completing the registration and submitting the application.
3-10-1
PART 3 – Conditions of
Contract and Contract
Forms
3-3
Section VII. General Conditions (GC)

Table of Clauses
A. Contract and Interpretation ............................................................................. 3-5

1. Definitions............................................................................................................ 3-5
2. Contract Documents............................................................................................. 3-8
3. Interpretation ........................................................................................................ 3-8
4. Communications ................................................................................................ 3-10
5. Law and Language ............................................................................................. 3-10
6. Fraud and Corruption ......................................................................................... 3-10
B. Subject Matter of Contract ............................................................................. 3-12
7. Scope of Facilities .............................................................................................. 3-12
8. Time for Commencement and Completion........................................................ 3-13
9. Contractor’s Responsibilities ............................................................................. 3-13
10. Employer’s Responsibilities .............................................................................. 3-14
C. Payment ............................................................................................................ 3-16
11. Contract Price..................................................................................................... 3-16
12. Terms of Payment .............................................................................................. 3-16
13. Securities ............................................................................................................ 3-17
14. Taxes and Duties ................................................................................................ 3-18
D. Intellectual Property ........................................................................................ 3-19
15. License/Use of Technical Information............................................................... 3-19
16. Confidential Information ................................................................................... 3-20
E. Execution of the Facilities ............................................................................... 3-21
17. Representatives .................................................................................................. 3-21
18. Work Program .................................................................................................... 3-23
19. Subcontracting ................................................................................................... 3-24
20. Design and Engineering ..................................................................................... 3-25
21. Procurement ....................................................................................................... 3-28
22. Installation.......................................................................................................... 3-30
23. Test and Inspection ............................................................................................ 3-38
24. Completion of the Facilities ............................................................................... 3-40
3-4 Section VII. General Conditions
25. Commissioning and Operational Acceptance .................................................... 3-42

F. Guarantees and Liabilities .............................................................................. 3-46
26. Completion Time Guarantee .............................................................................. 3-46
27. Defect Liability .................................................................................................. 3-47
28. Functional Guarantees ....................................................................................... 3-49
29. Patent Indemnity ................................................................................................ 3-50
30. Limitation of Liability........................................................................................ 3-51
G. Risk Distribution .............................................................................................. 3-52
31. Transfer of Ownership ....................................................................................... 3-52
32. Care of Facilities ................................................................................................ 3-52
33. Loss of or Damage to Property; Accident or Injury to Workers;
Indemnification .................................................................................................. 3-54
34. Insurance ............................................................................................................ 3-55
35. Unforeseen Conditions....................................................................................... 3-57
36. Change in Laws and Regulations ....................................................................... 3-59
37. Force Majeure .................................................................................................... 3-59
38. War Risks ........................................................................................................... 3-61
H. Change in Contract Elements ......................................................................... 3-62
39. Change in the Facilities ...................................................................................... 3-62
40. Extension of Time for Completion .................................................................... 3-66
41. Suspension ......................................................................................................... 3-67
42. Termination ........................................................................................................ 3-69
43. Assignment ........................................................................................................ 3-76
44. Export Restrictions............................................................................................. 3-76
I. Claims, Disputes and Arbitration ................................................................... 3-77
45. Contractor’s Claims ........................................................................................... 3-77
46. Disputes and Arbitration .................................................................................... 3-78
Section VII. General Conditions 3-5
General Conditions
Contract and Interpretation
1. Definitions 1.1 The following words and expressions shall have the meanings
hereby assigned to them:
“Contract” means the Contract Agreement entered into between
the Employer and the Contractor, together with the Contract
Documents referred to therein; they shall constitute the Contract,
and the term “the Contract” shall in all such documents be
construed accordingly.
“Contract Documents” means the documents listed in Article 1.1
(Contract Documents) of the Contract Agreement (including any
amendments thereto).
“GC” means the General Conditions hereof.
“PC” means the Particular Conditions.
“day” means calendar day .
“year” means 365 days.
“month” means calendar month.
“Party” means the Employer or the Contractor, as the context
requires, and “Parties” means both of them.
“Employer” means the person named as such in the PC and
includes the legal successors or permitted assigns of the
Employer.
“Project Manager” means the person appointed by the Employer
in the manner provided in GC Sub-Clause 17.1 (Project
Manager) hereof and named as such in the PC to perform the
duties delegated by the Employer.
“Contractor” means the person(s) whose bid to perform the
Contract has been accepted by the Employer and is named as
Contractor in the Contract Agreement, and includes the legal
successors or permitted assigns of the Contractor.
“Contractor’s Representative” means any person nominated by
the Contractor and approved by the Employer in the manner
provided in GC Sub-Clause 17.2 (Contractor’s Representative
and Construction Manager) hereof to perform the duties
delegated by the Contractor.
“Construction Manager” means the person appointed by the

Contractor’s Representative in the manner provided in GC Sub-
Clause 17.2.4.
“Subcontractor,” including manufacturers, means any person to
whom execution of any part of the Facilities, including
preparation of any design or supply of any Plant, is sub-
contracted directly or indirectly by the Contractor, and includes
its legal successors or permitted assigns.
“Dispute Board” (DB) means the person or persons named as
such in the PC appointed by agreement between the Employer
and the Contractor to make a decision with respect to any
dispute or difference between the Employer and the Contractor
referred to him or her by the Parties pursuant to GC Sub-Clause
46.1 (Dispute Board) hereof.
“The Bank” means the financing institution named in the PC.
“Contract Price” means the sum specified in Article 2.1
(Contract Price) of the Contract Agreement, subject to such
additions and adjustments thereto or deductions therefrom, as
may be made pursuant to the Contract.
“Facilities” means the Plant to be supplied and installed, as well
as all the Installation Services to be carried out by the Contractor
under the Contract.
“Plant” means permanent plant, equipment, machinery,
apparatus, materials, articles and things of all kinds to be
provided and incorporated in the Facilities by the Contractor
under the Contract (including the spare parts to be supplied by
the Contractor under GC Sub-Clause 7.3 hereof), but does not
include Contractor’s Equipment.
“Installation Services” means all those services ancillary to the
supply of the Plant for the Facilities, to be provided by the
Contractor under the Contract, such as transportation and
provision of marine or other similar insurance, inspection,
expediting, site preparation works (including the provision and
use of Contractor’s Equipment and the supply of all construction
materials required), installation, testing, precommissioning,
commissioning, operations, maintenance, the provision of
operations and maintenance manuals, training, etc… as the case
may require.
“Contractor’s Equipment” means all facilities, equipment,
machinery, tools, apparatus, appliances or things of every kind
required in or for installation, completion and maintenance of
Facilities that are to be provided by the Contractor, but does not

include Plant, or other things intended to form or forming part of
the Facilities.
“Country of Origin” means the countries and territories eligible
under the rules of the Bank as further elaborated in the PC.
“Site” means the land and other places upon which the Facilities
are to be installed, and such other land or places as may be
specified in the Contract as forming part of the Site.
“Effective Date” means the date of fulfillment of all conditions
stated in Article 3 (Effective Date) of the Contract Agreement,
from which the Time for Completion shall be counted.
“Time for Completion” means the time within which
Completion of the Facilities as a whole (or of a part of the
Facilities where a separate Time for Completion of such part has
been prescribed) is to be attained, as referred to in GC Clause 8
and in accordance with the relevant provisions of the Contract.
“Completion” means that the Facilities (or a specific part thereof
where specific parts are specified in the Contract) have been
completed operationally and structurally and put in a tight and
clean condition, that all work in respect of Precommissioning of
the Facilities or such specific part thereof has been completed,
and that the Facilities or specific part thereof are ready for
Commissioning as provided in GC Clause 24 (Completion)
hereof.
“Precommissioning” means the testing, checking and other
requirements specified in the Employer’s Requirements that are
to be carried out by the Contractor in preparation for
Commissioning as provided in GC Clause 24 (Completion)
hereof.
“Commissioning” means operation of the Facilities or any part
thereof by the Contractor following Completion, which
operation is to be carried out by the Contractor as provided in
GC Sub-Clause 25.1 (Commissioning) hereof, for the purpose of
carrying out Guarantee Test(s).
“Guarantee Test(s)” means the test(s) specified in the
Employer’s Requirements to be carried out to ascertain whether
the Facilities or a specified part thereof is able to attain the
Functional Guarantees specified in the Appendix to the Contract
Agreement titled Functional Guarantees, in accordance with the
provisions of GC Sub-Clause 25.2 (Guarantee Test) hereof.
“Operational Acceptance” means the acceptance by the

Employer of the Facilities (or any part of the Facilities where the
Contract provides for acceptance of the Facilities in parts),
which certifies the Contractor’s fulfillment of the Contract in
respect of Functional Guarantees of the Facilities (or the relevant
part thereof) in accordance with the provisions of GC Clause 28
(Functional Guarantees) hereof and shall include deemed
acceptance in accordance with GC Clause 25 (Commissioning
and Operational Acceptance) hereof.
“Defect Liability Period” means the period of validity of the
warranties given by the Contractor commencing at Completion
of the Facilities or a part thereof, during which the Contractor is
responsible for defects with respect to the Facilities (or the
relevant part thereof) as provided in GC Clause 27 (Defect
Liability) hereof.
2. Contract 2.1 Subject to Article 1.2 (Order of Precedence) of the Contract

Documents Agreement, all documents forming part of the Contract (and all
parts thereof) are intended to be correlative, complementary and
mutually explanatory. The Contract shall be read as a whole.
3. Interpretation 3.1 In the Contract, except where the context requires otherwise:
(a) words indicating one gender include all genders;
(b) words indicating the singular also include the plural and
words indicating the plural also include the singular;
(c) provisions including the word “agree,” “agreed,” or
“agreement” require the agreement to be recorded in
writing;
(d) the word “tender” is synonymous with “bid,” “tenderer,”
with “bidder,” and “tender documents” with “bidding
documents,” and
(e) “written” or “in writing” means hand-written, type-
written, printed or electronically made, and resulting in a
permanent record.
The marginal words and other headings shall not be taken into
consideration in the interpretation of these Conditions.
3.2 Incoterms
Unless inconsistent with any provision of the Contract, the
meaning of any trade term and the rights and obligations of
Parties thereunder shall be as prescribed by Incoterms.
Incoterms means international rules for interpreting trade terms

published by the International Chamber of Commerce (latest
edition), 38 Cours Albert 1er, 75008 Paris, France.
3.4 Entire Agreement
Subject to GC Sub-Clause 16.4 hereof, the Contract constitutes
the entire agreement between the Employer and Contractor with
respect to the subject matter of Contract and supersedes all
communications, negotiations and agreements (whether written
or oral) of Parties with respect thereto made prior to the date of
Contract.
3.5 Amendment
No amendment or other variation of the Contract shall be
effective unless it is in writing, is dated, expressly refers to the
Contract, and is signed by a duly authorized representative of
each Party hereto.
3.6 Independent Contractor
The Contractor shall be an independent contractor performing the
Contract. The Contract does not create any agency, partnership,
joint venture or other joint relationship between the Parties hereto.
Subject to the provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall be
solely responsible for the manner in which the Contract is
performed. All employees, representatives or Subcontractors
engaged by the Contractor in connection with the performance
of the Contract shall be under the complete control of the
Contractor and shall not be deemed to be employees of the
Employer, and nothing contained in the Contract or in any
subcontract awarded by the Contractor shall be construed to
create any contractual relationship between any such employees,
representatives or Subcontractors and the Employer.
3.7 Non-Waiver
3.7.1 Subject to GC Sub-Clause 3.7.2 below, no relaxation,
forbearance, delay or indulgence by either Party in
enforcing any of the terms and conditions of the Contract
or the granting of time by either Party to the other shall
prejudice, affect or restrict the rights of that Party under
the Contract, nor shall any waiver by either Party of any
breach of Contract operate as waiver of any subsequent or
continuing breach of Contract.
3.7.2 Any waiver of a Party’s rights, powers or remedies under
the Contract must be in writing, must be dated and signed
by an authorized representative of the Party granting such
waiver, and must specify the right and the extent to which
it is being waived.
3.8 Severability
If any provision or condition of the Contract is prohibited or
rendered invalid or unenforceable, such prohibition, invalidity or
unenforceability shall not affect the validity or enforceability of
any other provisions and conditions of the Contract.
3.9 Country of Origin
“Origin” means the place where the plant and component parts
thereof are mined, grown, produced or manufactured, and from
which the services are provided. Plant components are produced
when, through manufacturing, processing, or substantial or
major assembling of components, a commercially recognized
product results that is substantially in its basic characteristics or
in purpose or utility from its components.
4. Communica- 4.1 Wherever these Conditions provide for the giving or issuing of
tions approvals, certificates, consents, determinations, notices,
requests and discharges, these communications shall be:
(a) in writing and delivered against receipt; and
(b) delivered, sent or transmitted to the address for the
recipient’s communications as stated in the Contract
Agreement.
When a certificate is issued to a Party, the certifier shall send a
copy to the other Party. When a notice is issued to a Party, by
the other Party or the Project Manager, a copy shall be sent to
the Project Manager or the other Party, as the case may be.
5. Law and 5.1 The Contract shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance
Language with laws of the country specified in the PC.
5.2 The ruling language of the Contract shall be that stated in the PC.
5.3 The language for communications shall be the ruling language
unless otherwise stated in the PC.
6. Fraud and 6.1 If the Employer determines that the Contractor and/or any of its
Corruption personnel, or its agents, or its Subcontractors, subconsultants,
services providers, suppliers and/or their employees has
engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive coercive, or
obstructive practices, in competing for or in executing the
Contract, then the Employer may, after giving 14 days notice to
the Contractor, terminate the Contractor's employment under
the Contract and expel him from the Site, and the provisions of
Clause 42 shall apply as if such expulsion had been made under
Sub-Clause 42.2.1 (c).
For the purposes of this Sub-Clause,
(i) “corrupt practice” is the offering, giving, receiving or
soliciting, directly or indirectly, of anything of value
to influence improperly the actions of another party15;
(ii) “fraudulent practice” is any act or omission, including
a misrepresentation, that knowingly or recklessly
misleads, or attempts to mislead, a party to obtain a
financial or other benefit or to avoid an obligation16;
(iii) “collusive practice” is an arrangement between two or
more parties17 designed to achieve an improper
purpose, including to influence improperly the actions
of another party;
(iv) “coercive practice” is impairing or harming, or
threatening to impair or harm, directly or indirectly,
any party18 or the property of the party to influence
improperly the actions of a party;
(v) “obstructive practice” is
(aa) deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering or
concealing of evidence material to the
investigation or making false statements to
investigators in order to materially impede a
Bank investigation into allegations of a corrupt,
fraudulent, coercive or collusive practice; and/or
threatening, harassing or intimidating any party
to prevent it from disclosing its knowledge of
matters relevant to the investigation or from
pursuing the investigation, or
(bb) acts intended to materially impede the exercise
of the Bank’s inspection and audit rights
15
“Another party” refers to a public official acting in relation to the procurement process or contract
execution]. In this context, “public official” includes World Bank staff and employees of other
organizations taking or reviewing procurement decisions.
16
“Party” refers to a public official; the terms “benefit” and “obligation” relate to the procurement process or
contract execution; and the “act or omission” is intended to influence the procurement process or contract
execution.
17
“Parties” refers to participants in the procurement process (including public officials) attempting to
establish bid prices at artificial, non competitive levels.
18
“Party” refers to a participant in the procurement process or contract execution.
provided for under Sub-Clause 9.8.
Subject Matter of Contract

7. Scope of 7.1 Unless otherwise expressly limited in the Employer’s
Facilities Requirements, the Contractor’s obligations cover the provision
of all Plant and the performance of all Installation Services
required for the design, and the manufacture (including
procurement, quality assurance, construction, installation,
associated civil works, Precommissioning and delivery) of the
Plant, and the installation, completion and commissioning of
the Facilities in accordance with the plans, procedures,
specifications, drawings, codes and any other documents as
specified in the Section, Employer’s Requirements. Such
specifications include, but are not limited to, the provision of
supervision and engineering services; the supply of labor,
materials, equipment, spare parts (as specified in GC Sub-
Clause 7.3 below) and accessories; Contractor’s Equipment;
construction utilities and supplies; temporary materials,
structures and facilities; transportation (including, without
limitation, unloading and hauling to, from and at the Site); and
storage, except for those supplies, works and services that will
be provided or performed by the Employer, as set forth in the
Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled Scope of Works and
Supply by the Employer.
7.2 The Contractor shall, unless specifically excluded in the
Contract, perform all such work and/or supply all such items
and materials not specifically mentioned in the Contract but
that can be reasonably inferred from the Contract as being
required for attaining Completion of the Facilities as if such
work and/or items and materials were expressly mentioned in
the Contract.
7.3 In addition to the supply of Mandatory Spare Parts included in
the Contract, the Contractor agrees to supply spare parts
required for the operation and maintenance of the Facilities for
the period specified in the PC and the provisions, if any,
specified in the PC. However, the identity, specifications and
quantities of such spare parts and the terms and conditions
relating to the supply thereof are to be agreed between the
Employer and the Contractor, and the price of such spare parts
shall be that given in Price Schedule No. 6, which shall be
added to the Contract Price. The price of such spare parts shall
include the purchase price therefor and other costs and
expenses (including the Contractor’s fees) relating to the supply
of spare parts.
8. Time for 8.1 The Contractor shall commence work on the Facilities within
Commence- the period specified in the PC and without prejudice to GC
ment and Sub-Clause 26.2 hereof, the Contractor shall thereafter proceed
Completion with the Facilities in accordance with the time schedule
specified in the Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled
Time Schedule.
8.2 The Contractor shall attain Completion of the Facilities or of a
part where a separate time for Completion of such part is
specified in the Contract, within the time stated in the PC or
within such extended time to which the Contractor shall be
entitled under GC Clause 40 hereof.
9. Contractor’s 9.1 The Contractor shall design, manufacture including associated
Responsibilities purchases and/or subcontracting, install and complete the
Facilities in accordance with the Contract. When completed,
the Facilities should be fit for the purposes for which they are
intended as defined in the Contract.
9.2 The Contractor confirms that it has entered into this Contract
on the basis of a proper examination of the data relating to the
Facilities including any data as to boring tests provided by the
Employer, and on the basis of information that the Contractor
could have obtained from a visual inspection of the Site if
access thereto was available and of other data readily available
to it relating to the Facilities as of the date twenty-eight (28)
days prior to bid submission. The Contractor acknowledges
that any failure to acquaint itself with all such data and
information shall not relieve its responsibility for properly
estimating the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the
Facilities.
9.3 The Contractor shall acquire and pay for all permits, approvals
and/or licenses from all local, state or national government
authorities or public service undertakings in the country where
the Site is located which such authorities or undertakings
require the Contractor to obtain in its name and which are
necessary for the performance of the Contract, including,
without limitation, visas for the Contractor’s and
Subcontractor’s personnel and entry permits for all imported
Contractor’s Equipment. The Contractor shall acquire all other
permits, approvals and/or licenses that are not the responsibility
of the Employer under GC Sub-Clause 10.3 hereof and that are
necessary for the performance of the Contract.
9.4 The Contractor shall comply with all laws in force in the
country where the Facilities are to be implemented. The laws

will include all local, state, national or other laws that affect the
performance of the Contract and bind upon the Contractor. The
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Employer
from and against any and all liabilities, damages, claims, fines,
penalties and expenses of whatever nature arising or resulting
from the violation of such laws by the Contractor or its
personnel, including the Subcontractors and their personnel, but
without prejudice to GC Sub-Clause 10.1 hereof.
9.5 Any Plant and Installation Services that will be incorporated in
or be required for the Facilities and other supplies shall have
their origin as specified under GC Clause 1 (Country of
Origin). Any subcontractors retained by the Contractor shall be
from a country as specified in GC Clause 1 (Country of
Origin).
9.6 The Contractor shall permit the Bank to inspect the
Contractor’s accounts and records relating to the performance
of the Contractor and to have them audited by auditors
appointed by the Bank, if so required by the Bank.
9.7 If the Contractor is a joint venture, or association (JVA) of two
or more persons, all such persons shall be jointly and severally
bound to the Employer for the fulfillment of the provisions of
the Contract, unless otherwise specified in the PC, and shall
designate one of such persons to act as a leader with authority
to bind the JVA. The composition or the constitution of the
JVA shall not be altered without the prior consent of the
Employer.
9.8 The Contractor shall permit, and shall cause its Subcontractors
and subconsultants to permit, the Bank and/or persons
appointed by the Bank to inspect the Site and all accounts and
records relating to the performance of the Contract and the
submission of the Bid, and to have such accounts and records
audited by auditors appointed by the Bank if requested by the
Bank. The Contractor’s and its Subcontractors’ and
subconsultants’ attention is drawn to Sub-Clause 6.1 [Fraud
and Corruption] which provides, inter alia, that acts intended to
materially impede the exercise of the Bank’s inspection and
audit rights provided for under Sub-Clause 9.8 constitute a
prohibited practice subject to contract termination (as well as to
a determination of ineligibility pursuant to the Bank’s
prevailing sanctions procedures).
10. Employer’s 10.1 All information and/or data to be supplied by the Employer as
described in the Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled
Responsibilities Scope of Works and Supply by the Employer, shall be deemed

to be accurate, except when the Employer expressly states
otherwise.
10.2 The Employer shall be responsible for acquiring and providing
legal and physical possession of the Site and access thereto, and
for providing possession of and access to all other areas
reasonably required for the proper execution of the Contract,
including all requisite rights of way, as specified in the
Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled Scope of Works and
Supply by the Employer. The Employer shall give full
possession of and accord all rights of access thereto on or
before the date(s) specified in that Appendix.
10.3 The Employer shall acquire and pay for all permits, approvals
and/or licenses from all local, state or national government
authorities or public service undertakings in the country where
the Site is located which (a) such authorities or undertakings
require the Employer to obtain in the Employer’s name, (b) are
necessary for the execution of the Contract, including those
required for the performance by both the Contractor and the
Employer of their respective obligations under the Contract,
and (c) are specified in the Appendix (Scope of Works and
Supply by the Employer).
10.4 If requested by the Contractor, the Employer shall use its best
endeavors to assist the Contractor in obtaining in a timely and
expeditious manner all permits, approvals and/or licenses
necessary for the execution of the Contract from all local, state
or national government authorities or public service
undertakings that such authorities or undertakings require the
Contractor or Subcontractors or the personnel of the Contractor
or Subcontractors, as the case may be, to obtain.
10.5 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract or agreed upon by
the Employer and the Contractor, the Employer shall provide
sufficient, properly qualified operating and maintenance
personnel; shall supply and make available all raw materials,
utilities, lubricants, chemicals, catalysts, other materials and
facilities; and shall perform all work and services of whatsoever
nature, including those required by the Contractor to properly
carry out Precommissioning, Commissioning and Guarantee
Tests, all in accordance with the provisions of the Appendix to
the Contract Agreement titled Scope of Works and Supply by
the Employer, at or before the time specified in the program
furnished by the Contractor under GC Sub-Clause 18.2 hereof
and in the manner thereupon specified or as otherwise agreed
upon by the Employer and the Contractor.

10.6 The Employer shall be responsible for the continued operation
of the Facilities after Completion, in accordance with GC Sub-
Clause 24.8, and shall be responsible for facilitating the
Guarantee Test(s) for the Facilities, in accordance with GC
Sub-Clause 25.2.
10.7 All costs and expenses involved in the performance of the
obligations under this GC Clause 10 shall be the responsibility
of the Employer, save those to be incurred by the Contractor
with respect to the performance of Guarantee Tests, in
accordance with GC Sub-Clause 25.2.
10.8 In the event that the Employer shall be in breach of any of his
obligations under this Clause, the additional cost incurred by
the Contractor in consequence thereof shall be determined by
the Project Manager and added to the Contract Price.
Payment
11. Contract Price 11.1 The Contract Price shall be as specified in Article 2 (Contract
Price and Terms of Payment) of the Contract Agreement.
11.2 Unless an adjustment clause is provided for in the PC, the
Contract Price shall be a firm lump sum not subject to any
alteration, except in the event of a Change in the Facilities or as
otherwise provided in the Contract.
11.3 Subject to GC Sub-Clauses 9.2, 10.1 and 35 hereof, the
Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied itself as to the
correctness and sufficiency of the Contract Price, which shall,
except as otherwise provided for in the Contract, cover all its
obligations under the Contract.
12. Terms of 12.1 The Contract Price shall be paid as specified in Article 2
Payment (Contract Price and Terms of Payment) of the Contract
Agreement and in the Appendix to the Contract Agreement
titled Terms and Procedures of Payment, which also outlines
the procedures to be followed in making application for and
processing payments.
12.2 No payment made by the Employer herein shall be deemed to
constitute acceptance by the Employer of the Facilities or any
part(s) thereof.
12.3 In the event that the Employer fails to make any payment by its
respective due date or within the period set forth in the
Contract, the Employer shall pay to the Contractor interest on

the amount of such delayed payment at the rate(s) shown in the
Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled Terms and
Procedures of Payment, for the period of delay until payment
has been made in full, whether before or after judgment or
arbitrage award.
12.4 The currency or currencies in which payments are made to the
Contractor under this Contract shall be specified in the
Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled Terms and
Procedures of Payment, subject to the general principle that
payments will be made in the currency or currencies in which
the Contract Price has been stated in the Contractor’s bid.
13. Securities 13.1 Issuance of Securities

The Contractor shall provide the securities specified below in
favor of the Employer at the times, and in the amount, manner
and form specified below.
13.2 Advance Payment Security
13.2.1 The Contractor shall, within twenty-eight (28) days of
the notification of contract award, provide a security in an
amount equal to the advance payment calculated in
accordance with the Appendix to the Contract Agreement
titled Terms and Procedures of Payment, and in the same
currency or currencies.
13.2.2 The security shall be in the form provided in the
bidding documents or in another form acceptable to the
Employer. The amount of the security shall be reduced in
proportion to the value of the Facilities executed by and
paid to the Contractor from time to time, and shall
automatically become null and void when the full amount
of the advance payment has been recovered by the
Employer. The security shall be returned to the
Contractor immediately after its expiration.
13.3 Performance Security
13.3.1 The Contractor shall, within twenty-eight (28) days of
the notification of contract award, provide a security for
the due performance of the Contract in the amount
specified in the PC.
13.3.2 The performance security shall be denominated in the
currency or currencies of the Contract, or in a freely
convertible currency acceptable to the Employer, and
shall be in the form provided in Section IX, Contract

Forms, corresponding to the type of bank guarantee
stipulated by the Employer in the PC, or in another form
13.3.3 Unless otherwise specified in the PC, the security shall
be reduced by half on the date of the Operational
Acceptance. The Security shall become null and void, or
shall be reduced pro rata to the Contract Price of a part of
the Facilities for which a separate Time for Completion is
provided, five hundred and forty (540) days after
Completion of the Facilities or three hundred and sixty
five (365) days after Operational Acceptance of the
Facilities, whichever occurs first; provided, however, that
if the Defects Liability Period has been extended on any
part of the Facilities pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 27.8
hereof, the Contractor shall issue an additional security in
an amount proportionate to the Contract Price of that part.
The security shall be returned to the Contractor
immediately after its expiration, provided, however, that
if the Contractor, pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 27.10, is
liable for an extended defect liability obligation, the
performance security shall be extended for the period
specified in the PC pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 27.10 and
up to the amount specified in the PC.
13.3.4 The Employer shall not make a claim under the
Performance Security, except for amounts to which the
Employer is entitled under the Contract. The Employer
shall indemnify and hold the Contractor harmless against
and from all damages, losses and expenses (including
legal fees and expenses) resulting from a claim under the
Performance Security to the extent to which the
Employer was not entitled to make the claim.
14. Taxes and 14.1 Except as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract, the
Duties Contractor shall bear and pay all taxes, duties, levies and
charges assessed on the Contractor, its Subcontractors or their
employees by all municipal, state or national government
authorities in connection with the Facilities in and outside of
the country where the Site is located.
14.2 Notwithstanding GC Sub-Clause 14.1 above, the Employer
shall bear and promptly pay
(a) all customs and import duties for the Plant specified in
Price Schedule No. 1; and
(b) other domestic taxes such as, sales tax and value added
tax (VAT) on the Plant specified in Price Schedules No. 1
and No. 2 and that is to be incorporated into the Facilities,
and on the finished goods, imposed by the law of the
country where the Site is located.
14.3 If any tax exemptions, reductions, allowances or privileges may
be available to the Contractor in the country where the Site is
located, the Employer shall use its best endeavors to enable the
Contractor to benefit from any such tax savings to the
maximum allowable extent.
14.4 For the purpose of the Contract, it is agreed that the Contract
Price specified in Article 2 (Contract Price and Terms of
Payment) of the Contract Agreement is based on the taxes,
duties, levies and charges prevailing at the date twenty-eight
(28) days prior to the date of bid submission in the country
where the Site is located (hereinafter called “Tax” in this GC
Sub-Clause 14.4). If any rates of Tax are increased or
decreased, a new Tax is introduced, an existing Tax is
abolished, or any change in interpretation or application of any
Tax occurs in the course of the performance of Contract, which
was or will be assessed on the Contractor, Subcontractors or
their employees in connection with performance of the
Contract, an equitable adjustment of the Contract Price shall be
made to fully take into account any such change by addition to
the Contract Price or deduction therefrom, as the case may be,
in accordance with GC Clause 36 hereof.
Intellectual Property
15. License/Use of 15.1 For the operation and maintenance of the Plant, the Contractor
Technical hereby grants a non-exclusive and non-transferable license
Information (without the right to sub-license) to the Employer under the
patents, utility models or other industrial property rights
owned by the Contractor or by a third Party from whom the
Contractor has received the right to grant licenses thereunder,
and shall also grant to the Employer a non-exclusive and non-
transferable right (without the right to sub-license) to use the
know-how and other technical information disclosed to the
Employer under the Contract. Nothing contained herein shall
be construed as transferring ownership of any patent, utility
model, trademark, design, copyright, know-how or other
intellectual property right from the Contractor or any third
Party to the Employer.
15.2 The copyright in all drawings, documents and other materials
containing data and information furnished to the Employer by

the Contractor herein shall remain vested in the Contractor or,
if they are furnished to the Employer directly or through the
Contractor by any third Party, including suppliers of materials,
the copyright in such materials shall remain vested in such
third Party.
16. Confidential 16.1 The Employer and the Contractor shall keep confidential and
Information shall not, without the written consent of the other Party hereto,
divulge to any third Party any documents, data or other
information furnished directly or indirectly by the other Party
hereto in connection with the Contract, whether such
information has been furnished prior to, during or following
termination of the Contract. Notwithstanding the above, the
Contractor may furnish to its Subcontractor(s) such
documents, data and other information it receives from the
Employer to the extent required for the Subcontractor(s) to
perform its work under the Contract, in which event the
Contractor shall obtain from such Subcontractor(s) an
undertaking of confidentiality similar to that imposed on the
Contractor under this GC Clause 16.
16.2 The Employer shall not use such documents, data and other
information received from the Contractor for any purpose
other than the operation and maintenance of the Facilities.
Similarly, the Contractor shall not use such documents, data
and other information received from the Employer for any
purpose other than the design, procurement of Plant,
construction or such other work and services as are required
for the performance of the Contract.
16.3 The obligation of a Party under GC Sub-Clauses 16.1 and 16.2
above, however, shall not apply to that information which
(a) now or hereafter enters the public domain through no
fault of that Party
(b) can be proven to have been possessed by that Party at the
time of disclosure and which was not previously obtained,
directly or indirectly, from the other Party hereto
(c) otherwise lawfully becomes available to that Party from
a third Party that has no obligation of confidentiality.
16.4 The above provisions of this GC Clause 16 shall not in any
way modify any undertaking of confidentiality given by either
of the Parties hereto prior to the date of the Contract in respect
of the Facilities or any part thereof.
16.5 The provisions of this GC Clause 16 shall survive termination,

for whatever reason, of the Contract.
Execution of the Facilities

17. Representatives 17.1 Project Manager
If the Project Manager is not named in the Contract, then within
fourteen (14) days of the Effective Date, the Employer shall
appoint and notify the Contractor in writing of the name of
the Project Manager. The Employer may from time to time
appoint some other person as the Project Manager in place of
the person previously so appointed, and shall give a notice of
the name of such other person to the Contractor without
delay. No such appointment shall be made at such a time or
in such a manner as to impede the progress of work on the
Facilities. Such appointment shall only take effect upon
receipt of such notice by the Contractor. The Project
Manager shall represent and act for the Employer at all times
during the performance of the Contract. All notices,
instructions, orders, certificates, approvals and all other
communications under the Contract shall be given by the
Project Manager, except as herein otherwise provided.
All notices, instructions, information and other
communications given by the Contractor to the Employer
under the Contract shall be given to the Project Manager,
except as herein otherwise provided.
17.2 Contractor’s Representative & Construction Manager
17.2.1 If the Contractor’s Representative is not named in the
Contract, then within fourteen (14) days of the
Effective Date, the Contractor shall appoint the
Contractor’s Representative and shall request the
Employer in writing to approve the person so
appointed. If the Employer makes no objection to the
appointment within fourteen (14) days, the
Contractor’s Representative shall be deemed to have
been approved. If the Employer objects to the
appointment within fourteen (14) days giving the
reason therefor, then the Contractor shall appoint a
replacement within fourteen (14) days of such
objection, and the foregoing provisions of this GC
Sub-Clause 17.2.1 shall apply thereto.
17.2.2 The Contractor’s Representative shall represent and
act for the Contractor at all times during the
performance of the Contract and shall give to the

Project Manager all the Contractor’s notices,
instructions, information and all other communications
under the Contract.
All notices, instructions, information and all other
communications given by the Employer or the Project
Manager to the Contractor under the Contract shall be given
to the Contractor’s Representative or, in its absence, its
deputy, except as herein otherwise provided.
The Contractor shall not revoke the appointment of the
Contractor’s Representative without the Employer’s prior
written consent, which shall not be unreasonably withheld. If
the Employer consents thereto, the Contractor shall appoint
some other person as the Contractor’s Representative,
pursuant to the procedure set out in GC Sub-Clause 17.2.1.
17.2.3 The Contractor’s Representative may, subject to the
approval of the Employer which shall not be unreasonably
withheld, at any time delegate to any person any of the
powers, functions and authorities vested in him or her. Any
such delegation may be revoked at any time. Any such
delegation or revocation shall be subject to a prior notice
signed by the Contractor’s Representative, and shall specify
the powers, functions and authorities thereby delegated or
revoked. No such delegation or revocation shall take effect
unless and until a copy thereof has been delivered to the
Employer and the Project Manager.
Any act or exercise by any person of powers, functions and
authorities so delegated to him or her in accordance with this
GC Sub-Clause 17.2.3 shall be deemed to be an act or
exercise by the Contractor’s Representative.
17.2.4 From the commencement of installation of the Facilities at
the Site until Completion, the Contractor’s Representative
shall appoint a suitable person as the Construction Manager.
The Construction Manager shall supervise all work done at
the Site by the Contractor and shall be present at the Site
throughout normal working hours except when on leave, sick
or absent for reasons connected with the proper performance
of the Contract. Whenever the Construction Manager is
absent from the Site, a suitable person shall be appointed to
act as the Construction Manager’s deputy.
17.2.5 The Employer may by notice to the Contractor object to any
representative or person employed by the Contractor in the
execution of the Contract who, in the reasonable opinion of

the Employer, may behave inappropriately, may be
incompetent or negligent, or may commit a serious breach of
the Site regulations provided under GC Sub-Clause 22.3. The
Employer shall provide evidence of the same, whereupon the
Contractor shall remove such person from the Facilities.
17.2.6 If any representative or person employed by the Contractor
is removed in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 17.2.5, the
Contractor shall, where required, promptly appoint a
replacement.
18. Work Program 18.1 Contractor’s Organization

The Contractor shall supply to the Employer and the Project
Manager a chart showing the proposed organization to be
established by the Contractor for carrying out work on the
Facilities within twenty-one (21) days of the Effective Date.
The chart shall include the identities of the key personnel and
the curricula vitae of such key personnel to be employed shall
be supplied together with the chart. The Contractor shall
promptly inform the Employer and the Project Manager in
writing of any revision or alteration of such an organization
chart.
18.2 Program of Performance
Within twenty-eight (28) days after the Effective Date, the
Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager a detailed
program of performance of the Contract, made in a form
acceptable to the Project Manager and showing the sequence
in which it proposes to design, manufacture, transport,
assemble, install and precommission the Facilities, as well as
the date by which the Contractor reasonably requires that the
Employer shall have fulfilled its obligations under the
Contract so as to enable the Contractor to execute the
Contract in accordance with the program and to achieve
Completion, Commissioning and Acceptance of the Facilities
in accordance with the Contract. The program so submitted
by the Contractor shall accord with the Time Schedule
included in the Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled
Time Schedule, and any other dates and periods specified in
the Contract. The Contractor shall update and revise the
program as and when appropriate or when required by the
Project Manager, but without modification in the Times for
Completion specified in the PC pursuant to Sub-Clause 8.2
and any extension granted in accordance with GC Clause 40,
and shall submit all such revisions to the Project Manager.

18.3 Progress Report
The Contractor shall monitor progress of all the activities
specified in the program referred to in GC Sub-Clause 18.2
above, and supply a progress report to the Project Manager
every month.
The progress report shall be in a form acceptable to the
Project Manager and shall indicate: (a) percentage completion
achieved compared with the planned percentage completion
for each activity; and (b) where any activity is behind the
program, giving comments and likely consequences and
stating the corrective action being taken.
18.4 Progress of Performance
If at any time the Contractor’s actual progress falls behind the
program referred to in GC Sub-Clause 18.2, or it becomes
apparent that it will so fall behind, the Contractor shall, at the
request of the Employer or the Project Manager, prepare and
submit to the Project Manager a revised program, taking into
account the prevailing circumstances, and shall notify the
Project Manager of the steps being taken to expedite progress
so as to attain Completion of the Facilities within the Time for
Completion under GC Sub-Clause 8.2, any extension thereof
entitled under GC Sub-Clause 40.1, or any extended period as
may otherwise be agreed upon between the Employer and the
Contractor.
18.5 Procedures
The Contract shall be executed in accordance with the
Contract Documents including the procedures given in the
Forms and Procedures of the Employer’s Requirements.
The Contractor may execute the Contract in accordance with
its own standard project execution plans and procedures to the
extent that they do not conflict with the provisions contained
in the Contract.
19. Subcontracting 19.1 The Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled List of Major
Items of Plant and Installation Services and List of Approved
Subcontractors, specifies major items of supply or services
and a list of approved Subcontractors against each item,
including manufacturers. Insofar as no Subcontractors are
listed against any such item, the Contractor shall prepare a list
of Subcontractors for such item for inclusion in such list. The
Contractor may from time to time propose any addition to or

deletion from any such list. The Contractor shall submit any
such list or any modification thereto to the Employer for its
approval in sufficient time so as not to impede the progress of
work on the Facilities. Such approval by the Employer for
any of the Subcontractors shall not relieve the Contractor
from any of its obligations, duties or responsibilities under the
Contract.
19.2 The Contractor shall select and employ its Subcontractors for
such major items from those listed in the lists referred to in
GC Sub-Clause 19.1.
19.3 For items or parts of the Facilities not specified in the
Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled List of Major
Items of Plant and Installation Services and List of Approved
Subcontractors, the Contractor may employ such
Subcontractors as it may select, at its discretion.
19.4 Each sub-contract shall include provisions which would
entitle the Employer to require the sub-contract to be
assigned to the Employer under GC 19.5 (if and when
applicable), or in event of termination by the Employer under
GC 42.2.
19.5 If a sub-contractor's obligations extend beyond the expiry
date of the relevant Defects Liability Period and the Project
Manager, prior to that date, instructs the Contractor to assign
the benefits of such obligations to the Employer, then the
Contractor shall do so.
20. Design and 20.1 Specifications and Drawings
Engineering
20.1.1 The Contractor shall execute the basic and detailed design
and the engineering work in compliance with the provisions
of the Contract, or where not so specified, in accordance with
good engineering practice.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any discrepancies,
errors or omissions in the specifications, drawings and other
technical documents that it has prepared, whether such
specifications, drawings and other documents have been
approved by the Project Manager or not, provided that such
discrepancies, errors or omissions are not because of
inaccurate information furnished in writing to the Contractor
by or on behalf of the Employer.
20.1.2 The Contractor shall be entitled to disclaim responsibility
for any design, data, drawing, specification or other
document, or any modification thereof provided or designated

by or on behalf of the Employer, by giving a notice of such
disclaimer to the Project Manager.
20.2 Codes and Standards
Wherever references are made in the Contract to codes and
standards in accordance with which the Contract shall be
executed, the edition or the revised version of such codes and
standards current at the date twenty-eight (28) days prior to
date of bid submission shall apply unless otherwise specified.
During Contract execution, any changes in such codes and
standards shall be applied subject to approval by the
Employer and shall be treated in accordance with GC Clause
39.
20.3 Approval/Review of Technical Documents by Project Manager
20.3.1 The Contractor shall prepare or cause its
Subcontractors to prepare, and furnish to the Project
Manager the documents listed in the Appendix to the
Contract Agreement titled List of Documents for
Approval or Review, for its approval or review as
specified and in accordance with the requirements of
GC Sub-Clause 18.2 (Program of Performance).
Any part of the Facilities covered by or related to the
documents to be approved by the Project Manager
shall be executed only after the Project Manager’s
approval thereof.
GC Sub-Clauses 20.3.2 through 20.3.7 shall apply to
those documents requiring the Project Manager’s
approval, but not to those furnished to the Project
Manager for its review only.
20.3.2 Within fourteen (14) days after receipt by the Project
Manager of any document requiring the Project
Manager’s approval in accordance with GC Sub-
Clause 20.3.1, the Project Manager shall either return
one copy thereof to the Contractor with its approval
endorsed thereon or shall notify the Contractor in
writing of its disapproval thereof and the reasons
therefor and the modifications that the Project
Manager proposes.
If the Project Manager fails to take such action within
the said fourteen (14) days, then the said document
shall be deemed to have been approved by the Project
Manager.
20.3.3 The Project Manager shall not disapprove any
document, except on the grounds that the document
does not comply with the Contract or that it is contrary
to good engineering practice.
20.3.4 If the Project Manager disapproves the document, the
Contractor shall modify the document and resubmit it
for the Project Manager’s approval in accordance with
GC Sub-Clause 20.3.2. If the Project Manager
approves the document subject to modification(s), the
Contractor shall make the required modification(s),
whereupon the document shall be deemed to have been
approved.
20.3.5 If any dispute or difference occurs between the
Employer and the Contractor in connection with or
arising out of the disapproval by the Project Manager
of any document and/or any modification(s) thereto
that cannot be settled between the Parties within a
reasonable period, then such dispute or difference may
be referred to a Dispute Board for determination in
accordance with GC Sub-Clause 46.1 hereof. If such
dispute or difference is referred to a Dispute Board,
the Project Manager shall give instructions as to
whether and if so, how, performance of the Contract is
to proceed. The Contractor shall proceed with the
Contract in accordance with the Project Manager’s
instructions, provided that if the Dispute Board
upholds the Contractor’s view on the dispute and if the
Employer has not given notice under GC Sub-Clause
46.3 hereof, then the Contractor shall be reimbursed
by the Employer for any additional costs incurred by
reason of such instructions and shall be relieved of
such responsibility or liability in connection with the
dispute and the execution of the instructions as the
Dispute Board shall decide, and the Time for
Completion shall be extended accordingly.
20.3.6 The Project Manager’s approval, with or without

modification of the document furnished by the
Contractor, shall not relieve the Contractor of any
responsibility or liability imposed upon it by any
provisions of the Contract except to the extent that any
subsequent failure results from modifications required
by the Project Manager.
20.3.7 The Contractor shall not depart from any approved

document unless the Contractor has first submitted to
the Project Manager an amended document and
obtained the Project Manager’s approval thereof,
pursuant to the provisions of this GC Sub-Clause 20.3.
If the Project Manager requests any change in any

already approved document and/or in any document
based thereon, the provisions of GC Clause 39 shall
apply to such request.
21. Procurement 21.1 Plant

Subject to GC Sub-Clause 14.2, the Contractor shall procure
and transport all Plant in an expeditious and orderly manner
to the Site.
21.2 Employer-Supplied Plant
If the Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled Scope of
Works and Supply by the Employer, provides that the
Employer shall furnish any specific items to the Contractor,
the following provisions shall apply:
21.2.1 The Employer shall, at its own risk and expense, transport
each item to the place on or near the Site as agreed upon by
the Parties and make such item available to the Contractor at
the time specified in the program furnished by the Contractor,
pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 18.2, unless otherwise mutually
agreed.
21.2.2 Upon receipt of such item, the Contractor shall inspect the
same visually and notify the Project Manager of any detected
shortage, defect or default. The Employer shall immediately
remedy any shortage, defect or default, or the Contractor
shall, if practicable and possible, at the request of the
Employer, remedy such shortage, defect or default at the
Employer’s cost and expense. After inspection, such item
shall fall under the care, custody and control of the
Contractor. The provision of this GC Sub-Clause 21.2.2 shall
apply to any item supplied to remedy any such shortage or
default or to substitute for any defective item, or shall apply
to defective items that have been repaired.
21.2.3 The foregoing responsibilities of the Contractor and its
obligations of care, custody and control shall not relieve the
Employer of liability for any undetected shortage, defect or
default, nor place the Contractor under any liability for any
such shortage, defect or default whether under GC Clause 27

or under any other provision of Contract.
21.3 Transportation
21.3.1 The Contractor shall at its own risk and expense
transport all the materials and the Contractor’s
Equipment to the Site by the mode of transport that the
Contractor judges most suitable under all the
circumstances.
21.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the
Contractor shall be entitled to select any safe mode of
transport operated by any person to carry the materials
and the Contractor’s Equipment.
21.3.3 Upon dispatch of each shipment of materials and the
Contractor’s Equipment, the Contractor shall notify
the Employer by telex, cable, facsimile or electronic
means, of the description of the materials and of the
Contractor’s Equipment, the point and means of
dispatch, and the estimated time and point of arrival in
the country where the Site is located, if applicable, and
at the Site. The Contractor shall furnish the Employer
with relevant shipping documents to be agreed upon
between the Parties.
21.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, if
necessary, approvals from the authorities for
transportation of the materials and the Contractor’s
Equipment to the Site. The Employer shall use its best
endeavors in a timely and expeditious manner to assist
the Contractor in obtaining such approvals, if
requested by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
indemnify and hold harmless the Employer from and
against any claim for damage to roads, bridges or any
other traffic facilities that may be caused by the
transport of the materials and the Contractor’s
Equipment to the Site.
21.4 Customs Clearance
The Contractor shall, at its own expense, handle all imported
materials and Contractor’s Equipment at the point(s) of
import and shall handle any formalities for customs clearance,
subject to the Employer’s obligations under GC Sub-Clause
14.2, provided that if applicable laws or regulations require
any application or act to be made by or in the name of the
Employer, the Employer shall take all necessary steps to

comply with such laws or regulations. In the event of delays
in customs clearance that are not the fault of the Contractor,
the Contractor shall be entitled to an extension in the Time for
Completion, pursuant to GC Clause 40.
22. Installation 22.1 Setting Out/Supervision
22.1.1 Bench Mark: The Contractor shall be responsible for
the true and proper setting-out of the Facilities in
relation to bench marks, reference marks and lines
provided to it in writing by or on behalf of the
Employer.
If, at any time during the progress of installation of the
Facilities, any error shall appear in the position, level
or alignment of the Facilities, the Contractor shall
forthwith notify the Project Manager of such error and,
at its own expense, immediately rectify such error to
the reasonable satisfaction of the Project Manager. If
such error is based on incorrect data provided in
writing by or on behalf of the Employer, the expense
of rectifying the same shall be borne by the Employer.
22.1.2 Contractor’s Supervision: The Contractor shall give or
provide all necessary superintendence during the
installation of the Facilities, and the Construction
Manager or its deputy shall be constantly on the Site to
provide full-time superintendence of the installation.
The Contractor shall provide and employ only
technical personnel who are skilled and experienced in
their respective callings and supervisory staff who are
competent to adequately supervise the work at hand.
22.2 Labor:
22.2.1 Engagement of Staff and Labor
Except as otherwise stated in the Specification, the
Contractor shall make arrangements for the
engagement of all staff and labor, local or otherwise,
and for their payment, housing, feeding and transport.
The Contractor shall provide and employ on the Site in
the installation of the Facilities such skilled, semi-
skilled and unskilled labor as is necessary for the
proper and timely execution of the Contract. The
Contractor is encouraged to use local labor that has the
necessary skills.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all
necessary permit(s) and/or visa(s) from the appropriate
authorities for the entry of all labor and personnel to be
employed on the Site into the country where the Site is
located. The Employer will, if requested by the
Contractor, use his best endeavors in a timely and
expeditious manner to assist the Contractor in
obtaining any local, state, national or government
permission required for bringing in the Contractor’s
personnel.
The Contractor shall at its own expense provide the
means of repatriation to all of its and its
Subcontractor’s personnel employed on the Contract at
the Site to the place where they were recruited or to
their domicile. It shall also provide suitable temporary
maintenance of all such persons from the cessation of
their employment on the Contract to the date
programmed for their departure. In the event that the
Contractor defaults in providing such means of
transportation and temporary maintenance, the
Employer may provide the same to such personnel and
recover the cost of doing so from the Contractor.
22.2.2 Persons in the Service of Employer
The Contractor shall not recruit, or attempt to recruit,
staff and labor from amongst the Employer’s
Personnel.
22.2.3 Labor Laws
The Contractor shall comply with all the relevant labor
Laws applicable to the Contractor’s Personnel,
including Laws relating to their employment, health,
safety, welfare, immigration and emigration, and shall
allow them all their legal rights.
The Contractor shall at all times during the progress of
the Contract use its best endeavors to prevent any
unlawful, riotous or disorderly conduct or behavior by
or amongst its employees and the labor of its
Subcontractors.
The Contractor shall, in all dealings with its labor and
the labor of its Subcontractors currently employed on
or connected with the Contract, pay due regard to all
recognized festivals, official holidays, religious or

other customs and all local laws and regulations
pertaining to the employment of labor.
22.2.4 Rates of Wages and Conditions of Labor
The Contractor shall pay rates of wages, and observe
conditions of labor, which are not lower than those
established for the trade or industry where the work is
carried out. If no established rates or conditions are
applicable, the Contractor shall pay rates of wages and
observe conditions which are not lower than the
general level of wages and conditions observed locally
by employers whose trade or industry is similar to that
of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall inform the Contractor’s Personnel
about their liability to pay personal income taxes in the
Country in respect of such of their salaries, wages and
allowances as are chargeable under the Laws for the
time being in force, and the Contractor shall perform
such duties in regard to such deductions thereof as
may be imposed on him by such Laws.
22.2.5 Working Hours
No work shall be carried out on the Site on locally
recognized days of rest, or outside the normal working
hours stated in the PC, unless:
(a) otherwise stated in the Contract,
(b) the Project Manager gives consent, or
(c) the work is unavoidable, or necessary for the
protection of life or property or for the safety of
the Works, in which case the Contractor shall
immediately advise the Project Manager.
If and when the Contractor considers it necessary to
carry out work at night or on public holidays so as to
meet the Time for Completion and requests the Project
Manager’s consent thereto, the Project Manager shall
not unreasonably withhold such consent.
This Sub-Clause shall not apply to any work which is
customarily carried out by rotary or double-shifts.
22.2.6 Facilities for Staff and Labor
Except as otherwise stated in the Specification, the

Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary
accommodation and welfare facilities for the
Contractor’s Personnel. The Contractor shall also
provide facilities for the Employer’s Personnel as stated
in the Specification.
The Contractor shall not permit any of the Contractor’s
Personnel to maintain any temporary or permanent
living quarters within the structures forming part of the
Permanent Works.
22.2.7 Health and Safety
The Contractor shall at all times take all reasonable
precautions to maintain the health and safety of the
Contractor’s Personnel. In collaboration with local
health authorities, the Contractor shall ensure that
medical staff, first aid facilities, sick bay and ambulance
service are available at all times at the Site and at any
accommodation for Contractor’s and Employer’s
Personnel, and that suitable arrangements are made for
all necessary welfare and hygiene requirements and for
the prevention of epidemics.
The Contractor shall appoint an accident prevention
officer at the Site, responsible for maintaining safety
and protection against accidents. This person shall be
qualified for this responsibility, and shall have the
authority to issue instructions and take protective
measures to prevent accidents. Throughout the
performance of the Contract, the Contractor shall
provide whatever is required by this person to exercise
this responsibility and authority.
The Contractor shall send to the Project Manager,
details of any accident as soon as practicable after its
occurrence. The Contractor shall maintain records and
make reports concerning health, safety and welfare of
persons, and damage to property, as the Engineer may
reasonably require.
The Contractor shall throughout the contract (including
the Defects Notification Period): (i) conduct
Information, Education and Consultation
Communication (IEC) campaigns, at least every other
month, addressed to all the Site staff and labor
(including all the Contractor's employees, all Sub-
Contractors and Employer’s and Project Manager’s'

employees, and all truck drivers and crew making
deliveries to Site for construction activities) and to the
immediate local communities, concerning the risks,
dangers and impact, and appropriate avoidance behavior
with respect to of Sexually Transmitted Diseases
(STD)—or Sexually Transmitted Infections (STI) in
general and HIV/AIDS in particular; (ii) provide male
or female condoms for all Site staff and labor as
appropriate; and (iii) provide for STI and HIV/AIDS
screening, diagnosis, counseling and referral to a
dedicated national STI and HIV/AIDS program,
(unless otherwise agreed) of all Site staff and labor.
The Contractor shall include in the program to be
submitted for the execution of the Facilities under Sub-
Clause 18.2 an alleviation program for Site staff and labor
and their families in respect of Sexually Transmitted
Infections (STI) and Sexually Transmitted Diseases (STD)
including HIV/AIDS. The STI, STD and HIV/AIDS
alleviation program shall indicate when, how and at what
cost the Contractor plans to satisfy the requirements of this
Sub-Clause and the related specification. For each
component, the program shall detail the resources to be
provided or utilized and any related sub-contracting
proposed. The program shall also include provision of a
detailed cost estimate with supporting documentation.
Payment to the Contractor for preparation and
implementation this program shall not exceed the
Provisional Sum dedicated for this purpose.
22.2.8 Funeral Arrangements
In the event of the death of any of the Contractor’s

personnel or accompanying members of their families,
the Contractor shall be responsible for making the
appropriate arrangements for their return or burial,
unless otherwise specified in the PC.
22.2.9 Records of Contractor’s Personnel
The Contractor shall keep accurate records of the
Contractor’s personnel, including the number of each
class of Contractor’s Personnel on the Site and the
names, ages, genders, hours worked and wages paid to
all workers. These records shall be summarized on a
monthly basis in a form approved by the Project
Manager and shall be available for inspection by the
Project Manager until the Contractor has completed all

work.
22.2.10 Supply of Foodstuffs
The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of a
sufficient supply of suitable food as may be stated in
the Specification at reasonable prices for the
Contractor’s Personnel for the purposes of or in
connection with the Contract.
22.2.11 Supply of Water
The Contractor shall, having regard to local
conditions, provide on the Site an adequate supply of
drinking and other water for the use of the
Contractor’s Personnel.
22.2.12 Measures against Insect and Pest Nuisance
The Contractor shall at all times take the necessary
precautions to protect the Contractor’s Personnel
employed on the Site from insect and pest nuisance,
and to reduce their danger to health. The Contractor
shall comply with all the regulations of the local health
authorities, including use of appropriate insecticide.
22.2.13 Alcoholic Liquor or Drugs
The Contractor shall not, otherwise than in accordance
with the Laws of the Country, import, sell, give barter
or otherwise dispose of any alcoholic liquor or drugs,
or permit or allow importation, sale, gift barter or
disposal by Contractor's Personnel.
22.2.14 Arms and Ammunition
The Contractor shall not give, barter, or otherwise
dispose of, to any person, any arms or ammunition of
any kind, or allow Contractor's Personnel to do so.
22.2.15 Prohibition of All Forms of Forced or Compulsory
Labor
The contractor shall not employ “forced or compulsory
labor” in any form. “Forced or compulsory labor”
consists of all work or service, not voluntarily
performed, that is extracted from an individual under
threat of force or penalty.
22.2.16 Prohibition of Harmful Child Labor

The Contractor shall not employ any child to perform
any work that is economically exploitative, or is likely
to be hazardous to, or to interfere with, the child's
education, or to be harmful to the child's health or
physical, mental, spiritual, moral, or social
development.
22.3 Contractor’s Equipment
22.3.1 All Contractor’s Equipment brought by the Contractor
onto the Site shall be deemed to be intended to be used
exclusively for the execution of the Contract. The
Contractor shall not remove the same from the Site
without the Project Manager’s consent that such
Contractor’s Equipment is no longer required for the
execution of the Contract.
22.3.2 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, upon
completion of the Facilities, the Contractor shall
remove from the Site all Equipment brought by the
Contractor onto the Site and any surplus materials
remaining thereon.
22.3.3 The Employer will, if requested, use its best endeavors
to assist the Contractor in obtaining any local, state or
national government permission required by the
Contractor for the export of the Contractor’s
Equipment imported by the Contractor for use in the
execution of the Contract that is no longer required for
the execution of the Contract.
22.4 Site Regulations and Safety
The Employer and the Contractor shall establish Site
regulations setting out the rules to be observed in the
execution of the Contract at the Site and shall comply
therewith. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the
Employer, with a copy to the Project Manager, proposed Site
regulations for the Employer’s approval, which approval shall
not be unreasonably withheld.
Such Site regulations shall include, but shall not be limited to,
rules in respect of security, safety of the Facilities, gate
control, sanitation, medical care, and fire prevention.
22.5 Opportunities for Other Contractors
22.5.1 The Contractor shall, upon written request from the

Employer or the Project Manager, give all reasonable
opportunities for carrying out the work to any other
contractors employed by the Employer on or near the
Site.
22.5.2 If the Contractor, upon written request from the
Employer or the Project Manager, makes available to
other contractors any roads or ways the maintenance
for which the Contractor is responsible, permits the
use by such other contractors of the Contractor’s
Equipment, or provides any other service of
whatsoever nature for such other contractors, the
Employer shall fully compensate the Contractor for
any loss or damage caused or occasioned by such other
contractors in respect of any such use or service, and
shall pay to the Contractor reasonable remuneration
for the use of such equipment or the provision of such
services.
22.5.3 The Contractor shall also so arrange to perform its
work as to minimize, to the extent possible,
interference with the work of other contractors. The
Project Manager shall determine the resolution of any
difference or conflict that may arise between the
Contractor and other contractors and the workers of
the Employer in regard to their work.
22.5.4 The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager
promptly of any defects in the other contractors’ work
that come to its notice, and that could affect the
Contractor’s work. The Project Manager shall
determine the corrective measures, if any, required to
rectify the situation after inspection of the Facilities.
Decisions made by the Project Manager shall be
binding on the Contractor.
22.6 Emergency Work
If, by reason of an emergency arising in connection with and
during the execution of the Contract, any protective or
remedial work is necessary as a matter of urgency to prevent
damage to the Facilities, the Contractor shall immediately
carry out such work.
If the Contractor is unable or unwilling to do such work
immediately, the Employer may do or cause such work to be
done as the Employer may determine is necessary in order to
prevent damage to the Facilities. In such event the Employer

shall, as soon as practicable after the occurrence of any such
emergency, notify the Contractor in writing of such
emergency, the work done and the reasons therefor. If the
work done or caused to be done by the Employer is work that
the Contractor was liable to do at its own expense under the
Contract, the reasonable costs incurred by the Employer in
connection therewith shall be paid by the Contractor to the
Employer. Otherwise, the cost of such remedial work shall be
borne by the Employer.
22.7 Site Clearance
22.7.1 Site Clearance in Course of Performance: In the
course of carrying out the Contract, the Contractor
shall keep the Site reasonably free from all
unnecessary obstruction, store or remove any surplus
materials, clear away any wreckage, rubbish or
temporary works from the Site, and remove any
Contractor’s Equipment no longer required for
execution of the Contract.
22.7.2 Clearance of Site after Completion: After Completion
of all parts of the Facilities, the Contractor shall clear
away and remove all wreckage, rubbish and debris of
any kind from the Site, and shall leave the Site and
Facilities in a clean and safe condition.
22.8 Watching and Lighting
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at its own expense
all lighting, fencing, and watching when and where necessary
for the proper execution and the protection of the Facilities, or
for the safety of the owners and occupiers of adjacent
property and for the safety of the public.
23. Test and 23.1 The Contractor shall at its own expense carry out at the place
Inspection of manufacture and/or on the Site all such tests and/or
inspections of the Plant and any part of the Facilities as are
specified in the Contract.
23.2 The Employer and the Project Manager or their designated
representatives shall be entitled to attend the aforesaid test
and/or inspection, provided that the Employer shall bear all
costs and expenses incurred in connection with such
attendance including, but not limited to, all traveling and
board and lodging expenses.
23.3 Whenever the Contractor is ready to carry out any such test
and/or inspection, the Contractor shall give a reasonable

advance notice of such test and/or inspection and of the place
and time thereof to the Project Manager. The Contractor shall
obtain from any relevant third Party or manufacturer any
necessary permission or consent to enable the Employer and
the Project Manager or their designated representatives to
attend the test and/or inspection.
23.4 The Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with a
certified report of the results of any such test and/or
inspection.
If the Employer or Project Manager or their designated
representatives fails to attend the test and/or inspection, or if it
is agreed between the Parties that such persons shall not do
so, then the Contractor may proceed with the test and/or
inspection in the absence of such persons, and may provide
the Project Manager with a certified report of the results
thereof.
23.5 The Project Manager may require the Contractor to carry out
any test and/or inspection not required by the Contract,
provided that the Contractor’s reasonable costs and expenses
incurred in the carrying out of such test and/or inspection
shall be added to the Contract Price. Further, if such test
and/or inspection impede the progress of work on the
Facilities and/or the Contractor’s performance of its other
obligations under the Contract, due allowance will be made in
respect of the Time for Completion and the other obligations
so affected.
23.6 If any Plant or any part of the Facilities fails to pass any test
and/or inspection, the Contractor shall either rectify or replace
such Plant or part of the Facilities and shall repeat the test
and/or inspection upon giving a notice under GC Sub-Clause
23.3.
23.7 If any dispute or difference of opinion shall arise between the
Parties in connection with or arising out of the test and/or
inspection of the Plant or part of the Facilities that cannot be
settled between the Parties within a reasonable period of time,
it may be referred to an Dispute Board for determination in
accordance with GC Sub-Clause 6.1.
23.8 The Contractor shall afford the Employer and the Project
Manager, at the Employer’s expense, access at any reasonable
time to any place where the Plant are being manufactured or
the Facilities are being installed, in order to inspect the
progress and the manner of manufacture or installation,

provided that the Project Manager shall give the Contractor a
reasonable prior notice.
23.9 The Contractor agrees that neither the execution of a test
and/or inspection of Plant or any part of the Facilities, nor the
attendance by the Employer or the Project Manager, nor the
issue of any test certificate pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 23.4,
shall release the Contractor from any other responsibilities
under the Contract.
23.10 No part of the Facilities or foundations shall be covered up on
the Site without the Contractor carrying out any test and/or
inspection required under the Contract. The Contractor shall
give a reasonable notice to the Project Manager whenever any
such parts of the Facilities or foundations are ready or about
to be ready for test and/or inspection; such test and/or
inspection and notice thereof shall be subject to the
requirements of the Contract.
23.11 The Contractor shall uncover any part of the Facilities or
foundations, or shall make openings in or through the same as
the Project Manager may from time to time require at the Site,
and shall reinstate and make good such part or parts.
If any parts of the Facilities or foundations have been covered
up at the Site after compliance with the requirement of GC
Sub-Clause 23.10 and are found to be executed in accordance
with the Contract, the expenses of uncovering, making
openings in or through, reinstating, and making good the
same shall be borne by the Employer, and the Time for
Completion shall be reasonably adjusted to the extent that the
Contractor has thereby been delayed or impeded in the
performance of any of its obligations under the Contract.
24. Completion of 24.1 As soon as the Facilities or any part thereof has, in the
the Facilities opinion of the Contractor, been completed operationally and
structurally and put in a tight and clean condition as specified
in the Employer’s Requirements, excluding minor items not
materially affecting the operation or safety of the Facilities,
the Contractor shall so notify the Employer in writing.
24.2 Within seven (7) days after receipt of the notice from the
Contractor under GC Sub-Clause 24.1, the Employer shall
supply the operating and maintenance personnel specified in
the Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled Scope of
Works and Supply by the Employer for Precommissioning of
the Facilities or any part thereof.

Pursuant to the Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled
Scope of Works and Supply by the Employer, the Employer
shall also provide, within the said seven (7) day period, the
raw materials, utilities, lubricants, chemicals, catalysts,
facilities, services and other matters required for
Precommissioning of the Facilities or any part thereof.
24.3 As soon as reasonably practicable after the operating and
maintenance personnel have been supplied by the Employer
and the raw materials, utilities, lubricants, chemicals,
catalysts, facilities, services and other matters have been
provided by the Employer in accordance with GC Sub-Clause
24.2, the Contractor shall commence Precommissioning of the
Facilities or the relevant part thereof in preparation for
Commissioning, subject to GC Sub-Clause 25.5.
24.4 As soon as all works in respect of Precommissioning are
completed and, in the opinion of the Contractor, the Facilities
or any part thereof is ready for Commissioning, the
Contractor shall so notify the Project Manager in writing.
24.5 The Project Manager shall, within fourteen (14) days after
receipt of the Contractor’s notice under GC Sub-Clause 24.4,
either issue a Completion Certificate in the form specified in
the Employer’s Requirements (Forms and Procedures), stating
that the Facilities or that part thereof have reached
Completion as of the date of the Contractor’s notice under GC
Sub-Clause 24.4, or notify the Contractor in writing of any
defects and/or deficiencies.
If the Project Manager notifies the Contractor of any defects
and/or deficiencies, the Contractor shall then correct such
defects and/or deficiencies, and shall repeat the procedure
described in GC Sub-Clause 24.4.
If the Project Manager is satisfied that the Facilities or that
part thereof have reached Completion, the Project Manager
shall, within seven (7) days after receipt of the Contractor’s
repeated notice, issue a Completion Certificate stating that the
Facilities or that part thereof have reached Completion as of
the date of the Contractor’s repeated notice.
If the Project Manager is not so satisfied, then it shall notify

the Contractor in writing of any defects and/or deficiencies
within seven (7) days after receipt of the Contractor’s
repeated notice, and the above procedure shall be repeated.
24.6 If the Project Manager fails to issue the Completion

Certificate and fails to inform the Contractor of any defects
and/or deficiencies within fourteen (14) days after receipt of
the Contractor’s notice under GC Sub-Clause 24.4 or within
seven (7) days after receipt of the Contractor’s repeated notice
under GC Sub-Clause 24.5, or if the Employer makes use of
the Facilities or part thereof, then the Facilities or that part
thereof shall be deemed to have reached Completion as of the
date of the Contractor’s notice or repeated notice, or as of the
Employer’s use of the Facilities, as the case may be.
24.7 As soon as possible after Completion, the Contractor shall

complete all outstanding minor items so that the Facilities are
fully in accordance with the requirements of the Contract,
failing which the Employer will undertake such completion
and deduct the costs thereof from any monies owing to the
Contractor.
24.8 Upon Completion, the Employer shall be responsible for the

care and custody of the Facilities or the relevant part thereof,
together with the risk of loss or damage thereto, and shall
thereafter take over the Facilities or the relevant part thereof.
25. Commissioning 25.1 Commissioning

and Operational
Acceptance 25.1.1 Commissioning of the Facilities or any part thereof
shall be commenced by the Contractor immediately
after issue of the Completion Certificate by the Project
Manager, pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 24.5, or
immediately after the date of the deemed Completion,
under GC Sub-Clause 24.6.
25.1.2 The Employer shall supply the operating and
maintenance personnel and all raw materials, utilities,
lubricants, chemicals, catalysts, facilities, services and
other matters required for Commissioning.
25.1.3 In accordance with the requirements of the Contract,
the Contractor’s and Project Manager’s advisory
personnel shall attend the Commissioning, including
the Guarantee Test, and shall advise and assist the
Employer.
25.2 Guarantee Test
25.2.1 Subject to GC Sub-Clause 25.5, the Guarantee Test
and repeats thereof shall be conducted by the

Contractor during Commissioning of the Facilities or
the relevant part thereof to ascertain whether the
Facilities or the relevant part can attain the Functional
Guarantees specified in the Appendix to the Contract
Agreement titled Functional Guarantees. The
Employer shall promptly provide the Contractor with
such information as the Contractor may reasonably
require in relation to the conduct and results of the
Guarantee Test and any repeats thereof.
25.2.2 If for reasons not attributable to the Contractor, the
Guarantee Test of the Facilities or the relevant part
thereof cannot be successfully completed within the
period from the date of Completion specified in the
PC or any other period agreed upon by the Employer
and the Contractor, the Contractor shall be deemed to
have fulfilled its obligations with respect to the
Functional Guarantees, and GC Sub-Clauses 28.2 and
28.3 shall not apply.
25.3 Operational Acceptance
25.3.1 Subject to GC Sub-Clause 25.4 below, Operational
Acceptance shall occur in respect of the Facilities or any part
thereof when
(a) the Guarantee Test has been successfully completed and
the Functional Guarantees are met; or
(b) the Guarantee Test has not been successfully completed
or has not been carried out for reasons not attributable
to the Contractor within the period from the date of
Completion specified in the PC pursuant to GC Sub-
Clause 25.2.2 above or any other period agreed upon by
the Employer and the Contractor; or
(c) the Contractor has paid the liquidated damages
specified in GC Sub-Clause 28.3 hereof; and
(d) any minor items mentioned in GC Sub-Clause 24.7
hereof relevant to the Facilities or that part thereof have
been completed.
25.3.2 At any time after any of the events set out in GC Sub-
Clause 25.3.1 have occurred, the Contractor may give
a notice to the Project Manager requesting the issue of
an Operational Acceptance Certificate in the form
provided in the Employer’s Requirements (Forms and
Procedures) in respect of the Facilities or the part

thereof specified in such notice as of the date of such
notice.
25.3.3 The Project Manager shall, after consultation with the
Employer, and within seven (7) days after receipt of
the Contractor’s notice, issue an Operational
Acceptance Certificate.
25.3.4 If within seven (7) days after receipt of the
Contractor’s notice, the Project Manager fails to issue
the Operational Acceptance Certificate or fails to
inform the Contractor in writing of the justifiable
reasons why the Project Manager has not issued the
Operational Acceptance Certificate, the Facilities or
the relevant part thereof shall be deemed to have been
accepted as of the date of the Contractor’s said notice.
25.4 Partial Acceptance
25.4.1 If the Contract specifies that Completion and
Commissioning shall be carried out in respect of parts
of the Facilities, the provisions relating to Completion
and Commissioning including the Guarantee Test shall
apply to each such part of the Facilities individually,
and the Operational Acceptance Certificate shall be
issued accordingly for each such part of the Facilities.
25.4.2 If a part of the Facilities comprises facilities such as
buildings, for which no Commissioning or Guarantee
Test is required, then the Project Manager shall issue
the Operational Acceptance Certificate for such
facility when it attains Completion, provided that the
Contractor shall thereafter complete any outstanding
minor items that are listed in the Operational
Acceptance Certificate.
25.5 Delayed Precommissioning and/or Guarantee Test
25.5.1 In the event that the Contractor is unable to proceed
with the Precommissioning of the Facilities pursuant
to Sub-Clause 24.3, or with the Guarantee Test
pursuant to Sub-Clause 25.2, for reasons attributable to
the Employer either on account of non availability of
other facilities under the responsibilities of other
contractor(s), or for reasons beyond the Contractor’s
control, the provisions leading to “deemed”
completion of activities such as Completion, pursuant
to GC Sub-Clause 24.6, and Operational Acceptance,

pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 25.3.4, and Contractor’s
obligations regarding Defect Liability Period, pursuant
to GC Sub-Clause 27.2, Functional Guarantee,
pursuant to GC Clause 28, and Care of Facilities,
pursuant to GC Clause 32, and GC Clause 41.1,
Suspension, shall not apply. In this case, the following
provisions shall apply.
25.5.2 When the Contractor is notified by the Project
Manager that he will be unable to proceed with the
activities and obligations pursuant to above Sub-
Clause 13.1, the Contractor shall be entitled to the
following:
(a) the Time of Completion shall be extended for the
period of suspension without imposition of
liquidated damages pursuant to GC Sub-Clause
26.2;
(b) payments due to the Contractor in accordance
with the provision specified in the Appendix to
the Contract Agreement titled Terms and
Procedures of Payment, which would not have
been payable in normal circumstances due to
non-completion of the subject activities, shall be
released to the Contractor against submission of
a security in the form of a bank guarantee of
equivalent amount acceptable to the Employer,
and which shall become null and void when the
Contractor will have complied with its
obligations regarding those payments, subject to
the provision of Sub-Clause 25.5.3 below;
(c) the expenses towards the above security and
extension of other securities under the contract,
of which validity needs to be extended, shall be
reimbursed to the Contractor by the Employer;
(d) the additional charges towards the care of the
Facilities pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 32.1 shall
be reimbursed to the Contractor by the Employer
for the period between the notification
mentioned above and the notification mentioned
in Sub-Clause 25.5.4 below. The provision of
GC Sub-Clause 33.2 shall apply to the Facilities
during the same period.
25.5.3 In the event that the period of suspension under above

Sub-Clause 25.5.1 actually exceeds one hundred
eighty (180) days, the Employer and Contractor shall
mutually agree to any additional compensation payable
to the Contractor.
25.5.4 When the Contractor is notified by the Project
Manager that the plant is ready for Precommissioning,
the Contractor shall proceed without delay in
performing Precommissioning in accordance with
Clause 24.
Guarantees and Liabilities

26. Completion 26.1 The Contractor guarantees that it shall attain Completion of the
Time Facilities (or a part for which a separate time for completion is
Guarantee specified) within the Time for Completion specified in the PC
pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 8.2, or within such extended time to
which the Contractor shall be entitled under GC Clause 40
hereof.
26.2 If the Contractor fails to attain Completion of the Facilities or
any part thereof within the Time for Completion or any
extension thereof under GC Clause 40, the Contractor shall pay
to the Employer liquidated damages in the amount specified in
the PC as a percentage rate of the Contract Price or the relevant
part thereof. The aggregate amount of such liquidated damages
shall in no event exceed the amount specified as “Maximum”
in the PC as a percentage rate of the Contract Price. Once the
“Maximum” is reached, the Employer may consider termination
of the Contract, pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 42.2.2.
Such payment shall completely satisfy the Contractor’s
obligation to attain Completion of the Facilities or the relevant
part thereof within the Time for Completion or any extension
thereof under GC Clause 40. The Contractor shall have no
further liability whatsoever to the Employer in respect thereof.
However, the payment of liquidated damages shall not in any
way relieve the Contractor from any of its obligations to
complete the Facilities or from any other obligations and
liabilities of the Contractor under the Contract.
Save for liquidated damages payable under this GC Sub-Clause
26.2, the failure by the Contractor to attain any milestone or
other act, matter or thing by any date specified in the Appendix
to the Contract Agreement titled Time Schedule, and/or other
program of work prepared pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 18.2 shall
not render the Contractor liable for any loss or damage thereby
suffered by the Employer.
26.3 If the Contractor attains Completion of the Facilities or any part
thereof before the Time for Completion or any extension thereof
under GC Clause 40, the Employer shall pay to the Contractor a
bonus in the amount specified in the PC. The aggregate amount
of such bonus shall in no event exceed the amount specified as
“Maximum” in the PC.
27. Defect 27.1 The Contractor warrants that the Facilities or any part thereof
Liability shall be free from defects in the design, engineering, materials
and workmanship of the Plant supplied and of the work
executed.
27.2 The Defect Liability Period shall be five hundred and forty (540)
days from the date of Completion of the Facilities (or any part
thereof) or one year from the date of Operational Acceptance of
the Facilities (or any part thereof), whichever first occurs, unless
specified otherwise in the PC pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 27.10.
If during the Defect Liability Period any defect should be found
in the design, engineering, materials and workmanship of the
Plant supplied or of the work executed by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall promptly, in consultation and agreement with
the Employer regarding appropriate remedying of the defects,
and at its cost, repair, replace or otherwise make good as the
Contractor shall determine at its discretion, such defect as well
as any damage to the Facilities caused by such defect. The
Contractor shall not be responsible for the repair, replacement or
making good of any defect or of any damage to the Facilities
arising out of or resulting from any of the following causes:
(a) improper operation or maintenance of the Facilities by the
Employer;
(b) operation of the Facilities outside specifications provided
in the Contract; or
(c) normal wear and tear.
27.3 The Contractor’s obligations under this GC Clause 27 shall not
apply to:
(a) any materials that are supplied by the Employer under GC
Sub-Clause 21.2, are normally consumed in operation, or
have a normal life shorter than the Defect Liability Period
stated herein;
(b) any designs, specifications or other data designed, supplied

or specified by or on behalf of the Employer or any
matters for which the Contractor has disclaimed
responsibility herein; or
(c) any other materials supplied or any other work executed
by or on behalf of the Employer, except for the work
executed by the Employer under GC Sub-Clause 27.7.
27.4 The Employer shall give the Contractor a notice stating the
nature of any such defect together with all available evidence
thereof, promptly following the discovery thereof. The
Employer shall afford all reasonable opportunity for the
Contractor to inspect any such defect.
27.5 The Employer shall afford the Contractor all necessary access to
the Facilities and the Site to enable the Contractor to perform its
obligations under this GC Clause 27.
The Contractor may, with the consent of the Employer, remove
from the Site any Plant or any part of the Facilities that are
defective if the nature of the defect, and/or any damage to the
Facilities caused by the defect, is such that repairs cannot be
expeditiously carried out at the Site.
27.6 If the repair, replacement or making good is of such a character
that it may affect the efficiency of the Facilities or any part
thereof, the Employer may give to the Contractor a notice
requiring that tests of the defective part of the Facilities shall be
made by the Contractor immediately upon completion of such
remedial work, whereupon the Contractor shall carry out such
tests.
If such part fails the tests, the Contractor shall carry out further
repair, replacement or making good, as the case may be, until
that part of the Facilities passes such tests. The tests shall be
agreed upon by the Employer and the Contractor.
27.7 If the Contractor fails to commence the work necessary to
remedy such defect or any damage to the Facilities caused by
such defect within a reasonable time (which shall in no event be
considered to be less than fifteen (15) days), the Employer may,
following notice to the Contractor, proceed to do such work, and
the reasonable costs incurred by the Employer in connection
therewith shall be paid to the Employer by the Contractor or may
be deducted by the Employer from any monies due the
Contractor or claimed under the Performance Security.
27.8 If the Facilities or any part thereof cannot be used by reason of
such defect and/or making good of such defect, the Defect

Liability Period of the Facilities or such part, as the case may be,
shall be extended by a period equal to the period during which
the Facilities or such part cannot be used by the Employer
because of any of the aforesaid reasons.
27.9 Except as provided in GC Clauses 27 and 33, the Contractor
shall be under no liability whatsoever and howsoever arising,
and whether under the Contract or at law, in respect of defects in
the Facilities or any part thereof, the Plant, design or engineering
or work executed that appear after Completion of the Facilities
or any part thereof, except where such defects are the result of
the gross negligence, fraud, or criminal or willful action of the
Contractor.
27.10 In addition, any such component of the Facilities, and during the
period of time as may be specified in the PC, shall be subject to
an extended defect liability period. Such obligation of the
Contractor shall be in addition to the defect liability period
specified under GC Sub-Clause 27.2.
28. Functional 28.1 The Contractor guarantees that during the Guarantee Test, the
Guarantees Facilities and all parts thereof shall attain the Functional
Guarantees specified in the Appendix to the Contract Agreement
titled Functional Guarantees, subject to and upon the conditions
therein specified.
28.2 If, for reasons attributable to the Contractor, the minimum level
of the Functional Guarantees specified in the Appendix to the
Contract Agreement titled Functional Guarantees, are not met
either in whole or in part, the Contractor shall at its cost and
expense make such changes, modifications and/or additions to
the Plant or any part thereof as may be necessary to meet at least
the minimum level of such Guarantees. The Contractor shall
notify the Employer upon completion of the necessary changes,
modifications and/or additions, and shall request the Employer
to repeat the Guarantee Test until the minimum level of the
Guarantees has been met. If the Contractor eventually fails to
meet the minimum level of Functional Guarantees, the Employer
may consider termination of the Contract, pursuant to GC Sub-
Clause 42.2.2.
28.3 If, for reasons attributable to the Contractor, the Functional
Guarantees specified in the Appendix to the Contract Agreement
titled Functional Guarantees, are not attained either in whole or
in part, but the minimum level of the Functional Guarantees
specified in the said Appendix to the Contract Agreement is met,
the Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s option, either

(a) make such changes, modifications and/or additions to the
Facilities or any part thereof that are necessary to attain the
Functional Guarantees at its cost and expense, and shall
request the Employer to repeat the Guarantee Test or
(b) pay liquidated damages to the Employer in respect of the
failure to meet the Functional Guarantees in accordance
with the provisions in the Appendix to the Contract
Agreement titled Functional Guarantees.
28.4 The payment of liquidated damages under GC Sub-Clause 28.3,
up to the limitation of liability specified in the Appendix to the
Contract Agreement titled Functional Guarantees, shall
completely satisfy the Contractor’s guarantees under GC Sub-
Clause 28.3, and the Contractor shall have no further liability
whatsoever to the Employer in respect thereof. Upon the
payment of such liquidated damages by the Contractor, the
Project Manager shall issue the Operational Acceptance
Certificate for the Facilities or any part thereof in respect of
which the liquidated damages have been so paid.
29. Patent 29.1 The Contractor shall, subject to the Employer’s compliance with
Indemnity GC Sub-Clause 29.2, indemnify and hold harmless the Employer
and its employees and officers from and against any and all
suits, actions or administrative proceedings, claims, demands,
losses, damages, costs, and expenses of whatsoever nature,
including attorney’s fees and expenses, which the Employer may
suffer as a result of any infringement or alleged infringement of
any patent, utility model, registered design, trademark, copyright
or other intellectual property right registered or otherwise
existing at the date of the Contract by reason of: (a) the
installation of the Facilities by the Contractor or the use of the
Facilities in the country where the Site is located; and (b) the
sale of the products produced by the Facilities in any country.
Such indemnity shall not cover any use of the Facilities or any
part thereof other than for the purpose indicated by or to be
reasonably inferred from the Contract, any infringement
resulting from the use of the Facilities or any part thereof, or any
products produced thereby in association or combination with
any other equipment, plant or materials not supplied by the
Contractor, pursuant to the Contract Agreement.
29.2 If any proceedings are brought or any claim is made against the
Employer arising out of the matters referred to in GC Sub-
Clause 29.1, the Employer shall promptly give the Contractor a
notice thereof, and the Contractor may at its own expense and in
the Employer’s name conduct such proceedings or claim and any
negotiations for the settlement of any such proceedings or claim.
If the Contractor fails to notify the Employer within twenty-eight
(28) days after receipt of such notice that it intends to conduct
any such proceedings or claim, then the Employer shall be free
to conduct the same on its own behalf. Unless the Contractor
has so failed to notify the Employer within the twenty-eight (28)
day period, the Employer shall make no admission that may be
prejudicial to the defense of any such proceedings or claim.
The Employer shall, at the Contractor’s request, afford all
available assistance to the Contractor in conducting such
proceedings or claim, and shall be reimbursed by the Contractor
for all reasonable expenses incurred in so doing.
29.3 The Employer shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor
and its employees, officers and Subcontractors from and against
any and all suits, actions or administrative proceedings, claims,
demands, losses, damages, costs, and expenses of whatsoever
nature, including attorney’s fees and expenses, which the
Contractor may suffer as a result of any infringement or alleged
infringement of any patent, utility model, registered design,
trademark, copyright or other intellectual property right
registered or otherwise existing at the date of the Contract
arising out of or in connection with any design, data, drawing,
specification, or other documents or materials provided or
designed by or on behalf of the Employer.
30. Limitation of 30.1 Except in cases of criminal negligence or willful misconduct,
Liability
(a) neither Party shall be liable to the other Party, whether in
contract, tort, or otherwise, for any indirect or
consequential loss or damage, loss of use, loss of
production, or loss of profits or interest costs, which may
be suffered by the other Party in connection with the
Contract, other than specifically provided as any
obligation of the Party in the Contract, and
(b) the aggregate liability of the Contractor to the Employer,
whether under the Contract, in tort or otherwise, shall not
exceed the amount resulting from the application of the
multiplier specified in the PC, to the Contract Price or, if a
multiplier is not so specified, the total Contract Price,
provided that this limitation shall not apply to the cost of
repairing or replacing defective equipment, or to any
obligation of the Contractor to indemnify the Employer
with respect to patent infringement.
Risk Distribution
31. Transfer of 31.1 Ownership of the Plant (including spare parts) to be imported
Ownership into the country where the Site is located shall be transferred to
the Employer upon loading on to the mode of transport to be
used to convey the Plant from the country of origin to that
country.
31.2 Ownership of the Plant (including spare parts) procured in the
country where the Site is located shall be transferred to the
Employer when the Plant are brought on to the Site.
31.3 Ownership of the Contractor’s Equipment used by the
Contractor and its Subcontractors in connection with the
Contract shall remain with the Contractor or its Subcontractors.
31.4 Ownership of any Plant in excess of the requirements for the
Facilities shall revert to the Contractor upon Completion of the
Facilities or at such earlier time when the Employer and the
Contractor agree that the Plant in question are no longer required
for the Facilities.
31.5 Notwithstanding the transfer of ownership of the Plant, the
responsibility for care and custody thereof together with the risk
of loss or damage thereto shall remain with the Contractor
pursuant to GC Clause 32 (Care of Facilities) hereof until
Completion of the Facilities or the part thereof in which such
Plant are incorporated.
32. Care of 32.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the care and custody of the
Facilities Facilities or any part thereof until the date of Completion of the
Facilities pursuant to GC Clause 24 or, where the Contract provides
for Completion of the Facilities in parts, until the date of
Completion of the relevant part, and shall make good at its own
cost any loss or damage that may occur to the Facilities or the
relevant part thereof from any cause whatsoever during such
period. The Contractor shall also be responsible for any loss or
damage to the Facilities caused by the Contractor or its
Subcontractors in the course of any work carried out, pursuant to
GC Clause 27. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contractor shall
not be liable for any loss or damage to the Facilities or that part
thereof caused by reason of any of the matters specified or referred
to in paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) of GC Sub-Clauses 32.2 and 38.1.
32.2 If any loss or damage occurs to the Facilities or any part thereof
or to the Contractor’s temporary facilities by reason of

(a) insofar as they relate to the country where the Site is located,
nuclear reaction, nuclear radiation, radioactive
contamination, pressure wave caused by aircraft or other
aerial objects, or any other occurrences that an experienced
contractor could not reasonably foresee, or if reasonably
foreseeable could not reasonably make provision for or
insure against, insofar as such risks are not normally
insurable on the insurance market and are mentioned in the
general exclusions of the policy of insurance, including War
Risks and Political Risks, taken out under GC Clause 34
hereof; or
(b) any use or occupation by the Employer or any third Party
other than a Subcontractor, authorized by the Employer of
any part of the Facilities; or
(c) any use of or reliance upon any design, data or
specification provided or designated by or on behalf of the
Employer, or any such matter for which the Contractor has
disclaimed responsibility herein,
the Employer shall pay to the Contractor all sums payable in
respect of the Facilities executed, notwithstanding that the same
be lost, destroyed or damaged, and will pay to the Contractor the
replacement value of all temporary facilities and all parts thereof
lost, destroyed or damaged. If the Employer requests the
Contractor in writing to make good any loss or damage to the
Facilities thereby occasioned, the Contractor shall make good
the same at the cost of the Employer in accordance with GC
Clause 39. If the Employer does not request the Contractor in
writing to make good any loss or damage to the Facilities
thereby occasioned, the Employer shall either request a change
in accordance with GC Clause 39, excluding the performance of
that part of the Facilities thereby lost, destroyed or damaged, or,
where the loss or damage affects a substantial part of the
Facilities, the Employer shall terminate the Contract pursuant to
GC Sub-Clause 42.1 hereof.
32.3 The Contractor shall be liable for any loss of or damage to any
Contractor’s Equipment, or any other property of the Contractor
used or intended to be used for purposes of the Facilities, except
(i) as mentioned in GC Sub-Clause 32.2 with respect to the
Contractor’s temporary facilities, and (ii) where such loss or
damage arises by reason of any of the matters specified in GC
Sub-Clauses 32.2 (b) and (c) and 38.1.
32.4 With respect to any loss or damage caused to the Facilities or

any part thereof or to the Contractor’s Equipment by reason of
any of the matters specified in GC Sub-Clause 38.1, the
provisions of GC Sub-Clause 38.3 shall apply.
33. Loss of or 33.1 Subject to GC Sub-Clause 33.3, the Contractor shall indemnify
Damage to and hold harmless the Employer and its employees and officers
Property; from and against any and all suits, actions or administrative
Accident or proceedings, claims, demands, losses, damages, costs, and
Injury to expenses of whatsoever nature, including attorney’s fees and
Workers; expenses, in respect of the death or injury of any person or loss
Indemnifica- of or damage to any property other than the Facilities whether
tion accepted or not, arising in connection with the supply and
installation of the Facilities and by reason of the negligence of
the Contractor or its Subcontractors, or their employees, officers
or agents, except any injury, death or property damage caused by
the negligence of the Employer, its contractors, employees,
officers or agents.
33.2 If any proceedings are brought or any claim is made against the
Employer that might subject the Contractor to liability under GC
Sub-Clause 33.1, the Employer shall promptly give the
Contractor a notice thereof and the Contractor may at its own
expense and in the Employer’s name conduct such proceedings
or claim and any negotiations for the settlement of any such
proceedings or claim.
If the Contractor fails to notify the Employer within twenty-eight
(28) days after receipt of such notice that it intends to conduct
any such proceedings or claim, then the Employer shall be free
to conduct the same on its own behalf. Unless the Contractor
has so failed to notify the Employer within the twenty-eight (28)
day period, the Employer shall make no admission that may be
prejudicial to the defense of any such proceedings or claim.
The Employer shall, at the Contractor’s request, afford all
available assistance to the Contractor in conducting such
proceedings or claim, and shall be reimbursed by the Contractor
for all reasonable expenses incurred in so doing.
33.3 The Employer shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor
and its employees, officers and Subcontractors from any liability
for loss of or damage to property of the Employer, other than the
Facilities not yet taken over, that is caused by fire, explosion or
any other perils, in excess of the amount recoverable from
insurances procured under GC Clause 34, provided that such
fire, explosion or other perils were not caused by any act or
failure of the Contractor.

33.4 The Party entitled to the benefit of an indemnity under this GC
Clause 33 shall take all reasonable measures to mitigate any loss
or damage which has occurred. If the Party fails to take such
measures, the other Party’s liabilities shall be correspondingly
reduced.
34. Insurance 34.1 To the extent specified in the Appendix to the Contract
Agreement titled Insurance Requirements, the Contractor shall at
its expense take out and maintain in effect, or cause to be taken
out and maintained in effect, during the performance of the
Contract, the insurances set forth below in the sums and with the
deductibles and other conditions specified in the said Appendix.
The identity of the insurers and the form of the policies shall be
subject to the approval of the Employer, who should not
unreasonably withhold such approval.
(a) Cargo Insurance During Transport
Covering loss or damage occurring while in transit from
the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s works or stores until
arrival at the Site, to the Plant (including spare parts
therefor) and to the Contractor’s Equipment.
(b) Installation All Risks Insurance
Covering physical loss or damage to the Facilities at the
Site, occurring prior to Completion of the Facilities, with
an extended maintenance coverage for the Contractor’s
liability in respect of any loss or damage occurring during
the Defect Liability Period while the Contractor is on the
Site for the purpose of performing its obligations during
the Defect Liability Period.
(c) Third Party Liability Insurance
Covering bodily injury or death suffered by third Parties
including the Employer’s personnel, and loss of or damage
to property occurring in connection with the supply and
installation of the Facilities.
(d) Automobile Liability Insurance
Covering use of all vehicles used by the Contractor or its
Subcontractors, whether or not owned by them, in
connection with the execution of the Contract.
(e) Workers’ Compensation
In accordance with the statutory requirements applicable in

any country where the Contract or any part thereof is
executed.
(f) Employer’s Liability
In accordance with the statutory requirements applicable in
any country where the Contract or any part thereof is
executed.
(g) Other Insurances
Such other insurances as may be specifically agreed upon
by the Parties hereto as listed in the Appendix to the
Contract Agreement titled Insurance Requirements.
34.2 The Employer shall be named as co-insured under all insurance
policies taken out by the Contractor pursuant to GC Sub-Clause
34.1, except for the Third Party Liability, Workers’
Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurances, and the
Contractor’s Subcontractors shall be named as co-insureds under
all insurance policies taken out by the Contractor pursuant to GC
Sub-Clause 34.1 except for the Cargo Insurance During
Transport, Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability
Insurances. All insurer’s rights of subrogation against such co-
insureds for losses or claims arising out of the performance of
the Contract shall be waived under such policies.
34.3 The Contractor shall, in accordance with the provisions of the
Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled Insurance
Requirements, deliver to the Employer certificates of insurance
or copies of the insurance policies as evidence that the required
policies are in full force and effect. The certificates shall
provide that no less than twenty-one (21) days’ notice shall be
given to the Employer by insurers prior to cancellation or
material modification of a policy.
34.4 The Contractor shall ensure that, where applicable, its
Subcontractor(s) shall take out and maintain in effect adequate
insurance policies for their personnel and vehicles and for work
executed by them under the Contract, unless such Subcontractors
are covered by the policies taken out by the Contractor.
34.5 The Employer shall at its expense take out and maintain in effect
during the performance of the Contract those insurances
specified in the Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled
Insurance Requirements, in the sums and with the deductibles
and other conditions specified in the said Appendix. The
Contractor and the Contractor’s Subcontractors shall be named
as co-insureds under all such policies. All insurers’ rights of

subrogation against such co-insureds for losses or claims arising
out of the performance of the Contract shall be waived under
such policies. The Employer shall deliver to the Contractor
satisfactory evidence that the required insurances are in full
force and effect. The policies shall provide that not less than
twenty-one (21) days’ notice shall be given to the Contractor by
all insurers prior to any cancellation or material modification of
the policies. If so requested by the Contractor, the Employer
shall provide copies of the policies taken out by the Employer
under this GC Sub-Clause 34.5.
34.6 If the Contractor fails to take out and/or maintain in effect the
insurances referred to in GC Sub-Clause 34.1, the Employer may
take out and maintain in effect any such insurances and may
from time to time deduct from any amount due the Contractor
under the Contract any premium that the Employer shall have
paid to the insurer, or may otherwise recover such amount as a
debt due from the Contractor. If the Employer fails to take out
and/or maintain in effect the insurances referred to in GC 34.5,
the Contractor may take out and maintain in effect any such
insurances and may from time to time deduct from any amount
due the Employer under the Contract any premium that the
Contractor shall have paid to the insurer, or may otherwise
recover such amount as a debt due from the Employer. If the
Contractor fails to or is unable to take out and maintain in effect
any such insurances, the Contractor shall nevertheless have no
liability or responsibility towards the Employer, and the
Contractor shall have full recourse against the Employer for any
and all liabilities of the Employer herein.
34.7 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall
prepare and conduct all and any claims made under the policies
effected by it pursuant to this GC Clause 34, and all monies
payable by any insurers shall be paid to the Contractor. The
Employer shall give to the Contractor all such reasonable
assistance as may be required by the Contractor. With respect to
insurance claims in which the Employer’s interest is involved,
the Contractor shall not give any release or make any
compromise with the insurer without the prior written consent of
the Employer. With respect to insurance claims in which the
Contractor’s interest is involved, the Employer shall not give
any release or make any compromise with the insurer without
the prior written consent of the Contractor.
35. Unforeseen 35.1 If, during the execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall
Conditions encounter on the Site any physical conditions other than climatic
conditions, or artificial obstructions that could not have been

reasonably foreseen prior to the date of the Contract Agreement
by an experienced contractor on the basis of reasonable
examination of the data relating to the Facilities including any
data as to boring tests, provided by the Employer, and on the
basis of information that it could have obtained from a visual
inspection of the Site if access thereto was available, or other
data readily available to it relating to the Facilities, and if the
Contractor determines that it will in consequence of such
conditions or obstructions incur additional cost and expense or
require additional time to perform its obligations under the
Contract that would not have been required if such physical
conditions or artificial obstructions had not been encountered,
the Contractor shall promptly, and before performing additional
work or using additional Plant or Contractor’s Equipment, notify
the Project Manager in writing of
(a) the physical conditions or artificial obstructions on the Site

that could not have been reasonably foreseen;
(b) the additional work and/or Plant and/or Contractor’s

Equipment required, including the steps which the
Contractor will or proposes to take to overcome such
conditions or obstructions;
(c) the extent of the anticipated delay; and
(d) the additional cost and expense that the Contractor is likely
to incur.
On receiving any notice from the Contractor under this GC Sub-

Clause 35.1, the Project Manager shall promptly consult with the
Employer and Contractor and decide upon the actions to be
taken to overcome the physical conditions or artificial
obstructions encountered. Following such consultations, the
Project Manager shall instruct the Contractor, with a copy to the
Employer, of the actions to be taken.
35.2 Any reasonable additional cost and expense incurred by the

Contractor in following the instructions from the Project
Manager to overcome such physical conditions or artificial
obstructions referred to in GC Sub-Clause 35.1 shall be paid by
the Employer to the Contractor as an addition to the Contract
Price.
If the Contractor is delayed or impeded in the performance of the

Contract because of any such physical conditions or artificial
obstructions referred to in GC Sub-Clause 35.1, the Time for

Completion shall be extended in accordance with GC Clause 40.
36. Change in 36.1 If, after the date twenty-eight (28) days prior to the date of Bid
Laws and submission, in the country where the Site is located, any law,
Regulations regulation, ordinance, order or by-law having the force of law is
enacted, promulgated, abrogated or changed which shall be
deemed to include any change in interpretation or application by
the competent authorities, that subsequently affects the costs and
expenses of the Contractor and/or the Time for Completion, the
Contract Price shall be correspondingly increased or decreased,
and/or the Time for Completion shall be reasonably adjusted to
the extent that the Contractor has thereby been affected in the
performance of any of its obligations under the Contract.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, such additional or reduced costs
shall not be separately paid or credited if the same has already
been accounted for in the price adjustment provisions where
applicable, in accordance with the PC pursuant to GC Sub-
Clause 11.2.
37. Force 37.1 “Force Majeure” shall mean any event beyond the reasonable
Majeure control of the Employer or of the Contractor, as the case may be,
and which is unavoidable notwithstanding the reasonable care of
the Party affected, and shall include, without limitation, the
following:
(a) war, hostilities or warlike operations whether a state of
war be declared or not, invasion, act of foreign enemy and
civil war
(b) rebellion, revolution, insurrection, mutiny, usurpation of
civil or military government, conspiracy, riot, civil
commotion and terrorist acts
(c) confiscation, nationalization, mobilization, commandeering
or requisition by or under the order of any government or de
jure or de facto authority or ruler or any other act or failure to
act of any local state or national government authority
(d) strike, sabotage, lockout, embargo, import restriction, port
congestion, lack of usual means of public transportation
and communication, industrial dispute, shipwreck,
shortage or restriction of power supply, epidemics,
quarantine and plague
(e) earthquake, landslide, volcanic activity, fire, flood or
inundation, tidal wave, typhoon or cyclone, hurricane,
storm, lightning, or other inclement weather condition,
nuclear and pressure waves or other natural or physical

disaster
(f) shortage of labor, materials or utilities where caused by
circumstances that are themselves Force Majeure.
37.2 If either Party is prevented, hindered or delayed from or in
performing any of its obligations under the Contract by an event
of Force Majeure, then it shall notify the other in writing of the
occurrence of such event and the circumstances thereof within
fourteen (14) days after the occurrence of such event.
37.3 The Party who has given such notice shall be excused from the
performance or punctual performance of its obligations under
the Contract for so long as the relevant event of Force Majeure
continues and to the extent that such Party’s performance is
prevented, hindered or delayed. The Time for Completion shall
be extended in accordance with GC Clause 40.
37.4 The Party or Parties affected by the event of Force Majeure shall
use reasonable efforts to mitigate the effect thereof upon its or
their performance of the Contract and to fulfill its or their
obligations under the Contract, but without prejudice to either
Party’s right to terminate the Contract under GC Sub-Clauses
37.6 and 38.5.
37.5 No delay or nonperformance by either Party hereto caused by
the occurrence of any event of Force Majeure shall
(a) constitute a default or breach of the Contract, or
(b) give rise to any claim for damages or additional cost or
expense occasioned thereby, subject to GC Sub-Clauses
32.2, 38.3 and 38.4
if and to the extent that such delay or nonperformance is caused
by the occurrence of an event of Force Majeure.
37.6 If the performance of the Contract is substantially prevented,
hindered or delayed for a single period of more than sixty (60)
days or an aggregate period of more than one hundred and
twenty (120) days on account of one or more events of Force
Majeure during the currency of the Contract, the Parties will
attempt to develop a mutually satisfactory solution, failing which
either Party may terminate the Contract by giving a notice to the
other, but without prejudice to either Party’s right to terminate
the Contract under GC Sub-Clause 38.5.
37.7 In the event of termination pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 37.6, the
rights and obligations of the Employer and the Contractor shall

be as specified in GC Sub-Clauses 42.1.2 and 42.1.3.
37.8 Notwithstanding GC Sub-Clause 37.5, Force Majeure shall not
apply to any obligation of the Employer to make payments to the
Contractor herein.
38. War Risks 38.1 “War Risks” shall mean any event specified in paragraphs (a)
and (b) of GC Sub-Clause 37.1 and any explosion or impact of
any mine, bomb, shell, grenade or other projectile, missile,
munitions or explosive of war, occurring or existing in or near
the country (or countries) where the Site is located.
38.2 Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract, the Contractor
shall have no liability whatsoever for or with respect to
(a) destruction of or damage to Facilities, Plant, or any part
thereof;
(b) destruction of or damage to property of the Employer or
any third Party; or
(c) injury or loss of life
if such destruction, damage, injury or loss of life is caused by
any War Risks, and the Employer shall indemnify and hold the
Contractor harmless from and against any and all claims,
liabilities, actions, lawsuits, damages, costs, charges or expenses
arising in consequence of or in connection with the same.
38.3 If the Facilities or any Plant or Contractor’s Equipment or any
other property of the Contractor used or intended to be used for
the purposes of the Facilities shall sustain destruction or damage
by reason of any War Risks, the Employer shall pay the
Contractor for
(a) any part of the Facilities or the Plant so destroyed or
damaged to the extent not already paid for by the
Employer
and so far as may be required by the Employer, and as may
be necessary for completion of the Facilities
(b) replacing or making good any Contractor’s Equipment or
other property of the Contractor so destroyed or damaged
(c) replacing or making good any such destruction or damage
to the Facilities or the Plant or any part thereof .
If the Employer does not require the Contractor to replace or
make good any such destruction or damage to the Facilities, the

Employer shall either request a change in accordance with GC
Clause 39, excluding the performance of that part of the
Facilities thereby destroyed or damaged or, where the loss,
destruction or damage affects a substantial part of the Facilities,
shall terminate the Contract, pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 42.1.
If the Employer requires the Contractor to replace or make good
on any such destruction or damage to the Facilities, the Time for
Completion shall be extended in accordance with GC 40.
38.4 Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract, the
Employer shall pay the Contractor for any increased costs or
incidentals to the execution of the Contract that are in any way
attributable to, consequent on, resulting from, or in any way
connected with any War Risks, provided that the Contractor
shall as soon as practicable notify the Employer in writing of any
such increased cost.
38.5 If during the performance of the Contract any War Risks shall
occur that financially or otherwise materially affect the
execution of the Contract by the Contractor, the Contractor shall
use its reasonable efforts to execute the Contract with due and
proper consideration given to the safety of its and its
Subcontractors’ personnel engaged in the work on the Facilities,
provided, however, that if the execution of the work on the
Facilities becomes impossible or is substantially prevented for a
single period of more than sixty (60) days or an aggregate period
of more than one hundred and twenty (120) days on account of
any War Risks, the Parties will attempt to develop a mutually
satisfactory solution, failing which either Party may terminate
the Contract by giving a notice to the other.
38.6 In the event of termination pursuant to GC Sub-Clauses 38.3 or
38.5, the rights and obligations of the Employer and the
Contractor shall be specified in GC Sub-Clauses 42.1.2 and
42.1.3.
Change in Contract Elements

39. Change in the 39.1 Introducing a Change
Facilities
39.1.1 Subject to GC Sub-Clauses 39.2.5 and 39.2.7, the
Employer shall have the right to propose, and subsequently
require, that the Project Manager order the Contractor
from time to time during the performance of the Contract
to make any change, modification, addition or deletion to,
in or from the Facilities hereinafter called “Change”,
provided that such Change falls within the general scope

of the Facilities and does not constitute unrelated work and
that it is technically practicable, taking into account both
the state of advancement of the Facilities and the technical
compatibility of the Change envisaged with the nature of
the Facilities as specified in the Contract.
39.1.2 The Contractor may from time to time during its
performance of the Contract propose to the Employer with
a copy to the Project Manager, any Change that the
Contractor considers necessary or desirable to improve the
quality, efficiency or safety of the Facilities. The
Employer may at its discretion approve or reject any
Change proposed by the Contractor, provided that the
Employer shall approve any Change proposed by the
Contractor to ensure the safety of the Facilities.
39.1.3 Notwithstanding GC Sub-Clauses 39.1.1 and 39.1.2, no
change made necessary because of any default of the
Contractor in the performance of its obligations under the
Contract shall be deemed to be a Change, and such change
shall not result in any adjustment of the Contract Price or
the Time for Completion.
39.1.4 The procedure on how to proceed with and execute

Changes is specified in GC Sub-Clauses 39.2 and 39.3,
and further details and forms are provided in the
Employer’s Requirements (Forms and Procedures).
39.2 Changes Originating from Employer
39.2.1 If the Employer proposes a Change pursuant to GC Sub-

Clause 39.1.1, it shall send to the Contractor a “Request
for Change Proposal,” requiring the Contractor to prepare
and furnish to the Project Manager as soon as reasonably
practicable a “Change Proposal,” which shall include the
following:
(a) brief description of the Change

(b) effect on the Time for Completion
(c) estimated cost of the Change
(d) effect on Functional Guarantees (if any)
(e) effect on the Facilities
(f) effect on any other provisions of the Contract.
39.2.2 Prior to preparing and submitting the “Change Proposal,”

the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager an
“Estimate for Change Proposal,” which shall be an
estimate of the cost of preparing and submitting the
Change Proposal.
Upon receipt of the Contractor’s Estimate for Change

Proposal, the Employer shall do one of the following:
(a) accept the Contractor’s estimate with instructions
to the Contractor to proceed with the preparation
of the Change Proposal
(b) advise the Contractor of any part of its Estimate
for Change Proposal that is unacceptable and
request the Contractor to review its estimate
(c) advise the Contractor that the Employer does not
intend to proceed with the Change.
39.2.3 Upon receipt of the Employer’s instruction to proceed
under GC Sub-Clause 39.2.2 (a), the Contractor shall,
with proper expedition, proceed with the preparation of
the Change Proposal, in accordance with GC Sub-Clause
39.2.1.
39.2.4 The pricing of any Change shall, as far as practicable, be
calculated in accordance with the rates and prices
included in the Contract. If such rates and prices are
inequitable, the Parties thereto shall agree on specific
rates for the valuation of the Change.
39.2.5 If before or during the preparation of the Change
Proposal it becomes apparent that the aggregate effect of
compliance therewith and with all other Change Orders
that have already become binding upon the Contractor
under this GC Clause 39 would be to increase or decrease
the Contract Price as originally set forth in Article 2
(Contract Price) of the Contract Agreement by more than
fifteen percent (15%), the Contractor may give a written
notice of objection thereto prior to furnishing the Change
Proposal as aforesaid. If the Employer accepts the
Contractor’s objection, the Employer shall withdraw the
proposed Change and shall notify the Contractor in
writing thereof.
The Contractor’s failure to so object shall neither affect
its right to object to any subsequent requested Changes or

Change Orders herein, nor affect its right to take into
account, when making such subsequent objection, the
percentage increase or decrease in the Contract Price that
any Change not objected to by the Contractor represents.
39.2.6 Upon receipt of the Change Proposal, the Employer and
the Contractor shall mutually agree upon all matters
therein contained. Within fourteen (14) days after such
agreement, the Employer shall, if it intends to proceed
with the Change, issue the Contractor with a Change
Order.
If the Employer is unable to reach a decision within
fourteen (14) days, it shall notify the Contractor with
details of when the Contractor can expect a decision.
If the Employer decides not to proceed with the Change
for whatever reason, it shall, within the said period of
fourteen (14) days, notify the Contractor accordingly.
Under such circumstances, the Contractor shall be
entitled to reimbursement of all costs reasonably incurred
by it in the preparation of the Change Proposal, provided
that these do not exceed the amount given by the
Contractor in its Estimate for Change Proposal submitted
in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 39.2.2.
39.2.7 If the Employer and the Contractor cannot reach
agreement on the price for the Change, an equitable
adjustment to the Time for Completion, or any other
matters identified in the Change Proposal, the Employer
may nevertheless instruct the Contractor to proceed with
the Change by issue of a “Pending Agreement Change
Order.”
Upon receipt of a Pending Agreement Change Order, the
Contractor shall immediately proceed with effecting the
Changes covered by such Order. The Parties shall
thereafter attempt to reach agreement on the outstanding
issues under the Change Proposal.
If the Parties cannot reach agreement within sixty (60)
days from the date of issue of the Pending Agreement
Change Order, then the matter may be referred to the
Dispute Board in accordance with the provisions of GC
Sub-Clause 46.1.
39.3 Changes Originating from Contractor
39.3.1 If the Contractor proposes a Change pursuant to GC Sub-

Clause 39.1.2, the Contractor shall submit to the Project
Manager a written “Application for Change Proposal,”
giving reasons for the proposed Change and including the
information specified in GC Sub-Clause 39.2.1.
Upon receipt of the Application for Change Proposal, the
Parties shall follow the procedures outlined in GC Sub-
Clauses 39.2.6 and 39.2.7. However, should the
Employer choose not to proceed, the Contractor shall not
be entitled to recover the costs of preparing the
Application for Change Proposal.
40. Extension of 40.1 The Time(s) for Completion specified in the PC pursuant to GC
Time for Sub-Clause 8.2 shall be extended if the Contractor is delayed or
Completion impeded in the performance of any of its obligations under the
Contract by reason of any of the following:
(a) any Change in the Facilities as provided in GC Clause 39
(b) any occurrence of Force Majeure as provided in GC
Clause 37, unforeseen conditions as provided in GC
Clause 35, or other occurrence of any of the matters
specified or referred to in paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) of GC
Sub-Clause 32.2
(c) any suspension order given by the Employer under GC
Clause 41 hereof or reduction in the rate of progress
pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 41.2 or
(d) any changes in laws and regulations as provided in GC
Clause 36 or
(e) any default or breach of the Contract by the Employer,
Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled ,or any activity,
act or omission of the Employer, or the Project Manager,
or any other contractors employed by the Employer, or
(f) any delay on the part of a sub-contractor, provided such
delay is due to a cause for which the Contractor himself
would have been entitled to an extension of time under this
sub-clause, or
(g) delays attributable to the Employer or caused by customs,
or
(h) any other matter specifically mentioned in the Contract
by such period as shall be fair and reasonable in all the
circumstances and as shall fairly reflect the delay or impediment

sustained by the Contractor.
40.2 Except where otherwise specifically provided in the Contract,
the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager a notice of a
claim for an extension of the Time for Completion, together with
particulars of the event or circumstance justifying such extension
as soon as reasonably practicable after the commencement of
such event or circumstance. As soon as reasonably practicable
after receipt of such notice and supporting particulars of the
claim, the Employer and the Contractor shall agree upon the
period of such extension. In the event that the Contractor does
not accept the Employer’s estimate of a fair and reasonable time
extension, the Contractor shall be entitled to refer the matter to a
Dispute Board, pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 46.1.
The Contractor shall at all times use its reasonable efforts to minimize
any delay in the performance of its obligations under the
Contract.
In all cases where the Contractor has given a notice of a claim for an
extension of time under GC 40.2, the Contractor shall consult
with the Project Manager in order to determine the steps (if any)
which can be taken to overcome or minimize the actual or
anticipated delay. The Contractor shall there after comply with
all reasonable instructions which the Project Manager shall give
in order to minimize such delay. If compliance with such
instructions shall cause the Contractor to incur extra costs and
the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time under GC 40.1,
the amount of such extra costs shall be added to the Contract
Price.
41. Suspension 41.1 The Employer may request the Project Manager, by notice to the
Contractor, to order the Contractor to suspend performance of
any or all of its obligations under the Contract. Such notice shall
specify the obligation of which performance is to be suspended,
the effective date of the suspension and the reasons therefor.
The Contractor shall thereupon suspend performance of such
obligation, except those obligations necessary for the care or
preservation of the Facilities, until ordered in writing to resume
such performance by the Project Manager.
If, by virtue of a suspension order given by the Project Manager,
other than by reason of the Contractor’s default or breach of the
Contract, the Contractor’s performance of any of its obligations
is suspended for an aggregate period of more than ninety (90)
days, then at any time thereafter and provided that at that time
such performance is still suspended, the Contractor may give a
notice to the Project Manager requiring that the Employer shall,

within twenty-eight (28) days of receipt of the notice, order the
resumption of such performance or request and subsequently
order a change in accordance with GC Clause 39, excluding the
performance of the suspended obligations from the Contract.
If the Employer fails to do so within such period, the Contractor
may, by a further notice to the Project Manager, elect to treat the
suspension, where it affects a part only of the Facilities, as a
deletion of such part in accordance with GC Clause 39 or, where
it affects the whole of the Facilities, as termination of the
Contract under GC Sub-Clause 42.1.
41.2 If
(a) the Employer has failed to pay the Contractor any sum due
under the Contract within the specified period, has failed
to approve any invoice or supporting documents without
just cause pursuant to the Appendix to the Contract
Agreement titled Terms and Procedures of Payment, or
commits a substantial breach of the Contract, the
Contractor may give a notice to the Employer that requires
payment of such sum, with interest thereon as stipulated in
GC Sub-Clause 12.3, requires approval of such invoice or
supporting documents, or specifies the breach and requires
the Employer to remedy the same, as the case may be. If
the Employer fails to pay such sum together with such
interest, fails to approve such invoice or supporting
documents or give its reasons for withholding such
approval, or fails to remedy the breach or take steps to
remedy the breach within fourteen (14) days after receipt
of the Contractor’s notice or
(b) the Contractor is unable to carry out any of its obligations
under the Contract for any reason attributable to the
Employer, including but not limited to the Employer’s
failure to provide possession of or access to the Site or
other areas in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 10.2, or
failure to obtain any governmental permit necessary for
the execution and/or completion of the Facilities,
then the Contractor may by fourteen (14) days’ notice to
the Employer suspend performance of all or any of its
obligations under the Contract, or reduce the rate of
progress.
41.3 If the Contractor’s performance of its obligations is suspended or
the rate of progress is reduced pursuant to this GC Clause 41,
then the Time for Completion shall be extended in accordance

with GC Sub-Clause 40.1, and any and all additional costs or
expenses incurred by the Contractor as a result of such
suspension or reduction shall be paid by the Employer to the
Contractor in addition to the Contract Price, except in the case of
suspension order or reduction in the rate of progress by reason of
the Contractor’s default or breach of the Contract.
41.4 During the period of suspension, the Contractor shall not remove
from the Site any Plant, any part of the Facilities or any
Contractor’s Equipment, without the prior written consent of the
Employer.
42. Termination 42.1 Termination for Employer’s Convenience
42.1.1 The Employer may at any time terminate the Contract for
any reason by giving the Contractor a notice of
termination that refers to this GC Sub-Clause 42.1.
42.1.2 Upon receipt of the notice of termination under GC Sub-

Clause 42.1.1, the Contractor shall either immediately or
upon the date specified in the notice of termination
(a) cease all further work, except for such work as the
Employer may specify in the notice of termination
for the sole purpose of protecting that part of the
Facilities already executed, or any work required to
leave the Site in a clean and safe condition
(b) terminate all subcontracts, except those to be

assigned to the Employer pursuant to paragraph (d)
(ii) below
(c) remove all Contractor’s Equipment from the Site,

repatriate the Contractor’s and its Subcontractors’
personnel from the Site, remove from the Site any
wreckage, rubbish and debris of any kind, and leave
the whole of the Site in a clean and safe condition,
and
(d) subject to the payment specified in GC Sub-Clause

42.1.3,
(i) deliver to the Employer the parts of the

Facilities executed by the Contractor up to the
date of termination
(ii) to the extent legally possible, assign to the

Employer all right, title and benefit of the

Contractor to the Facilities and to the Plant as
of the date of termination, and, as may be
required by the Employer, in any subcontracts
concluded between the Contractor and its
Subcontractors; and
(iii) deliver to the Employer all non-proprietary

drawings, specifications and other documents
prepared by the Contractor or its
Subcontractors as at the date of termination in
connection with the Facilities.
42.1.3 In the event of termination of the Contract under GC

Sub-Clause 42.1.1, the Employer shall pay to the
Contractor the following amounts:
(a) the Contract Price, properly attributable to the parts
of the Facilities executed by the Contractor as of the
date of termination
(b) the costs reasonably incurred by the Contractor in
the removal of the Contractor’s Equipment from the
Site and in the repatriation of the Contractor’s and its
Subcontractors’ personnel
(c) any amounts to be paid by the Contractor to its
Subcontractors in connection with the termination of
any subcontracts, including any cancellation charges
(d) costs incurred by the Contractor in protecting the
Facilities and leaving the Site in a clean and safe
condition pursuant to paragraph (a) of GC Sub-
Clause 42.1.2
(e) the cost of satisfying all other obligations,
commitments and claims that the Contractor may in
good faith have undertaken with third Parties in
connection with the Contract and that are not
covered by paragraphs (a) through (d) above.
42.2 Termination for Contractor’s Default
42.2.1 The Employer, without prejudice to any other rights or
remedies it may possess, may terminate the Contract
forthwith in the following circumstances by giving a
notice of termination and its reasons therefor to the
Contractor, referring to this GC Sub-Clause 42.2:
(a) if the Contractor becomes bankrupt or insolvent, has

a receiving order issued against it, compounds with
its creditors, or, if the Contractor is a corporation, a
resolution is passed or order is made for its winding
up, other than a voluntary liquidation for the
purposes of amalgamation or reconstruction, a
receiver is appointed over any part of its undertaking
or assets, or if the Contractor takes or suffers any
other analogous action in consequence of debt
(b) if the Contractor assigns or transfers the Contract or
any right or interest therein in violation of the
provision of GC Clause 43.
(c) if the Contractor, in the judgment of the Employer
has engaged in corrupt, collusive, coercive, or
fraudulent practices, as defined in GC Clause 6, in
competing for or in executing the Contract.
42.2.2 If the Contractor
(a) has abandoned or repudiated the Contract
(b) has without valid reason failed to commence work
on the Facilities promptly or has suspended, other
than pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 41.2, the progress
of Contract performance for more than twenty-eight
(28) days after receiving a written instruction from
the Employer to proceed
(c) persistently fails to execute the Contract in
accordance with the Contract or persistently neglects
to carry out its obligations under the Contract
without just cause
(d) refuses or is unable to provide sufficient materials,
services or labor to execute and complete the
Facilities in the manner specified in the program
furnished under GC Sub-Clause 18.2 at rates of
progress that give reasonable assurance to the
Employer that the Contractor can attain Completion
of the Facilities by the Time for Completion as
extended,
then the Employer may, without prejudice to any other
rights it may possess under the Contract, give a notice to
the Contractor stating the nature of the default and
requiring the Contractor to remedy the same. If the
Contractor fails to remedy or to take steps to remedy the
same within fourteen (14) days of its receipt of such

notice, then the Employer may terminate the Contract
forthwith by giving a notice of termination to the
Contractor that refers to this GC Sub-Clause 42.2.
42.2.3 Upon receipt of the notice of termination under GC
Sub-Clauses 42.2.1 or 42.2.2, the Contractor shall, either
immediately or upon such date as is specified in the notice
of termination,
(a) cease all further work, except for such work as the
Employer may specify in the notice of termination
for the sole purpose of protecting that part of the
Facilities already executed, or any work required to
leave the Site in a clean and safe condition
below
(c) deliver to the Employer the parts of the Facilities
executed by the Contractor up to the date of
termination
(d) to the extent legally possible, assign to the Employer
all right, title and benefit of the Contractor to the
Facilities and to the Plant as of the date of
termination, and, as may be required by the
Employer, in any subcontracts concluded between
the Contractor and its Subcontractors
(e) deliver to the Employer all drawings, specifications
and other documents prepared by the Contractor or
its Subcontractors as of the date of termination in
connection with the Facilities.
42.2.4 The Employer may enter upon the Site, expel the
Contractor, and complete the Facilities itself or by
employing any third Party. The Employer may, to the
exclusion of any right of the Contractor over the same,
take over and use with the payment of a fair rental rate to
the Contractor, with all the maintenance costs to the
account of the Employer and with an indemnification by
the Employer for all liability including damage or injury to
persons arising out of the Employer’s use of such
equipment, any Contractor’s Equipment owned by the
Contractor and on the Site in connection with the Facilities
for such reasonable period as the Employer considers
expedient for the supply and installation of the Facilities.

Upon completion of the Facilities or at such earlier date as
the Employer thinks appropriate, the Employer shall give
notice to the Contractor that such Contractor’s Equipment
will be returned to the Contractor at or near the Site and
shall return such Contractor’s Equipment to the Contractor
in accordance with such notice. The Contractor shall
thereafter without delay and at its cost remove or arrange
removal of the same from the Site.
42.2.5 Subject to GC Sub-Clause 42.2.6, the Contractor shall
be entitled to be paid the Contract Price attributable to the
Facilities executed as of the date of termination, the value
of any unused or partially used Plant on the Site, and the
costs, if any, incurred in protecting the Facilities and in
leaving the Site in a clean and safe condition pursuant to
paragraph (a) of GC Sub-Clause 42.2.3. Any sums due the
Employer from the Contractor accruing prior to the date of
termination shall be deducted from the amount to be paid
to the Contractor under this Contract.
42.2.6 If the Employer completes the Facilities, the cost of
completing the Facilities by the Employer shall be
determined.
If the sum that the Contractor is entitled to be paid,
pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 42.2.5, plus the reasonable
costs incurred by the Employer in completing the
Facilities, exceeds the Contract Price, the Contractor shall
be liable for such excess.
If such excess is greater than the sums due the Contractor
under GC Sub-Clause 42.2.5, the Contractor shall pay the
balance to the Employer, and if such excess is less than the
sums due the Contractor under GC Sub-Clause 42.2.5, the
Employer shall pay the balance to the Contractor.
The Employer and the Contractor shall agree, in writing,
on the computation described above and the manner in
which any sums shall be paid.
42.3 Termination by the Contractor
42.3.1 If
(a) the Employer has failed to pay the Contractor any
sum due under the Contract within the specified
period, has failed to approve any invoice or
supporting documents without just cause pursuant

to the Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled
Terms and Procedures of Payment, or commits a
substantial breach of the Contract, the Contractor
may give a notice to the Employer that requires
payment of such sum, with interest thereon as
stipulated in GC Sub-Clause 12.3, requires approval
of such invoice or supporting documents, or
specifies the breach and requires the Employer to
remedy the same, as the case may be. If the
Employer fails to pay such sum together with such
interest, fails to approve such invoice or supporting
documents or give its reasons for withholding such
approval, fails to remedy the breach or take steps to
remedy the breach within fourteen (14) days after
receipt of the Contractor’s notice, or
(b) the Contractor is unable to carry out any of its
obligations under the Contract for any reason
attributable to the Employer, including but not
limited to the Employer’s failure to provide
possession of or access to the Site or other areas or
failure to obtain any governmental permit necessary
for the execution and/or completion of the
Facilities,
then the Contractor may give a notice to the Employer
thereof, and if the Employer has failed to pay the
outstanding sum, to approve the invoice or supporting
documents, to give its reasons for withholding such
approval, or to remedy the breach within twenty-eight (28)
days of such notice, or if the Contractor is still unable to
carry out any of its obligations under the Contract for any
reason attributable to the Employer within twenty-eight
(28) days of the said notice, the Contractor may by a
further notice to the Employer referring to this GC Sub-
Clause 42.3.1, forthwith terminate the Contract.
42.3.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract forthwith by
giving a notice to the Employer to that effect, referring to
this GC Sub-Clause 42.3.2, if the Employer becomes
bankrupt or insolvent, has a receiving order issued against
it, compounds with its creditors, or, being a corporation, if
a resolution is passed or order is made for its winding up
(other than a voluntary liquidation for the purposes of
amalgamation or reconstruction), a receiver is appointed
over any part of its undertaking or assets, or if the
Employer takes or suffers any other analogous action in

consequence of debt.
42.3.3 If the Contract is terminated under GC Sub-Clauses
42.3.1 or 42.3.2, then the Contractor shall immediately
(a) cease all further work, except for such work as may
be necessary for the purpose of protecting that part
of the Facilities already executed, or any work
required to leave the Site in a clean and safe
condition
(ii)
(c) remove all Contractor’s Equipment from the Site
and repatriate the Contractor’s and its
Subcontractors’ personnel from the Site, and
(d) subject to the payment specified in GC Sub-Clause
42.3.4,
(i) deliver to the Employer the parts of the
Facilities executed by the Contractor up to the
date of termination
(ii) to the extent legally possible, assign to the
Employer all right, title and benefit of the
Contractor to the Facilities and to the Plant as
of the date of termination, and, as may be
required by the Employer, in any subcontracts
concluded between the Contractor and its
Subcontractors, and
(iii) deliver to the Employer all drawings,
specifications and other documents prepared
by the Contractor or its Subcontractors as of
the date of termination in connection with the
Facilities.
42.3.4 If the Contract is terminated under GC Sub-Clauses
42.3.1 or 42.3.2, the Employer shall pay to the Contractor
all payments specified in GC Sub-Clause 42.1.3, and
reasonable compensation for all loss, except for loss of
profit, or damage sustained by the Contractor arising out
of, in connection with or in consequence of such
termination.
42.3.5 Termination by the Contractor pursuant to this GC Sub-

Clause 42.3 is without prejudice to any other rights or
remedies of the Contractor that may be exercised in lieu of
or in addition to rights conferred by GC Sub-Clause 42.3.
42.4 In this GC Clause 42, the expression “Facilities executed” shall
include all work executed, Installation Services provided, and all
Plant acquired, or subject to a legally binding obligation to
purchase, by the Contractor and used or intended to be used for
the purpose of the Facilities, up to and including the date of
termination.
42.5 In this GC Clause 42, in calculating any monies due from the
Employer to the Contractor, account shall be taken of any sum
previously paid by the Employer to the Contractor under the
Contract, including any advance payment paid pursuant to the
Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled Terms and Procedures
of Payment.
43. Assignment 43.1 Neither the Employer nor the Contractor shall, without the
express prior written consent of the other Party, which consent
shall not be unreasonably withheld, assign to any third Party the
Contract or any part thereof, or any right, benefit, obligation or
interest therein or thereunder, except that the Contractor shall be
entitled to assign either absolutely or by way of charge any
monies due and payable to it or that may become due and
payable to it under the Contract.
44. Export 44.1 Notwithstanding any obligation under the Contract to complete
Restrictions all export formalities, any export restrictions attributable to the
Employer, to the country of the Employer or to the use of the
Plant and Installation Services to be supplied which arise from
trade regulations from a country supplying those Plant and
Installation Services, and which substantially impede the
Contractor from meeting its obligations under the Contract, shall
release the Contractor from the obligation to provide deliveries
or services, always provided, however, that the Contractor can
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Employer and of the Bank
that it has completed all formalities in a timely manner,
including applying for permits, authorizations and licenses
necessary for the export of the Plant and Installation Services
under the terms of the Contract. Termination of the Contract on
this basis shall be for the Employer’s convenience pursuant to
Sub-Clause 42.1.
Claims, Disputes and Arbitration

45. Contractor’s 45.1 If the Contractor considers himself to be entitled to any
Claims extension of the Time for Completion and/or any additional
payment, under any Clause of these Conditions or otherwise in
connection with the Contract, the Contractor shall submit a
notice to the Project Manager, describing the event or
circumstance giving rise to the claim. The notice shall be given
as soon as practicable, and not later than 28 days after the
Contractor became aware, or should have become aware, of the
event or circumstance.
If the Contractor fails to give notice of a claim within such
period of 28 days, the Time for Completion shall not be
extended, the Contractor shall not be entitled to additional
payment, and the Employer shall be discharged from all liability
in connection with the claim. Otherwise, the following
provisions of this Sub-Clause shall apply.
The Contractor shall also submit any other notices which are
required by the Contract, and supporting particulars for the
claim, all as relevant to such event or circumstance.
The Contractor shall keep such contemporary records as may be
necessary to substantiate any claim, either on the Site or at
another location acceptable to the Project Manager. Without
admitting the Employer’s liability, the Project Manager may,
after receiving any notice under this Sub-Clause, monitor the
record-keeping and/or instruct the Contractor to keep further
contemporary records. The Contractor shall permit the Project
Manager to inspect all these records, and shall (if instructed)
submit copies to the Project Manager.
Within 42 days after the Contractor became aware (or should
have become aware) of the event or circumstance giving rise to
the claim, or within such other period as may be proposed by
the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager, the
Contractor shall send to the Project Manager a fully detailed
claim which includes full supporting particulars of the basis of
the claim and of the extension of time and/or additional
payment claimed. If the event or circumstance giving rise to the
claim has a continuing effect:
(a) this fully detailed claim shall be considered as interim;
(b) the Contractor shall send further interim claims at monthly
intervals, giving the accumulated delay and/or amount
claimed, and such further particulars as the Project
Manager may reasonably require; and

(c) the Contractor shall send a final claim within 28 days after
the end of the effects resulting from the event or
circumstance, or within such other period as may be
proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Project
Manager.
Within 42 days after receiving a claim or any further particulars
supporting a previous claim, or within such other period as may
be proposed by the Project Manager and approved by the
Contractor, the Project Manager shall respond with approval, or
with disapproval and detailed comments. He may also request
any necessary further particulars, but shall nevertheless give his
response on the principles of the claim within such time.
Each Payment Certificate shall include such amounts for any
claim as have been reasonably substantiated as due under the
relevant provision of the Contract. Unless and until the
particulars supplied are sufficient to substantiate the whole of
the claim, the Contractor shall only be entitled to payment for
such part of the claim as he has been able to substantiate.
The Project Manager shall agree with the Contractor or
estimate: (i) the extension (if any) of the Time for Completion
(before or after its expiry) in accordance with GC Clause 40,
and/or (ii) the additional payment (if any) to which the
Contractor is entitled under the Contract.
The requirements of this Sub-Clause are in addition to those of
any other Sub-Clause which may apply to a claim. If the
Contractor fails to comply with this or another Sub-Clause in
relation to any claim, any extension of time and/or additional
payment shall take account of the extent (if any) to which the
failure has prevented or prejudiced proper investigation of the
claim, unless the claim is excluded under the second paragraph
of this Sub-Clause.
In the event that the Contractor and the Employer cannot agree
on any matter relating to a claim, either Party may refer the
matter to the Dispute Board pursuant to GC 46 hereof.
46. Disputes and 46.1 Appointment of the Dispute Board
Arbitration
Disputes shall be referred to a DB for decision in accordance
with GC Sub-Clause 46.3. The Parties shall appoint a DB by the
date stated in the PC.
The DB shall comprise, as stated in the PC, either one or three
suitably qualified persons (“the members”), each of whom shall

be fluent in the language for communication defined in the
Contract and shall be a professional experienced in the type of
activities involved in the performance of the Contract and with
the interpretation of contractual documents. If the number is not
so stated and the Parties do not agree otherwise, the DB shall
comprise three persons, one of whom shall serve as chairman.
If the Parties have not jointly appointed the DB 21 days before
the date stated in the PC and the DB is to comprise three
persons, each Party shall nominate one member for the approval
of the other Party. The first two members shall recommend and
the Parties shall agree upon the third member, who shall act as
chairman.
However, if a list of potential members is included in the PC,
the members shall be selected from those on the list, other than
anyone who is unable or unwilling to accept appointment to the
DB.
The agreement between the Parties and either the sole member
or each of the three members shall incorporate by reference the
General Conditions of Dispute Board Agreement contained in
the Appendix to these General Conditions, with such
amendments as are agreed between them.
The terms of the remuneration of either the sole member or each
of the three members, including the remuneration of any expert
whom the DB consults, shall be mutually agreed upon by the
Parties when agreeing the terms of appointment of the member
or such expert (as the case may be). Each Party shall be
responsible for paying one-half of this remuneration.
If a member declines to act or is unable to act as a result of
death, disability, resignation or termination of appointment, a
replacement shall be appointed in the same manner as the
replaced person was required to have been nominated or agreed
upon, as described in this Sub-Clause.
The appointment of any member may be terminated by mutual
agreement of both Parties, but not by the Employer or the
Contractor acting alone. Unless otherwise agreed by both
Parties, the appointment of the DB (including each member)
shall expire when the Operational Acceptance Certificate has
been issued in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 25.3.
46.2 Failure to Agree on the Composition of the Dispute Board
If any of the following conditions apply, namely:

(a) the Parties fail to agree upon the appointment of the sole
member of the DB by the date stated in the first paragraph
of GC Sub-Clause 46.1,
either Party fails to nominate a member (for approval by the
other Party) of a DB of three persons by such date,
the Parties fail to agree upon the appointment of the third
member (to act as chairman) of the DB by such date, or
the Parties fail to agree upon the appointment of a replacement
person within 42 days after the date on which the sole
member or one of the three members declines to act or is
unable to act as a result of death, disability, resignation or
termination of appointment,
then the appointing entity or official named in the PC shall,
upon the request of either or both of the Parties and after due
consultation with both Parties, appoint this member of the DB.
This appointment shall be final and conclusive. Each Party shall
be responsible for paying one-half of the remuneration of the
appointing entity or official.
46.3 Obtaining Dispute Board’s Decision
If a dispute (of any kind whatsoever) arises between the Parties
in connection with the performance of the Contract, including
any dispute as to any certificate, determination, instruction,
opinion or valuation of the Project Manager, either Party may
refer the dispute in writing to the DB for its decision, with
copies to the other Party and the Project Manager. Such
reference shall state that it is given under this Sub-Clause.
For a DB of three persons, the DB shall be deemed to have
received such reference on the date when it is received by the
chairman of the DB.
Both Parties shall promptly make available to the DB all such
additional information, further access to the Site, and
appropriate facilities, as the DB may require for the purposes of
making a decision on such dispute. The DB shall be deemed to
be not acting as arbitrator(s).
Within 84 days after receiving such reference, or within such
other period as may be proposed by the DB and approved by
both Parties, the DB shall give its decision, which shall be
reasoned and shall state that it is given under this Sub-Clause.
The decision shall be binding on both Parties, who shall

promptly give effect to it unless and until it shall be revised in
an amicable settlement or an arbitral award as described below.
Unless the Contract has already been abandoned, repudiated or
terminated, the Contractor shall continue with the performance
of the Facilities in accordance with the Contract.
If either Party is dissatisfied with the DB’s decision, then either
Party may, within 28 days after receiving the decision, give
notice to the other Party of its dissatisfaction and intention to
commence arbitration. If the DB fails to give its decision within
the period of 84 days (or as otherwise approved) after receiving
such reference, then either Party may, within 28 days after this
period has expired, give notice to the other Party of its
dissatisfaction and intention to commence arbitration.
In either event, this notice of dissatisfaction shall state that it is
given under this Sub-Clause, and shall set out the matter in
dispute and the reason(s) for dissatisfaction. Except as stated in
GC Sub-Clauses 46.6 and 46.7, neither Party shall be entitled to
commence arbitration of a dispute unless a notice of
dissatisfaction has been given in accordance with this Sub-
Clause.
If the DB has given its decision as to a matter in dispute to both
Parties, and no notice of dissatisfaction has been given by either
Party within 28 days after it received the DB’s decision, then
the decision shall become final and binding upon both Parties.
46.4 Amicable Settlement
Where notice of dissatisfaction has been given under GC Sub-
Clause 46.3 above, both Parties shall attempt to settle the
dispute amicably before the commencement of arbitration.
However, unless both Parties agree otherwise, arbitration may
be commenced on or after the fifty-sixth day after the day on
which notice of dissatisfaction and intention to commence
arbitration was given, even if no attempt at amicable settlement
has been made.
46.5 Arbitration
Unless indicated otherwise in the PC, any dispute not settled
amicably and in respect of which the DB’s decision (if any) has
not become final and binding shall be finally settled by
arbitration. Unless otherwise agreed by both Parties, arbitration
shall be conducted as follows:
(a) For contracts with foreign contractors:

(i) international arbitration with proceedings
administered by the international arbitration
institution appointed in the PC, in accordance with
the rules of arbitration of the appointed institution;,
(ii) the place of arbitration shall be the city where the
headquarters of the appointed arbitration institution
is located or such other place selected in accordance
with the applicable arbitration rules; and
(iii) the arbitration shall be conducted in the language for
communications defined in Sub-Clause 5.3; and
(b) For contracts with domestic contractors, arbitration with
proceedings conducted in accordance with the laws of the
Employer’s country.
The arbitrator(s) shall have full power to open up, review and
revise any certificate, determination, instruction, opinion or
valuation of the Project Manager, and any decision of the DB,
relevant to the dispute. Nothing shall disqualify the Project
Manager from being called as a witness and giving evidence
before the arbitrator(s) on any matter whatsoever relevant to the
dispute.
Neither Party shall be limited in the proceedings before the
arbitrator(s) to the evidence or arguments previously put before
the DB to obtain its decision, or to the reasons for
dissatisfaction given in its notice of dissatisfaction. Any
decision of the DB shall be admissible in evidence in the
arbitration.
Arbitration may be commenced prior to or after completion of
the Works. The obligations of the Parties, the Project Manager
and the DB shall not be altered by reason of any arbitration
being conducted during the progress of the Works.
46.6 Failure to Comply with Dispute Board’s Decision
In the event that a Party fails to comply with a DB decision
which has become final and binding, then the other Party may,
without prejudice to any other rights it may have, refer the
failure itself to arbitration under GC Sub-Clause 46.5. GC Sub-
Clauses 46.3 and 46.4 shall not apply to this reference.
46.7 Expiry of Dispute Board’s Appointment
If a dispute arises between the Parties in connection with the

performance of the Contract, and there is no DB in place,
whether by reason of the expiry of the DB’s appointment or
otherwise:
(a) GC Sub-Clauses 46.3 and 46.4 shall not apply, and
(b) the dispute may be referred directly to arbitration under
GC Sub-Clause 46.5
APPENDIX
A General Conditions of Dispute Board Agreement
1. Definitions
Each “Dispute Board Agreement” is a tripartite agreement by and between:
the “Employer”;
the “Contractor”; and
the “Member” who is defined in the Dispute Board Agreement as being:
(i) the sole member of the “DB” and, where this is the case, all references to the
“Other Members” do not apply, or
(ii) one of the three persons who are jointly called the “DB” (or “dispute board”)
and, where this is the case, the other two persons are called the “Other
Members”.
The Employer and the Contractor have entered (or intend to enter) into a contract, which is
called the “Contract” and is defined in the Dispute Board Agreement, which incorporates this
Appendix. In the Dispute Board Agreement, words and expressions which are not otherwise
defined shall have the meanings assigned to them in the Contract.
2. General Provisions
Unless otherwise stated in the Dispute Board Agreement, it shall take effect on the latest of
the following dates:
(a) the Commencement Date defined in the Contract,
(b) when the Employer, the Contractor and the Member have each signed the
Dispute Board Agreement, or
(c) when the Employer, the Contractor and each of the Other Members (if any) have
respectively each signed a dispute board agreement.
This employment of the Member is a personal appointment. At any time, the Member may
give not less than 70 days’ notice of resignation to the Employer and to the Contractor, and
the Dispute Board Agreement shall terminate upon the expiry of this period.
3. Warranties
The Member warrants and agrees that he/she is and shall be impartial and independent of the
Employer, the Contractor and the Project Manager. The Member shall promptly disclose, to
each of them and to the Other Members (if any), any fact or circumstance which might
appear inconsistent with his/her warranty and agreement of impartiality and independence.
When appointing the Member, the Employer and the Contractor relied upon the Member’s
representations that he/she is:
(a) experienced in the work which the Contractor is to carry out under the Contract,
(b) experienced in the interpretation of contract documentation, and
(c) fluent in the language for communications defined in the Contract.
4. General Obligations of the Member
The Member shall:
(a) have no interest financial or otherwise in the Employer, the Contractor or the
Project Manager, nor any financial interest in the Contract except for payment
under the Dispute Board Agreement;
(b) not previously have been employed as a consultant or otherwise by the
Employer, the Contractor or the Project Manager, except in such circumstances
as were disclosed in writing to the Employer and the Contractor before they
signed the Dispute Board Agreement;
(c) have disclosed in writing to the Employer, the Contractor and the Other Members
(if any), before entering into the Dispute Board Agreement and to his/her best
knowledge and recollection, any professional or personal relationships with any
director, officer or employee of the Employer, the Contractor or the Project
Manager, and any previous involvement in the overall project of which the
Contract forms part;
(d) not, for the duration of the Dispute Board Agreement, be employed as a
consultant or otherwise by the Employer, the Contractor or the Project Manager,
except as may be agreed in writing by the Employer, the Contractor and the
Other Members (if any);
(e) comply with the annexed procedural rules and with GC Sub-Clause 46.3;
(f) not give advice to the Employer, the Contractor, the Employer’s Personnel or the
Contractor’s Personnel concerning the conduct of the Contract, other than in
accordance with the annexed procedural rules;
(g) not while a Member enter into discussions or make any agreement with the
Employer, the Contractor or the Project Manager regarding employment by any
of them, whether as a consultant or otherwise, after ceasing to act under the
Dispute Board Agreement;
(h) ensure his/her availability for all site visits and hearings as are necessary;
(i) become conversant with the Contract and with the progress of the Facilities (and
of any other parts of the project of which the Contract forms part) by studying all
documents received which shall be maintained in a current working file;
(j) treat the details of the Contract and all the DB’s activities and hearings as private
and confidential, and not publish or disclose them without the prior written
consent of the Employer, the Contractor and the Other Members (if any); and
(k) be available to give advice and opinions, on any matter relevant to the Contract
when requested by both the Employer and the Contractor, subject to the
agreement of the Other Members (if any).
5. General Obligations of the Employer and the Contractor
The Employer, the Contractor, the Employer’s Personnel and the Contractor’s Personnel
shall not request advice from or consultation with the Member regarding the Contract,
otherwise than in the normal course of the DB’s activities under the Contract and the Dispute
Board Agreement. The Employer and the Contractor shall be responsible for compliance
with this provision, by the Employer’s Personnel and the Contractor’s Personnel
respectively.
The Employer and the Contractor undertake to each other and to the Member that the
Member shall not, except as otherwise agreed in writing by the Employer, the Contractor, the
Member and the Other Members (if any):
(a) be appointed as an arbitrator in any arbitration under the Contract;
(b) be called as a witness to give evidence concerning any dispute before
arbitrator(s) appointed for any arbitration under the Contract; or
(c) be liable for any claims for anything done or omitted in the discharge or
purported discharge of the Member’s functions, unless the act or omission is
shown to have been in bad faith.
The Employer and the Contractor hereby jointly and severally indemnify and hold the
Member harmless against and from claims from which he is relieved from liability under the
preceding paragraph.
Whenever the Employer or the Contractor refers a dispute to the DB under GC Sub-Clause
46.3, which will require the Member to make a site visit and attend a hearing, the Employer
or the Contractor shall provide appropriate security for a sum equivalent to the reasonable
expenses to be incurred by the Member. No account shall be taken of any other payments due
or paid to the Member.
6. Payment
The Member shall be paid as follows, in the currency named in the Dispute Board
Agreement:
(a) a retainer fee per calendar month, which shall be considered as payment in full
for:
(i) being available on 28 days’ notice for all site visits and hearings;
(ii) becoming and remaining conversant with all project developments and
maintaining relevant files;
(iii) all office and overhead expenses including secretarial services,
photocopying and office supplies incurred in connection with his duties;
and
(iv) all services performed hereunder except those referred to in sub-paragraphs
(b) and (c) of this Clause.
The retainer fee shall be paid with effect from the last day of the calendar month in which the
Dispute Board Agreement becomes effective; until the last day of the calendar month in
which the Taking-Over Certificate is issued for the whole of the Works.
With effect from the first day of the calendar month following the month in which Taking-
Over Certificate is issued for the whole of the Works, the retainer fee shall be reduced by one
third This reduced fee shall be paid until the first day of the calendar month in which the
Member resigns or the Dispute Board Agreement is otherwise terminated.
(b) a daily fee which shall be considered as payment in full for:
(i) each day or part of a day up to a maximum of two days’ travel time in each
direction for the journey between the Member’s home and the site, or
another location of a meeting with the Other Members (if any);
(ii) each working day on site visits, hearings or preparing decisions; and
(iii) each day spent reading submissions in preparation for a hearing.
(c) all reasonable expenses including necessary travel expenses (air fare in less than
first class, hotel and subsistence and other direct travel expenses) incurred in
connection with the Member’s duties, as well as the cost of telephone calls,
courier charges, faxes and telexes: a receipt shall be required for each item in
excess of five percent of the daily fee referred to in sub-paragraph (b) of this
Clause;
(d) any taxes properly levied in the Country on payments made to the Member
(unless a national or permanent resident of the Country) under this Clause 6.
The retainer and daily fees shall be as specified in the Dispute Board Agreement. Unless it
specifies otherwise, these fees shall remain fixed for the first 24 calendar months, and shall
thereafter be adjusted by agreement between the Employer, the Contractor and the Member,
at each anniversary of the date on which the Dispute Board Agreement became effective.
If the Parties fail to agree on the retainer fee or the daily fee the appointing entity or official
named in the PC shall determine the amount of the fees to be used.
The Member shall submit invoices for payment of the monthly retainer and air fares quarterly
in advance. Invoices for other expenses and for daily fees shall be submitted following the
conclusion of a site visit or hearing. All invoices shall be accompanied by a brief description
of activities performed during the relevant period and shall be addressed to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall pay each of the Member’s invoices in full within 56 calendar days after
receiving each invoice and shall apply to the Employer (in the Statements under the Contract)
for reimbursement of one-half of the amounts of these invoices. The Employer shall then pay
the Contractor in accordance with the Contract.
If the Contractor fails to pay to the Member the amount to which he/she is entitled under the
Dispute Board Agreement, the Employer shall pay the amount due to the Member and any
other amount which may be required to maintain the operation of the DB; and without
prejudice to the Employer’s rights or remedies. In addition to all other rights arising from this
default, the Employer shall be entitled to reimbursement of all sums paid in excess of one-
half of these payments, plus all costs of recovering these sums and financing charges
calculated at the rate specified in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 12.3.
If the Member does not receive payment of the amount due within 70 days after submitting a
valid invoice, the Member may (i) suspend his/her services (without notice) until the
payment is received, and/or (ii) resign his/her appointment by giving notice under Clause 7.
7. Termination
At any time: (i) the Employer and the Contractor may jointly terminate the Dispute Board
Agreement by giving 42 days’ notice to the Member; or (ii) the Member may resign as
provided for in Clause 2.
If the Member fails to comply with the Dispute Board Agreement, the Employer and the
Contractor may, without prejudice to their other rights, terminate it by notice to the Member.
The notice shall take effect when received by the Member.
If the Employer or the Contractor fails to comply with the Dispute Board Agreement, the
Member may, without prejudice to his other rights, terminate it by notice to the Employer
and the Contractor. The notice shall take effect when received by them both.
Any such notice, resignation and termination shall be final and binding on the Employer, the
Contractor and the Member. However, a notice by the Employer or the Contractor, but not by
both, shall be of no effect.
8. Default of the Member
If the Member fails to comply with any of his obligations under Clause 4 concerning his
impartiality or independence in relation to the Employer or the Contractor, he/she shall not
be entitled to any fees or expenses hereunder and shall, without prejudice to their other
rights, reimburse each of the Employer and the Contractor for any fees and expenses received
by the Member and the Other Members (if any), for proceedings or decisions (if any) of the
DB which are rendered void or ineffective by the said failure to comply.
9. Disputes
Any dispute or claim arising out of or in connection with this Dispute Board Agreement, or
the breach, termination or invalidity thereof, shall be finally settled by institutional
arbitration. If no other arbitration institute is agreed, the arbitration shall be conducted under
the Rules of Arbitration of the International Chamber of Commerce by one arbitrator
appointed in accordance with these Rules of Arbitration.
Annex
DISPUTE BOARD GUIDELINES
1. Unless otherwise agreed by the Employer and the Contractor, the DB shall visit the
site at intervals of not more than 140 days, including times of critical construction events, at
the request of either the Employer or the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed by the
Employer, the Contractor and the DB, the period between consecutive visits shall not be less
than 70 days, except as required to convene a hearing as described below.
2. The timing of and agenda for each site visit shall be as agreed jointly by the DB, the
Employer and the Contractor, or in the absence of agreement, shall be decided by the DB.
The purpose of site visits is to enable the DB to become and remain acquainted with the
progress of the Works and of any actual or potential problems or claims, and, as far as
reasonable, to prevent potential problems or claims from becoming disputes.
3. Site visits shall be attended by the Employer, the Contractor and the Project Manager
and shall be co-ordinated by the Employer in co-operation with the Contractor. The
Employer shall ensure the provision of appropriate conference facilities and secretarial and
copying services. At the conclusion of each site visit and before leaving the site, the DB shall
prepare a report on its activities during the visit and shall send copies to the Employer and
the Contractor.
4. The Employer and the Contractor shall furnish to the DB one copy of all documents
which the DB may request, including Contract documents, progress reports, variation
instructions, certificates and other documents pertinent to the performance of the Contract.
All communications between the DB and the Employer or the Contractor shall be copied to
the other Party. If the DB comprises three persons, the Employer and the Contractor shall
send copies of these requested documents and these communications to each of these
persons.
5. If any dispute is referred to the DB in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 46.3, the DB
shall proceed in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 46.3 and these Guidelines. Subject to the
time allowed to give notice of a decision and other relevant factors, the DB shall:
(a) act fairly and impartially as between the Employer and the Contractor, giving
each of them a reasonable opportunity of putting his case and responding to
the other’s case, and
(b) adopt procedures suitable to the dispute, avoiding unnecessary delay or
expense.
6. The DB may conduct a hearing on the dispute, in which event it will decide on the
date and place for the hearing and may request that written documentation and arguments
from the Employer and the Contractor be presented to it prior to or at the hearing.
7. Except as otherwise agreed in writing by the Employer and the Contractor, the DB
shall have power to adopt an inquisitorial procedure, to refuse admission to hearings or
audience at hearings to any persons other than representatives of the Employer, the
Contractor and the Project Manager, and to proceed in the absence of any Party who the DB
is satisfied received notice of the hearing; but shall have discretion to decide whether and to
what extent this power may be exercised.
8. The Employer and the Contractor empower the DB, among other things, to:
(a) establish the procedure to be applied in deciding a dispute,
(b) decide upon the DB’s own jurisdiction, and as to the scope of any dispute
referred to it,
(c) conduct any hearing as it thinks fit, not being bound by any rules or
procedures other than those contained in the Contract and these Guidelines,
(d) take the initiative in ascertaining the facts and matters required for a decision,
(e) make use of its own specialist knowledge, if any,
(f) decide upon the payment of financing charges in accordance with the
Contract,
(g) decide upon any provisional relief such as interim or conservatory measures,
(h) open up, review and revise any certificate, decision, determination,
instruction, opinion or valuation of the Project Manager, relevant to the
dispute, and
(i) appoint, should the DB so consider necessary and the Parties agree, a suitable
expert at the cost of the Parties to give advice on a specific matter relevant to
the dispute.
9. The DB shall not express any opinions during any hearing concerning the merits of
any arguments advanced by the Parties. Thereafter, the DB shall make and give its decision
in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 46.3, or as otherwise agreed by the Employer and the
Contractor in writing. If the DB comprises three persons:
(a) it shall convene in private after a hearing, in order to have discussions and
prepare its decision;
(b) it shall endeavour to reach a unanimous decision: if this proves impossible the
applicable decision shall be made by a majority of the Members, who may
require the minority Member to prepare a written report for submission to the
Employer and the Contractor; and
(c) if a Member fails to attend a meeting or hearing, or to fulfil any required
function, the other two Members may nevertheless proceed to make a
decision, unless:
(i) either the Employer or the Contractor does not agree that they do so, or
(ii) the absent Member is the chairman and he/she instructs the other
Members to not make a decision.
3-93
Section VIII. Particular Conditions
The following Particular Conditions shall supplement the General Conditions in Section
VII. Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall prevail over those in the
General Conditions.
3-94 Section VIII. Particular Conditions
Table of Clauses
PC 1. Definitions............................................................................................................ 3-95
PC 5. Law and Language ............................................................................................... 3-95
PC 7. Scope of Facilities [Spare Parts] (GC Clause 7) ................................................. 3-95
PC 8. Time for Commencement and Completion.......................................................... 3-95
PC 11. Contract Price....................................................................................................... 3-96
PC 13. Securities .............................................................................................................. 3-96
PC 22 Installation ........................................................................................................... 3-97
PC 25. Commissioning and Operational Acceptance ...... 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
PC 26. Completion Time Guarantee ................................................................................ 3-97
PC 27. Defect Liability .................................................... 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
PC 30. Limitation of Liability.......................................... 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
PC 46. Disputes and Arbitration ...................................................................................... 3-98
Section VIII. Particular Conditions 3-95
Particular Conditions
The following Particular Conditions (PC) shall supplement the General Conditions (GC).
Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall prevail over those in the GC. The
clause number of the PC is the corresponding clause number of the GC.
PC 1. Definitions (GC Clause 1)
The Employer is: Palestinian Water Authority
The Project Manager is: -to be named-
The Bank is: The World Bank . The co financiers of the Project are: the French
Development Agency (AFD) and the European Commission (EC)
Country of Origin: all countries and territories as indicated in Section V of the bidding
documents; Eligible Countries.
PC 5. Law and Language (GC Clause 5)
PC 5.1 The Contract shall be interpreted in accordance with the laws of: State of Palestine
PC 5.2 The ruling language is: English
PC 5.3 The language for communications is: English
PC 7. Scope of Facilities [Spare Parts] (GC Clause 7)
PC 7.3 The Contractor agrees to supply spare parts for a period of 5 years starting at Final
Acceptance, however the availability of spare parts shall be guaranteed at least for
a period of 15 years
PC 8. Time for Commencement and Completion (GC Clause 8)
PC 8.1 The Contractor shall commence work on the Facilities within sixty (60).days from
the Effective Date for determining Time for Completion as specified in the
Contract Agreement.
Pursuant to Clauses 1.3 and 2.1.9 of the ESHS Specifications of the Contract,
written instruction from the Employer is required prior to commencing operation
on any of the Worksites. For that purpose, the Contractor shall submit an updated
W-ESMP specifying all relevant information pertaining to the ESHS management
on this specific Worksite.
PC 8.2 The Time for Completion of the whole of the Facilities shall be nine hundred ten
(910) days from the Effective Date as described in the Contract Agreement.
PC 11. Contract Price (GC Clause 11)
PC 11.2 The Contract Price shall be adjusted in accordance with the provisions of
Appendix 2 (Price Escalation) of the Contract Agreement.
PC 13. Securities (GC Clause 13)
PC 13.3.1 The amount of performance security, as a percentage of the Contract Price for the
Facility or for the part of the Facility for which a separate Time for Completion is
provided, shall be: 10% of the Contract price.
PC 13.3.2 The performance security shall be in the form of the bank guarantee attached
hereto in Section IX, Contract Forms.
PC 13.3.3 The performance security shall be reduced to ten percent (10%) of the value of the
component covered by the extended defect liability in accordance with the
provisions in the PC, pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 27.10.
PC 14. Taxes and duties
PC 14.2 (a 7 b) The Contarctor will be granted for the Contrcat Ceiling VAT
exemption to enable the Contrcator issuing the required Zero VAT invoices and
the Contractor will be granted donation number for all Plant and Equipmnet
importaed from abroad, all as per applicable procedures by MoF. However, the
Contractor shall copmply with all the requirements related to registration of the
contracting entity (individual firm or Joint Ventures) as per applicable and adapted
procedures in Palestine. Furher details are presented in the Employer Requiremnets
Annex 5. Considerations For Delivering Imported Goods And Equipment To
The Site.
PC 20 Design and Engineering
PC 20.3.2 The text of the sub-clause shall be replaced by the following:

Within fourtytwo (42) days after receipt by the Project Manager of any document
requiring the Project Manager’s approval in accordance with GC Sub-Clause
20.3.1, the Project Manager shall either return one copy thereof to the Contractor
with its approval endorsed thereon or shall notify the Contractor in writing of its
disapproval thereof and the reasons therefore and the modifications that the Project
Manager proposes.
Section VIII. Particular Conditions 3-97
If the Project Manager fails to take such action within the said fourtytwo (42) days,
then the said document shall be deemed to have been approved by the Project
Manager.
PC 21 Procurement [Employer-Supplied Plant] (GC Clause 21.2)
PC 21.2 Employer Supplied Plant: Not applicable
PC 22 Installation (GC Clause 22)
PC 22.2.5 Working Hours

Normal working hours are: 07.00 - 18.00
PC 23 Test and Inspection (GC Clause 23)

The text of GC 23 is replaced by the following text:
PC 23.1 After Completion of the Facility, the Contractor shall at his own expense carry out
all the tests to ensure that:
- the Facility and all systems and components is traceable to the pertinent data
quality objectives from the applicable guidelines as set-out in the Employer
Requirements;
- the Facility and all systems and components are in accordance with the
Employer Requirements and with the Design Specifications;
- the performance of the Facility and all systems and components is suitable for
treatment of the waste water of the Municipality of Hebron.
PC 25 Commissioning and Operational Acceptance
25.2.2 The Guarantee Test of the Facilities shall be successfully completed within 120
days from the date of completion.
PC 26. Completion Time Guarantee (GC Clause 26)
PC 26.2 Applicable rate for liquidated damages: 0.5% per week of the Total Contract price.
The above rate applies to the price of the part of the Facilities, as quoted in the
Price Schedule, for that part for which the Contractor fails to achieve Completion
within the particular Time for Completion.
Maximum deduction for liquidated damages: 10% of the Total Contract price.
PC 26.3 Applicable (amount or rate) for the bonus for early Completion:
No bonus will be given for earlier Completion of the Facilities or part thereof.
PC 46. Disputes and Arbitration (GC Clause 46)
PC 46.1 The DB shall be appointed within [28 days] after the Effective Date.
PC 46.1 The DB shall comprise three suitably qualified members.
Each Party shall nominate for approval of the other Party. The first two members
shall recommend and the Parties shall agree upon the third member, who shall act
as chairman. Each of the members shall be fluent in the language for
communication defined in the Contract and shall be professionally experienced in
the type of activities involved in the performance of the Contract and with the
interpretation of contractual documents.
PC 46.1 List of potential DB members is Not applicable
PC 46.2 Appointment (if not agreed) to be made by ICC Palestine
PC 46.5 Procedure to settle disputes in respect of DB’s decisions:
(a) Contracts with foreign contractors:

Any dispute, controversy or claim arising out of or relating to this Contract, or
breach, termination or invalidity thereof, shall be settled by arbitration in
accordance with the UNICITRAL Arbitration Rules as at present in force
(b) Any dispute between the Employer and a Contractor who is a national of the
Employer’s country arising in connection with this Contract shall be referred to
adjudication or arbitration in accordance with the laws of the Employer’s
Country.
(a) Appointed arbitration institution:

International Chamber of Commerce, ICC Global Headquarters, located at 33-43
avenue du President Wilson, 75116 Paris, France.
Section IX. - Contract Forms
Table of Forms
Notification of Award - Letter of Acceptance ..................... 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.

Contract Agreement .............................................................. 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
Appendix 1. Terms and Procedures of Payment ........... 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
Appendix 2. Price Adjustment ...................................... 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
Appendix 3. Insurance Requirements ........................... 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
Appendix 4. Time Schedule .......................................... 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
Appendix 5. List of Major Items of Plant and Installation Services and List of
Approved Subcontractors................................... 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
Appendix 6. Scope of Works and Supply by the Employer3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
Appendix 7. List of Documents for Approval or Review3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
Appendix 8. Functional Guarantees .............................. 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
Performance Security Forms – Bank Guarantee ................ 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
Bank Guarantee—Conditional ............................................. 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
Bank Guarantee Form for Advance Payment..................... 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
2 Section IX. Contract Forms
Notification of Award – Letter of Acceptance

[on letterhead paper of the Employer]
. . . . . . . date. . . . . . .
To: [insert name and address of the Contractor]
Subject: Notification of Award Contract No. . . . . . . . . . .
This is to notify you that your Bid dated . . . . date . . . . for execution of the . . . . . . . . .
.name of the contract and identification number, as given in the Contract Data . . . . . . . . . .
for the Accepted Contract Amount of the equivalent of . . . . . . . . .amount in numbers and
words and name of currency . . . . . . . . ., as corrected and modified in accordance with the
Instructions to Bidders is hereby accepted by our Agency.
You are requested to furnish the Performance Security within 28 days in accordance with the
Conditions of Contract, using for that purpose the of the Performance Security Form included
in Section VI of the Bidding Document.
Authorized Signature: ................................................................
Name and Title of Signatory: .....................................................
Name of Agency: .......................................................................
Attachment: Contract Agreement

Section IX. Contract Forms 3
Contract Agreement
THIS AGREEMENT is made the ________ day of ________________________, _____,

BETWEEN
(1) ______________________, a corporation incorporated under the laws of ___________

and having its principal place of business at ___________________ (hereinafter called “the
Employer”), and (2) ______________________, a corporation incorporated under the laws
of ________________________ and having its principal place of business at
________________________ (hereinafter called “the Contractor”).
WHEREAS the Employer desires to engage the Contractor to design, manufacture, test,
deliver, install, complete and commission certain Facilities, viz. Hebron Wastewater
Treatment Plant _________________ (“the Facilities”), and the Contractor has agreed to
such engagement upon and subject to the terms and conditions hereinafter appearing.
NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED as follows:
Article 1. Contract 1.1 Contract Documents (Reference GC Clause 2)

Documents The following documents shall constitute the Contract between the
Employer and the Contractor, and each shall be read and construed
as an integral part of the Contract:
(a) This Contract Agreement and the Appendices hereto
(b) Letter of Bid and Price Schedules submitted by the Contractor
(c) Particular Conditions
(d) General Conditions
(e) Specification
Part 2 Section VIa Specification, Employers Requirements DSI
Part 2 Section VI Specification, Employers Requirements Annex
Civil
Mechanical
Electrical
Change Procedures
(f) Drawings
(g) Other completed bidding forms submitted with the Bid
(h) Other documents forming part of the Employer’s
Requirements:
(i) [Any other documents shall be added here]
1.2 Order of Precedence (Reference GC Clause 2)
In the event of any ambiguity or conflict between the Contract
Documents listed above, the order of precedence shall be the order
in which the Contract Documents are listed in Article 1.1 (Contract
Documents) above.
1.3 Definitions (Reference GC Clause 1)
Capitalized words and phrases used herein shall have the same
meanings as are ascribed to them in the General Conditions.
Article 2. Contract 2.1 Contract Price (Reference GC Clause 11)
Price and Terms of The Employer hereby agrees to pay to the Contractor the Contract
Payment Price in consideration of the performance by the Contractor of its
obligations hereunder. The Contract Price shall be the aggregate of:
__________________, _______________ as specified in Price
Schedule No. 4 (Grand Summary), and_______________,
_________________, or such other sums as may be determined in
accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract.
2.2 Terms of Payment (Reference GC Clause 12)
The terms and procedures of payment according to which the
Employer will reimburse the Contractor are given in the Appendix
(Terms and Procedures of Payment) hereto.
The Employer may instruct its bank to issue an irrevocable
confirmed documentary credit made available to the Contractor in a
bank in the country of the Contractor. The credit shall be for an
amount of ________________________; and shall be subject to the
Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credits 1993
Revision, ICC Publication No. 600.
In the event that the amount payable under Schedule No. 1 is
adjusted in accordance with GC 11.2 or with any of the other terms
of the Contract, the Employer shall arrange for the documentary
credit to be amended accordingly.
Article 3. Effective Date 3.1 Effective Date (Reference GC Clause 1)

The Effective Date from which the Time for Completion of the
Facilities shall be counted is the date when all of the following
conditions have been fulfilled:
(a) This Contract Agreement has been duly executed for and on
behalf of the Employer and the Contractor;
(b) The Contractor has submitted to the Employer the
performance security and the advance payment guarantee;

(c) The Employer has paid the Contractor the advance payment
(d) The Contractor has been advised that the documentary credit
referred to in Article 2.2 above has been issued in its favor.
Each party shall use its best efforts to fulfill the above conditions for
which it is responsible as soon as practicable.
3.2 If the conditions listed under 3.1 are not fulfilled within two (2)
months from the date of this Contract notification because of
reasons not attributable to the Contractor, the Parties shall discuss
and agree on an equitable adjustment to the Contract Price and the
Time for Completion and/or other relevant conditions of the
Contract.
Article 4. 4.1 The address of the Employer for notice purposes, pursuant to GC
Communications 4.1 is: ______________________.
4.2 The address of the Contractor for notice purposes, pursuant to GC 4.1
is: ________________________.
Article 5. Appendices 5.1 The Appendices listed in the attached List of Appendices shall be
deemed to form an integral part of this Contract Agreement.
5.2 Reference in the Contract to any Appendix shall mean the Appendices
attached hereto, and the Contract shall be read and construed
accordingly.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Employer and the Contractor have caused this
Agreement to be duly executed by their duly authorized representatives the day and
year first above written.
Signed by, for and on behalf of the Employer
[ Signature ]
[ Title ]
in the presence of
[ Signature ]
[ Title ]
Signed by, for and on behalf of the Contractor

[ Signature ]
[ Title ]
in the presence of
[ Signature ]
[ Title ]
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 - Terms and Procedures of Payment

Appendix 2 - Price Escalation
Appendix 3 - Insurance Requirements
Appendix 4 - Time Schedule
Appendix 5 - List of Major Items of Plant and services and List of Approved
Subcontractors
Appendix 6 - Scope of Works and Supply by the Employer
Appendix 7 - List of Documents for Approval or Review
Appendix 8 - Functional Guarantees
Appendix 1. Terms and Procedures of Payment
In accordance with the provisions of GC Clause 12 (Terms of Payment), the Employer shall
pay the Contractor in the following manner and at the following times, on the basis of the
Price Breakdown given in the section on Price Schedules. Payments will be made in the
currencies quoted by the Bidder unless otherwise agreed between the Parties. Applications
for payment in respect of part deliveries may be made by the Contractor as work proceeds.
TERMS OF PAYMENT
Schedule No. 1. Plant and Equipment Supplied from Abroad
In respect of plant and equipment supplied from abroad, the following payments shall
be made:
Ten percent (10%) of the total CIP amount as an advance payment against receipt of
invoice and an irrevocable advance payment security (ref. Chapter 5 “Bank Guarantee
Form for Advance Payment”) for the equivalent amount made out in favor of the
Employer. The advance payment security may be reduced in proportion to the value of
the plant and equipment delivered to the site, as evidenced by shipping and delivery
documents.
Eighty percent (80%) of the total or pro rata DDP amount upon Incoterm “DDP”, upon
delivery to the carrier within forty-five (45) days after receipt of documents.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata DDP amount upon issue of the Completion
Certificate, within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata DDP amount upon issue of the Operational
Acceptance Certificate, within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
Schedule No. 2. Plant and Equipment Supplied from within the Employer’s Country
In respect of plant and equipment supplied from within the Employer’s country, the
following payments shall be made:
Ten percent (10%) of the total EXW amount as an advance payment against receipt of
invoice, and an irrevocable advance payment security (ref. Chapter 5 “Bank Guarantee
Form for Advance Payment”) for the equivalent amount made out in favor of the
Employer. The advance payment security may be reduced in proportion to the value of
the plant and equipment delivered to the site, as evidenced by shipping and delivery
documents.
Eighty percent (80%) of the total or pro rata EXW amount upon Incoterm “Ex-Works,”
upon delivery to the carrier within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice and
documents.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata EXW amount upon issue of the Completion
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata EXW amount upon issue of the Operational
Acceptance Certificate, within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
Schedule No. 3. Design Services
In respect of design services for both the foreign currency and the local currency
portions, the following payments shall be made:
Ten percent (10%) of the total design services amount as an advance payment against
receipt of invoice, and an irrevocable advance payment security (ref. Chapter 5 “Bank
Guarantee Form for Advance Payment”) for the equivalent amount made out in favor of
the Employer.
Ninety percent (90%) of the total or pro rata design services amount upon acceptance of
design in accordance with GC Clause 20 by the Project Manager within forty-five (45)
days after receipt of invoice.
Schedules No. 4 a, and 4 b. Installation Services – Earth Works and Site Preparation and
Building Civil Works and other Construction Works
In respect of installation services for both the foreign and local currency portions, the
following payments shall be made:
Ten percent (10%) of the total installation services amount as an advance payment
against receipt of invoice, and an irrevocable advance payment security (ref. Chapter 5
“Bank Guarantee Form for Advance Payment”) for the equivalent amount made out in
favor of the Employer. The advance payment security may be reduced in proportion to
the value of work performed by the Contractor as evidenced by the invoices for
installation services.
Eighty percent (80%) of the value of work measured under Schedules 4 a and 4 b and
performed by the Contractor, as identified in the said Program of Performance, during
the preceding month, as evidenced by the Employer’s authorization of the Contractor’s
application, will be made monthly within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata value of installation services under Schedules
4 a and 4 b performed by the Contractor as evidenced by the Employer’s authorization
of the Contractor’s monthly applications, upon issue of the Completion Certificate,
within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata value of installation services under Schedules
4 a and 4 b performed by the Contractor as evidenced by the Employer’s authorization
of the Contractor’s monthly applications, upon issue of the Operational Acceptance

Schedule No. 5 – Environmental, Social, Health and Safety Services (ESHS)
In respect of ESHS for both the foreign and local currency portions, the following
payments shall be made:
Ten percent (10%) of the total installation services amount as an advance payment
against receipt of invoice, and an irrevocable advance payment security (ref. Chapter 5
“Bank Guarantee Form for Advance Payment”) for the equivalent amount made out in
favor of the Employer. The advance payment security may be reduced in proportion to
the value of work performed by the Contractor as evidenced by the invoices for
installation services.
Eighty percent (80%) of the value of work measured under Schedule 5 and performed
by the Contractor, as identified in the said Program of Performance, during the
preceding month, as evidenced by the Employer’s authorization of the Contractor’s
application, will be made monthly within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata value of installation services under Schedule 5
performed by the Contractor as evidenced by the Employer’s authorization of the
Contractor’s monthly applications, upon issue of the Completion Certificate, within
forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata value of installation services under Schedule 5
performed by the Contractor as evidenced by the Employer’s authorization of the
Contractor’s monthly applications, upon issue of the Operational Acceptance
In the event that the Employer fails to make any payment on its respective due date, the
Employer shall pay to the Contractor interest on the amount of such delayed payment at the
rate of half percent (0.5%) per month for period of delay until payment has been made in full.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
The procedures to be followed in applying for certification and making payments shall be as
follows:
The contractor shall make application for payment by submitting a statement at the end of
each month to the Project Manager, in a tabulated form approved by the Employer, showing
the amounts to which the Contractor considers himself entitled. The statement shall include
the following items:
(a) The value of payments for work executed up to the end of the month, as determined
in accordance with GC Clause 12, at the Unit Prices shown in Schedule1;
(b) The value of payments for work executed up to the end of the month, as determined
in accordance with GC Clause 12, at the Unit Prices shown in Schedule 2;
(c) The value of payments for work executed up to the end of the month, as determined
in accordance with GC Clause 12, at the Unit Prices shown in Schedule 3
(d) The value of payments for work executed up to the end of the month, as determined
in accordance with GC Clause 12, at the Unit Prices shown in Schedules 4 a and 4 b;
(e) The value of payments for work executed up to the end of the month, as determined
in accordance with GC Clause 12, at the Unit Prices shown in Schedule 5;
(f) The value of any change orders executed up to the end of the month;
(g) Any credit or debit for the month in respect of ……
(h) Any amount withheld under the retention provisions of the Contract;
(i) Any amount to be deducted as repayment of the Advance under GC Clause…
The Contractor’ s statement shall be approved or amended by the Project Manager in

such a way that in his opinion it reflects the amounts due to the Contractor in accordance
with the Contract. Within 14 days of receipt of the monthly statement referred to above,
the Engineer shall determine the amounts due the Contractor and shall deliver to the
Employer and the Contractor an Interim Payment Certificate, certifying the amounts due
the Contractor.
The Employer will make payments on the certified Interim Payment Certificate within 45
days after receiving the Zero VAT Invoice and the Deduction of Source Clerance Stamped
by MoF relevant department, as further described in the General Conditions of Contract.
Appendix 2. Price Escalation
Where the Contract Period (excluding the Defect Liability Period) exceeds eighteen (18)
months, it is normal procedure that prices payable to the Contractor shall be subject to
adjustment during the performance of the Contract to reflect changes occurring in the cost of
labour and material components. In such cases the bidding documents shall include in this
Appendix 2 a formula of the following general type, pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 11.2. Where
Contracts are of a shorter duration than eighteen (18) months or in cases where there is to
be no Price Adjustment, the following provision shall not be included. Instead, it shall be
indicated under this Appendix 2 that the prices are to remain firm and fixed for the duration
of the Contract.
Sample Price Escalation Formula
Prices payable to the Contractor, in accordance with the Contract, shall be subject to
adjustment during performance of the Contract to reflect changes in the cost of labor
and material components, in accordance with the following formula:
L1 M1
P1  P0  ( a  b c )  P0
L0 M0
in which:
P1 = adjustment amount payable to the Contractor
P0 = Contract price (base price)
a = percentage of fixed element in Contract price (a = %)
b = percentage of labor component in Contract price (b = %)
c = percentage of material and equipment component in Contract price (c = %)
L0, L1 = labor indices applicable to the appropriate industry in the country of origin
on the base date and the date for adjustment, respectively
M0, M1= material and equipment indices in the country of origin on the base date and
the date for adjustment, respectively
Note that the sum of percentages a, b, c, etc… in formula must always be equal to
100%!
Conditions Applicable To Price Adjustment

The Bidder shall indicate the source of labour and materials indices and the base date
indices in its bid.
Base Date
Item Source of Indices Used
Indices
The base date shall be the date thirty (30) days prior to the Bid closing date.
The date of adjustment shall be the mid-point of the period of manufacture or

installation of component or Plant.
The following conditions shall apply:
(a) No price increase will be allowed beyond the original delivery date unless
covered by an extension of time awarded by the Employer under the terms of the
Contract. No price increase will be allowed for periods of delay for which the
Contractor is responsible. The Employer will, however, be entitled to any price
decrease occurring during such periods of delay.
(b) If the currency in which the Contract price, P0, is expressed is different from the
currency of the country of origin of the labour and/or materials indices, a
correction factor will be applied to avoid incorrect adjustments of the Contract
price. The correction factor shall correspond to the ratio of exchange rates
between the two currencies on the base date and the date for adjustment as
defined above.
(c) No price adjustment shall be payable on the portion of the Contract price paid to
the Contractor as an advance payment.
For complex plant supply and installation involving several sources of supply and/or a
substantial amount of installation works, a family of formulas may be necessary, with
provision for the usage of Contractor’s equipment in the works formula.
Appendix 3. Insurance Requirements

Insurances to be Taken Out by the Contractor
In accordance with the provisions of GC Clause 34, the Contractor shall at its expense take
out and maintain in effect, or cause to be taken out and maintained in effect, during the
performance of the Contract, the insurances set forth below in the sums and with the
deductibles and other conditions specified. The identity of the insurers and the form of the
policies shall be subject to the approval of the Employer, such approval not to be
unreasonably withheld.
Parties Insured
The Employer shall be named as co-insured under all insurance policies taken out by the
Contractor pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 34.1, except for the Third Party Liability, Workers’
Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurances, and the Contractor’s Subcontractors
shall be named as co-insured under all insurance policies taken out by the Contractor
pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 34.1, except for the Cargo, Workers’ Compensation and
Employer’s Liability Insurances. All insurer’s rights of subrogation against such co-insureds
for losses or claims arising out of the performance of the Contract shall be waived under such
policies.
(a) Cargo Insurance

Covering loss or damage occurring, while in transit from the supplier’s or manufacturer’s
works or stores until arrival at the Site, to the Facilities (including spare parts therefore) and
to the construction equipment to be provided by the Contractor or its Subcontractors.
DEDUCTIBLE Parties
Amount From To
LIMITS insured
[in
[names] [place] [place]
currency(ies)]
110% of the
DDP price of Supplier/
none See above HRWWTP
the goods or Subcontractor
equipment
(b) Installation All Risks Insurance

Covering physical loss or damage to the Facilities at the Site, occurring prior to completion
of the Facilities, with an extended maintenance coverage for the Contractor’s liability in
respect of any loss or damage occurring during the defect liability period while the
Contractor is on the Site for the purpose of performing its obligations during the defect
liability period.
DEDUCTIBLE Parties
From To
Amount LIMITS insured
[in currency(ies)] [names] [place] [place]
USD
20,000,000 not not
none See above
(Twenty applicable applicable
million)
(c) Third Party Liability Insurance

Covering bodily injury or death suffered by third parties (including the Employer’s
personnel) and loss of or damage to property (including the Employer’s property and any
parts of the Facilities that have been accepted by the Employer) occurring in connection with
the supply and installation of the Facilities as well as during the Operations and Maintenance
period.
DEDUCTIBLE Parties
Amount From To
LIMITS insured
USD
not not
10,,000,000 USD 1,000 See above
applicable applicable
(Ten million)
(d) Automobile Liability Insurance

Covering use of all vehicles used by the Contractor or its Subcontractors (whether or not
owned by them) in connection with the supply and installation and operations and
maintenance of the Facilities. Comprehensive insurance in accordance with statutory
requirements of the State of Palestine.
(e) Workers’ Compensation

In accordance with the statutory requirements applicable in the State of Palestine or any other
country where the Facilities or any part thereof is executed.
(f) Employer’s Liability

In accordance with the statutory requirements applicable in the State of Palestine or any other
country where the Facilities or any part thereof is executed.
(g) Other Insurances
Professional Indemnity Insurance
Covering professional negligence including faults in design and the Financial loss caused by
an error or omission in the services and/or the given advice.
Amount Parties insured From To

USD 5,000,000 not not

See above
(Five million) applicable applicable
Insurances To Be Taken Out By The Employer

The Employer shall at its expense take out and maintain in effect during the performance of
the Contract the following insurances.
none
Appendix 4. Time Schedule
To be added before contract award

Appendix 5. List of Major Items of Plant and Services and List of

Approved Subcontractors
Appendix 6. Scope of Works and Supply by the Employer

Appendix 7. List of Documents for Approval or Review
Pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 20.3.1, the Contractor shall prepare, or cause its Subcontractor to
prepare, and present to the Project Manager in accordance with the requirements of GC Sub-
Clause 18.2 (Program of Performance), the following documents for
A. Approval
1. Alteration of the composition of JVA (9.7 GC)

2. Nomination of Contractors Representative (17.2.1 GC)
3. List of approved subcontractors (19.1 GC)
4. Format for recoding personnel on site (22.2.9 GC)
5. Site regulations (22.4 GC)
6. Protocols for FAT and SAT (23.2 GC)
7. Identity of insurers and form of policies (34.1 GC)
8. Application for Change Proposal, (39.3.1 GC)
B. Review
 Program of performance (18.2 GC)

Appendix 8. Functional Guarantees
1. General
This Appendix sets out
(a) the functional guarantees referred to in GC Clause 28 (Functional Guarantees)
(b) the preconditions to the validity of the functional guarantees, either in

production and/or consumption, set forth below
(c) the minimum level of the functional guarantees
(d) the formula for calculation of liquidated damages for failure to attain the
functional guarantees.
2. Preconditions
The Contractor gives the functional guarantees (specified herein) for the facilities,
subject to the following preconditions being fully satisfied:
- Average annual flows are no more than 15,250 m3/day

- Peak daily flow – 22,875 m3/day
- Peak hourly flow – 1, 585 m3/hr
- Peak hourly storm flow – 2,375 m3/hr
- Loads will be no more that the design concentrations multiplied by the average flow with
a 10% peak factor.
- The Plant may be loaded in all or in part of the above flows and/or loads. The contractor’s
full functional guarantee shall include compliance of the plant in all various situations,
including the following conditions:
- The Plant may be loaded with flows and loads that are lower than the design values.
Therefore the plant shall also be capable of treating actual flows and loads that are less
than maximum production capacity so as to achieve full effluent quality and excess sludge
requirements as per Part 2 Section VIa par. 2.3.4 and as per Part 2 Section VIa par. 2.3.5
respectively.
3. Functional Guarantees
Subject to compliance with the foregoing preconditions, the Contractor guarantees
as follows:
3.1 Production Capacity

The Plant shall produce the effluent quality as required under Part 2, Section
Via.
Maximum Production Capacity
Note: The figures entered below shall be fully consistent with the corresponding
values for each functional guarantee of the proposed plant and equipment offered
by the Bidder in the Bidding Forms of Part 1, Sections IV and V.
- Average annual flow 15,250 m3/day

- Peak Daily flow 22,875 m3/day
- Peak hourly Flow 1,585 m3/hr
- Peak hourly storm flow 2,375 m3/hr
- BOD load ________kg/day
- TSS load ________kg/day
- COD load ________kg/day
- TN load ________kg/day
- TP load ________kg/day
- Effluent quality produced as per Part 2 Section VIa par. 2.3.4
- Excess sludge requirements as per Part 2 Section VIa par 2.3.5
- Specific sludge production will be specified as maximum amount of sludge
produced from the plant, ____ kg dried solids per kg BOD removed from influent
wastewater, as per Contractors Bid
3.2 Raw Materials and Utilities Consumption

Note: The figures entered below shall be fully consistent with the corresponding values
for each functional guarantee relating to the Cost of Consumables offered by the
Bidder in the Bidding Forms of Part 1, Sections IV and V, Tables 1 and 2.
- Specific energy consumption shall be no more than _____KW per 55 kg TOD
(where TOD – total oxygen demand = BOD mass removed + 4,57 x NKjeldahl mass
removed)
- Specific chemical consumption (polyelectrolytes) will be no more than ___ kg
polyelectrolytes used per kg BOD removed from influent wastewater as per
Contractors Bid
- Specific fuel consumption will be no more than ____ m3 fuel per m3 of influent
wastewater treated
4. Failure in Guarantees and Liquidated Damages

4.1 Failure to Attain Guaranteed Production Capacity
If the production capacity of the Plant attained in the guarantee test, pursuant
to GC Sub-Clause 25.2, is less than the guaranteed figure specified in para. 3.1
above, but the actual production capacity attained in the guarantee test is not
less than the minimum level specified in para. 4.3 below, and the Contractor
elects to pay liquidated damages to the Employer in lieu of making changes,
modifications and/or additions to the Plant, pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 28.3,

then the Contractor shall pay liquidated damages at the rate of US dollars
250,000 (Two Hundred Fifty Thousand) for every complete one percent (1%)
of the deficiency in the production capacity of the Plant , or at a
proportionately reduced rate for any deficiency, or part thereof, of less than a
complete one percent (1%).
4.2 Raw Materials and Utilities Consumption in Excess of Guaranteed Level

If the actual measured figure of specified raw materials and utilities consumed
per unit (or their average total cost of consumption) exceeds the guaranteed
figure specified in para. 3.2 above (or their specified average total cost of
consumption), but the actual consumption attained in the guarantee test,
pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 25.2, is not more than the maximum level
specified in para. 4.3 below, and the Contractor elects to pay liquidated
damages to the Employer in lieu of making changes, modifications and/or
additions to the Plant pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 28.3, then the Contractor
shall pay liquidated damages at the rate of US dollars 50,000 (Fifty Thousand)
for every complete one percent (1%) of the excess consumption of the
Facilities, or part thereof, of less than a complete one percent (1%).
4.3 Minimum Levels

Notwithstanding the provisions of this paragraph, if as a result of the guarantee
test(s), the following minimum levels of performance guarantees (and
consumption guarantees) are not attained by the Contractor, the Contractor
shall at its own cost make good any deficiencies until the Plant reaches any of
such minimum performance levels, pursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 28.2:
(a) production capacity of the Plant attained in the guarantee test: ninety-five
percent (95%) of the guaranteed production capacity
and/or
(b) average total cost of consumption of all the raw materials and utilities of
the Facilities: one hundred and five percent (105%) of the guaranteed
figures.
4.4 Limitation of Liability

Subject to para. 4.3 above, the Contractor’s aggregate liability to pay
liquidated damages for failure to attain the functional guarantees shall not
exceed 10% (ten percent) of the Contract Price.
Performance Security Form – Bank Guarantee
________________________________ [Bank’s Name, and Address of Issuing Branch or Office]
Beneficiary: [Name and Address of Employer]
Date: ________________
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE No.: _________________
We have been informed that [name of Contractor] (hereinafter called “the Contractor”) has
entered into Contract No. [reference number of the contract] dated ____________ with you, for
the execution of [name of contract and brief description of Facilities] (hereinafter called “the
Contract”).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, a performance

guarantee is required.
At the request of the Contractor, we [name of Bank] hereby irrevocably undertake to pay you
any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of [amount in figures] (___) [amount in
19
words] , upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a written
statement stating that the Contractor is in breach of its obligation(s) under the Contract,
without your needing to prove or to show grounds for your demand or the sum specified
therein.
This guarantee shall be reduced by half upon our receipt of:
(a) a copy of the Operational Acceptance Certificate; or

(b) a registered letter from the Contractor (i) attaching a copy of its notice
requesting issuance of the Operational Acceptance Certificate and (ii) stating
that the project manager has failed to issue such Certificate within the time
required or provide in writing justifiable reasons why such Certificate has not
been issued, so that Operational Acceptance is deemed to have occurred.
This guarantee shall expire no later than the earlier of:20
(a) twelve months after our receipt of either (a) or (b) above; or
(b) eighteen months after our receipt of:
19
The Guarantor shall insert an amount representing the percentage of the Contract Price specified in the
Contract and denominated either in the currency(ies) of the Contract or a freely convertible currency
20
This text shall be revised as and where necessary to take into account (i) partial acceptance of the Facilities
in accordance with Sub-Clause 25.4 of the GCC; and (ii) extension of the performance security when the
Contractor is liable for an extended warranty obligation pursuant to Sub-Clause 27.10 of the GCC
(although in this latter case the Employer might want to consider an extended warranty security in lieu of
the extension of the performance security).
(i) a copy of the Completion Certificate; or

(ii) a registered letter from the Contractor, attaching a copy of the notice to
the project manager that the Facilities are ready for commissioning,
and stating that fourteen days have elapsed from receipt of such notice
(or seven days have elapsed if the notice was a repeated notice) and
the project manager has failed to issue a Completion Certificate or
inform the Contractor in writing of any defects or deficiencies; or
(iii) a registered letter from the Contractor stating that no Completion
Certificate has been issued but the Employer is making use of the
Facilities; or
(c) the ____ day of _____, 2___.21
Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at this
office on or before that date.
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication No.
458, except that subparagraph (ii) of Sub-article 20(a) is hereby excluded.
_____________________
[signature(s)]
21
Insert the date twenty-eight days after the expected expiration date of the Defect Liability Period. The
Employer should note that in the event of an extension of the time for completion of the Contract, the
Employer would need to request an extension of this guarantee from the Guarantor. Such request must be
in writing and must be made prior to the expiration date established in the guarantee. In preparing this
guarantee, the Employer might consider adding the following text to the form, at the end of the penultimate
paragraph: “The Guarantor agrees to a one-time extension of this guarantee for a period not to exceed [six
months][one year], in response to the Employer’s written request for such extension, such request to be
presented to the Guarantor before the expiry of the guarantee.”
Performance Security Form- Conditional Bank Guarantee
Date:
Grant/Credit No:
IFB No:
[Name of Contract]
To: [Name and address of Employer]
Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen,
We refer to the Contract Agreement (“the Contract”) signed on [date] between you and
[name of Contractor] (“the Contractor”) concerning design, execution and completion of
[Brief description of the Facilities].
By this letter we, the undersigned, [name of Bank], a Bank (or company) organized under the
laws of [country of Bank] and having its registered/principal office at [address of Bank], do
hereby jointly and severally with the Contractor irrevocably guarantee payment owed to you
by the Contractor, pursuant to the Contract, up to the sum of [amount], equivalent to
[number] percent ( %) [amount shall not exceed ten percent (10%) in any case] of the
Contract Price until the date of the Operational Acceptance Certificate and thereafter up to a
sum of [amount], equivalent to [number] percent ( %) [amount shall not exceed five percent
(5%) in any case] of the Contract Price, until twelve (12) months after the date of
Operational Acceptance, or eighteen (18) months after Completion of the Facilities,
whichever comes first.
Where it is agreed between you and the Contractor that the Facilities are to be accepted in
parts, and thus where there are separate Completion and Operational Acceptance Certificates
for each part, this Letter of Guarantee shall be apportioned to the value of each such part and
shall reduce or expire as provided above on or following Completion or Operational
Acceptance of each part.
We shall only undertake to make payment under this Letter of Guarantee upon our receipt of
a written demand signed by your duly authorized officer for a specified sum, where such
demand sets out the reasons for your claim under this Letter of Guarantee and is
accompanied by
(a) a copy of the written notice sent by you to the Contractor before making the claim
under this Guarantee, specifying the Contractor’s breach of contract and
requesting the Contractor to remedy it
(b) a letter signed by your duly authorized officer certifying that the Contractor has
failed to remedy the default within the period allowed for remedial action
(c) a copy of your written notice to the Contractor stating your intent to claim under
this Letter of Guarantee because of the Contractor’s failure to remedy the default
in accordance with the request referred to in para. (a) above.
Our liability under this Letter of Guarantee shall be to pay to you whichever is the lesser of
the sum so requested or the amount then guaranteed hereunder in respect of any demand duly
made hereunder prior to expiry of this Letter of Guarantee, without being entitled to inquire
whether or not this payment is lawfully demanded.
This Letter of Guarantee shall be valid from the date of issue until the earlier of twelve (12)
months after the date of Operational Acceptance or eighteen (18) months after the date of
Completion of the Facilities or, where the Facilities are to be accepted in parts, twelve (12)
months after the date of Operational Acceptance or eighteen (18) months after the date of
Completion of the last part or [date], whichever comes first.
Except for the documents herein specified, no other documents or other action shall be
required, notwithstanding any applicable law or regulation.
If the Defect Liability Period is extended with respect to any part of the Facilities in
accordance with the Contract, you shall notify us, and the validity of this Letter of Guarantee
shall be extended with respect to the percentage of the Contract Price stipulated in the
notification until expiry of such extended Defect Liability Period.
Our liability under this Letter of Guarantee shall become null and void immediately upon its
expiry, whether it is returned or not, and no claim may be made hereunder after such expiry
or after the aggregate of the sums paid by us to you shall equal the sums guaranteed
hereunder, whichever is the earlier.
All notices to be given hereunder shall be given by registered (airmail) post to the addressee
at the address herein set out or as otherwise advised by and between the parties hereto.
We hereby agree that any part of the Contract may be amended, renewed, extended,
modified, compromised, released or discharged by mutual agreement between you and the
Contractor, and this security may be exchanged or surrendered without in any way impairing
or affecting our liabilities hereunder without notice to us and without the necessity for any
additional endorsement, consent or guarantee by us, provided, however, that the sum
guaranteed shall not be increased or decreased.
No action, event or condition which by any applicable law should operate to discharge us
from liability hereunder shall have any effect and we hereby waive any right we may have to
apply such law, so that in all respects our liability hereunder shall be irrevocable and, except
as stated herein, unconditional in all respects.
Yours truly,
[Name of the Bank]
Authorized Signature
Bank Guarantee Form for Advance Payment
................................................................ Bank’s Name, and Address of Issuing Branch or Office ................................................................
Beneficiary: ........................................................ Name and Address of Employer ..............................................................................
Date: ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advance Payment Guarantee No.: .....................................................................................................................................
We have been informed that . . . . . name of the Contractor. . . . . (hereinafter called “the
Contractor”) has entered into Contract No. . . . . . reference number of the Contract. . . . . dated
. . . . . . . .with you, for the execution of . . . . . . name of contract and brief description of the Facilities. .
. . . (hereinafter called “the Contract”).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the Conditions of the Contract, an
advance payment in the sum . . . . . name of the currency and amount in figures. . . . . . (. . . . . amount
in words. . . . . ) is to be made against an advance payment guarantee.
At the request of the Contractor, we . . . . . name of the Bank. . . . . hereby irrevocably

undertake to pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of . . . . . name
of the currency and amount in figures* . . . . . . (. . . . . amount in words. . . . . ) upon receipt by us of
your first demand in writing accompanied by a written statement stating that the
Contractor is in breach of its obligation under the Contract because the Contractor
used the advance payment for purposes other than the costs of mobilization in respect
of the Works.
It is a condition for any claim and payment under this guarantee to be made that the
advance payment referred to above must have been received by the Contractor on its
account number . . . . . Contractor’s account number. . . . . at . . . . . name and address of the Bank. . . . .
The maximum amount of this guarantee shall be progressively reduced by the amount
of the advance payment repaid by the Contractor as indicated in copies of interim
statements or payment certificates which shall be presented to us. This guarantee shall
expire, at the latest, upon our receipt of a copy of the interim payment certificate
indicating that eighty (80) percent of the Contract Price has been certified for
payment, or on the . . . day of . . . . . . . , . . . . .*, whichever is earlier. Consequently,
any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at this office on
or before that date.
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC
Publication No. 458.
............................
Seal of Bank and Signature(s)
Note: All italicized text is for guidance on how to prepare this demand guarantee
and shall be deleted from the final document.
* Insert the expected expiration date of the Time for Completion. The Employer should note that in the event of an
extension of the time for completion of the Contract, the Employer would need to request an extension of this guarantee
from the Guarantor. Such request must be in writing and must be made prior to the expiration date established in the
guarantee. In preparing this guarantee, the Employer might consider adding the following text to the form, at the end of the
penultimate paragraph: “The Guarantor agrees to a one-time extension of this guarantee for a period not to exceed [six
months][one year], in response to the Employer’s written request for such extension, such request to be presented to the
Guarantor before the expiry of the guarant.

Final HWWTP Dsi Bid 02.12.2016

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Final HWWTP Dsi Bid 02.12.2016

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

i

Bidding Document for

Issued on: December 2016

ICB No: PWA/HRWWTP/ICB/1-2016

Employer: Palestinian Water

PART 1 – Bidding Procedures ................................................................................................5

PART 1 – Bidding Procedures

Section I. Instructions to Bidders

26. Invitation to Submit Second Stage Bids ......................................................... 1-1-24

Section I. Instructions to Bidders

1.2 Unless otherwise stated, throughout this Bidding Document

2. Source of Funds 2.1 The Borrower or Recipient (hereinafter called “Borrower”)

2.3 The Grant Agreement prohibits a withdrawal from the Grant

such contracts. In pursuit of this policy, the Bank:

(bb) acts intended to materially impede the exercise

3.2 In further pursuance of this policy, Bidders shall permit the

4. Eligible Bidders 4.1 A Bidder may be a private entity or a government-owned

(b) the JVA shall nominate a Representative who shall have

(e) a Bidder submits more than one bid in this bidding

(b) by an act of compliance with a decision of the United

B. Contents of Bidding Document

PART 1 Bidding Procedures

 Section I. Instructions to Bidders (ITB)

PART 3 Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms

 Section VII. General Conditions (GC)

6.3 The Employer is not responsible for the completeness of the

7. Clarification of 7.1 A prospective Bidder requiring any clarification of the

7.5 The Bidder is requested, as far as possible, to submit any

C1. First Stage Technical Proposals: Preparation

technical criteria specified in the bidding documents.

(c) Adequate evidence demonstrating the substantial

be signed or initialed by the person signing the bid.

C2. First Stage Technical Proposals: Submission and

or premature opening of the technical proposal.

C3. First Stage Technical Proposals: Evaluation

Responsiveness of to determine whether they are complete, whether the

(b) compliance with the time schedule called for in the

(c) type, quantity and long-term availability of mandatory

(d) other relevant factors, if any, listed in Section III,

Evaluation and Qualification Criteria; and

(e) any deviations to the commercial and contractual

23.2 The Employer will also review complete alternative technical

D. Clarification of First Stage Technical Proposals

be made to the First Stage technical proposal; however the

or that the Bidder does not meet the minimum

E1. Second Stage Bid Preparation

documentary evidence of the conformity of the Plant

Employer when executed and shall be deemed to be covered

(b) Plant manufactured within the Employer’s country

material, transport and contractor’s equipment in accordance

31.3 In the case of fixed price contracts, if the award is delayed by

performance security pursuant to ITB 54.

E2. Second Stage Bids: Submission and Opening

electronic bid submission procedures specified in the BDS.

shall be considered for evaluation. No bid shall be rejected at

E3. Second Stage Bids: Evaluation and Comparison

40. Clarification of 40.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation, and comparison of

42. Determination of 42.1 The Employer’s determination of a bid’s responsiveness is to

Nonconformities may waive any nonconformities in the bid that do not

46. Margin of 46.1 No margin of domestic preference shall apply.

determine the lowest evaluated price of the lot (contract)

Contract Agreement shall be completed, listing the approved

Contract successful Bidder the Contract Agreement.

Dated on ______________ day of _, _

Dated on __________________ day of _, _

Name: In the capacity of _